we oy.
Fed SEPALS 55
© tet Sane?
>.
:
TRE L DIG ey
ciate
sitet
oe aS
a 2 Ha
; uit
Hae eatin: joectai its119
a)
i sy tS i
ita nti Te aes i
Bidet ise based hey Y
Ria cel NOU mat
hi
+}
ar etn
Hebe
1)
ie
it
nt
¢S 6. ¢ (Oatld Ce
So, & CO Ee < €
lO’ Of cack Ga COON ee Cl a @ ¢ 4
C« (a & (4 aca € «(OTA CO@ de CC
ELE UC ee Co COLA COKEMT CCC
4 rc | Ka ((¢ 7 Coe | ¢ @ ec( ac ¢ CCG @@¢
MER CF ter, CC (OEE CH EEE.
CCS Cm Gig mM G@eKc (Gad €4¢ 4
(QA COS i amt QC UT Ma «CA
EK Oe SM ty C EEC UE EE «|
Ge CCC ar Kk HAC A Ta |
(HEC CCL GE « B CCC GH EAE
Gia COC aie AKC Wt OCR (q
(OC € EO aC QING (¢ ac Ca M4
@G@c «€& € =s mut ter f ¢ C(O (Wa @ « Ce
C ¢¢@ ae 4 ri € (Ee CCC C CCC ae 6
C Ce a @ v Ca COG (ara «(a
¢ Cat a ca far K (CT «( (QW € CC
axe ¢ GG ( «CE ( a C¢ Te
ci a OO ger Gh COR OO SE EE KHOA
ce va (@ —} eM aa CS Ee Cm:
a Gay < CC Ga @ C Ca ( @ <¢ “a
CEG < <e gurvax KO CU: C Ea a (CG fe
(EO GEC CG qapan KC CCK CEC EKG
reat me *@ em: CAE OE (EC (a CCG ef
a! qf CC ax COC CCE K(|E (eh EG CCC
SAC CG Ca ecm (CCS CaGe
EOE CE GE & TERUG 23 s¢ 4 gq
C4 OE Cle Cae CC Qe CEQ & YC é
C(O Crq@e Cay «C CE Cl “x aa CX
Cicemure sen om i< VaR Cie GEC <e¢ ¢
C ( COX FE oo rey mG ((S Gag qt <
«i ’ ho a: sa one Pen, oe GCS ¢ @ s we (
O@ , _&, x, COE 4 (CHEE &
Ne Cae es LS, mee, |
CCT SC a aig a a Sel ‘, os —®
CM is fo aes weg <a (Gia & a |
(ema ot, EE SFE ME COME
{0a NO Conga Al C (OS & CC ae « «Oo
( €C ¢€ C@ da Gat (Ce GG ce “(or
ACG a aay - a anil & GMC @& ( aaa acd
: CCG CHT ¢ € (Qa vé ri CO COC G@ all CC ‘
_ “Gs C@ 4 (l Ga ae (aa or Gin Gan Grn 6 (adc « €@
CG (Ce 4 (a a C. r & 4 (€ foal CC OCC are c
ri CE¢q CO Ce a CONT CCCI € CC
COC Ce . cae fou @©Ceel ‘C @€ CCG €d¢
ra Carts (mar, . 16 (a @€ aac (a Gada (ce a
ce COs CONC or AR Gaede Cla WAT C44 &
(UAE OC XK ah QE FM SS
(EE OC OM te K EEC, UE Cr
OE CEM ar kk COE Ya “7
(an Od Car @ a wwe eC GK GOCE W
a AAAS OS REA ISAR SRA LAE SAR RRR BIST IS:
oA NS ecevevase WUNSSOrS Se SAE
fe tedhtrateDadedatadA°
{ . Cay: 7 re 4 ket pee
wel : ahhh | pre Ns
ob Vv WW¥weer, tee 5 = Bt en |
ed vey yey WAG SeS tte ee wi ~ — oa Basi se
y
yevewteveewtireer seve J eeidaie
wer lige we }
RIAA IA a
S Oy ts we Wo ON
= = L ba ‘x wee’
yo Ueullly ve 4) | AMAA
ot Nag te vues: $a kes AAS
ay ae vt erveunen eo wi 5 Ue cwecs are vove
i ore prota) aw A wr pe withe « .
Sev ie "ewe ud S Ute eeeyeeey. yeuvees Vw
Wee vowss wap ecestetes letter
™ ad) w Breve — Ue heigl piety ty ©
ASS PI YpgiyewouFurr<. Wg
Ves wigvrly vevweuterwrr =e Seveees’ yp
~~
e S bo De nt NS ig = we as ,
, Sew Ce NCES CUS peOe¥OU LOVED ONEL |
RF te Sn con, ICO wine, VERSES NUCNY, By SV were.
i ai TAD y @
, ree
tn
ee coe
hh:
BN
it y
JOURNAL
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
VOLUME 15, 1925 | :
-9,.%8 BH S
BOARD OF EDITORS
E, P, Kine D. F. Hewirr S. J. MAaucHiy
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A. RoHwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLDMAN G. W. Strose
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Grices J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
mj. Vol. 15 JANUARY 4, 1925 No. 1
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Kure W. F. Meccrrs D. F. Hewerr
NATIONAL MUBEUM BUREAU OF STANDARDS GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A. RoHwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GotpMANn G. W. Stross
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIDTY
R, F. Grices J. R: SWANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY > ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
, E. WicHERSs ae
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE :
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anp GuILFoRD AVES.
BauTIMore, MaryLanD
Baad es Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
et of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. ae nenees on July 3, 1918.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on Pogues from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be ~
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Tilustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof —in order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ;
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
/
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi- ;
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume is
Semi-monthly numbers
Monthly numbers
Remittances should be made payable to ‘(Washington Academy of Sciences,’”’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. : x
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy.
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. Tothisenditpublishes:
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 JANUARY 4, 1925 No. 1
GENETICS.—The chromosomes of Citrus. Howarp B. Frost,
Citrus Experiment Station, Riverside, California (Communi-
cated by W. T. SwINGLe).
Many of the “bud variations” of Citrus? probably result from a
chimeral constitution of the tree producing the variation. It may be
assumed, however, that bud-variation types originate primarily
through either gene (point) mutation or chromosomal mutation (chro-
mosome aberration). In the investigation of the nature of somatic
hereditary variations of Citrus, therefore, determinations of chromo-
some number are necessary. They are also of interest in relation to
the great variability of F, hybrids between species,’ although I consider
it probable that this variability is mainly due to extensive heterozygo-
sis of the parent forms.
Strasburger* examined pollen mother cells and stem tips of sweet
orange (“‘Apfelsine;”’ C. sinensis Osbeck), sour orange (“‘Pomaranze;”
C. aurantium L.), citron (“Cedrate’’; C. medica L.), and a “bizzarria”’
form which was doubtless a mixed chimera, the components being
citron and sour orange. He states that the pollen mother cells have
8 pairs of chromosomes, diakinesis being the most favorable stage for
counting, and that ‘‘mit grosser Wahrscheinlichkeit” the very small
1 Paper No. 121, University of California, Graduate School of Tropical Agriculture
and Citrus Experiment Station, Riverside, California.
2? A.D. Saamet, L. B. Scorr, and C.S. Pomeroy. Citrus-frutt improvement: a study
of bud variation in the Washington navel orange. U.S. Dept. Agr. Bull. 623. 146 p.,
19 pls., 16 figs. 1918. Also: Dept. Bulls. 624 and 697 (1918); 813 and 815 (1920).
3Watrer T. Swinete. Variation in first-generation hybrids (imperfect dominance) ;
tts possible explanation through zygotaxis. Conf. Internat. Génétique, IV°. Compt.
Rend., p. 381-394, 10 figs.
4Epvuarp Srraspurcer. Uber die Individualitét der Chromosomen und die Pfropfhy-
briden-Frage. Jahrb. f. wissensch. Bot. 44: 482-555. 3 pls., 1 fig. 1907.
1
2 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 1
stem-tip cells have 16 chromosomes. Osawa® reports for “unshuw”
(satsuma; C. nobilis var. unshiu (Lour.) Swingle) that the number of
pairs in pollen mother cells at diakinesis and at the first metaphase is
probably 8, and that the somatic number is ‘‘more than 14, probably
16.” Evidently neither Strasburger nor Osawa secured very clear
metaphase figures. No other determinations of chromosome number
for Citrus seem to have been published.
During the blooming season of 1924, pollen mother cells of several
commercial varieties of Citrus were stained by the present writer,
using Belling’s® iron-acetocarmine method (No. 2). This method
probably gives better fixation than has previously been secured;
in good material it gives some metaphase views in which every chromo-
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
ApoGAMIC PROGENY OF MEDITERRANEAN SWEET ORANGE
Vig. 1—Metaphase of first meiotic division; 9 bivalent chromosomes. Fig. 2.—
Same as figure 1, at second metaphase; 9 univalent chromosomes in each group; some
chromosomes distinctly split, but the halves always very close together.
some is well separated from its neighbors. Normal spore tetrads
are very uniformly produced. Polyspory and polycary have not been
observed.
The first count secured (at the metaphase of the first meiotic divi-
sion) showed 9 separate chromosomes. Further study showed that
9 is the normal number of pairs in two varieties of sweet orange (C.
sinensts Osbeck), namely, Mediterranean Sweet and Paper Rind
(St. Michael), and in the variety of grapefruit (C. maxima (Burm.)
Merrill) called Imperial. This conclusion depends on a few counts at
diakinesis, where poorer staining and irregular position made count-
SI. Osawa. Cytological and experimental studies in Citrus. Imp. Univ. Tokyo.
Coll. Agr. Jour. 4: 83-116. 4 pls.,1fig. 1912.
§ Joun Beirne. On counting chromosomes in pollen mother cells. Am. Nat. 55:
573-574. 1921.
JAN. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 3
ing relatively difficult, a few counts at the first or second anaphase,
and more numerous counts at the first metaphase (fig. 1)7 and the
second metaphase (fig. 2).
As Strasburger’s! figures indicate, the chromosomes are very small.
Dark granules, sometimes resembling the chromosomes, were often
troublesome, and spoiled some preparations, but some metaphase
groups were individually decisive. With Mediterranean Sweet (that
is, one of the apogamic progeny from a species cross in which this
variety was seed parent), the case was finally put beyond the pos-
sibility of reasonable doubt. The chromosomes in two groups of
pollen mother cells at the second division were countable in a large
proportion of the cases, and 24 positive counts of 9 chromosomes were
made here; in four of these cells, both groups were countable and each
group consisted of 9 chromosomes. ‘The few apparent counts of 8 in
these groups were plainly to be classed with those of still smaller
numbers; that is, they obviously were cases where not all the chromo-
somes of the normal complement were distinguishable. It is also
significant that apparent counts of 10 are rare.
Since three varieties of Citrus have been found to have 9 pairs of
chromosomes, and two of these varieties belong to one of the species
which Strasburger studied, it seems probable that 9, not 8, is the usual
haploid number in Citrus. At least, it is certain that the number is
not uniformly 8.
BOTANY.—New plants from Central America... Pau C. STANDLEY,
U.S. National Museum.
In the course of work recently begun upon a flora of the Panama
Canal Zone, several new species have been detected, and descriptions
of them are published here. Two of the species described were recog-
nized a few years ago by the late Prof. W. W. Rowlee, while revising
the Scitaminales for the proposed Flora of Central America.
Most of the species here described belong to the large family
Rubiaceae, and particularly to the genus Hoffmannia. This genus
finds its greatest development in Mexico and Central America, and
consists of a large number of species, most of which seem to be
extremely local in their distribution.
7 The figures were drawn with the aid of a camera lucida, at a magnification of about
3065 diameters, and are reduced one-fourth in reproduction.
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
4 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 1
Calathea hirsuta Standl., sp. nov.
Plants 0.5 to 1 meter high; leaves all basal, long-petiolate, the sheaths
15-20 em. long, membranaceous, densely short-hirsute, the petioles 3 cm.
long or less, hirsute, the blades oblanceolate-oblong to oval, 19-41 cm. long,
11-12.5 cm. wide, rounded or broadly cuneate at base, abruptly short-
acuminate at apex, thin, green, sparsely short-pilose above or glabrate,
beneath soft-pilose or in age glabrate; scape 54-66 cm. long, slender, hir-
sute; spike 6-12 cm. long, 1-2 em. thick, the bracts 4 or 5, spirally imbricate,
rather lax, broad, thin, 2.5-4 em. long, acute to rounded and apiculate at
apex, densely hirsute; corolla glabrous, exserted 2-3 cm. beyond the bracts.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,165,835, collected at Alajuela,
Panama, August 18, 1923, by F. L. Stevens (no. 1131). Also collected in
damp woods on Ancén Hill, Canal Zone in 1923, Standley 25163.
A very distinct species, not closely related to any other known from
Central America.
Calathea panamensis Rowlee, sp. nov.
Plants small, 20-40 cm. high, with few or numerous, erect or spreading
basal leaves; petioles 8-16 em. long, sheathed for nearly their whole length,
minutely pilose or glabrate; leaf blades obovate to oval, 11-20 em. long,
5-10 em. wide, rounded and abruptly short-acuminate or apiculate at apex,
rounded or obtuse at base, thin, glabrous above except along the puberulent
costa, puberulent beneath; peduncles one or several, 3.5 em. long or less,
the spikes sometimes sessile; bracts numerous, the outer ones ovate tolance-
oblong, 4—7 cm. long, membranaceous, acute or acuminate, sparsely short-
pilose; corolla yellow, equaling or exceeding the bracts, the segments seri-
ceous outside.
Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 863124, collected in deep
woods near Juan Diaz, Province of Panama, Panama, near sea level, Sept.
30, 1917, by Ellsworth P. Killip (no. 3078). The following additional
specimens represent the same species: '
Panama: Near Tapia River, edge of forest, Maxon & Harvey 6664.
Matias Hernandez, Pittier 6806. Chepo, Province of Panama, Pittier
4564.
Costa Rica: Matambu, Nicoya Peninsula, alt. 600 m., Cook & Doyle 710.
Myrosma panamensis Standl., sp. nov.
Plants acaulescent, small, usually 30-40 cm. high, with few or numerous
basal leaves; petioles 12-18 em. long, with broad green sheaths nearly their
whole length, glabrate; leaf blades elliptic or oval, 16-30 em. long, 7-13 cm.
wide, obtuse or acute at apex, rounded or broadly cuneate at base, thin,
glabrous above except along the puberulent costa, beneath slightly paler,
thinly short-pilose or puberulent; scapes equaling or shorter than the petioles,
bearing at apex a large long-petiolate leaf; racemes 2-4 from the axil of the
leaf, 4-6 em. long, on peduncles 1.5—-4 em. long; bracts numerous, lax, spread-
ing, rather remote, broadly ovate, about 2 cm. long, obtuse, scarious, gla-
brous; sepals oblong-lanceolate, 1 em. long; ovary glabrous.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,506, collected in wet
forest along the Rfo Tapia, Province of Panama, Panama, near sea level,
December, 1923, by Paul C. Standley (no. 26219). The following addi-
tional collections belong here:
JAN. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 5
Panama: Rio Tecumen, Standley 26738.. Near the big swamp east of
Rio Tecumen, Sfandley 26608. Along the Corozal Road, near Panama,
Standley 26845.
Pleiostachya pittieri Rowlee, sp. nov.
Plants a meter high or more; petioles about 75 em. long, glabrous, the
callus terete, glabrous, 4 cm. long, with a distinct collar at its junction with
the petiole; leaf blades elliptic, about 45 cm. long and 15 cm. wide, green
and glabrous on both sides, acute at each end; spikes 2, sessile, linear, 15-19
em. long, 1.3 em. wide, slightly compressed; bracts ovate, 2.2 cm. long, acute,
coriaceous, closely appressed, glabrous; flowers white, exserted; spikes
subtended by a large petiolate leaf and by an obtuse oblong bract 3 cm.
long inserted opposite the leaf.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 679566, collected on hills of
Sperdi, Puerto Obaldia, San Blas Coast, Panama, altitude 200 meters or
less, September, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 4409).
Pleiostachya pruinosa (Regel) Schum., the only similar species, differs in
its usually pedunculate, broader, more compressed spikes, with larger thinner
bracts, and in the dark red lower surface of the leaves.
Aristolochia panamensis Standl., sp. nov.
Stems erect or decumbent, simple, 30-100 cm. high, stout, the young
branches densely pilose with short subappressed hairs; petioles stout, about
1 em. long; leaf blades obovate-oval to oblong-obovate, 9-21 cm. long,
5-12 cm. wide, acute to rounded at apex, acute at base, thick, pinnate-
nerved, glabrous above, beneath very glaucous, finely soft-pubescent, the
yenation prominent-reticulate; flowers borne near the base of the stem;
peduncles slender, simple, in fruit 3-6 cm. long; calyx about 3.5 cm. long,
densely pilose, the basal portion narrow, the throat inflated into a large
sac 1.8 em. broad, the limb apparently broadly ovate and acuminate; cap-
sule oval, about 3 em. long and 1.5 cm. in diameter, 6-celled, tomentose or
glabrate, 6-costate.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,154,510, collected in moist
forest along the Rio Paraiso, above East Paraiso, Canal Zone, Panama,
Jan. 7, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 29906). The following additional
specimens belong here:
Panama: Vicinity of San Felix, eastern Chiriquf, alt. 120 meters or less,
Pittier 5463, 5750. Rio Pedro Miguel, Canal Zone, Standley 29950. Las
Cascadas Plantation, Canal Zone, Standley 25740, 29515.
The plant is abundant locally in wet forests about the Canal Zone. It is
quite unlike any of the other Central American species.
Aristolochia sylvicola Standl., sp. nov.
Stems very slender, scandent, glabrous; petioles slender, glabrous, 6-8 cm.
long; leaf blades broadly rounded-deltoid, 12-17 em. long, 10-15 cm. wide,
acuminate or somewhat abruptly acute, at base subcordate or subtruncate,
thin, dark green and glabrous above, beneath glaucescent and thinly puberu-
lent, palmately 5-nerved; inflorescence 4-flowered, borne on the naked
corky-angled stems, glabrous, the pedicels about 6 mm. long; immature
capsules oblong, 6-angled, 3 cm. long, glaucescent, glabrous.
6 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 1
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,853, collected in wet
forest on hills north of Frijoles, Canal Zone, Panama, Dec. 19, 19238, by
Paul C. Standley (no. 27469).
The stems were tightly wrapped about the trunk of a large tree. Only
one plant was found. Although without flowers, the plant is so distinct
from all known Central American species of Aristolochia that it seems best
to describe it as new.
Calderonia klugei Standl., sp. nov.
Tree; young branchlets sparsely hispid with short hairs; stipules triangu-
lar-ovate, 7 mm. long, brown, puberulent outside along the costa; petioles
about 3 mm. long, hispid; leaf blades broadly ovate, 4-6.5 em. long, 2-4.5
cm. wide, narrowed to the obtuse apex, usually deeply cordate at base,
glabrous above, hispidulous beneath along the costa; capsule subglobose,
2.5-3 em. long, glabrate, 2-celled, loculicidally bivalvate; seeds numerous,
horizontal, semiorbicular, strongly compressed, winged at one end, the seed
with its wing 2.5 em. long.
Type in the U. §. National Herbarium, no. 1,206,424, collected near
Chepo, Province of Panama, Panama, in 1924, by H. C. Kluge (no. 19).
The type material forms part of a small but interesting collection of timber
trees obtained by Mr. Kluge in the neighborhood of Chepo. The collector
states that this tree does not reach a great size and that it grows usually
on overflowed land. The vernacular name is ‘“‘palo colorado.”
The flowers are not at hand, and when they are collected it may be found
that the tree belongs to some other genus, but the fruit is so distinctive that
it seems probable that it belongs to the genus Calderonia, recently described?
from Salvador. Calderonia salvadorensis is distinguished from the Panama
tree by its large leaves, rounded or obtuse at base.
Manettia estrellae Standl., sp. nov.
Suffrutescent or woody vine, the stems villosulous; stipules 1-1.5 mm.
long, dentate; petioles 3-24 mm. long, villosulous; leaf blades ovate to
oblong-elliptic, 3.5-6.5 em. long, 1.5-3 em. wide, acute, obtuse or acute at
base, thin, villosulous on both surfaces, more densely so beneath; cymes
axillary, few-flowered, pedunculate, the pedicels stout, 2.4 mm. long, vil-
losulous; hypanthum densely short-villous, the 4 calyx lobes oblong-ob-
lanceolate, foliaceous, 4-5 mm. long, acute; corolla pinkish white, thinly
villous outside, the slender tube 1 cm. long, the lobes of about the same
length; capsule obovoid, 5 mm. long.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,146, collected in wet
forest, La Estrella, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, March 27, 1924, by
Paul C. Standley (no. 39224). No. 39425 from the same locality is of this
species.
Among the North American species this is easily recognized by the copi-
ous pubescence upon all parts of the plant.
2 This JouRNAL 13: 290. 1923.
JAN. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 7
Hamelia storkii Standl., sp. nov.
Branches glabrous; stipules subulate from a narrowly triangular base,
10-12 mm. long, ciliate; leaves opposite, the petioles 1.5-5 cm. long, glabrous;
leaf blades elliptic, 12-22 em. long, 4-9 em. wide, acuminate, acute at base,
sparsely barbate beneath in the axils of the lateral nerves, elsewhere gla-
brous; inflorescence terminal, the branches often 10 cm. long in age, glabrous,
many-flowered, the flowers secund, sessile or nearly so; calyx glabrous, the
lobes triangular-oblong, 1.5 mm. long, obtuse, longer than broad, erect;
corolla yellow, 2.5-8 em. long, tubular, slightly widened above, the throat
4 mm. broad; fruit oblong, 1 cm. long, 3 mm. thick.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,166,466, collected in western
Panama, August 1, 1923, by H. E. Stork (no. 38). Also collected in the
Changuinola Valley, Panama, Jan. 14, 1924, by V. C. Dunlap (no. 326).
Related to H. calycosa Donn. Smith, of Guatemala, which has smaller,
mostly ternate leaves, a few-flowered inflorescence, and smaller corolla,
besides much larger calyx lobes.
Hamelia rowleei Standl., sp. nov.
Branches thinly pilose with long spreading hairs; stipules subulate, about
1 em. long; leaves opposite, the petioles 1.5-4.5 cm. long, sparsely pilose;
leaf blades elliptic-obovate, 15-19 em. long, 7-8 em. wide, abruptly short-
acuminate, cuneate-attenuate at base, villosulous above along the costa but
elsewhere glabrous, beneath copiously pilose with stiff spreading hairs;
inflorescence terminal, many-flowered, the branches pilose, the flowers
secund, sessile or nearly so; calyx pilose, the lobes deltoid, about as broad
as long, 1.5 mm. long; corolla tube puberulent, 28 mm. long, 5 mm. wide
above the base, the lobes broadly ovate, spreading.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,080,249, collected at Living-
ston, on the Reventazén River, Costa Rica, in 1920, by W. W. Rowlee and
H. E. Stork (no. 75).
Probably related to H. magniloba Wernham, of Nicaragua, which has
smaller flowers and nearly glabrous leaves.
Hoffmannia asclepiadea Standl., sp. nov.
Stems simple, herbaceous, green, 1.5 meters high, villosulous; leaves op-
posite, the petioles stout, 2.5-4 cm. long, villosulous; leaf blades ovate-
elliptic, about 20 cm. long and 8 cm. wide, long-acuminate, cuneate at base,
glabrous above, copiously short-villous beneath, especially along the nerves;
cymes sessile, shorter than the petioles, many-flowered, the branches densely
short-villous; calyx short-villous, the lobes ovate-deltoid, obtuse, 1 mm.
long; corolla ovoid and acutish in bud, greenish yellow, densely short-
villous.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,122, collected in wet
forest at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,900
meters, March 20-22, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38349).
Among the Costa Rican species this is well marked by the copious pubes-
cence.
8 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, no. 1.
Hoffmannia amplexifolia Standl., sp. nov.
_ Stems simple, herbaceous, glabrous, sharply quadrangular, 1-1.5 meters
high; leaves ternate, sessile, oblanceolate or oblong-obovate, 23-35 em.
long and 8-13 ecm. wide or larger, long-acuminate, long-attenuate to the
deeply cordate, clasping base, glabrous above, beneath minutely puberulent
along the nerves; cymes clustered in the leaf axils, many-flowered, 3-8 cm.
long, the branches densely villosulous, the flowers slender-pedicellate;
calyx reddish, short-villous, the lobes narrowly triangular, obtuse; corolla
greenish yellow, puberulent or villosulous, in bud 5 mm. long, the lobes
longer than the tube; fruit red.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,192, collected in moist
forest near Orosi, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, March 30, 1924, by
Paul C. Standley (no. 39869). Nos. 39717 and 39809, from the same locality
are also of this species.
Readily distinguished from other species of the genus by the clasping
bases of the leaves.
Hoffmannia josefina Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub 3 meters high, with few branches, the stems terete, glabrous; leaves
opposite, the stout glabrous petioles 1-1.5 em. long; leaf blades obovate or
oblong-obovate, 13-22 em. long, 5.5-9 cm. wide, acute or abruptly short-
acuminate, cuneate-attenuate at base, glabrous; cymes few or many-flowered,
pedunculate, longer than the petioles, the branches glabrous, the pedicels
1-3 mm. long; calyx glabrous or with a few short scattered hairs, the limb
2 mm. long, the lobes narrowly triangular, acute, green; corolla in bud
ovoid, acute, in anthesis 11 mm. long, glabrous, the lobes shorter than the
tube; fruit subglobose, 6 mm. long, dark red.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,152,900, collected in moist
forest between Aserri and Tarbaca, Province of San José, Costa Rica, al-
titude about 1800 meters, February 12, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no.
34143).
Hoffmannia hamelioides Standl.,sp. nov.
Shrub 1.5 meters high, the branches glabrous; leaves opposite, the petioles
stout, 1-3 em. long, sparsely puberulent or glabrous; leaf blades obovate-
elliptic or oblancolate-elliptic, 12-21 cm. long, 4.5-7 em. wide, abruptly
acuminate, cuneate-decurrent at base, glabrous above, villosulous beneath
along the nerves; cymes sessile, few or many-flowered, about equaling the
petioles, the branches short-villous; calyx short-villous, the lobes 1-1.5
mm. long, narrowly triangular, acutish; corolla in bud ovoid, acutish, 4 mm.
long, greenish white, short-villous; fruit dark red, 7-8 mm. long.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,152,904, collected in moist
forest between Aserri and Tarbaca, Province of San José, Costa Rica, alti-
tude about 1,800 meters, February 12, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no.
34149).
Related to H. josefina, but distinguished by the pubescence of leaves
and inflorescence.
JAN. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 9
Hoffmannia macrophylla Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub 3 meters high, with few branches, glabrous throughout, the stems
green; leaves sessile or nearly so, the blades decurrent to the base, oblong-
obovate, 21-35 cm. long, 8-10 em. wide, abruptly acute, long-attenuate
to the base, bright green; cymes sessile or pedunculate, 3-4 cm. long, laxly
few-flowered, the pedicels 3-8 mm. long; calyx red, the limb shallowly lo-
bate, the lobes rounded-deltoid, 1.5 mm. long; corolla in bud cylindric,
obtuse, 6 mm. long, red outside, the lobes yellow, twice as long as the tube.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,152,957-8 (from the same
plant), collected in wet forest, Cerro de la Carpintera, Province of Cartago,
Costa Rica, altitude about 1700 meters, February, 1924, by Paul C. Stand-
ley (no. 35636).
Hoffmannia leucocarpa Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub about 2 meters high, simple or with few branches, glabrous through-
out; leaves opposite, the petioles stout, 3-5.5 em. long, the blades elliptic
or lance-elliptic, 15-24 em. long, 6-12 em. wide, acuminate, acute or cuneate
at base; cymes axillary, equaling or often much exceeding the petioles, laxly
few-flowered, the flowers on slender pedicels 5-12 mm. long, the branches
bright red; calyx limb 2-3 mm. long, red, the lobes deltoid, acute; corolla
red, in bud 7 mm. long and acute, the lobes longer than the tube; fruit
subglobose, about 1 em. long, white.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,121, collected in wét
forest at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 1600
meters, March 20-22, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38340). No. 38703
from the same locality belongs to this species.
Hoffmannia pallidifiora Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub 1-2 meters high, with simple quadrangular glabrous stems; leaves
opposite, the slender petioles 2-4 cm. long, glabrous, the upper leaves often
sessile; leaf blades elliptic or obovate-elliptic, 15-25 cm. long, 7-9 cm. wide,
acuminate, abruptly long-decurrent, glabrous; cymes few-flowered, long-
pedunculate, equaling the petioles, the branches glabrous, the flowers partly
sessile and partly pedicellate; calyx pale green, the lobes triangular, obtuse
or acute, 1-1.5 mm. long; corolla pale green, narrow and acute in bud, in
anthesis 8 mm. long, the lobes nearly twice as long as the tube; fruit oval,
red, 1 cm. long.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,101, collected in wet
forest at La Hondura, Province’ of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about
1500 meters, March 16, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 37877). The fol-
lowing collections also belong here:
Costa Rica: La Hondura, Standley 37780, 37837. El Mufieco, south of
Navarro, Province of Cartago, alt. about 1400 meters, Standley 33435,
33951.
10 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 1
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
181sT MEETING
The 181st meeting of the Academy was held in the Assembly Hall of the
Cosmos Club the evening of Thursday, November 15, 1923, and was de-
voted to a consideration of Pan-Pacific problems. The program was as
follows:
J. C. Merriam: The origin and development of the Pan-Pacific Scientific
Congress.
T. Waytanp VauGcHAN: The Australian Meeting in 1923: The Scientific
Proceedings.
Dr. Vaughan, in reporting for Col. Alfred H. Brooks and himself as dele-
gates from the Academy, spoke in general of the cordial hospitality with
which the delegates were received by the Commonwealth Government,
the financial and other assistance rendered by the Government, the success
of the meetings, and in some detail of the fields covered by the general and
sectional meetings. There were present 81 official delegates, as follows:
Great Britain, 12; United States, 17; Canada, 3; Hawaii, 6; New Zealand,
13; Japan, 10; Philippine Islands, 5; Netherlands, 6; British Malaya, 2;
Tahiti, 1; Papua, 1; New Guinea, 1; Fiji, 1; Hongkong, 1; France, 1;
Chile, 1. The Congress was officially opened in Melbourne, August 13, by
an address from the Governor-General. The Sydney sessions were opened
August 24. The President of the Congress, Sir David Orme Masson,
Professor of Chemistry at the University of Melbourne, presided over the
general sessions at Melbourne, which were limited to opening and closing
meetings. The Vice-president of the Congress, Sir Edgeworth David,
Professor of Geology at the University of Sydney, presided over the general
session at Sydney, which were mostly devoted to subjects of general interest
to several sections. These were as follows: The structure of the Pacific region
and its influence on animal and plant life; Organization and coordination of
scientific work in the Pacific region; Insects, their distribution and role in the
Pacific region; Climate of the Pacific region, its causes and relations to eco-
nomic and social life; Settlement in areas of low rainfall.
The sections of the Congress were Agriculture, Anthropology and Ethnol-
ogy, Botany, Entomology, Forestry, Geodesy and Geophysics (including
Radiotelegraphy), Geography and Oceanography, Geology, Hygiene,
Veterinary Science, and Zoology. In addition to the technical discussions,
arrangements were made for several popular public lectures in both Mel-
bourne and Sydney. Outlines of the programs of the sections are as follows:
Agriculture.—(1) Problems relating to irrigation; (2) Agricultural educa-
tion and research; (3) Genetics and the improvement of farm animals; (4)
Diseases of wheat; (5) Soil surveys; (6) Genetics and the improvement of
crops; (7) Diseases of cereals; (8) Diseases of miscellaneous crops; (9)
Tropical agriculture; (10) Plant quarantine regulations.
Anthropology and Ethnology.—(1) Cartography of the Pacific (joint
meeting with sections of Geodesy and Geography); (2) Organization of
research among the natives of Australia and the islands of the Pacific, and
Linguistic problems of the Pacific; (3) Decline in native population in the
islands of the Pacific, and Variations in sex ratios in relation to the index
of declining fertility; (4) The Australian aboriginal—his origin and his re-
gan. 4, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 11
lations to the Tasmanian and other races; (5) The relation of Melanesian,
Polynesian, and Indonesian peoples and languages; (6) Migration zones.
Botany.—(1) Forests of Victoria, and the big trees of Australia; (2)
Ecologie studies in Tasmania, and the flora of Krakatau; (3) Antipodean
shortage of softwoods (with Forestry Section); (4) Wheat diseases (with
Agricultural Section); (5) Distribution of plants, Australia’s influence on
adjacent floras, and Distribution of orchids; (6) So-called back-mutations
and plant ecology in arid regions; (7) Gymnosperms of the Pacific; (8)
Evolution of plant life in the Pacific; (9) General botany, especially the
phytogeography, of the Pacific.
Entomology.—(1) Parasitologic problems in veterinary science and zool-
ogy; The bufialo fly (jot meeting with sections of Zoology and Veterinary
Science); (2) Introduced pests and natural enemies (joint meeting with sec-
tions of Zoology, Botany, and Forestry); (8) Introduction of beneficial
insects into New Zealand, Distribution of anopheline mosquitoes, and The
termite problem as affecting Australia; (4) The Mediterranean fruit-fly,
Fruit-fly control, and Australian fruit-flies; (5) Control of noxious insects
by the introduction of their natural enemies, and Entomological control
of the prickly pear; (6) Control of the blow-fly pest; (7) Distribution of
insects in relation to disease (jointly with other sections).
Forestry.—The first three of the four sessions of this Section were devoted
to joint discussions with the sections of Botany, Entomology, and Zoology.
At the fourth session the topics were: Seasoning of hardwood timber, The
need for research into the properties of hardwood timbers. At Sydney
the topics were: Timber-boring insects, with special reference to the ex-
portation of Philippine lumber; Re-afforestation in the Pacific; A national
forestry school and the properties of hardwood timber; Introduced tropical
borers and their natural enemies; Plant quarantine (jointly with the sec-
tions of Agriculture and Entomology).
Geodesy, Geophysics, and Radiotelegraphy.—(1) Present condition of
mapping in the Pacific, and A geodetic survey of Australia; (2) Determina-
tion of gravity at sea, Isostasy in the light of the work in India, Earth-
tides, Australia’s possible contribution to knowledge of the figure of the
Earth; (3) Meteorology of the Pacific, and International researches in solar
physics; (4) Studies of terrestrial magnetism In the Pacific region, and The
magnetic observatory of the Carnegie Institution at Watheroo; (5) Geodetic
and trigonometric surveys and their status in New South Wales and the
Netherlands East Indies; (6) Gravity determinations in the Philippines,
Development of the hypothesis of isostasy, Limiting depth of earthquake
foci, Methods of geodetic work; (7) Tropical storms and associated phenom-
ena; (8) Location of earthquakes and the installation of seismographs and
related matters; (9) Microseisms and their correlation with the distribu-
tion of atmospheric pressure; (10) Engineering and architectural construc-
tion in countries of high seismicity; (11) Earthquake forecasting; (12)
Radiotelegraphy (three half-day discussions on ten topics, among them the
organization of wireless time signals in the Pacific and adjoining countries).
Geography and Oceangraphy.—(1) Mapping of the Pacific, and related
matters (jointly with the sections of Anthropology and Geodesy); (1) Hy-
drographic surveys in Australia, and An oceanographic institute in Australia;
(3) Meteorology of the Pacific (jointly with section of Geodesy and Geo-
physics); (4) Oceanography, Ocean currents of the southwest Pacific;
(5) Unexplored regions of the Pacific, especially in Melanesia; (6) Geo-
graphic education; (7) Physiographic unity of the Pacific (jointly with the
section of Geology).
12. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 1
Geology.—There had been selected for the Section of Geology eight topics,
and in the discussion of each of them an endeavor was made to cover the
Pacific region. ‘The different topics interlocked in scope, so that they were
mutually supplementary and taken all together a good general account, of
many of the important geologic features of the Pacific region was the result.
The topics were (1) Correlation of the Cenozoic formations; (2) The ore
provinces; (3) The geologic structure; (4) Post-Mesozoic volcanic activity;
(5) Carboniferous and Permian; (6) Coral reefs; (7) Oil and water re-
sources; (8) Coal resources and status of a real geologic mapping.
Hygiene.—(1) Mining hygiene; (2) Program of hygiene for the Pacific
region; (8) Control of plague, small-pox, and other diseases among native
races, and cooperation in public health matters; (4) Causes of the decline
of native races; (5) Climate and human efficiency; (6) Insects and the
distribution of disease by them (jointly with the sections of Entomology
and Veterinary Science). There were also papers on ventilation, diseases
among children in New South Wales, and heredity in cancer.
Veterinary Science.—The work of this section is so interlocked with the
sections of Agriculture, Entomology, and Zoology that it held no separate
sessions in Melbourne, and in Sydney most of the sessions were also with
those of other sections. Pleuro-pneumonia in cattle, Piroplasmoses of the
Pacific region, and The control of the cattle tick were separately discussed.
Zoology.—The papers before the section of Zoology were largely of mis-
cellaneous character. In Melbourne parasites ard genetics were discussed
with other sections, and fisheries and marine biological stations received
independent consideration. In Sydney the geographic, distribution of
several groups of organisms received attention; there were papers on the
evolution of the marsupials, on the evolution of mollusks concurrent with
topographic development, and on the ecology of marine organisms. The
preservation of the native fauna of Australia was specially considered.
In conclusion Dr. Vaughan spoke appreciatively of the general benefits
of the Congress in bringing widely separated investigators into direct con-
tact, in affording opportunity for first-hand information as to scientific
progress in distant regions, and in promoting good will and mutual under-
standing by the assembling of men actuated by the common purpose of
increasing and utilizing scientific knowledge in the improvement of human
welfare.
H. E. Grecory: The resolutions adopted by the Congress on International
Cooperation in Scientific Research.
The resolutions adopted by the Congress of 1923 show that the delegates
viewed the Pacific as a unit area, of which information in all branches of
science was deficient. It was recognized that increase of knowledge in any
branch is of great assistance to all other branches and that practical steps in
progress are to be made by utilizing all agencies concerned—governmental,
institutional, and individual. The resolutions therefore took the forms of
(1) pointing out needed investigations wholly within the sphere of a single
country, state, or institution, and (2) formulating projects which demand
specific contributions from different sources. For some problems, for
example the origin and history of the native populations, areas were de-
limited in which Japan, Dutch East Indies, Australia, New Zealand, and
the United States are to assume responsibility.
The Congress passed resolutions designed to insure mere methods
of field recording and label making, to provide for the publication of
JAN. 4, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 13
manuscripts, and to develop more and better university courses of instruc-
tion in subjects directly related to the Pacific.
Resolutions which are essentially outlines of projects for investigation
in agriculture, anthropology, botany, entomology, forestry, geodesy, geog-
raphy, geology, geophysics, hygiene, oceanography, veterinary science,
and zoology, and which reveal an appreciation of the inter-relation of these
subjects and a knowledge of ways and means, were spread on the records
for transmission to institutions and government bureaus. Resolutions
dealing with conservation are considered of particular importance, because
of the urgency and human interest of the investigation which they formulate.
Attention was directed to the threatened extinction of indigenous terrestrial
fauna and flora and marine mammals; to the depletion of fisheries; to the
relative unprofitableness of tropical agriculture because of plant diseases
and insect pests; to the absence of ready communication between Pacific
peoples, and especially to the alarming decrease in the native population.
That the resolutions passed at the Australian session of the Pacific Con-
gress are likely to lead to accomplished results is indicated by the way in
which the suggestions formulated in resolutions at the Honolulu meeting
in 1920 have been put into effect. (Author’s abstract.)
182d MEETING
The 182d meeting of the Academy, the 26th annual meeting, was held at
the Administration Building of the Carnegie Institution of Washington the
evening of Tuesday, January 8, 1924. The program consisted of an address
by the retiring President, T. WayLanp VAUGHAN, entitled, Oceanography
in its relations to other earth sciences. This has since been published in the
Journal (14: 307-333. August 19, 1924).
After a short intermission following the address the annual business meeting
of the Academy was held. The minutes of the 25th annual meeting were
read and approved. The Corresponding Secretary, Francis B. SILsBEE,
reported briefly on the activities of the Academy during the year 1923.
On, January 1, 1924, the membership consisted of 15 honorary members,
3 #:trons, and 560 members, one of whom was a life member. Of the total
membership of 578, those living in or near Washington number 361, those
in other parts of the United States 192. There are 25 foreign members.
During the year the resignations of 13 members were accepted, and the
Academy lost by death the following: Winu1am H. Baxcocx, Joun B.
HENDERSON, Orro Kiotz, Aurrep A. Mayor, E. W. Mortuny, E. D. Wit-
LiaMson. There was, nevertheless, a slight gain in membership over the
last preceding year. Nine meetings of the Board of Managers were held,
one important activity being the election of nine honorary members, as
follows: ErRNest CLayton ANDREWs, Australia (Geology); CARL FREDERICK
ALBERT CHRISTENSEN, Denmark (Botany); Raoun Gautier, Switzerland
(Geodesy); Lron Manovvrier, France (Anthropology); Paunt Marcnat,
France (Biology); F. Omort, Japan (Seismology); Sir Ernest RUTHERFORD,
England (Radioactivity); Guiseprr STeraNInt, Italy (Paleontology); Max
Weser, Netherlands (Zoology). Other matters considered by the Board
of Managers pertained to support of the plan for a national arboretum
in Washington, relief to sorely distressed scientists of foreign countries, and
the proposed plan for preparing a complete and detailed history of scientific
work in Washington, a project which, unfortunately, it has been necessary
to postpone indefinitely. Especially noteworthy was the affiliation of three
14 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 1
new societies with the Academy during the year: Society of American Bac-
teriologists (Washington Branch), American Society of Mechanical En-
gineers (Washington Section), Helminthological Society of Washington.
The effect of this has been to add about 350 scientists, or about 25 per cent,
to those now directly affiliated with and represented by the Academy. This
is the first occasion since 1912 that additional societies have become affil-
iated with the Academy.
The report of the Recording Secretary, Wituram R. Maxon, was read.
In addition to the annual meeting there were held during the calendar year
9 public meetings, nearly all in conjunction with one or more of the affiliated
societies, at which illustrated addresses were delivered. The titles and
dates and places of publication of the addresses were stated. Besides these
meetings the Academy participated in the memorial exercises held at the
National Museum the evening of Saturday, February 3, 1923, celebrating
the centenary of the birth of Spencer F. Baird, former Secretary of the Smith-
sonian Institution. Addresses on that occasion were delivered by WILLIAM
H. Datu, C. G. Assot, Epwin Linton, Davin Starr JoRDAN, and C. Hart
Merriam, all, with a single exception, members of the Academy.
The report of the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, showed total receipts of $5,307.12
and total disbursements of $6,190.09; the cash balance in hand December
31, 1923, was $1,788.50. Investments of the Academy have a total par
value of $16,036.37. The cost of maintaining and printing the Journal in
1923 was approximately $3,700, a slight increase over 1922.
The report of the Auditing Committee was read and the reports of both
the Treasurer and the Auditing Committee were accepted.
The report of the Editors of the Journal was read by Sipney Paice,
the senior Editor. The editorial policy of the Board had remained essen-
tially unchanged. Volume 13, for 1923, consists of 465 pages and includes
58 original articles, as against 486 pages and 52 original articles published in
1922. The cost of printing was slightly less per page than in 1922. Ref-
erence was made also to a definite provision adopted by the Board of Mana-
gers by which the Academy shares with authors the cost of illustrations,
and by which authors’ reprints may be purchased at a much lower price
than that charged by the publishers. With deep regret the Editors recorded
the death of EK. D. Witutamson, a member of the Editorial Board.
The committee of Tellers reported that the following officers had been
elected for 1924: President, A. L. Day; Non-resident Vice-Presidents, IRA
Remsen, W. E. Ritter; Corresponding Secretary, F. B. Stuspen; Recording
Secretary, W. D. Lampert; Treasurer, R. L. Farts; Managers, Class of
1927, F. G. Corrrent, V. KELLOGG.
The following Vice-Presidents, nominated by the affiliated societies, were
then elected: Anthropological Society, T. Micuntson; Archaeological Society,
Water Houau; Society of American Bacteriologists (Washington Branch),
W. M. Cuarx; Biological Society, J. W. Grotey; Botanical Society, L. C.
Corsett; Chemical Society, R. S. McBring; Institute of Electrical Engineers,
A. R. Curyney; Society of Engineers, M. C. GRoveR; American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (Washington Section), O. P. Hoop; Entomological
Society, S. A. Ronwer; Society of Foresters, G. B. Supwortx; National Geo-
graphic Society, FREDERICK V. Cov1LuE; Geological Society, G. F. LOUGHLIN;
Helminthological Society of Washington, B. H. Ransom; Historical Society,
ALLEN C. CiarK; Medical Society, Joon D. THomas; Philosophical Society,
D. L. Hazarp.
At 10:15 the meeting adjourned.
Wiuuram R. Maxon, Recording Secretary.
JAN. 4, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOFHICAL SOCIETY 15
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
905TH MEETING
The 905th meeting was held in the Auditorium of the Cosmos Club on
Saturday, October 4, 1924. The meeting was called to order at 8:15 P.
M. by President Hazarp with 50 persons in attendance.
The program of the evening consisted in reports from the meetings of the
British Association and the International Mathematical Congress, held in
Toronto during August 1924.
W. J. Humenreys reported upon that part of the program which dealt
with geophysics, including, particularly, meteorology, magnetism, and seis-
mology.
H. L. Curtis reported upon that part of the program which was con-
cerned with general physics, describing in detail also some of the enter-
tainment features and excursions.
Pau D. Foote reported upon that part of the program which dealt with
atomic physics, detailing particularly the papers by Compton and Duane.
E. W. Woorarp reported upon the meetings of the International Mathe-
matical Congress, discussing the papers under the headings of pure and
applied mathematics.
The reports were discussed by F. B. SmusBEE.
906TH MEETING
The 906th meeting was held in the Auditorium of the Cosmos Club on
Saturday, October 18, 1924. The meeting was called to order at 8:15 P.
M. by President Hazarp with 50 persons in attendance.
The first paper on the program was presented by O. H. GisH on Prelimi-
nary results of earth-current measurements at Watheroo, Western Australia.
The paper was illustrated with lantern slides and was discussed by Messrs.
Marmuer, Maucuty, TucKERMAN, BreitT, and CRooKER.
The first continuous recording of earth-current potentials in the Southern
Hemisphere was begun in October, 1923, at the Watheroo Magnetic Obser-
vatory of the Carnegie Institution of Washington near Watheroo, Western
Australia. The method used was previously described (see Tuis JouRNAL
14: 120. 1924). Curves of the diurnal variation for the months of Novem-
and December, 1923, show pronounced characteristics as follows: The South-
North component is a double wave which when plotted on local time is in
phase with the South-North component of diurnal variations inearth-currents
observed at Berlin (1884-1888) and Ebro (1914-1918). The West-East com-
ponent of the diurnal variation at Watheroo, however, is approximately a
single wave, while at Berlin and Ebro a double wave is obtained for this
component. This single wave is in phase with the principal harmonic of
the curve obtained at the other stations. The amplitudes observed at
Berlin are expressed in arbitrary units and consequently can not be used in a
comparison. At Ebro, however, the amplitude of either component is 20
times that found thus far at Watheroo, the range in values at Watheroo
being as follows: South-North component, 1.6 millivolts per kilometer;
West-East component, 0.6 millivolts per kilometer. The vector diagrams
of the diurnal variations at Watheroo are of similar character to those
obtained at both Ebro and Berlin. These diagrams are elongated along a
line extending from west of north to east of south, and on the day-light
portion the progression is clockwise. Though too early to draw definite
16 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 1
conclusions, these results do not appear to fit in to any existing theory.
(Author’s abstract.)
A paper on Graphical solution of spherical triangles was presented
by F. E. Wricur. It was illustrated with lantern slides and was discussed
by Messrs. Lirrnenaues, TuckERMAN, HawxkeswortuH, and HumpHReys.
The paper was published in full in the Journal of the Washington Academy
of Sciences for October 19, 1924.
W. D. Lampert presented the third paper on the program on The dis-
tance between two points on the Earth. The paper was discussed by
Messrs. O. 5. Apams, L. H. Apams, GarpNreR, Hayrorp, GisH, WRIGHT,
and HawkKESWORTH.
The problem of finding the latitude and longitude of a point given by its
distance and direction from a point of known latitude and longitude is
called “the principal geodetic problem.’”’ The problem in hand is the in-
verse of this, the two points being assumed to be given by their geographic
coordinates. Many solutions of these two problems have been given to meet
various conditions of distance, accuracy, or convenience in computation.
When the flattening of the earth is aJlowed for, there are various con-
necting lines which might be used, but the most natural one is the shortest,
or geodesic, line.
The complete solution for the geodesic was given in 1825 by Bessel
in the Astronomische Nachrichten (Vol. 4). It involves elliptic integrals,
and is decidedly laborious in spite of auxiliary tables. Associated with the
spheroidal triangle, the vertices of which are a pole of the earth and the
two points, there is a spherical triangle somewhat resembling the spheroidal
one and related to it in certain rather simple ways.
The spherical triangle should be conceived as a convenient geometrical
representation of certain quantities occurring in the computation rather
than as a deformation or projection of the spheroidal triangle. The rigorous
solution involves successive approximations, each approximation requiring
the solution of spherical triangles. If, however, too great accuracy is not
demanded, the solution may be found by applying to the first approximation
certain small corrections deduced from the differential variations of the
parts of a triangle. This is done in the proposed approximate solution.
This approximate solution is so accurate that, regardless of the distance
between points, a computation with five-figure tables will not distinguish
with certainty between the approximate and the exact processes, and often
a computation with six figures is no more than sufficient for the purpose.
(Author’s abstract.)
W. J. Humpureys presented, as an informal communication, a report as
delegate from the Philosophical Society of Washington to the Centenary
Celebration of the Franklin Institute at Philadelphia.
907TH MEETING
The 907th meeting was a joint meeting with the Washington Academy
of Sciences and was held in the Auditorium of the Cosmos Club on Saturday,
November 1, 1924.
The meeting was called to order at 8:18 P. M., by President A. L. Day,
of the Acapremy, with 95 persons present.
Dr. Henry Norris Russet of Princeton University addressed the
meeting on Recent advances in our knowledge of the interior of the stars.
JAN. 4, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 17
All our direct knowledge of the stars deals with their surfaces. We can
now find not only their distances and brightness, but their diameters, and
temperatures; that is, their surface temperatures. The largest stars are red
and relatively cool;those of intermediate size are white, and hot; the smallest
ones (“dwarf stars’) are again red, with few exceptions. These facts fit
in with the scheme of stellar evolution proposed by Lane and Lockyer, and
revised by the speaker, according to which a mass of gas contracting under
its gravitation will get hotter, both at the center and (more slowly) on the
surface till its density becomes so high that the atoms are crowded close
together, when the temperature falls again.
The cooler stars show mainly the spectral lines of the metals; the hotter,
those of the permanent gases. Saha and others have explained this on the
theory of ionization. When a metallic atom loses an electron it absorbs a
new set of lines—the spark lines. After losing from two to four, it no longer
absorbs anything in the visible spectrum. This happens at the higher
stellar temperatures. The permanent gases are much harder to ionize,
and demand these high temperatures even to get their atoms into the ‘‘ex-
cited” state in which they absorb lines in the visible region (instead of the
ultra-violet). The spectral differences are therefore no evidence of trans-
mutation of elements.
In the interior of the stars the temperature must be many millions of
degrees. Under these conditions the lighter atoms (about as far as sodium)
would lose all their electrons, and be reduced to bare nuclei. The heavier
ones would retain a few of the inner electrons. Even here, no general trans-
mutation occurs; if the gas cooled down, the original atoms would auto-
matically be reconstituted.
Eddington has shown that the enormous gravitational pressure is sup-
ported partly by the gas pressure due to the motion of atoms and electrons and
partly by the pressure of the imprisoned radiation. If the mass of the body
is less than one-tenth that of the sun, the radiation pressure has an insignif-
icant share. Such bodies can not shine brightly enough to be seen at great
distances—which explains why there are no stars of mass smaller than this.
The amount of light which leaks out to the surface of a star depends on the
opacity of the internal material. The first form of Eddington’s theory made
this opacity constant, and ascribed the low luminosity of the dwarf stars
to low internal temperature resulting from close packing of the atoms. Later
work leads to an opacity increasing with the density, and to internal tem-
peratures higher for the dwarfs than for the giants—the increased opacity
of the former preventing much escape of heat to the surface.
This demands that the stellar material should behave practically like a
perfect gas, up to at least 100 times the density of water. The nuclei, and
highly ionized residues of atoms inside the stars, are so much smaller than
normal atoms that this is entirely reasonable.
A few of the dwarf stars are white, and probably of great surface bright-
ness, small diameter, and high density.
The computed density for the comparison of Sirius is about 50,000 times
that of water. Even this enormous density is no longer incredible, and the
interpretation of these white dwarfs—previously a hopeless puzzle—is one
of the notable triumphs of the new theory. (Author’s abstract.)
18 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES voL. 15, No. 1
908TH MEETING
The 908th meeting was a joint meeting with the Washington Academy of
Sciences and was held in the Auditorium of the Cosmos Club on Saturday,
November 15, 1924.
The meeting was called to order at 8:17 P. M. by D. L. Hazarp, President
of the Philosophical Society, with 80 persons present.
President Hazard announced that the Committee on Elections would
receive nominations for officers of the Philosophical Society for the coming
year.
The address of the evening was delivered by Prof. Cu. Fasry of Paris
on the subject Thirty years of spectroscopy with the interferometer.
The address was termed by Prof. Fabry a scientific autobiography, and
the origin of interference fringes and their applications were discussed.
Views illustrating the first fringes obtained as well as some of the early
apparatus used were shown.
The address was discussed by Messrs. SosMANn, BurGEss, and SKINNER.
J. P. Aut, Recording Secretary.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
At the Annual Meeting of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian In-
stitution the Secretary announced the appointment of Senators Smoor and
Prrrer to fill the vacancies on the Board caused by the death of Senator
Lodge and the resignation of Senator McCormick.
Dr. Wini1am M. Mann returned recently from an extended trip, in the in-
terests of the Federal Horticultural Board, to southern Europe where he
investigated the distribution of the Mediterranean fruit fly.
A meeting of the Petrologist’s Club was held at the home of H. G. Frr-
Guson on December 16. M. I. GotpMan described An instance of syngenetic
solution and epigenetic flowage in limestones, and observations on silicification.
There was also further discussion of SHANNON and Ross’s paper on Bentonite,
presented at the preceding meeting. Officers for 1925 were elected as follows:
Secretary, Epwarp Sampson; Governing Committee, H. G. Frerauson, J. M.
Mertir, H. E. Merwin.
The December meeting of the Pick and Hammer Club, held at the Geologi-
cal Survey on December 6, was devoted in part to an informal memorial and
tribute to the late ALFRED H. Brooks, chief of the Alaska Branch of the
Survey. Among the speakers were SipNEY Paice, GLENN S. Smiru, A. C.
Spencer, C. E. MEeNDENHALL, R. H. Sarcent, and G. O. Smita. The
regular program of the meeting consisted of reports on the work of the past
field season, made by N. C. Grover for the Hydrographic Branch, GLENN
S. Smirx for the Topographic Branch, G. R. MaNnsriztp for the Geologic
Branch, J. D. Norrurvp for the Land Classification Board, and 8. R. Capps
for the Alaska Branch.
ANN OUNCEMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY
AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES*
wie i ie - Tuesday, January 6. The Botanical Society.
Thursday, January 8. The Chemical Society.
Saturday, January 10. The Philosophical apes at the Cosmos Club.
_ =& Program: Danret L. Hazarp: Terrestrial magnetism in the twentieth century.
Tuesday, January 13. The AcapEmy.
Wednesday, January 14. The Geological Society.
_ Thursday, January 15. The Acapremy.
£ Saturday, January 17. The Biological Society.
: The Helminthological Society.
? = * The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page if
sent to the editors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month.
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
“ Genetics —The chromosomes of Citrus. Howarp B. Frost. Sh sien se
Botany.—New plants from Central America. Pau C, STANDLEY.....
‘ie MER
PROCEEDINGS
/ Wie
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: ArrHur L. Day, Geophysical Laboratory. eae,
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. Siuspen, Bureau of Standards. .
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Survey. a
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey. _ f
Vol. 15 JANUARY 19, 1925 No. 2
~ JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Kiiure W. F. Mreacrrs D. F. Hewerr
NATIONAL MUSEUM BUREAU OF STANDARDS GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L, H. Apams S. A. RonwEr
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Stosr
" BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY = GEOLOGICAL SOCINTY
ls
R. F. Griees J. R. SWANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
*
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anD GUILFORD AVES.
Battmore, MaryLtanp
. Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under’the
7 Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
P in Section 1103, Act of October 23,1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be.
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof.—tin order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
Ag an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volumeé 18.........0.00ceceecc nescence res seats $6.00*
Semi-monthly numbers: - 2.0015 6/0'0.6:0:4 oiaiclela’s:e slelaislsvelaie psieya nloyeisioteuar atest eet ae .25
Monthly ‘numbers... 2200's gists Sere sce « Cietanie rictens slate iebeetele te iets stele ete ee -50
Remittances should be made payable to ‘(Washington Academy of Sciences,’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L#Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges—The Journat does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
~* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members ot scientific societies affiliated with the Academy.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 JANUARY 19, 1925 No. 2
MATHEMATICS.—On the empirical representation of certain pro-
duction curves! C. E. VAN ORSTRAND, Geological Survey.
INTRODUCTION
Production data representing the yearly output from individual
mines, or from groups of mines included within areas of the order of
magnitude of states or nations, can generally be represented by a
curve (a, figure 1) which has a zero value at the origin of time—the
curve rises irregularly and oftentimes quite abruptly to a maximum
value and then declines rather slowly; presumably to a zero value,
in an interval of time which may be assumed to be finite, or infinite.
The problem to be solved consists of two distinct parts—(a) the selec-
tion of an empirical equation, and (b) the evaluation of the constants
of the empirical equation selected to represent the observations. It
is proposed to treat both of these problems with sufficient detail and
generality to enable the investigator to adopt at the outset certain well
defined methods of procedure that will enable him to obtain satisfac-
tory results with a minimum expenditure of time and energy.
SELECTION OF AN EMPIRICAL EQUATION
Expressed in terms of mathematics, we may say that the equation,
y = FG)
which represents the production (y) in terms of the time (x) has a
zero value at the origin and at infinity—between these two values of
the abscissae, the function is finite, positive, and continuous. The
first derivative vanishes at infinity, but it may, or may not, vanish
at the origin.
1 Published with the permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey.
19
20 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
Functions satisfying these conditions can be defined in accordance
with the theorems of the modern theory of functions. The following
classification is based on the treatise by Forsyth.?
Pec emes y =F (2) LIMITING CONDITIONS
Accidental (1) a™(ao + aaa + +++ ane”)
(bo + bie + ++ + byz”) RS
1
(2) af(ze 9 @ * (3) g (rt) > 0
Essential (") Aqa i
(3) | estaene? eMX\zF 4+ AG || n\ ° >0
x
(4) ax™e— 92) m>0g (zr) >0
=1
(5) E m eo (x) + (. ‘) m>0O0g(t)>0
| ar
Accidental 1 1
and essen- <| (6) Crm ite aS: () m>O0g (*) >0
tial
1 -1
- 1 1
(7) Ez n () + of ‘) m>on C) >0
x
(8) Oba! o Pig: AS ero 6 Order of numerator <
Pi+Gi order of denominator
Equation (8) consists of polynomial and transcendental expressions.
The functions, f(x) and P(z, *), are polynomials, but g(#) and gu(-)
may be either polynomial or transcendental. The exponents in f(x)
are unrestricted—they may be positive or negative, integral or frac-
tional. The order of contact at the vanishing points is finite or infin-
ite according as the singularity is accidental or essential. The
inequalities tabulated in the column ‘Limiting Conditions” are
satisfied when the first derivative vanishes at the origin. Equations
V, VIII, and IX of the following list are very special cases,
y=a(1+=) (lee) eee ee (I)
Cy C2 Cy C2
2A.R. Forsyru. Theory of functions of a complex variable. Cambridge University
Press, 1900. A.L. Day and C.E. Van Orstrranp. The black body and the measurement
of extreme temperatures. Astrophysical Jour. 19: 24-30. 1904.
JAN. 19, 1925 VAN ORSTRAND: PRODUCTION CURVES 21
y=a @ _ a) Na CRNA REET ele Eel Ce hl ae ete arr ee (II)
ae ba = — br
y= 6 Q — *) Coan er er ree Sera IO TA ISELE. Hes RRA SIRES (IIT)
=i
a —m —btan =
y=a ( + = € Sib PELE ATES a ES eas (IV)
2
is YAS:
on Ga a a Oe SIE CRETE AS BNE BREE OEE AUT (V)
y= a(x — ey cn Os eae Ghee See pe, ean Wart ene” ae Raed Gaates Mee ae eh (Vi)
petactgie ee. AT et ee FOU AOR Om yA jit oe ate. (VII)
= Ey ta CSO) Lees pe Ieee TA ee eT eR (VIID)
TS CER are ater en Meee re ae (IX)
b
= =a)?
Lf) = C8 LTE Oa OO ORS Ge tna oe aoe (X)
respectively, of equations 6, 7, and 4 of the preceding list. With the
exception of equation VII, the remaining equations in the list are
easily obtained in a similar manner by introducing zeros at the points
c, and c. instead of the points 0 and ~. Both zeros of equation VII
are at an infinite distance from the origin.
Apart from certain relations between the constants, equations I to
VII, inclusive, represent Pearson’s seven types of frequency distribu-
tion which have been used with great success by himself and others,’
chiefly in the field of biometrics. If we properly define the constants
in IX and put m = n = 2, the equation represents the distribution of
molecular velocities in a gas. Putting m = 0, n = 2, the equation
reduces to Pearson’s type VII, which is the well known normal, Lapla-
cean, or Gaussian distribution of frequencies on which the classical
theory of probabilities is based. Pearson’s type III and V are like-
wise special cases of IX. Two other very special cases of IX,
br
—_™
Y= OLes ONG = Ge
are used to represent decline or extinction curves. These relations
2,W. Pain Experton. Frequency-curves and correlation. C. and E. Layton, Lon-
don.
22 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
are easily represented by straight lines on logarithmic paper. Equa-
tion VIII contains as a special case, the equation deduced by Planck
to represent at a particular temperature the distribution of energy in
the spectrum of a black body.
Pearson has developed criteria based on the method of moments by
means of which one may select from his list of seven functions the
particular equation of the group which will most accurately represent
the observed values. Unfortunately, this method of procedure, at
least in its present state of development, is not easily adapted either
to the determination of criteria or to the evaluation of the constants in
the selected equation when the observed frequency curve is incomplete.
In view of these defects and the fact that theoretical considerations
give us practically no information as to the nature of the required
function, it becomes necessary to adopt a different method of pro-
cedure. Evidently, variation, or degree of flexibility, or generality
of functions can be obtained in only two ways—either by increasing
the number of constants, or by putting the necessary mechanism into
the function itself. An extreme case of the first is a Fourier series—
of the second, a function of functions such as the expressions obtained
for the representation of a frequency distribution by the method of
semi-invariants. From the preceding brief discussion, it appears that
equation [IX best meets the requirement of possessing a very consider-
able range of generality expressed in terms of a minimum number of
constants. It has therefore been selected for a first trial.
COMPARISON OF METHODS OF EVALUATION OF CONSTANTS OF FREQUENCY
DISTRIBUTIONS
The precise evaluation of the constants of a frequency distribution
oftentimes presents more difficulties than does the selection of an
equation which is assumed to represent the data of observation. Four
methods of evaluating the constants are now in use: (1) Method of
least squares; (2) Pearson’s method of moments;? (3) Thiele’s* method
4Cuarues 8. Larkey. Mathematical determination of production decline curves.
Mining and Metallurgy 4: 341-344. 1923. Harry M. Rorsrer. Determining the con-
stants of oil-production decline curves. Trans. Am. Inst. Mining and Metallurgical
Engineers. (Birmingham meeting, October, 1924.) WitLtarp W. Curier, Jr. Es-
timation of underground oil reserves by oil-well production curves. Bull. 228 U. 8. Bureau
of Mines, VII + 114 pages, 1924.
5 ARNE Fisopr. An elementary treatise on frequency curves. The Macmillan Co.
1922. ARNE FisHer. The mathematical theory of probabilities. Vol. 1. Second edi-
tion. 1923. The Macmillan Co.
gan. 19, 1925 VAN ORSTRAND: PRODUCTION CURVES 23
of semi-inyariants; and (4), Krichewsky’s® method of evaluating the
constants of the first derivative of the required integral equation.
Columns 3 and 4 of table 1 give Elderton’s? computed values
(y-), and residuals (v) for the data tabulated in columns 1 and 2.
The values were obtained by adjusting Pearson’s type I by the method
of moments. Columns 6 and 8 give the computed values obtained by
adjusting equations IX and I, respectively, by the method of least
squares. The computed values in column 6 are too large over that
portion of the curve which approaches the age axis as an asymptote,
but over the remaining portion of the curve, the residuals obtained
by this method are less than those obtained by the method of moments.
Using the arbitrary values, c: = 9.1, co = 65.0, and adjusting the
remaining constants of equation I by the method of least squares, we
obtain the numbers tabulated in column 8. Judged by the usual
criterion that the sum of the squares of the residuals (2v?) must be a
minimum, the values tabulated in table 1, namely, 298, 550, and 169,
show that the method of least squares gives a better adjustment than
does the method of moments; furthermore, equation IX gives.a gradua-
tion only slightly inferior to that of equation I.
Column 11 gives the values calculated by Fisher’ from the
equation,
y = 1130 [¢o(x) + 0.0258 dpiti(x) + 0.0158 doi¥(x)]
wherein
1 -3 (Hen)
1.624 Vn ©
and the remaining terms are respectively, the third and fourth deriva-
tives of ¢,(z). The constants were evaluated by the method of semi-
invariants from the data of columns 9 and 10. In column 13 are
tabulated the values obtained from a least square adjustment of equa-
tion I, using the arbitrary values, c: = c. = 31.0. The values of m
and m, were assumed in this case to be independent. Comparison of
the corresponding values of 2v?, 124 and 639, suggests that.it is prob-
ably impossible to adjust equation I, either by the method of least
got) =
6S. Kricnewsxy. A method of curve fitting. Ministry of Public Works, Egypt.
Physical Department Paper No. 8. Government Press, Cairo, 1922. E.W.Woo.uarp.
On Krichewsky’s method of fitting frequency curves. Monthly Weather Review 62, no. 2:
91-94. 1924. P
7W. Pain EvpEerTon. Loc. cit. pp. 54-58.
8 A. Fisner. Loc. cit. First reference, pp. 48-52.
24 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 15, No. 2
squares or by the method of moments so as to obtain the remarkable
degree of precision obtained in this particular instance by the method
of semi-invariants.
TABLE 1.—Comparison or Metuop or Least Squares with Meruop or Moments
AND METHOD OF SEMI-INVARIANTS
EXPOSED aa 2 NUMBER) yar
CENTRAL | TO RISK me Bie a T CENTRAL aienas ANTS y
AGE AGE
Yo ¥ v z Yc x Uc Yo Yc r Uc
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
17 34 44 —10 1 43 =9 43 37 1 1 =29 0
22 145 137 +8 6 137 —4 145 42 6 5 24 0
27 156 149-7 11 158 +1 158 47 17 17 19 8
32 145 142 +3) 16 149 6 143 52 48 48 14 45
37 123 127 —4]| 21 128 1 127, 57 118 118 9 129
42 103 108 —5]| 26 105 | +16 107 62 224 226 —4 229
47 86 88 —2/] 31 88 21 87 67 286 291 +1 280
52 71 69 -+-2'| 36 65 26 «68 72 248 241 6 240
57 55 51 +4] 41 49 31 50 77 128 126 11 139
62 37 36 +11] 46 37 36 35 82 38 44 16 48
67 21 24 -—8] 51 28 |}+41 22 87 13 15 +21 ul
72 13 14 -1/] 56 20 46 13 92 2 3 26 0
77 7 7 0} 61 15 51 6 97 1 1
82 3 3 0!) 667 11 56 2
87 1 1 ON 7k 8 61 0
ZYo 1000 1000 1000 1130 1130
Lye 1000 1036 1001 1136 1125
Tv 298 550 169 124 639
log.a 0.94440 | 3.83910 5.03218 REaS 5.62412
m ears 0.86077 : Fic eee
b fore 0.07650
my 0.40983 eters 0.35530 Bear 7.00455
Ms 2.77698 arty 2.53785 Canehs 6.42181
Cy 1.99638 aio 9.1 eects 31.0
C2 13.52728 HABE 65.0 31.0
Origin—age | 26.75942 16.0 26.0 ms. 66.0
Mode 0.00000 11.25 00.0 meters 1.345
Mode—age 26.75942 27.25 26.0 ee 67.345
The method of least squares frequently fails to give a satisfactory
adjustment of Pearson’s type V; after passing the mode, the com-
puted curve generally falls considerably above the observed curve.
25
ORSTRAND: PRODUCTION CURVES
VAN
5
19, 192
JAN.
TABLE 2.—Pretroteum Propuction IN West VireGinia, 1890-1923
v
(12)
kau
—2.4
—0.5
kg)
—1.0
+0.4
—1.2
(Or
=053
—0.2
—0.3
+0.5
Ye
(11)
5.5
10.5
11.5
Ill
v
(10)
—2.4
+0.8
+0.1
13.4
13.1
ILL So
11.4
11.0
9.4
9.0
8.6
8.2
7.8
—(0).t8)
118)
ale)
+0.5
ileal
(Osi
—0.3
—0.3
+0.7
Yc
(9)
10.5
13.4
13.4
12.9
Mil az
11.3
10.9
9.8
9.4
90
8.2
7.5
—ifao)
6.5
S ils)
—0.5
6.5
+7.5
8.5
11.5
13.5
15.5
19.5
IX
—=2.4
—125
SNES) || G7 4b)
=i,3
Il 1
Hei
—0.1 |+12.5
—0.3
Yc
(6)
10.5
11.5
13.1
13.4 | +0.8
13.4 | +0.1
12.9
11.8
11.3 | +0.5
10.9
9.8
9-4
9.0
WON Onsale
6.8 | +0.2
4.5
5.5
20.5
23.5
5
IX
—2.3
—1.4
—1.4) 14.5
a AS .5
+0.4| 19.5
2
Ai)QJ
—0.1| 24.5
~0.3| 25.5
+0.3) 31.5
10.4
11.4
13.0 | +0.9} 8.5
13.4 | +0.8| 10.5
13.0
11.8
11.4
11.0
9.8
9.4
9.0
PRO-
DUC-
TION
Yo
millions
of
barrels
8.1
10.0
13.9 |
14.2
11.6
| 10.7
| 11.8
9.8
ora
9.3
8.7
TIME
years
ite)
6
9
11
15
19
20
21
24
26
28
33
26 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
This defect can be corrected in part by substitution of equation X for
equation V.
The preceding examples serve to call attention to some of the difficul-
ties involved in obtaining the best graduation of a particular set of
observations; none of the methods is infallible, and ordinarily, the
best method of meeting the requirements of a particular problem can
be found only by trial and investigation.
175
10.0 -
75
50
PRODUCTION-MILLIONS OF BARRELS
25
c ic + ze
w [e} Ww [o) wn oO wo uw
S ice) Q a (ep) je) 2) 2 Dy a 2 N
o © o 0 © D D D D D D
MES eV eARS
Fig. 1. Curves showing the effect of weighting the observation equations. Curve c
is weighted; curve b is not weighted.
ADJUSTMENT OF SOME PETROLEUM PRODUCTION DATA
The annual production of petroleum’ for the’ years 1875-1923,
inclusive, for the state of West Virginia is shown graphically in fig-
ure 1. The numerical values, expressed in terms of millions of barrels,
are tabulated in column 2 of table 2.
In figure 1 is shown an anomaly of the least square adjustment.
Curve b was obtained by adjusting equation IX, n = 1, on the basis
of equal weights of the observation equations written in the form
log.a + loge m — xb = log.y.
9G. B. Ricuarpson. Petroleum in 1919-1921. Mineral Resources of the United
States, 1921. Part II, pp. 253-333, May 26, 1923.
JAN. 19, 1925 VAN ORSTRAND: PRODUCTION CURVES 27
Curve c shows the result of adjusting the same equation after assign-
ing to each observation equation the theoretically correct weight,1°
y2. Following are the values of the constants:
Curveb. Weight1. log.a = — 1.4008, m = 1.2776,b = — 0.0376.
Curvec. Weighty. log.a = —5.6961,m = 4.5267,b = + 0.1609.
The first value of b is negative instead of positive as it should be.
Attention is called to this peculiar result as it occurs quite frequently
in attempting to adjust the complete data of production curves and
_may be incorrectly attributed to an error in the computation. The
defect disappears if the origin is displaced sufficiently to the right as
the following results, obtained by displacing the origin to the year
1889, readily show. ;
Weight 1. log.a = 0.19062, m = 1.45976, b = 0.10375, =v? = 73.41,
Weight y2. log.a = 0.80217, m = 1.14872, 6b = 0.08857, =u? = 65.61.
Comparison of the values of =v? shows that the best results are again
obtained by properly weighting the observation equations. Equal
weights may be assigned to observation equations written in the
form
y 4 + ylog.x dm — ay db = dy = 0 ote ues ousta rele: fe (1)
Using the preceding values of the constants obtained by assigning the
weight, y?, and solving for da, dm, and db on the basis of equality of
weights, we obtain the following results:
Weight 1. log.a = 0.76175, m = 1.16496, b = 0.08935, =x? = 65.06.
The value of =v? = 65.06 is practically the same as the former value
65.61; consequently, the two methods lead to identical results provided
the values of the constants used in the computation of dy = v in the
differential equation are a sufficiently close approximation to the cor-
rect values.
The true value of the exponent, n, in equation IX is not easily
determined. In order to obtain distinct types of equations which are
easily capable of interpretation in terms of the theory of generalized
probability, Pearson adopted the integral values, + 1, — 1, and + 2.
Fractional values of n must be admitted, however, if one desires to
100. M. Levanp. Practical least squares. First edition. p. 136, McGraw-Hill
Book Co. 1921.
28 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
minimize Yv?. Curves corresponding to various values of n are shown
in figure 2. All negative values, including the value n = — 1 for
which the curve is shown in the figure, must be excluded for the reason
that in all of these cases the first derivative vanishes at the origin.
Comparison of the values of =v? for the remaining values of n shows
that the true value falls between n = 0 andn = 0.5. Values of the
order of magnitude of n = 0.01 leads to indeterminate solutions for
the remaining constants in the equation. This result is to be expected
for in these special cases the value of the exponential factor (e-?*”)
tends to approach a constant or a straight line. In the following final
computations, the value n = 1 has been selected as a sufficiently close ”
approximation to the true value.
TABLE 3.—ConstTants FoR TABLE 2
Ix IX It I
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Lyo 329.3 329.3 329.3 329.3
Lye 337.5 337.0 336.7 336.8
Lv? 59.26 57.11 56.86 58.41
log.a 1.23530 1.46607 2.59166 2.59092
m 0.93588 0.81369 sacra
b 0.08033 0.07470 0.07470
my ere Aone 0.81373 0.76915
m2 ~ notre ane pices 15. 48968
C1 Sie yt 12.0 12.0
Ce Siac Face eter 222.0
Origin 1890 1890 1902 1902
Mode 165 10.89 —1.11 —0.93
Mode—year 1901.65 1900.89 1900.89 1901.07
The constants of the equation,
m br
y =are
are easily determined by writing the observation equations in the form
log.a + log. xm — ab = logy.
As previously stated, theoretical considerations show that each obser-
vation equation must be multiplied by the corresponding value of
yo. Using the data contained in the first two columns of Table 2,
we obtain 33 weighted observation equations of the following form:
JAN. 19, 1925 VAN ORSTRAND: PRODUCTION CURVES 29
2.4 log.a + 0.000 m — 2.46 = 2.101
3.8 log.a + 2.634 m — 7.66 = 5.073
6.4 log.a + 22.378 m — 211.2 b = 11.880,
the solution of which leads to the results summarized in the second
column of table 3. The first derivative vanishes at the points
m
b
The latter point is designated mode by Pearson, and peak by the petro-
leum geologist.
The ordinates in the preceding computation were placed at the ends
of the year intervals. Precision is generally supposed to be gained by
placing the ordinates at the mid-points instead of the end points.
The results of making the computation in this way are summarized
in table 2, columns 5, 6, and 7; and in table 3, column 3. In this
particular case, the value of =v? is reduced from 59.26 to 57.11, but it
must not be inferred that a reduction of this character will always be
obtained, for the value of Sv? is dependent also upon the point selected
for origin.
Pearson places the initial origin at any convenient point, and then
solves for c:, the point at which the curve touches the x axis. The
corresponding procedure by the method of least squares consists in
solving a differential equation similar to (1) for the differential ele-
ments da, db, de, and dm. I have not carried out the computations
for this solution. The results obtained by transferring the origin to
the point, z = 12.0, and adjusting type III on the basis of unrestricted
constants are tabulated in columns 9 and 10 of table 2. Comparison
of the values summarized in columns 3 and 4 of table 3 shows that the
two methods lead to identical results. The numerical values are
represented graphically by the curve designated, type IX, in figure 3.
Two attempts have been made to apply Pearson’s method of
moments: first, to the incomplete data (y.) tabulated in table 2,
column 2; and, second, to assumed complete data obtained by using
the observed values (y.) (column 2, table 2) from 1890 to 1923, inclu-
sive, and the computed values represented by that portion of the type
IX curve, figure 3, which extends from 1923 to the end of the curve.
The values of « inthe respective cases are «x = — 0.0123 and« =
— 0.2240, thus indicating that type I should be used in preference
to type III. Both types fail for incomplete data. Evaluation of the
constants from the so called complete data leads to the following
results:
iP —= Ce) Bhivoldy —
30 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
0.4543
L x
ee (1 r sin (1 P sc)
Mode-year = 1889.5 + 10.016 = 1889.516 Skewness = 0.838
12.1008
ll
Mean-year = 1889.5 + 24.323 = 1913.823 Le = 63.18
Standard deviation = 17.07 Lye = ozs
x 1.4749 — 0.0922x
Type lll. y = 12.42 (1 + | e
Mode-year = 1889.5 + 13.473 = 1902.973 Skewness = 0.636
Mean-year = 1889.5 + 24.323 = 1913:823 DT Se,
Standard deviation = IA LYc = 323.3
Type I appears to be preferable to type III. As the labor involved
in actually deciding the case would be very great, I have evaluated,
instead, the constants of type I, using the method of least squares.
Three computations were made, assuming for c; the arbitrary value,
12.0, and for c, the successive values, 132.0, 222.0, and 312.0. The
respective values of =v?, wherein v was carried to tenths of a unit, were
found to be 60.93, 58.41, and 57.97. The curve which represents
>v? expressed as a function of c, varies so slowly that these values alone
do not lead to an accurate determination of the desired constant.
However, the value c. = 222.0 appears to be a close approximation
to the true value, and as it does not differ greatly from the value
c. = 216.4 calculated by the method of moments, it has been used in
extending the computed curve until it reaches the 2 axis. The exten-
sion is designated type I in figure 3. Over the remaining portion of
the curve, the three types of formulae lead to almost identical results,
as may be readily verified by comparison of columns 6, 9, and 11 of
table 2. The values of Sv? tabulated in table 3 differ slightly, how-
ever, and suggest that types III or [X should be used in preference to
type I, but the agreement in the values is so close, and departures
from rigorous methods of evaluation of the constants have been so
marked, that definite conclusions can not be drawn except to say that
each of the formulas in question gives a very satisfactory representa-
tion of the data of observation.
SOME GENERAL RESULTS AND SUGGESTIONS
Table 4 summarizes the results of adjusting the petroleum produc-
tion data given by Richardson® for three states and one western
field. The constants of the equation
JAN. 19, 1925 VAN ORSTRAND: PRODUCTION CURVES 31
were evaluated by the method of least squares from weighted observa-
tion equations of the general form
- yolog.a + ylog.xm — xy.b = ylog-Yo.
The resulting values of the constants are tabulated in columns 1,
2, and 3. Column 4 contains values of r, the probable error of -an
observation of weight unity. The origins were determined by inspec-
tion. A correct determination of these points would reduce slightly
TABLE 4.—SumMary or ComMPUTATIONS FOR STATES AND FIELDS
als 5
z I a ©
STATE OR FIELD i=]
3 SB ae ESA eS as
3 5 2/88 | a) aa Aa A AIA
bo | m
=~
a
—
(3) (4) | (5) | (6) | (7) | (8) | (9) (10) | (11) | (12)
year
2)1884/12 26/513. 9/499. 4/0.029|169.11}565. 1)2!
3|187410. 72/737 . 4/699. 1/0.055|203. 74/792. 4/25.
3|1890|10. 89/337 .0\329. 3/0 .023)110.07|447 .7|2
OHIO seteteaslos-i< 0.82158}1. 48136/0.12084|1.3
Pennsylvania. il .99230/0.92101\0.08595/2.3:
West Virginia|1.46607/0.81369|0.07470/0.9.
Kern River, |
@aleancntcec: |2.42293|0.50828,0. 10208|1.34/1900) 4.98|251.5/241.3/0.042) 63.18)/312. 4|20.2
the values of r. The mode-year is obtained by addition of the modeto
the year selected as origin—thus, the mode-year or peak-year for the
state of Ohio is 1884 + 12.26 = 1896.26.
Pearson’s method of moments equalizes the observed and computed
areas when applied to complete data. The value, Sy. = 328.1,
obtained by the method of moments from the assumed complete data
of West Virginia is in close agreement with the observed value, Dyo
= 329.3; on the other hand, all of the values resulting from the appli-
cation of least squares to the particular cases discussed in this paper
are too large. The magnitude of the discrepancy is shown in column
9 of table 4. The error, for example, in computing the total produc-
tion from 1890 to 1923 inclusive, for the state of West Virginia, is 2.3
per cent of the observed total production (Zy.) for the same time inter-
val. The corresponding error resulting from an imperfect application
of the method of moments is only 0.4 per cent. Unfortunately, this
advantage is offset to a considerable extent by the failure of the method
to minimize =v*; the difference between the two values, 63.18 and 57.11,
is altogether too large. Mathematicians seem not to have settled the
question as to the precise relation between the two methods of evalua-
tion of constants. Jackson“ has shown that the methods are identical
1 Dounwam Jackson. The method of moments. Am. Math. Monthly 30: 307-3811.
1923.
32 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 2
for power series, but the relationship existing between the two methods
when applied to the more complicated functions has not been estab-
lished. It is obvious from elementary considerations that the con-
dition of maximum probability and the other condition of equalization
of observed and computed areas are not necessarily satisfied at the
PRODUCTION-MILLIONS OF BARRELS
2
5 —_—— 4 1 - — ml
iso 4 + | +
é ~ ae [
L yrax atl
qe tte oats | [ Lede |
n b =007470
ae Mode = T= \0gs3 T
FI | Mean = 38¥= 26.163 (Ongin at 1690) |
aS is Lt
a Standard Deviation eS 17.702 (Origin at mean)
5 | ate tte — =0750
50
g
25
ar Bea 9 = ey a
a ee oe oe ee a ae ee ae ee
Fig. 3. Curves showing final adjustment of types I and IX
same time. The computations summarized in columns 3 and 8
of table 1 provide a numerical proof of this proposition.
The total area of the computed curve is easily obtained from the
formula
° im — br T (m+ 1) m!
area = | aw @ dx = St el ee
9 b b
The results obtained by substitution in this formula are tabulated in
column 11 of table 4. The values, 565.3, 792.1, 448.0, and 312.7
were obtained by summation of the computed ordinates (y.). The
agreement between the two summations is all that could be desired.
JAN. 19, 1925 VAN ORSTRAND: PRODUCTION CURVES 33
As the area of the computed curve from the origin to the mode (area
abca, figure 3) can not be evaluated by integration; it is necessary to
base the calculation on the computed values of y. The areas tabulated
in column 10 represent these summations for the integral years and for
the fractional part of the year interval extending from the end of the
last integral year tothe mode. The ratio of computed peak produc-
tion to computed total production is tabulated in column 12.
The preceding results show that the simple equation (2) can be
used to represent a very considerable range of production data with a
degree of accuracy that is quite sufficient for most purposes. The
constants are easily determined by the method of least squares, and
the mode is given by the simple ratio, m/b. The computations repre-
sented by the curves in figure 3 show that equation I also gives a satis-
factory representation of the data. For other states or areas, some of
the remaining equations in the list will undoubtedly prove to be
useful.
Pearson’s types of frequency distribution promise to be of great
value in various fields of science. It may be of interest in this con-
nection to call attention to the possibility that certain sands, for
example, may be characterized by the mode, mean, and skewness (see
figure 3) of the curve which represents the distribution of grain diam-
eters, and that certain properties of the sands, such as permeability,
may be related to these characteristics. The results recently obtained
by Wightman, Trivelli, and Sheppard” on the relation of size-fre-
quency distribution of grains in photographie emulsions to sensito-
metric characteristics serve to emphasize the importance of this
suggestion.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The investigation on which this paper is based was undertaken at
the suggestion of Mr. G. B. Richardson, Geologist, of the U. 8. Geolog-
ical Survey. Two of his assistants, Miss C. M. Shanner and Mrs. L.
Boswell assisted in making some of the preliminary computations.
The remainder of the computations were made by Mr. C. R. Randall,
Junior Geophysicist of the Geological Survey. I am greatly indebted
to all of those who have thus contributed so generously and efficiently
in the preparation of my paper.
2 E. P. Wicurman, A. P. H. Trivenu, and S. E. Suepparp. The size-frequency
distribution of grains of silver halide ‘n photographic emulsions and its relations to sensi-
tometric characteristics. Abridged Scientific Publications from the Research Laboratory
of the Eastman Kodak Company 7, no. 172: 24-33. 1923.
34 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
PHYSICS.—WNote on the theory of optical dispersion. G. Brett,
Department of Terrestrial Magnetism. (Communicated by L.
A. BAuER.)
Soon after the development of the J pag = nh principle attempts
have been made by Sommerfeld and Debye! to account for optical
dispersion by studying the perturbations caused in the electronic
motion by the incident wave. These attempts, however, were unsuc-
cessful because the frequency at which the calculation showed the
reaction to be strongest proved to be the frequency of revolution of
the electron and not the absorption frequency given by the relation
AW =h»y. This difficulty was.avoided by Ladenburg and by Laden-
burg and Reiche? by disregarding the nature of the perturbations and
by postulating directly that an atom which is in a position to absorb
radiation of frequency », contributes to the refractive index of the
medium in which it is situated a term which would be contributed by
a linear oscillator of the same frequency ».. A modification of this
theory has been given by Kramers.’
In these theories the dispersion is discussed only for frequencies
which do not lie in the absorption band. For this reason the equiva-
lent classical resonator is not supposed to have any dissipation of
energy. It is the purpose of the present note to discuss how far it
is necessary to introduce the dissipation of energy into the theory.
On the classical theory a frictional term in the equations of motion
could be interpreted as due to radiation. On the quantum theory
there is no continuous radiation. Thus a frictional term introduced
directly into the equations of motion of the classical resonator would
appear, to a certain extent, illogical, and one is led to look more closely
into the possibilities of a classical resonator without a frictional term
We adopt the notation of Van Vleck, and consider an energy level s
from which it is possible for the atom to go into higher states r by
absorbing energy and to descend into lower states t by emitting energy
Taking the orientations of the atoms to be random, the polarization
for N, electrons in the state s is hypothesized by Kramers to be
IPs = 2 4 l=. 2 an Vie De Ars | N, C
Vrs”
(v,22 — v?) Vs (ve — v”)
1 Depyg, Sitzungsber. Miinchener Akademie, p. 1, 1915.
2? LADENBURG and Retcus, Naturwissenschaften 27: 584. July 6, 1923.
3H. A. Kramers, Nature, May 10, 1924, p. 673; August 30, 1924, p. 310. See
Van Vurck, Phys. Rev. 24: 344. 1924.
4J.H. Van Vurck, Phys. Rev. 24: 330. 1924.
5 Van VLECK, loc. cit. Equation 17.
gAN. 19, 1925 BREIT: THEORY OF OPTICAL DISPERSION 35
where A,_;.dé is the @ prior? probability that in the time dt an atom
which is in the state r should fall into the state s. Whether this is
the actual form or only similar to reality the essence of what follows
remains unaffected.
Let us consider one particular dispersion term.
3 A o
a rs oS
y 32 74 Vrs (vp? — v?)
Eee (1)
This means that under the action of the incident wave having an
intensity & the V; atoms which are in the state s suffer a total polariza-
tion P,; owing to their ability to be transferred to the state r. Now
it is clear that any single atom can not give a purely monochromatic
expression (1) because it does not remain in the state s indefinitely
but on account of the A.;,is bound to leave s spontaneously. There-
fore, even if one should suppose that while an atom is in the state s
it gives a polarization of the type (1), one must expect an expression
different from (1) for the observed average polarization. Expression
(1) is essentially the reaction on the wave due to a classical oscilla-
tor and for this reason we shall simplify the discussion by considering
a resonator having the equation of motion®
eo p = ue (2)
m
Here E; is the x component of the incident wave, e, m, 2 are respec-
tively the charge, mass, and resonant frequency of the resonator.
The incident wave we suppose to be of the type
E, = E.» cos(wot — 6) (3)
Let us suppose that at the time ¢ = ¢,, the atom falls into the state s
and that at the time ¢ = f, it falls out of it. It is impossible to say
(with the present state of our knowledge) what the initial conditions
of the oscillator (2) are at tf = t. Lacking better information, how-
ever, we may take the oscillator to be in a state of rest and in a position
of equilibrium at the instant of its birth. The solution of (2) with
these initial conditions is
6 While writing this note the author was unaware of the derivation given by H. A.
Lorentz (Proc. Amst. Acad. 8: 591. 1906.) in which formula (10) is derived. Inasmuch,
however, as the present note considers the question from the point of view of Fourier
integrals, and shows the manner in which only the part of the polarization synchronous
with the incident wave survives, it has not been withdrawn from publication.
36 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
€ Ex
= ih See) Is cos (€ — wots) cosQ2 (t — 4) —
a sin (€ — wo f,) sin Q @ — t1) + cos (aot — o| (4)
In the neighbourhood of w) = © this is very nearly the same as
Exo
L= Svar as E (wot — €) — cos {Q(t — tr) + wot - | (4’)
Letting
and neglecting w — 2in comparison with 2 we have in the neighbour-
hood of the absorption frequency the following Fourier Integral for x
xv (t; hi, dy) -
eB (ie —o)T sino — 97
rm (2 — wo')e 2) (cq — 109) 2 (w — )
| sine (° i) sin'(*® 5 =u)
e — (@ — wo) t) + | =
| cos (wl —
®— Wo (Op
€ — (w — wo)ti) \ dw (5)
Let us suppose that the intervals (4, t2) are distributed throughout a
long interval 7 in such a way that on the average their density is 1.
The value which concerns us is
oe
(‘x Gain dt
i =0
--)
eile, mao w@ — 0) TS “(Se +o) “sin(g— ue
~) €08 (wt — e) +
TM (Q? — wo Ww — wo 2(@i—en) a 2a —
— —2
sin(® 5 “") in(?5* r) |
= — sin(wt — ‘|
@ — Wo wo —Q
a east Me 8 an
JAN. 19, 1925 BREIT: THEORY OF OPTICAL DISPERSION 37
sin(* = em) cin(*>°r) |
= = = cos(wt — o| dw
@ — wn a —Q
Again, to within the same approximation, the wave (2) when acting
for a time -7, and analyzed into a Fourier Integral is
tog 1 Bhs sin (w = BLO
E; 2 Nor aan) cos(wt — e)dw (7)
Since 7must be thought of as >>T the band of frequencies repre-
sin (w = By : .
sented by —————— is to be thought of as infinitely more sharp
® — Wo
sin(@ —. a)"
than that represented by ——————., and consequently we may re-
OP ip:
write (6) as
T
fat GL) dt, =
4=0
e E. i. = oat sin(wo — ©) a) ee
7m (Q?2 — «,?) @® — Wo 2, 2(wo — Q) % .
A — 0
<in(“ 5 r)
oe Ati its sin —
eri (w €)
° ®O— 07
(asm
sine 2 Na sata =o
id 2 Done)
Lee ®
feet! cos(ut = a| des (8)
: *sin? x , beh
Since | is dz = 0 we may disregard the part of (8) containing
) sin(wt — e) +
to
Comparing what is left of (8) with (7) it is clear that
®— Wo
the atom acts as though during the time 7 it had a polarization
38 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
Deaceves {(r _ sin(wo — 2)T
~~ m(2 — we)
) cos(wot — ce) —
wo — 2
2 sin( “> *7)
zZ sin (wot — e)
wo — 2
(9)
If now we should suppose that the times 7 have a distribution function
~ATo T. :
of the type e SGI G) then we obtain an average value of P from
IE
(9) viz.
P 3 é Bes TT? (Q = wo) [To COS(wot = €) + (Q — 9) sin (wot ae
5 )]
m (Q+ wo) [1 + Te? (wo — &)?) co
This result for the polarization is thus obtained on the hypothesis of
intermittent actions, the number of intervals of lengths between 7
and 7 + dT beginning per second being e id =. The total number
0
of intervals started per second is therefore 1 and the average duration
of an interval is 7). Hence, if we are to compare (10) with the result
of the classical theory for a single continuously acting resonator having
a frictional term then we must divide (10) by 7>. To within the
approximations made (on performing an elementary calculation for the
classical resonator) the result is seen to be identical on the two theories.
We have thus shown that the phase change introduced by the clas-
sical frictional force may be also thought of quantitatively as due to
the interrupted action of the resonator. If the Correspondence Princi-
ple may be applied in this case and if it is to be interpreted as assign-
ing a certain similarity to the actual dispersion and the theoretical
classical dispersion then we are practically forced to abandon any other
influence than that of interrupted actions in the higher quantum states.
If, further, the width of emission and absorption lines is related to the
dispersion by the laws of the classical theory then we must think of
this width as being entirely due to the finite time of each independent
emission.
Absorptions beginning in the lowest energy level occupy a singular
position in this theory because atoms may remain in these indefinitely.
Whether they suffer phase changes in their motion while in the lowest
state is unknown but for the sake of uniformity such changes might be
hypothesized.
gAN. 19, 1925 DYAR AND SHANNON: NEW MOSQUITOES FROM BRAZIL 39
It is of interest to observe (as will be brought out in more detail
in another note) that the above theory of interruptions accounts for
the polarization of resonance radiation in weak magnetic fields in a
more satisfactory manner than the classical resonator.’
ENTOMOLOGY.—New mosquitoes from Brazil (Diptera, Culicidae).
Harrison G. Dyar and Raymonp C. SHannon, U. 8S. National
Museum. (Communicated by 8. A. RoHWER.)
Dr. J. Bequaert has placed before us for determination a collection
of mosquitoes recently made in Brazil, chiefly in the State of Ama-
zonas. Among a number of interesting species collected, the following
are hitherto undescribed.
Sabethoides glaucodaemon, new species.
Of usual size in the genus, largely purplish black; proboscis extending well
beyond the antennae, slightly longer than the abdomen; palpi small, slightly
longer than the two basal flagellar joints; eyes contiguous on lower side of
head for a greater distance than they are above; prothoracic lobes contiguous
above, their scales overlapping; rather numerous setae on anterior margin;
mesonotum with setae only above roots of wings and a few on anterior mar-
gin; spiracular sclerite with three setae; propleura with two setae; sterno-
pleura without setae; a small but dense tuft of long setae on upper posterior
corner of mesepimeron; pleurae with dense white scales below; trochanters
and base of femora yellow, the under sides of the femora white scaled basally
along the entire length of the posterior pair; abdomen compressed laterally,
dark scaled on upper half, yellowish white scaled below, the colors divided
in a straight line, though the white is illy contrasted in certain lights. Wings
normal, basal cross-vein opposite the anterior cross-vein; roots of halteres
yellow, stem and knob blackish; mid tarsi white scaled below on last four
joints except narrowly at base of second.
Type, female, no. 27744, U.S. Nat. Mus.; near San Alberto, Rio Branco,
Amazonas, Brazil, August 28, 1924 (J. Bequaert).
Nearest related to imperfectus B.-W. & B.,differing chiefly in the slightly
longer proboscis, and from both this and chloropterus Humb. in the coloration
of the abdomen.
Culex (Choeroporpa) bequaerti, new species
Rather small dark brown species; occiput with erect forked scales, all the
recumbent scales broad, mostly white in front, a patch of black ones on each
side of the middle; antennae fairly long, exceeding length of proboscis, which
is about equal to the length of abdomen; integument of mesonotum very
dark brown, scutellum somewhat paler; scales narrow, dark brown; dorsal
setae sparse but well developed; a row of pronotal setae; pleurae yellowish,
7JIn such a way we may think of the field caused by virtual oscillators as virtual in
the sense that it carries energy away only statistically but does not necessarily produce
damping of the motions induced in the virtual oscillator by the exciting field.
40 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 2
prealar setae about seven, a row of fairly strong setae along posterior margin
of sternopleura, a little weaker below; a single lower mesepimeral seta; legs
entirely dark, except for paler ventral surfaces of femora; abdomen dark
brown, with whitish scales on ventral surface at bases of segments; wing
scales broad subcostally, those on base of fork of second vein narrowly ovate
to ligulate; halteres pale, the knobs dark.
Male: palpi exceeding the proboscis by nearly the length of the last two
joints, the penultimate joint with a small whitish ring at base, otherwise
dark. Scales of mesonotum deep bronzy brown; three pronotal setae, broken
in the female type.
Hypopygium.—Side piece a little longer than hemispherical; inner division
of lobe strong, running far into the side piece, with an infuscated patch
basally, columnar, long, exceeding the outer lobe, with two strong long
hooked and distorted filaments at tip, one inserted basally of the other; outer
division small, with four stout rod-like filaments on the oblique outer aspect
and a small rounded leaf basally of them. Clasper slenderly snout-shaped,
the spine appendiculate. Tenth sternites comb-shaped, with six teeth, en-
larged at base, with only a rudiment of basal projection; first plate of meso-
some normal, the articulated plate rather narrow, emarginate on one side;
second plate curved, tip furcate, the arms short, inner pointed, outer smooth,
a long strong horn a little beyond the middle of the stem; basal hooks slender,
strongly recurved, not projecting at base; ninth tergites conically pointed,
small, setose, connected by a chitinous band.
Type, male, paratype, female, no. 27745, U. 8. Nat. Mus.; male, Sororoca,
Rio Branco, Amazonas, Brazil, September 1, 1924; female, Carmo, with other
data the same (J. Bequaert).
The preceding description was written before we had an opportunity of
examining Miss A. M. Evans’ recent paper! describing new Choeroporpa from
Brazil. Of the species there described C. (C.) thomasi Evans comes nearest
to the present form. The mesosomal plate in the two is much the same.
The comb of the tenth sternite of thomas? appears abnormal in Miss Evans’
figure; in bequaerti it consists of seven long equal teeth. The inner division
of the lobe of the side piece has a longer stem in beguaerti than in thomast,
the distance between the insertion of the two filaments being less than the
remaining basal part of the stem, whereas in the figure of thomasi the reverse
is the case. The outer division of the lobe of the side piece is differently
formed, having no inner limb in bequaerti and the leaf is inserted on the stem
basally of the other filaments, whereas in thomasz it arises between the limb
and the outer setal group.
Culex (Choeroporpa) albinensis Bonne-Wepster & Bonne
Culex (Choeroporpa) albinensis Bonne-Wepster & Bonne, Ins. Ins. Mens. 7:
173: 1920.
Culex (Choeroporpa) albinensis Dyar, Ins. Ins. Mens. 8:62. 1920.
Culex (Choeroporpa) gordoni Evans, Ann. Trop. Med. & Par. 18:369. 1924.
No difference is apparent between Miss Evans’ detailed figures of the
1 Ann. Trop. Med. and Par. 18: 363-375. 1924.
Jan. 19, 1925 DYAR AND SHANNON: NEW MOSQUITOES FROM BRAZIL 41
hypopygium of gordonz and the characters of albnensis in a slide before us.
The distribution of the species includes Paramaribo, Surinam, and Mandos,
Brazil.
Mansonia indubitans, new species
Basal antennal joints as dark as rest of antennae; antenna somewhat
shorter than length of proboscis; palpi as long as four basal flagellar joints;
proboscis on basal two-fifths with pale and dark scales intermixed, a
rather broad white ring a little beyond middle, beyond blackish, paler at
apex; mesonotum dark brown, setae normal, sparse small narrow golden
scales intermixed, with long dark scales on the sides posteriorly; a number of
pronotal setae; postspiracular setae present; sterno-pleural on posterior mar-
gin with one long stout seta midway and smaller setae on either side, mes-
epimeron with three setae near anterior margin; femora and tibiae with dark
and light scales intermixed; hind tibiae darker; first tarsal joint without basal
or apical ring, but with scattered white scales on inner surface; second and
third tarsal joints white basally, also the fourth joint of mid and hind tarsi,
remainder dark; wings dark scaled with numerous white ones intermixed,
all broad; abdomen dark, with triangular patch of white scales on first seg-
ment, apex directed forward, the venter with numerous broad white scales
intermixed. Knobs of halteres dark brown.
Type, female, paratypes, three females, no. 27746, U.S. Nat. Mus.; Belem,
Para, September 19, 1924; Carmo, Rio Branco, Amazonas, August 31, 1924;
above Santarem, July 22, 1924, Itacoatiara, Amazon River, September 15,
1924 (J. Bequaert).
Similar to étillans Walker, the palpi shorter, and with slight differences in
coloration as indicated above.
Anopheles celidopus, new species
Medium size, grayish in general appearance; occiput with erect truncate
white scales above, dark brown below, white setae and scales between eyes;
antenna shorter than palpus, scales only on the basal ‘flagellar joint; palpus
but little shorter than proboscis, with outstanding dark brown scales, a few
white ones at apices of second and third joints; prothoracic lobes with tuft of
scales above; mesonotum with pale curved hairs sparsely distributed, a little
denser anteriorly and darker on the sides; pleura with two indefinite pale
pollinose lines; legs dark with narrow white rings at apices and bases of all
but the last tarsal joints; abdomen dark, with sparse dark hairs, a few white
scales on the dorsum of the last segment, and many dark and white scales on
the venter of this segment; cerci densely scaled, mostly dark; wings with eight
more or less definite white spots on anterior margin, and numerous other
small white spots irregularly distributed over the wing; wing scales lanceo-
late; knobs of halteres dark.
Type, female, paratypes, four females, no. 27747, U.S. Nat. Mus.; Carmo,
Rio Branco, Amazonas, Brazil, September 1, 1924 (J. Bequaert).
This species does not fit well into any of the existing groups of Anopheles.
It comes nearest to Arribalzagia, but lacks the lateral scale tufts of the
abdomen.
42 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 2
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Dr. 8. G. Mortury, Associate in Middle American Archaeology, Carnegie
Institution of Washington, gave public lectures at the Institution on October
28 and December 38, on Initial excavations at Chichen Itza, Yucatan.
Under agreement with the government of Mexico, the Institution has the
privilege of excavation and archaeological study at this ancient Maya city
for a period of ten years, beginning January, 1924.
Dr. A. E. Doveuass, Director of the Steward Observatory, University of
Arizona, gave an illustrated lecture at the Carnegie Institution of Washington
on December 5, on Cycles in development of tree rings as an evidence of
climatic variation.
Two lectures on atmospheric dynamics were given at the Carnegie Insti-
tution on January 6 and 8, by Pror. V. BirrKknus, professor of hydrody.
namics at the Geophysical Institute at Bergen, Norway, and research
associate of the Institution. The first lecture was on The forces which lift
airplanes, and the second, on Problems in dynamical meteorology.
Dr. J. A. ANDERSON, of the Mt. Wilson Observatory of the Carnegie Insti-
tution, gave an illustrated lecture at the auditorium of the Institution on
January 5, under the title: An experimental method of studying high
temperatures.
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Tuesday, January 20. THe Acapemy, Anthropological Society, Archaeo-
logical Society, Biological Society (joint meeting), at the Carnegie Insti-
tution. Program: J. C. Merriam, A.Scuuttz, A. Hrpuicka. The origin
and evolution of man.
Saturday, January 24. The Philosophical Society, at the Cosmos Club.
Program: Reports from the Madrid meeting of the International Geo-
detic and Astrophysical Union. Henry Freupine Rem, Wm. Bown,
H. H. Knvreatt, L. A. Bauer.
Wednesday, January 28. The Geological Society.
Saturday, January 31. The Biological Society.
Tuesday, February 3. The Botanical Society.
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE
JOURNAL
Tue Acapemy, at the Carnegie Institution. Program: A.L.Day. The study
of earth movements in California. Annual meeting for reports of officers,
announcements of the results of the elections for 1925.
CONTENTS EA te,
ORIGINAL PAPERS
; Physies—-Note on the theory of Gpcinal ieeeraae G. BREIv....
Entomology.—New mosquitoes from Brazil (Diptera, eee
G. Dyar and Raymonp C. SHANNON.............. Pepi eles ans
fi Screnrivic\Nomms AND NEWS. 22.02.00. 0.5 ees Paet ceuee slemvaene
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
i President: ple L. pedal National Research Council.
War, Recording Secretary: W. 'D. ee Coast and Geodetie Survey,
Ry Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey. —
1. 15 Fepruary 4, 1925 . No. 3
JOURNAL
OF THE
ASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
; BOARD OF EDITORS
= E. P. Kriure W. F. Meccers ~ §. J. Maucaiy
NATIONAL MUSEOM BOREAU OF STANDARDS DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
D. F. Hewett
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L, H. Apams ‘ S. A. RonWER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIEFY ENTOMOLOGWAL SOCIETY
E, A. GoLpMAN_ G, W. Stosr
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY Fe GEOLOGICAL SOCIDTY
— RR. F. Griees J. R. SwANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WIcHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
emp MTOR ie in
= PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY ete i fh
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHENIONTHLY == “/',
xs a
BY THE > ne
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF EN! ‘e PAGDH. 1m
cu GeR 61920
Mr. Royan anp Guitrorp AY¥zs. v4
BauTmMoke, MARYLAND ‘
~
~
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
7
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
present a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington:
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or perce respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should he
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy *s followed.
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume 18... 2.05000 os0 since sss «cies cincn Oaeme slop $6.00*
Semi-monthlynumiberss..i0/5.2'.-ch sacs asc oa hie Sate nselae cs, «anise eounetaiel a ae eae -25
Monthly numbers 3! ssi 2: sicnio smpviais lea sta «seiko pieigi nicl: piety cinta fh elettee ee eee -50
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,’”’ and ~
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges—The Journat does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members ot scientific societies affiliated with the Academy.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 15 FEBRUARY 4, 1925 No. 3
BOTAN Y.—Roseoeactus, a new genus of Cactaceae. Atwin BERGER,
New York Agricultural Experiment Station, Geneva, N. Y.
(Communicated by E. P. Krzirp.)
In 1838 J. Scheidweiler described and figured a curious little cactus
collected by Galeotti near San Luis Potosi, Mexico, where it was said
to grow on porphyritic rocks at an elevation of 6500 to 7000 feet.
This cactus was unlike any of the Cactaceae known at that time.
Scheidweiler recognized it as a new genus, so far monotypic, and gave
it the name Ariocarpus. The generic name alludes to the fruit of the
Aria, though in the case of this cactus it is a soft berry with many
small seeds. The specific name which Scheidweiler gave to the plant,
retusus, referred to the shape of the tubercles, which, mistaken for
leaves, somewhat resemble the leaves of Haworthia retusa from South
Africa; indeed the whole habit of the plant is similar to this strange
little aloid succulent. Scheidweiler did not discuss the relationship
of his new genus.
The following year Lemaire described the same plant under the name
Anhalonium prismaticum. In spite of the fact that this was a later
name, it has been more commonly used than Scheidweiler’s older one.
In 1842 Lemaire added another plant to his genus Anhaloniwm, A.
kotschoubeyanum, also from San Luis Potosi, where three specimens
of it had been collected by Karwinski. Lemaire, ignored the fact
that the Karwinskian plant differed from that of Galeotti in having
the tubercles split lengthwise by a deep fissure. In general habit,
of course, the two plants were much alike, and in both the flowers
came from the center of the plant; the exact origin of the flowers
could not apparently be determined without sacrificing the very rare
plants.
Later on, in 1850, Prince Salm-Dyck published a description of
43
44. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 3
another plant, collected by Galeotti, under the name Anhaloniuwm
elongatum, and Lemaire added A. areoloswm in 1859 and A. pulvilli-
gerum in 1869. These three species, as well as several others, have
remained doubtful.
In 1856 G. Engelmann described a new plant of this relationship
collected by Schott and Bigelow near the junction of the Pecos and
the Rio Grande as Mammillaria fissurata. In 1859 he transferred this
tothe genus Anhaloniwm. Nine years later Lemaire needlessly changed
this name to A. engelmannit.
Schumann, in 1903, recognized four species of Ariocarpus, and Brit-
ton and Rose, in their recent excellent monograph of the Cactaceae,
admit three species. The different views as to the number of species
are not of great importance here; more important is the fact that in
these monographs the genus Ariocarpus is located in different sub-
tribes. While Schumann placed the genus among the Mammillarieae,
Britton and Rose place it with the Echinocactanae. This seems
strange but, as itis, they may both be right.
I was never quite satisfied with the conception of the genus as
stated by Lemaire and maintained by all subsequent writers. Scheid-
weiler’s plant with the smooth, sharply pointed tubercles, bearing
a little round areole with felt and some minute or obsolete spines near
the top, is utterly different from the others with cleft tubercles. It
was Lemaire who first included them under the same genus, his An-
halonium being only another name for the genus Artocarpus of
Scheidweiler.
Through the kindness of Dr. J. N. Rose, I was enabled to study
various living and dried plants and to compare them with Engel-
mann’s Mammillaria jfissurata from ‘Texas, cultivated at the New
York State Experiment Station. I finally have come to the con-
clusion that there are indeed two distinct genera, differing not only
in the nature of the tubercles but also, and chiefly, in the origin of the
flowers.
If we break off an old tubercle of the Texan plant or of Artocarpus
lloydit Rose and cut it longitudinally, we shall see that the fissure,
filled with grayish hairy wool, corresponds to an areole and we shall
discover in its lower part the remains of the fruit and perhaps even a
few seeds. On my living plant of Mammillaria fissurata Engelm., from
Texas, seeds are observed in many of the old areoles. The seeds are
more or less exposed and can be easily extracted; evidently in nature
they are removed by rainwater. I have shown four of them recently
and have three healthy seedlings at present. I do not know how old
FEB. 4, 1925 BERGER: ROSEOCACTUS 45
these seeds may have been. We see that these plants have one single
areole from which arise the flowers; in this character they agree with
the subtribe Echinocactanae.
The tiny areole at the top of the tubercles of the true Ariocarpus of
Scheidweiler is wholly different. It does not show any sign of having
ever produced flowers. In fact, if we break off one of the tubercles on
a dried specimen, we shall detect in the axil between the tubercles,
at the base of the tubercle but rising from the axis, the remains of the
old fruit and numerous seeds, which have been hidden there for years.
We see, therefore, that Ariocarpus, like Neomammillaria, has two
kinds of areoles, barren ones on the top of the tubercles and others
producing flower and fruit situated between the tubercles, or axillary
on the stem. There can be no doubt that Ariocarpus belongs in the
vicinity of Neomammillaria in the subtribe Coryphanthanae.
It is evident, now, that the plants hitherto included under Ario-
carpus not only are very different but may even belong to two sub-
tribes. It may be, however, that this longitudinal flower producing fis-
sure corresponds to the groove on the tubercles of the Coryphanthanae,
and that the spine-bearing areole at the top of the tubercle has become
obsolete. In this case these plants would be Coryphanthanae and not
belong to the Echinocactanae. This question can only be solved
by following the development of the plants from the seedlings, which
bear spines, to the adult state. At present the exact systematic posi-
tion must remain doubtful.
The only species which can positively be left in Ariocarpus Scheid-
weiler is A. retusus, the type species. Presumably there may be
more than one species. Schumann placed the species of Ario-
carpus proper in the subgenerus Leiothele and the two other
species, A. fisswratus and A. kotschoubeyanus in the subgenera Aego-
podothele and Chasmatothele. These latter species form a new genus,
for which I herewith propose the name, Roseocactus. I take great
pleasure in associating with these remarkable plants the name of
Dr. J. N. Rose, who has done so much for the exploration of the Mexi-
can flora and especially for the advancement of our knowledge of the
Cactaceae, and who has recently published with Dr. N. L. Britton,
Director of the New York Botanical Garden, a comprehensive mono-
graph of these plants under the auspices of the Carnegie Institution
of Washington.
Roseocactus Berger, gen. nov.
Extremely succulent plants with a thick turnip-like root and a flat or
hemispherical body with numerous, densely spirally arranged thick tubercles,
46 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 3
exhibiting only the triangular upper surface of the top, and this rough,
wrinkled or variously furrowed and deeply cleft lengthwise; cleft con-
cealing the areole filled with wool and sproducing the flower and fruit from its
lower part, the basal part of the tubercles generally quite hidden, the upper
part semiterete or flattened; ovary naked; fruit naked, finally desiccating;
seeds roundish obovate, finely rough-punctate, dull black; flowers from
very young tubercles in the slightly depressed woolly center of the plant,
surrounded by a dense mass of wool, the perianth shortly funnel-shaped, the
outer segments few, somewhat fleshy and paler, the inner perianth segments
in two rows, oblanceolate, finely dentate and cuspidate, sometimes retuse,
spreading when fully developed, usually deeply rose-colored; filaments
numerous, erect, somewhat longer than the tube; anthers small, yellow;
style overtopping the anthers, with 5 to 9 irregularly spreading stigma lobes.
The flowers open at noon in full sun and are of short duration. The
seedlings have minute white bristles in their areoles which disappear entirely
on the plants later on.
Fic. 1—Roseocactus FISSURATUS (ENGELM.) BERGER
Type species: Mammillaria fissurata Engelm.
The genus ranges from Central Mexico to Western Texas. It consists of
the following species:
Roseocactus fissuratus (Engelm.) Berger
Mammillaria fissurata Engelm. Proc. Amer. Acad. 3: 270. 1856.
Anhalonium fissuratum Engelm. Cact. Mex. Bound. 75, pl. 16. 1859.
Anhalonium engelmannii Lemaire, Cactées 42. 1868.
Ariocarpus fissuratus IK. Schumann in Engler and Prantl, Nat. Pflanzen-
fam. 3%: 195. 1894.
Coahuila, and southwestern Texas.
The triangular surface of the tubercles show a deep linear impression fol-
lowing the outer margins of the triangle.
47
ER: ROSEOCACTUS
x
BER
AMOUMTE, (SOY)
IIGAO
at
IT SOLOVOO
aASOY—'Z ‘OMT
48 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 3
“This plant is generally known as living rock. It is dull gray to brown in
color and grows on dry stony ground and, when not in flower, is easily mis-
taken for the rocks which surround it.’”!
Roseocactus lloydii (Rose) Berger
Ariocarpus lloydii Rose, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 13: 308. pl. 62. 1911.
Zacatecas. >
This species is very distinct from the preceding. In R. lloydii the tubercles
are without the linear depression along the margin, but areraised towards the
longitudinal cleft, almost as if they were compressed. Moreover, the exposed
end of the tubercles is broadly rhomboid rather than deltoid. It is of more
southern distribution than R. fissuratus.
Roseocactus kotschoubeyanus (Lemaire) Berger
Anhalonium kotschoubeyanum Lemaire, Bull. Cercle Confér. Hort. Dép.
Seine 1842.
Anhalonium sulcatum Salm-Dyck, Cact. Hort. Dyck. 1849: 5. 1850.
Anhalonium fissipedum Mony. Cat. 1846 ex Labour. Monogr. 154. 1858.
Stromatocarpus kotschubeyi Karw. ex Lem. Ill. Hort. 16: Misc. 72, 1868,
name only.
Ariocarpus sulcatus IK. Schumann, Monatschrift. f. Kakteenk. 8:9. 1897.
Ariocarpus kotschubeyanus K. Schumann in Engler and Prantl, Nat.
Pflanzenfam. Nachtr. 259. 1897.
Central Mexico.
In this, the smallest of the three species, the triangular surface of the small
tubercles is slightly rough; the flowers arise just a little below the triangular top
of the tubercle, from the areole but far away from the axil. This species has
been recently introduced rather frequently.
BOTANY.—Notes on Peruvian Urticaceae of the Marshall Field ex-
ploration... Evusworts P. Kinurp, U. 8. National Museum.
During the course of biological exploration in Central and South
America conducted recently by the Field Museum of Natural History
through the generosity of Captain Marshall Field, extensive botanical
collections have been made in Peru by Macbride and Featherstone in
1922 and by Macbride and Bryan in 1923. The material of several
families has been shared with the United States National Museum,
and the present paper is essentially a report upon the family
Urticaceae.
The South American Urticaceae have received little critical atten-
tion since the publication of Weddell’s treatment of the family in De
Candolle’s Prodromus.? Many of the species, particularly those of the
1BrirTron anD Rosg, The Cactaceae 3: 83. 1922.
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
216!: 32-235. 1869.
FEB. 4, 1925 KILLIP: URTICACEAE 49
genus Pilea, are of limited range, and study of these two collections,
as well as of other Andean material recently received by the National
Museum,* has proved of the greatest interest.
Urtica magellanica Poir. Lam. Encycl. 4: 221. 1816.
Colombia to Chile.
Matucana, 2500 meters (174). La Oroya, 3700 meters (974).
Weddell’s description of this is probably too inclusive, certain species
which are cited in synonomy probably being distinct. These two Peruvian
specimens seem to be typical U. magellanica.
Urtica ballotaefolia Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. IJ. Bot. 18: 197. 1852.
Colombia, Peru.
In clumps at base of river cliffs, Llata, 2200 meters, August, 1922 (2268).:
Recognized by its elongate androgynous spikes. A much coarser plant
than the preceding.
Urtica macbridei Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, about 1.5 meters high; stem erect, subquadrangular,.
suleate, finely pilosulous or almost glabrous near base, armed with a few
short, weak bristles, few-leaved, the internodes 6 to 20 cm. long; stipules in
pairs, subreniform, 3 to 5 mm. long, 6 to 8 mm. wide, free to base, densely
pilosulous; petioles 2 to 6 em. long, slender, widely divaricate or sub-reflexed,
pilosulous-tomentose; leaves cordate-ovate, large for the genus, 6 to 12 cm.
long, 4 to 8 cm. wide, tapering to an obtuse or acutish acumen, crenate from
base to apex, 5 to 7-nerved at base, reticulate-veined (nerves and veins
prominent beneath, paler than rest of blade), the upper surface pilosulous on
the nerves, marked with minute linear and punctiform cystoliths, bearing
numerous short inconspicuous bristles, otherwise glabrous, the under surface
densely appressed-brown hirsutulous on the nerves and veins; plants monoe-.
cious, the flower-spikes unisexual; staminate spikes borne at the upper nodes,
12 to 15 em. long, finely pilosulous, sparingly armed with weak bristles, the
flowers in dense, more or less contiguous glomerules 4 to 5 mm. thick; perianth
segments ovate, about 1 mm. long, obtuse, concave, pilosulous without;
stamens about 1.5 mm. long; pistillate spikes borne at the lower nodes, 3 to
3.5 em. long, very slender, pilosulous and armed with weak bristles, the
flowers in small, often contiguous glomerules 2 to 3 mm. thick; achenes ovate,
1 mm. long, compressed, glabrous.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum, no. 535353, collected at Mufia,
on the trail to Tambo de Vaca, Peru, altitude about 2400 meters, June 5 to
7, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 4271). A specimen of this is also in the
National Herbarium.
This species apparently has no close relatives in America. The long
staminate spikes suggest U. ballotaefolia Wedd., but the inflorescences of U.
ballotaefolia are androgynous while those of U. macbridet are unisexual.
From U. dioica and the species that have been segregated from it, U.
macbridei is at once distinguished by the shape of the leaves, length of the
floral spikes, and general habit. Urtica morifolia Poir., of the Azores, is
apparently the nearest relative of this new species.
3 See Kitire; New Urticaceae from Colombia. This Journau 13: 354-360. 1923.
50 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 3
Urera laciniata Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. III. Bot. 18: 203. 1852.
Panama to Peru.
Sunny, gravelly river flat, Pozuzo, 600 meters, June, 1923, “about 6 ft.
high” (4703). Sandy flat, La Merced, 600 meters, August, 1923, “Coarse
perennial, or woody below, to 20 ft. high. Stalks 3-5, rarely fewer. Flowers
white. Wounds from spines cause swelling.”’ (5315).
Distinguished by its deeply laciniate leaves.
Urera baccifera (L.) Gaud. in Freyc. Voy. Bot. 497. 1826.
Mexico and West Indies to Peru and Brazil.
Mufia, 2200 meters, May, 1923. ‘Tree-shrub. Inflorescence red, with
stinging pubescence. Fruits white.” (8910).
A common tree in tropical America, distinguished from other species of this
genus by the large sinuate serrations of the leaves.
Pilea microphylla (L.) Liebm. Dansk. Vid. Selsk. Skrivt. V.2: 296. 1851.
Throughout tropical America.
Steep grass-shrub slopes, Piedra Grande, station near Rio Santo Domingo,
1600 meters, May, 1923 (3690).
A common plant in various habitats in the tropics, variable in size and
habit. Leaves ovate or obovate. Many segregates have been proposed on
slight differences.
Pilea thymifolia (H. B. K.) Blume, Mus. Bot. Lugd. Bat. 2: 44. 1855.
Urtica thymifolia H. B. K. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 2:37. 1817.
Pilea globosa Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. II]. Bot. 18: 208. 1852.
Southern Colombia to Peru.
Rock-outcrop, Huanuco, 2200 meters, April, 1923 (3512). Huacachi,
station near Muna, May, 1923 (3868, 4087). In shallow soil on sunny, sloping
rocks, Matucana, 2500 meters, April-May, 1922 (447).
A plant with much the habit of the preceding, but with nearly orbicular
leaves. The name Pilea globosa has generally been applied to this species
because of the inappropriateness of the earlier name.
Pilea cordifolia Killip, sp. nov.
Slender, repent herb, leafy throughout, especially at the ends of the
branches; stems villosulous; stipules ovate, 1 to 1.5 mm. long, about 1 mm.
wide, obtuse, persistent; petioles slender, 1 to 2 mm. long; leaves cordate, up
to 4 mm. long and 5 mm. wide, obtuse at apex, entire or slightly undulate
and, when dry, often revolute at margin, inconspicuously 3-nerved, sparsely
villosulous on both surfaces, completely covered with punctiform cystoliths,
black when dry; plants monoecious; staminate flowers borne singly or in pairs
in the axils of the leaves on slender peduncles 3 to 6 mm. long, the perianth
segments narrowly ovate, 1.5 mm. long, concave, the stamens 1 mm. long;
pistillate flowers borne in a 4 to 6-flowered umbel on a slender peduncle 2 to
3 mm. long, the perianth segments unequal, the middle ovate, 0.5 mm. long,
the lateral minute; achene ovoid, 0.7 mm. long.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum, no. 535481, collected in mossy
uplands, Tambo de Vaca, Peru, altitude about 4200 meters, June 10-24,
1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 4395). A specimen of this collection is in the
U.S. National Herbarium also.
This small plant has the general appearance of P. microphylla and P.
thymifolia. The leaves, the shape of the cystoliths, and the pubescence
distinguish it readily from these two species and their close relatives.
FEB. 4, 1925 KILLIP: URTICACEAE : 51
Pilea diversifolia Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. II. Bot. 18: 212. 1852.
Peru.
In patch at edge of shady brook, Mufia, 2200 meters, May 23-June, 1923
(3984).
A much branched herb, with small leaves, those of a node both dissimilar
and unequal.
Pilea minutiflora Krause, Bot. Jahrb. Engler 37: 529. 1906.
Peru (known hitherto only from the type locality, Huacapistana, Province
of Tarma, Department of Junin).
Mossy ledges, Huariaca, 2900 meters, April, 1923, ‘Indians take as remedy
to cause forgetfulness for unrequited love.”’ (3126.)
This and the following species belong to the long-peduncled group of the
section Glabratae. Pilea minutiflora is related to P. anomala. Wedd.
Pilea dauciodora Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. IIT. 18: 223. 1852.
Costa Rica and West Indies to Peru, Bolivia, and Venezuela.
Wet bank, Huacachi, station near Mufia, about 2000 meters, May, 1923
(4117).
Low creeping herb with leaves up to 3 cm. long.
Pilea delicatula Killip, sp. nov.
Plant slender, glabrous throughout, the stem repent, at length erect, 8
to 10 em. high; stipules ovate, 1 to 1.5 mm. long, abruptly acuminate; petioles
of a node unequal, the longer 4 to 8 mm. long, the shorter 2 to 5 mm.; leaves
crowded near end of stem, those of a node similar and nearly equal, 1 to 1.5
em. long, 0.5 to 1 cm. wide, acute, rounded or subcuneate at base, dentate-
serrate (6 to 10 teeth on each side, imbricate toward apex, mucronate), 3-
nerved (lateral nerves inconspicuous, barely reaching middle of blade),
bearing on upper surface, mainly along nerves, a few minute linear cystoliths,
on the under surface numerous inconspicuous punctiform cystoliths; plants
apparently dioecious, the staminate not seen; pistillate flowers borne in
globose glomerules 3 to 4 mm. in diameter, on peduncles 4 to 10 mm. long;
perianth segments subequal, about 1 mm. long; achenes broadly ovate, about
1 mm. long and wide.
Type in the Field Museum, no. 535486, collected in a wet mossy wood,
at Tambo de Vaca, Peru, altitude 4000 meters, June 10-24, 1923, by J. F.
Macbride (no. 4400). A specimen of this collection is also in the U.S.
National Herbarium.
Resembling P. daucidora Wedd. in size and habit P. delicatula differs in
having larger and sharper teeth on the margin of the leaves, less numerous
and less conspicuous cystoliths, which are punctiform, not linear, on the
under surface of the leaves, and a more compact, globose inflorescence. This
plant also resembles P. lamioides, a species of the short-peduncled group.
Pilea tarmensis Killip, sp. nov.
Erect herb, about 60 meters high, glabrous throughout; stem terete,
striate, and woody below, subquadrangular and succulent above, leafy
toward apex, naked below; stipules small, triangular-ovate, 2 to 3 mm. long,
2 mm. wide, obtuse; petioles 1 to 2 cm. long (or longer?), those of a node
subequal or one a third longer than the other; leaves of a node
subequal and similar, ovate-elliptic, 8 to 14 cm. long, 4 to 6 cm. wide, obtuse,
auriculate at base, crenate-serrate from base to apex, 3-nerved (lateral nerves
52 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 3
extending to apex of blade), covered on both surfaces with yellowish fusiform,
linear, and punctiform cystoliths, in addition finely black-punctate beneath;
plants dioecious; staminate flowers in dense clusters in a diffuse, long-
peduncled panicle (peduncle up to 5 em. long), short-pediceled, the perianth
segments ovate, 1 mm. long, mucronulate; pistillate inflorescence not seen.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum, no. 536847, collected among
rocks in a sunny shrubby canyon, near Huacapistana, Province of Tarma,
Peru, altitude about 2800 meters, September 8, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no.
5822).
In the absence of pistillate plants it is difficult to determine the exact
relationship of this species. Weddell’s subdivision of both the section
Glabratae and the section Pubescentes on the basis of the peduncles of pistillate
inflorescence being longer or shorter than the subtending petioles is not
wholly satisfactory. Probably this species is nearest P. anomala Wedd.,
though it differs in having broader leaves with obtuse apices and blunter
teeth, and much denser flower clusters. Among the short-peduncled species
it comes nearest P. multiflora (Poir.) Wedd.
Pilea macbridei Killip, sp. nov.
Plant about 1 meter high, glabrous throughout; stem woody, terete, nearly
destitute of cystoliths, much branched above, the lower internodes 3.5 to
4 em. long, those near the ends of the branches 1.5 to 2 em.; stipules ovate,
about 5 mm. long, 4 mm. wide, rounded at apex, soon deciduous; petioles 4
to 5 mm. long, geniculate near base, densely covered with linear cystoliths;
leaves ovate or ovate-elliptic, 3 to 5 em. long, 1.5 to 2.5 em. wide, acuminate,
shallowly cordate at base, serrate from base to apex (teeth averaging 2 mm.
long), 3-nerved (nerves reaching the upper quarter of blade), faintly marked
with fine linear cystoliths above, copiously covered with minute punctiform
cystoliths and punctate with a few dark spots beneath, the upper surface
very dark green, when dry, often yellow green along the nerves; plants monoe-
cious; staminate heads cymose, about 5 mm. wide, borne 1 to 3 on slender
peduncles 2 to 3.5 em. long which arise in the axils of the upper leaves;
perianth purple-tinged, its segments minute; pistillate heads few-flowered,
about 4 mm. wide, borne in the axils of the lower leaves on peduncles 6 to 8
mm. long; perianth segments unequal, the middle ovate, 1.2 mm. long,
cucullate, the lateral barely half as long; achenes broadly ovoid or nearly
orbicular, 1 mm. long, punctulate.
Type in the Field Herbarium, no. 536217, collected at Villeabamba,
hacienda on the Rio Chinchao, Peru, altitude about 2800 meters, July 17-26,
1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 5179).
The inflorescence of this plant resembles that of P. elliptica Hook. f., of
Chile, and in Weddell’s monograph, P. macbridez would key out close to P.
elliptica. However, in general habit and shape and texture of the leaves the
two species are very distinct.
Pilea marginata Wedd. Arch. Mus. Paris9:238. 1856-57. Peru.
Rocky trail edge through montafia, Pampayacu, hacienda at mouth of Rio
Chinchao, about 1100 meters, July, 1923 (5086).
Herb, about 80 em. high, the leaves coriaceous, minutely repand-serrulate
along upper half of margins.
FEB. 4, 1925 KILLIP: URTICACEAE 53
Pilea verrucosa Killip, sp. noy.
Shrub, about 1 meter high; stem terete and glabrous below, subquad-
rangular, ferruginous and verrucose above, the internodes about 2 cm. long;
stipules small, orbicular, 2 mm. long; petioles of a node equal or one half as
long as the other, 3 to 8 mm. long; leaves ovate or subrhombic, 2 to 3.5 cm.
long, 1 to 2.5 em. wide, acute, subauriculate and often slightly asymmetrical
at base, crenate-serrate (about 15 serrations to a side), triplinerved (lateral
nerves extending to upper quarter of blade), subcoriaceous, glabrous, bearing
very minute punctiform cystoliths on both surfaces; plants monoecious;
staminate flowers borne in much-branched, densely-flowered panicles 2.5 to
4 em. long, in the axils of the upper leaves (common peduncles about 1 em.
long), subsessile, very small, barely 0.5 mm. long, the segments acute;
pistillate flowers in sessile or subsessile, densely-flowered cymes in the axils
of the middle leaves, the perianth segments subequal, 1 mm. long, concave;
achenes ovoid, 1.2 mm. long, 0.6 mm. wide, narrowed toward apex.
Type in the Field Museum, no. 536240, collected at Villeabamba, hacienda
on the Rio Chinchao, Peru, altitude about 2800 meters, July 17-26, 1923, by
J. F. Macbride (no. 5201).
In many respects this plant agrees with the description of P. suffruticosa
Krause. Both are shrubs and the upper branches apparently have the same
peculiar roughness. The leaves of P. suffruticosa, however, are ovate-elliptic,
tapering to the base, 5 to 8 em. long, and long-petioled, while in P. verrucosa
the longest leaf present is but 3.5 em. long, and the leaves are ovate and
auriculate at the base. The staminate inflorescences of P. suffruticosa are
only half as long as the leaves and the individual flowers are long-pedicellate.
In P. verrucosa the staminate inflorescences fully equal the leaves and the
flowers are subsessile.
Pilea orbiculata Killip, sp. nov.
Low succulent herb, glabrous throughout, the stem repent, rooting at
nodes, the branches erect or suberect, simple, up to 15 cm. high, longitudinally
marked with fusiform cystoliths; stipules broadly ovate, 2 mm. long, 1 mm.
wide, obtuse, connate at base, persistent; leaves crowded near apex of plant,
those of a pair similar and subequal, orbicular or broadly ovate-orbicular, 7
to 10 mm. long, 9 to 12 mm. wide (leaves near middle of stem 5 mm. long and
wide), rounded or slightly narrowing at apex, rounded or truncate at base,
mucronate-serrulate except at entire base, short-petioled (petioles 4 to
6 mm.), often cartilaginous-thickened at margin, inconspicuously 3-nerved,
faintly marked on the upper surface with minute fusiform cystoliths, almost
destitute of eystoliths beneath; plants dioecious, the staminate not seen;
pistillate flowers borne in small, densely-flowered, sessile or subsessile cymes
2 to 5 mm. long, shorter than the subtending petioles; perianth exteriorly
covered with linear cystoliths, the segments unequal, the middle segment
ovate, 5 mm. long, the lateral segments less than half as long; achene ovoid,
about 5 mm. long, compressed.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum, no. 534560, collected on mossy
ledges, Chasqui, Peru, April 10, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 3289).
The following points of difference are to be noted between this species and
its nearest relative P. pusilla Krause, both of the short-peduncled group of the
section Glabratae: P. pusilla—leaves crenate, cystoliths punctiform, petioles
8 to 12 mm. long; pistillate cymes on erect, slender peduncles, equaling or
54 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No.3
slightly longer than petioles; achenes 1.2 mm. long; P. orbiculata—leaves
mucronate-serrulate, cystoliths fusiform, petioles 4 to 6 mm. long; pistillate
cymes sessile or subsessile, shorter than petioles; achenes 0.5 mm. long.
Pilea lamioides Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. III. Bot. 18: 213. 1852.
Peru.
Rocky hillside, San Geronimo, Lima, about 150 meters, September, 1923
(5917).
Small plant, 5 to 10 em. high, with the aspect of Lamium purpureum.
Pilea pulegifolia (Poir.) Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. III. Bot. 18: 213. 1852.
Urtica pulegifolia Poir. Encycl.4: 224. 1816.
Peru.
Thickets, Chaglla, about 2800 meters, May, 1923 (8650).
Stem elongate, lax (?), much branched; leaves of a node similar but very
unequal, the larger up to 2.5 cm. long; pistillate flowers in a loosely-flowered
panicle about 8 mm. wide, the peduncles filiform, 1 to 1.5 em. long; perianth-
segments unequal, the lateral less than half as long as the middle segment;
achenes suborbicular, 1 mm. long and wide, finely papillose.
The dimension of the leaves of Macbride’s specimen is twice that given by
Weddell in his description of P. pulegifolia, but in general habit, leaf shape,
and cystolithic markings this specimen agrees well with Weddell’s diagnosis.
Weddell evidently saw only staminate plants, while Macbride’s specimens are
all pistillate.
DOUBTFUL SPECIMENS OF THE GENUS PILEA
No. 3770. Yanano,about 1800 meters, May, 1923. Coarse, erect herb,
glabrous throughout, the leaves oblong-elliptic, up to 15 em. long, 4 em.
wide, narrowing to a rather broad base (petioles stout, 2.5 mm. long).
This plant is nearest P. goudotiana Wedd., a species cultivated in Colombia,
known to me only by description. In Macbride’s specimen, the inflorescence,
probably pistillate, is not in a condition for satisfactory determination of the
plant.
No. 4826. Cushi, about 1600 meters, June, 1923. Erect succulent peren-
nial herb, ‘‘4 feet’’ high; leaves long-petioled, oblong-elliptic, up to 16 cm.
long, 6 em. wide; inflorescence undeveloped.
Nearest P. spruceana Wedd., but larger in every way.
Boehmeria aspera Wedd. Arch. Mus. Paris 9: 349, pl. 11, f. 24-28. 1856-57.
Colombia, Peru.
Steep, grass-shrub slopes, Piedra Grande, station near Rio Santo Domingo,
May, 1923 ‘‘Shrub 2-5 feet”’ (8698).
Readily recognized by its coriaceous, bullate-rugose, lanceolate leaves.
Boehmeria pavonii Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 1: 202. 1854.
Peru and Bolivia.
La Merced, about 600 meters, August, 1923. ‘Slender open shrub-tree”’
(5268).
Leaves long-acuminate, the alternate ones often dimorphic; flowers clusters
small for the genus.
FEB. 4, 1925 KILLIP: URTICACEAE 55
Boehmeria weddelliana Killip, nom. nov.
Boehmeria hirta Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 1: 202. 1854, not Boehmeria
hirta Pers. (1807).
Peru.
Sunny stream edge, Muna, about 2200 meters, May-June, 1923. “Compact
5 it. shrub” (4012).
This is apparently the only South American species of Boehmerza with
both axillary flower clusters and opposite leaves. The plant is densely
hirsute throughout.
Pouzolzia aspera Wedd. in DC. Prodr. 161: 233. 1869.
Peru and Bolivia.
Steep grassy, rocky slope, canyon of the Rio Huallaga, below Rio Santo
Domingo, about 1200 meters, June, 1923, “Dense 2-3 ft. shrub’ (4238).
Leaves lanceolate, entire, rough above, cano-tomentose beneath.
Mpyriocarpa densiflora Benth. Bot. Voy. Sulphur 169. 1844.
Colombia to Bolivia and Peru.
Forest, Cushi, about 1600 meters, June, 1923, ‘“Rather open 10 ft. shrub-
tree”’ (4838).
A second specimen, collected at La Merced, about 600 meters altitude,
August, 1923 (5454), with larger leaves rugose above, and more densely
tomentose, is the subspecies dombeyana Wedd.
The differences between Myriocarpa densiflora and M. stipitata, described
at the same time by Bentham, are very slight, and the two may not be dis-
tinct. In such case the latter name must be used, but in the absence of type
material or authenticated specimens it does not seem advisable at this time to
treat them as conspecific.
Mpyriocarpa laevigata Killip, sp. nov.
Compact tree or shrub, up to 5 meters high, glabrous, except inflorescence,
petioles, and tips of branches, the bark of the younger branches cinerous;
stipules ovate-lanceolate, 6 to 8 mm. long, 4 to 5 mm. wide, acutish; petioles
up to 5 em. long, canaliculate, appressed-pilosulous or nearly glabrous; leaves
obovate or ovate, 7 to 14 cm. long, 4 to 8 cm. wide, abruptly acuminate or acute
at apex, subcuneate or rounded at base, shallowly undulate-serrulate above
middle, subentire in lower half, triplinerved with 3 or 4 ascending secondary
nerves on each side of the mid-nerve, reticulate-veined, coriaceous, glabrous
above, beneath often densely pilose in the axils of the principal and secondary
nerves, and sparsely pilosulous along midrib, otherwise glabrous, densely
covered on both surfaces with fusiform and punctiform cystoliths, the nerves:
on under surface bearing longer, linear cystoliths; plants dioecious (?);
staminate plants not seen; pistillate inflorescences solitary or in pairs in the
axils of the leaves, twice dichotomous, the branches slender, wiry, pilosulous,
5 to 8 mm. long, the primary branches slightly shorter, the ultimate elon-
gate, 10 to 15 cm. long, averaging 3 mm. thick; sepals 2, about 0.5 mm. long,
recurved, glabrous; achene ovate-elliptic, s stipitate, ‘about 1. 5 mm. long
(including stipe), compressed, slightly hispidulous, setose at margin (setae
subequal), the body dark brown, the stipe pale.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum, no. 534987, collected at Mumia.
Peru, altitude about 2300 meters, May 23 to June 4, 1923, by J. F. Macbride
(no. 3925). A specimen of this collection is also in the National Herbarium..
56 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 3
Additional specimens examined:
Peru: Yanano, about 1800 meters, Macbride 3783. Cueva Grande, near
Pozuzo, about 1100 meters, Macbride 4811.
The smooth, coriaceous, nearly entire leaves distinguish this from the other
Peruvian species of Myriocarpa. The foliage more nearly resembles that of
M. heterostachys Donn. Smith, a plant of Guatemala, though in that species
the leaves are rather long-attenuate at the apex, thinner, and the cystolithic
markings are different.
Phenax hirtus minor Wedd. in DC. Prodr. 161: 235°. 1869.
eee urticaefolius minor Wedd. Arch. Mus. Paris 9: 496. 1856-57.
eru.
Shrubby canyon side, Matucana, about 2500 meters, March, 1923, ‘Loosely
branched shrub, about 4 ft. Flowers pink” (2883). Brook margin, Matu-
cana, April-May, 1922, ‘Woody below. Leaves glossy above.” (233.)
Leaves only 1.5 to 3 cm. long; otherwise apparently the same as typical
P. hirtus Sw., a common tropical plant.
Phenax laevigatus Wedd. Ann. Sci. Nat. 1V. Bot.4: 192. 1854.
Colombia to Peru.
Stream-canyon’ thicket, Mito, about 2700 meters, July, 1922, “To 4 ft.,
erect; branches spreading, ‘spray-like’’”’ (1503). Huacachi, station near
Muna, 2000 meters, May, 1923 (4153).
Leaves coriaceous, glabrous except, occasionally, on the nerves beneath.
Phenax laxiflorus Wedd. Arch. Mus. Paris 9: 499. 1856-57.
Peru.
Mufia, along trial to Tambo de Vaca, about 2500 meters, June, 1923 (4282).
Readily recognized by the loosely-flowered clusters. Usually more densely
pubescent than the other Peruvian species of Phenaz.
Parietaria debilis Forst. Fl. Ins. Austr. Prodr. 73. 1786.
Widely distributed in both hemispheres, from sea level to high altitudes.
In moist soil on rock ledges of canyon, Matucana, about 2500 meters, April—
May, 1922, “Stems clinging to face of rock,” (262). Upper slopes of seaside
hills, Chorrillos, near Lima, September, 1923 (5870). Sandy loams along
the sea, Turin, Lima, about 60 meters, September, 1923 (5968).
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
909TH MEETING
The 909th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club Saturday, November 29,
1924, with President Hazarp in the chair and 55 persons in attendance.
Program: W. W. Cosutentz: The measurement of planetary tenvperatures.
(llustrated.) ;
Author’s abstract: In 1921 a new method was used at the Lowell Observa-
tory, Flagstaff, Arizona, for determining the temperature of stars. The
novelty of the method consisted in separating the radiation into spectral
components by means of transmission screens, and measuring the energy by
means of stellar thermocouples similar to those used at the Lick Observatory,
Mt. Hamilton, California, in 1914.
FEB. 4, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 57
The results obtained were so promising that in 1922 the Lowell Observa-
tory provided financial means for testing the device on the planets, pre-
liminary to the crucial work at the opposition of Mars in 1924. Unfortu-
nately, owing to eye-strain, only a few nights could be devoted to the tests.
However, the results were entirely successful, indicating that the equatorial
temperature of Mars was high, perhaps 10° to 20°C.
In estimating planetary temperatures the usual procedure is to consider
the intensity of insolation on the planet, the albedo of the planet, and various
other factors. The measurements, which were made in 1922, showed that
while the water cell is an excellent means for testing the presence of planetary
radiation, it was desirable to try out a new method which would permit the
correlation of the spectral distribution of the planetary radiation with that
of a black body radiator. This is possible by separating the planetary radia-
tion into spectral components by means of transmission screens as used in
1921.
The outstanding features of this investigation are the results of the meas-
urements on selected regions on the surface of Venus and of Mars. The sur-
face of the former planet is hidden by clouds, and its period of rotation is
undetermined. Hence, the thermocouple radiometer appears to be a means
of obtaining further information on this question.
It was found that not only does the illuminated crescent show the presence
of considerable planetary radiation, but the unilluminated part of the disk
also emits a large amount of infra red rays. This raises the question whether
the radiation from the dark side of the planet is owing to a rapid rotation,
say 1 to 10 days.
Radiometric measurements were made on Mars on 24 nights under a wide
range of instrumental and meteorological conditions. These measurements
show that the bright regions of Mars are cooler than the dark regions, that
the sunrise side of the planet is at a lower temperature than the side exposed
to the afternoon sun, and that the polar regions are intensely cold.
An estimate of the temperature of the irradiated equatorial surface of
Mars was obtained by four methods, as follows: (1) By comparison with
terrestrial conditions, Martian temperatures similar to those found on the
Earth were inferred; (2) By direct comparison of the spectral components of
the planetary radiation from Mars and the Moon, noonday temperatures
were obtained ranging from 5°C. for the bright equatorial region to 20°C.
for the adjacent dark regions; (3) By comparison of the observed spectral
components of the planetary radiation from Mars with similar data calculated
from the laws of spectral radiation of a black body, temperatures were ob-
tained ranging from — 15°C. for the bright equatorial regions to 12°C. for the
adjoining dark regions; and (4) By applying the fourth-power law of total
radiation to the water-cell transmissions of isolated regions, temperatures up
to 15°C. were calculated.
As a whole, these temperature estimates are in harmony with visual ob-
servations on Mars. The measurements show that the noonday tempera-
ture of the equatorial surface of Mars at perihelion is not unlike that of a cool
bright day on the Earth, with temperatures ranging from 5° to 15°C., or 40°
to 60°F.
The temperature estimates of the other planets are as follows: Mercury 75
to 100°C.; the upper limiting temperatures of the outer atmospheres of
Venus, Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus, —60°, —75°, —65°, and —75°C. re-
spectively; and the unillumininated face of the Moon —75°C. to —200°C.
58 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 3
W. D. Coxitins: Temperatures of air and water. The paper was illustrated
with lantern slides and diagrams, and was discussed by Messrs. SosMAN,
Humpureys, and L. H. Apams.
Author’s abstract: The large number of published measurements of earth
temperatures throughout the world indicate that at depths of from 30 to 60
feet the temperature at any place is practically constant throughout the year.
Computations by C. E. Van Orstrand from many temperature measure-
ments at different depths lead to the conclusion that in general this constant
temperature is about 2°F. higher than the mean annual air temperature at the
same place. A number of different results have been published for the rate of
increase of temperature with depth. A committee of the British Association
for the Advancement of Science reported in 1882 the selection of 1°F. for 64
feet of depth as the most probable average rate. Thus from the air tempera-
ture it is possible to estimate closely the probable temperature of water ob-
tainable from wells of any depth.
Measurements of surface water temperatures at 23 places in the United
States, published in United States Geological Survey Water-Supply Paper
520-f, show a reasonably close agreement between the mean monthly water
temperature and the mean monthly air temperature. In the warmer months
the agreement is somewhat better than in winter. The mean monthly air
temperature at any place may be taken as the approximate temperature of
surface water during the month, but the agreement with the actual tempera-
ture is not likely to be as close as the agreement between the calculated and
actual temperature of ground water.
910TH MEETING
The 910th meeting, being the 54th annual meeting, was held at the Cosmos
Club Saturday, December 13, 1924, with President Hazarp in the chair and
35 persons present.
The report of the Treasurer showed total receipts, $2015.12; disburse-
ments, $1074.04, leaving a balance of $941.08. The report of the Secretaries
showed that 18 meetings were held during the year, several in conjunction
with other societies.
The following officers were elected for the ensuing year: President, J. A.
FieminG; Vice-presidents, J. P. Autt and W. Bowin; Treasurer, P. R. HEY;
Recording Secretary, H. A. Marmrr; Members-at-Large, General Committee,
L. B. Tuckerman and H.E. Merwin.
Regular program: N. H. Hecx: Application of force diagrams to compass
compensation. The paper was illustrated with lantern slides and was dis-
cussed by Messrs. Curtis, HawkKESworRTH, PAWLING, FRENCH, and AULT.
Author’s abstract: Mariners of the Middle Ages did not recognize the need
for compass compensation, but with the arrival of the iron steamship, about
1850, and later the steel ship, the matter became of great importance. His-
tory is cited to explain why this old subject is revived. Early investigators
developed a mathematical solution which was improved by the British Navy
and by Diehl and Muir for the American Navy. About 1910 there was a
reaction against the mathematical treatment for several reasons, including:
Realization that sub-permanent magnetism of a ship does not change accord-
ing to fixed laws and may be affected by electrical machinery; magnetic ob-
servations at sea by the Coast and Geodetic Survey showed that variations
in ships’ magnetism made it difficult to get accurate observations and this led
to the use by the Carnegie Institution of the “Galilee,” and the building of
the “Carnegie,” a non-magnetic ship; the use of the gyro compass on large
FEB. 4, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 59
vessels has removed some of the more difficult problems. A reaction accord-
ingly followed and recent manuals give a very simple treatment, in some
cases the efforts to simplify lead to fallacies. This paper describes a rela-
tively simple treatment which is intended to give a picture of the forces
involved.
The old method described nine bars as representing the ship’s magnetism;
in any case, all the forces at the compass center can be resolved into compo-
nents in three directions, but this statement presents no picture that can be
visualized.
Starting with an iron filing diagram of a bar magnet, the directions of forces
at points in the field corresponding to that of the compass aboard the ship
are indicated. Magnetism of the ship is considered as represented by three
magnets symmetrically placed with respect to the ship, there being two such
sets of magnets, one for permanent and one for temporary magnetism.
Permanent magnetism. The forces due to the three magnets can be
readily visualized, and the simple force diagram gives the resultant direction
of the compass needle, taking into account the Earth’s field.
Temporary magnetism. This is a little more difficult to visualize. By
means of iron filing diagrams due to a soft iron bar making different angles
with a uniform field, it is seen that the field of the bar may be considered as
identical in form with that of a magnet of the same shape, but that the force
in the field changes with the direction of the bar, becoming zero when at right
angles to the direction of the uniform field. A simple force diagram shows
how the force normal to the meridian which causes the deviation may be
represented. From this an extremely simple diagram is developed for show-
ing the variation of this force with the heading of the vessel.
Compensation is briefly discussed, and the action of the spheres in compen-
sating temporary magnetism is demonstrated.
The application of this method, and discussion of the heeling error affords
a test of its value.
J. P. Autt, Recording Secretary. -
THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY
669TH MEETING
The 669th meeting of the Biological Society was held in the lecture hall
of the Cosmos Club, October 25, 1924, at 8:10 p.m., with President GIDLEY
in the chair and 72 persons present.
F. C. Lrxcotn reported that the Authors’ Index to the Proceedings of the
Biological Society had been issued, and exhibited copies.
S. F. Biaxe reported that during the past summer he had observed in
Connecticut a small snapping turtle which, when irritated by a stick, slowly
raised the posterior portion of its body and then jumped forward about an
inch, at the same time shooting out its head.
Program: VERNON Batter: Recent observations in Glacier National Park
(illustrated). The speaker compared the present numbers of the animals
in the park with observations made some years ago. Careful estimates of the
numbers of the larger animals in the park made by park officials for several
years provide a basis for future determination of increase or decrease, but
unfortunately there are few data for comparison from past years. From his
study of animal life in the park in 1917 and 1918, the speaker is confident
that there has been a noticeable increase in mountain goat, bighorn and deer,
60 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 3
a slight increase in elk and moose, and a notable decrease in predatory ani-
mals, such as coyotes, wolves, and mountain lions. With reasonable control
of these harmful species, the wild life of the park should go on increasing until
there is a constant overflow into surrounding country, much of which is well
adapted to game.
One of the most delightful features of the animal life in the park is its tame-
ness. White goats, bighorns, and deer are easily photographed at close
range, and the great hoary marmots, Columbia ground squirrels, and chip-
munks would often take food from the hand. Beaver, porcupines, snowshoe
rabbits, squirrels, martens, mink, weasels, and conies were often seen at
close range, and the birds of the park were equally confident and unafraid.
Colored lantern slides were shown of some of the wildflower gardens and
picturesque scenery of the park, as well as of many of the mammals and a few
of the birds.
P. J. BALDENSPERGER, Nice, France: Palestine and its fauna (illustrated).
The speaker described the country and its inhabitants, and illustrated both
the scenery and the people with numerous lantern slides, many of which
showed places of religious interest. Mention was made of some of the more
important birds and animals, and the decrease in wild life which has followed
the deforestation of the country during the war was particularly emphasized.
In conclusion the speaker, who is a practical bee-keeper, showed views of the
bee hives used in Palestine and described some of his experiences with bees.
670TH MEETING
The 670th meeting was held November 8, 1924, at 8 p.m., with President
Giwv-tey in the chair and 53 persons present.
L. O. Howarp read the following resolution regarding the recent death of
Nep Ho.tutstTer, an ex-president of the Biological Society:
Wuereas, the Biological Society of Washington has learned with profound regret
of the death of one of its ex-presidents Ned Hollister, Superintendent of the National
Zoological Park, therefore be it
Resolved that this Society place on record an expression of the deep loss that it has
suffered through the death of a most valued member, former editor and president; and
of its appreciation of his ability as a zoologist, and especially of his character and worth
as a man,
Resolved, further, that a copy of this resolution be spread upon the minutes of the
Society and that a copy be transmitted by the secretary to the bereaved family.—
L. O. Howarp, T. 8S. Paumer, H. C. OBeRHOLSER, COMMITTEE.
H. C. OBERHOLSER spoke of Mr. Hotuister’s work as editor of the “‘Jour-
nal of Mammalogy”’ and of the educational work he accomplished as director
of the National Zoological Park, as well as of his worth as a man.
T. H. Scuerrer, Biological Survey: Mountain beavers and moles in the
Puget Sound country (illustrated)—The peculiar little animal called the
mountain beaver (A plodontia) is to be found only on the Pacific coast of North
America. It resembles a tailless muskrat in size and general appearance,
but is not aquatic. It is particularly abundant in the edges of the forests and
on the old burns and cut-over lands of the Puget Sound country, where it
burrows extensively among the stumps and logs and in the slopes of the many
gulches that dissect the bench lands. The food of the mountain beaver
includes a great variety of herbs, and cuttings of both deciduous and evergreen
trees, shrubs, and vines. The animal is not arboreal in habit, but readily
climbs shrubs and saplings to a height of several feet, cutting off the small
branches and leaving short stubs to serve as the rounds of its ladder. Small
FEB. 4, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 61
piles of the green stuff it uses for food are cached temporarily at the entrances
of its burrows, or in exposed situations where they are sometimes left to dry.
The animal is active throughout the year. Skins of the mountain beaver
were used by the Indians for making garments and robes, but have not been
utilized by our modern furriers.
Of the two species of mole to be found in our Pacific Coast States, the
Townsend mole (Scapanus townsend) is the largest on the continent and is
more abundant locally than any species occurring elsewhere. This abun-
. dance is due, in a large degree, to the fertile, well watered soil of the North-
west Coast, which teems with earthworms, the principal food of the mole.
The Townsend mole burrows more deeply than the eastern mole and heaps
up unsightly mounds of earth in fields, parks, and on lawns. From the stand-
point of food habits it is more or less neutral in its effects on our interests, but
becomes an intolerable nuisance in gardens, parks, lawns, and meadows, be-
cause of its burrowing habits. The animal may be readily controlled by the
use of properly constructed traps, but by no other practicable method. The
fur of the Townsend mole is of excellent quality and is coming into use in the
trade. The skins are larger than those imported from Europe as Scotch mole
and Dutch mole. (Author’s abstract.)
G. A. Dean, Bureau of Entomology: The European corn borer in America
Gllustrated)—The European corn borer (Pyrausta nubdlalis Hiibner), now
firmly established in the United States and Canada, probably gained en-
trance into America in 1909 or 1910 in broom corn imported from Hungary
and Italy, but was first reported in the United States in 1917, from near Bos-
ton. In 1919 it was discovered in New York and northwestern Pennsylvania,
and in 1920 it was reported from Ontario. In 1921 a slight infestation was
found throughout a narrow strip of territory bordering on Lake Erie in Penn-
sylvania, Ohio, and Michigan. The survey for 1924 has disclosed increases
of 150 to 300 per cent in areas infested in Ohio, Michigan, and Pennsylvania.
New areas have been found in Staten Island, Long Island and Connecticut.
In Canada, the principal dent corn growing areas in Essex and Kent
Counties, Ontario, are now so seriously infested as to cause considerable com-
mercial injury. The prevalence of moisture, heavy dews, and high humidity
’ during the incubation of the eggs and during the early or first instar stage of
the larvae in 1924 apparently caused very little mortality of the eggs and per-
mitted large numbers of the larvae to become established in the tassels,
leaves, stalks, and ears of the corn plants.
In Massachusetts there has been not only a very marked decrease in the
intensity of infestation, but also very little spread in the infestation. This
decrease apparently is due principally to the adverse climatic conditions which
prevailed during the summer of 1923. The thorough clean-up of fields, gar-
dens, and small weed areas and the fall plowing of practically 90 per cent of
the cultivated fields probably also contributed considerably to the decrease
in the infestation. In eastern New York the infestation remains about the
same, that is, there has been very little spread and very little increase in the
intensity of the infestation.
Since the insect in the short time that it has been found in America has been
found infesting nearly two hundred species of plants, including many valuable
garden and farm crops, it is considered an insect of major importance. En-
tomologists and agronomists are convinced of its tremendous potentiality and
of what may be expected when it once becomes established throughout the
corn belt and has the benefit of one or two years of favorable climatic condi-
tions. (Author’s abstract.)
62 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 3
F. C. Lrycoin, Biological Survey: Results of bird banding in Europe (illus-
trated).—Bird banding in Europe has been practiced since 1899 when the
first experimental work was done by Prof. H. C. C. Mortensen of Viborg,
Denmark, followed by organized investigations in Germany, Holland, Hun-
gary, Sweden, Scotland, and England.
The records available trace the migration of the White Stork (Ciconia
ciconia) south through the valleys of the Elbe and Oder Rivers, across the
Carpathian Mountains, Asia Minor, and Syria to the delta of the Nile
River. This stream is then followed to its headwaters and on south to the
Transvaal, Orange Free State and Cape Colony where the birds spend the
winter. Another route is to the southwest through the valley of the Rhone
River to the Mediterranean coasts of France and Spain and also to Morocco.
It is not believed that the flight by this route (which is obviously of lesser
importance) is continued much south of the African coast as the stork evi-
dently dislikes the long flights which would be necessary to cross the Sahara
Desert. A few young birds have returned in later years to within a short
distance of their original home. The oldest bird, as revealed by banded
birds, was eleven years old when killed.
The Pintail (Dafila a. acuta) breeds in northern Europe, and a large number
were banded by Prof. Mortensen at the island of Fano, off the west coast of
Denmark. Many of these were subsequently recovered, some as far north
as Lapland, Finland, and the coast of the White Sea. The winter range is
shown to extend south through the valley of the Rhine River and along the
Bay of Biscay to the northern shores of the Mediterranean and Adriatic seas.
One bird was taken far in the interior, east of the Ural Mountains.
Professor Mortensen also banded a large number of European Teal (Nettion
crecca), another duck breeding to about 70° north. The winter quarters are
confined largely to the regions included between the isotherms of 4° and 6°C.
for January. These areas include almost all of Ireland, the south and west
coasts of England, the western part of France between the Loire and Gironde
Rivers, northern Italy and Jugo-Slavia. The fall migration to winter quar-
ters is probably via the coastwise route.
The Black-headed Gull (Larus ridibundus) breeds throughout Europe and
Asia to Kamchatka, but the birds banded were mainly from colonies along the ~
Baltic coasts and in Hungary. The fall migration of these birds follows the
coast line south to the Mediterranean Sea, a few crossing to the African coast.
From this main route there are several offshoots, the principal river valleys
being followed by different quotas. At times cross-country flights of con-
siderable length are undertaken and several ranges of mountains are regularly
crossed. Two gulls, banded at the German station of Rossitten on the Baltic
Sea, have been recovered in American waters; one near Bridgetown, island of
Barbados, British West Indies, and the other near Vera Cruz, Bay of
Campeche, Mexico.
European Swallows (Hirundo r. rustica) have yielded a few interesting
returns. Seven birds banded in England were recovered in South Africa,
over 7,000 miles from the point of banding. Six of these were young birds in
their first season. The route taken is not definitely indicated. Fifteen
Hungarian birds returned to the point of banding, two yielding three succes-
sive returns each. Corroborative evidence of the strength of the homing
instinct in these birds is furnished by records from England and Scotland.
FEB. 4, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 63
671ST MEETING
The 671st meeting was held November 22, 1924, at 8:00 p.m., with Presi-
dent GIpLEY in the chair and 98 persons present. New members elected:
Dr. ALBERT L. Barrows, C. 8. East, ARTHUR LOVERIDGE.
T. S. PALMER gave a report of the recent A. O. U. meeting at Pittsburgh,
referring especially to the moving pictures of birds and exhibition of bird
paintings. He also reported that one of his box turtles, after going into hiber-
nation in October, had appeared again but was not active. S. F. Buaxs
stated that a small Bell’s turtle which he had in captivity had reappeared
from the mud during the warm days in early November, but had gone into the
mud again at the time of the cold spell.
Vernon BariEy commented on the delicious quality of some wild rice
received from C. E. CHamptuiss, and discussed the hibernation of certain
mammals.
M. K. Brapy exhibited some living specimens of two rare Japanese sala-
manders, and commented on their characters.
S. F. Buaks reported that the series of books containing the minutes of
the Council meetings of the Society is now complete, but that the first book
of minutes for the open meetings has not been found.
A. WerTmore reported that a hen pheasant appeared in his yard at Takoma
Park on November 9.
JOSEPH GRINNELL: Faunal changes now taking place in California.—The
paper covers the faunal changes that have taken place since the coming of the
white man to California. The principal factors controlling the number of
animals are food supply, temporary refuges (cover), proper breeding places,
and suitable climate. All these factors of the environment are affected by the
following modifications, due to man: deforestation, afforestation, clearing
of brush land, irrigation, cultivation of grassy plains, drainage of lakes and
swamps, formation of reservoirs and canals, and grazing. Asa result of these
modifications, some species have been reduced in numbers, some have in-
creased (linnet), some have been exterminated (kit fox, last recorded in 1903),
and some have been added from adjacent territory (bobolink). Irrigation
has undoubtedly increased the number of individuals, but the species are
fewer, owing to the extermination of many.
In the Imperial Valley, where the Colorado River was diverted from its
course, the introduction of water into desert areas has brought with it the
cotton rat, muskrat, and Bermuda grass, the last closely followed by the pock-
et gopher. Some desert rodents have been eliminated in the flooded regions.
Examples of extermination are afforded by several rodents of very local dis-
tribution inhabiting regions where the environment has been greatly changed
by the advent of man.
New arrivals are the opposum, which was introduced by negro caterers at
San Jose in 1910 and is now found abundantly in the lowlands from Sacra-
mento to Riverside, and the roof rat (Rattus alexandrinus), which is making
its way along streams into remote places in the mountains.
In discussion, T. S. Parmer stated that the important date in a study of
changed conditions in California is that of the coming of railroads. In reply,
Dr. Grinnell stated that he considered the introduction of automobiles of more
importance in changing wild conditions. A. WETMORE, commenting on Dr.
Grinnell’s statement that the eucalyptus groves in California were practically
devoid of wild life, stated that he had found conditions much the same in the
eucalyptus groves of Argentina. Almost the only native bird that inhabits
64 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 15, No. 3
them there is a parrakeet, which builds very large nests. A species of teal
lays its eggs in the nests built by the parrakeet. Within five miles of Monte-
video the only conspicuous plants and birds were all introduced—eucalyptus,
tamarix, and the English sparrow.
The paper was also discussed by M. K. Brapy and J. W. Grpuey, who re-
ferred to the destructive effects of grazing in the northwestern states.
H. V. Haruan: The plains and hills of the Punjab and Kashmir (illustrated).
—Central and northwest India are regions of low rainfall. Much of the
Punjab is desert. In the drier sections of the Punjab several million acres
have recently been brought under irrigation. Cotton and wheat are the basic
crops. The Mogul dynasty did much to promote horticulture and there are
still remains of their work visible in the gardens of the tombs of several of
their emperors.
The Vale of Kashmir is a picturesque horticultural valley. The charac-
teristic trees of the valley are oriental plane, mulberry, white-barked poplar,
and willow. Berries, apricots, apples, and grapes are grown extensively.
The grain crops are rice, wheat, barley, and corn. There are remains of eleven
Mogul gardens several of which are still in good condition. They usually
contain plane trees several centuries old. The irrigation systems are the
original ones installed by the Moguls. Market gardens are grown in beds of
turf floated on shallow lakes. (Author’s abstract.)
672D MEETING
The 672d regular and 45th annual meeting of the Biological Society was
held in the lecture hall of the Cosmos Club December 6, 1924, at 8:15 p.m.,
with President GipLey in the chair and 22 persons present. The Annual
Reports of the Corresponding Secretary, Recording Secretary, Treasurer, and
Committee on Publications were read. The following officers were then
elected: President, S. A. Ronwer; Vice Presidents, H. C. OBERHOLSER, E. A.
GotpMaAN, A. Wermorg, C. E. Cuamsuiss; Recording Secretary, S. F. BLAKE;
Corresponding Secretary, T. E. SNypER; Treasurer, F. C. Lincotn; Members of
Council, H. H. T. Jackson, H. C. Futter, W. R. Maxon, C. W. Stiuus,
A. A. Doourrrie. The President-elect was nominated as Vice-President
of the Washington Academy of Sciences to represent the Biological Society.
8. F. Brake, Recording Secretary.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
ALDEN Sampson, formerly a game preserve expert with the Biological Sur-
vey, died in New York City January 5. Mr. Sampson was widely known as
an explorer and traveler. He was a member of the Biological and Arch-
aeological Societies.
Dr. Ates Hrpiicka was recently elected President of the American An-
thropological Society, succeeding Dr. WALTER Hovueu.
The National Museum has received important ethnological, zoological and
botanical material from the National Geographic Society, obtained by the
Society’s recent expedition to China, headed by F. R. Wutsin.
_ ANNOUNCEMENT OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
: Thursday, February 5. The Entomological Society.
_ Saturday, February 7. The Philosophical Society, at the Cosmos Club.
_ Program: W. P. Wuire: Some scientific aspects of the game of golf. H. L.
_ _Drypen: The Flettner rotor ship.
- Thursday, February 12. The Chemical Society.
_ Saturday, February 14. The Biological Society.
_ Tuesday, February 17. The Anthropological Society.
The Helminthological Society.
ernest, February-19. THe ACADEMY.
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE
JOURNAL
a Saturday, January 17. The Biological Society. A.B. Howewu: Mice that live in trees.
: R. F. Grices: Scientific results of the Katmai expeditions.
CONTENTS
ia ORIGINAL PAPERS
‘adh Botany.—Roseocaclus, a new genus of Cactaceae. ALWIN Brercer
; Botany.—Notes on Urticaceae of the Marshall Field Peruvian explorat
i WORTH. P. IRTOUIP 2 csp sg-slomesceien ser sas oo ears ee ae
PROCEEDINGS
4
\Screntiric Norms AND NBWS..-..2.650.c0000stegeeceretorciioasee enter
- | OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY —
President: Vernon L. Ketoca, National Research Council.
Corresponding Secretary: Francts B. Stspen, Bureau of Stan
- Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Barve
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Vol. 15 Frsruary 19, 1925 No. 4
- JOURNAL«,,_
“ OF THE
i ; 4
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
E, P. Kiuure D. F. Hewerr S. J. Maucuiy
NATIONAL MUBEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L, H. Apams S. A. RonwER
PHILOS0PHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GoLDMAN G. W. StosE
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIDTY
R, F. Grices J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royat anp GuILrorp AVES.
BattTmore, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAt is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures -
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume 18.........0c0secceeecececccccccccecess $6.00*
Semi-monthly: numbers 25.272 wie iar rain cl el aelom uy o clase aie wleteigi we lelatstatammions -25
Monthly nivimbers yoo oso ia ats eisthnitstets wiaialer steve laisvotateveratoneeistais caters Maete te eieeaian -50
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges—The JourNat does not exchange with other publications. ~
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members ot scientific societies affiliated with the Academy.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vor. 15 Fresruary 19, 1925 No. 4
BOTANY .—Notes on the taxonomy of American and Mexican Upland
cottons. FreperRiIcK L. Lewron, U. 8. National Museum.
A testimony to the difficulties in the way of assigning the proper
botanical names to the many cultivated species and varieties of cotton
is seen in the fact that students of the taxonomy of the genus Gossypium
are not in accord as to the proper name which should be assigned to the
group of varieties yielding the bulk of our annual crop of Upland
cotton amounting to millions of bales.
The name most commonly accepted for this important crop plant is
Gossypium hirsutum 1., the first American species to be recognized by
Linnaeus as distinct from Old World cottons. Some students of this
question, like Fletcher and Watt, after examining the Linnean speci-
mens, noting that his name hirsutwm was intended to apply to a cotton
plant having seeds with green fuzz and a flower with red spots on the
bases of the petals, have restricted the name G. hirsutum to a small
group of varieties of Upland cotton having the above named char-
acteristics; and have assigned other names to the bulk of the culti-
vated forms yielding American Upland Cotton. Sir George Watt
uses G. mexicanum Todaro to cover ‘Mexican cotton and the bulk of
the Upland Americans;’’! while Fletcher believes G. siamense Tenore
to be the true name of our plant.?. Before trying to decide between
these two views let us examine the validity of the arguments pre-
sented by the above writers in advocating the names proposed by
them.
‘Watt, Sir George: The wild and cultivated cotton plants of the world, pp. 226-244.
Bae F.: Botany and origin of American Upland cotton, Cairo Sci. Journ.
3: 264-266. 1909.
65
66 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 4
MEXICAN UPLAND COTTON NOT GOSSYPIUM MEXICANUM
The bulk of the commercial cotton crop of Mexico is yielded by a species
of Gossypiwm for which as yet we have no adequate name. To supply this
deficiency, Sir George Watt makes use of an apparently appropriate specific
name, @. mexicanum Todaro.
Todaro’s name does not seem to have been taken up by any other student
of the cottons until used by Watt in 1910. The latter does not cite any of
Todaro’s actual specimens, nor indeed any specimens from Mexico, but
apparently after deciding to apply G. mexicanum to the broad-leaved Mexican
cottons of the general upland type he finds specimens from all over the world
in the herbaria of Kew, British Museum, Geneva, and Calcutta, which he
assigns to this species. Before accepting Watt’s identification of ‘“Mexican
cotton” let us see if we can determine what kind of a cotton plant was in the
mind of Agostino Todaro when he proposed the name Gossypiwm mexicanum.
A brief description in Latin under this name was first published in 1868 in the
list of seeds which ripened in 1867 in the Royal Botanic Garden at Palermo,
Sicily; later a fuller and more detailed description was presented by Todaro
in his monograph of the genus Gossypium, published in 1878. This deserip-
tion was strengthened by an excellent colored plate, and shows a shrubby
small-bolled plant yielding tawny colored cotton and small flowers with a
spot at the base of each petal. He gives the habitat of the plant as ‘‘Northern
Mexico”’ and says that seed of this species was sent to him in 1864 by the
“celebrated Professor Decaisne”’ under the name ‘‘Coton sauvage de Siam dit
Siam clair,’ with the statement that it was shrubby and perennial. The
label on the specimen of cotton seed sent by Decaisne from the Botanic
Garden at Paris at once arouses a question in the mind of the reader as to
what “Wild Siamese Cotton’? was doing in Mexico about 1864. At first
thought it would seem that Todaro had misquoted Decaisne and unintention-
ally connected Siam and Mexico together, but an examination of Todaro’s
writings develops that in three distinct papers he mentions the wild Siamese
cotton having a habitat in Mexico.’
That such a species of cotton as was described and figured by Todaro is
really to be found in Northern Mexico was proven by that indefatigable
collector of Mexican plants, Dr. Edward Palmer, who brought to Washington
from Victoria, Tamaulipas, Mexico, specimens and fresh seeds of a shrubby
brown-linted cotton which he said was locally known as socollo or cocoyo.
Plants grown by the writer in Texas and Florida from the seeds brought by
Dr. Palmer appear as almost exact counterparts of Todaro’s plate of his
G, mexicanum.’ From carefully made field notes put down from the living
plants at Brownsville, Texas, the following description has been drawn:
8 Todaro, Agostino: Relazione sui cotoni coltivati al R. Orto Botanico nell’ anno 1864,
in Atti della Societa di Acclimazione e di Agricoltura in Sicilia 4: 164. 1864.
Todaro, Agostino: Index seminum Horti Regii Botanici Panormitani, ann. 1867,
p. 20 and 31. 1868.
Todaro, Agostino: Relazione sulla cultura dei cotoni in Italia, 193, pl. 6. 1877.
FEB. 19,1925 LEWTON: AMERICAN AND MEXICAN COTTONS 67
Gossypium mexicanum Todaro
Plant woody 1.5 to 2.5 meters high, very strict and: open, branching very
low. Stem erect, slightly hairy, green or reddish. Basal limbs numerous,
ascending, gradually becoming smaller upwards. Fruiting branches 15 to
20, ascending internodes very long, bolls not clustered nor fasciated.
Leaves 10 to 13 em. long from base to tip, width the same, dark green,
quite smooth above, smooth below, very flat, not thrown up in folds at the
sinuses, 3-lobed, divisions broad, basal sinus deep, open; pulvinus very small,
red; petioles 6 to 10 em. long, slightly hairy; nectaries present, small, oval
very deep, edges not raised.
Bracteoles small 2.5 to 4 em. long, 2 em. wide, oval, auriculate at base,
almost smooth, thin, laciniae 6 to 8, hairy, extremely long, especially the
middle one; nectaries 3, medium-sized, oval, shallow, not hairy; bractlets
absent.
Calyx, much appressed to the corolla tube, with conspicuous teeth, smooth;
extra-floral nectaries on the calyx 3, medium-sized, smooth, elliptical; internal
floral nectary broad, hairy hand broad.
Petals small, 3.5 em. long, yellow, usually with a small purple red spot on
the claw.
Stamens variable in length, scattered, staminal tube not toothed at apex;
pollen cream-colored, plentiful, style exserted.
Bolls exceedingly small, 1 to 1.5 em. in diameter, round, blunt, 3- and 4-
locked, short-stalked. erect, open poorly; oil glands very prominent, but a
little below the surface, scattered.
Seeds average 5 per lock, rather small, loose, very fuzzy; fuzz at first gray-
green, later becoming rusty brown.
Lint sparse, pale greenish brown changing to light brown on exposure to
light; fine, soft, short, weak.
The growing plant appears much like the common Mexican tree cotton,
with its long ascending limbs and smooth, thin, flat leaves.
The assigning of a specific name in the form of a geographical adjective
to a plant whose limits of distribution are not known at the time often leads
to the choice of a name which does not at all indicate the region where the
plant ismost abundant. Witness for example the many plants whose specific
name canadensis is far from indicating their true range of distribution. A
geographical specific name is also misleading even when it truly expresses the
plant’s native home if it is bestowed upon an obscure species when the same
area is occupied by more common or conspicuous species. However this
may be, the rules of taxonomy provide that even if the specific name is
inappropriate for either of the above reasons, it must be used if properly pub-
lished and not set aside by an oldername. We have such a case in Gossypium
mexicanum Todaro.
How much influence the Mexican types of Upland cottons have had in the
development of particular varieties cultivated in our. cotton belt is still a
matter of conjecture rather than of record, but certainly the species described
by Todaro and the small-bolled, brown-fibered cotton found by Dr. Palmer
had no part in the development of the Upland cottons of the United States,
and none of the varieties belonging to this group of Upland cottons are refer-
able to G. mexicanum Todaro.
68 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No, 4
“stam”? COTTON
Fletcher’s argument,? that G. siamense Tenore is the true name for Ameri-
can Upland cotton, is not to be disposed of so easily, even though he misquotes
both Du Pratz and Tenore, on whose accounts he mainly depends. His argu-
ment, in brief, is as follows: (1) That G. hirsutum L. is typified by a plant
bearing 3 to 5-toothed bracteoles and flowers with dark red petal spots in the
center, neither of which characterize our Upland cottons; (2) that in a large
collection of varieties grown by him, the one most typical of the Upland cot-
ton was a Cambodian variety, considered a native of that country; (3) that
in 1758 “Du Prate” (Du Pratz) tells of the French colonists growing white
cotton of Siam in preference to the Turkey kind “cultivated in our colonies;”
(4) that in 1839 Tenore figured and described under the name G. siamense,
“apparently from the country of origin,’ a cotton of the Upland type; and
(5) that although G. religiosum L. “is undoubtedly the Upland plant,” and
has priority over the name given by Tenore it has been applied by others to
so many totally different varieties ‘“‘that it seems best to drop it altogether.”
However, Tenore’s name szamense of 18389 was already preoccupied by Tussae
in 1818 for a different type of cotton known at that time in San Domingo as
Siamese cotton.
Fletcher brings no proof of the Asiatic origin of his Cambodian Upland
cotton other than the opinion of the agricultural authorities there that itis
indigenous, and the existence of a similar supposedly wild type in the Philip-
pines. Undoubtedly the presence of this cotton in the Philippines is due to
the same cause as that of many other American plants found there; the early
commerce between Spain and her eastern colonies via Mexico. Although
Tenore was unable to trace the geographical origin of his white cotton of Siam
he used the specific name szamense because he was unable to find that this
variety had in Italy ever borne any other name. Du Pratz did say that the
cotton successfully raised by the French colonists in Louisiana was of the
“white cotton of Siam,” but the statement often credited to him, that the
cotton “cultivated in our colonies is of the Turkey kind,” was added in a
footnote by the English translator and refers to the British Colonies. More-
over, a few years later, a number of quite distinct types of cotton were known
and described from the West Indies as ‘Siam cotton.”
The following quotations and translations taken from the works of several
18th and early 19th Century writers indicate the widespread knowledge of
“Siam’”’ cotton 100 to 200 years ago:
Pire Lasar: ‘There is in the islands another species of cotton whose
seeds have been brought from Siam, and named for this reason cotton of
Siam. It has naturally the color of clear coffee. It is of an extraordinary
fineness, it is long and softer than silk. There is made of it stockings of an
admirable fineness and so beautiful as to make blush the best silk stocking.”
Du Prarz: “The cotton which is cultivated in Louisiana is of the species
4Labat, Pére: Nouveau voyage aux Isles de ’ Amerique 2: 406. 1724.
5 Du Pratz, Le Page: Histoire de la Louisiane 3: 364. 1758.
FEB. 19, 1925 LEWTON: AMERICAN AND MEXICAN COTTONS 69
of the White Siam, though not so soft nor so long as the silk-cotton it is
extremely white and very fine, and very good use may be made from it.’
Note added by translator of the English edition of 1774: ‘This East-India
annual cotton has been found to be much better and whiter than what is
cultivated in our colonies, which is of the Turkey kind. Both of them keep
their color better in washing, and are whiter than the perennial cotton
that comes from the islands although this last is of a better staple.”’
Bossu:' “‘The cotton of this country is of the species called white cotton
of Siam. It is neither so fine nor so long as the silky cotton, but it is however
very white and very fine. Its leaves are of a lively green and resemble spinage
very much; the flower is of a pale yellow, the seed contained in the capsule
is black, and oval like a kidney bean.”
Lamarck:’ “It is claimed that there exists in the Kingdom of Siam, a
cotton plant which produces cotton of.a russet or reddish color and of an
extreme fineness, and it is said to be of a quality superior to other cottons.
This cotton plant would appear to us to be still unknown to Botanists and
should be different from the species that we come to mention, seeing that
these all produce strong white cotton, even those which are grown in the
East Indies and Moluccas. They cultivate in the West Indies a cotton plant
analogous to that in question and which they call there Cottonzer de Siam.
It is remarkable in that it produces a reddish cotton or one of a good chamois
color and very fine. They make of it stockings of an extreme fineness and
which are preferable to silk stockings by their cost and their beauty. » There
are nevertheless very few of them made because they consume so much time.”
Cavaninues :§ “Tn the Royal Garden of Paris I saw a plant, not in bloom,
named Gossypzi flavi Siam, which seems to be reducible to this (G. religioswm) ;
the leaves themselves are quite the same as G. religioso and it is true also the
wool is yellow and not white as in other species.”
Von Rour:? Of the 34 varieties of cotton described by Von Rohr and
experimented with by him on Saint Croix, 4 were obtained from Martinique
where they were known as “Siam rouge” or “Siam blane’’ (Von Rohr’s
numbers 13, 16, 19 and 25).
The following paragraphs are from Von Rohr’s notes describing the varie-
ties grown by him:
“No. 13 Siam lisse, brownish smooth Siam, plain nankeen; grows the high-
est of all and already in the second year is 12 feet and spreads its branches 8
feet. Bolls small, fall easily, the staple weak; seeds smooth.”
“No. 16 Siam couronne, brownish crowned Siam; wool paler in color than
No. 13 and swells out of the boll better.”’
“No. 19 Siam blanc, white Siam; raised at Aux Cayes and Martinique.
Outside of the harvest it is impossible to tell this (white Siam) from No. 16
(brown Siam), even when they stand next to one another. .
“One would naturally think the white Siam was a sub-variety of No. 16,
but suchisnotso. I have grown both in quantities since 1785 and both have
held to their own characteristics. The wool of the white Siam is unusually
white, never gets dirty on the tree and never has a colored fiber.”’
® Bossu: Travels through Louisiana 1: 377-379. 1771.
7 Lamarck, Chev.: Encye. Method. Bot. 2: 136. 1786.
8 Cavanilles, A. J.: Monodelphiae classis Dissertationes, Sexta Dissert. 3: 314.
1788.
3 Von Rohr, Julius Philip Benjamin: Anmerkungen wiber den Cattunbau zum nuzen
der Daenischen Westindischen Colonien 1791.
70 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 4
“No. 25 Brownish fuzzy Siam, mossy nankeen. In Guadeloupe called
Siam rouge velu. Has been grown for many years by Mr. Von Oxholm. The
color of the wool is isabella, it is very tender and elastic; seeds fuzzy.”
RaAFINESQUE:'® This prolific writer, fifty years after the appearance of Von
Rohr’s book, assigned Latin names to each of Von Rohr’s 34 varieties and
published very brief descriptions in Latin drawn from Von Rohr’s notes.
Rafinesque of course never worked with cotton plants, either living or in
herbaria.
The following are the names given to Von Rohr’s Siam cottons by
Rafinesque:
Gossypium fuscum Raf. Plain nankeen, Von Rohr No. 13.
G. pallens Raf. Crowned nankeen, Von Rohr No. 16.
G. asiaticum Raf. White Siam, Von Rohr No. 19.
G. isabelum Raf. Mossy nankeen, Von Rohr No. 25.
De Lasreyris:" This author includes an annotated list of 18 cotton
varieties which he credits to M. de Badier, a cotton farmer of Guadeloupe,
who made his experiments there in 1785-1787 (same time as Von Rohr in
St. Croix). The list is divided into two groups, the commercial cottons and
the uncultivated varieties which are used only by the Indians.
“Cotonnier Siam batard a graines recowerte d’un duvet verdatre obscur.
Distinguished by its dirty red cotton and by its seeds which are obscurely
greenish.”
“Cotonnier Siam batard a graines notres et lisses. It differs from No. 3 by
its seeds; the rest is the same.”
“Cotonnier Siam franc. Cotton brownish red; differs from Nos. 3 and 5,
by the felt which adheres to the seeds, and of a brownish red. The cotton is
very good.” De Lasteyrie also gives a table of Von Rohr’s 34 varieties, using
his names and tabulating his data as to character of lint and habit of plant.
Dr Tussac:” “There is found in the Antilles only one species of indigenous
cotton which is commonly known under the name of ‘‘Maron” cotton. I
consider it identical with the one I have just described (G. tricuspidatum).
The other species cultivated there have been brought from the Hast
Indies. . . . . The species cultivated by preference in the Antilles is
the hairy cotton (G. hirsutum) with white lint and its variety with brown lint,
the one with hairy seed adherent to the lint, the other with smooth seed easily
detached from the lint. chs
“A fourth species of cotton, less cultivated than the three others, is the cot-
ton of Siam (G. stamense), this is a small annual shrub which does not attain
a height of more than three feet, whose reddish branches are spread out and
hang to the ground, and produces a kind of cotton brown in color, or some-
times white, whose lint surpasses in fineness and length all the other species
known. The shrub on account of its smallness does not bear much cotton.
Its culture is convenient, but for one reason, that is, because it can be cul-
tivated in dry places where other varieties do not succeed. Some authors
have claimed that the Chinese manufacture the nankeens, which are sold to
Europeans with this species of cotton, but I assured myself that the brown
cotton of Siam bleaches upon being exposed alternately to dew and sunlight.
It is therefore probable that if it is really with this species of cotton that the
Chinese make their nankeens they surely have a method of fixing the brown
color.”
10 Rafinesque, C.8.: Sylva Telluriana pp. 14-19. 1888.
11 De Lasteyrie, C. P.: Du cotonnier et de sa culture, pp. 1389-146. 1808.
12'Tussac, F. R. de: Flore des Antilles 2: 67-68. 1818.
FEB. 19, 1925 BARTSCH: NEW HOSTS OF ASIATIC BLOOD FLUKE 71
CoNCLUSIONS
A study of the above arguments and quotations must bring us to the
following conclusions: (1) That neither G. mexicanum nor G. siamense are
proper names for American Upland cotton; (2) that for more than a hundred
years ‘“‘Siam cotton’’ was a general name given to several species or varieties
of West Indian cottons having tawny or brownish lint and to occasional white
forms of these; and (3) that there has been brought forward no valid evidence
to indicate an Asiatic origin for our American Upland cotton.
ZOOLOGY .—Some new intermediate hosts of the Asiatic hwman blood
fluke» Patt Bartscu, U. 8. National Museum.
The réle played by fresh-water mollusks as intermediate hosts of
Trematode worms parasitic upon man, has received considerable
attention in the last few years. As the elimination of the mosquito,
or the curtailment of its development, eliminates or curtails malaria,
so the elimination of the intermediate molluscan host of flukes will
place a check upon fluke diseases. Great work has been done by
Japanese workers in this field and more recently by Doctors Faust and
Melaney in China.
The known intermediate hosts of Schistosoma japonica, the Asiatic
human blood fluke, belong to two genera, namely, Katayama and
Oncomelania. The first of these is typified by Katayama nosophora
Robson, made known to us by the careful studies of Robson based upon
specimens secured in the Katayama district in the Province of Bingo
on the Island of Hondo, Japan. In the present paper I am recognizing
as subspecifically distinct from this, the form that occurs at Kurume
on the Island of Kiushiu, Japan, under the name of Katayama noso-
phora yoshidai. The Island of Formosa harbors the third race, Kata-
yama formosana, described by Pilsbry and Hirasi as Blanfordia for-
mosana some time ago. :
Dr. Faust’s researches in Chinese Schistosomiasis have brought to
light the occurrence of Katayama on the mainland, and I am describing
as Katayama fausti the species discovered by Faust at Shaohing,
Chekiang Province, China, and as Katayama fausti cantoni the race
which he found at Canton, Kwangtung Province, China.
The genus Oncomelania, of which there is more than one race, is the
intermediate host of the human blood fluke in the Yangtse Valley,
China. More material will be needed than I have at hand before a
systematic discussion of this group can be undertaken.
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
72 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 4
Katayama nosophora yoshidai, new subspecies
Shell elongate-conic, brownish horn-colored. Nuclear whorls well-
rounded, smooth (always decollated in the adult specimens that we have
seen). Postnuclear whorls strongly rounded, narrowly shouldered at the
summit. The portion of the summit that is appressed to the preceding turn
forms a darker colored zone than the rest of the whorl. The postnuclear
whorls are marked by indications of somewhat irregularly developed and
spaced, axial, curved thread-lke riblets. These riblets are a little stronger
on the last whorl than on the preceding. Atirregular intervals strong varicial
thickenings are present. Periphery of the last whorl inflated, strongly
rounded. Base short, strongly rounded, narrowly openly umbilicated.
Aperture very broadly oval; outer lip strongly curved with a strong varicial
thickening immediately behind the peristome; inner lip almost vertical,
curved, reflected over and almost half covering the umbilicus; parietal wall
covered by a thick callus.
The type, Cat. no. 362024, U.S. N. M., was collected by Dr. A. Sadao
Yoshida at Kurume, Kiushiu Island, Japan. It has lost the nucleus. There
are eight whorls remaining, which measure: Length, 8.2 mm.; diameter, 3.3
mm. Cat. no. 340953, U. S. N. M., contains several hundred additional
specimens from the type locality, collected by Dr. Yoshida.
This subspecies differs from Katayama. nosophora nosophora in being in
every way more robust and larger, and in having a much stronger sculpture
than that race.
Katayama fausti, new species
Shell narrowly elongate-conic, horn-colored with a brownish tinge.
Nuclear whorls decollated in all our specimens. Postnuclear whorls well
rounded, narrowly shouldered at the summit, marked by very slender, curved,
axial threads and rather inconspicuous varicial thickenings at irregular inter-
vals. A very heavy varix forms a decided callus immediately behind the
peristome, which extends from the posterior angle of the aperture undi-
minished to the columella. Periphery of the last whorl well rounded. Base
short, well rounded, very narrowly umbilicated. The base is drawn out
anteriorly to join the varicial callus referred to above. Aperture oval, pale
brown within; peristome darker; outer lip gently curved, inner lip curved and
reflected over about half the umbilicus; parietal wall forming a strong callus
that renders the peristome complete.
The type, Cat. no. 362025, U.S. N. M., was collected by Dr. E. C. Faust
at Shaohing, Chekiang Province, China. It has lost the nucleus; the remain-
ing 54 whorls measure: Length, 6.5 mm.; diameter, 2.7, mm.
Katayama fausti fausti resembles in slenderness Katayama nosophora
nosophora, but is at once distinguished from this by the exceedingly strong
varical callus behind the peristome. The axial sculpture in this species is
also much finer than in Katayama nosophora nosophora.
Cat. no. 362026, U. S. N. M., contains paratypes also collected by Dr.
Faust.
Katayama fausti cantoni, new subspecies.
Shell elongate-conic, thin, semi-translucent, horn-colored with a brownish
flush. Nuclear whorls decollated in all our specimens. Nuclear whoris
FEB. 19, 1925 MANN! NEW BEETLE GUESTS OF ARMY ANTS 73
strongly rounded, narrowly shouldered, marked by obsolete, curved axial
threads which are a little stronger on the last turn than on the rest. In
addition to these there are inconspicuous varicial streaks at irregular inter-
vals. Periphery of the last whorl wellrounded. Base moderately long, well
rounded, narrowly umbilicated, anteriorly produced to meet the strong cal-
lus-like varix which extends behind the peristome from the posterior angle of
the aperture to the base. Aperture oval, pale brown within, with a dark
brown edge at the peristome; outer lip strongly curved; inner lip moderately
curved and reflected over about half the umbilicus; parietal wall covered by a
rather thick callus.
The type, Cat. no. 362027, U.S. N. M., was collected by Dr. E. C. Faust
at Fatshan near Canton, China. It has 6.1 whorls, and measures: Length,
6.5 mm.; diameter, 2.7 mm. Cat. no. 362028, U.S. N. M., contains para-
types also collected by Dr. Faust.
The present subspecies differs from Katayama fausti fausti in being much
thinner-shelled, and in having the varix behind the peristome much less
strongly developed. The axial sculpture here is also much finer and much
closer spaced than in Katayama fausti fausti. It is much larger than Kata-
yama nosophora nosophora, but smaller than Katayama nosophora yoshidat.
It differs from both these Japanese forms by having the varix behind the
peristome much stronger.
ENTOMOLOGY .—New beetle guests of army ants. W. M. Mann,
Bureau of Entomology, Department of Agriculture. (Communi-
cated by 8. A. RoHWER.)
The four species of beetles here described are file guests of army ants.
Dr. E. Wasmann has made photos of three of them, and included the
fourth, Ecitopora brevicornis new species, in a table of species in that
genus soon to be published in a general account of the Eciton guests.
All belong in the tribe Myrmedoniae of the Aleocharinae, and the
two new genera add a little to the heterogeny of this already un-
natural group.
The types of these species will be deposited in the U. 8. National
Museum.
Ecitopora brevicornis, new species
Length 1.8 mm.
Black, except abdomen and appendages which are brownish, the first two
and the apical abdominal segment much lighter than the rest, the antennae
reddish brown at base and the legs yellow. Opaque, ventral surface of abdo-
men somewhat shining; head, pronotum and elytra densely and rather
coarsely, abdomen more finely, and the ventral surface shallowly punctate.
Hairs on head, thorax, elytra, and abdomen exceedingly fine, short, recum-
bent, yellow in color, abundant, longer and abundant on appendages and
ventral surface of abdomen; mixed with stiff, erect black hairs on antennae
and apical portion of abdomen.
Head a little broader than long, front broadly and rather strongly impressed
at middle, with a narrow median impression with sublucid surface extending
74 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 4
its entire length. Antennal scape about as long as the second and third
joints together, second joint as long as broad, joints 4 to 8 two times as broad
as long, joints 9 and 10 three times as broad as long. Prothorax a little
broader than long, broadest at anterior corners, evenly narrowed behind to
the very broadly rounded posterior corners; dise broadly and shallowly
impressed at middle, with elongate impressions at sides separated from the
median portion by very broadly rounded ridges. Elytra at base considerably
broader than pronotum, together broader than long; humeral and posterior
corners rounded, sides slightly convex. Abdomen flat above, strongly convex
beneath, narrowly margined at sides, the ultimate dorsal sclerite at basal
fourth with a pair of short, curved, acute spines.
Legs slender.
Type locality —Cachuela Esperanza, Rio Beni, Bolivia.
Host.—Eciton burchelli Westw.
Described from a single specimen running with the ant column.
Close to opaca Wasm. but the body is broader and darker in color, the
antennal joints are shorter and broader, with the apex obtusely conical (in
opaca it is more acute), and the abdomen is more finely punctate.
Ecitophya gracillima, new species
Length 5 mm.
Reddish brown, elytra dark brown to black. Subopaque, densely and
moderately finely punctate throughout. Erect hairs on head and body
coarse, golden brown in color, not very abundant, on appendages finer;
abdomen with very fine, not abundant yellow pubescence.
Head longer than pronotum and nearly three times as long as broad,
gradually broadened from occiput to eyes; vertex convex, front at middle
feebly impressed longitudinally. Clypeus at basal half constricted and
convex, broadly triangular in front, with the anterior border very feebly
emarginate. Eyes very convex, about as long as the transverse diameter
of first antennal joint. Antennae slender, only slightly thickened apically;
first joint nearly as long and a little thicker than the third, enlarged near
base and continuing of subequal thickness to apex; second joint broader than
long and about one-fourth as long as the third, which is distinctly longer than
the fourth and fifth together, joints 4 to 9 longer than broad; joint 10 shorter
than the 9th; terminal a little longer than the penultimate joint, with sides
nearly parallel on basal half, apical half conical, subacuminate at tip. Pro-
notum shorter than elytra, a little less than twice as long as broad, broadest in
front of middle where the sides are rounded (here a little broader than head
including eyes), the anterior corners and border rounded; sides at posterior
half nearly straight, posterior corners subangulate, border straight; dise at
middle with narrow, strong sulcus, extending five-sixths its length; at sides
posterior to middle broadly and shallowly impressed. Scutellum longer than
broad, its apical border narrowly rounded and sublamellate. Elytra together
longer than broad, humeri rounded, sides nearly straight and parallel. Abdo-
men slender, scarcely broader than elytra, as long as head and thorax together.
Legs long and very slender.
Type locality Holotype and paratype. Cachuela Esperanza, Rio Beni,
Bolivia.
Host.— Eciton hamatum (Fabr.).
- Near Ecitophya simulans Wasm. but smaller and lighter colored, with
a much more slender abdomen, shorter antennal joints and less pronounced
impressions on sides of pronotum.
FEB. 19, 1925 MANN: NEW BEETLE GUESTS OF ARMY ANTS 75
Wasmannina, new genus
Form elongate, slightly physogastric; heavily chitinized species. Head
broad, not constricted behind. Eyes large and very convex. Maxillary
palpi 4-jointed, the basal joint very small, second joint more than half as long
as the third, narrow at base and gradually thickened toward apex; third joint
cylindrical, slender, three and one-half times as long as broad; terminal joint
coarse, subulate, less than half as long as the third. Mandibles rather large,
arcuate, acute at tips. Antennae short and stout, first jomt scapiform.
Pronotum moderately elongate, deeply impressed at middle, inflexed at
sides. Elytra simple, not longer than pronotum. Abdomen a little longer
than head and thorax together, broader and thicker than the thorax, strongly
convex above and very strongly beneath, moderately margined at sides, with
6 distinct segments visible from above. Prosternum short, with a strong
median carina and anterior border margined by a strong and sides by weak
carinae. Mesosternum elevated between coxae as a high, strong carina;
posterior half broad and rather strongly convex. Metasternum short.
Anterior and middle coxae separated, posterior approximate. Femora nearly
straight, stout; tarsi 4-5, 5-jointed, the middle and posterior metatarsi not
much shorter than remaining joints together.
Genotype.—W asmannina trapezicollis.
Wasmannina trapezicollis, new species
Length 6 mm.
Dark brown to black, opaque; legs and basal joint of antennae and parts of
abdomen red brown and shining. Head, thorax, elytra, and mesosternum
densely, granulose-punctate, the remainder more finely and shallowly but
equally densely punctate. Stiff, black, erect hairs sparsely distributed on
head and body, more abundant on apical half of ventral portion of abdomen;
very fine and silky yellow recumbent hairs abundant on abdomen.
Head a little longer than broad, sides posterior to eyes broadly rounding
into the posterior border, which is convex at sides and narrowly concave at
middle. Front impressed at middle. Eyes about as long as their distance
from the occipital corners. Clypeus strongly and narrowly carinate at mid-
dle. Antennae thick and short, not longer than head and pronotum together;
first jomt longer than the second and third together with the apical two-
thirds strongly enlarged and rounded, nearly twice as thick as.the second;
joints 3 to 9 transverse, 10 and 11 longer than broad, the terminal slightly
longer than the penultimate and rounded at tip. Pronotum about one and
one-half times broader than head, nearly one-half longer than broad, widest
just behind the rounded anterior angles, from where the nearly straight sides
converge to the very broadly rounded hind angles and posterior border;
anterior border straight at sides, convex at middle; disc at middle with a
profound, narrow, longitudinal impression which is broadest in front, deep-
est at middle, and extends from the anterior border four-fifths the length of
the disc. Elytra together broader than long; sides nearly straight and very
feebly divergent behind, humeri rounded, posterior angles very broadly
rounded, the hind margin angulately excised at middle.
Type locality —Cachuela Esperanza, Rio Beni, Bolivia.
Host.— Eciton crassicornis Smith.
The holotype and single paratype were collected from a file of the ants
crossing a road.
76 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 4
The broad form of the head and thorax, strongly suleate prothorax, the
structure of the antennae and the pro— and mesosternum are distinctive in
this genus. The body is unusually heavily chitinized and punctate.
.
Acamatoxenus, new genus
Form elongate, with abdomen enlarged behind, constricted anteriorly.
Head depressed, elongate and narrowed behind. Eyes large and convex.
Maxillary palpi 4-joited, the basal joint very small, second joint a little
longer than broad and about one-third as long as the third joint, which is
subcylindrical, nearly four times as long as broad, and feebly bent on basal
half; terminal joint slender, subulate. Labial palpi 3-jointed. Mandibles
rather strong, apparently simple, bluntly tipped. Antennal fossae deep,
extending to anterior border of head. Antennae 11-jointed, basal joint
clavate, as long as second and third joints together. Labrum feebly con-
vex, its anterior border strongly concave at middle, sides rounded. Pronotum
elongate; laterally compressed, side margins deflexed, strongly lobed at middle
opposite coxae. Elytra elongate, narrowed behind; humeri rounded, sub-
gibbous. Abdomen carried elevated, constricted in front in the form of a
short petiole which, in profile, is a little longer than high, with the dorsal
surface strongly margined at sides and in the middle with an elongate elevation
separating two deep lateral concavities; remainder of abdomen strongly
swollen, very convex beneath and moderately above; not margined; seven
dorsal segments visible. Prosternum in front of coxae broadly concave,
margined in front and behind. Mesosternum prominent, convex, extending
forward as a broad carina between middle coxae. Legs long and slender,
femora normal; front coxae contiguous, middle and hind coxae separated;
tarsi 4-5, 5-jointed; middle and posterior metatarsi very elongate.
Genotype.—Acamatoxenus suavis.
Acamatoxenus suavis, new species
Length 3.5 mm.
Reddish brown, legs and apex of abdomen yellowish, shining. Head,
pronotum, elytra, and legs and petiole with small, setigerous tubercles,
sparsest on head and most abundant on the elytra, mesothorax, and sides of
abdominal pedicel; large foveolate punctures on head, thorax, pronotum,
epimera, and mesothorax; abdomen microscopically punctate, except near
border; stronger punctation in rows near posterior margins of abdominal
segments; antennae densely punctate and subopaque. Long, fine yellow-
brown hairs moderately abundant on head, body, and appendages; less
abundant on dorsum of abdomen and arranged in rows on apical half of
segments.
Head one and five-eighths times longer than broad, broadest just behind
eyes, from where the nearly straight sides converge to the prominently
rounded occipital corners. Clypeus flat, about five times as broad as long,
straight at anterior border. Front with a large, median, very profound
impression. Vertex and occipital border deeply excised, the ‘ ‘neck”’ portion
short and transversely concave. Antennae with first joint scapiform, thick,
slightly enlarged toward apex; basal joint equal in length to the two fol-
lowing together, second small, clavate, less than half as long as the third,
which is nearly as long as the fourth and fifth together and twice as broad
apically as at base; remaining joints (except the ultimate) each shorter and
very slightly thicker than the preceding; terminal joint conical, obtuse at
FEB. 19,1925 DYAR & SHANNON: MOSQUITOES OF PEARY’S EXPEDITION 77
apex, about as long as the joints 9and 10 together. Eyes large, with distinct
facets, situated at front of sides of head, half as long as their distance to occip-
ital border. Pronotum not as broad as head including eyes, more than twice
as long as broad and only alittle broader behind than in front; anterior border
convex at middle, produced at corners into obtuse angles, sides in front of
middle nearly straight and parallel, then very broadly subgibbous and, pos-
terior to this, feebly concave to the broadly rounded posterior corners, pos-
terior border convex; median surface in front of middle shallowly and broadly
impressed; sides posterior to middle with large and profound pits. Elytra
together one and one-third times as broad as pronotum, together longer than
broad; sides in front of middle nearly straight and parallel, then convergent,
posterior corners and margins broadly rounded.
Type locality—San Diego Cocula, Jalisco, Mexico.
Host-—Eciton (Acamatus) cocula Mann (MSS.)
The single specimen before me was found among a small cluster of this ant,
beneath a stone.
The genus is evidently a ‘‘file-guest”” and distinct from all related forms in
the structure of the head, which is very broad in front, and, due to the marked
incision at middle of posterior border, bilobed behind, with a profound frontal
fossa.
The abdomen is swollen behind, somewhat as in Mimeciton and Mimo-
nilla, but both of these lack the distinct pedicel in front, and the structure
ot the head and thorax is entirely different.
ENTOMOLOGY .—The mosquitoes of Peary’s North Pole expedition of
1908. (Diptera, Culicidae). Harrison G. Dyar and Ray-
MOND C. SHANNON, U.S. National Museum. (Communicated by
S. A. RoHWER.)
A small collection of insects made on Admiral Peary’s 1908 polar
expedition has recently been found in material at the National
Museum. The actual collector of the specimens is not of record, nor
is there anything in Peary’s narrative that throws light on the mat-
ter. Captain R. A. Bartlett of the expedition states that the col-
lecting must have been done by somebody on the “Erik,” the supply
boat. The mosquitoes of this collection are here recorded.
Aédes cantator Coquillett
One female, Sydney, Nova Scotia, July 8,1908. This is the first authen-
tic record of the species from Canada. Dyar gives! the distribution as ‘‘prob-
ably in New Brunswick and Nova Scotia,” which is now in part verified.
Two species of black-legged Aédes were taken in Hawk’s Harbor,
Labrador, in female examples only. It is possible that these are forms of
1 Trans. Royal Can. Inst.13: 106. 1921.
78 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 4
punctor or communis, and, indeed, the smaller and more abundant species
is practically identical with Aédes punctodes Dyar, of northern Alaska; but
we think it will be more definite to apply special names to them until males
have been found. ‘
Aédes pearyi, new species
Proboscis long, as long as the abdomen, slender, black. Palpi rather
long, about. one-fifth the length of proboscis. Head with narrow curved
light brown scales, which are whitish on the vertex in some lights. _Mesono-
tum black in the integument, the scales narrow, curved, dark bronzy brown
dorsally, shading to ight brownish yellow about the antescutellar space and
to a rather broad area of light gray on the sides. About 20 proepimeral setae
present (10 in A. punctor Kirby). Abdomen black, the segments with basal
white bands, broad and even, two-fifths the length of the segment, scarcely
widened laterally; venter uniformly whitish-scaled. Legs black; femora
pale beneath, rather densely whitish speckled above; tibiae with pale reflec-
tion below and small white tips; tarsi black. Wing scales hair-like black;
costa and sixth vein white-scaled at base. Length, 6 mm.
Type and paratypes.—Four females, no. 27861, U.S. Nat. Mus; Hawk’s
Harbor, Labrador, July 20, 1908.
Aédes labradorensis, new species
Proboscis slightly shorter than the abdomen, black. Palpi about one-fifth
the length of proboscis. Head with dark brown narrow curved scales, which
shade to whitish on the sides rather than on the vertex. Mesonotum black,
with narrow curved dark brown scales, shading to yellowish about antescutel-
lar space, but not gray on the lateral margins; black posterior side stripes often
quite distinct and edged within by a line of light scales, sometimes less con-
trasted. Abdomen black with basal segmental whitish bands, which are
narrowed centrally in an are and are not more than one-third the length of
the segment dorsally, widening moderately at the sides; venter whitish scaled,
the tips of the segments sometimes blackish shaded. Legs black, the femora
whitish beneath and narrowly tipped with white. A few white scales at base
of costa. Length, 4.5. to 5mm.
Type and paratypes.—11 females, no. 27862, U. S. Nat. Mus.; Hawk’s
Harbor, Labrador, July 20, 1908.
Three females reported? by Howard, Dyar and Knab from Cape Charles,
St. Lewis Inlet and Rigolet, Labrador, appear to be this species, and have
been placed under labradorensis instead of under the provocans label as the
latter has been made a synonym of punctor by Dyar.? A twelfth female from
Hawk’s Harbor is light gray. We think it to be a badly faded specimen of
labradorensis, although the date of capture is the same as that of the fresh
specimens.
Aédes alpinus Linnaeus
Two females, much worn and abraded, we refer to this species, although a
positive identification is impossible on account of condition and sex. God-
havn, Greenland, August 29, 1908; Holstenborg, Greenland, September 2,
1908.
2 Mosq. N. & Centr. Amer. & W. I. 4: 749. 1917.
3 Ins. Ins. Mens. 12: 41. 1924.
FEB. 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 79
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
361ST MEETING
The 361st meeting of the Entomological Society was held at the National
Museum December 6, 1923, with President Howarp presiding and 37 persons
present.
Georck A. Dean, of the Bureau of Entomology, was elected a member of
the Society.
The following officers for 1924 were elected: Preszdent, A. G. Bovina;
Vice-Presidents, R. A. CusHMAN and J. M. Aupricu; Editor, CARL HEINRICH;
Recording secretary, C. T. GREENE; Corresponding secretary-Treasurer, S. A.
RouWwER; Lxecutive Committee, A. N. CAUDELL, W. R. Watton, J. A. Hystor;
Vice-President of the AcapEmy, 8. A. RoHweEr.
Program: J. E. Grar: Sweet potato weevil eradication. The sweet potato
weevil, Cylas formicarius Fabr., is widely distributed throughout the tropics.
The insect was first found in the United States in the vicinity of New Orleans
about 1875. The facts concerning the first infestations are vague but from
information collected by T. H. Jones, it appears that the weevil was imported
from Cuba with seed sweet potatoes. The spread of the insect was very slow.
Outbreaks occurred at Manatee, Florida, in 1878, and on the Gulf coast of
Texas in 1890. In the following years occasional publications dealing with
this species were issued, and these showed that the Gulf coast was slowly
becoming generally infested.
Food plants of the weevil belong to the Convolvulaceae Family. Seven
species of the genus J/pomoea are infested to some extent, four of which are
favorite food plants. A few species of the genera Calonyction, Pharbitis, and
Jacquemontia are infested slightly. Many of the large-stemmed tie-vines,
especially the perennial species, are utilized as food plants by this insect.
362D MEETING
The 362d meeting of the Society was held at the National Museum, Janu-
ary 9, 1924, with President B6vine in the chair and 53 persons present.
Reports of officers for the year 1923 were read and approved.
Program: The retiring President, Dr. L. O. Howarp, gave a short review
of the entomological societies of the world. The address was discussed by
Messrs. ScHaus, Schwarz, Baker, ALpRIcH, and MArRnart.
H.S. Barber exhibited specimens of one of the smallest known beetles,
recently received from A. Dampf, who collected them from a Polyporus on a
fir near Mexico City. Two species! are represented in the sample received,
and with them are larvae supposed to be their young. The beetles area little
over 0.5 mm. long by about 0.1 mm. wide, and are therefore twice as long
as the smallest known beetle, Nanosella fungi Le Conte, which is described
as only a hundredth of aninchin length. This latter species has apparently
never been found since its original capture by Count Victor Motschulsky, at
Atlanta, Georgia, seventy years ago. A related widespread species, found
only once at Cincinnati, Ohio, by Charles Drury has, however, been recorded
under this name.
1 Described in Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington 26: 172 and 174. 1924, as Cylindroselta
dampfi and Mycophagus robustus.
80 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 4
Although no information as to how it lived in the fungus was received, the
extremely elongate form strongly suggests that it lives in the sporetubes
and its coloration—clear yellow except the black head-—suggests that it sits
in the sporetubes with its head downward and nearly flush with the mouth
of the tube. The larvae, on the contrary, have the hind end infuscated
and strongly armed with formidable processes, suggesting the reverse to be
the normal position in the sporetubes. It is also suggested that these forms
are quite distinct from other groups of Ptiliidae, as they are dependent upon
fresh polypore fungi.
Program: J. C. Bripweuu: Bruchidius ater (Marsham), an unrecorded
immigrant from Europe (Bruchidae, Coleoptera). In the proceedings of the
meeting of the New York Entomological Society on October 1, 1918, Olsen is
recorded as exhibiting specimens of Bruchus caluus Horn from Woods Hole,
Massachusetts, where he is reported to have found it abundantly, breeding in
Cytisus scoparius, the common broom. In a note, apparently by Charles
Leng, it is suggested that the insect in question may be an introduced Euro-
pean form, since, under several names, Bruchidae have been recorded as
breeding in the broom.
Asa result of the examination of material in several collections in New York
bred from the broom at Wood’s Hole, the speaker found that the specimens
in question were of the common European species which affects the broom,
and were distinct from calvus. The synonomy of this species is involved,
so that there is some difficulty in ascertaining its proper specific name. It
has been commonly called Bruchus villosus or cist, but Schilsky, who exam-
ined Fabrician types finds that these names apply to another species. It has
also been called pubescens Germar, but an older available name is ater Mar-
sham. Baudi has identified Olivier’s fasczatus as based upon specimens of
this species, and it seems preferable to use Marsham’s name. The species
is referred by Schilsky to his genus Bruchidius.
Bruchus caluus Horn is referable to Acanthoscelides Schilsky and may be
readily distinguished from Bruchidius ater by the form of the pronotum, which
is much more transverse in B. ater. In A. calvus it is subconical and longer
than broad while in B. ater it is broader than long. Bruchidius ater is repre-
sented in the National Museum by several series of specimens from various
sources including some intercepted in the seeds of Cytisus laburnwm from
France by H. B. Shaw in quarantine at Washington. There are European
records of its breeding in the seeds of the black locust (Robinia pseudacacia)
but these are probably incorrect.
It may be noted that the seeds of Cytisws contain a considerable propor-
tion of spartein, an alkaloid intensely poisonous to mammals. The East
African Bruchid Carypemon cruciger (Stephens) also breeds in a poisonous
seed, that of Abrus pecatorius. In this case, however, the poisonous sub-
stance is proteid in its nature and is destroyed by heat. It is possible that
it is only poisonous when injected into the blood. It is occasionally used in
India by cattle poisoners.
The food plants of A. calvus still remain undiscovered. It is northeastern
in its distribution, and is not uncommon from the District of Columbia to
Massachusetts and Michigan; apparently it is abundant in the pine barrens of
New Jersey.
363D MEETING
The 363d meeting was held at the National Museum February 7, 1924,
with President B6vrne in the chair and 56 persons present.
FEB. 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 81
The following were elected to membership in the Society: P. D. SanpERs,
G.S. Lanerorp, and §. F. Ports.
Program: C. P. Cuatusen: Entomological investigations in the Orient. The
paper was divided into two parts: (1) General observations on crop pests in
Japan, and (2) a discussion of various biological factors entering into the
problem of the introduction and establishment of the ten species of parasites
of Popillia japonica and related forms, found in Japan and Korea.
J. L. Kina: A brief sketch of entomological work in Japan. In Japan there
is no federal or centralized bureau of entomology comparable to that of the
United States. Most of the work is carried on in stations supported by the
Prefectoral Governments or in part by appropriations of the Division of
Agriculture. Much work, too, is under the direction of universities and
agricultural colleges. Many of these stations have their problems narrowed
to those concerning a single crop such as rice, fruits, silk culture, etc.
A short review of the work of the chief economic entomologists of Japan
was given, with special reference to the work of Dr. 8. I. Kuwana, Director
of the Imperial Plant Quarantine Station, Yokohama. This station has
branches at all the chief ports of Japan and Korea. Its chief function is the
interception and inspection of plants for noxious insects and plant diseases.
General work in economic entomology is also conducted by this department.
The collections of Dr. S. Matsumura, of the Imperial University of Hokkaido,
were described.
364TH MEETING
The 364th meeting was held in the National Museum March 6, 1924, with
Vice-President CusHMAN presiding and 31 persons present.
Program: C. T. GREENE: Remarks on the puparia of muscoid flies. It was
shown how the various types of puparia and their spiracular plates correlated
with the adult characters. The following six families were used in this
comparison: Tachinidae, Dexiidae, Sarcophagidae, Oestridae, Muscidae
(Calliphoridae), and Anthomyidae. The paper was discussed by Messrs.
ALDRICH, EWING, and SNODGRASS.
R. E. SNoperass: Anatomy asa basts for research in entomology. Anatomy
in its widest sense, is basic in all branches of entomological research,
such as taxonomy, metamorphosis, physiology, senses and sense organs,
parasitology, pathology, ecology, physiological effect of insecticides, insecti-
cides, chemotropism. This classification of gubjects is merely that by
which the different branches of entomology are taken up by the specialist
but includes what may be called the Fundamentals of Entomology. Anat-
omy may not be directly important to each one of these subjects, but workers
in each are likeiy at some time to require a knowledge of some anatomy;
to many of them anatomy is directly fundamental.
The paper was discussed by Messrs. ALpRicH, Baker, Ewine, Grar, Haut,
Howarp, WHITE and ZIEGLER.
Notes and Discussion: Dr. Aldrich stated that the National Museum had
acquired by exchange with the Zoological Museum, Copenhagen, representa-
tives of 80 species of Diptera from Greenland, including cotypes of 13 species.
With the exception of a few mosquitoes, these are the first Greenland Diptera
to be acquired by the Museum. They represent almost half of the known
species.
The flora and land fauna of Greenland were entirely exterminated during
the ice age, and are still very meager. Henriksen and Lundbeck have given?
2 Meddelelser om Grénland vol. 22. 1917.
82 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 4
an exhaustive list of the insects of Greenland, the number of species in the
different orders being as follows: Coleoptera 41, Hymenoptera 66, Diptera
188, Siphonoptera 6, Lepidoptera 46, Hemiptera 12, Corrodentia 2, Mallo-
phaga 43, Anoplura 7, Orthoptera 2, Thysanoptera 1, Odonata 1, Trichop-
tera 5, Neuroptera 2, Ephemerida 1, Collembola 14.
365TH MEETING
The 365th meeting was held at the National Museum April 3, 1924, with
President Bévrne presiding and 30 persons present.
Dr. Bovine read a translation from Swedish of Professor Ivar Tradgardh’s
paper Problems and methods in forest entomology. This paper was originally
given at the opening of the first Scandinavian Entomological Congress, held
at Stockholm in November, 1923.
Dr. T. E. SnyprrR gave an account of a trip to Panama made early in the
year. Of particular interest were the termite nests, seen along the railroad
from Colon to Panama and along the road to the Rio Tapia. Mention was
made of the damage done to the Hotel Tivoli by termites and to the lead cables
of the Miraflores Locks by Coptotermes. Dr. Snyder referred to the excellent
opportunities for biological studies at the tropical research station at Barro
Colorado Island, in Gatun Lake.
366TH MEETING
The 866th meeting was held at the National Museum May 1, 1924, with
President B6vine presiding and 30 persons present.
Drs. B6vine and Howarp paid a tribute to Dr. E. A. ScHwarz, who had
just reached his 80th birthday.
Program: J. B. Parker: On the biology of Tricrania. The meloid beetle
Tricrania sanguintpennis Say is parasitic on the solitary bee Colletes rufithorax
Swenk. The beetle passes the winter in the ground in the brood cell of the
bee from which it emerges, and lays its egg three or four weeks before the bee
begins its nesting activity. The eggs of the beetle are laid on the under side
of objects lying loose on the ground occupied by the bees. The time required
for the egg to hatch is about four weeks, and the young larval beetles, on
hatching, scatter about over the nesting area. The evidence obtained indi-
cates that the beetle gains entrance to the nest of the host by gaining lodg-
ment on the female bee and riding down on her to the brood-cell. Once in the
brood-cell the parasite first devours the egg of the bee and then completes its
development by devouring the honey and pollen provided by the bee for her
young. The insect passes through six instars in reaching the pupal condition.
In moulting the skin is cast free from the body in each of the first three in-
stars. In the fourth instar the cast skin is not ruptured but remains intact
as a covering for the insect. The fifth is cast in the same fashion within the
fourth, but the sixth is ruptured and cast free from the body within the fifth.
The pupal stage is passed within the case formed by the cast skins of the
fourth and fifth instars and within this case also the adult remains until time
for it to emerge the following spring. R
The time of emergence of the beetle and egg laying in the District of Colum-
bia varied in the different years of observations from March 30 to April 21,
and the one successful hatching of the eggs under field conditions required 26
days. How long the first instar can survive in the field is not known; in the
laboratory without food the greatest limit was eleven days. Data obtained
showed that the period of feeding, which includes the first four larva instars,
FEB. 19, 1925 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 83
varied from 26 to 41 days. In 1920 all larvae reared in the laboratory had
transformed to the pupal condition by August 23, and beetles obtained from
the brood chambers of the bee that year on August 31 were all in the pupal
stage. All beetles that year, whether bred in the laboratory or obtained from
the nesting area in the pupal stage, transformed to the adult stage prior to
September 17. The adult beetle, therefore, remains inactive in the brood
cell, where it developed from September till the following spring.
Notes and Discussion: The receipt of a number of drawings of the larvae of
bees from Brother Claude Joseph, of Santiago, Chile, was reported by 8. A.
ROHWER.
Cart HEINRICH gave an account of a trip to institutions in New York,
Boston, Ottawa, and Decatur, Illinois, in connection with his studies of
Microlepidoptera.
Professor C. B. Crossy, of Cornell University, spoke of the occurrence
of Pomphebius say? in New York every second year.
R. C. SHANNON reported the capture of several specimens of the rare
Syrphid fly.
367TH MEETING
The 367th meeting was held at the National Museum June 5, 1924, with
President Bovine presiding and 35 persons present.
Program: Marcus Bensamin: Thoughts on entomological writings. The
speaker made suggestions for the preparation of manuscripts.
Notes and Discussion: JAMES ZETEK gave an account of the scientific
research work that is being done on the Canal Zone. Barro Colorado Island,
recently established as a tropical research station, has an area of six square
miles. A screened building has been erected here. Scientists interested in
tropical research are invited to visit the island. Nineteen species of termites
and about 80 species of mammals have been reported from Barro Colorado.
Mr. Caudell exhibited a specimen of Arixenia jacobsoni Burr, an earwig-
like creature found in bat caves in Java.
368TH MEETING
The 368th meeting was held at the National Museum October 2, 1924,
with President Bovine presiding and 28 persons present.
Program: A. C. Baker: A major epidemic of a new pest on Citrus. The
paper was illustrated by charts showing Citrus localities in Florida and cli-
matic conditions, and was discussed by Messrs. Mason, Hystop, GAHAN,
and Rouwer.
Dr. J. M. Aldrich exhibited some specimens of the larvae of Nothomicrodon
aztecarum Wheeler, found in the nest of the ant Azteca trigona Emery. This
Dipteron is a remarkable form which can not be placed definitely in any
family. The specimens were donated to the National Museum by Dr. W. M.
Wheeler, of Harvard University.
Cuas. T. Greene, Recording Secretary.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
At the annual meeting of the Washington Chapter of the American
Institute of Chemists, held January 9, the following officers were elected
for the ensuing year: President, J. F. Coucn, Bureau of Animal Industry;
Vice-President, H. E. Patren, Consulting Chemist, Washington Loan and
Trust Building; Secretary, J. N. Taytor, Bureau of Animal Industry;
S84 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 4
Treasurer, H. L. Lourtr, U. 8. Tariff Commission. Dr. C. E. Munror
was elected Honorary President.
At the meeting of the Petrologists’ Club at the Geological Survey Janu-
ary 21, F. L. Hess and W. T. Scuauuer discussed Replacement in peg-
matites. Definite progress can be recorded since the previous discussion of
the subject of the club in March, 1923. The new evidence tends to show
the common occurrence of replacement of one mineral by another in the
formation of many pegmatites.
The following program of radio talks by station WRC, under the aus-
pices of the Smithsonian Institution, has been announced: February 19,
Hi. 8S. Wasutncton: What the Earth is made of; February 26, W. M. Mann:
Habits of ants; March 5, E. Luster Jones: The work of the Coast and Geodetic
Survey in saving life and property at sea; March 12, B. A. Bran: American
Jishes.
Part Four of the Trees and shrubs of Mexico, by Pauu C. StTaNDLEY
(Contributions from the U. $8. National Herbarium, Vol. 23), was issued
last December. The families treated are from Passifloraceae to Sero-
phulariaceae, inclusive. It is expected that Part Five, the concluding
portion, will be published this year.
ANNOUNCEMENT OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Saturday, February 21. The Philosophical Society. at the Cosmos Club.
Program: H. W. Fisu: Magnetic secular change in Latin America; G.
Breit: The inductance and resistance of a coil encircling the Harth; O.S.
Apams: New World maps derived from elliptic integrals.
The Helminthological Society.
Wednesday, February 25. The Geological Society.
The Medical Society.
Saturday, February 28. The Biological Society.
Tuesday, March 3. The Botanical Society.
Wednesday, March 4. The Entomological Society.
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE
JOURNAL
Wednesday, January 28. The Acapumy and the Geological Society.
Program: F. L. Pack: Scenic aspects of Utah geology. H. D. Misrr: Erosion in
San Juan Canyon, Utah.
Thursday, February 5. The Entomological Society. Program: R. E. Snoparass:
Senses and sense organs of insects.
Thursday, February 12. The Chemical Society. Program: J.S. Norris, Massachusetts
Institute of Technology: The reactivities of atoms and groups in organic compounds.
CONTENTS:
ORIGINAL PAPERS
Zoology. Le new Griiermnediate hosts of the Asiatic human blood fluke.
BARTSCH, yess vote scio cls os aide
Entomology.—New beetle guests of army ants. V
Entomology.—The mosquitoes of Peary’s North Pole expedition of.
Harrison G. Dyar and Raymonp C. SHANNON............0..00e008
PROCEEDINGS
The Hatomological Society. <<... .c2 8eacl eet kak ys Wace
j
; Scrmnenrio)! Notes Any NMWSi¥ . nie sews eile ele te ON clalateis eee te Oe tae
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vas L. cae National Research cone’
Recording Secretary: W. D. Sadan Coast fad Geodiika Mele i
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey. i
’
4
Vol. 15 Marcu 4, 1925 No. 5
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Kruuie D. F. Hewett S. J. Maucuiy
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
¢ L. H. Apaus S. Av RonwER
{ PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
, E. A. GotpmaNn G. W. Strose
; BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
, R. F. Griccs J. R. SWANTON
‘ BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anp GuILFoRD AVES,
BauTimMorReE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
leg
fy
¢
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. 3
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author. f
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. [tis urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy ‘s followed.
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4,75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The'rate. of: Subscriplion) Per) VOLUME 28... c's. o/sos.cels «)= = nua 2 sis ale cle elk sve era $6.00*
Semi-monthly) number Bers. oi. seteie «cup scelasets won saw tiavade orele erode stl atahocete at earn .25
Monthly ‘numbers. 020 5: -n iis -/ole o)eitia sie lone wiaseinotsin/ 310) hata cvelia/ala et oe ates oto ate 50
Remittances should be made payable to “‘Washington Academy of Sciences,’’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges—The JourNAt does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members ot scientific societies affiliated with the Academy.
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 Marcu 4, 1925 No. 5
PHYSICS.—Thermoelectric measurement of cutting tool temperatures.'
Henry SHore. Massachusetts Institute of Technology (Com-
municated by Mayo D. Hersey).
A knowledge of the temperatures developed under the chip in the
process of cutting metal is of importance for all research problems
in metal cutting, especially those relating to the properties of the
lubricants employed. Comparatively little has been attempted in
‘this field, although calorimetric methods for observing the heat im-
parted to the chips have been used in lathe work? and thermocouples
inserted close to the cutting surface have been used in drilling tests.*
The method adopted in the present experiments was suggested by
Dr. Lyman J. Briggs of the Bureau of Standards. This method con-
sists in utilizing the contact point between tool and work as the hot
junction of a thermoelectric circuit. This is entirely feasible since
tool steel is of different composition from machine steel and hence,
for a difference in temperature at the junctions, a thermal e.m.f.
is produced, which depends on the temperature difference between
the two junctions.
Before attempting any calibrations, a preliminary run was made
to see if the pressure produced at the top of the tool would affect the
1 Published by permission of the Department of Electrical Engineering, Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology. The experiments were conducted under the super-
vision of Prof. V. Bush. The problem was brought to the writer’s attention by Prof.
M. D. Hersey in connection with the work of the Special Research Committee on the
Cutting and Forming of Metals, American Society of Mechanical Engineers. See
Mech. Eng. 46: 20-30, 57. 1924.
? Brackenbury, H. I. and Meyer, G. M., Heat generated in the process of cutting metal.
Engineering 91: 39-40. 1911.
2 Schwartz, H. A. and Flagle, W. W., Significance of tool temperatures. Proc. Amer.
Soc. Test. Mat. 237: 27-39. 1923.
85
86 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 5
e.m.f. generated. This was accomplished by placing the work in a
lathe and bringing the tool to bear on it. An electric soldering iron
with a fine tip was placed at the point of contact, and the resultant
deflection of the millivoltmeter read. A light cut was then taken
and the lathe stopped, leaving the tool in position. The work was
suddenly made to bear down hard on the tool by pulling on the belt
by hand, while the hot soldering iron remained at the point of con-
tact, its temperature being held constant. The resulting deflection
was the same as before, so it was concluded that pressure did not
appreciably change the thermal e.m.f. This was important, since it
meant that only an ordinary calibration of the tool and work metals
would be necessary.
TABLE 1.—Catipration Data ror Toot anp Work Metats (Toon MeTaL—JESSUP
HIGH SPEED STEEL)
WORK METAL—ORDINARY CAST BRASS WORK METAL—MILD STEEL
Thermal e.m.f. Temperature diff. Thermal e.m.f. Temperature diff.
millivolts degs. C. millivolts degs. C.
0.36 43 0.04 43
0.50 55 0.05 58
0.65 68 0.07 97
0.80 79 0.10 136
0.85 84 0.13 146
0.90 87 0.16 175
0.95 93 ? 0.32 209
1.00 96 0.40 228
ites 110 0.51 242
1.30 123 1.00 315
1.50 140 1.84 400
The calibration of the metals was accomplished by placing a bar
of the tool metal (16 inches long by 7°; inch square) and a rod of
work metal (16 inches long by } inch in diameter) in a small gra-
phite crucible (No. 00) with 400 grams of pure tin. The crucible
was heated electrically by inserting three lugs on the periphery of
the crucible, spaced 120° apart, and connecting each lug to one
phase of a 5-k.w., 3-phase, 60-cycle generator. The line current was
regulated by adjusting the generator field rheostat, which varied the
impressed voltage. This method of melting the tin enabled the heat
input to be easily and quickly fixed and at the same time to be held
constant. A constant heat input was necessary to allow thermal
equilibrium to be reached at the inserted ends of the two metals
undergoing calibration. The temperature of the tin was measured
mar. 4, 1925 SHORE: THERMOELECTRIC MEASUREMENT 87
by an alumel-copper thermocouple when calibrating the steel rod,
and with a high temperature mercury thermometer when calibrating
the brass. Data for this calibration are given in Table 1.
The next step was the actual determination of the e.m.f.’s produced
for varying rates of removal of chips in a lathe. It was not feasible
to insulate the tool without a special tool holder, so the work was
insulated instead. The ends of the work were drilled and tapped
for a 2 inch, 16-thread screw. Hard rubber plugs 4 inch long were
inserted in these holes and filed flush with the ends of the work metal,
then drilled and countersunk to fit the lathe centers. The dog was
insulated from the lathe by wrapping varnished cambric around the
tail. While the work was effectively insulated, the use of hard
rubber center plugs at the ends limited to depth of cut, for due to
bearing friction the plugs deteriorated rapidly, and threw the work
off center. The thermoelectric circuit, starting at the point of con-
tact of tool and work, was completed through work, commutator,
TABLE 2.—TempPerATURE RISE WHEN CutTtine Cast Brass. (Curtine sPEEp, 16.0
FEET PER MINUTE} AVERAGE INITIAL DIAMETER, 0.52 INCH)
RATE OF REMOVING CHIPS E.M.F. TEMPERATURE RISB
lb. per minute millivolts degs. C.
0.0024 0.35 42
0.0036 0.50 55
0.0062 0.55 59
0.0086 0.60 64
0.0181 0.77 78
0.0476 1.10 106
TABLE 3.—TEMPERATURE RISE WHEN Courtine Mitp STEEL (CUTTINGSPEED, 13.5 FEET
PER MINUTE; AVERAGE INITIAL DIAMETER, 0.88 INCH)
mere On Eee Ova OF Catt E.M.F. CORRECTED TEMPERATURE RISE
1b. per minute millivolts degs. C.
0.0010 0.08 112
0.0036 0.17 165
0.0020 0.30 205
0.0030 0.45 237
0.0121 0.65 270
0.0300 0.65 270
0.0208 0.67 273
0.0235 0.72 279
0.0297 0.72 279
0.0321 0.77 285
0.0177 0.80 290
0.0270 0.82 292
88 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 5
millivoltmeter, and tool. One lead of the millivoltmeter was soldered
to the free end of the tool, while the other went to a wooden con-
tainer of mercury held in a ring stand. An annular copper disk,
wetted previously with mercury, dipped into the container. The
disk was held onto the work by means of a bakelite boss, but kept
in good contact with the work by a copper strip placed under the
set-screw of the dog. Using this arrangement, no parasitic or ex-
traneous e.m.f.’s could be detected.
To measure the generated e.m.f., it was only necessary to take a
cut and note the reading of the millivoltmeter. This reading was
sensibly constant for any particular cut, 5 per cent being the max-
imum deviation which occurred whenever a chip broke off from the
work.
The data obtained for cutting brass and mild steel without the
use of cutting fluids are given in Tables 2 and 3. These were reduced
to usable form by means of the calibration curves, and by calipering
the work before and after each run.
Final results, also given in Tables 2 and 3, show at first a rapid
increase of temperature with increasing rates of cutting the metal,
but dropping to a more gradual rise at faster cutting rates—about
100 deg. C. rise for brass at 25 pound per minute, and about 300 deg. C.
for mild steel at ,’y pound per minute.
It is hoped that these experiments may later be continued in order
to collect systematic information on the effect of varying the cutting
speeds and depth of cut, as well as the tool and work materials and
cutting fluids. A more complete paper, which will include the dimen-
sional analysis of these and other published data, is in preparation by
M. D. Hersey and the author.
SPECTROSCOPY .—Regularities in the arc spectrum of nickel.
Francis M. Watters, Jr., Bureau of Metallurgical Research,
The Carnegie Institute of Technology (Communicated by W. F.
MEGGERS).
More than two years ago I collected all available spectroscopic data
for iron, cobalt, and nickel, constructed complete wave-number
tables for the are spectra of these elements, and began to investigate
the structure of these spectra. Results for iron! and for cobalt? have
already been published; the present note gives some preliminary
results for the are spectrum of nickel.
1Waxters. This JouRNAL13: 248. 1923. J.O.S.A.&R.S.1.8:245. 1924.
2 Waters. This JourNaL14:407. 1924.
MarR. 4, 1925 WALTERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF NICKEL 89
One of the questions attacked in these investigations was whether
or not the alternation law of spectroscopy is obeyed throughout a
triad of elements in column VIII of the periodic table. The spec-
trum of neutral iron was found to consist mainly of terms whose
maximum multiplicities are odd (8, 5, and 7 fold); the structure of
the cobalt-are spectrum appears to be due to terms of even multi-
plicities (2 and 4), while odd values (1 and 3) appear again to char-
acterise the are spectrum of nickel.
Although the latter spectrum is the simplest of the three, it has
been the most difficult to analyse, and it is still in a somewhat in-
complete and unsatisfactory state. After finding a considerable
number of relative terms, and assigning inner quantum numbers to
them, attempts were made to identify the terms which belong together
in a polyfold group. Inner quantum numbers were given on the
basis of combinational properties of the terms, and the spectral
types of some of these terms were suggested by the Zeeman effects
for nickel lines.
The way in which a combination of two polyfold terms gives rise
to a multiplet may be illustrated by the following group of six lines,
an example of a three-fold P term combining with a three-fold D
term, the individual levels of each triple level being distinguished by
subscripts which represent the inner quantum numbers. The lines
are represented by their wave numbers in vacuo and by their in-
tensities and character as given by Hamm.’ All of these lines belong
to class IL of King’s‘ temperature classification of the nickel
lines. The separations of the polyfold terms are given in italics.
73958.40 73283.41 72450.11
D; D: D
45593.97 28364.39 674.95 27689.44 833.28 26856.16
P: 10 R, II 8 u, Il 6, IL
931.38 931.49
44662.49 28620.82 833.17 2787.65
P; 10 R, II PB, ill
691.51
43971 .00 28479 .16
Py 7B, Il
The Zeeman effects for the above six lines as observed by Graft-
dijk® are given for comparison with the patterns calculated from
Landé’s * scheme.
3 Hamm. Zeitschr. wiss. Phot.13:105. 1913.
* Kine. Astroph. Journ. 42: 344. 1915.
5 Grarrpisk. Arch. Neerl. II] A: 192. 1912.
*Lanpé. Zeitschr. fiir Physik 15:190. 1923.
90 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 5
Terms Observed / Calculated
D:Po (0.00) 0.69 (0.00) 0.50
D:P, (0.84) 0.58, 1.55 (1.00) 0.50, 1.50
D,P: (0.00) 2.63 (0.00, 1.00) 0.50, 1.50, 2.50
DP, (0.00) 1.20 (0.00, 0.33) 0.83, 1.17, 1.50
D2P2 (0.59) 1.40 (0.33, 0.67) 0.88, 1.17, 1°60; “1-838
D;P2 (?) 1.33 (0.00, 0.17, 0.33) 1.00,1.17, 1.33, 1.50, 1.67
Considering that fairly large errors may be present in the observed
values, it appears that the Zeeman effects for nickel may be expected
to be in quantitative agreement with the values derived from Landé’s
outline for multiplets of the first stage. Unfortunately, the published
data on magnetic resolution of nickel lines are insufficient for the
purpose of identifying many spectral terms.
In addition to the D and P terms already mentioned, it is possible
that 71946.69, 72831.10, and 74163.21 may represent a low lying F
level, a higher one being represented by 40552.34, 41050.93, and 41189.
82. The terms 39754.70, 40000.00, 40662.44 and 43250.41, 43548.84,
44494.29 are probably of the type D, while 58145.92, 58429.10,
58553.42 have the appearance of a P level. In nearly all of these
cases the interval rule is violated, but such violations are known to
be common in complex spectra. In some of the combinations the
intensity rule also appears to be violated, and on account of the
fairly general validity of this rule the above term groupings will
be regarded as provisional. Further investigation of the Zeeman
effect for nickel lines is now in progress, and it is hoped that these
new data will permit unambiguous identification of all the terms.
For the present I am content to give in Table 1 the relative terms,
inner quantum numbers (in parenthesis), and the wave numbers and
description of the observed spectral lines arising from combinations
of these terms. The distribution of the inner quantum numbers
indicates that the spectrum consists of singlets and triplets; there
appear to be no quintets unless the term separations are very large.
In this connection it is observed that the terms fall into five (or
more) rather definite groups as follows: 70753 to 74163, 58146 to
60641, 37563 to 47497, 29900 to 31557, and 21965 to 25077.
The number of nickel lines classified in Table 1 is 345. These
include nearly all of the stronger lines of the spectrum of neutral
nickel. Of the lines of classes I and II there remain unclassified only
19 lines; of the remaining lines (intensity > 2) there remain 21 lines
of temperature class III, 9 of class IV, 43 of class V, and 58 for which
no temperature classification is given.
MAR. 4, 1925 WALTERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF NICKEL 91
TABLE 1.—ReEtative TERMS AND COMBINATIONS IN THE ARC SPECTRUM OF
NICKEL.
7416321 73958 . 40 73283 .41 72831.10 72450.11
(4) (3) (2) (8) (1)
47497 .11 26665 .94 26461 . 22
(4) | 41] 4-1
46748 .30 26082 .76 25701.85
(2 3-I 5-I1
46095 .10 | 28068 .10 27863 .32 26735 .91
(4) } AIT 5-II ae
45621 .22 28542 .05 27209 .79
(3) 4-T 7-I-I1
45593 .97 28364.39 27689 .48 27237 .08 26856. 16
(2) 10R-II1 Su-II 5-II 6-I1
45585 ..14 28373 25 27698 .25 27245 .92
(3 3-I1 5-II 4-II
45150.00 28133 .39 27300.21
(1) 4-I 3-1
45078 .76 29084. 45 28879 .65 27752 .33
(3) 6R-IL 10R-II 5-II
44849 44 29320.75 29115.94 28440 .94 27988 .58
(3) 5-Il 9R-IL 9R-II 7R-IL
44682 .27 29480 .94 29276.18 28148 .83
(4) 7R-II 10R-IL 4-I
44662 .49 28620. 82 27787 .65
(1) 10R-IIL 7R-IL
44494 29 29668 .83 29464.07 28789 .12 28336 .67
(3) 10R-II 10R-I1 7R-IL 5-II
44330 .45 29627 .92 28952 .98 28500.63
(3 4R-II 6R-IL 4-I
44974.80 | 29683 .67 29008 .65 28556 . 34
(2) } 2-II 10R-IL 6-IL
44900.13 | 29958 . 32 29283 .27 28830 .96 28449 .93
(1, 2) 1-I 3R-IT 5-II 5-IT
92 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 5
TABLE 1.—Continued
72450.11
(1)
74163.21 73958. 40 73283.41 72831.10
(4) (3) (2) (3)
43971 .00
(0)
43771 .25 29512.13
(1) t=
43543. 84 30414.59 29739. 61 29287 .27
(2) 411 5R-I1 5R-I1
43250. 41 30032.98
(1)
il
43132.21 31030.96 30826.18 30151. 20 29698 . 86
(3) 4R-II 8R-I 7R-II 5R-I1
42721 .60 31236.77 30561.81 30109 .50
(2) 2-TI 4-II 5R-I1
42377 .10 31786.16 31581 .35 30906. 29 30454.00
(3) 11 1-1 5R-II SIDE
41189. 82 32973 .48 32768 .50 31641. 28
(4) 3-II 10R-II 1-1]
41180.98 32102.44
(1) 6-11
41050.93 33112.28 32907 .50 32232 49 31780.19
(3) 5-II 9R-II 8R-II 4-II
40662. 44 33500 .87 3329600 32620.97 32168 .67
(3) 4-II 10R-I1 6-II 2-1
40552 .34 33406.01 32731 .06 32278 .73
(2) 6-II S8R-II 5-11
40000.00 33958 .39 33283. 41 32831 .08
(2) 6 9R-II . 4-II
39754.70 33528 .71
(1) 6-11
38524.10 35639.11 35434.30 34306 .92
(3) 3 4 2
37562.45 36395.98 35720.98 35268. 63
(2) 4 4 3
28479 .16
7R-IL
29199 .72
8R-I1
29728 .54
2=]
31269 .13
4-II
31897 .82
10R-II
32450.14
6-II
32695. 42
10R-II
34887 .62
5
MAR. 4, 1925
WALTERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF NICKEL
TABLE 1.—Continued.
93
60641.83 59434.38 58553.42 58429.10 58145.92
71946.69 70753.30
(2) (2) (2) (0)
47497 .11
(4)
46748 .30 24004.96
(2) 3-IIA
46095.10
(4)
45621 .22 25132.16
(3) oar
45593.97 | 26352.74 5159.34 15047.7
(2) 6-1 7-II 6-1
45585.14 | 26361.60 25168.16
(3) 41 4I
45150.00 | 26796.71
(1) etl
45078.76
(3)
44842. 44 | 27104.25 25910.93 15799.41
(3) 4-II 10-II 5-II?
44682 27
(4)
44662.49 | 27284.18 26090.79 15979.33 14771.79
(1) 5-II 6-11 TA 10-1
4449499 | 27452.43 26259.05 16147.50
(3) 21 s-II 6-I
44330 .45 26422.93 16311.40
(3) | 8-II 3
44974.80 | 27672.03 26478.63 16367.08
(2) 7-II 9-II 7-11
|
44000.13 | 26753.22 16641.78
(1, 2) 7-II 3-11
(2) (1)
12959.43 12835.18
8-IA 6-IIIA
12968 .20
1
13474 .69
2
13711.21
8-ITIA
(0)
13890.72 138766.63 13483.43
7-IIIA = 8-IITA
14058 .88
6-IIIA
14278.61 14154.30
4V ? 4
6- IITA
14145 .63
2
94 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 5
TABLE 1.—Continued.
71946.69 70753.30 60641.83 5943438 58553.42 58429.10 58145.92
(2) (2) (2) (0) (2) (1) (0)
43971 .00 14458.18
(0) 7-II
43771.25 | 28175.38
(1) 5-II
43543.84 | 28402.81 27209.79 17098.04
(2) 5-II lee. 8
43250.41 | 28696.31 27502.95 17391.48 16183.93 15302.94 15178.79
(1) 6R-Il SI. eu 3 3 5-11
43132.21 | 28814.52 27621.11 17509.65 15421.13
(3) 5-II 10R-II 6-1 re \ hme
42721.60 | 29225.08 28031.72 17920.32 15831.78 15707.57
(2) 2-1 10R-II 5-1 10200
42377.10 | 29569.59 28376.22
(3) 4R-Il ei
41189. 82
(4)
41180.98 | 30765.69 29572.28 19460.83 18253.41 17372.42 16964 .94
(1) 2-I 1OR-Ir| 8-1 10-1 5-1J 9-I1
41050.93 | 30895.73 29702.38 19590.92 17502.50
(3) {1 4R-II 4 6-3
40662.44 | 31284.25 30090.86 19979.44 17891.01
(3) 2-II 5-II 2 5-1
40552.34 | 31394.33 30201.04 20089.50 18001.07 17876.94
(2) 4-JI 2-1 2 AV P70
40000.00 | 31946.72 30753.30 20641.94 18429 .25
(2) a] 3-II 2 4-11
39754.70 | 32191.97 30998.54 20887.22 19679.64 18391 .22
(1) 5-II 5R-II 2 3 6-II
8524.10 | 33422.77 32229.17 22117.75
(3) 3-II 8R-II 4-11
37562.45 | 34384.21 33190.82 23079.50 20990 .97
(2) 3 9R-II 6-11 2-IIA
mar. 4, 1925
TABLE 1.—Continued
WALTERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF NICKEL
95
31557 .37 31373 .28 30051 .13 29900.75 25077 .36 24988 .47
(2, 3) (2) (1) (2) (4) (3)
47497 .11 22420 .04
(4) 9-ITI
46748 .30 15375.05
(2) lu
46095.10 14537 .71 21017.87
(4) 3-IV 7-IJ
45621 .22 20548 . 86
(3) 7-II1
45593 .97 14036 .53 14220.63 15693 .29
(2) 10-IV-V 5-V 4
45585.14 14027 .82 14211.90 20507 .94
(3) 2 4
45150 .00
(1)
45078 .76 13521 .37 20001 . 44 20090 .83
(3) 10-III 4JII lu
44849 44 13285 .07 13469 .14 19854.04
(3) S-III 9-III 10-111
44682 .27 13124.89 19604.87
(4) 10-III 7u-V
44662.49 13289 .16 14611.38 14761 .74
(1) 8-IIIL 6-V 9-V
44494 29 12936 .95 13121.07 19506 .07
(3) 10-IV 9-II1 6-1V
44330 .45 12773 .04 12957 .13 19342 .00
(3) 4 7 6-ITL
44274.80 12717 .36 12901 .44 14373 .99
(2) 4 10-V 5-V
44000.13 12442 83 12626. 84 13948 .93
(1, 2) 1 7 4
43971.00 13919 .74
‘0) 9-V
96 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 5 |
TABLE 1.—Continued
31557 . 37 31873.28 30051.18 — 29900.75 += 25077.386 24988. 47
(2, 3) (2) (1) (2) (4) (3)
43771 .24 13720.06 |
(1) 2 |
43543 .84 13492.75 13643.12
(3) 9-IV 4 .
43250.41 11877.15 13199.27 13349.74
(1) 2 7-V 2
43132.21 11574.85 11758.97 13231 .45 18143.81 |
(2) 2 2 9-III 5-IV
|
42721 .60 11348.32 12670.50 12820.24
(2) 3 3 8-V
42377 .10 11003.96 12476.43
(3) 1 2
41189 82 16112.54
(4) 3-V
41180.98 11280.27
(1) 4
41050.93 11150.23 15973.56 16062.49
(3) 2 4-V 6-V
40662 .44 15585.05 15673.96
(3) 5 7-IV?
40552.34 10501.33
(2) 2
24891.76 24849.40 24830.52 24385.74 23816.82 23697.14
(3) (2, 3) (4) (3) (2) (4)
4749711 22666.85 23111.67
(4) 5u-III 4
46748 .30 22362.69 22931.53
(2) 8-IIl 6-V
46095.10 21709.51 22398 .07
(4) 9-III 3
4562122 21924 .02
(3) 3
mar. 4, 1925
TABLE 1.—Continued
WALTERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF NICKEL
24891 76 24849.40 24830.52 24885.74 23816.82 23697.14
3 (2, 3) (4) (3) (2) (4)
45593 .97 20702 .29
(2) ADU
45585.14 20693 .09 21768.40 21888.11
(3) 5-II1 7-III 1
45150.00 21333 .26
(1) 5-III
45078 .76 20248.23 20693.08
(3) 4u-III 5-III
44842 44 19950.66 19993.08 20456.77. 21025.63
(3) 3u 5-III 3 3-V
44682 27 19851.69 20296.51 20985 .12
(4) 3u S00 4-IIl
44662 .49
(1)
44494 29 19602.49 19644.89 19663.83 20797 .24
(3) 7u- V 2 7u-I1I 4-III
44330 .45 19481.05 19944.69 20513.64
(3) 3-V 4-III 5-II1
4497480 19425 .36
(2) Ni
44000.13 19614.34 20183.21
(1, 2) 4V 3-V
43971.00
(0)
43771.25 19954.33 20074.05
(1) 2 8-II1
43543 .84
(2)
43250.41
(1)
4313221 18282.70 18301.63
(3)
2
4-V
98 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 5
TABLE 1.—Continued
24891.76 24849. 40 24830. 52 24385. 74 23816.82 23697 .14
(3) (2, 3) (4) (3) (2) (4)
2721.60 17872 .27
(2) 6-II1
42377 .10
(3)
41189.82 16359 .33 17492 .69
(4) 4u-V
41180.98
(1)
41150.93 16159 .16 16201 .55 16220.39 17353 .77
(3) 6-V 3 5u-V 41IV
40662.44 | 15770.60 15813.06
(3) 10-III 3
03.18 16166. 59
40552 .34 157
7-IV
(2)
40000 .00 15150. 57
(2) 4-IV
39754.70 15937.81
(1) 1
38524.10 13632 .17
(3) 1
37562. 45
2
23409.10 23331. 22 23328 .95 22857. 20 22122.70 21965, 83
(1) (2, 3) (1) (2) (2) (3)
46748 .30 23891 .18
(2) 4
MAR. 4, 1925
WALTERS: ARC SPECTRUM OF NICKEL
TABLE 1.—Continued
99
23409. 10
(1)
23331 .22 23328 .95 22857 .20
(2;,3) (1) (2)
21965.83
(3)
43971 .00
(0)
43771.25
(1)
43543 84
(2)
43250 41
(1)
|
22184.94
1
19841 .32
4
2262.86
21985.27
4V
21825 .07
3
21417 .58
3-V
20641 .94
9
20212 .60 20214 .89 20686. 59
3 2u 3-V
1992151
3u-IV
21421 .12
3-III
21127 .74
4-IV?
23628 .15
3-V
23112.92
22716 .42
3-V
100 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 5
TABLE 1.—Continued
23409. 10 23331.22 23328 .95 22857 .20
(1) (2, 3) (1) (2)
43132 .21 19801 .01 20274 .96
(3) 4-V 1
42721.60 19312.48 19390.39 19392 .64 19864. 25
(2) 5-V 8-V 4u-V lu
42377 .10 19519.71
(3) 3
41189.82
(4)
41180.98 17771 .97
(1) 7-V
41050.93 18193 .65
(3) 3-V
40662. 44 17805.21
(3) 6-V
40552 . 34 17143 . 23 17221..15 17695 .24
(2) 5r-V 7-V 4-V
40000.00 16668.78 16671 .04
(2) 2u-V 3u-V
39754.70 16345 .61 16425 .74
(1) 8-V 8r-V
38524.10 15192.96
(3) 2u
37562 .45 14153 .36 14231 .45 14233 .35
(2) 2 8-V 1
22122.70 —-21965.83
(2) (3)
20254. 30
4IV
18539 .61
2
17877 .27
1
17632 .00
3
mar. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 101
BOTAN Y.—New plants from Central America—II.! Pau C. Stanp-
Ley, U. 8S. National Museum.
The species here described as new are mostly plants of the Canal
Zone, which have been studied during the preparation of a flora
of that region. There are included also descriptions of two Costa
Rican plants, and of a new cactus from the Republic of Salvador.
Inga gracilipes Standl., sp. nov.
Tree 6 m. high, the young branchlets sparsely puberulent but soon gla-
brate; petioles 1.5-3 em. long, glabrous, narrowly winged above, bearing
at the middle and at the apex a sessile cup-shaped gland; rachis 1.5-2 em.
long, with a cup-shaped gland at apex, narrowly winged, the wing attenuate
below, the rachis 4 mm. wide at apex; leaflets 2 pairs, elliptic-oblong, 6-11 cm.
long, 2.5-4.5 em. wide, abruptly and shortly obtuse-acuminate, obtuse at
base, coriaceous, glabrous, lustrous above, with prominent venation; flowers
umbellate, the umbels paniculate, the peduncles very slender, 2.5-4.5 cm.
long, solitary or fasciculate, obscurely puberulent or glabrate; pedicels fili-
form, 8-10 mm. long, minutely and very sparsely puberulent; calyx tubular,
3 mm. long, sparsely and very minutely puberulent; corolla greenish white,
narrow-funnelform, 8-9 mm. long, glabrous; stamen tube short-exserted;
very young fruit obiong, strongly compressed, with scarcely thickened mar-
gins, glabrous, acute at base, subsessile.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,219,236, collected on brushy
slope between France Field, Canal Zone, and Catival, Province of Colén,
Panama, near sea level, January 9, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 30353).
The vernacular name is “guava,” a term applied locally to all species of
Inga. Inga gracilipes belongs to the section Leptinga, characterized by
pedicellate flowers, but in its nearly glabrous flowers it is distinct from the
other Central American species of the group. It is, however, closely re-
lated to some of the Brazilian species, although it appears to differ from each
of them in one or more details.
Anaxagorea panamensis Standl., sp. nov.
Slender shrub 1-2 m. high, the branchlets sparsely ferruginous-puberulent
when young but soon glabrate; petioles 3-5 mm. long, glabrate; leaf blades
lance-oblong, 9-16 cm. long, 2.5-4 cm. wide, acuminate, obtuse or acutish
at base, thin, deep green and lustrous above, glabrous, beneath paler, when
very young puberulent along the costa, but elsewhere glabrous, the lateral
nerves 6 or 7 pairs, diverging at a wide angle, arcuately anastomosing remote
from the margin; flowers axillary, solitary, the pedicels 2.5 cm. long, very
slender, obscurely puberulent or glabrous, with a minute bractlet near the
base; sepals ovate-acuminate, 8 mm. long, ferruginous-puberulent, thin;
outer petals pale dull yellow, linear-oblong, obtuse, 2 cm. long, thin, puberu-
lent, the inner petals scarcely 1 cm. long, triangular-ovate, acuminate;
follicles numerous, bronze-green, glabrous, the stipe 1-1.5 em. long, the body
about 1 cm. long, apiculate, splitting along one side at maturity and exposing
the lustrous seed.
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
102 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 5
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, nos. 1,216,855-6, collected in
wet forest along the Rio Tapia, Province of Panama, Panama, near sea
level, Dec. 7, 1923, by Paul C. Standley (no. 26168). The following collec-
tions are of the same species:
Panama: Rio Tapia, Standley 28247, 28289, 30660. Hills north of
Frijoles, Canal Zone, Standley 27589.
One other species, A. crass7petala Hemsl., has been described from Central
America (Nicaragua), but according to the description it is not closely related
to the present. plant. The Panama species is related to A. acuminata St.
Hil., of South America, which has coriaceous leaves with very different
venation.
Annona hayesii Safford, sp. nov.
Large shrub or small tree, the young branchlets ferruginous-tomentose
at first but soon glabrate; petioles 3-7 mm. long; leaf blades elliptic-obovate
or oblong-obovate, 12-25 em. long, 5-9 cm. wide, abruptly acuminate, obtuse
or rounded at base, thin, deep green above, paler beneath, when young sparsely
and minutely sericeous with brownish hairs but soon glabrate; pedicels
10-15 mm. long, solitary or fasciculate in the leaf axils, brown-tomentose,
bearing a small ovate bract below the middle; calyx lobes triangular, acute,
2.5 mm. long, tomentose; outer petals linear, dilated at base, about 3 cm.
long, obtuse, densely brown-tomentose, the inner petals minute; fruit sub-
globose, 5 em. long or more, smooth, with scant pulp and thin skin; seeds
smooth, brown, lustrous, compressed, 1 em. long.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 717078, collected near Yaviza,
southern Darién, Panama, April, 1914, by H. Pittier (no. 6592). The
following additional collections are referred here:
PaNnaMA: La Palma, southern Darién, Pittier 6598. Matias Hernandez,
Province of Panama, Pittier 6749. Corozal Farm, Canal Zone. Pittier 6684.
Road to Corozal, Bro. Gervais 141. Old Las Cruces Trail, between Fort
Clayton and Corozal, Standley 29179. Tumba Muerto Road, near Panama,
Standley 29723. Punta Paitilla, Province of Panama, Standley 26272.
Near Juan Franco Race Track, Province of Panama, Standley 27704.
Annona hayesii is related to A. reticulata, a species distinguishable at a
glance by its uniformly narrow leaves.
Unonopsis pittieri Safford, sp. nov.
Medium-sized tree with pyramidal crown, the branchlets at first minutely
sericeous but soon glabrate; petioles 4-6 mm. long; leaf blades oblong-ellip-
tic or elliptic-oblong, 14-32 em. long, 5.5-8.5 em. wide, abruptly acuminate,
obtuse and slightly unequal at base, thin, concolorous or nearly so, minutely
sericeous beneath along the costa, elsewhere glabrous; flowers greenish,
borne in few-flowered racemes on old wood, the pedicels 2 cm: long, minutely
sericeous, with a minute bractlet near the middle; calyx shallowly trilobate,
minutely sericeous, the lobes obtuse; petals rounded-elliptic, very thick and
fleshy, sparsely and minutely sericeous outside, strongly concave, the outer
ones § mm. long, the inner slightly shorter.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 716051, collected along the
Rio Faté6, Province of Colén, Panama, altitude 100 meters or less, July, 1911,
by H. Pittier (no. 3871).
Here probably belongs a fruiting specimen, Mazon 6890, from the Rio
mar. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 103
Chinilla, Canal Zone. The berries are globose, 1.5 cm. in diameter, gla-
brous, red at maturity, and long-stipitate. The single globose seed is deeply
pitted.
Pittier states that the vernacular name Is “‘yaya,’’ and that the soft wood
is used for building purposes. The genus is a South American one, and no
species has been known previously from North America. Species from
Central America formerly placed in Unonopsis are now referred to Desmopsis.
Trichilia unifoliola Blake & Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub or small tree 3-6 m. high; branchlets nearly or quite glabrous;
leaves alternate, 1-foliolate, very rarely 3-foliolate; petioles flattened and
hispidulous above, 1-3.3 cm. long; leaflet sessile or obscurely ‘petiolulate,
oval or oblong-oval, sometimes slightly obovate-oblong, 4-12 cm. long, 2.2—
5.5 em. wide, obtuse or retuse, often with short blunt apiculation (2.5 mm.
long or less), cuneate to rounded and usually unequal at base, usually firm,
deep green and somewhat shining above, glabrous on both sides except for
the often barbatulate cups in the axils of the veins beneath, prominulous-
reticulate on both sides, the principal veins 6-S pairs, whitish and prominent
beneath; panicles axillary and terminating the branchlets, subsessile, about
1 em. long and thick, 3-fid, densely flowered; flowers sessile; calyx 2 mm.
long, glabrous, the teeth 5, very short, obtuse, obscurely ciliolate; petals 5,
free, oblong, 3.8 mm. long, obtuse, glabrous; stamens 10, 3.8 mm. long, the
filaments alternately unequal, connate for nearly half their length into a
glabrous tube, the free portions hirsute on margin and inside, cuspidate-
bifid at apex, the anthers glabrous; ovary densely strigose, inserted in a
fleshy, crenately 10-lobed disk about half its length, 3-celled; style glabrous,
thick, about equaling ovary, the stigma small; capsule subglobose, warty,
short-pilose, 7 mm. thick, brownish, 3-seeded.
Panama: Sabana de Juan Corso, near Chepo, Oct. 1911, H. Pittier 4755
(type no. 679918, U. S. Nat. Herb.). Near Punta Paitilla, Piper 5426;
Standley 26314, 30810. Bella Vista, Standley 25333. Near Matias Her-
nindez, Standley 28881. Between Matias Hernandez and Juan Diaz,
Standley 31989. Near big swamp east of Rio Tecumen, Standley 26685.
All the specimens cited are from the Province of Panama, where the
plant is common in thickets. The species seems clearly to be a derivative
of Trichilia trifolia L., agreeing with it in flowering and fruiting char-
acters, but differing in its almost always solitary leaflet, much larger
than those of T. irifolia and of different outline. Two of the specimens
examined show on the flowering branchlets one or two small leaves that
bear a single lobe on one side at the base of the leaflet, or occasionally a
single small lateral leaflet, rarely a third abortive one. Trichilia trifolia
has a rather wide range in America, from Mexico to Venezuela and the
islands off the Venezuelan coast, but it is not known in Panama, where it
appears to be entirely replaced by T. unifoliola.
Bernardia macrophylla Standl., sp. nov.
Erect shrub 1.5-2.5 meters high; branchlets densely covered with very
short ascending hairs; petioles 3-10 mm. long; leaf blades oblanceolate-
oblong or oblong-obovate, 11-19 cm. long, 3.5-8.5 em. wide, acute or acu-
104 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 5
minate, cuneately narrowed to the base, penninerved, crenate-serrate,
copiously pilose on both surfaces with short simple hairs, the lateral nerves
about 12 on each side; staminate spikes axillary, 3-4 em. long, much inter-
rupted, the rachis hirtellous with ascending hairs, the bracts broadly ovate,
many-flowered; pistillate spikes terminal, many-flowered, about 2.5 cm.
long, the flowers sessile; capsule 5 mm. long, covered with minute appressed
hairs.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,218,687, collected in moist
thicket near the Rfo Tecumen, Province of Panama, Panama, ‘near sea
level, Jan. 3, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 29389). Nos. 29380 and 29471
from the same locality belong to this species.
The nearest relative of the Panama plant is B. corensis (Jacq.) Muell.
Arg., in which the leaves are relatively broader, mostly obtuse, coarsely
crenate, and with few lateral nerves.
Opuntia salvadorensis Britt. & Rose, sp. nov.
Plant 8-10 em. high, much branched and spreading; joints flattened,
orbicular to short-oblong, 10-15 cm. long, glabrous; areoles rather few, 1.5—-
3 em. apart, small, circular, bearing tawny felt; spines usually 1 to 3, very
unequal, slender-acicular, the longest ones up to 6 em. long, white or be-
coming tawny; flowers yellow; petals about 2 em. long; ovary about 2.5 cm.
long, obovoid, bearing small areoles without spines; fruit not seen.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,207,015, collected by Dr.
Salvador Caler6én at the Hacienda La Concordia, Departamento de Usulu-
tan, El Salvador, January 19, 1924 (no. 2100).
No species of Opuntia has heretofore been reported from El Salvador,
although it is quite possible that there may be several native species. We
should refer this species to the series T'wnae as limited in our monograph of
the cactaceae. It is probably to be placed nearest O. triacantha and O.
antillana, two West Indian species.
Tontanea glabra (Bartl.) Stand.
Coccocipsilum glabrum DC. Prodr. 4: 397. 1830.
This species, described from Panama from specimens collected presum-
ably by Née over a century ago, has not been found again until recently. It
was collected near Fort Lorenzo, Canal Zone, March, 1923, by C. V. Piper
(no. 5983).
Evea guapilensis Standl., sp. nov.
Stem suffrutescent, simple, terete, about 25 cm. high, green, glabrous,
the internodes 2-5 cm. long, stipules green, persistent, 1 cm. long or more,
bilobate, the lobes linear from a narrowly triangular base; petioles slender,
34 cm. long; leaf blades elliptic, 14-21 em. long, 6.5-9.5 em. wide, abruptly
short-acuminate at each end, thin, deep green and glabrous above, paler
beneath, sparsely hirtellous along the nerves; flower head terminal, solitary,
subsessile, 2 cm. in diameter, the bracts purplish green, rounded and apicu-
late at apex, densely furnished on both surfaces with soft slender multicel-
lular appressed hairs.
MAR. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 105
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,029, collected in wet
forest near Gudpiles, Province of Limén, Costa Rica, altitude about 500
meters, March 12-13, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 37025).
Evea nana Standl., sp. nov.
Stems suffrutescent, simple, 15 em. high, subterete, green, glabrous, the
internodes 1-2 cm. long; stipules green, persistent, glabrous, about 6 mm.
long, bilobate, the lobes oblong-linear; petioles slender, 3.5 cm. long; leaf
blades oblong-elliptic, 15-16 cm. long, 6 cm. wide, acuminate at each end,
thin, glabrous, deep green above, paler beneath; flower head terminal, soli-
tary, on a stout peduncle about 2 cm. long, in fruit about 3 cm. in diameter,
dense; bracts bright purple, broad, glabrous; nutlets 4 mm. long, grayish,
obscurely tricostate dorsally, plane on the inner surface.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,871, collected in open
thicket on hills north of Frijoles, Canal Zone, Panama, Dec. 19, 1923, by
Paul C. Standley (no. 27550).
Although a single specimen in rather poor condition is at hand, it is evi-
dent that the species represented is something quite distinct from anything
previously reported from Central America.
Pyschotria chagrensis Standl., sp. nov.
Densely branched shrub 1-2 m. high, the branches slender, terete, gla-
brous, very leafy; stipules 8-10 mm. long, triangular-ovate, long-cuspidate,
thin, brown, caducous; petioles slender, 4-12 mm. long; leaf blades elliptic-
obovate, 4-8.5 cm. long, 2-3 cm. wide, usually abrupt-acuminate, with
acute tip, at base usually abruptly and cuneately decurrent, thin, glabrous,
slightly paler beneath; flowers mostly terminal, in a few-flowered head,
surrounded by thin brown glabrous bracts similar to the stipules, the flowers
sessile, enclosed in large bractlets; calyx limb brown, the lobes linear; corolla
white, glabrous outside, villous in the throat, the tube 4 mm. long, ampliate
above, the 5 lobes spreading, less than half as long as the tube; fruit oval,
5 mm. long, multicostate, glabrous.
Type in the U. §. National Herbarium, no. 1,215,962, collected along
stream in wet forest, Barro Colorado Island. Canal Zone, Panama, Jan. 17,
1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 31373). The following specimens also be-
long here:
Panama: Chagres, Fendler 110. Porto Bello, Pittier 2433. Barro
Colorado Island, Standley 31370. Fort Sherman, Canal Zone, Standley
31109.
NicaraGcua: San Juan del Norte, Puttier 9657.
No other American Psychotria known to the writer has a similar inflores-
cence.
Diodia denudata Standl., sp. nov.
Erect perennial herb 30-100 cm. high, branched, the branches stout,
quadrangular, glabrous, the angles narrowly winged, the wings green, with
smooth margins; stipular sheath puberulent, the margin bearing numerous
scabrous-margined bristles 4-9 mm. long; leaves short-petiolate, the blades
ovate-elliptic to narrowly elliptic, 3-5 cm. long, 1-2.5 cm. wide acute, ab-
ruptly decurrent at base, deep green above, paler beneath, scaberulous on
106 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 5
both surfaces; flowers sessile in dense axillary clusters about 6 mm. in diam-
eter, the subtending leaves much reduced above or obsolete, the upper
flower clusters usually about 4 mm. in diameter; calyx lobes 4, triangular,
acute, 0.5 mm. long, green, scaberulous-ciliolate; corolla white, exceeding
the calyx lobes; fruit subglobose, bisulcate, 1 mm. long, scaberulous, separat-
ing into 2 indehiscent cocci.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,154,022, collected on wet
stream bank along the Rio Tapia, Province of Panama, Panama, near sea
level, Dec. 24, 1923, by Paul C. Standley (no. 28123). The following speci-
mens also belong here:
Panama: Rio Tecumen, Province of Panama, in moist forest, Standley
29364. Fort Lorenzo, Pzper 5895.
This plant is very unlike any other species known from North America,
but it is related to D. alata Nees & Mart. of Brazil. In that the wings of
the stem are wider and retrorse-aculeolate, and the calyx is 2-lobed.
Vernonia lankesteri Blake, sp. nov.
Shrubby, 2-3.3 m. high; branches stout, herbaceous, pithy, densely grise-
ous-lanate-tomentose, glabrescent; leaves alternate; petioles slender, pubes-
cent like the branches, 1.5-3.5 em. long; blades obovate, 12.5-21.5 cm.
long (including the decurrent base), 5-7.5 cm. wide, acuminate, at base long-
acuminate and narrowly decurrent on the petiole, serrate or serrulate ex-
cept toward base and apex (teeth about 1 mm. high, acutely callous-tipped,
3-8 mm. apart), papery, above deep dull green, densely and sordidly pubes-
cent on costa and veins with short several-celled subglandular hairs, sparsely
and finely so on surface, beneath paler green, griseous-subtomentose when
young, glabrescent except along the veins and veinlets, on surface densely
dotted with small, mostly yellow glands, penninerved, the chief lateral
veins 10-15 pairs, prominulous beneath, curved-anastomosing toward mar-
gin; heads in terminal or subterminal corymbiform panicles of 4-8, very
many-flowered; pedicels pubescent like the stem, 3-8.5 cm. long, thickened
below the heads; disk 2 em. high, about 2.5 cm. thick; involucre about 7-seriate,
strongly graduate, 1.5-1.7 em. high, the 5 outer series of phyllaries triangular
(outermost) to oblong-oval or oblong-obovate, with indurate greenish-white
bases and shorter, usually broader, spreading or loose, somewhat nervose,
herbaceous tips (those of the outermost phyllaries linear or lanceolate, acutish,
of the others deltoid, obtuse or rounded), scantily appressed-tomentose, the
middle ones 3-5 mm. wide, the 2 inner series erect, oblong, essentially gla-
brous, with brownish, subscarious, obtuse to acuminate tips; corollas
“Amparo purple (Ridgway), 19 mm. long (tube 5 mm., throat cylindric,
Smm.,teeth 6 mm.), sparsely glandular; achenes (submature), blackish brown,
glabrous, 5-angled, 2 mm. long; pappus yellowish white, the outer setae
similar to inner but shorter, 1—2.5 mm. long, the inner about 4.2 mm. long.
Costa Rica: La Palma, altitude 1500 meters, Nov., 1897, C. Wercklé
_ 11604. In roadside undergrowth, Santa Clara de Cartago, 23 Feb., 1924,
C. H. Lankester 712 (type no. 1,207,014, U. 8. Nat. Herb.). La Hondura,
Province of San José, March, 1924, Standley 36602.
The specimen collected by Wercklé has been identified by Dr. H. A.
Gleason as Vernonia salvinae Hemsl., and the Costa Rican portion of the
range given in the North American Flora? for that species is doubtless de-
233: 81. 1922.
MAR. 4, 1925 REINHARD: HOPLISUS COSTALIS 107
rived from this specimen. In V. salvinae, as described by Hemsley and
exemplified by two specimens from Chiapas now before me, the heads are
only 1 to 3; the leaves are evenly strigose-pilose over the whole surface
beneath; and the considerably broader phyllaries have shining, glabrous,
more or less purplish brown, indurated bases, and their tips are acuminate
or apiculate and (except in the innermost) short-strigose and more or less
glandular. ;
ENTOMOLOGY.—The wasp Hoplisus costalis, a hunter of tree-
hoppers. Epwarp G. REINHARD, Canisius College (Communi-
cated by 8S. A. RoHwEr).
About twenty nests of the solitary wasp Hoplisus costalis (Cress.)
were found scattered among the burrows of a large colony of bee-
hunting wasps, Philanthus gibbosus, at Woodstock, Maryland, during
the summers of 1922 and 1923. The site of this community was a
sandy path, loosely paved with bricks and sheltered by a long balcony.
Exteriorly, the burrow of Hoplisus is indicated by a small mound
of sand, in expanse no larger than the area which could be covered
by the palm of one’s hand. The nest entrance is always concealed
under a covering of sand. A straw probe quickly finds the hidden
doorway. From thence a slanting shaft penetrates the earth for
five or six inches, making a moderate dip of about 30 degrees with
the horizontal surface. At a depth of two inches the gallery is
terminated by a scattered group of cells, each of which is stored with
sufficient food to nourish a single Hoplisus during its larval growth.
Every nursling receives for its nutriment a common diet of tree-
hoppers, but the communistic system does not distribute an equal
share to all. Of the 34 larvae whose provisions were listed, seven
enjoyed six pieces of game, nine had five, seventeen had four, and
one had only three articles to satisfy its appetite.
The victims that are selected by Hoplisus for the nourishment of
her grubs are all tree-hoppers, all members of the great Homopterous
family Membracidae.t In hunting these Membracids the wasp
shows no exclusive preference for any particular species, but she does
seem to restrict her choice to the mature adults, as if deeming the
mere undeveloped nymphs undesirable game. I have taken more than
a dozen different species of tree-hoppers from the nests which Hop-
1G. P. Barth states of Gorytes canaliculatus: ‘‘The prey of the wasp seems to be
exclusively leaf-hoppers of the species Cyrtolobus fenestratus Fitch and Atymna inornata
Say.”’ Cyrtolobus and Atymna however are Membracidae, ‘‘tree-hoppers’’ therefore,
though the writer calls them “‘leat-hoppers”’ throughout his account, a term which com-
mon usage has restricted to the Jassidae.
108 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 5
lisus had provisioned in this neighborhood. Among these species
were: Ceresa bubalus Fabricius, Ceresa borealis Fairmaire, Telamona
monticola Fabricius, Telamona tristis Fitch, Telamona unicolor Fitch,
Thelia bimaculata Fabricius, Glossonotus crataegi Fitch, Archasia
galeata Fabricius, Cyrtolobus arcuatus Emmons?, Vanduzea arcuata
Say, Platycotis vittata Fabricius, Campylenchia latipes Say. These
Membracids were kindly determined for me by Mr. W. L. McAtee.
Hoplisus is a skilful huntress, but also a skilful paralyser. The
Membracids are stung to complete immobility. Once the wasp has
performed her surgical operation the victim becomes as quiet as a
wax model. This state of traumatic coma persists for about a week;
then the victim dies.
But is the skill of the paralyser always unerring and infallible?
The following fact suggests a negative answer. On August 4, I
examined a burrow of Hoplisus consisting of a shaft and a single cell.
In the corridor was the female wasp, and in the cell a solitary green
tree-hopper, Ceresa borealis. Far from being paralysed to immo-
bility the tree-hopper could thrash its legs about very vigorously, and
its wings also, though it could neither walk nor fly. These strenuous
muscular movements persisted through the entire day, but on the
following day the victim died, supposedly from exhaustion. Here was
a case where the wasp’s sting had brought about mere motor ataxia
instead of complete paralysis. Hoplisus had evidently bungled badly.
How can we exonerate her clumsiness? The first week of August
marks the appearance of the second generation, and a single cell,
provisioned with a single hopper, points to the very commencement
of the wasp’s active career. So let us say that it was the tyro’s first
operation; she was as yet a novice in wielding the lancet—and such
would be by no means a fictitious excuse.
Once a suitable victim is selected and properly paralysed, Hoplisus
proceeds to straddle her prey, venter to venter, grasping it close to
her body with her median legs, and in this attitude transports the
unresisting bug through the air. Most of the wasps carrying prey
succeed in landing squarely in front of their burrow, but not un-
frequently one or another happens to descend wide of the mark.
That is a mishap which necessitates an awkward portage along the
ground. The tree-hopper’s high back or projecting horns cause the
wasp many a tumble and a tussle before she finally gains the nest
with her burden.
When the wasp arrives at her burrow she scrapes it open and
enters without releasing her prey. But once inside she usually drops
MarR. 4, 1925 REINHARD: HOPLISUS COSTALIS 109
the hopper just within the vestibule, then turns around and pulls
the prey down after her into the depths of the nest.
The egg of Hoplisus costalis is about three millimeters long; smooth,
white, and bow-shaped. It is carefully tucked beneath the folded
legs of the tree-hopper, along one side of its broad breast. One end
is fixed to the metasternum near the hind coxa; the other arches
forward towards the hopper’s head.
Sometimes the wasp makes use of a curious appliance to hold her
precious egg in position. On the sternum of Membracidae, along-
side the middle leg, there is a projecting spur, a curved, blade-like
process. It forms with the adjoining coxa a deep notch. When
closed by the overlying femur this notch becomes a socket exactly
fitted to receive the wasp’s egg. When particularly careful the
mother slips the end of her egg into this natural pocket, thus clamp-
ing it more securely in place.
It takes but two days for the egg to hatch. Five days are spent
by the larva in consuming the tree-hoppers. Then the cocoon is
fashioned—an oblong-ovate capsule put together with silk and sand;
a neat and tough pupal casket, not without artistic merit.
The nests of this wasp are sometimes parasitized by a small
Tachinid. Two cells were unearthed on August 2, provisioned with
green tree-hoppers but each occupied by a Dipterous maggot. Three
days later these larvae formed their coarctate kegs, but the adult
flies failed to emerge. Mr. C. T. Greene, of the United States Bureau
of Entomology, examined the puparia, and found that they were the
pupal cases of Pachyophthalmus signatus Meigen. Two empty
pupuria of the same species were also taken from an old Hoplisus
cell in which there were the remains of four Membracids.
A bold and successful ravager of the nests of Hoplisus is her para-
sitic relative, the Nysson wasp, Brachystegus hoplisivora Rohwer.
The interesting activities of this Nysson parasite will be related in a
future paper.
Hoplisus costalis was described in 1872, under the generic name
Gorytes, by Cresson from a female collected in Texas. Since the male
has heretofore not been known, a brief description of it is here given.
The male differs from the female in the followmg points: Form
smaller and less robust; its color is brighter, and is of a more brilliant
black and a lighter yellow than the female; the basal half of the
flagellum is more darkly ferruginous beneath; the clypeus is black
with a median yellow spot; several yellow markings of the female,
viz., line on posterior orbits, spot on mandibles, spot on metanotum,
110 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 5
are not present in the male; the femora are black beneath, though
all are tipped with yellow; the wings are less densely smoked along
the costal margin; the anterior tarsi are without combs, and the
apical abdominal tergite is rounded convexly, not flattened like that
of the female.
Several specimens of both sexes bearing my label are preserved
in the collections of the United States National Museum. A reared
pair was presented also to the American Museum of Natural History.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
J. B. Esy resigned from the U. 8. Geological Survey, the end of Feb-
ruary, to engage in petroleum engineering in Texas.
Dr. R. B. Sosman, of the Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution
of Washington, will give a series of lectures on geophysics at the Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology in March and April.
On February 7 occurred the death of Wituiam Francis HILLEBRAND, a
man whose name is known wherever chemistry is taught or practised.
Dr. Hillebrand was born in Honolulu, December 12, 1858. After two
years at Cornell University (1870-72) he completed his training at the
Universities of Heidelberg and Strassburg and at the Mining Academy at
Freiberg. Returning to America he began practise as an assayer but
entered the laboratory of the U. 8. Geological Survey at Denver in 1880.
He was transferred to Washington in 1885 and the remaining forty years of
his life were spent here. In 1908 he became chief chemist of the Bureau of
Standards.
He made many important contributions to his chosen science but was best
known for his work on the analysis of rocks and minerals. Dr. Hillebrand
was the first chemist to make a practice of determining all of the so-called
minor constituents of minerals and rocks. His painstaking work in this field
provided much information of geological significance, and will undoubtedly
throw light on generalizations which are still to be made. His methods for
rock analysis were described in five Bulletins of the Geological Survey, the
last one, Bulletin 700, appearing in 1919. These bulletins have always been
in great demand. ‘Two of them were translated and published in Germany.
At the time of his death he had already spent a year in the preparation of a
book on inorganic analysis. Fortunately his notes are so complete that his
associate, G. E. F. Lundell, will be able to finish this work.
Dr. Hillebrand was one of the world’s great chemists because of his knowl-
edge in his chosen field and because of his absolute honesty of purpose and
the high standards he set for himself. His attitude toward his work and his
achievements in it inevitably brought recognition from his fellow scientists.
He was President of the Washington Chemical Society in 1903 and of the
American Chemical Society in 1906, at a critical time in the history of that
organization. He was a member of the American Philosophical Society and
of the National Academy of Sciences. In 1916 Columbia University awarded
him the Chandler medal for his attainments in chemistry. He was a charter
member of the ACADEMY.
—_—_
oe wae a ee
ee wehtoes 4
_
wet
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Thursday, March 5. The Entomological Society.
Saturday, March7. The Philosophical Society, at the Cosmos Club. Program:
C. L. Mircseti: West Indian hirricanes and other revolving tropical
storms of the North AtlanticOcean. R.L.SaNnrorp: The detection of flaws
by magnetic analysis.
Wednesday, March 11. The Philosophical Society, special meeting, 3.30
P.M.,at Bureau of Standards. Program: Prof. P. Drsys: The quantum
theory and its bearing on the classical laws of the conservation of energy
and momentum. i
Thursday, March 12. The Chemical Society.
. Saturday, March 14. The Biological Society.
Tuesday, March 17. The Anthropological Society.
Wednesday, March 18. The Entomological Society.
Thursday, March 19. The AcaprEmy.
*
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE ~
JOURNAL
Saturday, February 14. The Biological Society. Program: Epgar Brown: The
longevity of buried seeds. E. P. Watxer: Commercial development of Blue Fox
farming in Alaska. H. L. Suanrz: Collecting experiences in Hast Africa.
Thursday, February 19. The Acapemy and the affiliated biological societies. Program:
Undesirable immigrants. Speakers: J. R. Mouiuer (Animal diseases); C. L.
Manuatt (Plant diseases); L. Kotz (Human diseases).
CONTENTS
OriainaL PAPERS
Physics.—Thermoelectric measurement of cutting tool temperatures.
te SHORE! ALE cae = sehen RMAC Yee SNS MBE Sig, Sd
he, a Spectroscopy.—Regularities in the are spectrum of nickel. Prancrs M.
; BOR SPS Lest ie buck la§ sh ete wAbie Sef. 2) ofan le vis elas anooh fen a a em
Botany.—New plants from iGesiont Kenora Ti Pau C. STanDLEY.....
Bea Entomology.—The wasp Hoplisus costalis, a hunter of tree-hoppers. ‘Epwa
REINHARD.......... WOH > Came ma He aN eT Eee 6h. asa
:
Screntiric Notes aNp NEWS.......... SALA, Gatton Abe YS NT Wl ra 2: pee
/ *
OFFICERS. OF THE ACADEMY
President: VeRNoN L. Kettoaa, National Research Council. 4
Corresponding decal Francis B. SrusBex, Bureau of secs
ad
Marc 19, 1925 No. 6
JOURNAL
OF THE
BOARD OF EDITORS
E.P.Kuue - D. F. Hewett S. J. Maucuty
NATIONAL MUSECM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY 3 DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
,
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L, H. Apams S. A. Ronwar
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGIOAL SOCIETY
E, A. GoLDMAN G. W. Stosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Griacs J. R. Swanton”
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WIcHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY ‘
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THB
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anp GUILFORD AVES.
Bautmore, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Claes Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
Made in United States of America
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences:
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishe
(1) short arigmal papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JOURNAL is issued —
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; 2 manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journal for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate —
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character, The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof .—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy ‘s followed.
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4,75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or ronnie
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume 18...........++- ass i es Semen ss
Semi-monthly numbers...............000+0+
Monthly numbers........:..6....0+008 Seg seks tea aise
Remittances should be made payable to “‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges—The Jougnat does not exchange with other publications. :
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made a
within thirty days after date of the following issue. :
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. i
;
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Von. 15 Marcu 19,1925 No. 6
TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM.—Terrestrial magnetism in_ the
Twentieth Century... DanteL L. Hazarp, Coast and Geodetic
Survey.
One of the early presidents of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science in his presidential address likened himself
to a biennial plant, which for the first year devotes itself to storing up
a reserve supply of plant food and in the second year bursts into
flower. The character of the flower is an indication of the adequacy
of the stored food supply. The president of this society is in much
the same category.
The close of the Nineteenth Century witnessed a marked quickening
of interest in the study of the earth’s magnetism, of which one evidence
was the expansion of the magnetic work of the United States Coast
and Geodetic Survey, the establishment of a separate division of
terrestrial magnetism, and the inauguration of a magnetic survey of
the United States.
Now, after the lapse of a quarter of a century, it will not be amiss
to take account of stock and see to what extent our knowledge has
been increased and how far we have advanced toward the solution of
the perplexing problems of the causes of the earth’s magnetism and its
variations.
It must be borne in mind that the science of terrestrial magnetism
is comparatively young. Although Gilbert in 1600 conceived the idea
of the earth as a great magnet, similar to a spherical lodestone, he
had almost no observational data with which to test his theory, and
it was not until 1838 that a fairly correct idea of the nature of the
1 Address of the retiring president of the Philosophical Society of Washington,
presented at the meeting on January 10, 1925. Received January 24, 1925.
1il
112 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
earth’s magnetism and its distribution was developed by Gauss from
his analysis of the results at that time available. With the character
of the phenomenon established, the natural philosophers were quick
to realize the importance of observations more widely distributed over
the earth as a prerequisite for a more effective study.
On the initiative of Humboldt and Gauss, supported by Herschell,
Kupffer, and Sabine, there was developed one of the earliest cases of
international cooperation for the study of a world-wide phenomenon,
which was remarkably successful when the conditions of transportation
and communication at that time are considered. Magnetic surveys
were undertaken, observers were sent to regions where magnetic
observations had not previously been made, including the expedition
of Ross to the vicinity of the magnetic south pole, and magnetic
observatories were established about 1840, at widely separated points,
for the study of the variations of the earth’s magnetism. In spite of
the imperfect instruments then available, the operation of these
observatories served to establish the principal features of the short
period variations of the earth’s magnetism. Some of them were
discontinued at the close of the limited period for which international
cooperation had been arranged, but others continued in operation
much longer, some (as the one at Toronto, Canada) even to the present
day. It is of interest to recall that, thanks to the zeal of A. D. Bache,
later Superintendent of the Coast Survey, a magnetic observatory was
operated at Girard College, Philadelphia, from 1841 to 1845, and that
variation observations were made in this city from 1840 to 1842.
One of the observatories established by Russia was at Sitka, Alaska,
and was in operation from 1842 to 1867. The results obtained brought
out the fact that the variations of the earth’s magnetism are different
in different magnetic latitudes and called attention to the probability
of some relationship between the presence of sun spots and the occur-
rence of auroras and magnetic storms on the earth. The desire for
more information regarding the connection between these two ter-
restrial phenomena led to further international cooperation in the
establishment of a ring of temporary magnetic observatories around the
borders of the Arctic Ocean to be operated for three years from 1882.
From that time on the interest in the study of the earth’s magnetism
steadily increased, not only in the extension of magnetic surveys and
in the operation of additional magnetic observatories, but also in the
discussion of the results and investigations regarding the cause of the
phenomenon.
In most countries the magnetic observatories were established as an
MAR. 19, 1925 HAZARD: TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 113
adjunct to existing meteorological observatories and given a subordi-
nate position. At the meeting of the International Meteorological
Conference held in Paris in 1896, however, recognition was given to
the growing importance of the science of terrestrial magnetism by the
appointment of a Permanent Commission for Terrestrial Magnetism
and Atmospheric Electricity.
A fresh impulse was given to the growth of interest by the appear-
ance in 1896 of the Journal of Terrestrial Magnetism edited by Bauer,
with the cooperation of most of the leading magneticians of the world.
This provided a medium for the interchange of ideas and a forum for
the discussion of problems of international import of much greater
value than the triennial meetings of the international commission and
helped to prepare the way for more ready acquiesence in recommenda-
tions of the commission requiring international codperation or agree-
ment.
The investigations of the Nineteenth Century had shown that definite
conclusions regarding the causes of the earth’s magnetism and its
variations could not be reached until more accurate, more detailed,
and more widely distributed observations had been made, and the
first quarter of the Twentieth Century has been characterized by
almost world-wide activity in the accumulation of observational data.
More or less detailed magnetic surveys have been made by nearly
every civilized country, new magnetic observatories have been
established, instruments and methods of observing have been im-
proved, greater homogeneity of results has been secured by national
and international comparisons of instruments, and a fuller and more
prompt publication of results has been the rule.
In this accumulation of data the United States has played a most
important part, and that it has done so is largely the result of the
energy and persistence of Dr. Louis A. Bauer. His efforts in 1899,
backed by those of Dr. Henry 8. Pritchett, at that time Superin-
tendent of the Coast and Geodetic Survey, resulted in the appropria-
tion of funds necessary for the expansion of the magnetic work of that
bureau, so that it became possible to make a general magnetic survey
of the country, including the islands under its jurisdiction and parts
of Alaska, and to establish and operate five widely separated magnetic
observatories. This work was planned and the magnetic survey
carried well toward completion under his direction.
Designed primarily to meet the practical needs of the navigator
and surveyor, this survey at the same time supplied the data needed
for the study of the problems of the earth’s magnetism.
114. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
Realizing that only a small portion of the earth’s surface is occupied
by. the civilized nations and that it would be extremely difficult to
secure governmental funds for work to be done outside a country’s
jurisdiction, Bauer presented to the trustees of the Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington a plan for the establishment of a bureau for inter-
national magnetic research, including a world magnetic survey to
supplement the work being done by other agencies. This plan was
approved, and the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of the
Carnegie Institution of Washington was established in April, 1904.
While in charge of the magnetic work of the Coast and Geodetic
Survey Bauer had satisfied himself of the feasibility of making magne-
tic observations at sea with nearly the same accuracy as on land, if a
suitable vessel could be obtained. His plan for the world survey,
therefore, included provision for a magnetic survey of the ocean areas
by means of a non-magnetic vessel. This work at sea was carried on
successfully from 1905 to 1921, first on the ‘‘Galilee,”’ a chartered
sailing vessel, and later on the ‘Carnegie,’ a sailing vessel with
auxiliary power, built for the purpose so nearly free of magnetic
material as to practically eliminate the need of taking account of
deviation corrections.
While this work at sea was carried on primarily for scientific
purposes, it had great immediate practical value in that it provided
the means for correcting the existing world isogonic charts, which were
found to be seriously in error because of the insufficient data on which
they were based.
At the same time magnetic observers were sent to nearly all accessi-
ble regions where magnetic surveys were not being made under other
auspices and to some regions usually thought of as inaccessible. Asia,
Africa, South America, Central America, Mexico, were all the field
of these far-reaching operations. In some instances, as in Canada, one
season’s work by an observer of the Department of Terrestrial Magnet-
ism of the Carnegie Institution of Washington was sufficient to
stimulate local interest to a point where means were provided for
continuing the work under local auspices. Advantage was taken of
these world-wide travels to secure comparisons of instruments with
the standards of the various magnetic observatories and other agencies
engaged in making magnetic surveys, thus insuring a greater homo-
geneity of results, in some cases calling attention to defective in-
struments and in general emphasizing the importance of better in-
struments and methods.
MarR. 19, 1925 HAZARD: TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 115
Some idea of the magnitude of the work done in this world magnetic
survey may be gained from the statement that it covered all the ocean
areas from latitude 70° north to 60° south, nearly all of the land areas
from 30° north to 60° south, excepting India and the Dutch East
Indies, and in addition parts of China, Persia, and Canada.
During the same period governmental magnetic surveys have been
made in India, New Zealand, Dutch East Indies, South Africa, Canada,
and Russia (including Siberia), and resurveys have been made of
Japan and the British Islands, and in France, Prussia, and other
European countries. Thus it will be seen that during the past 25
years there has been executed a world magnetic survey covering
practically the whole surface of the earth between latitude 70° north
and 60° south.
At the same time the making of magnetic observations has been
recognized as an important part of the work of an exploring expedition,
and as a result much information has been obtained regarding condi-
tions in regions which would not ordinarily be reached. This is
particularly true of the polar regions. The Ziegler expedition to
Teplitz Bay in 1903 and 1904, Amundsen’s work in the vicinity of the
magnetic north pole, 1903-1906, and along the north coast of
Siberia in 1918-1921, and the work of MacMillan’s two expedi-
tions served to reduce materially the size of the magnetically un-
explored region around the north pole, while the various South
Polar expeditions, German, French, British, and Australasian, between
1902 and 1912, supplied a large amount of valuable information re-
garding magnetic conditions on the borders of the Antarctic continent,
and served to locate the position of the south magnetic pole within
narrow limits. The operation of temporary magnetic observatories by
some of the expeditions made possible a comparison of the magnetic
variations in polar regions with those in lower latitudes, the value of the
comparison being enhanced by cooperation at a number of leading
observatories in the form of a more open time scale on the magneto-
grams at specified times.
While there were plenty of magnetic observatories in operation 25
years ago, their distribution was very unsatisfactory. Out of about
40 making reports, 70 per cent were in Europe; there was only one in
North America (Toronto), none in South America, and only four in
the Southern Hemisphere. With the new observatories established
since that time there has been a great improvement in the geographical
distribution, so that more than 50 per cent of the present active
116 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
observatories are outside of Europe and ten are in the Southern
Hemisphere. Here again the United States has taken a leading part.
Observatories have been operated by.the Coast and Geodetic Survey at
Cheltenham, Maryland; Tucson, Arizona; Vieques, Porto Rico;
Sitka, Alaska, and near Honolulu, Hawaii, and by the Department of
Terrestrial Magnetism at Watheroo, Australia, and Huaneayo,
Peru. Other new observatories at Cordova and New Year Island;
Argentina; Vassouras, Brazil; Apia, Samoa; Christ Church, New
Zealand; Dehra Dun, India; Helwan, Egypt; Sodankyla, Finland;
Meanook, Canada, have all helped to extend the area covered. At
the same time some of the older observatories have been discontinued
and others have been compelled to move to new sites because of the
encroachments of electric car lines and other industrial developments.
Improved methods and instruments have added materially to the
accuracy of the results. In the development of new and improved
field instruments the Department of Terrestrial Magnetism has been
particularly active, to meet the very varied conditions under which it
has had to operate, especially in the matter of observations at sea.
The design of a portable galvanometer for use with the earth inductor
has made it possible to use that instrument in the field in place of the
dip circle, and the addition of a special device for rotating the coil of
the earth inductor adapted it for use on board ship. The marine
collimator permits more accurate declination observations at sea and
the sea deflector provides a method of determining directly the hori-
zontal intensity on board ship. Magnetometers have been improved
to secure greater ease of handling, adjustment and transportation,
and various combination instruments have been devised for use where
a very light compact outfit is essential.
The sine galvanometer, of which three types have been developed,
provides an electrical method for determining the horizontal intensity,
combining rapidity with great accuracy. It is particularly well
adapted for a standard instrument, but not well suited for field use.
The variometers designed by Eschenhagen, with very small magnets,
have permitted the erection of smaller observatory buildings for the
variation instruments and a decrease in the cost of operation, since it
is possible to have three variometers record on a single photographic
sheet. More complete control of the instrumental constants is also
provided.
With so much energy being devoted to the collection of observational
data, it would not be surprising to find a falling off in the attention
Mar. 19, 1925 HAZARD: TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 117
paid to the discussion of results; but this has been true only to the
extent that the utilization of the data has not kept pace with its
accumulation. There has been no falling off in the zeal with which
magneticians have attacked the problems awaiting solution. Many
of those who had taken a prominent part in the investigations of the
last half of the Nineteenth Century have gone one by one, leaving
their places to be filled by a younger generation. Schott, Eschenhagen,
Wild, von Bezold, Snellen, Bérgen, Sutherland, Fritsche, Bidlingmaier,
Neumayer, Riicker, Birkeland, and Leyst are among those whose
names will always be recalled when reviewing the progress during that
period.
The fundamental problem of the cause of the earth’s magnetism -
and its variations, attacked from many sides and with various weapons,
has thus far withstood the attack. One theory after another has been
advanced only to be withdrawn before the irresistable assault of ob-
served facts. Some theories fitted well enough qualitatively, but
were entirely inadequate when quantity was taken into account, while
others which seemed plausible at one stage of our knowledge had to
be discarded when our knowledge increased.
Advances in other fields of science have been seized upon in the hope
that they might furnish a clue to the mystery of the earth’s magnetism.
Cathode rays, the electronic theory of matter, the constitution of the
sun, and the probable condition of the interior of the earth are all being
studied as to their possible bearing on the magnetic field of the earth.
Gilbert’s conception of the earth as a great magnet uniformly
magnetized about its axis of rotation, and subsequent modifications,
had to be discarded with the acceptance of a very high temperature for
the interior of the earth and the recognition of the demagnetizing
effect of heat, coupled with the small amount of magnetic material
found in the visible rocks. At the same time the magnitude of the
anomalies (the departures from a uniform magnetization) indicated
the presence of large masses of magnetic material not far from the
surface. Recent investigations in various fields have suggested the
possibility that some of the properties of matter subjected to very
great pressure may be materially different from those observed in the
laboratory at ordinary pressures. Susceptibility to magnetization
may be one of those properties, and the Department of Terrestrial
Magnetism, with the cooperation of the Geophysical Laboratory of the
Carnegie Institutionof Washington, is arranging a series of experiments
designed to test the matter.
118 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 6
Nippoldt, in 1921, returned to the idea of the earth as a magnetized
sphere, because of the difficulty of providing a satisfactory system of
electric currents to account for the observed magnetic field. He
advanced the theory that the principal part of the earth’s magnetic
field consists of a non-homogeneous magnetization of the earth’s crust
down to a depth of about 20 kilometers. In addition, there may exist
for the earth’s nucleus a magnetic field symmetrical both about the
axis of rotation and about the equatorial plane which may have arisen
in the same manner as the general magnetic field of the sun. He
assumed that the proportion of magnetite in the earth’s crust Increases
with depth below the surface, but that the distribution is not homo-
geneous. He also assumed an inner core composed of iron, nickel, and
cobalt, as suggested by geophysicists, with the possibility that it may
be susceptible of magnetization in spite of the high temperature, in
view of the magnetic effects observed on the sun by Hale.
Adolph Schmidt points out that even on the assumption that at a
depth of 20 kilometers the earth’s crust is composed entirely of magne-
tite, the average susceptibility would not be great enough to account
for the observed conditions at the surface.
When it became apparent that the conception of the earth as a
permanent magnet could not be sustained, the idea was advanced that
the earth’s magnetic field might be due to electric currents flowing
about the earth, either below the surface or in the atmosphere—the
earth an electro-magnet. The mathematical analysis of the earth’s
field according to the method devised by Gauss and extended by Neu-
mayer and Petersen (1891), and Schmidt (1896), indicated that a small
portion of the earth’s magnetism, perhaps one-fortieth, could be
referred to forces outside the earth, another small portion to vertical
electric currents, but by far the larger part to a system of forces within
the earth. A new analysis made by Bauer in 1922, using improved
data based on modern observations, gave approximately the same
result. He reached the conclusion that for a satisfactory representa-
tion of the observed data it is necessary to recognize the existence of an
internal magnetic system constituting about 94 per cent of the total
field, and an external system and a non-potential system about equal
to each other in amount.
A comparison of his results with those previously obtained for the
epochs 1842 and 1885 indicated that the intensity of magnetization of
the earth had been decreasing during the 80 year period at an average
annual rate of 1 part in 1500, a rate of loss which it is hard to reconcile
MAR. 19, 1925 HAZARD: TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 119
with the age of the earth and the present intensity of magnetization
unless we suppose that there have also been periods of increasing
intensity.
Bauer also carried out the harmonic analysis separately for parallels
of latitude at 5° intervals from 60° south to 60° north and found an
apparent correlation between distribution of land and water and
intensity of magnetization, the intensity being greater for the parallels
falling largely on the land.
In an earlier (1911) discussion of the earth as an electro-magnet,
Bauer took the position that the system of magnetic forces within the
earth required by the Gaussian analysis might be the result of mag-
netizing currents outside the earth, namely, negative electric currents
circulating from west to east, but he later withdrew this hypothesis,
after further study of the problem. As it seems to be established that
the diurnal variations of the earth’s field and the disturbances must
be ascribed to outside currents, it would be much simpler to ac-
count for those changes if the field itself is due principally to outside
currents.
The idea of the earth as an electro-magnet naturally suggests the
possibilty that its magnetism may be caused by its rotation. This
possibility has been the subject of much study, particularly by Barnett,
who has shown experimentally that a piece of iron may be magnetized
by rotation; but the observed effect was much too small to account for
the earth’s magnetism. Swann attacked the problem mathematically
and concluded that any effect due to rotation would be too small to be
detected. In 1900 Sutherland suggested as a possible cause of the
earth’s magnetism the rotation of an electrostatic field within the earth
(a positively charged core and a negatively charged crust, or vice
versa), as Rowland’s experiments had proved that a moving charge of
electricity produces a magnetic field analagous to that of a current,
but this theory proved untenable when submitted to analysis.
The development of the electronic theory of matter with the atoms
consisting of a positively charged nucleus surrounded by negatively
charged electrons led Sutherland to suggest that if for some unknown
reason connected with gravitation the negative charge of the atom
was further from the center of the earth than the positive charge by
only 0.4 x 10-* cm., it would account for a magnetic field comparable
with that of the earth. Here again, when the theory was submitted
to analysis and the electronic theory was more fully developed, it was
seen that Sutherland’s hypothesis was untenable either qualitatively
or quantitatively.
120 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
Failing to find a satisfactory explanation of the earth’s magnetism
on the basis of the known properties of matter and the accepted laws of
electro-dynamics, J. J. Thomson, Sutherland, Bauer, and Swann have
suggested that we may have to look for some slight but fundamental
modification of those accepted laws, possibly as regards the mutual
attraction and repulsion of moving positive and negative electrons,
similar to a suggestion by H. A. Lorenz regarding the cause of gravita-
tion. Indeed there seems to be growing a belief that gravitation and
terrestrial magnetism are very closely allied and probably to be traced
to a common origin.
Realizing the difficulties in the way of a direct attack on the problem,
especially before more complete observational data was available,
many magneticians have turned their attention to a study of the
variations of the earth’s magnetism and their correlation with asso-
ciated phenomena, such as atmospheric electricity, earth currents,
auroras, sun spots, solar radiation, meteorological phenomena, hoping
in this way to throw light on the main problem. In particular,
magnetic storms, those irregular disturbances of large amplitude and
comparatively short duration, have been the subject of much study.
From the time of the earliest comparisons of photographic records
from widely separated observatories, it was recognized that the more
severe magnetic disturbances occur at practically the same time all
over the earth, and further comparative study of abrupt beginnings
and sharp turning-points indicated strict stmultaneity, the departures
therefrom being ascribed to errors inherent in the time measurements,
so that more accurate determination of the time of occurrence of such
salient features was suggested as a method of determining differences
of longitude. In fact, van Bemmelen, from the mean of 53 abrupt
beginnings, computed the difference of longitude between Batavia,
Java, and Greenwich, and obtained a value differing by only 9 seconds
from the one derived in the usual way.
On May 8, 1902, there occurred a magnetic storm, the abrupt
beginning of'which coincided with the eruptionof Mont Pelée, as nearly
as the time of that disastrous outbreak could be determined. This
apparent coincidence suggested the possibility that the two phenomena
might be related. Bauer made a study of this storm in 1910, based on
the records of 25 observatories, and reached the conclusion that it did
not begin at the same instant all over the earth, but on the contrary
had its origin in about longitude 75° west of Greenwich and traveled
eastwardly around the earth, requiring between three and four minutes
MAR. 19, 1925 HAZARD: TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 121
to complete the circuit. A similar study of another storm of dis-
tinctive features supported this conclusion.
For further evidence on this very important question, Faris made a
study of 15 abruptly beginning storms occurring in 1906-1909, using
the records of the five magnetic observatories of the Coast and Geodetic
Survey, and his results apparently confirmed Bauer’s conclusions, the
transmission time again coming out about 33 minutes. It was neces-
sary, however, to assume that some of the storms traveled from west to
east, ashad been suggested by Bauer. Faris pointed out that probably
the greater part of the error of determining the time of an abrupt
beginning is due to the difficulty of selecting the exact point of begin-
ning on the curve. Bauer accordingly secured reports from 23 obser-
vatories on the same storms which Faris had investigated, making an
effort to secure more homogeneous data by means of tracings of por-
tions of the curves showing the points selected for measurement. A
discussion of these more accurate data failed to confirm the conclusions
drawn irom the earlier investigations. Rodés also made a study of a
number of abrupt-beginning storms between 1910 and 1921 and found
no evidence of storm propagation of the character suggested by Bauer,
but he did find some indications that a terrestrial magnetic storm
may begin at the “tront meridian,’’ that portion of the earth, that is,
which would be the first to meet a stream of electrified particles
coming from the sun, occurring later on both sides of that meridian.
The close correlation between the occurrence of magnetic storms
and auroras and the presence of large spots on the sun naturally led to
attempts to trace a causal relationship. It was soon seen that a
direct magnetic effect by the sun was out of the question.. With the
development of the idea of currents of electricity being the cause of
the earth’s magnetism, different forms of electric discharge emanating
from the sun were successively put forth as the cause of the observed
terrestrial phenomena, the theories advanced keeping pace with the
development of our knowledge of electrical discharges in a vacuum.
Birkeland, Arrhenius, and Nordmann agreed in considering the
auroral rays as a luminescence produced by the absorption of cathode
rays in the upper atmosphere, and attracted toward the earth’s
magnetic poles. Birkeland, who devoted many years to the study of
auroras, first supposed that the cathode rays were emitted directly
from the sun, but later he advanced the modified theory that cathode
rays from the sun set up electric currents in the atmosphere which in
turn emit secondary cathode rays. He supported his theory by the
production of artificial auroras in the laboratory, about a magnetized
steel ball in a tube of rarefied air exposed to cathode rays. |
122 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
Paulsen in 1906, after calling attention to the difficulties with earlier
theories, sought to explain the aurora and magnetic storms by a strong
ionization of the upper layers of the atmosphere above the zone of
maximum frequency of the aurora.
Stérmer, who had worked with Birkeland in both his observational
and experimental studies of the aurora, knowing that the phenomenon
of the concentration of cathode rays toward a single magnetic pole had
been mathematically treated by Poinearé, thought it might be worth
while to determine mathematically the trajectories of electric corpus-
cles coming from the sun into the magnetic field of the earth, hoping
to bring out the principal features of the aurora. These studies began
in 1903 and covered a period of about ten years. Stérmer simplified
the problem at the outset by treating the earth as a spherical magnet
and neglecting the relative motion of the earth and sun and then
modified the results obtained for this simple case to correspond to the
more complex conditions actually existing. In this way he was able
to develop paths for the corpuscles which seemed to fit the general
features of the aurora as it appears in nature and of the artificial
aurora of Birkeland, and thus tended to strengthen the corpuscular
theory of its origin.
The correlation of magnetic storms with sun spots, although very
satisfactory when based on yearly averages, leaves much to be desired
when individual cases are considered. ‘Thus severe magnetic storms
sometimes occur when no large sun spots are visible and, on the other
hand, the appearance of a sun spot is not always accompanied by a
magnetic storm. ‘To account for this, Maunder advanced the theory
that the solar activity which gives rise to magnetic disturbances on the
earth does not act equally in all directions but along narrow well-
defined streams, not necessarily truly radial; that these streams arise
from active areas of limited extent; that these active areas are not only
the source of our magnetic disturbances but are also the seats of the
formation of sun spots; that these areas can be active both before a
spot has formed and after it has disappeared. The fact that large
magnetic storms frequently follow each other at an interval approxi-
mating the time of revolution of the sun and that such recurrence has
been traced for several rotation periods, not every recurrence being
accompanied by a visible sun spot, requires some such explanation as
that suggested by Maunder.
Chapman, after a detailed analysis of a number of magnetic storms,
attempted to show how some of their characteristics may be produced
MAR. 19, 1925 HAZARD: TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 123
by streams of electric particles entering the atmosphere from the sun,
but this theory, like so many others, failed to fit all the facts.
The researches of Hale at the Mt. Wilson Solar Observatory on the
evidence of magnetic polarity in the sun spots occurring in pairs and on
the general magnetic field of the sun have further stimulated the efforts
to trace a connection between solar and terrestrial magnetism and
opened the way for a study of the details of the sun’s magnetic field.
According to the most recent analysis by Seares, the sun’s magnetic
axis makes an angle of about 6° with the axis of rotation.
When we consider the diurnal variation of the earth’s magnetism a
different problem is presented. Here we have to deal with a phenom-
enon which is a function of local mean time, as contrasted with
magnetic storms, which, as we have seen, occur everywhere at practi-
cally the same absolute time. Attempts have been made to correlate
the diurnal variation with changes of pressure, temperature, humidity,
and other terrestrial phenomena which have a period the same as the
earth’s rotation, but without success. Broadly speaking the diurnal
variation is a function of the position of the sun above the horizon,
distinctly a local phenomenon. ‘The extremes and the principal por-
tion of the variation occur during the daytime. During the night |
hours there is comparatively little variation. In view of this fact, it
occurred to Bauer that the interposition of the moon between the earth
and the sun at the time of a solar eclipse might have an appreciable
effect on the earth’s magnetism. Accordingly he arranged for special
observations by observers of the Coast and Geodetic Survey at the
time of the total eclipse of May 28, 1900, at stations extending from
Alabama to Maryland. The results indicated a small but definite
disturbance associated with the passage of the moon’s shadow across
the place of observation and of the character to be expected. Similar
observations have been made at all accessible solar eclipses since that
time, principally on the initiative of the Department of Terrestrial
Magnetism of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, but with the
cooperation of other observers in the countries crossed by or contiguous
to the belt of totality. These have in general confirmed the results of
the first series, though the effect produced by an eclipse is so small that
it cannot be definitely recognized when ordinary magnetic disturbances
are In progress.
Much study has been given by Chree, Chapman, and others to the
details of the diurnal variation, particularly to a comparison between
conditions on quiet days and disturbed days and between conditions
124 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 6
in high and low magnetic latitudes. Material has been provided
for amore accurate study of those features which are not purely local,
such as the effect of change of geographic position on the form and
amplitude of the curves, through the publication by many observa-
tories of diurnal variation tables based on five internationally selected
quiet days, thus eliminating to a large extent the lack of homogeneity
which magnetic disturbances might introduce.
Still another problem is presented by the secular change of the
earth’s magnetism, which requires centuries for its development.
Time enough has not yet elapsed since the beginning of measurements
of the earth’s magnetism to fully determine the characteristics of this
change, but we do know that it does not go on indefinitely in one direc-
tion; eventually there is a reversal.
In the case of declination the records at some European stations go
back far enough to show two reversals, with a range, in the case of
London, of 35° in a little over 200 years. This suggested the idea of
periodicity and a motion of the magnetic pole as the cause of the secular
change, as it seemed possible to follow the occurrence of a particular
phase from east to west around the earth.
Data accumulated during the past 25 years show that the phenom-
enon is very complex. The change is by no means regular; the periods
indicated for different stations differ widely; unexpected reversals
occur and there are undoubtedly waves of shorter period superimposed
upon the primary wave, if indeed there is a primary wave. It is
impossible to predict with accuracy what conditions will be ten years
from now.
Bauer has made a mathematical analysis of the secular change of
the earth’s field as a whole, and has concluded that the system of forces
involved is partly within the earth and partly outside and that the
strength of the field is changing as well as its direction. It is not easy
to conceive of a system of forces acting for a long term of years to
produce such a great change in the direction of the earth’s magnetic
field. A loss of magnetism would not be surprising from our experience
with artificial magnets, but such a rapid loss as one part in 1500 per
year for 80 years or more requires verification on the basis of more
accurate secular change data for the whole earth.
Variation of solar activity has been suggested as one cause of the
secular change of the earth’s magnetism. The periodic change in the
number of sun spots, which is undoubtedly a symptom of varying solar
activity, is paralleled by an eleven-year period in the secular change,
mar. 19, 1925 HAZARD: TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 125
and Bauer has attempted to trace a relationship between changes in
the earth’s magnetism and the changes of solar activity indicated by
Abbott’s observations of the amount of heat given off by the sun.
Abbott’s observations have not yet been going on long enough, how-
ever, to draw any definite conclusions.
Any theory of the earth’s magnetism based on electric currents
either within or outside the earth must take account of the currents
actually observed, and one of the features of the progress of the past
twenty-five years has been the awakening of interest in the study of
atmospheric electricity and earth currents and the development of
instruments for measuring them which can be relied upon to give re-
sults of the required accuracy.
Before long we may also expect the increase in our knowledge of
radio transmission to throw light on electrical conditions of the
atmosphere at higher levels.
From this summary of the accomplishments in the field of terrestrial
magnetism during the first quarter of the Twentieth Century, it will
be seen that there has been no sudden increase in knowledge, no
epoch-making discovery, but just a steady advance. The old prob-
lems still confront us, but in a modified form. Their scope has broad-
ened tremendously and any theory to explain the earth’s magnetism
must take into account the structure of the atom as well as the struc-
ture of the universe. At the same time new weapons and new methods
of attack have become available and the workers in other fields of
science—astronomers, physicists, geologists, chemists—are now the
allies of the magneticians. Moreover, an accurate magnetic survey
of practically all of the accessible land and water areas and the opera-
tion of additional magnetic observatories, better distributed, have
provided us with reliable knowledge of the distribution of the earth’s
magnetism—the facts which must form the ultimate test of any theory.
Finally there has been an increasing recognition of the importance of
international cooperation, so well expressed by Riicker in 1898, when
he said: “For those who would unravel the causes of the mysterious
movements of the compass needle, concerted action is essential. They
cannot indeed dispense with individual initiative or with the leadership
of genius, but I think all would agree that there is urgent need for more
perfect organization, for an authority which can decide not only
what to do, but what to leave undone.” We may confidently expect
that the Section of Terrestrial Magnetism and Electricity of the
International Geodetic and Geophysical Union will eventually develop
into an organization of the character suggested by Riicker.
126 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
GEOLOGY.—A revision of the Pleistocene Period in North America,
based especially on glacial geology and vertebrate paleontology.
Outver P. Hay, Carnegie Institution of Washington.
1. EXPLANATORY
For some years the writer has been studying the fossil vertebrated
animals of the North American Pleistocene period in the endeavor to
determine the genera and species which then existed, the geological
stages during which the various species lived, thewr origin, their
distribution, and the causes of the disappearance of as many as did
disappear. Naturally, it has been necessary to study the geology of
the Pleistocene, in order to correlate the history of the animals with
the geology.
For the writer the Pleistocene is synonymous with the Glacial period.
As regards the beginning of this period, we may not know when the
first accumulations of ice began at the centers of radiation in Canada;
but we may credit to the Glacial period such phenomena in southern
British America and in the United States as (1) glacial drift produced
from a continuous sheet of ice; (2) moraines from local glaciers pro-
voked by a general lowering of the climate; (3) the disturbance of the
previous drainage. The close of the Pleistocene was marked by the
retreat of the last ice sheet to its center in Labrador.
I accept the results of the glacialists who seem to have established
the occurrence of five glacial and four interglacial stages. During
these stages there appear to have been produced such important ef-
fects, geological and biological, that they mark off as many distinct
divisions of the Pleistocene period; but not all of them have the same
value.
2. THE VICISSITUDES OF THE PLEISTOCENE VERTEBRATES
In considering the vertebrate palaeontology of North America during
the Pleistocene, the following facts need attention. Had it not been
for certain geological changes which occurred just before or at the
beginning of the Pleistocene, our continent would have been occupied
by animals very different from those found here when Columbus
made his discovery. The occupants would have been purely the
descendants of the late Tertiary animals. There would have been
found strange carnivores, probably various saber-tooth tigers; one-
toed, probably also three-toed horses; tapirs; various species of camels
MAR. 19, 1925 HAY: PLEISTOCENE IN NORTH AMERICA 127
and pececaries; short-jawed and long-jawed mastodons; possibly
rhinoceroses. However, movements of the earth’s crust opened the
gates of Asia and of South America and permitted hosts of vertebrates
to enter from those lands. From South America there arrived six or
more genera of giant ground-sloths, large and small armadillos,
glyptodons, and huge capybaras. <A few of these had filtered in during
the upper Pliocene, but most of them apparently during the wane of
the first glacial stage or early in the first interglacial.
From Asia there came, in at about the same time, elephants of
several species, the American mastodon, -probably most of the Pleis-
tocene and Recent dogs and cats, the bears, and the bisons, musk-
oxen, sheep, and reindeer; also moose of two or three genera. Hence,
shortly after the beginning of the Pleistocene, at least early in the first
interglacial stage, there was an abundant and varied fauna, the product
of three continents. There were copious materials from which new
forms might be evolved, and the environment seemed favorable.
What was the result?) When white men reached this country the fauna
had become impoverished. Orders, families, and genera, especially of
large mammals, which were present at an early stage of the Pleistocene,
had disappeared. All the great edentates, the ground-sloths, the
glyptodons, and the great armadillo Nothrotherium, also the capybaras,
sent north from South America, had perished. The saber-tooth tigers
had become extinct; the whole order of elephants and mastodons had
been swept away. Of more than a dozen species of horses which had
existed, none was left. Of six or more kinds of bisons, only one
remained.
Had other forms been evolved to take the places of those species
which had been exterminated? Assuredly, during that time no new
family had been evolved. Probably not even a new genus had come
into existence. It may be that certain forms had developed some of
the small differences that mark species. It was, however, a time of
extinction of species, and a time of little evolution. How can we
account for this zoological catastrophe? The interglacial stages were
certainly favorable for plant and animal life. Apparently it was the
glacial stages which brought about the extinction of so many imposing
animal forms. The reasons are clear. The area for occupation was
greatly diminished by the ice sheets. Much of the remaining area was
made inhospitable to most animals and to their habitual food-plants.
Snow storms and cold rains must have prevailed far southward and
been conducive to the extinction of the less hardy species.
128 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
3. THE STAGES OF THE PLEISTOCENE
The stages of the Pleistocene are shown below. We know little from
actual discovery about the vertebrate life of the first glacial stage,
the Nebraskan; but it must have been made up of some species from
South America, some from Asia, but principally of native species
remaining over from the Pliocene. Many of the latter must have
succumbed to the inclemencies of the climate. Whenthe warm inter-
glacial Aftonian came on, there were present, from persistence or
from recent immigration, saber-tooth tigers, elephants (among them’
Elephas imperator), mastodons of several species, a dozen or more
species of horses, several species of bisons, tapirs, camels, numerous
ground-sloths, forming thus a rich fauna. Next came the Kansas
glacial stage. After that stage we find few saber-tooths, no Hlephas
imperator, few species of horses, no camels, few species of ground-sloths,
no glyptodons, no capybaras. The first glacial stage had thus almost
annihilated the descendants of the Plhocene mammals, not inured to a
severe climate. The second glacial stage had nearly wiped out the
South American contingent. The survivors were mostly of northern
Asiatic origin, hardened to an inclement environment. Hlephas
imperator had probably reached North America from southern Asia
and was a weakling. ‘The faunal change that occurred during the first
three stages appears to have been more profound than that of the rest
of the Pleistocene. Hence I believe that the division of the Pleistocene
into Earlier and Later expresses best the history of the North American
vetebrrate animals during the Pleistocene.
Wisconsin glacial.
Peorian interglacial.
(Later | Iowan glacial.
|
)
Few edentates, few or no
horses, no camels, no
Elephas imperator, one or
\ Sangamon interglacial.
ae ary two mastodons, fewer
| IHinoian glacial.
Picistocone | Yarmouth interglacial. large cats.
| Many edentates, many
| ! { Kansan glacial. horses, many camels, Hle-
(Earlier { Aftonian interglacial. phas imperator, several
| Nebraskan glacial. mastodons, many large
cats.
4. PLEISTOCENE GEOLOGY. THE EASTERN AND SOUTHERN COASTAL
TERRACES
As regards the geology of the Pleistocene, the writer believes that
about the beginning of the period there were extensive elevations of
MAR. 19, 1925 HAY: PLEISTOCENE IN NORTH AMERICA 129
large parts of the continent, perhaps of the whole of it. These eleva-
tions affected certainly the coastal regions and the regions of the Great
Lakes. An important effect of these uplifts was the production of
deep and wide excavations of the valleys of many of our large rivers.
T accept the conclusions of our geologists that during the time of the
last glaciation, the Wisconsin, the areas occupied by the ice were
depressed, not greatly at and somewhat beyond the border, but in-
creasingly so farther northward. The subsidence js attested by beds
of marine shells along the coast at heights varying from 33 feet at
Nantucket Island to 200 feet or more on the coast of Maine; on the
coast of Labrador, 500 feet. Shell beds are found along the St. Law-
rence River at heights of 250 feet; along Ottawa River, 450 feet.
As to the Atlantic and Gulf coasts, from New Jersey to Mexico, it is a
widely accepted theory that they have been sunken beneath the sea,
once during the late Pliocene, three times during the Pleistocene,
resulting in the production of 4 or more sets of marine terraces. The
utter lack of marine fossils in these terraces, except for a few feet in the
lowest one, seems sufficient to show the untenability of this theory.
Other causes must be sought to explain the terraces. This is the work
of the geologists; but they must not overlook the paleontology of these
terraces.
Furthermore, it has been the custom to distribute the last three
terraces with impartiality to widely separated times of the Pleistocene.
The lowest one, having an elevation of perhaps from 40 to 100 feet
above the sea, has been regarded as belonging to the late Pleistocene,
about the time of the Wisconsin glacial stage. On the contrary,
deposits on this lowest terrace, from New Jersey to the west coast of
Florida, especially from North Carolina, contain an abundance of
vertebrate fossils of the first interglacial stage, the Aftonian. That is,
they contain the Aftonian elephant, #. imperator, species of mastodon
found in only early Pleistocene deposits, many species of horses,
camels, saber-tooth tigers, and various great edentates not found in
later Pleistocene deposits. The low plain along the Gulf coast of
Texas belongs to about the first interglacial, inasmuch as, down to sea-
level, it contains remains of giant sloths, early Pleistocene elephants
and mastodons, and camels. All those terraces then, low and high,
must have been formed during the late Pliocene and the Nebraskan
times. Since that time, no part of our coast south of New Jersey has
been submerged by the sea, beyond a very few feet.
In Florida and farther north, beneath the deposits regarded by the
130 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
writer as belonging to the Aftonian interglacial stage, is a widely
extended and deep accumulation of Pleistocene marine mollusks. I
believe that this shell bed belongs to the Nebraskan stage. In Publica-
tion 322 of the Carnegie Institution of Washington, on pages 9-10, I
provisionally referred to the Nebraskan, the Bone Valley phosphates
and the Alachua clays. As to the Bone Valley deposits, it appears
that an error was committed. Regarding the Alachua clays, it is
possible that further exploration will show that distinct Pliocene and
Miocene deposits are also present; but, so far as the writer knows,
this has not been done.
The terraces of all the great rivers of Texas, the lower, as well as the
upper ones, contain the vertebrate fossils which characterize the first
interglacial stage. There is hardly any other explanation than that
those great valleys were excavated during the late Pliocene and the
early Pleistocene. Possibly they were excavated during the Nebras-
kan, refilled during the Aftonian, the fossils being then included, and
the deposits removed partially at a later time.
5. THE AGE OF THE LAKE BONNEVILLE DEPOSITS
In his work on Lake Bonneville, G. K. Gilbert recognized two
stages of high water. During the first high stage the yellow clays of
the Lower Bonneville were laid down; during the second, the Upper
Bonneville White Marls. Gilbert referred these marls to the last of
his two recognized glacial stages, and this must be regarded as the
Wisconsin. In these beds no vertebrates which might decide the
geological age of the deposits were found; but Gilbert referred the re-
mains found in Lake Lahontan to deposits believed to correspond in
age to the Upper Bonneville. These remains belonged to a probosci-
dean, a bison, a horse, and a camel. At Astor Pass, in deposits re-
garded as equivalent to the Upper Bonneville, two species of horses, a
camel, and a large tiger-like cat have been discovered, all identical with
or closely related to, animals found at La Brea, California, of early
Pleistocene age. These discoveries seem to push back the Upper
Bonneville beds to about the time of the Aftonian, or early Kansan
stage, unless Gilbert erred when he correlated the Bonneville beds with
the Lahontan.
During the past summer, collections were made by Messrs. W. F.
Foshag and 8. H. Catheart, of H. G. Ferguson’s party, on the Walker
Lake beach and along Walker River. In these, remains of bison, a
mar. 19, 1925 HAY: PLEISTOCENE IN NORTH AMERICA 131
large and a small horse, and a large species of camel were found. The
camel is closely related to a large species found in Colorado, Idaho,
Oregon, and perhaps Washington.
6. THE PLEISTOCENE OF THE PACIFIC COAST
The Pleistocene geology and vertebrate paleontology of the Pacific
coast are of the highest interest. The early Pleistocene is well repre-
sented there; but many contrasts present themselves when the deposits
are compared with those of the Atlantic coast. At no place along the
coast of California did glaciers enter the sea. The coast was not at
rest for long, but with oscillations, it was raised and depressed and
raised again. When near sea-level the rocks were carved into terraces
and these are now found at various heights up to 1,000 feet or more.
Their origin is not doubtful, for marine fossils abound in them. At
San Pedro, as we learn from Arnold’s monograph! there are Upper
Pliocene deposits filled with marine shells. These deposits are overlain
by the Lower San Pedro Pleistocene from which about 250 species of
marine organisms, mostly mollusks, have been collected. These
indicate a cold climate. T. 8S. Oldroyd has recently studied? the
Lower San Pedro mollusks, and he confirms Arnold’s view regarding
the climate. Above this deposit comes the Upper San Pedro, from
which 250 species of marine mollusks have been secured. These fossils
indicate a warmer climate than that of today. Arnold stated that the
fauna resembled more nearly that now living two or three hundred
miles further south. He believed also that this formation does not
mark the close of the Pleistocene. He says: “‘All of this evidence,
then, leads to the conclusion that there has been a sufficient lapse of
time since the deposition of the Upper San Pedro strata to admit of
marked faunal and orographic changes.”
Now at San Pedro, in the Upper San Pedro beds, have been found
remains of a bison, a horse, a Nothrotherium, a camel, and Hlephas
imperator, the last three animals being characteristic of early Pleis-
tocene times. The evidence shows, therefore, that the Lower San
Pedro belongs to the first, or Nebraskan, glacial stage and the Upper
San Pedro to the Aftonian interglacial.
These same Upper San Pedro beds are found at many points along
the coast of California. At Port Los Angeles, about 25 miles from San
1 ARnoLp, R.: The paleontology and stratigraphy of the marine Pliocene and Pleistocene
of San Pedro, California, Calif. Acad. Sci. Mem. 3. 1903.
2 OtpRoyYD, T.S.: Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 65: art. 22. 1925.
132 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
Pedro, and about as many miles nearly directly west of Los Angeles,
Arnold obtained 16 species of marine mollusks which he referred to the
Lower San Pedro. ‘The overlying beds did not bear fossils, but Arnold
regarded them as probably Upper San Pedro. Farther east, 7 miles
west of Los Angeles, is the La Brea locality, famous for its vertebrate
fossils preserved in the asphalt pits. Here the Pleistocene, as described
by Arnold,‘ is from 50 to 100 feet thick and consists of clay, sand, and
gravel which have been brought down from the mountains. This
material is impregnated with oil and asphalt. In the La Brea locality
one must rely, not on marine fossils, but on land animals. The
specimens collected by Merriam and his associates, and amounting to
thousands, are usually in a fine state of preservation. The list of
species, birds and mammals, is a large one. In general it may be said
that the genera and the species of mammals are those which charac-
terize the first interglacial stage elsewhere; and they may be referred
without hesitation to the Aftonian.
7. THE PLEISTOCENE OF THE DESERT REGIONS OF OREGON AND
WASHINGTON
At Christmas Lake, Oregon, 20 or more species of fossil mammals,
more than 50 species of birds, and a few fishes have been collected.
The mammals include four species of camels, the imperial elephant, and
a horse; all of which the writer regards as indicative of the first inter-
glacial stage.
At what is now a small settlement called Delight, about 12 miles
northwest from Washtucna Lake, have been collected mammals in-
cluding probably 2 species of horses, 3 camels, and a large ground-
sloth (Mylodon). The writer regards the collection as belonging to
the Aftonian interglacial stage.
8. THE LATER PLEISTOCENE AND ITS VERTEBRATE FOSSILS
In deposits laid down on the Wisconsin drift, especially in lakes,
ponds, and swamps, are found 1 species of ground-sloth, 2 or more
species of peccaries, 3 or 4 species of elephants, perhaps 2 mastodons,
a moose, and a giant beaver, all now extinct. There have been dis-
covered, so far as I can learn, no saber-tooth tigers, no horses, no
tapirs, no camels, none of the many sloth-like animals that once
existed, except the megalonyx. These deposits, which overlie the
3’ ARNOLD, R. and Etpripcex, G. H.: The Santa Clara Valley, Puente Hills, and Los
Angeles oil districts, California. U.S. Geol. Surv. Bull. 309: 186-195. 1907.
mar. 19, 1925 CUSHMAN: PSEUDOTEXTULARIA AND GUEMBELINA 133
last drift sheet, and the fossil vertebrates found in them belong to the
close of the Later Pleistocene.
Of the genera missing from the late Wisconsin fauna, the ground-
sloths, the horses, the tapirs, various bisons, and saber-tooth tigers,
some had survived the Kansan glacial stage. The species of the
genera thus surviving are usually relatively few and the stages during
which they became extinct, usually uncertain. Mylodon, Bison
antiquus, and B. latifrons, and the tapirs dropped out probably during
the Sangamon or soon after; the few horses apparently perished before
or during the Wisconsin glacial stage. It seems, therefore, inexpedient
to divide the post-Kansan vertebrates into two or more faunas.
PALEONTOLOGY.—The genera Pseudotextularia and Guembelina.
JosEPH A. CusHMAN, Sharon, Massachuetts.
The genera Pseudotextularia and Guembelina described from Europe
also occur in the Upper Cretaceous of Mexico, and as the two are con-
fused in Egger’s work on the Foraminifera of the Cretaceous published
in 1899! a few notes may help other workers on the foraminifera.
Pseudotextularia Rzehak, 1886
This genus was erected by Rzehak in 1886.2 Later, in 1895, Rzehak
figured and described Pseudotextularia varians. This species seems to be
identical with that later published by Egger as Guembelina fruticosa,* and
it occurs in the Mendez member of the Upper Cretaceous of Mexico. As
will be noted, other species connect the two faunas of Central Europe and
Mexico. As shown by Rzehak in 1895 (pl. 7, figures 2 and 3) the early stages
of Pseudo textularia are truly textularian, an alternating series of chambers on
either side of an elongate axis, the apertures on the inner margin of newly
added chambers. In the adult there occur isolated chambers near the periph-
ery, subglobular in form, finally resulting in a spiral series about the margin,
leaving a depressed area in the center. Well preserved Mexican specimens
show this same series of characters. There are specimens, however, which do
not attain thjs full generic character, and as figured by Rzehak (1895, plate 7,
figure 1) still hold the textularian form. The ornamentation and general
appearance are very similar in the two forms, however.
1Eccer. Foraminiferen aus den Kreidemergeln der Oberbayerischen Alpen. Abh.
kon. bay. Akad Wiss. Miinchen, Cl. II, vol. 21, 1899.
2? Rzewak. Verh. Nat. Ver. Briinn, Sitz, 24:8. 1886.
*RzewAK. Ann.k.k. Nathist. Hofmuseums 10: 217, pl. 7, figs. 1-3. 1895.
4 Eaeer, loc. cit., pl. 14, figs. 8, 9.
134 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 6
The Mexican specimens from the Mendez formation, which is the upper
part of the so-called Papagallos of the Upper Cretaceous of Mexico, seem to
be identical with Pseudotextularia varians Rzehak. Turning to Egger’s
1899 work, it will be found that plate 14 has a very similar form which seems
identical, figures 8 and 9, which are described as a new species, Guembelina
fruticosa Egger. From a study of Mexican material this seems to be a
synonym of Pseudotextularia varians Rzehak, and does not belong in the genus
Guembelina erected by Egger.
Also in the Mendez is another species, much flattened and developing the
multiple chambers very early, and finally in great numbers. This, without an
opportunity of seeing the European types, would seem at least very close to,
if not identical with, Egger’s plate 14, figures 17, 18, 20, 21, described by him
as Guembelina acervulinoides Egger. This should be known as Pseudotextu-
laria acervulinoides (Egger).
Apparently Pseudotextularia is one of those genera which represents an
end development, and did not persist into the Tertiary to any extent. The
two species of the Mendez serve as do many others to correlate the Upper
Cretaceous of Mexico and Central Europe.
Guembelina Egger, 1899
In 1899 Egger erected the genus Guembelina which included certain species
already discussed. The typical species, however, have a spiral or bulimine
early development followed by a textularian series of chambers. A typical
species is Guembelina decurrens (Chapman) figured by Egger (plate 14, figures
1 to4). This has a peculiar surface ornamentation of curved costae, those
of each chamber independent of the others, and in general parallel to the
periphery. Associated with Pseudotextularia varians in the Mendez is a
species of Guembelina which is probably identical with G. decurrens (Chapman),
still further showing the relationship of this Cretaceous of Mexico and that
of Central Europe.
The genus Guembelina, like Pseudotextularia, does not seem to have persisted
to any extent into the Tertiary, and the two make excellent markers for this
part of the Upper Cretaceous over this wide geographical range.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
584TH MEETING
The 584th meeting of the Anthropological Society of Washington was held
October 21, 1924, in the new National Museum and was devoted to a sym-
posium on The anthropology of the Southeastern United States.
mar. 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 135
Dr. J. WatTer Fewxess took as his subject the archaeology of the Gulf
States. The speaker considered the aboriginal culture of the Southeastern
United States one of the greatest of prehistoric North America, ranking
in interest with that of the pueblo region. It had not, however, received the
attention it deserved, though the epoch-making contributions of Clarence B.
Moore and Frank Hamilton Cushing were of the greatest importance. Ina
general way the culture of our prehistoric Southeast, known, from the pre-
dominant tribe, as the Muskhogean or Creek, embraced Indians speaking
several cognate languages. The same culture extended from Florida through
Georgia, Alabama, Mississippi, Louisiana, and indefinitely toward the West.
The area in which it developed was bounded on the east by the Atlantic Ocean
and on the south by the Gulf of Mexico.
Attention was called to the excavation of two large mounds by Gerard
Fowke, under the direction of the Bureau of American Ethnology, along the
great bend of the Tennessee River at Mussel Shoals, both of which will be
submerged when the Wilson Dam is closed. These two mounds are situated
on Town Creek, not far from Courtland, Alabama. One, formed of mussel
shells, is technically a kitchen midden, or eating place. It evidently was the
locality where shellfish were brought ashore, cooked, and their soft portion
eaten, the mound being formed of rejected shells. The other, or adjacent,
mound contained many skeletons and mortuary objects, the most unusual of
which were three copper yorgets lying on the breasts of the dead. One of
these is the largest and best preserved of the objects yet collected.
During the past winter (1924), Dr. Fewkes superintended the excavation
of about one-third of a large burial mound on Weedon Island, near St.
Petersburg, on the west coast of Florida. He described the pottery found in
it, and pointed out that in this mound there were evidences of two distinct
layers, or strata: the upper contained beautiful specimens of pottery and other
objects quite similar to those found along the west coast of Florida at Tarpon
Springs, as far north as central Georgia; the lower layer had crude pottery and
many implements made of shells. The speaker supposed that the artifacts
of the lower stratum indicated that the most ancient inhabitants of Florida
were related to the archaic inhabitants of Cuba, and that the upper stratum
was later in time, and allied to that of the Creeks of the Southern States.
Dr. AueSs HrouiéKa, took up the physical anthropology of the region.
What might conveniently be called the Gulf stock of Indians is a large and
highly interesting group of people who occupied at and before the time of the
discovery of America large parts of what are now the states of Arkansas,
Louisiana, Mississippi, Tennessee, Alabama, Georgia, and probably also
South Carolina. This stock has no affinities towards the northeast or north,
and must have been derived from somewhere in the northwest, west, or
southwest. Present indications seem to favor eastern Mexico. Since dis-
covery, the type, though robust and strong in numbers, has become very
largely extinct except for the mixed survivors of the Choctaw. ‘Tribes that
may be offshoots of this body, though now speaking northern languages, are
a part of the Osage, and the Winnebago. The more oblong-headed elements
of Florida may be safely identified with the Seminoles and other Muskho-
gean tribes of northern derivation.!
1 For details see A. Hrpuiéka. Anthropology of Florida, Publ. Florida St. Hist.
Soc., Deland, Fla.. 1922.
136 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
Dr. John R. Swanton, the third speaker, considered the linguistic and
cultural relations of the Indians living in the Gulf area within historic times.
He stated that the Muskhogean linguistic stock was the largest in the region,
that Natchez, once thought to be distinct, is now known to have been a widely
divergent dialect, and that there is good reason to suppose that some ton-
gues spoken to the westward, as well as the Timucua languages of Florida,
would prove to belong to the same group. The south Florida languages were
probably typical Muskhogean, but not enough of them is known to establish
the fact. Comparing the Muskhogean languages with those of the other
great stocks of eastern North America, we find them associated much
more closely in structure with Uchean and Siouan than with Iroquoian,
Caddoan, or Algonquian. In conclusion, Dr. Swanton called attention to
cultural differences between the Gulf tribes, even those belonging to the same
stock, using Creek and Choctaw by way of illustration.
Joun M. Cooper, Secretary
THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
369TH MEETING
The 369th meeting was held at the National Museum November 6, 1924,
with President B6viNna presiding and 88 persons present.
Program: G. A. Dean: The corn borer situation. (Illustrated.) The
European corn borer, which has become firmly established in the United
States and Canada, probably gained entrance into America in 1909 or 1910
in broom corn imported from Hungary and Italy, although not until the
summer of 1917 was it first reported and identified in the United States. At
this time an infestation, covering an area of nearly 100 square miles, was found
in the vicinity of Boston.
In January, 1919, the insect was discovered in the vicinity of Schenectady,
N. Y., and in September, 1919, separate infestations were found south of -
Buffalo and at Girard, Pa. In August, 1920, Canadian entomologists re-
ported an infestation in Ontario, beginning near St. Thomas and extending
east along the lake shore to the Niagara River. In 1921 a slight infestation
was found throughout a narrow strip of territory bordering on Lake Erie in
Pennsylvania, Ohio, and Michigan.
While the results of the infestations in sweet corn and garden truck in
Massachusetts and the injury to flint corn in Ontario were such as to demon-
strate its importance as a serious pest, there still remained in the mind of some
investigators doubt as to the seriousness of the borer in large dent corn, which
is grown throughout the greater part of the corn belt. However, after making
an inspection tour in company with several Canadian entomologists and agri-
cultural agents of the dent corn areas of Kent and Essex counties, and observ-
ing the serious injury caused by the corn borer to the crop of 1924, the speaker
was Impressed by the tremendous potentiality of this insect once it became
established throughout the corn belt. Apparently the dry climate conditions
during July and August that are conducive for maximum yields of corn are
identical with those favorable for a rapid increase of the borers, and it would
seem, thus, that the most serious loss might be expected on the best corn crops.
The life history of the insect in eastern New York, New England, and the
Lake Erie region was given in detail by the speaker.
The nearly completed annual survey activities have disclosed such alarm-
mar. 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 137
ing facts as a spread of from 1900 square miles to 3350 square miles, or nearly
150 per cent in Ohio, with an average increase of 100 per cent in intensity;
in Michigan a spread of from 800 square miles to 2350 square miles, or nearly
300 per cent of the original territory, with a considerable increase in intensity;
and a spread of from 750 square miles to 1300 square miles, or nearly 150
per cent, in northwestern Pennsylvania, with a marked increase in intensity.
In addition to these developments, a limited infestation has appeared on the
northeastern side of Staten Island. One new spot of infestation has appeared
on Long Island close to the commercial sweet corn center, and a series of
infestations has developed along the south shore of Connecticut in the towns
of Bridgeport, West Haven, Old Lyme, New London, and Stonington.
The Canadian situation, which last year seemed to be fairly well in hand,
has broken out with renewed intensity, and the principal dent corn growing
areas in Essex and Kent Counties, Ontario, are now so seriously infested as
to cause considerable commercial injury. The prevalence of moisture,
heavy dews, and high humidity during the incubation of the eggs and during
the early or first instar stage of the larvae apparently caused very little
mortality of the eggs, and permitted large numbers of the larvae to become
established in the tassels, leaves, stalks, and ears of the corn plants.
In Massachusetts there has been not only a very marked decrease in the
intensity of infestation, but also very little spread in infestation. This
decrease apparently is due principally to the adverse climatic conditions which
prevailed during the summer of 1923. The thorough clean-up of fields, gar-
dens, and small weed areas and the fall plowing of practically 90 per cent of
the cultivated fields probably contributed considerably to the decreasein the
infestation. In eastern New York the infestation remains about the same,
that is, there has been very little spread and very little decrease in the inten-
sity of the infestation. (Author’s abstract.)
The paper was discussed by Messrs. ALpRIcH, BAKER, GRAT, ROHWER,
and SasscEr.
Notes and discussion: Dr. Howarp gave an informal talk on Some ento-
mologists at last summer’s Stanford meeting and at the Hawaiian Conference.
Dr. J. M. Aldrich read a note by R. C. SHANNON, entitled Brief history
of egg-laying habits of Dermatobia. The so-called human bot-fly, Dermatobia
hominis L. f., of Tropical America is of great interest because its larva fre-
quently parasitizes man, but it affords considerable added interest because
of its most unusual method of disposing its eggs.
Its mode of attack was long a mystery. Published accounts of the larva
and its parasitism in Man date as far back as 1749, but not until 1900150
years later—was there any definite clue as to its secret method of attack.
It was, naturally, believed that the adult fly came directly to the host and
laid its eggs on the skin but no authentic records were ever published to show
this to be true. The natives of the region believed that the bot was acquired
through the attack of other insects, and among natives of certain regions it
was called mosquito-worm.
During the years 1900-1910 a number of mosquitoes were collected in
various parts of Central and South America which had the eggs of another
insect attached to them and these, upon dissection, showed that they con-
tained the larva of a bot-fly. The eggs, usually eight to ten to a mosquito,
were placed on the lower surface of the abdomen and pointed obliquely down-
ward and backward in such a manner that when the mosquito is sucking
blood, the free, cr hatching, end is nearest the skin of the host. The eggs
are arranged in compact clusters and attached by means of a strong cement-
138 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 6
like substance. In practically all cases the mosquitoes were Janthinosoma
lutziz, one of the most bloodthirsty mosquitoes in the tropics, and from this
it was considered that the Dermatobia chose only the bloodsucking mosquitoes
to be the carriers for its eggs.
The more recent observations of Adolpho Lutz of Brazil (1918) give a
fairly complete life history. The flies, which parasitize numerous warm-
blooded animals, birds, dogs, pigs, cattle, monkeys, and man, have been
noted by Lutz to be attracted to cattle and to capture the blood and sweat
sucking flies on the cattle, cage them within their legs, and oviposit their eggs
on them, usually on the abdomen. Flies with such egg clusters have been
kept by Lutz until the larvae within the eggs were ready to hatch, and at this
time, when the eggs would be placed near the skin of man or dog, the larva
would hatch and after a time would burrow in the skin of the host.
As far as is definitely known Dermatobia confines its choice of egg carriers
to blood and sweat-feeding flies which it finds about animals at the time of
oviposition.
However, the writer procured a mosquito, Goeldia longipes, while in Pan-
ama, which as far as known is non-bloodsucking, but which bears a cluster
of eggs. This may possibly indicate a new phase, either in the life history
of the mosquito or in the bot-fly. If the bot-fly only lays its eggs on incects
found about animals it would indicate that Goeldia longzpes is a bloodsucker.
If this species of mosquito does not suck blood and is not attracted to animals
it would tend to show that Dermatobia will lay eggs on mosquitoes and prob-
ably on any insect, no matter where it may be.
However, the principal question is: why does Dermatobia come to the
animals to lay its eggs on other insects when it can apparently even more
effectively apply them directly to the host itself?
Cuas. T. GREENE, Secretary.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Titles of papers in the symposium on Chemistry in the field of microbiology,
to be given by the Division of Chemistry of Medicinal Products of the Ameri-
can Chemical Society at the Baltimore meeting of the American Chemical
Society, April 7-10, are: T. B. Jonson, Yale University: Application of the
methods of organic chemistry to the study of the structure and composition of
bacteria. Cart Voratuin, Hygienic Laboratory, Washington: Chemical
aspect of the therapeutic action of arsenicals. JoHN W. CHURCHMAN, Cornell
University Medical College: Practical and technical consideration of the local
and intravenous use of dyes (tentative title). VrEADER LEONARD, School of
Hygiene and Public Health, Johns Hopkins University: Internal antisepsis
in its relation to chemistry and biology (tentative title). G. W. Rarziss,
Philadelphia: Bacterial chemotherapy with special reference to mercury dye-
stuffs. E. C. Wuirr, Hynson, Westcott, & Dunning, Baltimore: Dyes used
as tests of liver function (scheduled for the joint meeting of the Organic
Division on Tuesday).
.
*
Ee RC ea ee ee MES po ee? ey ee
_ ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND |
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Thursday,March 19. ‘The AcaDEMY.
Saturday, March 21. The Philosophical Society, at the Cosmos Club.
Program: H. A. Marmrr: Mean sea level. H. E. Merwin and — Ww.
Morey: Optical effects of iron in certain glasses.
The Helminthological Society.
Wednesday, March 25. The Geological Society.
Saturday, March 28. The Biological Society, at the Cosmos Club.
Thursday, April 2. The Entomological Society.
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE JOURNAL
Saturday, February 28. The Biological Society. O. J. Munin: White sheep in the
Alaska Range. H. V. Haruan: Plant exploration in Abyssinia.
Thursday, March 5. The Entomological Society. Entomological taxonomy—its aims
and failures. From an economic standpoint, A. C. Baker; from an educational
standpoint, E. D. Bax; from a taxonomic standpoint, S. A. RoHwER.
Saturday, March 14. The Biological Society. R. C. SHannon: Parasitic flies in Man
and animals. James Stuver: The European harein North America: Is it a menace?
Wii1iam Mann: A collecting irip in Sinai and Palestine.
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
Terrestrial Magnetism.—Terrestrial magnetiom i in the Twentieth Cen as
Ti HAZARD yo) o's eal Happ leetein oll nena arnt cd Taare ain meter eta eae
Geology. —A revision of the Pleistocene Period in North Americ 2,
PROCEEDINGS
The Anthropological Society. ........cscceceseeteeeseccseceacecees
The Entomological Society 3). 50...) : Sales» vaasisicielnsiecapisieienc ta iemaantae
_ OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vemxow L. Kexzoso, National Research Council.
Aprit 4, 1925 No. 7
JOURNAL
OF THE
BOARD OF EDITORS Pat :
B.GsAns2 D. F. Hewett / §. J. Maucuiy
«NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
‘ seoane 3 anes
hyd
ASSOCIATE EDITORS Pa Sal
L, H. Apams S. A. RoswER ser
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GotpMAN G. W. Stosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Griees J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
) E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anp GUILFORD AvzEs.
BaurTmore, MaRyLaAND
i are yeerretrh Matter, January hg 1923, at ae net sities BOVE ae panels the
ugust Acceptance for mailing at special rate o! e
jin Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. ‘Authorised on July 3, 1018.
Made in United States of America
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short fe ee papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2) —
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(8) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNat is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the —
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or saree i respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof —Iin order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. oe
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume 18........ceeeceesceccccuneecceseceeaes $6.00*
Semi-monthly numbers ii:.5005 0/50 << «isc s'asc'0 ciclo wie’! «ie ini tenes salon eee 25
Monthly: numbers: 2s. < 6625 wisinjoisreo < sig. v.c Shine eieisiorerclgtatire seeioveteaphe leone %
Remittances should be made payable to ‘(Washington Academy of Sciences,” and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. i
Exchanges—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. = | 4
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made —
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.60. Special rater
are given to members ot scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. ee 5
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VoL. 15 Aprin 4, 1925 No. 7
RADIOTELEGRAPHY.—Some _ transpacific radio field intensity
measurements. L. W. Austin, Laboratory for Special Radio
Transmission Research, Bureau of Standards.
Radio field intensity measurements for frequencies varying roughly
between 1,000 and 15 ke. (300 m. and 20,000 m.), and for distances
up to 6,500 km., by daylight and over salt water, have been made
by a number of independent observers and the results, with some
exceptions,! are in fair agreement. For frequencies from 1,000 at least
down to 60 ke. (300 m. to 5,000 m.), the observed results agree within
the limits of experimental certainty with the values calculated from
the Austin-Cohen formula, up to the greatest distances attempted;
(5,500 km.).2 The lower frequencies ordinarily used for long-dis-
tance communication, say from 15 to 30 ke. (10,000 to 20,000 m.),
give observed values somewhat larger than those calculated. Ata
distance of 6,000 km. this ratio of observed to calculated values
amounts, on an average, to about two to one.* Only a limited num-
ber of observations have been taken at distances much greater than
this, and these have generally indicated a considerable increase in
the observed to calculated ratio.‘
In order to get more reliable data at these greater distances, observa-
tions were taken in August and September, 1924, at San Diego,
California, on the signals from Cavite, P. I., and from Malabar, Java.
'Vatiauri, G., Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 8: 286. 1920. Guimrre, M., Radio Review
2: 618. 1921. BAumuer, M., Elek. Nach. Tech. 1: 50. 1924.
? Austin, L. W., Bur. Stand. Sci. Papers no. 159. 1911;no. 286. 1914. Bown, R.,
EneGiunp, C. R., and Frus, H. T., Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 11:115. 1923.
* Pickarp, G. W., Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 10: 161. 1920. Eckrrstxy, J. L., Journ.
Amer. Inst. Elect. Eng. 59:677. 1921. Austin, L. W., Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 11: 459.
1923;12: 389. 1924.
4 GuieRRE, M., Radio Review 2: 618. 1921.
139
140 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 7
The distance from Cavite to San Diego is 11,800 km., with a differ-
ence in time of eight hours. This gives about two hours for observa-
tions in September without approaching the time of sunrise or sunset
too closely. The distance from Malabar is 14,700 km., with a time
difference of nine hours. These are about the greatest distances that
can be attained for all daylight and approximately all water signal
path with the present high-power stations of the world, except per-
haps between Japan and Chile. This last would, however, give about
ten hours difference in time and bring the sending and receiving
stations rather close to their respective sunrise and sunset times.
The receiving measurements were made in the U. 8. Naval receiv-
ing station, Point Loma, San Diego, under receiving conditions which,
while not ideal, are believed to have given errors not greater than
3o00
twenty per cent. On account of the weakness of the signals, in
comparison with the atmospheric disturbances, and to keep out strong
interference from eastern stations, it was generally found necessary
to make the measurements on Cavite and Malabar with unidirectional
reception, using the general type of circuit described in the work on
the direction of atmospheric disturbances in 1920.5
The arrangement of circuits is shown diagrammatically in Fig. 1.
Here A is a single-wire antenna approximately 30 m. long and 20 m.
high, B a square coil antenna of 48 turns and 2.44m. on aside. This
was mounted so as to be capable of rotation, with its lower side about
3m. from the ground. C is an intermediate circuit to reduce inter-
ference, D is the detector circuit, and E represents three stages of
radio-frequency transformer coupled amplification, adjusted to prevent
regeneration. F is a heterodyne generator for producing the local
® Austin, L. W., Journ. Franklin Inst. 619. 1921.
apr. 4, 1925 AUSTIN: RADIO FIELD INTENSITY MEASUREMENTS 141
oscillations for beat reception. H is a telephone comparator® con-
sisting of a General Radio tuning fork oscillator which generated a
thousand cycle current which was measured on a thermogalvanometer
and then passed through a voltage divider and resistances so that a
known 1000-cycle EMF could be impressed on the telephones. In
making the measurements, the heterodyne was adjusted so as to
give a beat frequency with the signal equal to the frequency of the
telephone comparator. The telephones could then be switched
rapidly from the receiver to the telephone comparator, and the vol-
tage divider adjusted until the telephone note was of the same inten-
sity in each. The couplings between B, C, and D were all loose,
and remained fixed during the whole course of the experiments. The
heterodyne was coupled to the detector so as to give the loudest
signal, and the coupling was separately adjusted for the different
wave lengths received. The inductance L was connected to the
antenna through a reversing switch so that the elevated antenna coil
combination could be made to receive from either direction on the
plane of the coil, while reception from the opposite direction was
practically zero.
The receiving set was calibrated by introducing a known EMF in
the coil antenna from the radio-frequency generator G. This con-
sisted of the tuned plate electron tube generator proper, the output
current of which, after being measured with a thermoelement and
galvanometer, passed through an attenuation box (artificial line) I,
kindly loaned by the Western Electric Company. From this it passed
to a l-ohm resistance S inserted in the loop. Ordinarily the current
from G was adjusted to 1.6 milliamperes, which was reduced in the
attenuation box I to 1/500 of its value, thus giving 3.2 microamperes
in the resistance 8. To prevent capacity coupling, the coil antenna
was grounded at one terminal of 8S. The generator with its dry cell
batteries and the attenuation box were enclosed in grounded copper
boxes, as was the whole receiving set with the exception of the coil
antenna.
The calibrating generator was furnished with a fixed condenser
giving a frequency of 23.06 ke. (13,000 m.). It had been intended to
replace this in San Diego by a variable condenser so that calibrations
could be made at all the frequencies of the stations being measured.
Unfortunately no variable condenser was found available which was
6 Austin and Jupson, Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 12:521. 1924.
142 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VoL. 15, No. 7
small enough to be used in the copper box, so that it was necessary
to do the calibrating at the single wave length and make corrections
for the effect of change of frequency. As the calibration was made
on the coil antenna with the elevated antenna disconnected, a cor-
rection for the presence of the elevated antenna in the reception of
the signals was also necessary. This correction was determined by
measurements made on the stronger stations with and without the
elevated antenna. Reversal experiments with the coil antenna
showed that the effect of its capacity to earth was negligible.
TABLE 1—TRANSMITTING STATION DaTA
PEARL HARBOR TUCKERTON CAVITE MALABAR
(NPM) (WGG) (NPO) (PIKX)
BLE CUMEW CV KCl ieee clan ercre 24.80 18.86 19.34 18.98
Wave length; merit. e set os 12,090 15,900 15,500 15,800
Antenna current, Amp............. 170 470 180 500
Radiation height, mss. . cajec uss 120 67.5 120 320
DIStAN CEM a cpleecicte eters wnt 4,200 3,800 11,800 14,700
TABLE 2.—TELEPHONE CompaRAToR Factor (A) ror Various FREQUENCIES
f, ke A, m. A
24.80 12,090 0. 402
19.34 15,500 0.504
18.98 13,800 0.524
18.86 15,900 0.545
Comparator reading X A = Electric field intensity in microvolts per meter.
Table 1 gives the data for calculation of the field intensities of the
sending stations. The Malabar antenna’ is suspended by steel
cables in a mountain ravine about 1.5 km. wide at the top and with
an average depth of about 550 m. According to information kindly
furnished by Mr. Schotel of the Dutch Colonial Office, the antenna
current is approximately 500 amperes at the frequency measured in
San Diego. Estimates of the radiation height, from measurements
made at moderate distances, vary between 3208 and 480 m. These
varying results are probably due to the mountainous character of the
surrounding country. In the calculations the lower value, 320 m.,
7 DeGroot, C. J., Proc. Inst. Radio Eng. 12: 693. 1924.
8 Other engineers give even lower values.
apr. 4, 1925
AUSTIN: RADIO FIELD INTENSITY MEASUREMENTS
143
TABLE 3.—Comparisons oF Cavite (NPO) anp Maraspar (PKX) with TuckERTON
(WGG) anp Peart Hargor (NPM)
TELEPHONE COMPARATOR TELEPHONE COMPARATOR
READINGS RATIOS DISTUR=
ab NPM | WGG | NPM | wGG ‘w/t
NPM | WGG | NPN | PKX Neo | Npo | PKx | PRX
RU GUSEIZS! aise oles cies Sie 85 — 7.5| — | 11.3] — — — 14
PATI SUS EGU Sesmictsc sarc cr 110 = 6.5 | 15.0 | 16.9 | — 7.4] — 23
September 1............. 55 — 3.5] 4.0] 15.7] — | 13.7] — —
September 2............. —_ 45 —_— 5.0 — Se DAO 1)
September 3............. — 40 — 3.0} — — — |) abs} |)
September 4..........:.. — |} 100 = |) ikeOy) = oe = 5.9 | 38
September 5............- —* 2100 3.0); — — | 33.4] — — —
September 6............. 100 | 100 6.3} — | 15.8] 15.8) — — —
September 8............. 50 80 4.3} — | 11.6/ 18.6] — —_— 50
September 9.............] 55 80 AVSi | dag aL2eSn SG | Nerijedl| Onda 25)
September 10............ 45 80 ODEON O2OF MOL ON G08 |Meoulel sso ero)
eptember 1s. cc sc h.22-- 50 7 4.3| — | 11.6] 18.1) — — ==
September 12............. 40 70 320) 1O09|—13%3) 223245) 470) 700) 5
September 13............ 50 80 Ges || = TO 2 fall) — _— 20.
September 15............ 48 80 —— || 14/6) — DAs | Lee |) 2a
IAVCTAG OS)... sisiche,2 2/012 12.59) 19.60) 7.05} 9.08
TABLE 4.—Direct MEASUREMENTS USING THE CALIBRATIN
G GENERATORS
PEARL HARBOR CAVITE TUCKERTON MALABAR
(NPM) (NPO) (WGG) (PKX) roe
1924 Tele- E Tele- E Tele- E Tele- E pron
phone phone phone phone BANCES
‘om- | VY Com-| #Y Com- |} #V Com- | HV pv/m
parator} m parator| m_ |parator m parator m
September17............ 40 | 16.1] 4.0] 2.0) — — Tol S40 |) V4
5.0) | 225
4.0} 2.0
September 18............ 45 18.1 6.0 | 3.0} 90 | 49.0) 4.8 | 2.5
60 | 24.2] 3.0 1.5 5-10
September 19............. 60 | 24.2} — — 100 | 54.4] 7.5} 3.9] 5-10
September 20............ 50 |°20.1] 4.0) 2.0] 50 | 27.2) — _— 15
30 12.0 | 6.0]. 3.0 70 | 38.1
40 16.1 60 | 32.6
70 | 38.1
September 22°. 2.c nc. <- 60 | 24.2} 4.0] 2.0] 70 | 38.1] 13.0] 6.8] 5-10
90 | 49.0
DAV OCV ARC! 52 ols oi.3 eec.018 48.3} 19.4 | 4.5] 2.27) 75 | 40.9] 8.1] 4.2
144 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 7
has been used. Even with this value the observed-to-calculated
ratio of Malabar at San Diego is considerably less than that of Cavite,
notwithstanding its greater distance. This may be due to the moun-
tainous surroundings.
Table 2 shows the field strength in microvolts per meter for 1 ohm
on the voltage divider of the telephone comparator at the various
frequencies observed, with the amplifier adjusted so that 3.2 uv in
the coil B gave 50 on the telephone comparator.
On account of an accident to the calibrating apparatus and delays
in getting replacements, the first part of the work had to be confined
to comparisons of Cavite (NPO) and Malabar (PKX) with the
stronger stations, Pearl Harbor (NPM) and Tuckerton (WGG). The
Cavite and Malabar average readings were later reduced to micro-
volts per meter, assuming that the average strengths of Pearl Harbor
TABLE 5.—AVERAGES OF FIELD INTENSITY
caviITtE (NPO) MALABAR (PKX)
LV
BIE
Hromidirecti messurementsy cee sce cece cine eee 120
2 4.22
Hrom, comparisonmwitbe Nib. eer alivette ese 1.93 3.55
1 4.26
HromycomparisonwithsWiGG. eases a. eoch-eie eee 93
Observedkavers west ontr.s.canschens acta ieuechr cites 2.04 * 4.02
Oslculated:tromebiq, (Q)a.cese rece aes euaeeieenace 0.69 1.83
and Tuckerton were the same as their averages during the second
period when the calibrations were being made.
Table 3 gives the comparator readings and the ratios of the various
stations for the first period of the observations, while Table 4 shows
the results during the second period when the field intensities were
measured directly.
The observations contained in the tables were all taken between
two and four o’clock in the afternoon, Pacific time. A few observa-
tions taken in the morning when the signal path was partly in day-
light and partly in darkness, indicated a somewhat greater strength
than the afternoon observations; while observations taken by the
station operators at the time of darkness along the whole signal path,
were reported to be many times stronger than the daylight observa-
tions, approaching at times the strength of Pearl Harbor (NPM).
Apr. 4, 1925 HOWELL: ALIMENTARY TRACTS OF SQUIRRELS 145
The final values of the field strengths of Cavite and Malabar as
derived from comparison with the signals of Tuckerton and Pearl
Harbor, and by direct measurement, are shown in Table 5. Below
the average observed values are given the values calculated from the
Austin-Cohen formula,
ayer ee
(1) bic hd sin 0°
where wu = 0.0015d/+/ x and 6is the angle between the stations from
the center of the earth.
The observed value of field intensity in the case of Cavite in Table
5 is seen to be approximately three times that calculated from Eq.
(1), while the observed strength of Malabar is about twice that cal-
culated from Eq. (1). These ratios of observed to calculated values
are much less than those given in M. Guierre’s paper.?
ZOOLOGY.—On the alimentary tracts of squirrels with diverse food
habits. A. Brazipr Howat, Biological Survey.
The majority, at least, of the squirrels of the United States may be
said fairly to be omnivorous in food habits. At one extreme, how-
ever, there are the chipmunks (Hutamias) and some tree squirrels
which undoubtedly feed as largely as possible upon concentrated
fare such as nuts and seeds and occasionally meat. At the other
extreme are the gramnivorous prairie dog, marmot, and certain
western ground squirrels of the genus C%tellus.
The difference between these food habit extremes is large, and
we would confidently expect some corresponding variation between
the internal economy of the two groups discussed. The amount of
this difference depends chiefly upon the length of time that present
habits have obtained within the species considered, the plasticity of
the animal to intestinal variation, and doubtless to unknown com-
plications of one sort or another which it is impossible for the in-
vestigator to take into account.
Typical of the group which feeds on concentrated rations is the
eastern gray squirrel. It evinces a marked preference for seeds of a
nut-like character, and similar items. A variety of provender such
as buds, bark, and a small amount of herbage is also consumed, but
I am under the impression that such fare is indulged in only when a
146 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 7
supply of more concentrated food is unavailable. This squirrel ranges
over a country especially rich in nut-bearing trees, where it encounters
comparatively little ecologic competition, as far as we can tell. Too,
when its favorite foods show indications of failure it is in the habit of
migrating to districts which, from its standpoint, are more favorable.
It may therefore be assumed that not very often is this squirrel
forced by hunger into eating any great amount of bulky fodder.
Typical of the other extreme is the Belding ground squirrel, selected
from among other species with similar habits because specimens
chanced to be available. This species undoubtedly has omnivorous
proclivities, for I have watched it eating out the soft parts of cicadas
(Okariagana), and the bodies of small mammals discarded from the
skinning table. But it has suffered severe ecologic competition
within such associations as appear to us most congenial to such a
creature. Over the portion of its range with which I am familiar,
every association is occupied by one, or usually more, species of
chipmunk, while as many as five forms of other sciuromorphs, par-
tially or entirely terrestrial in habits, may be found dwelling within
the same general area. Although prolific, the species is not active, and
it appears to us to have been forced by competition into laying its
paths in the less crowded places. The more agile chipmunks, which
usually fairly swarm about it, hoard stores of food, a thing which the
squirrels do not do, and doubtless secure by far the greater part of
the local seed crop, almost all obtained by Citellus being still in an im-
mature condition. So these little fellows congregate in and about the
high mountain meadows where they may feed upon the lush herbage
with but few to dispute their menu. I have watched them grazing
along through the damp swales, cropping the grass like pygmy
cattle, and when one enters a patch of such growth their small forms
often scurry away by the score.
These squirrels both aestivate and hibernate, so a great supply of
fat must be accumulated. As the food is comparatively low in
nutritive value a vast amount must be consumed, and digestion must
be rapid. They will stuff themselves until their swollen bellies
fairly drag upon the ground, and always the contents of their stomachs
and most of the intestinal tract is bright green, a condition which
I have not encountered in any tree squirrel, nor among chipmunks
unless the latter had been feeding upon green berries.
In examining and comparing the alimentary tracts of these two
APR. 4, 1925 HOWELL: ALIMENTARY TRACTS OF SQUIRRELS 147
mammals it must be born in mind that the gray squirrel was fully a
quarter, or possibly a third, larger than the Belding squirrel dissected.
The tree squirrel examined was a spirit specimen, presumably adult,
of Sciurus carolinensis carolinensis from Washington, D. C. The
ground squirrel was subadult—probably a yearling—Cvtellus bel-
dingi from Mammoth, Mono County, California, at an altitude of
9000 feet. In both animals the stomach was well distended.
It was noted that the oesophagus of the Sciwrus was very small
for an animal of such size, its capacity being but little more than
half that of the Citellus.
Fig. 1—Stomachs of Sciurus carolinensis carolinensis (left) and Citellus beldingt
(right): a oesophagus; 6 duodenum; c pyloric valve; dcardiacend;epyloricend. (Both
drawn to same scale).
STOMACH
The stomachs of both specimens measured about the same in greatest
diameter—namely 50 to 55 mm.—and in breadth they were also somewhat
similar; but the stomach of the Sciuwrus was the more capacious due to the
fact that the pyloric portion was the more constricted in Citellus. In neither
are there marked mucous or glandular areas upon the ental surface.
The stomach of Sciurus, distended with contents of meal-like consistency
and light color, is a simple sack. The cardiac and pyloric tubes are close
together—though not in contact—as seems to be the rule in rodents, and
there is no external evidence of a pyloric valve. It is as thin-walled and
devoid of muscular power as seems possible.
The stomach of the C7tellus was filled with green vegetable matter mark-
edly fibrous in texture. It was found to be considerably more specialized in
this animal, with cardiac and pyloric ends more differentiated, the former
being considerably larger than the latter. The two tubes were inclined at
a different angle, and there was an external constriction to indicate the
position of the pyloric valve. The cranial portion of the cardiac end, and the
148 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 7
entire pyloric division, were much more muscular than in Sciurus, with some
internal striations.
SMALL INTESTINE
In the Sciurus this tract had a length of 1470 mm., with a collapsed width
of 7 mm. It was simple, unconvoluted, thin and membrane-like, and uni-
form for its entire length.
The Citellus had a definite duodenal division, 145 mm. long and 8 mm.
wide, unconvoluted and markedly reddish in color, in contrast to the grayish
Fig. 2—Caecal regions of Sciurus carolinensis carolinensis (left) and Citellus beldingi
(right): a small intestine; b rectal tract; c colic portion; d caecum. (Both drawn to
same scale).
green shade of the remainder of the small intestine, or Meckel’s tract.!
The latter was irregularly convoluted, with a width of 11 or 12 mm. The
total length of the small intestine was about 825 mm.
CAECUM
The caecum of the Sciwrus was shaped like the cross-section of a channel-
bar and was relatively simple and vermiform, being but slightly convoluted.
In length it measured about 75 mm.
In Citellus the caecum was excessively irregular in shape, more spherical
and much convoluted. Its longest dimension was about 70 mm., and it was
almost as broad. The most capacious part was posterior to the junction
with the small intestine. This was not the colic portion, but constituted
a posterior extension of the true caecum. ‘There was also a definite protru-
sion of the caecal wall medially, which may or may not be a step towards,
or doubtfully away from, a double caecum.
1See Mircuetu, P. C., On the intestinal tract of mammals. Trans. Zool. Soc. London
17: 438-536. 1905.
Apr. 4, 1925 HOWELL: ALIMENTARY TRACTS OF SQUIRRELS 149
COLIC PORTION
The postcaecal inflation in Sczwrus consisted merely of a gradual narrow-
ing from the full diameter of the caecum until at 30 mm. from the end of the
small intestine the hind gut was uniform in size and character with the
remainder of the rectal tract.
In Citellus the caecum, posterior to the small intestine, did not narrow
gradually. The departure of the hind gut from the caecum was marked
by a valve-like constriction, and the colic portion, 25 mm. in length, was
convoluted with a suggestion of two loops.
RECTAL TRACT
In both animals this was simple, and measured about 340 mm. in length.
DISCUSSION
For practical purposes of comparison, the unknown quantities in the
evolution of the intestinal tract, important as these may be, must be ignored
until such time as a great supply of data has been accumulated, and we can
merely assume in a tentative manner, for the time being, that the results
as we now find them were brought about by differences in food habits.
We are told that nuts are highly digestible, and the simplicity and weak-
ness of the stomach of the Sciurus is as might be expected. The citelline
stomach, slightly more capacious from a relative standpoint, is more muscular
for the handling of tougher, more fibrous food. The easily assimilated food
of Sciurus is reduced in the large stomach to a condition necessitating but
relatively little action by the small intestine and the caecum, both of which
are comparatively simple. It is to be noted that the length of the small
intestine is actually almost twice as long in Sciurus as in Cvtellus, and there-
fore the additional length may, and probably does, compensate in part
for its simplicity. The significance of this discrepancy in length is not
clearly understood. It is at variance with what might be expected, after
an examination of some of the other rodents which I have dissected, and
I venture no opinion as to its real import.
The stomach of Citellus, although more muscular, is not of sufficient
size to hold for long the great amount of herbage which the animal habitually
consumes. The contents, therefore, are soon passed on to the small intestine,
more specialized and more efficient for this work than in Sczurus. The
process is completed in the highly complex caecum, so much better fitted as
an engine for the final reduction of coarse fare than is the same part of the
tree squirrel.
CONCLUSION
From the foregoing data it is tentatively concluded that in comparing
the intestinal tracts of a nut-eating and a grass-eating squirrel, size of the
150 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 7
stomach is not of great import. Muscularity is important in reducing
fibrous substances, but a stomach may compensate for lack of great size in
handling quantity by passing the contents quickly on to the small intestine
and thence to the caecum, both of which must then be of larger diameter
and more specialized than is necessary in the case of the animal which feeds
chiefly upon nuts.
ZOOLOGY.—Description of a new scincid lizard and a new burrowing
frog from China. Lronnarp Stesnecer, U. 8. National Mu-
seum.
The National Museum has recently received from the Museum
of Comparative Zoology, in exchange, two skinks from the province
of Yunnan, which appear to represent an undescribed form of the
genus Leiolopisma, nearly related to the species occurring in eastern
and central China, generally known as L. laterale or L. laterale reeve-
sii. A skink, evidently belonging to the same group as the above,
was described in 1879 by Dr. John Anderson! from a single specimen
collected at Momien, extreme western Yunnan, under the name
Mocoa exigua. It has not been recognized since, and Boulenger in
his Catalog? refers to it doubtfully as a synonym of L. laterale. An-
derson’s description is not explicit enough to settle the question, but
the coloration as described seems to be sufficiently different from
that of L. laterale to permit them being considered synonymous, in-
asmuch as M. exigua is said to have ‘‘a dark brown band from the
snout along the back to the tail, on which it disappears near the
root,’ while in L. laterale and its supposed subspecies the back is
pale brown or olive with small scattered dusky spots or lines.
Leiolopisma barbouri, sp. nov.
Like L. laterale, but legs much smaller; preanals enlarged; four supraocu-
lars; ear-opening about as large as eye-opening; prefrontals separated from
anterior supraocular by frontal; forelegs reach corner of mouth; hind legs
less than one half the distance between axilla and groin; 26-28 scale rows.
Type locality——Yunnan-fu, province of Yunnan, China.
Type.—Mus. Comp. Zodl., no. 7261; J. Graham, collector.
The paratypes in the National Museum (Nos. 68723-4) are essentially
like the type, though, because of their less perfect preservation, the measure-
ments are less reliable. All three specimens are rather pale with a narrow
dark brown dorso-lateral line from the rostral through eye to the tip of the
tail, bordered above by a still narrower whitish line, these lines being located
on the fourth scale row on each side from the middle of the back. Pale area
1 Zoological results of the two expeditions to Western Yunnan, p. 797.
2 Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus. 3: 264. 1887.
Apr. 4, 1925 STEJNEGER: NEW LIZARD AND FROG FROM CHINA 151
of back between the dorso-lateral lines with numerous small dark brown
spots which, because they occupy the outer angle of the scale, form inter-
rupted lines ‘down the back. Sides of body and legs more irregularly spotted.
Underside whitish with faint grayish lines due to minute dots at the angles
of the scales.
The type has 28 scale rows around the middle of the body, the paratypes
26 scale rows.
MEASUREMENTS (IN MILLIMETERS)
M. C. Z. U.S. N. M. U.S. N.M.
7261 68723 68724
SRIDVOUSNOUy LOstLp OL Galley siagsciom ccm cris scyeiele 124
PEINOM SNOUT LORVED baecis tai ess aa fe ee ere ease: 48 41 38
DEMON SNOULHLOSCAT. 50-1.) ecic.c etelsot ors siesisiereiaise 7 7 aU
IEF NOHSNOUTLO TOTClE gs elce ar ricci c ctetere laters 1255 12 14
PASSE a GOP EROUM. oer aye ential se cls toes tea 31 25.5 23
PROK Cle pec creeieye c/a hieieionians Hittin ae his aie 2 aust eels 8 8 7.5
Find elec see Arp) eh pena sha SN oie eee ch 22 11 12 16)
The new species is named in honor of Dr. Thomas Barbour.
In a collection of amphibians and reptiles belonging to the Zoological
Museum of the University of Michigan and kindly submitted to me for study,
I find a burrowing frog, collected at Nanking, which I believe represents an
undescribed species. With the permission of Dr. Alex. Ruthven, I propose
to name it:
Kaloula wolterstorf—i, sp. nov.
Toes slightly webbed at the base; digits not dilated at tips; upper surface
and sides slightly tuberculated; interorbital space nearly twice as wide as
upper eyelid; both metatarsal tubercles very large, very close together,
inner one nearly twice as long as first toe; subarticular tubercles on toes
very weak.
Type locality—Nanking, province of Kiangsu, China.
Type——Zool. Mus. Univ. Michigan, No. 60310; N. A. Wood, collector.
This species has a certain similarity to K. verrucosa from Yunnan, but
differs from it in many important characters as shown by a comparison with
two topotypes which the National Museum has obtained from Dr. Thomas
Barbour. Thus, for instance, the tips of the fingers which in K. verrucosa
are broadly truncated, in the new species are tapering; third finger is also
relatively longer; web at the base of the toes not much more than a rudiment
The inner metatarsal tubercle is enormous, nearly twice as long as the
diminutive first toe; the outer one is also very large, the two being nearly
confluent at base. The subarticular tubercles are weaker than in K. verru-
cosa, and so are the tubercles on the back, which are smooth and but slightly
prominent. The head is also very different. In K. wolterstorffi the inter-
orbital width is much greater, being nearly twice as wide as the eyelid, and
the snout more pointed and longer, the distance from tip of snout to eye
being greater than the diameter of the eye.
Measurements (in millimeters)—Tip of snout to vent, 35; tip of snout to
eye, 4.5; diameter of eye, 3.5; width of head, 12; interorbital space, 4.5;
152 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 7
upper eyelid, 2.5; foreleg, 20; hind leg from vent, 38; tibia, 11; inner meta-
tarsal tubercle, 3; first toe from metatarsal tubercle, 1.5.
Quite probably the species here described is the same which Dr. W.
Wolterstorff has recorded’ from Tsingtao, Shantung, under the name Callula
verrucosa. The deviations noted by him from Boulenger’s description of
that species tally very well with the Nanking specimen. Such an identifi-
cation would also make for a more consistent geographical distribution of
the two species.
In any event, Dr. Wolterstorff has done so much for the elucidation of
the amphibians of eastern China, that the dedication of this new species
is well merited.
ENTOMOLOGY .—New American termites, including a new subgenus.
Tuomas E. Snyprr, Bureau of Entomology, U. S. Department
of Agriculture.
Dr. W.M. Mann, of the Bureau of Entomology, visited Guatemala,
Honduras, Costa Rica, and Colombia in the winter and spring of
1924, and collected some extremely interesting termites. It is not
necessary to state that Dr. Mann is a most successful collector, and
has added much to our knowledge of American termites. In addi-
tion to collecting the conspicuous tree-nesting species, Dr. Mann
painstakingly chopped into hard, solid wood and, in consequence, dis-
covered some remarkable new species in the family Kalotermitidae,
including a new subgenus.
From the standpoint of biology and habitat, certain species in the
family Kalotermitidae, especially in the subgenera Cryptotermes
Banks, Glyptotermes Froggatt, Lobitermes Holmgren, et. al., occupy
the same role among termites (Isoptera) as do species of Bostrichidae
(1. s.) among beetles (Coleoptera); they represent the ‘‘powder-post”
termites, as the latter represent the ‘“powder-post”’ beetles. Many
species in this group are essentially house termites and are of great,
or at least of potentially great, economic importance.
Twenty species of termites, of which six are new, were found; this
collecting, of course, was incidental to other work.
The new species are: (Family Kalotermitidae) Kalotermes contrac-
ticornis Snyder, Kalotermes (Calcaritermes) imminens Snyder, Kalo-
termes (Calcaritermes) recessifrons Snyder, Kalotermes (Glyptotermes)
3 Abh. Mus. Magdeburg 1: 145, pl. 1, f. 1-2. 1906.
apr. 4, 1925 SNYDER: NEW AMERICAN TERMITES 153
suturis Snyder, Kalotermes (Glyptotermes) planus Snyder; (Family
Termitidae) Armitermes (Rhynchotermes) major Snyder.
To the descriptions of these new species there is appended a list
of the previously known species of Dr. Mann’s collection with a
record of the localities and dates of collection, and of the castes
obtained.
Kalotermes contracticornis, new species
Soldier—Head yellow-brown, darker anteriorly, not twice as long as
broad, broader posteriorly than anteriorly, sides slightly concave in middle,
epicranial suture distinct, front sloping and slightly depressed at origin,
head with scattered but not numerous long hairs. Gula narrow in middle;
half width at front. Eye spot hyaline, large, reniform. Mandibles black,
base reddish, incurved and sharp pointed at apex, broad at base; left man-
dible with sharp pointed tooth near apex, a broad molar in middle, with apical
tooth sharp, and another (molar) near base; right mandible with a sharp
pointed tooth in middle and molar near base (Fig. 1).
Antenna yellow, with 13 or 14 segments; segments wedge-shaped, become
longer and broader towards apex, not as long as width of head, with long
hairs; third segment (if 14 segments) not modified, longer than fourth but
shorter than second segment; fifth equal to fourth; last segment short and
narrow, wedge-shaped; (if 13 segments) third segment very small, ring-like,
shorter and narrower than second or fourth segments; fourth shorter than
second, slightly longer and broader than fifth segment.
Pronotum dirty white, tinged with yellow, margins darker (yellow-brown),
anterior margin broadly and roundly emarginate, posteriorly slightly emar-
ginate, anterior corners high, sides roundly slope to posterior margin, with
scattered long hairs.
Legs tinged light yellowish, femora swollen, but not greatly; tibia with
three spines at apex.
Abdomen dirty grey white, tinged with yellow, tergites with dense long
hairs at base; cerci not prominent.
Measurements—Entire soldier 7.5-8 mm. long; head with mandibles
443 mm. long; head without mandibles (to anterior) 2.9-3 mm. long;
left mandible 1.6 mm. long; pronotum 0.8-0.9 mm. long; hind tibia 1.2 mm.
long; head (anteriorly) 1.6-1.7 mm. wide, (posteriorly) 1.7-1.9 mm. wide;
pronotum 1.6 mm. wide.
Type locality—Navarro, Costa Rica.
Described from a series of soldiers collected with nymphs at the type
locality in March, 1924, by W. M. Mann. Type, soldier: Cat. no. 27733,
U.S. N. M.
Kalotermes contracticornis Snyder may be the same species that N. Banks
determined as K. posticus Hagen (from Jamaica); posticus was described by
Hagen from the deflated adult alone; contracticornis is smaller than simp-
licicorms Banks, of Texas (later, also Arizona), and has less dense pubescence on
the head. The marginal teeth of the mandibles are different, and the third
segment of the antenna is not as much modified or relatively as large.
154 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 7
5 7
Views of head, pronotum, mandibles and forelegs of new species
of Kalotermitidae
Fig. 1. Kalotermes (Kalotermes) contracticornis Snyder. Soldier; dorsal view of
mandibles to show marginal teeth. Fig. 2. Kalotermes (Calcaritermes) tmminens Snyder.
Soldier; three quarters view of head, pronotum and foreleg to show overhanging, dorsal,
anterior margin of head, scooped out front, and dorsal spur at apex of tibia. Fig. 3.
Kalotermes (Calcaritermes) imminens Snyder. Soldier; dorsal view of mandibles to show
marginal teeth. Fig. 4. Kalotermes (Calcaritermes) imminens Snyder. Soldier; view of
chitinized spur on apex of tibia of foreleg. Fig. 5. Kalotermes (Calcarttermes) reces-
sifrons Snyder. Soldier; dorsal view of mandibles to show marginal teeth. Fig. 6. Kalo-
termes (Glyptotermes) planus Snyder. Soldier; dorsal view of mandibles to show marginal
teeth. Fig. 7. Kalotermes (Glyptotermes) suturis Snyder. Soldier; dorsal view of man-
dibles to show marginal teeth. (Fig. 2 drawn by Miss E. T. Armstrong; all other draw-
ings made by the writer using camera lucida; all camera lucida drawings on the same
scale) .
apr. 4, 1925 SNYDER: NEW AMERICAN TERMITES 155
Kalotermes Hagen, subgenus Calcaritermes, new subgenus
Soldier—Head dark colored, fairly elongate, semicylindrical, thick,
concave at middle in profile, dorsal anterior margin cleft or lobed medianly.
Front of head not vertical but with oblique slope seen from the front, some-
times head with dorsal rim overhanging or projecting, more or less concave
or scooped out between upper rim and postclypeus. Mandibles usually
short, broad, with marginal teeth. Antenna usually with 11 segments.
Forelegs with two spines at apex of tibiae and also a chitinized, elongate,
thick (at base), pointed upturned, dorsal spur, femora swollen; cerci present.
Wznged aduli—The winged form is similar to those of the subgenera
Glyptotermes Froggatt and Lobitermes Holmgren; the median vein is close to
and parallel to the subcosta.
Genotype-—Kalotermes (Calcaritermes) imminens Snyder from Cincinnati,
Colombia; Kalotermes (Calcaritermes) recessifrons Snyder, from the same
locality, is also included in this new subgenus, as are Kalotermes (Lobitermes)
nigriceps Emerson, of British Guiana, Kalotermes (Glyptotermes) emargzni-
collis Snyder, Kalotermes (Cryptotermes) bregicollis Banks, of Panama, and
Kalotermes (Glyptotermes) corniceps Snyder, of Porto Rica.
Kalotermes (Calcaritermes) imminens, new species
Deélated, female adult—-Head dark castaneous-brown, with reddish
tinge, lighter below eyes, shining, longer than broad, slopes anteriorly at
epicranial suture, with scattered, fairly elongate hairs. Eye black, markedly
not round, projecting, separated from lateral margin by a distance less than
the long diameter of an eye. Ocellus hyaline, white, suboval, projecting,
separated from eye by a distance less than the diameter of an ocellus, set
obliquely to eye.
Antenna light yellow-brown, broken (8 segments'), segments bead-like,
become markedly longer and broader beyond fourth segment, with long
hairs; third segment subclavate, subequal to second but longer than fourth
segment.
Pronotum same color as head, anterior margin broadly and roundly emar-
ginate, posterior margin nearly straight, anterior corners high, sides roundly
slope to posterior margin, with scattered fairly long hairs.
Legs yellow with tinge of brown, elongate, slender; pulvillus present;
femora swollen, tibiae with 3 elongate, chitinized spines at apex, on fore-
leg 1 spine longer than others, with long hairs.
Abdomen with tergites same color as pronotum, with long hairs at base
of each tergite, cerci present.
Measurements ——Entire female, dedlated adult 6.3 mm. long; head (to tip
of labrum) 1.5 mm. long; pronotum 0.7 mm. long; eye (long diameter)
0.3 mm.; hind tibia 1.3 mm. long; head (at eyes) 1.35 mm. wide; pronotum:
1.1 mm. wide.
Soldier (Fig. 2)—Head castaneous-brown, darker anteriorly (piceous),
fairly elongate, semicylindrical, thick (high), concave at middle in profile,
head longer dorsally than ventrally, with an overhanging, projecting upper
rim, which is cleft or lobed medianly, but the lobes touch (no opening between
except at anterior margin), anterior margin of rim roughened. Head with
scattered long hairs. Front of head not vertical but with oblique slope
1 Nymph of sexual form with 13 segments to antenna.
156 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 7
ventrally and towards posterior margin; seen from the front, deeply scooped
out, concave like a socket between upper rim and post clypeus. Eye spot
dark, not distinct, in depression with antennal socket.
Mandibles piceous, short, broad, with marginal teeth as figured (Fig. 3).
Antenna white, with yellowish tinge, short, with 11 or 12 segments;
segments become broader and longer towards apex, with long hairs; third
segment (if 11 segments) narrow, short, subclavate, shorter and narrower
than second or fourth segments; fourth shorter than second; remaining
segments wedge-shaped; last segment narrower, suboval; (if 12 segments)
third segment ring-like, very small; fourth much shorter than second or
fifth segments.
Pronotum same color as head, not quite as broad as head, anterior margin
broadly but angularly emarginate, nearly straight, the posterior margin
more roundly but broadly emarginate; sides gradually slope to posterior
margin; with scattered long hairs.
Legs white, tinged with yellow, femora swollen, fore tibiae with 2 spines
at apex and also a chitinized, elongate, thick, (at base) upturned, pointed
dorsal spur, with long and short hairs. (Fig. 4.)
Abdomen grey white, tinged with yellow, with long hairs; cerci present,
fairly elongate.
Measurements.—Entire soldier 5.7-6.2 mm. long; head with mandibles
2.1-2.25 mm. long; head to anterior without mandibles (dorsally) 1.7-1.85
mm. long; head to anterior without mandibles (ventrally): 1.55-1.6 mm.
long; left mandible 1 mm. long; pronotum 0.8-0.85 mm. long; hind tibia
0.7-0.8 mm. long; head anteriorly 1.4-1.45 mm. high; head posteriorly 1.25-
1.3 mm. high; head 1.4-1.5 mm. wide; pronotum 1.4-1.45 mm. wide.
Type locality —Cincinnati, Colombia.
Described from a series of soldiers collected with nymphs and a deilated
adult at the type locality, in February, 1924, by Dr. W. M. Mann. Type,
soldier: Cat. no. 27734, U. S. N. M.; morphotype, deilated female, adult.
Kalotermes (C.) imminens Snyder differs from all other known species in
nearly related subgenera, and, in view of the overhanging dorsal rim of the
head and dorsal spur on the tibia of the forelegs, it was deemed advisable to
erect anew subgenus for this species. The specific name refers to the overhang-
ing rim of the head, the subgeneric name to the tibial spur, which does not
occur in species of other subgenera of Kalotermes.
Kalotermes (Calcaritermes) recessifrons, new species
Winged adult—Head dark castaneous-brown, with reddish tinge, lighter
below the eyes, shining, longer than broad, sides parallel, rounded posteriorly,
with scattered long hairs. Eye black, not round, projecting, separated from
lateral margin of head by a distance less than the long diameter of an eye;
ocellus hyaline, small, projecting, suboval, nearly touching eye.
Antennae brown, with 13 segments, segments becoming longer and broader
towards apex, with long hairs; third segment subclavate, longer than fourth
but shorter than second segment; fifth longer than fourth; segments become
wedge-shaped towards apex; last segment elongate and subelliptical.
Pronotum same color as head, anterior margin broadly, angularly emar-
ginate, posterior margin nearly straight, sides gradually and roundly slope
to posterior margin, not much narrowed posteriorly, with scattered long
hairs.
apr. 4, 1925 SNYDER: NEW AMERICAN TERMITES 157
Wings dusky brown, costal veins darker, membrane coarsely punctate;
fore wing with median vein close to and parallel to subcostal vein, cubitus
in about middle of wing, branches to apex of wing, with sub-branches to
lower margin.
Legs light yellow-brown, femora darker dorsally, with 3 elongate spines
at apex of tibiae, pulvillus present, pubescent.
Abdomen dark castaneous-brown, with long hairs, cerci present, but not
prominent.
Measu g;
adult 4.6-5.3 mm. long; head (to tip labrum) 1.2 mm. long; pronotum 0.7
mm. long; hind tibia 0.9 mm. long; fore wing 6 mm. long; eye (long diameter)
0.275 mm.; head (at eyes) 1 mm. wide; pronotum 0.95 mm. wide; fore wing
1.65 mm. wide.
Soldier—Head castaneous-brown, darker anteriorly (piceous), fairly
elongate, semicylindrical, thick, concave in the middle in profile, head longer
ventrally than dorsally, front of head not vertical, sloped anteriorly, ven-
trally, seen from the front more or less shallowly concave, margin of frontal
area not strongly developed, with but only slight outlines of a rim, anterior
margin slightly roughened, head lobed medianly at anterior margin(a
broad V-shaped, shallow, lobe), head with few, scattered, long and short
hairs. Eye spot hyaline, suboval, prominent, separated from antennal
socket by a distance greater than its long diameter, long diameter of eye spot
parallel to rim of antennal socket. Gula broadest at middle.
Labrum yellow, broader than long, tongue-shaped, with long hairs.
Mandibles piceous, short, broad, with marginal teeth as figured (Fig. 5).
Antenna white, tinged with yellow, short, with 11 segments, the segments
become broader and longer towards apex, with long hairs; third segment
short, ring-like, shorter and narrower than second or fourth segments; fourth
ring-like, short, shorter than second or fifth segments and only slightly
longer than third; last segment elongate, narrow, subelliptical.
Pronotum same color as head, not as broad as head, anterior and pos-
terior margins broadly, round-emarginate, anterior corners high, sides nearly
straight, with scattered long hairs.
Presternal process dark, (castaneous).
Legs white, tinged with yellow; femora swollen, fore tibiae with 2 spines
at apex and also a chitinized, elongate, thick (at base), upturned, pointed
dorsal spur, with long and short hairs.
Abdomen gray-white, tinged with yellow, with long hairs; cerci present.
Measurements——Entire soldier 4.6 mm. long; head with mandibles 2 mm.
long; head to anterior without mandibles (dorsally) 1.3 mm. long; head to
anterior without mandibles (ventrally) 1.7 mm. long; left mandible 0.7 mm
long; pronotum 0.7 mm. long; hind tibia 0.6 mm. long; head 0.9 mm. high;
head anteriorly 1.2 mm. wide; head posteriorly 1.3 mm. wide; pronotum
1.25 mm. wide.
Type locality Cincinnati, Colombia.
Described from a single soldier, collected with a series of winged adults,
at the type locality by W. M. Mann in February, 1924. Type, soldier:
Cat. no. 27735, U. S. N. M.; morphotype, winged adult.
Kalotermes Hagen, subgenus Glyptotermes Froggatt
Winged adult—The wing venation is very characteristic, the median
vein runs parallel and close to the subcostal vein and there are no cross
branches; the antennae have 13 segments.
158 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 7
Soldier.—The head is more or less elongate, the front is steeply oblique
and often somewhat scooped out or concave and lobed; the antennae usually
have 10 to 12 segments; the mandibles are relatively short and broad.
The subgenus Lobitermes Holmgren is closely related to Glyptotermes;
the winged adult is as in Glyptotermes. The soldier of species of Lobitermes
has the head deeply lobed, relatively short, thickly cylindrical, and with the
front nearly vertical. The head is shorter and darker colored (blacker)
than in Glyptotermes, and the antennae have more segments (11 to 14).
The mandibles are short, and are hardly visible from above.
Kalotermes (Glyptotermes) planus, new species
Winged, female adult—-Head deep castaneous-brown, with reddish:
tinge, lighter below eyes, longer than broad, with scattered long hairs.
Eyes black, not round, slightly projecting, separated from lateral margin
of head by a distance less than long diameter of eye. Ocelli hyaline, sub-
oval, projecting, close and .at oblique angle to eyes.
Antennae yellow-brown, 11 segments, segments bead-like, becoming very
much longer and broader towards apex, with long hairs; third segment sub-
clavate, short and narrow, shorter than second or fourth segments; fourth
segment shorter than second segment; fifth longer and broader than fourth
segment; last segment slender, elongate, subelliptical, with truncate apex.
Pronotum same color as head, anterior margin broadly angularly emar-
ginate, posterior margin nearly straight, anterior corners high, sides roundly
slope to posterior, with scattered long hairs.
Wings dusky, smoky, costal area darker (brown), tissue coarsely punctate;
median vein close to and parallel to subeosta; cubitus nearly in center of
wing, slightly nearer to median vein than to lower margin of wing, branching
to apex of wing.
Legs yellow, elongate, slender, pulvillus present, pubescent.
Abdomen with tergites the same color as pronotum, with long hairs;
cercl present.
Measurements—Entire winged adult 6.7 mm. long; entire dedlated adult
4.8 mm. long; head (to tip labrum) 1 mm. long; pronotum 0.5 mm. long;
fore wing 5.15 mm. long; hind tibia 0.7 mm. long; eye (long diameter) 0.235
mm.; head (at eyes) 0.80 mm. wide; pronotum 0.75 mm. wide; fore wing
1.35 mm. wide.
Soldier—Head yellow, darker anteriorly (light yellow-brown to light
castaneous-brown, with a reddish tinge), paler posteriorly, in profile head
in nearly a straight line, not high, front slopes obliquely, anteriorly, with
broad rounded median suture, lobes but very little elevated, slightly rough-
ened, with scattered fairly long hairs (a row of longer hairs both anteriorly
and posteriorly).
Eye spot not distinct, suboval, close to rim of antennal socket.
Gula narrower in middle.
Mandibles reddish-brown at base, piceous at apex, short and_ broad,
marginal teeth as figured (Fig. 6).
Antennae white, tinged with yellow, 10 segments, segments wedge-shaped,
becoming longer and broader towards apex, with long hairs; third segment
subclavate, narrower and shorter than second or fourth segments; fourth
segment only slightly longer than third but quite a little shorter than second;
Apr. 4, 1925 SNYDER: NEW AMERICAN TERMITES 159
fifth longer and broader than fourth segment; last segment short, narrow,
wedge-shaped.
Pronotum yellow, darker, light yellow-brown on margins, anterior margin
broadly angularly emarginate, posterior margin slightly convex, nearly
straight, slight median emargination, anterior corners high, sides narrowed
(angularly slope) posteriorly, with scattered long hairs.
Presternal processes light yellow-brown.
Legs light yellow, femora swollen, tibiae with three chitinized apical
spines, with long hairs.
Abdomen with tergites gray-white with yellowish tinge, with long hairs,
cerci present.
Measurements.—Entire soldier 4.8-4+.9 mm. long; head with mandibles
1.7-1.85 mm. long; head to anterior without mandibles (dorsally) 1.1 mm.
long; head to anterior without mandibles (ventrally) 1.25 mm. long; left
mandible 0.65 mm. long; pronotum 0.45 mm. long; hind tibia 0.5 mm.
long; head 0.8 mm. high; head anteriorly 0.8 mm. wide; head posteriorly
0.9 mm. wide; pronotum 0.85-0.9 mm. wide.
Type locality—Colombiana, Costa Rica.
Described from three soldiers collected with two winged female adults
and nymphs at the type locality in April, 1924, by W. M. Mann. Type,
soldier: Cat. no. 27736, U. 8. N. M.; morphotype, winged female adult.
The soldier of K. (G.) planus Snyder has a light colored head, with anterior
lobes not prominent; winged adult with only 11 segments to antennae and
small eyes.
Kalotermes (Glyptotermes) suturis new species
Winged female adult—Head light castaneous-brown with a reddish
tinge, darker on vertex, lighter below the eyes, not much longer than broad
front with an oblique slope anteriorly, with scattered long hairs. Eyes black,
not round, projecting, separated from lateral margin of head by a distance
less than an eye diameter. Ocelli hyaline, suboval, projecting, almost
touching and at an oblique angle to eyes.
Antennae light yellow-brown, (broken 8 segments), segments bead-like,
become longer’and broader towards apex, with long hairs; third segment
subclavate, narrow, slightly longer than fourth but slightly shorter than
second segment; fifth longer and broader than fourth segment.
Pronotum slightly darker than head, anterior margin broadly angularly
emarginate, posterior margin slightly and shallowly, roundly emarginate,
anterior corners high, sides roundly slope posteriorly, with scattered long
hairs.
Wings dusky, smoky brown, costal area darker (brown), coarsely punc-
tate; in fore wing, median vein close to and parallel to subcosta, cubitus
nearly in center of wing, slightly closer to median vein than to lower margin
of wing, branching to apex of wing.
Legs light yellow-brown, elongate, slender, pulvillus present, pubescent.
Abdomen with tergites about same color as pronotum, with long hairs
at base; cerci present, not prominent.
Measurements.—Entire winged adult 7.8 mm. long; entire dedlated adult
6.3 mm. long; head (to tip labrum) 1.3 mm. long; pronotum 0.6 mm. long;
fore wing 6 mm. long; hind tibia 1 mm. long; eye (long diameter) 0.275 mm.
head (at eyes) 1.2 mm. wide; pronotum 1 mm. wide; fore wing 1.7 mm. wide.
Soldier —Head light yellow, darker (yellow-brown) anteriorly, longer
than broad, slightly broader posteriorly, sides approximately parallel, slightly
160 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 7
concave anteriorly in profile, front obliquely, angularly sloping anteriorly,
broad, rounded suture medianly, margins of lobes rounded, not roughened,
lobes slightly elevated, head with scattered long hairs. Eye spot hyaline,
elongate long diameter parallel to rim of antennal socket, separated from
antennal socket by a distance equal to the long diameter of the eye spot.
Gula elongate, narrow at middle. Labrum light yellow, broader than long,
tongue-shaped, with long hairs.
Mandibles reddish brown to piceous at apex, short and broad; marginal
teeth as figured (Fig. 7).
Antennae light yellow, 10 segments, segments become longer and broader
(wedge-shaped) towards apex, with long hairs; third segment short, sub-
clavate, shorter than second but slightly longer than fourth segment; fourth
ring-like, only slightly shorter than third segment but much shorter than
eee fifth longer than fourth segment; last segment narrower, wedge-
shaped.
Pronotum yellow, margins light yellow-brown, broadly shallowly roundly
emarginate at anterior margin, posterior margin nearly straight, sides angu-
larly slope posteriorly, anterior corners high, with scattered, long hairs.
Presternal processes light yellow-brown.
Legs white tinged with yellow, femora swollen, tibiae with 3 chitinized
elongate spines at apex, with scattered, long hairs.
Abdomen gray-white, tinged with yellow, with long hairs; cerci present.
Measurements.—Entire soldier 5 mm. long; head with mandibles 2.25 mm.
long; head to anterior without mandibles (dorsally) 1.85 mm. long; head to
anterior without mandibles (ventrally) 1.5 mm. long; left mandible 0.8 mm.
long; pronotum 0.55 mm. long; hind tibia 0.7 mm. long; head 0.95 mm.
high; head anteriorly 1.05 mm. wide; head posteriorly 1.15 mm. wide; pro-
notum 1 mm. wide.
Type locality—La Carpentera, Costa Rica.
Described from a single soldier collected with a winged female adult and
nymphs at the type locality in April, 1924, by W.M. Mann. Type, soldier.—
Cat no. 27737, U: 8. N. M.; morphotype, female winged adult.
The soldier of K. (G.) suturis Snyder has a light-colored head, with a
rounded suture at the front of the head, the lobes being slightly elevated
and rounded.
Armitermes (Rhynchotermes) major, new species
Soldier —Head light castaneous-brown, middle of beak or nasus and mandi-
bles darker, reddish-brown (to piceous), head relatively short, pear-shaped
(with base of nasus), otherwise round, nasus very elongate, curved down-
ward, becoming gradually attenuated towards apex, where there are short hairs,
1 row short hairs on head anteriorly. Mandibles relatively very short, bent
inwards or hook-shaped, inner margin near tips not crenulate, near center
of each mandible a long outward curved, sharp, pointed marginal tooth.
Antenna yellow-brown, elongate, slender (with 14 elongate segments),
with long hairs; third segment subclavate, longer than first, longer than
second or fourth; fourth segment longer than second; fifth segment longer
than fourth; segments gradually becoming shorter but broader towards
apex; last segment subelliptical.
Pronotum light-brown, darker on margins, saddle-shaped, broader than
long, high and roundedly narrow at anterior margin, where emarginate,
broadly rounded posteriorly; long hairs on anterior margin.
apr. 4, 1925 SNYDER: NEW AMERICAN TERMITES 161
Legs yellow, with tinge of brown, elongate, with scattered long, but sparse
hairs; coxae of fore legs with an elongate point or sharp process, sometimes
hook-shaped and curving; two spines at apex of tibia.
Abdomen dirty gray-white, with tinge of yellow (to yellow-brown), with
row of long hairs at base of each tergite.
Measurements—Entire soldier 5.5-6 mm. long; head with nasus 3-3.2 mm.
long; head with mandibles 1.8 mm. long; head to anterior 1.2 mm. long;
nasus 1.9 mm. long; left mandible 1.2 mm. long; pronotum 0.4 mm. long;
hind tibia 1.85-2 mm. long; head (at widest portion) 1.15-1.25 mm. wide;
pronotum 0.7 mm. wide.
The soldier of A. (R.) major Snyder is darker colored, larger than nasutis-
simus Silvestri, it has a longer, more aquiline head and nasus, longer mandi-
bles, and long, pointed marginal teeth, the antennae have longer segments,
the process on the coxae is longer and more pointed; in comparison with
perarmatus Snyder, major is slightly darker colored and is consistently larger.
Worker —The head of the worker is light castaneous-brown, with seattered
long hairs, with prominent, hyaline, round, raised fontanelle (larger than in
perarmatus), it is darker colored and larger than the worker of nasutissimus
or perarmatus; antennae with 14 segments; post-clypeus about same color
as head, bulging, bilobed.
Measurements—Entire worker 4.7-5.3 mm. long; head 1.7 mm. long;
pronotum 0.45 mm. long; hind tibia 1.7 mm. long; head tibia 1.7 mm. long;
head 1.4 mm. wide; pronotum 0.7 mm. wide.
The winged adult is unknown.
Type locality—Estrella, Costa Rica.
Described from a large series of soldiers and workers collected in April,
1924, at the type locality by Dr. W. M. Mann. Type, soldier. Cat. no.
27738, U. S. N.. M.
Dr. Mann also found specimens of the termite at Sangrelaya, Honduras,
in May, 1924, under the bark of a decayed log. I previously referred
these specimens to the species perarmatus Snyder, from Panama, but. this
additional material shows a large series which are of constantly larger size
and are hence referred to the species major Snyder.
LIST OF DESCRIBED SPECIES
KALOTERMITIDAE
KALOTERMES (KALOTERMES) TUBERCULIFRONS Snyder
GuatTEeMALA, Antigua (El Potrero, Finca Vic, three soldiers, collected by
J. R. Slevin). These soldiers were compared with the type from Mexico;
the antennae of the type were broken off at the fourth segment, but the
soldiers from Antigua have 13 segments to the antennae; the head is slightly
broader anteriorly in the type, whereas in these specimens the head is broader
posteriorly, the eye spot is darker and smaller, and the femora more swollen,
than in the type.
RHINOTERMITIDAE
LEUCOTERMES TENUIS Hagen
Cotomst1a: Rio Frio, Feb., 1924 (soldiers and workers with Termitaphis
sp.) Rio Frio, Feb., 1924 (soldiers with Microcerotermes exiguus Hagen,
queens, soldiers and workers).
162 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 7
PRORHINOTERMES MOLINO! Snyder
Cosra Rica: Zent, March, 1924 (soldiers and workers with soldiers and
workers of Coptotermes niger Snyder).
CopTroTERMES NIGER Snyder
GUATEMALA: Mixco, May, 1924 (soldiers and workers).
Costa Rica: Zent, March, 1924 (soldiers and workers with Prorhinotermes
molinoi Snyder, soldiers and workers).
Cotomsia: Rio Frio, Feb., 1924 (soldiers and workers).
TERMITIDAE
AMITERMES MEDIUS Banks
Cotomsia: Rio Frio, Feb., 1924 (soldiers, workers and nymphs). Santa
Ana, Feb., 1924 (soldiers, workers and nymphs).
CoRNITERMES (Cornitermes) ACIGNATHUS Silvestri
Costa Rica: Colombiana, April, 1924 (soldiers and workers).
NasuTITERMES (Nasutitermes) CORNIGERA Motschulsky
GuATEMALA: Mixco, May, 1924 (queen, king, soldiers and workers).
Honpuras: Sangrelaya, March, 1924 (queen, king, soldiers and workers).
Sangrelaya, March, 1924 (queens, kings, soldiers and workers).
Malva, May, 1924 (queens, kings, soldiers and workers).
Costa Rica: Colombiana, March, 1924 (queen, soldiers and workers).
El Coyolar, March, 1924 (queen, soldiers and workers). Zent, March,
April, 1924 (queen, soldiers and workers). Estrella, April, 1924 (queen
soldiers and workers). San Mateo, April, 1924 (queen, king, winged
adults, soldiers and workers).
NASUTITERMES (Nasutitermes) EPHRATAE Holmgren
Honpuras: Sangrelaya, May, 1924 (3 queens, winged adults, soldiers
and workers in ball nest—outer shell 2” thick and very hard). San-
grelaya, May, 1924 (queen, soldiers and workers).
Costa Rica: Colombiana, March, 1924 (queen, soldiers and workers in
nest on ground). Colombiana, April, 1924 (winged adults, soldiers
and workers).
NASUTITERMES (Nasutitermes) ROTUNDATUS Holmgren
Costa Rica: Colombiana, April, 1924 (soldiers and workers).
NASUTITERMES (Tenuirostritermes) TENUIROSTRIS Desneux
GuaTEeMALA: Antigua, May, 1924 (soldiers and workers). Palin, May,
1924 (soldiers and workers).
ANOPLOTERMES (Anoplotermes) SP.
Costa Rica: El Coyolar, April, 1924 (workers and nymphs).
ANOPLOTERMES (Speculitermes) sP.
Cotomsi1a: Rio Frio, Feb., 1924 (workers marching from nests in files,
cutting leaves and carrying cut pieces).
MickOCEROTERMES ARBOREUS Emerson
Honpuras: Ceiba, April, 1924 (queens, winged adults, soldiers and
workers).
MIcROCEROTERMES EXIGUUS Hagen
_ GUATEMALA: Esquintla, May, 1924 (queen, soldiers and workers).
Cotoms1a: Rio Frio, Feb., 1924 (queen, soldiers and workers). Rio
Frio, March, 1924 (queens, soldiers and workers with soldiers of Leuco-
termes tenuis Hagen).
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Saturday, April 4. The Philosophical Society, at the Cosmos Club. Pro-
F gram: EF. WENNER and F. M. Sours: Measurement of cyclic changes in
electrical resistance. I.G. Priest: Gray skies and white snow.
_ Tuesday, April 7. The Botanical Society.
_ Wednesday, April8. The Geological Society.
_ Thursday, April9. The Chemical Society.
x Bianniay. April11. The Biological Society.
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE
JOURNAL
y Thursday, March 12. The Chemical Society. E. G. Zizs: Fumerolic incrustations in
: the Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes.
_ Tuesday, March 17. The Anthropological Society. M. Herskovits: Some aspects of
, the anthropology of the American Negro.
_ ‘Thursday, March 19. The Acapremy, the Society of Engineers, The Chemical Society,
‘ American Society for Steel Treating (joint meeting). Kari Brnepicxs: The theory
of high speed steel.
é ‘Saturday, March 28. The Biological Society. H. C. ie aes The future of the
_ Potomac Valley below Great Falls. W. B.’ Greetny: The jnational forests of the
CONTENTS
OriainaL Papers
Entomology—New American termites, eats a new el
SNYDER Ga ees spt a praia te weet ene pithy bs wis nce Oem on
cag }
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
1. 15 Aprit 19, 1925 ' No. 8
JOURNAL
OF THE ‘
ASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
: BOARD OF EDITORS
__ E.P. Kuure D. F. Hewerr S. J. Maucany
RATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL<SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L, H. Apams S. A. Ronwer
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GotpMAN G. W. Stoss
‘ BIOLOGICAL SOCIZETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Griaes J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
Pad
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY As fA
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN/MONTHLY. . 2409% |
F ig AR 4h We a) i
4 YY THE 4 1 } i
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES a A
Mr. Roya. anp GuinrorD AvEs. 8tiéKs| wus®
ae
BALTmoRE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Ai for ing at special rate of provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918.
Made in United States of America
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JourNat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, simsto
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. Tothisenditpublishes:
(1) short ongigs papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington; —
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: -(4
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issue
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Prompt —
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or —
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on reieet from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. ;
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate —
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. 4
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof —in order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ~ :
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4 pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints ;
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. ;
The rate of Subscription per volume t8..........00.secccecscees Sickie Saute $6.00°
Semi-monthly numbers <6). 30/5. o siclsis < sc s's's s.cie wis hs! sleletsip aise proatatcbe saan pepe he
Monthly numborat ss io sisi cc siewicts sisiele suis. ale ae ie cikie wisleval@a sie ier nyse eae -50
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” and ~
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.C. —
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. en
Exchanges—The Journat does not exchange with other publications, =
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue. vt
* Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. Bea ;
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 Aprit 19, 1925 No. 8
CHEMISTRY.—The addition compounds 3, 5-dibromo-o-toluidine
with metallic salts! Raymonp M. Hann and G. C. SPENCER.
U. S. Department of Agriculture. (Communicated by Epaar
T. WHERRY.)
During a comparative study of two methods for the determination
of nitrogen? it became a matter of interest to test the effect of meta!s
upon the catalytic oxidation of organic matter by sulfuric acid previous
to final conversion of all nitrogen to ammonium sulfate. The addition
compounds of anilines with metallic halides seemed suitable for the
study in mind, as they contained nitrogen and the desired metal in a
single compound. Several such compounds were made. This paper
reports the experimental data incidental to the preparation of addition
products of 3, 5-dibromo-o-toluidine with mercuric’ chloride, zinc
chloride, cadmium chloride, and cadmium bromide. The effect of the
added metal upon the nitrogen determination was appreciable only
in those cases where ammonia formed.with the metal complex salts
which were stable above the boiling point of water.
Addition compounds of aniline and its homologues with metallic
salts are too well known to deserve comment.’ Double salts of the
hydrohalides of aniline and its homologues have been studied under
the direction of Ira Remsen.‘ Few of the halogen-substituted anilines
have been combined with metallic salts, except platinic chloride.
Dibromo-o-toluidine combines readily with mercuric chloride, cad-
1 Presented before the Ithaca meeting of the American Chemical Society, Sept.
$-13, 1924.
? Markley and Hann. Unpublished results.
2 Beilstein, Il: 312. 1896.
4 Swann, Amer. Chem. Journ. 20: 613. 1898; Slagle, zbid. 633; Base, ibid. 646; Higbee,
thid. 23: 150. 1900.
163
164 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
mium chloride, cadmium bromide, and zine chloride in the ratio of two
molecules of base to one molecule of metallic salt, yielding well-
crystallized stable compounds.
EXPERIMENTAL
1-Methyl-3, 5-dibromoaniline.—This derivative was obtained by
the method of Fuchs.’ Thirty-three grams of o-toluidine was dissolved
in 60 ce. of glacial acetic acid and an ice-cold solution of 100 grams of
bromine in 180 ce. of glacial acetic acid was added gradually, with
constant stirring, to the toluidine solution cooled in an ice bath. The
hydrobromide separated immediately in white plates. Following addi-
tion of the bromine solution, an excess of water was added and, after
standing for one hour in an ice chest, the precipitate separated. This
was filtered by suction and dried. The yield was 107 grams. The
base was readily released by suspending the crude hydrobromide in
200 ec. of cold 10 per cent sodium hydroxide. The yield of base was
67 grams. This melted at 45°C. without further purification.
3, 5-Dibromo-o-toluidine mercuric chloride 2:1.—Five grams of
the dibromo-o-toluidine and 2.6 grams of mercuric chloride were dis-
solved in 50 ce. of 95 per cent alcohol. Following concentration to a
volume of 10 ce. the solution was allowed to stand over night and the
separated solid was then filtered off and recrystallized from alcohol.
The compound separated in colorless needlelike crystals, 10 or more
mm. long, rapidly changing in color to light red on standing. The
yield was quantitative. When heated in a capillary tube the com-
pound began to darken at 80°C. and melted, although not sharply,
at 120°C.
Analysis: 0.2748 g. substance consumed 607 cc. of 0.1 N acid equiva-
lent to 3.41 per cent N. Theory for 2C;H;N Br.-HgCl, = 3.49 per
cent N.
3, 5-Dibromo-o-toluidine zine chloride 2:1.—This derivative sep-
arated from an alcoholic solution containing 5 grams of base and 1:3
grams of metallic halide upon concentrating to a volume of 10 ce.
and cooling in an ice-bath. The solid: was filtered off by suction,
washed with ice-cold alcohol, and dried. It was obtained as a slightly
red, microcrystalline powder. It melted at 211°C., following a color
change at 200°C. Corresponding compounds of aniline and the tolui-
dines have been prepared by Tombeck.*
5 Fuchs, Monats. 36: 113. 1915.
6 Tombeck, Comptes Rendues 124: 1531. 1897.
APRIL 19, 1925 LEWTON: ANATOMICAL CHARACTERS IN HIBISCEAE 165
Analysis: 0.3325 g. substance consumed 10.1 ec. of 0.1 N acid
equivalent to 4.25 percent N. Theory for 2C;H,N Br2-ZnCl, = 4.20
per cent N.
3, 5-Dibromo-o-toluidine cadmium bromide 2:1.—Two and five-
tenths grams of cadmium bromide and 5 grams of the substituted
toluidine were dissolved in 50 ce. of alcohol and refluxed for several
hours on the steam bath. Upon cooling, the addition compound
separated in white velvety needles. The substance was recrystal-
lized from alcohol. It did not melt below 225°C.
Analysis: 0.1290 gram substance consumed 3.1 ec. of 0.1 N HCl
equivalent to 3.36 percent N. Theory for 2C;H;N Br.-Cd Br, = 3.49
per cent N.
3, 5-Dibromo-o-toluidine cadmium chloride 2:1.—This double
salt was prepared by the general procedure previously outlined. It
was obtained as a colorless microcrystalline powder, quite soluble in
cold alcohol, and rapidly assumed a red color upon exposure to light
and air. It did not melt below 200°C.
Analysis: 0.1484 gram substance consumed 4.2 ce. of 0.1 N acid
equivalent to 3.96 per cent N. Theory for 2C;H;N Br2.-Cd Cl. = 3.92
per cent N.
SUMMARY
3, 5-Dibromo-o-toluidine combines with metallic halides to give
addition compounds containing two molecules of base to one molecule
of metallic salt.
The mercuric chloride, zine chloride, cadmium bromide, and cad-
mium chloride 2:1 addition compounds have been prepared and
analyzed.
The presence of the metals did not adversely affect the nitrogen
results as determined by the official method.
BOTANY.—The value of certain anatomical characters in classifying
the Hibisceae. FRreprERiIcK L. Lewrton, U.S: National Museum.
The classification of genera and species of the Mallow family bear-
ing capsular fruits, which are usually considered as comprising the
tribe Hibisceae, has presented more or less difficulty to workers in
systematic botany when preparing formal descriptions, tables of re-
lationships, and keys.
The writer believes that the difficulties met with largely result from
the choice of certain variable and inconstant anatomical characters
166 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
which heretofore have been believed to be of prime importance in
distinguishing between genera and species.
Dr. Otto Kuntze in 1891 called attention to the fact that the gen-
era of the Hibisceae are poorly separated, and stated as follows!:
“T know of no single character in Gossypium which one may not also
find in Hibiscus.’”’ He then proceeded to add to the already bulky
and overloaded genus Hibiscus all the species of the genera Gossypium,
Fugosia, Sturtia, Thurberia, and Thespesia.
An examination of the principal standard systematic works shows
that the anatomical characters which have been considered of most
value and most frequently used by authors in describing the several
genera of the tribe Hibisceae, and to some extent their species also,
are the following: (1) The numerical divisions of the style and ovary;
(2) the length of the style branches; (3) the shape and size of the in-
volucral bracts; (4) the number of nectaries on the underside of the
leaves; (5) the presence or absence of petal spots; (6) the covering of
seed.
None of the characters mentioned are constant or exclusive for a
single one of the genera heretofore included in the tribe, and in de-
limiting the genera of this group other descriptive characters must be
sought for.
ANATOMICAL CHARACTERS WHICH ARE OF LITTLE VALUE OR’ WHICH HAVE BEEN
MISUSED
An examination of the use in the principal systematic works of the com-
monly accepted descriptive characters listed above will show the cause of
much of the confusion and difficulty in the classification of these plants,
and bears evidence of the dependence placed on these anatomical distinc-
tions by a number of well-known systematic writers.
1. Numerical divisions of the style and ovary.—-With the possible exception
of the genus Hibiscus, the divisions of the ovary vary from 3 to 5 in prac-
tically all the genera which have been placed in the Hibisceae, and in some
genera almost every plant, when examined, may be found to bear capsules
having 3, 4, or 5 cells. In spite of the variableness in the number of cells
of the ovary, many authors use a definite number in the sense of a descriptive
character in limiting genera and preparing analytical keys. Bentham and
Hooker? state that Fugosta (Cienfuegosia) has 3 to 4-celled capsules and
Gossypium, 5-celled. Whereas there are several species of Fugosia which
commonly have 5-celled capsules and only the highly selected and well
1 Kunze, Rev. Gen. Pl. 1: 67. 1891.
? BentHaM & Hooker, Gen. Pl. 1: 209.
APRIL 19, 1925 LEWTON: ANATOMICAL CHARACTERS IN HIBISCEAE 167
cultivated varieties of Gossypium have a large percentage of 5-celled fruits.
K. Schumann, in his key to the Hibisceae, states*:
a Ob vstIsyeO=GONEU St saute RPE None ene eet edn re aS Es Gossypium;
Onrarnya-colleds Sr sees. ERR a eae AG ae te Soe Soe Ingenhouzia;
@apsuleiconsistingiotocarpelS=- ose ene ee Thespesia;
Capsules mostly consisting of 3 carpels................. Cienfuegosia.”’
Garcke* states that one will as soon find a 5-celled Czenfuegosia as a 3-celled
Hibiscus, yet Cienfuegosia drummondii was described by Dr. Gray as
having a 5-celled, rarely a 4-celled, capsule. Saint-Hilaire nearly 100 years
ago noted how little dependence could be placed upon the numerical divi-
sion of the ovary. He said®: “If the genus Hibiscus did not contain already
such a large number of species we would not hesitate to include in it the
genus Fugosia because a careful comparison gives as a definite result only
one difference of little importance; that of the number of the stigmas and of
the cells. Also among the species of Gossypium, which have so many affini-
ties with Hibiscus and Fugosia, we see these same parts presenting indiffer-
ently the numbers 3 or 5.”
2. Length of the style branches.—The descriptive terms most often used
in separating the genera Hibiscus, Cienfuegosia, and Gossypium are “Style
branches long,” and “Style simple, clavate or parted into short erect
branches.” In many of these plants, depending upon the age of the flower,
the divisions of the style may be spreading, or erect and connivent, and ap-
pearing as if clavate. This was one of the reasons given by Saint-Hilaire
for not recognizing Ventenat’s genus Redoutea. Moreover the length of the
style branches varies, and it is often difficult to decide between ‘“‘long’”’ and
“Short.” Most systematic works still recognize under the genus Hibiscus
species having a simple, clavate style.
3. Shape and size of involucral bracts——In the cultivated cottons the shape
and size of the involucral bracts are almost as variable as the leaves, and
in the published species of Czenfuegosia the bracts vary from none to 12 or
15, and in form from a few bristle-like hairs to large cordate or toothed
bracts. Still, the number, shape, and size of the involucral bracts are used
by Bentham and Hooker,’ and by Schumann? in their analytical keys to
separate closely related genera belonging to this group. Hochreutiner,®
who has given much study to this group of the Malvaceae, assigns Gossypium
sturtii F. vy. M. to the genus Cienfuegosia because of its entire involucral
bracts even though it otherwise has the habit of Gossypium; and Prof. G. E.
Mattei’ of the Botanic Garden at Palermo, quotes Hochreutiner as ascribing
to the genus Cienfuegosza all species of Gossypium having entire, instead of
3 ScoumMann, K., in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenf. 3°.
4 GarckeE, Bonplandia 8: 150. 1860.
> Sarnt-Hinatre, Fl. Bras. Merid. 1: 251-252. 1825.
§ HocHREUTINER, B. P. G., Ann. Conserv. Jard. Bot. Genéve 6: 56. 1902.
7 Martrtet, G. E., Boll. Real Giar. Col. Palermo 1: 224. 1914.
168 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
laciniate, involucral bracts. Ulbrich, remarking on a Mexican plant which
he makes the type of his genus Selera, says’: ‘This plant resembles a spe-
cies of Gossypium; it possesses, however, an involucre of entire, ovate, cor-
date bracts and seeds so slightly hairy that it can not be included in that
genus.”
4. Number of leaf nectaries.—The older descriptions of species of Gossypium
always gave the number of nectaries to be found on the veins of the lower
side of the leaves. The species Gossypium eglandulosum Cay. was con-
sidered distinct from other cottons because no nectaries were found on the
leaves. The number of these glands on the leaves of any one plant or
species usually depends upon the number of lobes of the leaf and whether
the leaf is situated on a branch or on the main stem. The uselessness of the
number of nectaries on the leaf as a varietal or specific character was long
ago pointed out by Von Rohr? and Medicus.'® Leake,! working with cer-
tain Indian species, notes the varying number of leaf nectaries, and states
that it is possible to recognize forms within the species in which the leaves
are all eglandular. Gossypium tomentosum Nutt., a native Hawaiian species,
is without any nectaries on its leaves, as is also a cultivated Indian variety
of Gossypium nanking Meyen, grown by the writer out of a row of 130
plants of which but one plant bearing leaf nectaries was produced.
5. Petal spots.—Practically all of the species of this tribe which have
never been cultivated bear a pink, crimson, or purple spot on the base of
each petal. On the other hand a great many cultivated varieties of cotton
have lost the petal spot, though in certain varieties it sometimes reappears
in a few individuals. An example of this is found in the early Upland variety
known as “‘King.’”’ In the cultivated species in which it normally occurs,
such as Sea Island, Egyptian, and Kidney cottons (@. barbadense and G.
lapideum), it is often quite variable in size and distinctness.
6. Covering of the seed.—Several writers, notably Von Rohr,® Rafinesque,”
and Watt, have attempted a classification of varieties and species of Gos-
sypium based entirely upon the covering of the seed. The seeds of a few of
the genera of the Hibisceae are devoid of a downy or fuzzy covering, but in
most of the genera the wild species have their seeds covered with rusty down
or fuzz. In the cultivated varieties of cottons, however, the color and
amount of the fibrous covering is so variable within the species, and even
within the variety, as to make this character of doubtful value in taxonomic
work. Certain degenerate types of the common Upland fuzzy-seeded
cotton not only have naked seeds but the bolls contain little or no lint.
8 Utsricu, E., Verhandl. Bot. Ver. Brandenburg 55: 168. 1913.
° Von Rour, J. P. B., Anmerkungen iiber den Cattunbau part 2. 1793.
10 Mepicus, F. K., Bot. Beob. 2: 201. 1783.
1 Leake, H. M., Journ. Genetics 1: 239. 1911.
12 RAFINESQUE, C. 8., Sylv. Tellur. 14-19. 1838.
13 Wart, Gro., The wild and cultivated cotton plants of the world, pp. 8, 56, 60. 1907.
APRIL 19, 1925 LEWTON: ANATOMICAL CHARACTERS IN HIBISCEAE 169
A wild cotton found growing on the coast of Jamaica by Britton and Harris
has both smooth and fuzzy-seeded forms growing side by side, a condition
which is also found in certain Chinese and Transcaucasian forms of Gos-
sypium nanking. Yet Watt does not hesitate to use the presence or ab-
sence of fuzz on the seed as a basis of classification of species, and believes
the differences in the covering of the seed to be ‘‘almost sub-generic in
value.” H. M. Leake has called attention to this “new character’ in Asiatic
cottons. W. L. Balls gives his opinion of the dependence to be placed
in the covering of the seed as a taxonomic character thus: “Similarly the
smoothness or ‘fuzziness’ of the seed, which has been ridden to death in
some schemes of classification, is almost an accident; various forms of the
accidental result happen to be commoner in some species than others, but
the naked-seeded forms are known now in all the commercial cottons, hav-
ing probably arisen as sudden sports.”
ANATOMICAL CHARACTERS WHICH ARE OF VALUE IN CLASSIFYING THE
HIBISCEAE
In place of the variable anatomical characters mentioned above, some
of which are of taxonomic value when their limitations are known, other
characters are here suggested which are believed to be more dependable for
systematic classification. These may be listed as follows:
1. The extra-floral nectaries (excluding those on the leaves); position,
number, shape, and size.
. Black oil glands; presence or entire, absence, distribution.
. Fringe of hairs on valves of carpels.
. Persistence of involucral bracts.
. Adnation of bracts to each other.
. Number of chromosomes.
D Orv Ww dO
A few examples of the use already made of these anatomical characters
by systematists are offered in the paragraphs below, and practical applica-
tion of them to the problem of classifying the already established genera
and species of the Hibisceae is promised in further studies in this series.
1. Extra-floral nectaries——The various species of Gossypium and related
genera are usually provided with one or two sets of extra-floral nectaries
in addition to the one or more nectaries usually found on the underside of
the leaves.
In Professor Comstock’s exhaustive study of cotton insects, Dr. William
Trelease describes!’ the nectar secreted by the cotton plant and discusses its
value in attracting certain insects which might aid in cross-pollination or
act as guardians against the ravages of other insects.
14 Leake, H. M., Observations on certain extra-Indian Asiatic cottons. Mem. Dept.
Agr. India Bot. 4: (5):111. 1912.
1 Baus, W. L., The development and properties of raw cotton. 3. 1915.
16 TRELEASE, W. in Comstock, J. H., Report wpon cotton insects. U.S. Dept. Agr.,
317-343. 1879.
170 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
Where these extra-floral nectaries have been mentioned by systematic
botanists at all, they have usually been spoken of as ‘‘glands’’ without
clearly distinguishing them from the floral nectary proper or from the black
oil-glands to be seen so prominently in nearly all parts of the plant. But
little attention to the extra-floral nectaries has been given by taxonomists,
and their value as diagnostic characters in formal descriptions and keys has
generally been overlooked.
Tyler has clearly drawn"? the distinction between the four types of nec-
taries, and has indicated their value in the classification of the cottons and
their nearest relatives. Stanford and Viehoever describe!® the nectaries,
and show that they differ morphologically from the internal black glands
and have no connection with them.
2. The black oil-glands——The chemistry of the black oil-glands, black
dots, or internal glands, as they are called by various authors, which are
found in all parts of the cotton plant, has been studied by Stanford and
Viehoever,'’ who state that they have been noted within the Malvaceae
only in certain genera of the subfamily Hibisceae, and that other genera
appear not to possess glands of this type. The absence of these black in-
ternal glands from the cotyledons of the five species of Australian plants,
placed by Fr. von Mueller first in the genus Gossypium and later Fugosia
(Cienfuegosia), was noted by Todaro in his Monograph of Gossypium and
used by him to separate subgenera. The distribution and arrangement
of these glands was noted by Cavanilles in characterizing his genus Cien-
fuegosia.*® .
3. Fringe of hairs on the valves of the carpels:—The most prominent char-
acter of the genus Thurberia as described by Gray”! is a false dissepiment in
each cell of the ovary which, upon the maturing of the capsule, breaks up
into a fringe of long silky hairs along the edges of the carpels. These hairs
seem to have a part in the ejection of seed from the open valves of the cap-
sule in a manner somewhat analogous to the peristome on the capsule of
certain mosses. Similar carpellary fringes are to be found on Cienfuegosia
heterophylla (Vent.) Garcke, of southern Florida and the West Indies, Cien-
fuegosia yucatanensis Millsp., of Yucatan, Gossypium harknessii Brandegee,
of Lower California, Erioxylum palmeri Rose, of Mexico, and numerous
other species included in genera other than Thurberia. The edges of the
carpels of the capsules of Lagwnaria patersoni, a handsome ornamental
17 TyuErR, F. J., The nectaries of cotton. U.S. Dept. Agr. B. P. I. Bull. 131, pt. 5.
1908.
18 Sranrorp, E. E. & VizHorver, A., Chemistry and histology of the glands of the cotton
plant, with notes on the occurrence of similar glands in related plants. Journ. Agr. Re-
search 13: 419-435, pl. 42-50. May 20, 1918.
19 Toparo, A., Relazione sulla cultura dei cotoni in Italia 98. 1878.
20 CavaNnIuues, A. J., Monad. Diss., Decem. 174, pl. 72, f. 2. 1786.
21 Gray, A., Pl. Wright. 1: 23. 1852.
APRIL 19, 1928 LEWTON: ANATOMICAL CHARACTERS IN HIBISCEAE 171
Australian tree, are provided with a thick fringe of very fine, stiff, golden,
deciduous hairs pointing inwards and retarding the dissemination of the
smooth seeds. Dr. E. W. Bick, Curator of the Brisbane Botanic Garden,
Queensland, describes these as follows”: “‘Attached to the inner portion of
the capsules are numerous short barbed hairs that will attach themselves
to the skin, and are very irritating, being not unlike those of the velvet
bean, Wucuna pruriens, commonly called cow-itch.”
4. The persistence of the involucral bracts.—The deciduous nature of the
involucral bracts of the so-called Australian cottons (Notoxrylinon) and of
species of the genera Thespesia and Montezuma has been made use of by
several authors in formulating generic distinctions and analytical keys.
5. The adnation of the involucral bracts to each other —Whether the brac-
teoles forming the involucre are free from each other or more or less united
at their bases is a factor considered by Sir George Watt to be of value in
the classification of cottons. His words are as follows™: “The most in-
structive characteristics are derived from the position and condition of the
bracteoles; the presence or absence of-nectar-yielding glands; and the nature
of the floss and fuzz that surround the seed.”’ However, this writer finally
gives first place to the covering of the seed as a diagnostic character, the
adnation of the bracteoles being stated as the second most important charac-
ter in defining his sections of Gossypium.** Hochreutiner,”* in his revision of
the genus Hibiscus, considers this character of importance in classifying
the large number of species belonging to that genus.
The adnation of the involucral bracts of certain tropical American cottons
and species of the Old World has been suggested by O. F. Cook** as having
a protective value, but he does not suggest its use for purposes of classifi-
cation.
6. Number of chromosomes.—During the past year three investigators,
H. J. Denham in England,?’ A. G. Nikolajeva in Russia,?* and A. HE. Longley
in Washington, have studied, independently of each other, the chromosome
numbers of different species of cottons and some related genera. Each of
these investigators has pointed out that the species so far studied fall into
two groups, one having 13 chromosomes and the other 26. These two
groups have already been well defined as the Old World and the New World
cottons.
2 Bick, E. W., Flowering tress of the Brisbane Botanic Garden. Agr. Journ. Queens-
land 16: 379-380. 1921.
22 Wart, Gro., loc. cit. p. 60.
% Watt, Guo., loc. cit. pp. 61, 77, 163, 244, 316.
25 HocHREUTINER, B. P. G., loc cit. 4: 23-191. 1900.
28 Coox, O. F., The weevil-resisting adaptations of the cotton plant. U.S. Dept. Agr.
B. P. I. Bull. 88: 31, 32, 37. 1906.
27 Denuam, H. J., Chromosome numbers of Old and New World cottons. Ann. Bot. 38:
433-438. July, 1924. Journ. Textile Inst. Manchester 15: T1496-1500. Oct., 1924.
22 ZartEy, G.S., Bull. Applied Bot. & Pl. Breeding (Russian) 13?: 1382. 1924.
172 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
Cytological studies of this kind have opened a new field of investigation
which is sure to throw much light on the relationships of the important
economic plants.
ENTOMOLOGY.—The wasp Nysson hoplisivora, a parasitic relative
of Hoplisus costalis. Epwarp G. REINHARD, Canisius College,
Buffalo, New York. (Communicated by 8. A. RoHWER.)
It has been customary to extoll the solitary wasps as examples of
altruism and industry. They are the industrious fossores, considered
to be of a superior race above the ruder parasitic Hymenoptera. So
they are, a very respectable clan, yet, ike many noted families, they
are not without a “black sheep” to stain the family honor. It was only
recently that any wayward habits among the members of the Sphe-
coids have been brought to light. But information is accumulating,
and the evidence points to a degenerate branch, the Nyssonint, as a
set of parasites who revel in robbery and fratricide.
The Nyssonini had a clear record for centuries because no one had
ever investigated their manner of life. In 1887 Handlirsch voiced the
first suspicion by noting how similar in appearance some of them were
to the species of bees who practised parasitism. Yet nothing definite
was known about the life-history of any Nysson until 1901 when Fer-
ton observed the behavior of Nysson dimidiatus in France, and found
indications of parasitic habits.
Dr. William M. Wheeler, writing in 1919, thus summarizes the
knowledge of Nysson’s habits: “According to Ferton (1901) the
Gorytid Nysson dimidiatus is a parasite of Gorytes elegans. The latter
digs its burrow in the sand and provisions it with larval and adult
Hemiptera; the Nysson finds it and often enters it during the absence
of Gorytes. If the latter happens to be at home the Nysson waits
motionless about a dozen centimetersaway, with its head turned
towards the nest, till the Gorytes departs. Adlerz (1910) observed
very similar behavior on the part of Nysson maculatus towards Gorytes
lunatus. Apparently both species of Nysson destroy the Gorytes egg
attached to the prey and lay their own in its place.””!
Neither Ferton nor Adlerz succeeded in finding the Nysson’s egg
or larva or any signs of parasitic depredations beyond the suspicious
actions of the wasp and its forceful entry into the Gorytes’ burrow.
Barth in 1907 had made additional observations of which Dr. Wheeler
was not aware. He saw in Wisconsin a Nysson fidelis (Cres.) rapidly
1 The parasitic Aculeata, a study in evolution. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. 68: no. 1: 15.
APRIL 19, 1925 REINHARD: THE WASP NYSSON HOPLISIVORA 173
scratch open and enter the nest of an absent Gorytes canaliculatus.
The Nysson remained within for several minutes, then came out again
and closed the entrance. The following day when the nest was opened,
one of the cells was found to contain nine tree-hoppers and two eggs.
One egg was glued to the thorax of a hopper, another smaller one was
found lying unattached on the floor of the cell. This smaller egg, evi-
dently that of Nysson, was in shape similar to the Gorytes’ egg, but
its surface was less shining.
These three observations seem to be the only evidence recorded in
entomological literature of the singular manner of life practised by
the Nysson wasps.
During the summer of 1922 while investigating the habits of Hop-
lisus costalis at Woodstock, Maryland, I made the acquaintance of an
interesting Nysson previously unknown to science, which 8. A.
Rohwer described? as Nysson (Brachystegus) hoplisivora. An account
of the habits of this wasp will furnish us with new material for a con-
sideration of Nysson’s parasitic behavior. The Nysson parasitoids are
especially noteworthy because in all these cases the parasite bears
a very close genetic relationship to its host, and according to the
evolutionary doctrine it is supposed in general to have sprung from
the same stock as its host species.
The host of Nysson hoplisivora, as well as its parasite, both belong
to the subfamily Nyssoninae. It is a wasp sometimes known as
Gorytes costalis, though Hoplisus costalis is now the approved form.
It preys upon various species of tree-hoppers (Membracidae) which
it stores away in burrows dug into the sandy earth. Five or six mem-
bracids are commonly placed in a single cell and the wasp’s egg is
deposited on the last one brought in, along the lateral edge of the
bug’s broad sternum. The mouth of the burrow is kept barricaded
with a loose covering of sand which the wasp scrapes away when
entering and carefully replaces when about to depart.
There were about twenty nests of H. costalis sunk into the sand of a
brick-covered path which was the site of a thriving settlement of the
solitary wasps Philanthus gibbosus, who capture wild bees of the
family Halictidae. Both wasps build nest-mounds of about the same
size, those of Philanthus being somewhat more spreading.
Somewhere among these nests, flying about, or resting in the neigh-
borhood of a burrow, could always be found two or three of the Nysson
wasps. They were small but very neat-appearing in their dress of dull
2 Proc. Ent. Soc. Washington 25: no. 4. April, 1923.
174 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
black and the first abdominal segment gleaming with red and yellow,
like a ripe apple. They would fly very low, just skimming over the
surface, to pause at every sand heap, inspect it, circle about inquisi-
tively, and dart along to the next mound. The burrows of Philanthus
did not interest them. They delayed longest at the doors of Hoplisus
to gather information with trembling taps of their antennae. If the
owner was about, the visitor would sometimes settle herself on the
ground close by, and, with watchful gaze directed at the doorway,
wait quietly until Hoplisus had departed. At times she would enter
an open gallery but come out hastily again, and warily take up a post
of observation to sit awaiting. But when the coast was clear and the
nest vacated, the Nysson would boldly break through its barricaded
portal to enter the nurse-chambers below, where her depredations
could be committed without detection.
For several days the lurking Nyssons haunted the colony before I
could succeed in witnessing with full convicting evidence their sneaky
methods. On July 12, early in the morning, I am watching near a
clump of burrows which the Hoplisi has excavated. The tenent of
the nearest dwelling has already gone off on her hunting expedition.
A prying Nysson appears in the offing. She skims over to the un-
guarded nest and alights on the little plateau of sand. Just a slight
bit of hesitation and inspection, then the Nysson commences to tear
away at the loose sand with her front tarsal rakes. She does her work
audaciously and quickly. In a moment the tunnel is exposed and the
Nysson slips swiftly within. Only a few seconds does she tarry. Then
the intruder emerges and with wonderful nonchalance, as it were,
carefully rearranges the sand over the doorway. To see her you would
think she was the dwelling’s rightful owner and housewife. When the
tunnel is once more blocked and the nest entrance obliterated, the
Nysson calmly departs.
Was the Nysson’s action in closing the burrow really an attempt
to eliminate the traces of her forced entrance, or was it merely a
tropism and remnant of the days when her more industrious an-
cestors were wont to throw a curtain of sand over the doorway at
every departure?
In less than ten minutes, Hoplisus appears on the scene, she whose
home had been invaded. Under her body she carries a motionless
membracid. Will the wasp notice anything amiss in the arrangement
of her doorway or in the sacred chambers below? The wasp proceeds
as usual. She gives no evidence of alarm. The burrow is entered,
her fresh capture left in the nest, and the busy matron ventures forth
APRIL 19, 1925 REINHARD: THE WASP NYSSON HOPLISIVORA 175
again to resume her quest after choice tree-hoppers for her own—no,
quite unwittingly now for another’s offspring.
After an hour’s hunt, Hoplisus returns a second time with a captive,
and thus for three hours longer I leave her to perform her hunting and
household duties unmolested. At length, I begin to open the invaded
burrow to see what rape or ruin the despoiler has accomplished. The
corridor sloped gently downward for six inches, at the terminus of
which was a single oval cell. A branch gallery led off further, but only
this first cell had been provisioned. It contained six Ceresae piled two
deep in a double layer. A Ceresa in the upper layer bore the Hoplisus
egg. A Ceresa in the lower layer bore the parasite’s egg. This was so
skillfully concealed and protected as to claim my astonishment. The
Nysson had inserted it under the folded wings of the tree-hopper where
it rested hidden and secure along the bug’s dorsal abdomen. Re-
peatedly have I discovered the egg of hoplisivora in the cells of Hop-
lisus and it is always found tucked away in the same position.
Let us compare host egg and parasite egg. The former is more than
twice as large as the latter. Hoplisus lays an egg which is bow-shaped,
3 mm. long, smooth, shining white, and glued by its caudal pole to the
sternum of the tree-hopper alongside the hind coxa. It arches forward
along the body to the hopper’s head. The parasite, Nysson hoplisi-
vora, deposits an egg which is fairly straight and cylindrical, 1.34 mm.
long, its greatest width 0.44mm. The shell is dull white, tough, with a
“goose-flesh”’ texture that shows under the microscope as numerous
small excrescences placed with regularity.
For one reason or another I could not succeed in tracing out the
entire history of the parasite from a single individual, but, having
gathered scraps of information here and there, and having pieced them
together, the remainder of the story became apparent. Some scattered
bits of data taken from my note-book are here placed in order:
1. (July 13, cell no. 1). This cell contained five Membracids. The
Nysson egg was tucked away under the wings of a Platycotis vittata.
There was no Hoplisus egg present in the cell.
2. (July 12). Six membracids in the cell. The Nysson egg and the
Hoplisus egg, each on separate bugs.
3. (July 20). Cell contained six membracids, the Nysson egg, and
the Hoplisus egg. The following day, 7.30 a.m., the egg of the parasite
hatched. Twelve hours later the egg of the Hoplisus hatched.
4. (July 15, cell no. 1). Six membracids. The Hoplisus egg is near
hatching; the egg of the parasite has hatched. The larva feeds for a
short time, then leaves its hopper to go exploring.
176 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
5. (July 13, cell no. 4). Five membracids. The Hoplisus egg near
hatching. To its basal end is attached a small larva half as long as
the egg.
6. (July 15, cell no. 2). Fivemembracids. The parasite larva has
just finished eating the Hoplisus egg and is attacking the hopper
under the hind femur. The parasite feeds facing the opposite from the
direction in which the Hoplisus larva is turned when beginning its
meal.
From these data it is quite easy to construct the story of the
Nysson’s depredations:
Nysson hopliswwora manages to install her egg in the nest-chamber of
Hoplisus previous to the oviposition of the host-wasp who does not
place her egg in the cell until the full quota of Membracids has been
gathered. Theparasitic egg hatches half a day in advance of the Hop-
lisus egg. The intruding larva takes alittle nourishment, thenadvances
through the cell to seek out and devour the egg of its host. When its
rival is destroyed, hoplisivora feasts without danger of molestation
upon the store of provisions which its parasitism has appropriated.
These facts do not agree with the previous opinion of entomologists
that the Nysson destroys the egg of the Hoplisus wasp in order to lay
its own inplace of the host egg, for in reality the destruction of the host
egg is performed by the parasitic larva and not by its mother. Thisin-
correct surmise led Dr. Wheeler to discuss a ‘‘Nysson type of Para-
sitism’”’ which seemed singular and perturbing because it was without
a corresponding type among the parasitic bees. The case of Nysson
however is quite parallel in its general scheme with that of Stelis among
the bees.
When the egg of the parasite wasp has hatched the infant larvamay be
seen moving about in the space between the wings and body of the tree-
hopper. For the first few hours it attacks the flanks of the bug and
secures a little liquid nourishment. Then, aroused by some inexplic-
able urge it leaves its feast and goes exploring through the cell. When
it starts on its trip of adventure the larva is a short, stout grub with a
large head. It bears on its under surface some queer blisters, which
are possibly leg-like appendages that render assistance in crawling.
From its mouth projects a pair of long, thin mandibles, sharp and
curved like the venom-fangs of a rattlesnake.
The restless larva moves about over the heap of food. Sooner or
later it comes in contact with the frail Hoplisus egg, pregnant with
the developing form of another larva, larger than the parasite, and
capable of becoming a powerful rival. The jaws of the adventurer
APRIL 19, 1925 ROHWER: PARASITES OF HETEROSPILUS 177
open wide; the instinct for slaughter is aroused; its sharp fangs close
upon the living egg; they rend and tear it, while the hoplisivorous son of
Nysson proceeds to devour Hoplisus and by its cannabalism becomes
sole possessor of the chamber of food.
The remainder of the story is quickly told. The spoils gained by
slaughter are soon consumed. A series of moults transforms the
usurper from a small larva with sharp, falcate jaws and belly-blisters,
to a common grub with broad, blunt, bidentate mandibles, round of
abdomen without ambulatory contrivances. When the parasite has
eaten its fill, it sets about constructing a cocoon of brown silk and
earth, and thus once again betrays its Hoplisoid ancestry, for the co-
coon of Nysson hoplisivora is indistinguishable from that of Hoplisus
costalis except by its slightly smaller size.
ENTOMOLOGY.—Five braconid parasites of the genus Heterospilus.
S. A. Ronwer, Bureau of Entomology, U. 8. Department of
Agriculture.
The five new species described below have been received at various
times for identification, and the senders are anxious to have names for
them so that they can use them in connection with papers dealing with
the biology of their hosts. These species add considerably to our
knowledge of the habits of the representatives of this genus.
Heterospilus beameri, new species
Female——Length, 2.75 mm. Frons immediately above the antennae finely
aciculate; vertex and posterior orbits shining, practically without sculpture;
antenna 23-jointed; scutum and prescutum rather coarsely granular, the
prescutum more finely so anteriorly, the median posterior area of the scutum
reticulate in addition to the granulations; notauli feebly foveolate anteriorly;
the depression in front of the scutellum narrow, without longitudinal rugae;
scutellum subopaque, finely tessellated; dorsal carinae of the propodeum
well defined but narrow, the lateral-basal areas finely granular; the posterior
face of the propodeum not sharply separated from the dorsal aspect, rather
finely reticulate, without lateral carinae but with two rather indistinct
median carinae which converge below; mesepisternum above the sulcus
coarsely granular, below the sulcus tessellated; first tergite granular with
two median carinae which bound the raised area and converge posteriorly;
second tergite with a U-shaped suture basally and with triangular basal
lateral areas defined by sutures, the surface granular except the apical
margin; base of the third and fourth tergites feebly punctured, the punctures
more widely separated on the fourth; ovipositor subequal in length to the
abdomen; second abscissa of radius slightly shorter than the first; stigma
angulate at the middle where the radius leaves it. Piceous; the second and
fifth joints of antennae and legs below coxae, except last joint of tarsi which
is blackish, stramineous; wings hyaline, iridescent, venation pale brown.
178 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES vou. 15, NO. 8
Male.—Length, 2.75 mm. The male agrees in sculpture very well with
the female except that the first tergite is longitudinally striate in addition
to the granulations, the base of the second tergite is longitudinally wrinkled,
and the U-shaped area of the second tergite is greatly lengthened so it is
almost a truncate V. The third and following tergites are more distinctly
sculptured than in the female; the posterior femora are short, robust and
broad at the base; antenna 24-jointed; the carinae on the dorsal aspect of
the propodeum are feeble; posterior wings without a stigma.
Paratype females indicate variation in the number of antennal joints.
In some of them they are 22- and in others they are 25-jointed. Paratype
males indicate that the antennae may have only 22 joints. Some male
paratypes are only 2 mm. long.
Type locality—Cherokee County, Kansas.
Described from eleven females (one type) and seventeen males (one allo-
type) collected June, 1924, by R. H. Beamer, for whom the species is named.
In submitting this material Mr. Beamer writes, ‘“They were reared from the
eggs of Cicada.”
Type, allotype and twelve paratypes—Cat. no. 23973, U.S. N. M. Five
female and nine male paratypes returned to the Entomological Collections
of the University of Kansas.
This species falls nearest to languriae Ashmead, but is readily distinguished
from it by the sculpture of the second tergite. The male is one of the un-
usual forms of the genus, inasmuch as the stigma of the hind wing is wanting.
Heterospilus cephi, new species
Female.—Length, 2.25 mm. Length of ovipositor, 0.6 mm. Head
behind the ocelli finely, transversely striate; antenna 27-jointed, the joints
poorly differentiated; pronotum not dentate laterally; scutum and prescutum
rather coarsely granular; notauli not foveolate, well defined; mesepisternum
irregularly wrinkled dorsally with smooth, polished area ventrally; pro-
podeum with the lateral-basal area finely granular, the lateral-dorsal carinae
complete, with two diverging carinae dorsally which become obsolete later-
ally and posteriorly; the posterior face and dorsal surface between the diverg-
ing carinae irregularly wrinkled and with an indistinct median carina basally;
first tergite sharply carinate laterally, longitudinally striate with the striae
slightly irregular medianly; second tergite striato-granular; the base of the
third and fourth tergites finely striate; ovipositor one-third as long as the
abdomen; first intercubitus obsolescent; stigma angulate at the middle where
the radius leaves it. Dark ferruginous; antennae, propodeum and first
tergite piceous; wings hyaline, strongly iridescent; venation pale brown.
Male.—Length, 2.6 mm. Dorsal part of the head more feebly sculptured
than the female; base of the fourth tergite feebly striate; the diverging car-
inae of the propodeum shorter than in the female and the median carina
better defined; the posterior face of the propodeum more distinctly reticulate;
antenna 31-jointed.
Type locality—Ithaca, New York.
Described from three females (one type) and three males (one allotype)
recorded under Cornell University Experiment Station No. 1035. The
type and allotype reared March 21, 1924; all other paratypes reared Feb-
ruary 20, 1924, by D. T. Ries. Mr. Ries in transmitting this material
states that the species is a parasite of Cephus pygmaeus.
APRIL 19, 1925 ROHWER: PARASITES OF HETEROSPILUS 179
Type, allotype and paratypes—Cat. no. 27241, U.S. N.M. Paratypes,
male and female, returned to Cornell University.
The number of antennal joints varies; as one of the female paratypes
has twenty-nine joints in the antenna, and one of the male paratypes has
only 26 antennal joints.
This species is apparently most closely allied to chittendeniz (Ashmead)
and koebelei (Riley). In Ashmead’s key to the species of this genus it
agrees better with chittendenti than with koebelez. It may be separated
from chittendenii by the absence of the lateral carinae on the posterior face
of the propodeum and the presence of striae on the base of the third and
fourth tergites. From koebelei it may be separated by the longer antennae,
the different arrangement of the carinae on the propodeum and the shape of
the first tergite.
Since the above description was prepared Mr. Ries has forwarded five
small males (which are not considered types), under Bureau of Entomology
number Webster 18707, which are much darker than the types. These
specimens are piceous, with most of the head and thorax above almost
black. The number of joints in the antenna varies from 24 to 26. These
small males were reared in the autumn of 1924 and come from the following
localities in New York: Byron (Cage No. 4083), East Bethany (Cage No.
4084), Sodus (Cage No. 4109) and Neufield (Cage No. 4058).
Heterospilus etiellae, new species
Female—Length, 2.6 mm. Length of ovipositor, 1 mm. Head, seen
from above with the orbits gently receding; posterior orbits about half the
width of the eye; face finely granular; frons to the level of the anterior ocellus
granular; vertex with transverse wrinkles on a granular surface; posterior
orbits shining below, dorsally sculptured like the vertex. but not so strongly;
antenna 24-jointed, the third and fourth joints subequal; scutum coarsely
granular; notauli distinctly foveolate anteriorly; posterior portion of the
prescutum reticulate; suture in front of the scutellum with three longitudinal
rugae; disc of the scutellum laminate; dorsal aspect of the propodeum gran-
ulato-reticulate, the posterior face of the propodeum reticulate; dorsal aspect
of the propodeum with a median longitudinal carina which joins the pen-
tagonal area of the posterior face; mesepisternum smooth except medianly,
where it is finely laminate; first tergite shorter than the second, striato-
punctate with the striations predominating; second tergite with three trans-
verse depressions, the first line-like, the two following broad, shallow, the
surface longitudinally rugulose; third and following tergites smooth; ovipos-
itor half the length of the abdomen; first and second abscissae of the radius
subequal; recurrent vein interstitial. Jerruginous; dorsal aspect of the
propodeum, base of the first tergite piceous; palpi, mouth parts and legs
testaceous; flagellum black; wings hyaline; venation pale brown; parastigma
dark brown, very sparsely clothed with glistening white hairs. .
Paratype females show very little variation. The dark color of the pro-
podeum extends on the side in some and the antennae vary from 22 to 24
joints.
Male—Length, 2 mm. Antenna 23-jointed. The above description
180 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
of the female applies equally well to the male. The pseudostigma in the
hind wing is large and unusually well developed.
Paratype male is rufo-piceous, but the dark areas can be distinguished by
their black color; otherwise it agrees with’ the allotype.
Type locality—Porto Rico.
Described from 19 females (one type) and two males (one allotype)
reared from the larva of Etiella zinckenella Treitscke in the pods of chick
pea intercepted at quarantine in New York City. Material collected by
Ivan Shiller June 18, 1923, and recorded under New York No. 1912.
Mi
; Fal i iS |
i mits
mai
i Nee
i ‘Me \
\
j i
if
Fig. 1.—Heterospilus zeteki, new species. Adult female. (Drawn by E. T. Arm-
strong.)
Type.—Cat. no. 26599, U.S. N. M.
This new form is more like Heterospilus longicaudis Ashmead than any
other species from the West Indies. It may readily be separated from
longicaudis by the shorter ovipositor and by the presence of ridges on the
propodeum.
——
_
Heterospilus zeteki, new species (Fig. 1)
Female—Length, 1.5 mm.; length of ovipositor, 0.33 mm. Head when
seen from above strongly narrowing behind the eyes; width of the posterior
fecy.
APRIL 19, 1925 ROHWER: PARASITES OF HETEROSPILUS 181
orbits subequal with the width of the eyes; face coriaceous; frons, vertex,
and orbits smooth and polished; antenna 16-jointed, the joints long and
nearly of uniform length, third and fourth subequal; scutum polished;
notauli simple; depressed area on the posterior portion of the prescutum
irregularly wrinkled; suture in front of the scutellum finely granular at the
bottom; propodeum reticulate, without a carina, the lateral-basal areas
granular; mesepisternum polished; first tergite raised medianly, without
predominating striae, the surface with longitudinal striae which are better
defined immediately latrad of the raised area; second and following tergites
smooth, polished; ovipositor about one-third the length of the abdomen;
first and second abscissae of the radius subequal; recurrent vein nearly
interstitial. Dark piceous; scape, four anterior legs, except the femora
dorsally, the posterior tibiae and tarsi, posterior femora beneath, and the
posterior trochanters testaceous; mouth parts and inner orbits rufopiceous
thorax with sparse, long gray hairs; wings hyaline; venation dark brown.
Paratype female differs from the type in having the narrow base of the
second tergite finely striated.
Male—Length, 1.25mm. Antenna 17-jomted. Agrees with the descrip-
tion of the female except the base of the propodeum is not reticulate, the
sculpture of the face is not so coarse, and the head between the eyes at the
level of the antennae is rufo-piceous.
Paratype male has the antenna 15-jointed, otherwise agrees with the
allotype.
Type locality—Barro Colorado Island, Canal Zone, Panama.
Described from two females (one type) and two males (one allotype)
collected August 22, 1923, from the nest of Nasutitermes ephratae Holm-
gren. Material collected by J. Zetek and forwarded to T. E. Snyder under
Zetek No. 2210.
Type—Cat. no. 26598, U. S. N. M.
In the smooth sculpture of the thorax and abdomen this species is rather
unusual, and may easily be distinguished from the other Neotropical forms
by these characters and its general dark color.
Heterospilus melanocephalus, new species
Female.—Length, 2mm. Length of ovipositor beyond end of abdomen,
0.75 mm. Head subquadrate, temples broad; face rather coarsely cori-
aceous; frons shining, indistinctly tessellate medianly; vertex with irregular,
transverse aciculation immediately above the ocelli; antennae 20-jointed,
the joints long and well defined, third joint slightly longer than the fourth;
scutum granular, subopaque; notauli feeble; suture in front of scutellum
with a few well defined rugae; propodeum sub-shining, areola large, reticu-
late; basal-lateral areas finely punctate; mesepisternum smooth, polished
except the upper anterior angle which is coriaceous; sternauli well defined,
coriaceous; sides of the propodeum reticulate; first intercubitus obsolete
except for a small stump at the radius; radius leaving stigma beyond the
middle, its first abscissa two-thirds the length of the second; abdomen short,
apical width of the first tergite much greater than its length; first and base
of second tergite longitudinally striate; first tergite has two predominating
striae which form a raised wedged-shaped area medianly; second tergite
without impressed lines; apex of second and all of the following tergites
polished; ovopositor two-thirds of length of abdomen. Testaceous; head
.
182 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
black; scape and basal half of flagellum ferruginous, rest of flagellum piceous;
wings hyaline iridescent; venation pale brown.
One of the paratypes has the antennae 18-jointed, and the transverse
aciculation on the vertex are very feeble.
Type locality—Uvalde, Texas.
Described from four females reared in June, 1921, by J. C. Hamlin, and
thought by him to be a parasite of Melitaria junctolineella, and from one
specimen from the same locality which Mr. Hamlin thought was a parasite
of Cornifrons elautalis.
Type and three paratypes-—Cat. no. 25624, U.S. N. M. Single paratype
returned to the collector.
Runs in Ashmead’s key! to hylotrupidis Ashmead; but it differs in the
black head, shorter first tergite, ete.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
395th MEETING
The 395th meeting of the Geological Society was held at the Cosmos Club
November 12, 1924, President Wricur presiding and 89 persons present.
The secretary announced the resignations of ApoLpH KNopr and Espmr 8.
Larsen and the death of THomas L. Watson, State Geologist of Virginia,
a corresponding member. The secretary also announced the result of a
letter ballot on the place of meeting for the society as follows: Cosmos
Club, 73; Interior Building, 14; No choice, 3.
Program: G. R. Mansrretp: Physiography of southeastern Idaho. In
southeastern Idaho the highest ridgetops at elevations of about 9,000
feet probably represent remnants of a peneplain developed in a region of
complexly folded and faulted sedimentary rocks. The peneplain was dis-
sected, and after the excavation of broad and deep valleys which, with the
lower neighboring uplands, were extensively aggraded, the region was up-
lifted, and again subjected to erosion through several succeeding partial
cycles. About 1,000 feet below the peneplain stand remnants of a late
mature erosion surface, about which unreduced remnants of the earlier
dissected peneplain or of an intervening erosion surface now rise In some
places as high as 500 feet. Two later erosion surfaces stand at altitudes
respectively about 300 and 600 feet lower. These form more or less well
defined rock terraces above the present early mature canyons, which them-
selves range in depth from a few hundred to 1,000 feet or more. Older
valleys, representing some of these earlier erosion surfaces, now hang here
and there 400 feet or more above the present valley bottoms.
Some of the broader valleys or intermont basins have been reexcavated
in the buried valleys, which succeeded the peneplain. Others are in part
of structural origin or have been eroded in rocks with favorable structures.
Still other valleys owe their transverse courses to superposition, succeeding
the aggradational cycle which came after the peneplain. All have been
aggraded to a greater or less extent, partly because of former arid climatic
conditions and partly because of obstruction by basaltic flows in the lower
' Can. Ent. 25:74. 1893.
APRIL 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY 183
valleys. Moister climatic conditions, probably associated with the latest
glacial epoch, quickened the streams, notably Bear River, which rises in
the glaciated Uinta Mountains, and permitted the youthful dissection of
the aggraded material with the development of canyoned courses and graded
reaches in some of the streams. Bear Lake, which occupies a reexcavated
valley of structural origin in the southwestern part of the region, was de-
veloped to nearly twice its present size. Its highest level, maintained by
alluvial fans, did not long persist, but superposition of its outlet upon buried
ledges preserved the level of the lake long enough to develop shore lines,
which may now be recognized at many places. Since glacial time little
erosion has been accomplished. (Author’s abstract.)
The paper was discussed by Messrs. ALDEN and Marruss.
Wiis T. Lee: The caverns of Carlsbad, New Mexico. This was an in-
formal account of Dr. Lee’s explorations, and was illustrated by lantern
slides and moving pictures. It was discussed by Col. Jonn Miuuts, VERNON
Batey, and E. F. BurcuHarp.
396TH MEETING
The 396th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club November 26, 1924,
with President Wricut in the chair, and 38 persons present. The secretary
announced the death of ALFrEep H. Brooks, past president and an active
member of the Society. He also announced the election to active member-
ship of M. N. SHort, FREDERICK WALKER, LLoyp GrBson, and A. W. Lawson
Program: Dr. Kurt EHRENBERG, of the University of Vienna (by in-
yitation): Present day paleontologic work in Austria. In Austria, as else-.
where, fossils were studied first as aids to stratigraphy. Invertebrates,
particularly ammonites and gastropods, were of greater interest because of
their abundance. Edward Suess, Mojsisovics, Hoernes, Neumayr, and
many others worked chiefly on one or both of these groups.
In Neumayr’s time, as a consequence of Darwin’s and Haeckel’s studies,
the morphology and phylogeny of fossils became subjects of research, and
vertebrates assumed greater importance. From the study of vertebrates
started a new line of investigation, Paleobiology, which, begun by Dollo
in Brussels, developed at Vienna almost into a new science. At the Uni-
versity of Vienna there is now a Department of Paleontology, under the
leadership of Prof. C. Diener and Prof. G. von Arthaber, with collections
arranged stratigraphically, and a Department of Paleobiology where Prof.
Abel, the founder of Paleobiology, and his colleagues are working.
The paleobiologist endeavors to learn the mode of life of the fossil animal.
Starting from the knowledge that the outward form of every organism de-
pends to a large degree upon its mode of life, his first investigation is always
towards the special adaptations to the mode of locomotion, environment,
and food. All tracks left by the animals are of importance not only to such
investigations but also to phylogenetic researches, because the above-men-
tioned adaptations are usually developed more or less gradually. Under
favorable conditions the paleobiologist is able to finish his work with a res-
toration of the life of any past period as complete as the fossil documents
with which he had to work. An illustration of this is to be found in the
extraordinary results attained in the recent exploration of the ‘“Drachen-
héhle bei Mixnitz in Stiermark.”
Latterly, paleobiological methods have been adopted in the study of
invertebrates, but much remains to be done. Although the collections of the
Department of Paleobiology of the University of Vienna contain a considera-
184 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
ble number of invertebrates, which of course are arranged in paleobiological
order, they are insufficient for the study of all the groups of invertebrates.
The speaker appreciated therefore, the invitation of the International
Education Board of New York which enabled him to study the ample col-
lections in some of the museums in the United States. (Author’s abstract.)
Dr. Ehrenberg’s paper was discussed by Messrs. Basstur, Hacunr, and
WRIGHT.
C. WytHE Cooks: Coastal terraces of Georgia. Five coastal terraces
corresponding to ancient shore lines now standing at altitudes of 60, 100,
160, 215, and 260 feet above sea level extend inland across the southeastern
quarter of the state of Georgia. The two lower shore lines run parallel to
the present coast of the Atlantic Ocean; the higher shore lines indicate former
direct connection of the Atlantic with the Gulf of Mexico, Florida having
been submerged. Emergence has been by stages separated by periods of
quiescence; oscillation of sea level has been within narrower limits than north
of Cape Hatteras.
When the sea retreated from the 215 to the 160-foot level, a group of
islands appeared above water on the Floridian platform. From one of
the islands a sand spit and submerged bar (the present Trail Ridge) extended
northward to the vicinity of Jessup, Georgia, and shut off from the open
ocean a sound similar in general appearance to Pamlico Sound of North
Carolina. Further emergence permitted the water in the sound to drain
southwestward into the Gulf of Mexico, giving birth to Suwannee River.
Okefenokee Swamp, now 120 feet above sea level, occupies a depression
in the floor of this ancient sound. (Author’s abstract.)
This paper was discussed by Messrs. BassteR, ALDEN, Sampson, Woop-
RING, Hay, W. C. Mansrietp, Hacur, Bryan, and Capps.
397TH MEETING
The 397th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club December 10, 1924,
President Wricut presiding and 51 persons present. The secretary an-
nounced the election of Joun C. Bram, U. 8. Geological Survey, to active
membership.
F. E. Wricut: Methods for relative gravity measurements. (Presidential
address.)
After a brief recess the 32d Annual Meeting was called to order.
32D ANNUAL MEETING
The 32d annual meeting was held at the Cosmos Club December 10,
1924, with President Wricut in the chair, and 35 members present.
The minutes of the 3lst Annual Meeting and the annual report of the
secretaries were read and approved. The annual report of the Treasurer
was presented, showing an excess of assets over liabilities of $1083. The
following officers were elected for the ensuing year:
President, L. W. SvrerHenson; Vice-Presidents, D. F. Hewerr and
Cuartes Burts; Treasurer, J. B. Renstpen, Jr.; Secretaries, EDWARD SAMP-
son and J. D. Srars; Members-at-large of the Council, C. N. Fenner, F. E.
Martugs, F. H. Morrit, C.8. Ross, R. B. Sosman; Nominee for Vice-Presi-
dent of the Academy, F. E. Wricut.
C. WytHE Cooks, Epwarp Sampson, Secretaries.
APRIL 19, 1925 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 185
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
The Petrologists’ Club met at the home of H. G. Ferguson on February
17. Program: E. V. SHaNNon: Pegmatites of eastern Connecticut; C. S.
Ross: Petrology of an ore vein; W. F. FosHac: Andalusite deposits of the
White Mountains, California.
At a meeting of the Pick and Hammer Club at the Geological Survey
February 21 informal accounts of exploration in Alaska during the past
season were given by Messrs. P. 8. Smiru, Foran, and Memrtig.
W. M. BraMuette is on leave from the Geological Survey to make in-
vestigations for an oil company in Ecuador.
Colonel THomas L. Casry, who died recently, bequeathed his large col-
lections of insects, mollusks, and fossils to the National Museum.
Professor F. W. Ciarkxs, of the Geological Survey, retired from the federal
service the first of the year.
Laurence LaForeer, of the Geological Survey, is giving a course of
lectures in geology at Harvard University.
O. E. Merryzer, Chief of the Water Resources Branch of the Geological
Survey, recently examined a reservoir site near Guantanamo, Cuba, for a
public utility company.
A. F. Metcuer, geophysicist, has resigned from the Geological Survey
to accept a position with the Marland Refining Company, at Ponca City,
Oklahoma.
Dr. H. 8. Wasutneton, of the Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie In-
stitution of Washington, sailed for Europe early in February to carry on
archeological and volcanological studies in Italy and northern Africa.
Dr. M. L. Crossley, president of the American Institute of Chemists,
addressed the Washington chapter at its March meeting on the subject
Chemistry as a Profession. Before the meeting, resident fellows of the
Institute tendered Dr. Crossley a dinner at the Raleigh Hotel.
W. T. Foran, geologist in the Geological Survey who has been engaged
for two field seasons in the exploration of Alaskan petroleum reserves, has
resigned to undertake exploration work in Argentina.
Dr. ALEXANDER WETMORE, Superintendent of the National Zoological
Park, was appointed on April 1 an Assistant Secretary of the Smithsonian
Institution with general supervision of the National Museum, the National
Gallery of Art, and the National Zoological Park.
The National Geographic Society has announced a grant of $55,000 to
Dr. C. G. Abbot, to promote the establishment of a new solar radiation
186 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 8
station at a site to be chosen by Dr. Abbot in Africa or Asia, and to main-
tain daily measurements there for several years. The project is termed
“The National Geographic Society’s Solar Radiation Expedition, Cooper-
ating with the Smithsonian Institution.”
_ ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Betidsy. April 25. The Biological Society.
s piucaday, May 5. The Botanical Society.
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE
JOURNAL
journey across Lower California. E. A. Back: Some fabric pests.
‘Wednesday, April 8. The Geological Society. Program: J. B. Merrie: The Paleo-
zoic geology of interior Alaska. G. C. Martin: The Mesozoic rocks of Alaska.
P. 8. Smits: Fields for future Alaskan studies.
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
salts. “Raymonp M, Hann and G. C. eS y PRC vey anton Sie Sieso hie ot
Botany.—The value of certain anatomical charade: in classifying the Hibiseeae.
FREDERICK ‘Li. LOWTON. 1. J0N. tics acess ahd Wedel ate ale alee tase a aon
Entomology.—The wasp Nysson hoplisivora, a pate relative of Hoplisus costalie. &
Epwanp G. Remngenp soba uke bee wee ian a vie suo sald
Entomology. Five braconid parasites of the genus H. cnasetin 8. A. RouweEr... ap |
4
PROCEEDINGS
The Geological Society...............
Scrmntiric Notes AND NEWs.........
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vernon L. Kettoae, National Research Council.
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. Siuspex, Bureau of Standards.
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Mar 4, 1925 Waal eee
JOURNAL
OF THE
ASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
i BOARD OF EDITORS
EL P. Kine D. F. Hewerr S. J. Maucuiy
| WATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLCGICAL-SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L, H. Apams S. A. RopwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Srosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Griacs J. R. Swanton
a BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
*, BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royat anD GUILFORD AVES.
Battmore, MagzyLAND
Entered as Second Clases Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
srapaelart 4-0 Aceeptance for mailing at special rate of ostage provided for
e Section 11 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. athaaseed on July 3, 1018.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences |
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, sims to
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short aaa papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(8) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies: (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL is issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only, Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on. request from the author, in the —
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate —
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered ~
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. a
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures —
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of prpducing cuts for illustrations must be ~
partly met by the author. :
Proof.—Iin order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprinis.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices:
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Covers
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi- “a
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. P
The rate of Subscription per volume is........... vin's'elpieiee safes ka Ss ae eee
Semi-monthly numbers ae
Monthly numbers oes dois 'ssk cote cic sic cee je'eie a siale bieiale mele isa tials te ee
Remittances should be made payable to ‘“‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” an
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. TEN
Exchanges—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. ‘i's
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue. i
® Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special ra
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy. x
ia
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 May 4, 1925 No. 9
PHYSICS.—An electromagnetic theory of quanta. F. Russpuu
BicHowsky, Johns Hopkins University. (Communicated by A.
IE, IDs)
Several attempts have been made to modify the electromagnetic
theory of Maxwell and Lorentz in order to make it consistent with the
experimental facts which are the basis of the quantum theory. Most
of these modifications have concerned the Lorentz equations for the
electron, rather than the original Maxwell equations for the electro-
magnetic field. The reasons for this are: first, the feeling that the
quantum effects were somehow tied up with special atomic mechan-
ism, and second, because it was apparently necessary to keep the
Maxwell equations to account for wave propagation of light and the
ordinary equations of electricity and magnetism. On the other hand,
there is some evidence that the underlying quantum mechanism, what-
ever it may be, is more general than any particular atomic structure
but has to do with the field equations, the arguments for this being
the same as those which led Einstein to the conception of light
quanta.
The second point is susceptible to mathematical analysis. The
electromagnetic theory is the embodiment of the following ideas:
(1) the magnetic flux is some function of the circulation of electrical
forces, (2) the electrical flux is some function of the circulation of
magnetic forces. We shall use Heaviside units, and the Lorentz
notation, except that we shall follow the uses of Gibbs for the vector
operators. In this notation (1) and (2) become
) vx f(b) == 6 (4)
iL
(5) Vv x¥(d) = —7 6 (h)
187
188 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
1 1 : = ; :
The constants z and — ¢ *Ppearing explicitly since electric forces are
to be measured in electrostatic units and electromagnetic forces in
electromagnetic units, and the right hand screw convention is to be
used to fix sign.
Equation (1) of Maxwell is a definition and may be kept unchanged
without loss of generality
(1) c = ¢ (d)
Equations (2) and (8) of Maxwell are usually thought to express
the experimental restriction that there be no permanent uncompen-
sated charges or free magnetic poles in the space considered, and may,
in accordance with this mode of thought, be put in the form
(2) iG S00
(3) V-f(h) =0
At first sight, these expressions appear to be merely a definition of
uncharged space, but this interpretation is not free from possible
difficulties, for if we consider free space through which an electro-
magnetic disturbance is passing, the electric and magnetic energy at
each point is finite. Now the only apparent way to build up electric
and magnetic energies in space is to separate neutralizing charges in
space by producing what is called dielectric displacement, or by creat-
ing fugitive electric charges in time. Now, the first point of view
involving dielectric displacement has the advantage that it is consist-
ent with the atomic structure of electricity, but it has the disadvantage
that since both positive and negative electricity are assumed always
present even in uncharged space, uncharged space is given an energy
and mass content for which evidence is lacking or directly opposed.
The second point of view assumes the generation of fugitive electricity,
which is certainly not orthodox, but leaves uncharged space empty.
It may be shown, however, that both points of view lead to mathe-
matically equivalent results, though they suggest different interpreta-
tion. We may, therefore, keep to the conventional point of view as
expressed in equations (2) and (3).
We now have assumed four general equations of which the
Maxwell equations are special cases where the undetermined functions
f, ¢, ¥, and @ are each equal to 1. Our problem now is to find what
restriction on the form of these functions is necessary to account for
those facts of optics, electricity and magnetism which are successfully
may 4, 1925 BICHOWSKY: ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY OF QUANTA 189
accounted for by the special Maxwell function. Examination shows
that, as far as pure opticsis concerned, all the equations for velocity,
refraction, reflection, polarization, and interference depend on the
assumption that there are solutions of the electromagnetic equations
of the form:
Dalembertian (x) = 0, Le.,
(6) Vx —@x =0
Where x may be any function of the electric and magnetic force
1
separately, and where a? for free space equals a That, as far
as optical theory is concerned, x may be taken to be an inde-
termined function of d and h, may be proven by going through the
proof for the ordinary equations of optics, but may be seen in-
tuitively from the fact that the equations of pure optics do not ex-
plicitly involve electric and magnetic forces, the special form used in
the electromagnetic equations cancelling out in the course of the proof
of the optical equations. In order to derive equations for the effect
of known magnetic and electric fields on optical phenomena, it is
obvious that x must be determinate, but it is significant that it is
just in such equations that the Maxwell theory shows the first sign
of breaking down.
Let us now assume that equation (6) represents the facts of optics
and let us see what restriction this places upon the undetermined
functions f, 6, Y and 6. Reversing the proof by which the Dalem-
bertian (x) = 0; [x = d; x = h] is shown to be a solution of the
Maxwell equation, it may be shown that f = 6 and¢ =¥y. In other
words, any function of h and d substituted in the Maxwell equations
will lead to a solution consistent with all purely optical phenomena,
provided only the derivatives of the same functions are substituted for
h and d respectively. Maxwell’s equations, therefore, are by no
means the only electromagnetic equations which will lead to the facts
of optics.
There is, however, one other restriction which may be put on the
equations of the electromagnetic field, namely that they be consistent
with the principle of least action. From all that is known experi-
mentally, this is not a necessary restriction and may not be legitimate,
in fact, but it is certainly convenient to make this assumption as it
allows the general methods of dynamics to be applied to electro-
magnetics. There is a difficulty, however. To make use of this
principle it is necessary to set up separate equations for the kinetic and
190 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
potential energies of the field, that is to say, the part of the energy
which depends on generalized velocities and that which depends on
positions alone. In the ordinary theory it is known that the kinetic
energy arises exclusively from the magnetic forces, and is given by the
equation T = 3) 2? ds, where Z = f (h) = h [in the ordinary theory].
Similarly, the potential energy W depends exclusively on the electric
force, and is given by the equation W = 4 ite ds. There is no appar-
ent reason why this should be the case here since it might well happen
that our function f (h) might contribute both to the kinetic or poten-
tial energy; similarly for y (d). It may be shown, however, by sub-
stituting Z = f (h), integrating equation (5) in respect to the time,
taking the scalar product of the variation of = and the function, for
a real and slightly varied path between A and B and integrating over
the path, discarding the integrated parts, employing equation (4) and
integrating again, that if the principle of least action holds, the differ-
ence between the kinetic and potential energy must be in the form
Vax — W) ds =3 ie ery (a) ds, the signs being opposite
but undetermined. Now, if, as we shall assume f (h) is a function
of the wave length and any term of the expansion contributes to the
kinetic energy, all the terms must, but at long wave lengths f (h)
must reduce to h, in order to account for the experimental fact that
Maxwell’s equations hold for static or slowly changing fields, therefore
T = 3 )2' ds and similarly W = 3 fy (d) ds.
It will now be convenient to define the magnitude of two new vectors
® and by the equations f? (h) = h? — $2 and y? (d) = d? — D%.
In other words we have added a scalar corrective function to the
Maxwell equations. There appears to be no experimental test which
will fix the direction of the vectors , and D, but it will be convenient
later to assume that has the same direction as h and D asd. In
these terms our fundamental equations become
(2) V-(@ — 9)! = 0
(3) Vv -(? — 931 = 0
(4) vx ( — S) = > Lae — D
4 nee ce dt
(5) VX (2 — 2) = id ae
i e dt i
which are the same as Maxwell’s except that (h? — ?)' is substituted
for h and (d? — 9)! for d everywhere. Using these equations we
may 4, 1925 BICHOWSKY: ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY OF QUANTA 191
obtain by differentiation an equation for the energy flux of an electro-
magnetic field
(8) “3 f(a? — Dt + be — §) ds +e f(a — D)! x (h? — G)! ds
The first integral is the expression for the energy of an electromagnetic
field; the second, corresponding to the Poynting vector of the Maxwell
theory, represents the flux of energy across the arbitrary boundaries of
the field. The total expression obviously corresponds to the Maxwell
expression for the conservation of energy, but the energy E is now
equal to the quantity which would be calculated from Maxwell’s
expression E, but
(9) H =H, — 3 (? + 9°)
the flux being similarly
(10) Sic (22) (bh? 3)?
These expressions have the property of allowing zero energy density
and zero radiation in fields where both the electric and magnetic forces
are finite. They also show that if the classical (Maxwell) expression
is taken as representing the energy, energy is not conserved, though it
is with the new expression for the energy. Energy thus defined, since
it was obtained by the use of the principle of least action, obeys the
Hamiltonian equations, and its distribution is given by the equation
(11) aE = ae ibe O +H}
where 6 must equal 1/7 since the equation must reduce to the Max-
well distribution law for the case of perfect gases. Equipartition,
however, does not hold except in a modified sense, the average value
of the energy of a degree of freedom of radiation being equal not to
E. but to E, — 4 (D? + H*)aver, Where T,. = kr is the average energy of
a gas particle.
Now the energy of a radiation field may be expressed as a sum of
terms (one for each degree of freedom) of the form Av where » is the
frequency of a simple harmonic component of the electromagnetic
wave. The energy per degree of freedom therefore can be put in the
form E = E. — hy, where h, as far as theory goes, is a constant in
time, but adjustable for different frequencies; but we shall immediately
see that within the experimental limits of the Planck radiation law,
h is a constant for all wave lengths, and in fact is equal to the Planck’s
constant.
192 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
We may now calculate the equilibrium distribution between light
waves of such energy and a perfect gas. The condition for equilibrium
is ing 1a = 15), 5 KE,
Substituting in our formulae (11) and (12) and using the usual formula
for the energy of a gas molecule, we obtain
Ee~8E = (EB + hye ~8 E+ b)
or
(13 Fe eee
) ah
okt =e
which is Planck’s familiar equation, but it is now derived in an entirely
rigorous manner from the fundamental laws of mechanics with the
aid of a self-consistent electromagnetic theory. It will be noted,
moreover, that we have made use of no discontinuities such as are in-
volved in the ordinary quantum proofs, nor have we made use of
subsidiary assumptions of atom structure, or phase space, or special
probability functions. Indeed, we have not found it necessary that
the energy of a light wave is a multiple function of the wave length of
the type n h », nm appearing nowhere in the proof. If, however, we
had used the classical expression for energy and distribution, in order
to make these equations consistent with Planck’s law, the energy of a
monochromatic light wave must vary discontinuously with the
intensity, being of the form nh ». However, this expression for the
energy of a light wave is known to be inconsistent with general
dynamical principles: The remaining important expressions for the
energy of a light wave, namely the Stefan-Boltzmann equation and
the Maxwell equation for light pressure, follow directly from our
equations by any of the usual proofs, the former also by direct integra-
tion of the Planck equation.
Now let us consider the radiator. It is clear that in order
for a system containing moving charges to radiate the electric and
magnetic forces (due at great distances mostly to accelerations)
it must suffice to give the modified Poynting vector a value
greater than zero. The vector product of d, and h, (where d, and
h, are that part of the electric and magnetic forces which, on the
Maxwell theory, contribute to the radiation) must be greater than
hv, where » is the frequency of emitted light. Therefore, that part
1 BicHowsky, Phys. Rev. 11: 58. 1918.
may 4, 1925 BICHOWSKY: ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY OF QUANTA 193
of the energy of the electromagnetic field due to d, and h,, e.g.
3 fia +h2 — D2 — 2) ds, must equal zero for states in which the
radiation is zero, such states we will call steady. There will generally
be an infinite number of such states since both E,, and D2 + ? are
variables, and for all of them, except those containing no accelerations
the radiation from which is of infinite wave length, E,. will have a
finite value. Suppose we have a system in such a stationary state,
with the classical energy E,.., then E,., — €.3; suppose it now absorbs
radiation of the frequency ». The energy absorbed from the small
fraction of the wave surface available, calculated in the present way
we will suppose to be P, where P is a quantity, we can make as small
as we please by decreasing the intensity of the light. The contribution
of this small amount of energy to the energy of the system will be
AE. — hy = P. The system after absorption of energy has the
energy P = E., + AE, — ©, — hy; it will, therefore, differ only a
vanishingly small amount from the new non-radiating state
E, — © = 0 where © = G, + hy», therefore EH, — E,. = hv
which is Bohr’s frequency condition.
Let us now suppose we have a system in such a displaced steady
state and let it radiate. Since the new state is steady it will not radiate
‘until it has gained an extra energy Q. It will now radiate its classical
energy, changing from Q + E, to E, the total energy given out being
Q. Its wave length, moreover, will be given by the equation
hy = E,, — E.,. Now, in order for conservation of energy to hold
a b b
— { Qat = {Pat - ie dt
where (ie dt is the energy absorbed from neighboring atoms during
the transition A — B. These last integrals are independent, since at
least theoretically all neighboring atoms can be removed to a double
order of infinite distance. Therefore the number of transitions must
be proportional to the amount of light per unit time per unit area.
It will be noted that the above proof of the Einstein-Bohr frequency
condition tells us nothing about the frequency of the periodic motions
of the electron in their stationary states. We can, however determine
this connection for any particular model most simply by consideration
of the moment of momentum. This quantity 7, which is conserved, is
1
given by the equation 7 = — r X (d? — D?)? X (h’ — §*)' orem =
Eecw
— — 2zh, where Ecw is oe classical energy of a system with the
@
194 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
intrinsic frequency. Each possible transition is therefore equivalent
as far as classical energy and impulse goes to that of a system of
classical oscillators of the same constitution as the real system, but on
a scale such that the energy and momenta are AE and 2zh instead
of E and 7. Now, since momentum and energy and constitution
define a system completely, our system of virtual oscillators will have
all the dynamic properties of the real system, not as an approxima-
tion, but exactly. It may thus be used to calculate frequency polari-
zation, relative intensity, dispersion mean period of life, the results
being exactly of the classical type except v is to be substituted for w, AE
for E and 2zh for 7.
Let us now consider the possible mechanical constitution of systems
in the stationary state. Since the component of the radiation field of
the same frequency as the motion of any electron must be zero, the
field is conservative and must possess potential, a result which is
consistent with the results of Fues? and Urey,’? though unexpected
according to the ordinary quantum theory. However, when it comes
to the calculation of such potential, the problem is less simple. If the
field is stationary, as in the case of the two bodies in a stationary ex-
ternal field, the only forces which with a constant position of the
electron change with the time, are those due to radiation, and for-
stationary states these cancel out. We may, therefore, compute the
impulse moment by the ordinary methods of dynamics and solve for
the motions, putting the moments of each electron equal to nh, e.g.,
we can use the classical equations
6 Ee a
on = ; le, J ex@k3 Je = nh; [k = iL 2, 3]
é Tex
where J, is the impulse moment and «w, the intrinsic frequency of
rotation, of the electron, of the perihelion, and of the plane. These
equations are seen to be identical with Bohr’s formulation of the
general quantum conditions, but by our proof they could only be
expected to be valid in stationary fields, since the expression for
magnetic and electric forces, according to the present view, contains
the terms § and D which are functions in periodic systems of the
frequency (in non-periodic systems of the accelerations). The general
expression for non-radiating systems which would be expected from our
equations would be
2 Furs, Zeit. f. Physik. 11: 364; 12: 1; 13: 211; 21: 265.
3 Urey, Phys, Rev. 25: 241. 1925.
May 4, 1925 SHANNON: BOULANGERITE FROM WASHINGTON 195
5E =
= ae Jo & Fike di. SO
allthe quantities being calculated according to the new electromagnetic
equations.
Unfortunately, this formulation gives us no definite solution of the
three-body problem in terms of known constants, for the values of
§ and D are unknown though one-half the sum of their squares is
known to equal hy. In general, the solution must be different from
that, assuming the ordinary law of force, because the magnitude
of the periodic forces acting on an electron due to the changing relative
position of the other electrons, would be different according to the
present theory to that calculated from Coulomb’s law. If, however,
D = 0, this difference of the motion, due now exclusively to the change
in the expression for the magnetic force, would be small since magnetic
forces due to electron motion in general contribute but little to the
total motion, the calculation reducing in this case, except for a small
correction (of the order of the relativity effect), to the type of model
investigated by Kramers. In the probably impossible case D = hp
there would be no perturbing perodic electric force on the motion of
one electron due to the motion of another of the same frequency, even
though the rotation was of different sense. This might lead, for
example, to the model of a helium atom with the two electrons
rotating in opposite senses, in equal circular orbits in parallel planes.
Probably the true expression for D and © is not as simple as either of
these cases, but it might still be reasonably expected that pairs of
orbits might be found in which the perturbing effect of one on the
other would not be large, even though the rotation was of opposite
sense, a requirement which seems necessary to account for the low
magnetic moment of certain atoms containing even numbers of
electrons.
MINERALOGY.—Boulangerite from the Cleveland mine, Stevens
County, Washington.! EaruV. SHANNON, U.S. National Museum.
Within recent years the mineral boulangerite, heretofore con-
sidered rare, has been found by the writer to be perhaps the commonest
of the lead-antimony sulphosalts. Its occurrence in two important
districts in Idaho, one in Montana, and one in Bolivia have been
described? and it has since been found in ores from additional mines
} Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
2E. VY. Saannon, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 58: 589-607. 1920.
196 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
in these regions and from Lower California. Another locality which
came to notice a year or so ago is the Cleveland mine in Stevens
County, Washington, where this mineral is one of the major con-
stituents of a lead-silver ore occurring in lens-shaped bodies in frac-
tured and brecciated zones in dolomitic limestone.* The Cleveland
mine is located 18 miles by road west of Springdale, a town on the
Great Northern Railway. In some bodies of ore the boulangerite is
the most abundant mineral and it is prominent in most of the ore.
The associated primary sulphides are galena, sphalerite, and ar-
senopyrite. Secondary minerals formed by the oxidation of these
include cerusite, anglesite, mimetite, bindheimite, valentinite, and
scorodite.
The specimens from this locality were received from Mr. Henry
Fair of Spokane, Washington, to whom the writer desires to extend his
thanks.
The boulangerite forms excellent specimens which apparently are
available in quantity. The best one received weighs in excess of 2
pounds (1 kilogram) and is $0 per cent boulangerite. The min-
eral does not form free crystals but makes up columnar masses
in which the parallel blades reach 10 centimeters in length. The color
is light bluish lead-gray and the luster is metallic. The mineral
becomes dull on exposure. Although there is evidently a tendency to
cleavage, the larger blades are made up of fibers and no clean cut
cleavage fragments can be obtained for measurement. The cleavages
are in the vertical zone and there is none transverse to the fibers.
The material analyzed (U. 8. Nat. Museum Catalog No. 94,514)
was submitted to a metallographic examination, in polished section,
by Mr. M. N. Short of the U. S. Geological Survey, who reports it
pure except for the presence of about one tenth of one per cent. of
pyrite. The microchemical reactions obtained with the standard
reagents of Davy and Farnham are as follows: Strongly anisotropic;
HNO; instantly tarnishes iridescent; with a slight effervescence; HCl
fumes tarnish slightly—not always; KCN negative; FeCl; negative;
KOH negative; HgCl, negative. These tests agree with those given for
boulangerite by Davy and Farnham except that, where they describe
the mineral as sectile, it is very brittle. The reaction—negative—
with KOH immediately distinguishes this mineral from a jamesonite
recently examined which quickly tarnishes dark brown with this
reagent.
3O. P. Jenkins, Lead deposits of Pend Orielle and Stevens counties, Washington.
Wash. Dept. of Conservation and Development, Div. of Geology Bull. 31: 127-130.
1924.
me
may 4, 1925 SNYDER: NEW RUGITERMES FROM PANAMA 197
The sample analyzed gave the results of column 1 of Table 1, while
in column 2 is given the calculated composition agreeing with the
formula of boulangerite, 5PbS. 2 Sb.8;, and in column 38 the theoretical
composition of jamesonite according to Schaller’s formula, 4PbS.
FeS. 35b283.
TABLE 1.—ANALysSIS OF BOULANGERITE
I II Til
imMSOluble As elo to oe see te - G he ob eindes 0.40
Eek ch en yoy oes a CoStar os Crore ais arctan gaia s 55.34 55.41 40.32
[SRT eos 6 te tO BG aes in ETE SER re eer Pee ee 0.52 2.72
AITO Weeds 6 CUCROSE CSS R ROE o EES ae re Cnr 25.30 PAN Te 35.10
STATI sri bee Bae oO RDS IEE RoE nee y nertin 18.08 18.87 21.86
IRGUE Re abonbotod Donn OnOCO cote tere sare cinreetenae 99.64 100.00 100.00
I. Boulangerite from Cleveland mine
II. Theoretical composition of Boulangerite
_III. Theoretical composition of Jamesonite
Teher would appear to remain no doubt, from the foregoing com-
parison, of the agreement of the Cleveland mine mineral with the
boulangerite formula and its distinct difference from jamesonite, to
which mineral there is a strong tendency to refer all such lead sulph-
antimonites. The locality is of interest by reason of the excellence
of its specimens of this mineral and it is to be hoped that they may be
widely distributed in collections before the mine is exhausted.
ENTOMOLOGY.—A new Rugitermes from Panama. Tuos. E.
SnyDER, Bureau of Entomology, U.S. Department of Agriculture.
During the summer of 1924, Nathan Banks, of the Museum of
Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Massachusetts, visited the Canal
Zone and localities in nearby Panama. Some time was spent collect-
ing on Barro Colorado Island, Canal Zone, the site of the station of
the Institute for Research in Tropical America.
In addition to many other insects, Mr. Banks collected an interesting
series of termites, including one new species of the subgenus Rugitermes
Holmgren. Banks also collected the odd termite Armitermes (Rhynco-
termes) major Snyder, of Costa Rica and Honduras, on Barro Colorado
Island. Panama is a new locality for this interesting species. He has
courteously allowed me to examine this collection of termites.
Mr. Banks’ collection brings the termite fauna of the Canal Zone
and nearby Panama, up to 38 species, representing 23 genera or
subgenera, 22 of which, representing 16 genera or subgenera, occur on
Barro Colorado Island.
198 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
The new species is named ‘‘isthmz,’”’ in reference to the Isthmus of
Panama, and is described as follows:
Kalotermes Hagen, subgenus Rugitermes Holmgren
Winged adult.—Often markedly bicolored, head and abdomen dark-colored,
pronotum light-colored; in wings the median vein unites almost directly with
the radial sector; antennae with 16-19 segments.
Soldier.—Similar to soldiers of Kalotermes and Neotermes; antennae with
13-18 segments.
The six described species of Rugitermes are all from South America; they
are: nodulosus Hagen, rugusus Hagen, occidentalis Silvestri, bicolor Emerson,
flavicinctus Emerson, and magninotus Emerson. Kalotermes (Rugitermes)
isthmi Snyder is the first record of species in this subgenus occurring in
Central America.
Kalotermes (Rugitermes) isthmi, new species
Winged adult-—Head very dark castaneous (almost blackish with reddish
tinge), smooth, shining, longer than broad, sides almost parallel, rounded
posteriorly, with scattered, long hairs. Postelypeus and labrum yellow, with
long hairs; former, short but broad, latter broader than long and broadly
rounded anteriorly. Eye black, not round, fairly large and projecting,
separated from lower margin of head by a distance less than the diameter of
the eye. Ocellus hyaline, projecting, suboval and at an oblique angle to the
eye, almost touching eye.
Antennae dark castaneous, finely punctate, with 17 segments, segments
become longer and broader (somewhat wedge-shaped) towards apex; third
segment longer than second or fourth segments, subclavate; fourth and fifth
segments subequal; last segment shorter, narrower and suboval.
Pronotum yellow or light yellowish brown, not twice as broad as long,
broadest at middle, roundly emarginate both anteriorly and posteriorly;
sides roundly slope (narrowed) posteriorly, with scattered long hairs.
Wings smoky dark brown, coarsely punctate. In forewing median vein
unites almost directly with the radial sector; radial sector close to, parallel,
and with six branches to costal vein, first three long and oblique, others short;
cubitus runs parallel to radial sector above middle of wing to apex of wing,
with 12-13 branches or sub-branches to lower margin of wing; subcostal vein
unites with costa before the middle of the wing; seven irregular, transverse
and crescentic branches between cubitus and radial sector (Fig. 3). In hind
wing, median vein entirely absent; radial sector with two long and three short
branches to costal vein; cubitus runs to apex of wing, with 10-11 branches or
sub-branches to lower margin of wing; subcostal vein unites with costa before
middle of wing; seven irregular, transverse branches between cubitus and
radial sector.
Wing scale (of fore wing) as long as pronotum.
Legs yellow-brown to dark brown, elongate, slender, with long hairs; 3
long spines at apex tibiae, pulvillus present.
Abdomen with tergites dark brown to blackish, a row of long hairs near
the base of each tergite; cerci fairly elongate.
Measurements: Entire winged adult 8.5 mm. long; entire dealated adult
5.75 mm. long; head (to tip labrum) 1.55 mm. long; pronotum 0.9 mm. long;
fore wing 6 mm. long; posterior wing 5.75 mm. long; hind tibia: 0.9 mm.
Pee
may 4, 1925 SNYDER: NEW RUGITERMES FROM PANAMA 199
long; eye (long diameter) 0.305 mm.; head (at eyes) 1.4 mm. wide; pronotum
1.4 mm. wide; of fore wing, 1.70 mm. wide; posterior wing: 2.00 mm. wide.
Kalotermes (R.) zsthmi Snyder is a strikingly bicolored species; K. (R.)
rugosus Hagen is not bicolored, is larger, lighter colored, with a larger wing,
and wing much less coarsely punctate.
Soldier —Head light castaneous-brown, or yellow-brown with a reddish
tinge, especially anteriorly, cylindrical, with sides nearly parallel, but broadest
posteriorly, narrowed slightly anteriorly, with scattered long hairs, very dense
on oblique frontal slope. Small, narrow, hyaline, slit like eye spot at right
angles to sides of head.
Mandibles black, base reddish-brown, broad at base, tips slender, pointed
and incurved. Left mandible with one sharp pointed marginal tooth on
KALOTERMES (RUGITERMES) ISTHMI SNYDER
Fig. 1—Mandibles, with marginal teeth (soldier); Fig. 2—Pronotum (soldier) ;
Fig. 3—Venation of fore wing. (All drawings by camera lucida; figs. 1 and 2 high
power, fig. 3 low power.)
apical third, two molar teeth in middle. Right mandible with two large
marginal teeth at about the middle, the first sharp pointed, the other more
blunt; edge of mandible roughened between apex and first tooth (Fig. 1).
Antennae yellow, with 13 segments, slender, elongate, with long hairs;
third segment light castaneous-brown, elongate, slender, subclavate, longer
than second or fourth segments, nearly as long as fourth and fifth segments
together; fifth slightly longer than fourth segment; segments become longer
towards apex; last segment shorter, narrower and suboval.
Pronotum dirty white, tinged with yellow, margins darker, not twice as
broad as long, broadest at middle, broadly, roundly emarginate anteriorly,
generally convex posteriorly, sides rounded, slope (narrowed) posteriorly,
with scattered long hairs (Fig. 2).
200 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
Legs tinged with yellow, femora somewhat swollen, three long spines at
apex of tibia.
Abdomen dirty white, tinged with yellow, a row of long hairs near the base
of each tergite, cerci elongate.
Measurements: Entire soldier 6.5-7 mm. long; head with mandibles 3.6
mm. long; head without mandibles (to anterior) 2.4 mm. long; left mandible
1.2 mm. long; pronotum 0.95 mm. long; hind tibia 1 mm. long; head (an-
teriorly) 1.4 mm. wide; (posteriorly) 1.6 mm. wide; pronotum 1.65 mm. wide.
Type locality—Barro Colorado Island, C. Z., Panama.
Described from three winged adults, collected with one soldier and nymphs
at the type locality ‘'24, VII,” N. Banks, collector. Other winged adults,
soldiers and nymphs collected at Frijoles, C. Z., ‘10, VII,” N. Banks,
collector.
Type.—Winged adult, Cat. no. 15105, Museum Comparative Zoology,
Cambridge, Mass.; morphotype, soldier; paratype in U. 8. National Museum,
Washington, D. C.
ENTOMOLOGY .—Some new species of North American treehoppers
(Membracidae, Hemiptera). KE. D. Batu, U. 8. Department
of Agriculture.
The writer is working on a revision of the tribe Telamonini which
includes the major portion of the large treehoppers of the temperate
regions of the United States. In studying the various collections a
number of new species have been discovered. As it will probably be
some time before the revision is completed, it has been thought best
to describe the new species in advance so that the material may be
distributed.
Glossonotus nimbatulus new species
Resembling twrriculatus but smaller, darker, with a tall, variable, foliaceous
crest resembling acuminatus. Length 7 mm., width 4.5 mm., height 5 mm.
Horn anterior and nearly vertical, broad and high, constricted near middle,
nearly evenly foliaceous at apex, as seen from front broadly inflated from
just above the very short and weak lateral angles, tapering evenly to just
before the apex. Lateral angles obtuse, about half the width of the eye.
Pronotum moderately acute in both planes.
Color.—Uniform chestnut or darker, varying to almost black, with pale
points on the sides of the horn. In the lighter specimens there is a narrow
light median stripe from the apex of horn to apex of pronotum, becoming
narrower in the darker specimens and occasionally wanting.
Type female, Long Island, N. Y. (Davis); allotype, male, White Moun-
tains, N. H. (Ball); paratypes: Lakehurst, N. J. (Barber and Am. Mus. N.
H.); Roselle Park, N. J—Matausch (Am. Mus. N. H.); Framingham, Mass.
(Dickerson Coll., Am. Mus. N. H.); Karner, N. Y. (N. Y. St. Coll.) ; and Penn-
sylvania (Baker Coll., U.S. N. M.).
Type and allotype in author’s collection; paratypes in Davis, Farber,
Am. Mus. N. H..and U. 8. N. M. collections.
Heliria gibberata new species
Slightly smaller and darker than cristata, with the crest nearly uniform in
height and only slightly overhanging. Female: length 10 mm., width 7 mm.,
height 5 mm.; males: length 8 mm.
may 4, 1925 BALL: NEW NORTH AMERICAN TREEHOPPERS 201
Pronotum long, low, acute, weakly striated, crest prominent, situated as
in cristata but with the posterior lobe long, almost as high as the anterior and
nearly level, the anterior lobe rising in a gentle curve to the rounding and only
slightly overhanging apex. Humeral angles very prominent in the female,
resembling cristata. Males, shorter with a lower and less differentiated crest
and with the humeral angles much reduced.
Color.—Pale creamy ground with irregular dark mottlings giving a grizzled
appearance, these usually emphasized on anterior and posterior margins of
crest, the latter often extending as an oblique stripe to costa.
Type female, allotype male, and three pair of paratypes collected by the
writer at Ames, Iowa; a female from Galesburg, IIl., Stromberg (Godg. Coll.)
U.S. N. M.; and one from Lincoln, Neb. (Osborn Coll.).
Type and paratype in author’s collection; paratypes in U. 8S. N. M.,
A. M. N. H., and Osborn collections. The difference in the shape of both
lobes of crest render this a strikingly distinct species.
Heliria cornu tula new species
Resembling gibberata, crest slightly longer, anteriorly upright or slightly
retreating, superficially resembling Telamona maculata. Female: length
10 mm., height 6 mm., width 7 mm.; male: length 8.5 mm.
Pronotum low, the apex abruptly pointed, bearing definite striations
posteriorly. . Crest larger and longer than in gibberata, the anterior margin
arising perpendicularly from the face of the metapodium excluding the median
convexity; anterior lobe large, anterior angle broadly rounding; posterior
lobe but little lower than the anterior, upper margin horizontal, posterior
angle almost right-angled. Humeral angles longer than in cristata, rather
narrow at base, then expanded and rounding to the long apices, as a whole,
extraordinarily ear-like. Male crest smaller, the anterior margin sloping,
the anterior lobe inclined to be broadly pyramidal.
Color.—Pale gray, sometimes with a greenish tinge, mottled with darker,
usually the dark color is emphasized across the metapodium; on the upper
part of crest and in two bands behind the crest. Two examples are closely
and almost uniformly irrorate with dark.
Type female, Faltbush, L. I. (Olsen Coll.) ; allotype male, Elizabeth, N. J.
(Matausch. Am. Mus. N. H.); 3 paratype females and 3 males from the Ma-
tausch Collection, Am. Mus. N.H., one labeled Bronx, N. Y., one paratype
female, Hummelstown, Pa. (DeLong Coll.), and one male, Maryland (Uhler.
Coll, U.S. N. M.).
Type and paratypes in author’s collection; allotype and paratypes in the
Am. Mus. N. H.; paratypes in U.S. N. M. and collection of DeLong.
Heliria clitella new species
Resembling sinuata, but with a short oblique crest and short humeral
angles. Length 11 mm., width 6 mm.
Pronotum long, low, striae only normally developed and not prominent at
apex. Crest shorter than in sinuata, anterior and posterior margins almost
parallel, sloping, anterior lobe pyramidal or rounding, the posterior lobe short,
the angle acute, produced. Crest with two compressed areas, one along
front margin and the other parallel with it just before the posterior margin;
these two troughs are separated by a very pronounced ridge that extends to
the apex of the pyramid. Humeral angles very short and broad, rounding to
just before the slightly acute apices.
202 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 9
Color.—Grizzled gray, slightly mottled with dark, without definite pattern,
a broad creamy stripe arising from just below the posterior angle of the crest
and extending two-thirds of the way to apex of pronotum.
Type female, and allotype male from Huachuca Mts., Ariz. (Schaffer,
Brooklyn Mus.); paratype female taken with the types (Woodruff Coll.),
and a male from Arizona (Cornell Coll.)
Type in author’s collection; allotype in the Brooklyn Museum; paratypes
in Cornell Collection and collection of L. M. Woodruff.
Heliria fitchi new species
Resembling sinuwata but with a lower crest and a more definite “step.”
Length 11 mm., width 6 mm.
Pronotum very long, striae normal, crest moderate, placed well back of
metapodium, intermediate in length between sznuata and clitella, anterior
margin quite sloping, posterior margin vertical, anterior lobe almost uniformly
rounding above, one-third higher than the posterior one, posterior lobe almost
square. Humeral angles very short for this group, slightly acutely angled
with the margin rounding.
Color.—Pale creamy with quite definite dark mottlings, as follows: most
of the crest including an oblique band to the costa, a spot on the costa before
this and most of the apical region of pronotum. The oblique stripe and the
apical markings are separated by a white band which is enlarged on the median
line and contains a definite dark spot. One example is much darker than
the others and the old examples are pale brown rather than creamy.
Type female, allotype male, and one paratype female, Charter Oak, Pa.
(DeLong); paratype male, New York (Fitch Coll., U.S. N. M.) and another
labeled ‘city’? (Uhler Coll., U. S. N. M.), probably from Baltimore, Md.
Type female and allotype male in author’s collection; paratypes in U. 8.
N. M. and DeLong’s collection.
This is a strikingly distinct species although closely related to sinuata and
clitella. The examples from the Fitch collection in the National Museum
are labeled T'elamona concava Fitch and one parasitized example, probably a
female, is labeled ‘“‘type.’’ This is not the species represented by the Fitch
type in the Albany collection as will be discussed in a later paper.
Heliria gemma new species
Resembling fitch but paler and with a less definitely sinuated crest; crest
intermediate between that of fitchi and concava. Large; female, light creamy
with brown mottlings; males brown, hairy; crest long, broadly pyramidal with
a posterior sinuation or step. Length, female 11 mm., width 5.5 mm., height
5.5 mm.; male, length 8-9 mm.
Pronotum long, acute, crest arising just back of the metapodial slope,
anterior margin sloping insensibly into the outline of the rather large broadly
rounding anterior lobe, posterior lobe short, sometimes almost merged into
the posterior slope of the anterior one, usually represented by a slight step
or sinuation, the posterior angle obtuse and the margin rounding into
the posterior process. Humeral angles very broad, about right-angled,
equaling or exceeding the breadth of the eye.
Color.—Female pale creamy, irregularly irrorate and mottled with brown,
the brown mottling emphasized on the crest, the oblique stripe and at the apex
of pronotum, the creamy emphasized in a semicircle beneath the crest on
may 4, 1925 BALL: NEW NORTH AMERICAN TREEHOPPERS 203
either side and a band behind the crest which is connected with a definite
white stripe on the posterior face of crest. The semicircles are irregular
along the margin with brown mottling along the lower border and a tooth of
light pushed up into the anterior base of the crest. The males are densely
hairy, almost uniform brown, with traces of the creamy tooth and the
posterior stripe.
Type female, Vermont (Barrett) ; allotype male and two pairs of paratypes,
Adirondack Mts., N. Y. (Barber); paratype females, Catskill Mts., N. Y.
(Wanakana, N. Y. (Osb. Coll.) ; Lancaster, N. Y. (Van D. Coll., Ames); New
Hampshire and Massachusetts (U. 8. N. M.); and males, Elk Park, N. Y.
(Drake); and Mt. Katahdin, Me. (Barber).
Types, allotype, and paratypes in author’s collection; paratypes in U. 8.
N. M., Am. Mus. N. H., Ames Coll., Osborn Coll., and Barber Coll.
Telonaca tremulata new species
Resembling pyramzdata slightly shorter, stouter, with a broader sloping
sinuate crest and much darker pigmentation. Length, female 9-10 mm.,
with 5.5. mm., height 5mm. Length, male 8 mm.
Pronotum stout, the apical process rarely as long as the elytra, with a long
pyramidal crest sloping from the metapodium to the anterior angle with a
slight sinuation; anterior angle almost a right angle; top of crest long, sloping,
concave, slightly sinuate, posterior angle obtuse, the posterior margin sloping
slightly less than the anterior.
Numeral angles prominent, similar to pyramzdata, not as long as their basal
ath BeaLcely equaling the eye in length, slightly acutely angular, the apex
rounded.
Color.—Variable, usually soiled yellow, so heavily irrorated and mottled
with dark fuscous as to give a general dirty grizzled appearance with still
darker areas on the crest and extending obliquely to the costa as well as at the
apex. The males are usually darker, sometimes with a brownish shade. The
Utah examples are pale creamy with definite dark markings in sharp contrast
Type male Ephraim, Utah, July 20, 1924; allotype female Salem, N. Y.,
July 27, 1924, both collected by the writer on aspen. Paratypes: Woodruff,
Wisc. (DeLong); Bayfield, Wisc., (Wickham, Barber Coll.); Osceola, Wisc.
(Ball) ; Cranberry lake, N. Y. (Osborn) ; Canada (Baker, U.S. N. M.); Buena
Vista, Colo. (Wickham) ; and Colorado (Baker, U.S. N. M.).
Type and allotype in author’s collection; paratypes in Barber, Osborn,
DeLong, Am. Mus. N. H. and U. 8. N. M. collections.
Telamona tiliae new species
Intermediate between spreta and reclivata in outline, resembling spreta
but with definite dark markings especially in the male. Length, female 10
mm., width 6 mm., height 5 mm. Length, male 9 mm.
Pronotum long, acute, crest broad, quadrangular, inclined posteriorly, the
anterior margin sloping from middle of metapodium to middle of crest,
crest obliquely truncate, the anterior angle roundingly rectangular, the
posterior one obtuse, posterior margin upright, rounding into pronotum
below. Humeral angles slightly obtusely angular, their margins curved,
almost equaling the eye.
Color.—Dirty grayish-green, fading to dirty yellowish, with most of the
crest and an oblique strip to costa brown; in the females this brown area may
204 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
only be emphasized on the margin but in the males it is broad and definite,
a broad light stripe on anterior and posterior margins of crest.
Type female and allotype male, Ames, Iowa. Two pairs paratypes,
Ames, Iowa, and two pairs, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, all collected by the writer
on basswood. Type in author’s collection; paratypes in author’s collection,
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist. and U.S. Nat. Mus.
Telamona gibbera new species
Resembling tiliae but smaller and differently marked, slightly larger than
reclivata, with a taller, narrower crest. Length, female 9 mm., width 5 mm.,
height 6mm. Length, male 8 mm.
Pronotum low, rather broad with a narrow upright crest arising well back
of the metapodium. Crest with the anterior margin vertical and in line
with the lateral angles; dorsum obliquely rounding, highest just back of the
anterior margin and sloping down to the obtuse posterior angle, posterior
margin slightly sloping and rounding into the broad apical portion; humeral
angles broad, almost right angles, equaling the eyes, resembling tzlzae. Male
slightly smaller than the female with the crest sloping equally from both
front and back.
Color.—Dirty gray, slightly darkening around the margin of crest and set
off by a white stripe on the posterior slope. Male highly and strikingly
ornamented, as follows: Face and metapodium irregularly mottled with
brown; crest heavily margined with dark brown with occasional light spots,
a creamy area below the crest on either side which sends up a narrow yellow
stripe into the dark of the crest, anterior carinae narrowly light and posterior
slope broadly so.
Type female, allotype male, and 3 paratype females, Williams, Ariz.
(Knight); 1 paratype female, 1 paratype male, Pinal Mts., Ariz. (Wickman
Ames Coll.) ; 2 females, Williams, Ariz.; and 1 female and 2 males Flagstaff,
Ariz. (Barber and Swartz); 1 female and 3 males, Chiric. Mts., Ariz. (Hub-
bard)—all U.S. N. M. Type and allotype in author’s collection; paratype
in collection of author—H. H. Knight, Ia. St. Coll., Kan. U., U. 8. Nat. Mus.
and Am. Mus. N. H.
Teiamona tarda new species
Resembling gibbera but with a slightly more anterior and pyramidal crest.
Length, female 8.5 mm., width 4.5 mm., height 5mm. Length, male 7 mm.
Pronotum long and acute, about five lateral carinae strongly developed
back of the crest as in woodruffi; crest arising only slightly back of the me-
tapodium, anterior margin slightly sloping from the metapodium to just
before the evenly rounded apex; apex about one-half the width at base,
posterior margin more sloping than the anterior, its outline almost straight
to where it rounds to the pronotum. Humeral angles very short and
rounding, one-half the length of the eye. Male very small, hairy, with a low
rounding crest sloping equally from both margins.
Color.—Pale dirty grayish-brown with slight darkening of the margins of
the humeral angles and crest; median carina black interrupted before and
behind the crest with light. Male darker with the crest mottled brown.
Type female and allotype male, paratype female and male, Roselle Park,
N. J. (Matausch Coll., Am. Mus. N. H.); type and paratype Am. Mus.
N. H.; allotype and paratype and in author’s collection.
may 4, 1925 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 205
Telamona woodruffi new species
Resembling compacta but with a slightly higher and more angular crest as
in reclivata and less maculations. Length 8 mm., width 4 mm., height 5 mm.
Pronotum rather high, crest broader than high, slightly inclined posteriorly,
dorsum long and straight, both angles rounding. Anterior margins sloping
more than posterior and about in line with the humeral angles. Humeral
angles roundingly right-angled, almost equaling the eye, much longer and
more acute than in compacta. About five lateral carinae, quite definitely
marked on the apical portion of the pronotum. Male with a smaller crest
sloping into the metapodium anteriorly.
Color—Rich, red-brown with occasional white flecks, much smaller and
more obscure than in compacta. Carina interruptedly dark, posterior slope
of crest light with dark margins. Male darker.
Type female and allotype male, Elizabeth, N. J. Three-paratype females
and one male from the same locality. All from the Matausch Coll., Am.
Mus. N.H. Type in Am. Mus. N. H.; allotype and paratype in author’s
collection, paratypes in Coll. Am. Mus. N. H. and L. M. Woodruff. Named
for Mr. L. M. Woodruff who has done such fine work on the genus Cyrtolobus.
Telamona vestita new species
Resembling monticola, slightly smaller, darker, and with the crest rounding
over from the metapodium almost to the posterior angle. Length, fe-
male 9 mm., width 5 mm., height 6mm. Length, male 8 mm.
Pronotum rather broad and short, crest very broad occupying nearly one-
half the pronotum, anterior margin arising as a continuation of the curve
of the metapodium and rounding over to the elongate dorsum; posterior
margin short, upright, the angle often slightly acute. Humeral angles more
prominent than in monticola, right-angled, equaling the eye.
Color.—Pale, dirty yellowish, slightly flecked with brown, a light area on
the posterior face of crest. The males are much smaller and darker and the
Oregon female is dark.
Type female and allotype male, Quincy, Calif. Paratype females from
Quincy and Salinas, Calif. and a male from Tehachapi, Calif. all collected by
the writer. One female, Oregon (Westcott); 2 males, Gold Hill, Oregon
(Biederman, U. 8. Nat. Mus.); 1 female Humboldt, Calif. (VanDyke, U.S.
Nat. Mus.); anda male, Santa Cruz Mts., Calif. (U.S. Nat. Mus.). Type
and allotype in the author’s collection. Paratypes in National Museum,
the American Museum of Natural History and the author’s collection.
This is a very distinct species resembling monticola but lacking the green
color. It is close to reclivata in structure but has a higher crest.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Public law No. 353, 68th Congress, approved January 31, 1925, reads as
follows: “Beit enacted . . . . That the Coast and Geodetic Survey is
hereby authorized to make investigations and reports in seismology, including
such investigations as have been heretofore performed by the Weather
Bureau.” The Bulletin of the Survey announces that publication of seismo-
logical reports formerly published by the Weather Bureau in the Monthly
Weather Review and discontinued July 1, 1924, will be resumed in the near
future. The Act will have the effect of placing the seismological work of
206 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 9
the Survey, which has heretofore been an adjunct to the magnetic work, in
a position of equal importance to the magnetic work..
The Petrologists Club met at the home of A. C. SpENcER on March 17.
Program: J. W. Grine: The decomposition of andalusite, kyanite and silli-
manite by heating; R. W. G. Wycxorr: X-ray diffraction measurements on
sillimanite and mullite; A. C. Spencer: Review of Spurr and Lewis’ “Ore
deposits of Franklin Furnace.”
The Petrologists Club met at the home of H. G. Ferauson on April 14.
Program: J. B. Merrin, An outline of the igneous geology of Alaska; W. T.
ScuaLuer: Red muscovite from New Mexico; D. F. Huwerrr: Supergene
silica and jarosites in Nevada.
A joint meeting of the Washington sections of the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers, American Society of Naval Engineers and American
Chemical Society, with the Washington Society of Engineers, was held on
April 23 to hear a lecture by E. C. MacprpurceEr on Diesel engines in sub-
marines.
The April meeting of the Pick and Hammer Club was devoted to a dis-
cussion of the application of aerial photography to topographic and geologic
mapping.
An illustrated lecture on Bird life in the District of Columbia was given by
Harry C. OBERHOLZER before the Columbia Historical Society on April 21.
The Acapremy’s List of one hundred popular books in science, prepared
originally at the request of Dr. G. F. Bowerman, Librarian of the Public
Library, and subsequently republished by the American Library Association,
is now out of print, several thousand copies having been sold. The Associa-
tion wished to reprint the list but has postponed reprinting for a few weeks
in order to give opportunity for any revision that may be thought desirable.
A committee consisting of the vice-presidents of the AcaprEmy, with
R. B. Sosman of the Geophysical Laboratory as chairman, has been appointed
to prepare this revision. Suggestions from readers of the Journal as to
desirable changes will be appreciated by the committee. The latest revision
was published in this Journal, Vol. 12, p. 469, (Dec. 19, 1922).
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
_ Tuesday, May 5. The Botanical Society.
‘ _ PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE JOURNAL
_ Saturday, April 18. The Philosophical Society. C. W. Kanour: Non-inflammable
liquids for low temperature thermostats. E.W.Woouarp: A problem in mathematical
expectation and its bearing on statistics. P.R.Hzyz: Some thoughts on the inertia of
energy.
_ Wednesday, April22. The Geological Society. H.T.Sreanrns: The great explosions of
i.) Kilauea voleano in 1924. C.E. Van OnstRanv: A possible dependence of deep earth
? temperatures on geologic structure. CHartes Burrs: New light on the Talladega
et (Ocoee) rocks of Alabama. 4
‘Saturday, May 2. The Philosophical Society. F. Neumann: Harthquakes of 1925—
s the problem of determining epicenters. H.D. Hout: A method of studying electrode
potentials and polarization. N. H. Huck: The path of sound waves through water.
- CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS Faas Web
i ie "
Physics.—An electromagnetic theory of quanta. F. RUssELL mae,
ton. ker. 7: SHANNON. AS Beihai Saale nee etpla ie oe tae RR Oe
Entomology. eae new species of North American trechoppers
: Hemiptera). E. D. Ba: sity kieraih atelgi oj accnd NataE NR eee m tag
Bovanierero Nowas kien Kawa V0 OU nae thane ee ia
‘at
yi} OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vernon L. Ketioce, National Research Council.
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. Smuspez, Bureau of Sta
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodeti
Treasurer: R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
ol. 15 : May 19, 1925 No. 10
JOURNAL
OF THE
VASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
_E.P. Kur D. F. Hewerr S. J. Mavcany
IONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apaus S.A. RowweR _--=~
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Srosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY — are tg
R. F, Griaes J. R. Swanton ga
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIBTY
E. WIcHERS.
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royat anp GuILrorp AVEs.
Baitimore, MaryLANnD
‘ ‘Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on fale 3, 1918
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aim he
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publis
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Acad
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from W:
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated So
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNauisiss
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summe
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Promp
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. | F
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should b
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. Th
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. #5"
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figure:
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author. ee
Proof.—tIn order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors”
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. eis Cpe
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp.
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00
250 3.00 . §.30 6.25 7.50
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi- y
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. es
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprin
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume is........0...0.c0ccccceceseteveuses yee
Semi-monthly numbers:.'s (0: sg. ofa Ae eae ll ae eee
Monthly numbers)\o. 2-22). ygiek sie ares sein ete <0 isan a oe aaa
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,’’ an
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. O
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. yah
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. _
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is |
within thirty days after date of the following issue. F
as
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Specia’ "
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy *
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 May 19, 1925 No. 10
SPECTROSCOPY .—Quartet-system multiplets in the arc spectrum of
yttrium... W. F. Merccerrs. Bureau of Standards, and B. E.
Moore, University of Nebraska.
In a recent note on Spectrum regularities for scandium and yttrium?
doublets in the are spectra and triplets in the spark spectra were dis-
cussed, and attention was directed to the close correspondence of
spectral structures for these two elements. Zeeman effect data? con-
firming.most of the are and spark multiplets of yttrium were repro-
duced, but there existed at that time no published data for magnetic
resolutions of scandium lines. Such have since been published by S.
Goudsmit, J. Van der Mark and P. Zeeman,‘ and their measurements
positively identify certain doublet and triplet terms respectively in the
Se I and Sc IT spectra.
On the basis of King’s® intensity and temperature classification of
scandium lines, Cataldin® published three multiplets belonging to the
quartet system of the are spectrum, the occurrence of which was
required by the rule’ that the maximum multiplicity in a spectrum
is one unit greater than the column number for the element. With
the aid of Landé’s® interval rule the combining spectral terms were
identified as high ‘F (read ‘“‘quartet F’’) and lower ‘D, ‘F’, and ‘G
terms. No data for the Zeeman effect of these lines have been
published.
1 Published by permission of the Director of the Bureau of Standards of the U. 8S.
Department of Commerce.
2 Meccesrs, This Journal 14: 419. 1924.
3 Moorg, Astrophys. Jour. 28:1. 1908.
4 Kon. Akad. Wet. Amsterdam 33: 975. 1924.
5 Astrophys. Journ. 54:28. 1921.
§ Anales Soc. Espan. Fis. y Quim. 21: 464. 1923.
7 Laporte, Die Naturwissenschaften 11: 779. 1923.
3 Zeit. £. Physik. 15:189. 1923.
207
208 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
In the case of yttrium no temperature classification has been pub-
lished, and the Zeeman effect data were not extensive enough to iden-
tify the quartet terms. The latter deficiency has recently been cor-
rected by the authors; new measurements of magnetic resolutions
of yttrium arc lines at once revealed the prominent quartet terms
which are the analogues of those in scandium mentioned above. In
either case the absolute values of these terms are still unknown but
their relative values are compared in Table 1, in which the level with
smallest energy content is called zero.
TABLE 1.—Revative TERMS IN QuaRTET SYSTEMS
Term Scandium Yttrvwm
F, 00.00 00.00
F; 37 .67 141.33
14 90.28 340 .64
F; 157 .33 594.80
D; 31117.4 22278 .0
Dz 31139 .2 22328 .1
D; 31176.8 22420 .4
D, 31231 .5 22677 .2
I’ 29652 .5 20571 .1
F;’ 29695 .8 20742 .7
Fy,’ 29755 .6 20971 .8
5! 29831 .0 21250.8
Gs 27502..9 17756 .7
G4 27576 .2 18051 .5
Gs 27669 .8 18426 .9
Ge 27783 .5 18883 .2
The interval ratios of the yttrium terms are as follows:
Observed Calculated
‘pF 254.16 : 199.31 : 141.33 = 9.000 7.058 5.004 9 a 5
4D 256.88 : 92.36 : 50.09 = 7.0 2. 1.4 7 5 3
leh 278.90 : 229.12 : 171.55 = 9.0 7.4 5.5 9 7 5
4G 456.26 : 375.35 : 294.73 =11.00 9.05 ®) ll 9 7
The agreement between observed and calculated interval ratios
is almost perfect for the lowest F level, and although it is very poor
for the *D term it becomes progressively better for the high levels as
the azimuthal quantum number increases.
Three quartet system multiplets resulting from the combinations
of the above terms for yttrium are presented in Table 2. The multi-
plets are arranged with term designations and intervals at the margins,
each spectral line being represented by its observed wave length,
estimated intensity (in parenthesis), and vacuum wave number.
Exposures for the Zeeman effect of the yttrium lines in Table 2
were made with the spectrograph and magnet in the Brace Laboratory
MAY 19, 1925 MEGGERS AND MOORE: ARC SPECTRUM OF YTTRIUM 209
TABLE 2.—QvaRTETS IN THE ARC SPECTRUM OF YTTRIUM
Fs 254.16 Fy 199.31 F; 141.33 F,
Ds 4527 .26 (8) 4475.71 (4) 4436 .14 (1)
22082 .27 22336 .59 22535 .82
256 .88
D; 4527 .79(8) 4487 .29(3) 4458 .95 (2)
22079 .68 22278 .96 22420 .52
92.36
D2: 4505 .95 (8) 4477 .41(4)
- 22186 .67 22328 .11
50.09
D, 4487 .48 (6)
22278 .02
F's 4839 .86 (10) 4781 .04(3)
20656 .00 20910 .13
278 .90
F's 4906 .10(3) 4845 .68 (8) 4799.31 (4)
20377 .14 20631 .19 20830 .51
229 .12
F’; 4900.11 (10-x) 4852 .69(8) 4819 .64(3)
20402 .05 20601 .40 20742 .67
171.55
F’s 4893 .44(3) 4859 .83(8)
20429 .84 20571 .13
Gs 5466 .45 (10)
18288 .35
456 .26
G; 5606 .32 (3) 5527 .53 (10)
17832 .09 18086 .26
375.35
Gs Se 5644.68 (4) 5581.86 (8)
17456 .8 17710.91 17910 .20
294.73
G; 5740.23 (1) 5675 .26 (3) 5630.12 (8)
17416 .08 17615 .47 17756 .69
210 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
of Physics; the spectrograms were measured at the Bureau of Stand-
ards. In Table 3 the observed values are compared with those
calculated according to Landé.? The parallel components (in paren-
thesis) are followed by the perpendicular components, and in complex
patterns the strongest component of either set is printed in bold face
type while some of the weaker components are represented by asterisks.
The exposures obtained thus far do not permit the measurement of
TABLE 3.—ZrEMAN Errect oF Yttrium Arc LInEs
Terms ALA, Obs, Cale.
FD, 4487.48 (——) 0.58 (0.20) 0.20, 0.60
F.4D, 4475.71 (0.46) 1.27 (** 0:48; 0:67) ** 1.14) 335 eb ies
F,D2 4477.41 (——) 0.00, 0.77, 1.53 (0.40, 1.20) 0.00, 0.80, 1.60
F;D; 4487.29 (——-) 1.20 (* 0.52, 0.86) * 0.86, 1.20, 1.54, *
F;D2 4505.97 (0) 0.84 (0.08, 0.26) 0.77, 0.94, 1.12, 1.28
FsD, 4527.26 (0) 1.11 (0:05;-0:15°**)) 1.00; 1-10;ab19 seo seas
F.D; 4527.79 (0) 1.07 (0.07, 0.20, 0.33) 0.90, 1.04, 1.17, 1.30**
¥,F;’ 4781.04 (O) 1.46 (0.05, 0.14, **)***** 1.48, 1.57, 1. 67
F3F 4’ 4799.31 (w) 1.55 (0.10, 0.31 *)*** 1.34) 1250, 01-76
F.F,’ 4819.64 (0.31, 0.95) 1.94 (0.31, 0.94) 0.09, 0.71, 1.34, 1.97
F;F;’ 4839.86 (0) 1.34 (0) 1.33
ByF,’ 4845.68 (0) 1.23 (O) 1.24
F3F;’ 4852.69 (0) 1.03 (0) 1.03
F.F 2’ 4859.83 (0) 0.41 (0) 0.40
F3F 2’ 4893.44 (0.32, 0.95) 1.96 (0.31, 0.94) 0.09, 0.71, 1.34, 1.97
FFs’ 4900.11 =) 1.068 (0.10, 0.31 *)*** 1.34, 1.55, 1.76
FF,’ 4906.10 (0) 1.51 (0.06, 0.14 **)***** 1-480 1°57, 91.67,
F;Ge 5466.45 (0) 1.13 (0.03, 0:09: ***) 1:00; 1:06, das teetas
F.Gs 5527.53 (0) 1.05 (0:03; 0:10.) **) 0:94; 1:00, 1 O07) sae
F;G2 5581.86 (0) 0.93 (0.02, 0.07, 0.11) 0.87, 0.91, 1.00 **
F;Gs 5606.32 (0.62) 1.22 w (*** 0.57, 0:73) *** 10,126 yea
FG; 5630.12 (0) 0.72 (0.09, 0.26) 0.31, 0.49. 0.66, 0.83
FG, 5644.68 (0.85) 1.11 (** 0.64, 0.89) ** 0.86, 1.11, 1.37 **
F;G; 5675.26 (14) —— (0.23, 0.68, 1.14) * 0.34, 0.80, 1.26 *
= Intense spark line coincident. *F; — *Ds, (0.00, 0.08 *) 0.92, 1.00, 1.08 **.
some of the fainter components in complex patterns but even the
unresolved patterns are in qualitative agreement with the calculated
values. The observations are being extended and a complete pres-
entation together with further regularities in the spectra of yttrium
will be given in another paper.
® Zeit. f. Physik. 15:189. 1923.
e--
MAY 19, 1925 SHANNON: MYRMECOPHILE FROM PANAMA 211
ENTOMOLOGY .—An extraordinary adult myrmecophile from Panama.
Raymond C. SHannon, Bureau of Entomology, Department of
Agriculture. (Communicated by 8. A. RoHWER.)
Under the title Two extraordinary larval myrmecophiles from Pan-
ama,! Dr. W. M. Wheeler recently described a peculiar larva of a
dipteron which he thought might prove to belong to the genus Microdon
(Syrphidae) or to a closely allied genus. As a result of his paper, addi-
tional data relating to this group of myrmecophiles came to light, all of
which fit together fairly well to make a very interesting account.
Incidentally, a new species of Microdon, peculiar enough to be quite
in keeping with the remarkable larva recorded by Wheeler and which
may eventually prove to be the adult, was found in the National
Museum collection and is described below.
Dr. Wheeler found more than a hundred individuals of a peculiar
type of larva in the nest of an ant, Azteca trigona Emery. No adults
were reared and the authenticated imago remains unknown. Wheeler
states that a study of the larvae “‘shows a vague kinship to the Syrphid
Microdon, ***. On the other hand the rigidity of the integument on
the ventral surface and absence of a creeping-sole, the proportionally
much greater development of the thoracic segments, the large, cylin-
drical and undoubtedly functional prothoracic stigmata, the finer
structure of the posterior stigmata, etc., are all characters which sepa-
rate the larva under discussion from the Syrphidae and other aschizous
Cyclorrhapha. Since it in all probability represents a new genus and
may even represent a new family of Diptera I propose to call it Notho-
microdon aztecarum gen. nov. et sp. nov.
“What the larvae do in the carton nests of Azteca trigona must re-
main a mystery till they are encountered by some observer who can
study the behavior of both ants and guests in an artificial nest. The
powers of locomotion of the larvae must be nil or limited merely to
slowly dragging themselves by means of their feeble mouth-hooks.
Perhaps they are actually carried about the nest by the ants. That
they may feed on ant larvae is suggested by thefact that the brood was
much less abundant in the nest in which they occurred than in several
uninfested nests of the same ant which I examined in the avocado
orchard of Mr. John English at Frijoles.”’
Shortly after the appearance of Dr. Wheeler’s paper Dr. Mario
Bezzi suggested, in correspondence with Dr. J. M. Aldrich, the possi-
bility of Nothomicrodon aztecarum Wheeler being the larva of a very
1 Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 10: 240. 1924.
212 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
unique South American dipteron, namely, Masarygus planifrons
Brethes,? habitat, General Urquiza, Buenos Aires, Argentina, which has
cleft antennae, or of one of its relatives. When Dr. Aldrich related
this to the writer it recalled to his mind a Microdon-like syrphid in the
undetermined material from Panama, collected by Mr. August Busck,
which also had cleft antennae. It differs from the male of Masarygus
planifrons, which has the third antennal joint divided intofour branches,
by having only two branches.
Brethes apparently was unaware of the relationship of his species to
the Syrphidae, as he only compared it with the Syrphidae in the most
casual way (“‘Solamente el abdomen es un poco hinchado en la hembra,
mientras que el macho seria, bajo ese concepto, semejante a varios
Syrphidae’’). He compared the species with the Conopidae and the
Oestridae, and on the basis of their differences erected the family
Masarygidae: ‘De todo lo expuesto creo que la neuva familia Masary-
gidae debe colocarse entre los Conopidae y los Oestridae, pues con las
demas familias la relacion es demasiado remota.” His description and
figures of Masarygus planifrons reveal such close similarity to the
Microdontinae that it is necessary to include it in the Microdon group.
Moreover, he related how he found his specimens on a wooden post,
running in and out of the galleries of an ant, Camponotus mus Rog.,
which was inhabitating the post. All species of Microdon, as far as
known, are myrmecophiles.
Dr. Bezzi in a subsequent letter to Dr. Aldrich states that Masary-
gus Brethes may be congeneric with Ceratophya Wiedemann, a genus
established* just 100 years ago, and founded upon material collected
in Brazil. Only female specimens were known to Wiedemann and they
agree essentially with the female of Masarygus planifrons in which the
antennae are normal. Unless the males of the species of Ceratophya
have cleft antennae this genus must be considered as a synonym of
Microdon, as now understood. Dr. Bezzi also gave the reference to
his paper in which he states that Masarygus is probably synonymous
with Ceratophya, essentially as outlined above.‘
Whether Masarygus is generically distinct from Microdon on the
basis of adult characters remains to be determined. The distinctive
feature, i.e., the cleft antennae, as far as the evidence at present shows,
is peculiar only to the male sex. Otherwise Masarygus is quite similar
to a group of small, more or less yellowish, Microdon (Ceratophya ?)
2 Mus. Nac. Buenos Aires 410. 1908.
3 Wiedemann, Analecta Entomologica 14. 1824.
* Societas Entomologica 25: 67. 1910.
aha
may 19, 1925 SHANNON: MYRMECOPHILE FROM PANAMA 213
occurring in the American tropics. The cleft antenna, without the
arista, is unique in the Diptera. A number of species of Tachinidae
have the third antennal joint cleft, but the arista is present. Certain
Tabanidae (no arista occurs in this family) apparently have the cleft
antennae, but this is owing to a projection from the upper basal corner
of the third joint. A genus of Acaylpterae Diptera, Cryptochaetum,
has no arista. The present species is tentatively placed in Microdon
and for the present is designated by a distinctive specific name.
Family SYRPHIDAE
Masarygidae Brethes, Mus. Nac. Buenos Aires 410. 1908.
Genus Microdon Meigen, sensu latus.
Ceratophya Wiedemann, Analecta Entomologica 14. 1824.
Masarygus Brethes, Mus. Nac. Buenos Aires 410. 1908.
Nothomicrodon Wheeler, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 10: 240. 1924.
Microdon megacephalus, new species.
Male—A small golden yellow species with dark mesonotal markings.
Head very large, noticeably broader than high; eyes nearly twice as long as
wide, very slightly approaching above; face very broad, widening upwards
to near top of eyes; ocellar tubercle very prominent, ocelli closely grouped;
the triangle broader than long; first antennal joint slender, about as long as
distance between antennal base and eye margin; second joint very small; third
joint nearly four times as long as first, very broad basally and sheet-like,
with an incision extending nearly to its base, dividing it into two branches,
each branch tapering to a point; front and face golden yellow, a blackish line
extending across ocelli from eye to eye which is clothed with black, short,
coarse pile; a similar dark line looped around antennal base; facial pile very
sparse, golden; mouthparts somewhat reduced; thorax very small, much
smaller in dorsal aspect than frontal aspect of head; with three broad black-
ish stripes; scutellum yellow; thoracic pile very sparse, coarse, reddish yellow;
legs entirely yellow; fore and mid legs slender and with yellow pile; hind legs
more or less swollen throughout; the tibia along the upper surface with
densely matted, long black hairs; abdomen deep golden with sparse, coarse,
golden pile; four-segmented, the fourth nearly as long as first three combined ;
hypopygium remarkably enlarged, globose, with coarse black hairs; wings
hyaline; stigmatical crossvein present; spurious vein nearly obsolete; third
vein simple: apical crossvein nearly straight, slightly directed basally, mak-
ing apex of first posterior cell nearly quadrate. Length 7 mm., wing 5.5 mm.,
third antennal joint 2.75mm., width of head 2.75 mm., width of thorax 2 mm.
Type locality —Old Panama, Panama; January Bie 1911 (A. Busck).
Type.—Cat. no. 27824, U.S. N. M.
214 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
911TH MEETING
The 911th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 10, 1925, with
President FLEMING in the chair and 52 persons present.
The address of the evening was given by the retiring president, D. L.
Hazarp, on Terrestrial magnetism in the Twentieth Century. It has been
published in full in this Journau (15: 111-125. 1925).
912TH MEETING
The 912th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, January 24, 1925, with
President FLEMING in the chair and 50 persons present.
The program consisted of reports of the meeting of the International
Geodetic and Geophysical Union held at Madrid in October, 1924. Profes-
sor H. F. Rep presented the general report and also the report of the Section
of Seismology. These were followed in turn by the report on the Section of
Geodesy by Witu1amM Bowtr, the report on the Section of Meteorology by
H. H. Kimpatt, and the report on the Section of Terrestrial Magnetism pre-
pared by L. A. Baurr, read by W. J. Permrs in the author’s absence.
H. D. Harrapon also contributed some interesting remarks on the Madrid
meeting.
913TH MEETING
The 913th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 7, 1925, with
President FLEMING in the chair and 76 persons present.
Program: H. L. Dryprn: The Flettner rotor ship. The paper was
accompanied by practical demonstrations of the effects of air resistance and
was discussed by Messrs. Breit, HutBurRT, and Hryu.—The Flettner rotor
ship depends for its propulsion on the force exerted by the wind on a rotating
cylinder. The force is similar in its nature to the force that lifts air-planes
in that it is produced by an asymmetry in the object presented to the wind
and in that the component of the force at right angles to the wind is many
times larger than the component in the direction of the wind. Modern
aerodynamical analysis relates this cross-wind component to the ‘‘circulation”
of the fluid taken around the body. This modern point of view was set forth
by the author in its relation to the simpler concept of momentum. [ixperi-
ments were shown illustrating the existence of the large cross-wind compon-
ent in the case of rotating cylinders.
The rotor ship was then described, together with the investigations lead-
ing to its construction. The advantages of the rotor ship over the usual
type of sailing vessel are as follows: The crew required is very small. Less
training is required to operate the rotor ship. The ship is more easily maneu-
verable than a sailing vessel, turning more quickly and without bringing the
vessel to. Sail is automatically shortened in squalls. The vessel is more
easily gotten under way. Very little attention is needed in varying winds.
The disadvantages are as follows: The propulsive force is too small in light
winds. There is some question as to safety in extremely high winds. The
fact that the propulsive force is independent of wind speed above a certain
speed may mean that full advantage can not be taken of strong winds. The
may 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 215
rotor ship makes a strong leeway in a following wind with cylinders turning
or makes little headway if the cylinders are stopped.
The author called attention to the necessity of studies of cost of operation
before a final comparison could be made, and expressed the opinion that
for psychological reasons the invention would not generally be adopted.
(Author’s abstract.)
W. P. Wuire: Some scientific aspects of the game of golf—Most games of
skill are played with balls, and with a very great variety of balls and of bats
or sticks for propelling them. The main principle of most of the active
games, however, shows comparatively little variety. The object in the team-
work games is to keep control of the ball, passing it to your friends until it
can be put across some sort of goal, while in games of the tennis family the
object is to return the ball to your opponent and yet in such a way as to get
the better of him. Another group of less active games starts the ball from
rest: billiards, bowling, croquet, quoits, and golf are in this class. Here the
interest that comes from activity and from outguessing your opponent
are both wanting. Hence in these games other resources for variety are
sought. In tenpin bowling, however, the thrill, the suspense, as the ball goes:
down the alley, and the feeling of power in propelling it and in seeing it hit,
appear to be the only things which recommend the game. It is evident that
these things are sufficient to redeem an extreme monotony. In billiards the
use of more than one ball, with the necessary judging of various angles which
this involves, calls for an intellectual exercise that adds to the interest. The
element of variety from one day to another is absent from this game also,
but appears in golf, owing to changes in the weather and in other conditions,
and is particularly great when different courses are played on. There is also
great variety in the kinds of strokes, some of which have to a superlative
degree the elements of power and thrill, while others call for skill and control
and adaptation to the terrain in different ways.
In hitting the ball into the air from the ground, a beveled or “lofted” club:
is essential and such a club always gives the ball an under or back-spin.
This inevitable accompaniment is a great advantage, since it produces a.
lifting force which overcomes gravity for a while and so increases distance.
The ball, hit with a back-spin, goes nearly horizontally for the first half of its.
flight, so that its path can be calculated by taking account only of the resist-
dv
oot
cient approximation for the present purpose, a couple of integrations gives.
ance oftheair. Taking the law of air resistance — av’, which is a suffi-
5 Sa < logn = or the distance traversed while the ball is falling from one
velocity to another is a function of the ratio of the two velocities and not of
their absolute magnitude. Hence a livelier ball adds as many yards to a short
driver as to a long driver, and is therefore more advantageous for the short
driver. The ball of a powerful driver loses a third of its velocity and there-
fore nearly two-thirds of its energy in the first second after itis hit. The back-
spin lift is proportional to the product of spin and speed. It mainly determines.
at what velocity the ball shall begin to fall. The weak hitter gets less spin
from a given club. Hence his ball does not hold the air so well at the latter
end of the drive. He can estimate this deficiency and get more spin by using
a club with more bevel or loft. It is therefore important that weak drivers
should have abundant loft on their driving clubs. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. L. J. Briaas, TucKER-
MAN, Hazarp, C. A. Briaes, and Croox.
216 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
914TH MEETING
The 914th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, February 21, 1925, with
President FLEMING in the chair and 30 persons present.
Program: O. 8. Apams: New world maps derived from elliptic functions,
(Illustrated).—In 1864 H. A. Scuwanrz of Halle gave a formula for the con~
formal representation of a circle in a regular polygon. In 1877 the first
geographic map of this kind was constructed and published; in 1889 a
second such map was derived in an entirely different manner. By a tarther
manipulation of the general expression of Schwarz seven new maps were
computed and constructed, some for a hemisphere and others for the whole
sphere. In addition to these, two other projections were shown, the second
of which mapped the whole sphere in an ellipse with axes in the ratio of about
two to one. Of these eleven projections which have been constructed for
geographic purposes, no less than ten have been devised by members of the
U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey. A full discussion of the theory together
with tables will soon appear as U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Special Publi-
cation No. 112. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. PAwLING, Breit, Hawxks-
wortH, MArRMeErR, and TucKERMAN.
H. W. Fisx: Magnetic secular change in Latin America (Illustrated). The
paper presented a review of the work done by the Department of Terrestrial
Magnetism within the region under discussion, showing the positions on
charts, and summarizing stations and repeat stations by means of tables.
It was pointed out that for each of the so-called magnetic elements, declina-
tion, inclination, and horizontal intensity, there exists in this area, a center,
or focus of very rapid secular change. Charts were shown upon which were
drawn the lines of equal annual change of each element for the year 1915,
that being the mean year of the survey period. In the immediate vicinity of
the centers, the lines of equal annual change formed closed curves, inclosing
oval areas, while farther away the curvature of the lines was less regular.
While the chart was drawn for the epoch 1915, it was shown that the posi-
tions of these lines of equal annual change are continually shifting, as the rate
of secular change varies from year to year and from place to place. Either
there may be a motion of translation of the whole system of lines in any
direction, or there may be a motion radially away from or toward the centers,
which may move but little if at all. In the first case there will be accelera-
tions of the secular rate of opposite sign on two sides of the center, depending
on the direction of the translations; in the second case the accelerations will
have the same sign on all sides of the center. The latter was found to be the
case for all three elements. There was found to be a rapid increase of the
annual rate up to the year 1914 or 1915 after which there was an even more
rapid decrease at each of the centers, and this change at the centers was
accompanied by changes of the same sign at stations in all accessible direc-
tions from these stations, which became less as the distance from the centers
increased. From this it appears that the positions of the centers change
slowly, if at all, but that the accelerations are due to alterations in the activ-
ity at the center.
These centers of greatest change were situated generally as follows: For
declination near the mouth of the Amazon or in Guiana; for inclination, in
western Colombia and Ecuador; for horizontal intensity, in the Bahamas or
southern Florida. ‘the radial movement of the lines of equal change in hori-
zontal intensity was illustrated by a diagram showing the annual change for
May 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 217
each year from 1905 to 1923, as found from the annual means at the United
States Coast Survey observatories. At Vieques and Cheltenham, east
and north respectively from the center, the accelerations were very similar;
at Tucson on the west but at a greater distance, the acclerations were of the
same sign but smaller, while at Honolulu, the signs were the same but the
magnitude was quite inconsiderable by comparison.
From the discussion of these centers for the period 1905-1923, it is con-
cluded that the accelerations of changes of the secular rate were less near the
lines of no change, than near centers of great change, and that a relatively
small part of the acceleration is related to a change in position of those centers.
(Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. PAwiinG and Breit.
G. Breit: The inductance and resistance of a coil encircling the Earth. It
has been suggested by Swann that one may be able to learn something about
the electric and magnetic properties of the interior of the earth by study-
ing the electromotive force induced in a loop of wire encircling the earth
due to changes in a current maintained in another similar loop. In the
present paper some calculations are made in order to investigate the possi-
bilities of the idea. In view of the fact that it is easier to secure one loop
than two, the electrical constants of a coil arranged equatorially around the
earth are studied for the case of an alternating current passing through the
cou. The coil is supposed to have the form of a single circular turn of wire.
In view of the fact that the Heaviside layer appears to affect seriously the
behavior of magnetic elements, an attempt was made to take it into account
by introducing a conducting spherical shell into the problem, the shell being
supposed to be concentric with the conducting core of the earth. The result
of the calculation is too lengthy to be presented in this abstract. It may be
stated, however, that in special cases definite, perceptible effects are to be
expected and that by proper experimentation one may hope to learn some-
thing about the average properties of the earth to a depth of the order of
100 kilometers. The anticipated difficulties of the experiment lie mainly in
the considerable length of time which is likely to be necessary in order to make
the eddy currents penetrate through a sufficient thickness of the earth’s
crust. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Mr. WENNER.
915TH MEETING
The 915th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening,
March 7, 1925, with President FLemINc in the chair and 34 persons present.
Program: C. L. Mircurenty: West Indian hurricanes, and other tropical
revolving storms of the North Atlantic Ocean (Illustrated).—A preliminary
study of West Indian hurricanes in the Caribbean Sea during the period 1887—
1923 confirmed the opinion of the writer that tropical cyclones do not originate
over the eastern two-thirds, approximately, of the Caribbean Sea. This
investigation proved so informative and interesting that the much more
comprehensive work of plotting, from all available data, including original
vessel reports, the tracks of all tropical cyclones of the North Atlantic Ocean,
including the Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of Mexico, for the entire period for
which daily weather charts of the North Atlantic Ocean are available, 1887 to
1923, inclusive, was begun.
The storms were classified according to their intensity, being divided into
three groups, as follows:
218 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10:
1. Storms of known hurricane intensity.
2. Storms whose intensity was in doubt, because of an insufficient num-
ber of reports. ,
3. Storms not of hurricane intensity.
The total number of storms for the 37 year period was 239. Of these 122,.
or 51 per cent, were placed in group 1; 57, or 24 per cent, in group 2; and 60,.
or 25 per cent, In group 3.
The hurricane season in the region studied begins in June and ends in
November. ‘The tracks for each month were plotted separately, the number
for each of the months being as follows: June, 16; July, 17; August, 39; Sep-
tember, 78; October, 71; and November, 15. In addition, one May and.
and two December storms were charted, but they did not reach hurricane:
intensity.
One of the principal results of the study was definite establishment of the:
fact that there are two well-defined areas where the majority of the tropical.
cyclones of the North Atlantic Ocean develop; one of these areas is the region:
a short distance south and southwest of the Cape Verde Islands where many
cyclones develop during August and the first half of September, and the other
is the western third, approximately, of the Carribbean Sea where the develop-
ment of cyclones is most frequent at the beginning and again near the end of
the hurricane season. It was found that cyclones do not develop over the:
North Atlantic within about 8 degrees of the equator, and that they develop.
farther north as a rule only when the belt of doldrums, or area of light variable
winds between the northeast trades of the northern hemisphere and the south-
east trades of the southern hemisphere, shifts far enough to permit deflective
force of the earth’s rotation to establish a circulation around a low pressure:
area.
Another important conclusion reached was that tropical cyclones of the
North Atlantic Ocean seek to recurve to the north and northeast at the first.
favorable opportunity, irrespective of the longitude of the storm center, or
the time of the year. The reason that so many cyclones move far to the west-
ward before recurving is due to the semi-permanent area of high pressure that.
extends from the region of the Azores west-southwestward to the coast of
the South Atlantic States of the United States, and effectively prevents the
cyclones from moving northward, except in the infrequent instances when this.
area of high pressure breaks down. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Hryt and Pawtinc.
R.L.Sanrorp: The detection of flaws by magnetic analysis (Illustrated).—The
interpretation of the results of magnetic tests for the detection of flaws has been.
practically impossible due to the influence of internal stress on the magnetic
properties. By making two or more tests at properly chosen values of mag-
netizing force, the disturbing effect of variations of internal stress can be
eliminated. By the use of this method, the greatest obstacle in the way of
satisfactory interpretation of results is overcome and it is possible in the
light of the results here reported, that the method may be of practical value
for the detection of flaws.
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. WHITE, HAWKESWORTH,.
TuckEeRMAN, L. H. Apams, and SosMan.
916TH MEETING
The 916th meeting was a joint meeting with the scientific staff of the
Bureau of Standards and was held at the Bureau of Standards on Wednesday,
March 11, 1925.
a
May 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 219
The meeting was called to order by Dr. G. K. Burazss, Director of the
Bureau of Standards, at 3:30 p.m., with several hundred persons in
attendance.
Professor P. DresByr of Zurich addressed the meeting on The Quantum
Theory and its bearing on the classical laws of the Conservation of Energy and
Momentum.—When X-rays fall upon a single electron as in an ionized gas,
two things occur: the electron is set in motion forward, and secondary X-rays
are scattered in all directions, forward and backward, the intensity of the
forward rays being the greater. This may be accounted for by supposing
the quantum of energy incident upon the electron to be divided into a smaller
quantum which is radiated as scattered X-rays, and energy of motion of the
electron.
This explanation fails to account for the phenomena of interference. To
include this we may suppose that the electron is radiating energy in all direc-
tions before being hit by the quantum, and that the condition afterward is
the resultant of two conditions: the radiation and the secondary X-rays
with motion of the electron. In this case we have to assume that the laws of
the conservation of energy and of momentum do not hold instant by instant,
but only are valid when averaged over a period of time. (Abstract.)
917TH MEETING
The 917th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club on Saturday evening,
March 21, 1925, with President FLemrNc in the chair and 25 persons present.
Program: H. A. Marmer: Mean sea level (Illustrated). For many geo-
physical purposes, some of the difficulties inherent in geodetic sea level may
be overcome by defining geographic mean sea level at any point as the average
level of the sea at that point or as the plane about which the tide oscillates.
This makes the determination of mean sea level a problem in the field of tides,
and from the results of tidal observations it is found that sea level varies
from day to day, from month to month and from year to year.
The variation in sea level from day to day is conditioned by the weather,
but that from month to month possesses a large element of periodicity, which
is characteristic for a considerable area. From year to year the variation in
sea level was found to be much the same over large areas. Notwithstanding
occasional differences, it appears that if sea level in any one year is high or
low at one point on the Atlantic coast of the United States, it is high or low
all along the coast. And for the Pacific coast this was also found to be the
case.
The fact that the variation in sea level is much the same over considerable
areas makes it possible to determine mean sea level at any point with a
considerable degree of precision even from short series of observations, if at
some point not far distant a tidal station has been in operation for a number
of years. (Author’s abstract.)
The paper is to appear in full in the Annals of the Association of American
Geographers.
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. SosMAN, PAWLING,
Houmpureys, Lampert, Wricut, Hopason, and Morey.
H. E. Merwin and G. W. Morey: Optical effects of iron in certain glasses
(Illustrated). Ferric glasses with different amounts of iron were made by
adding Fe,O; to a glass containing 15 per cent Na.O, 10 per cent CaQ0,
and 75 per cent SiO». These were ground and oxidized at 600° in a current
of oxygen, then heated at about 1000° to make them compact. In an 80
220 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
per cent PbO, 20510, glass, 5 per cent FeO; dissolved readily at about 800°.
Ferrous glasses were prepared by heating to about 14000° in double graphite
crucibles mixtures of ferrous oxalate and the lime-soda glass just mentioned.
Timing to prevent formation of metallic iron, and also powdering and remelt-
ing to make homogeneous, were necessary.
The much greater effects of the ferric oxide on dispersion and refraction
were shown by plotting optical measurements against compositions, as found
by analysis.
Ferrous oxide is much the stronger coloring agent. It produces a green-
ish-blue color, and when ten per cent is present in the lime-soda glass, massed
fragments 2 mm. in diameter appear black. Corresponding ferric glass is a
slightly dull yellow. In the lead glass, five per cent Fe,.O; makes an appar-
ently black glass which in 0.5 mm. thickness is deep orange-red. (Authors’
abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Sosman and WRIGHT.
Dr. W. J. HumpHreys gave an informal talk on Tornadoes which was dis-
cussed by Messrs. Rupr, PAWLING, WRIGHT, SOSMAN, LAMBERT, Huck, and
TUCKERMAN.
H. A. Marner, Recording Secretary.
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY
673D MEETING
The 673d meeting of the Biological Society was held at the Cosmos Club
January 17, 1925, with President RoHweERr in the chair and 121 persons pres-
ent. ‘Lhe President read a list of committees for 1925, as follows: Committee
on Communications: W. R. Maxon, Chairman, H. C. OBrRHOLSER, C. E.
CHAMBLISS; Committee on Publications: C. W. RicHmMonp, Chairman, J. H.
Ritey, T. E. Snyper, F. C. Lincoin, G. 8S. Miuuer, Jr.; Committee on Zoolo-
gical Nomenclature: G. S. Miuurr, Jr., Chairman, P. Barrscu, A.C. BAKER,
EK. A. Cuapry, H. C. OBrRHOLSER; Trustees of Permanent Funds of Society:
T. S. Paumer (2 yrs.), H. C. OBERHOLSER (1 year), A. 8. Hircucock (3
years). The following members were elected: Witt1am M. Mann (life
member) and CarLron P. Ropers.
T.S. Paumer described the feeding of quail in the District of Columbia by
police using food supplied by the Audubon Society. Their reports, which
covered only a few days and do not include the whole of the District, enumer-
ated about 79 covies, amounting to some 918 birds. A similar census made
about six years ago gave the number of birds as 1200, and one made two
years later, 1400.
H. C. Osrruoser stated that a dead Baltimore oriole had been picked
up in Anacostia about January 5. He also mentioned the increase in recent
years of the canvasback duck.
F. C. Lincotn reported the recovery in Newfoundland of a kittiwake
banded in England. This is the first bird banded in Europe to be recovered
in America north of Mexico. The man who collected the bird reported that
it was good eating.
Program: A. B. Howriu: Mice that live in trees (Ilustrated).—The red
tree mouse (Phenacomys longicaudus), with a discontinuous distribution
throughout the humid coast forests of California and Oregon, is a member
of a genus related to the common meadow mouse. It, however, is remark-
able for the fact that it seems to be more truly arboreal than any other mam-
mal of the United States save the flying squirrel. Its food consists of the
May 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 221
fleshy portion of the needles of the fir trees in which it lives. The midribs
of these needles are not consumed, and these constitute the material with
which the arboreal nests are constructed.
The comparatively large nests of the females are very much more numer-
ous than the smaller ones of males, and this, coupled with the fact that all
of the five specimens thus far secured upon the ground have been males, sug-
gests the very unusual possibility that this sex spends a considerable portion
of the time amid terrestrial surroundings while the females do not.
The young are remarkable for the slow rate of their development, the eyes
not opening until the nineteenth day. The large, crested jays of the region
have acquired the habit of tearing the nests to pieces in search of young mice.
Data secured indicate that these mice, so specialized in habits, have few
enemies with which to contend, and that their ecologic position is one in
which they experience very little competition. (Awthor’s abstract.)
R. F. Griaes: Scientific results of the Katmat Expeditions (Illustrated). —
The speaker described the expeditions sent by the National Georgraphic
Society between 1913 and 1919, in the course of which the ‘‘Valley of Ten
Thousand Smokes’ was discovered. The vegetation of the region was
discussed with particular reference to its recovery after the volcanic eruption.
The numerous colored slides shown, in connection with moving pictures
taken in the Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes, gave a very clear idea of this
remarkable region.
SPECIAL MEETING
A special meeting of the Biological Society was held in the National
Museum January 24, 1925, with Vice-President OBERHOLSER in the chair
and 85 persons present. The speaker of the evening was Frits JOHANSEN,
who described the natural history, geology, and geography of the region on
the east shore of Hudson Bay as observed by himself on a trip made as far
north as Richmond Gulf in 1920 under the auspices of the Department of
Marine and Fisheries of Canada. The talk was illustrated by lantern slides,
mainly from photographs taken by the speaker. The studies of this expedi-
tion showed that the Arctic marine fauna extends practically to the southern
ead ot James Bay, in spite of the large amount of fresh water emptying into
the Bay.
674TH MEETING
The 674th meeting was a joint meeting with the Audubon Society held in
the National Museum January 31, 1925, with T. S. Paumer, President of
the Audubon Society, in the chair. The program consisted of the regular
annual meeting of the Audubon Society, and a paper by Dr. A. A. ALLEN,
of Cornell University on Our disappearing birds.
675TH MEETING
The 675th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club, Feburary 14, 1925,
with Vice President OBERHOLSER in the chair and 63 persons present. New
member elected: Mrs. T. E. SnyprErR.
_ VERNON Batey reported the observation of a duck hawk feeding on star-
lings on Pennsylvania Avenue.
A. Wetmore reported the first purple grackle seen at the Zoological Park
on February 9. He also mentioned hearing a starling give the song of a
meadowlark.
E. A. GoLpMAN reported the recent observation of a female Chinese pheas-
222 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
ant near the monastery at Brookland. A. WrrTmorg, discussing the local
history of the Chinese pheasant, stated that several had been released in
Maryland by E. Ler LeComptr, State Game Warden. Mr. Ernest Smoot
several years ago turned out thirty-five birds in Klingle Valley.
8. F. Buaxe reported the observation of a bat flying about in Poli’s Theater
on February 10.
Program: Epcar Brown: The longevity of buried seeds (Illustrated).—
Seeds of certain legumes (Hovea linearis and Goodia latifolia) collected in
Australia by Robert Brown, and germinated after 105 years, furnish the
longest authentic case of longevity of seeds. Prof. W. J. Brau buried seeds
in the earth 40 years ago, to be taken out at intervals and grown. At the end
of this time, half of the species still germinated. Dr. J. W. T. Duvet for-
merly of the Seed Laboratory, buried seeds of 107 species of many different
families in 1902. The seeds were buried at depths of 6 to 8 inches, 18 inches,
and 3 feet. At the end of 20 years, 51 of the species germinated. In gen-
eral, germination was better in the seeds buried at the greater depths. Of
the total 107 species 36 failed to grow after 1 year.
Ernest P. WALKER: Commercial development of blue fox farming in Alaska
(Illustrated) —The blue fox, a color phase of the Arctic fox, is cireumpolar
in range in the wild state, and is slightly smaller than the red fox. It ranges
nearly as far south on the Alaska coast as the Alaska Peninsula and occurs on
the Priblof and other large islands of Behring Sea. In 1858 the Russians,
who then had jurisdiction over Alaska, took steps to protect the blues on the
Priblofs and reduce the whites. In 1885 the Semidi Propagating Company
took blues from the Priblofs and stocked North Semidi Island off the Alaska
Peninsula and from then till 1899 a number of islands were stocked as far
east as Prince William Sound. About 1901 and for a few years following
about ten islands were stocked in southeastern Alaska but only one continued
in business. The entire industry declined until about 1916 and ’17, when it
began to revive.
At present practically all suitable islands along the Alaska coast are
occupied for blue fox farming, and raising blue foxes in pens has been success-
fully undertaken. The animals on the islands are fed and cared for, but run
at large. The young are born from late April to early June. Litters of as
many as fifteen have been recorded but the more common ones run from five
to nine.
Fish is the basis of the feed. It is fed fresh, dried, smoked and cooked, and
mushes of cereals are often fed in conjunction with it. Losses from diseases
and other causes have not been serious, and territorial legislation to check
poaching has been enacted. Breeding stock has been selling for about $300
per pair. When the animals are killed for skins, they are taken in late
November and December in small houses called trap-feed houses, in which
the animals are ordinarily fed and where a number can be taken at once.
With the development of successful penraising the industry can expand to
a large area of the United States and Canada where the climate is suitable.
(Author’s abstract.)
H. L. Suanvz: Collecting experiences in East Africa (Ilustrated)—The
speaker described his experiences in the ‘‘addo” bush in Cape Province, on
the Kafue River in northern Rhodesia, in Urundi, on Lake Tanganyika, and
in the waterhole country north and east of Mt. Kenya. The first camp was
in a dense thorn thicket. In such places Portulacaria afra the “speckbroom”
or “elephant-food,” is one of the most important forage plants, eaten by
wild elephants, domestic animals, and ostriches. On the Kafue in the open
may 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 223
forest and grassland were many wild fruit trees, among them Garcinia livings-
tonet, Diopyros senegalensis, Ximenia americana, and Canthium lanciflorum,
and a fine display of terrestrial orchids of the genus Lissochilus. The larger
game animals had deserted this region at the time of-account of dry weather.
Brachylaena hutchinsti, a composite, is one of the most important timber
trees in British East Africa, and reaches a large size.
The distribution of game in Africa is very unequal. At times one may
travel hundreds of miles without seeing any game animals; in other places
hundreds of large game animals may be visible at one time.
676TH MEETING
The 676th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club February 28, 1925, with
President RoHwer in the chair and 129 persons present. New members
elected: Cart J. Drekr, A. BRucr Horsratu, Morris A. STEWART.
O. J. Murte: The white sheep of the Alaska Range (Ilustrated).—The white
sheep, Qvzs dalli, is found principally on the north slope of the Alaska Range.
The south side is covered too deeply with snow for the sheep to find food in
winter. On the north side the strong winds sweep the snow off exposed places
and make the feed more accessible. The sheep range above timber, some-
times on gentle slopes, sometimes on rocky heights. They often flee for refuge
into high rock masses, cliffs, and pinnacles. Among the companions of the
sheep inhabiting the high country may be mentioned the caribou, grizzly,
marmot, ground squirrel, and three species of ptarmigan. The vegetation is
characterized by stunted forms of lowland plants. The sheep feed extensively
on grass. Among other plants eaten may be mentioned Dryas octopetala.
The sheep are found in greatest abundance in the Mt. McKinley region,
where they are now protected. The paper was illustrated by lantern slides
showing the sheep in their native haunts. (Author’s abstract.)
Harry V. Haruan: Plant exploration in Abyssinia (Illustrated) —The
northwest quarter of Abyssinia is a high plateau usually from 6,000 to 11,000
feet in elevation. It is populated by Amharas. On the east and south of
this plateau there is a plain, usually about 5,000 feet high near the escarp-
ment, and sloping gradually to the sea. The higher parts of this plain are
occupied by Galla tribes.
The Gallas raise wheat, barley, sorghums, teff, flax, many varieties of peas
and beans, and a number of garden vegetables. The Amharas grew small
grains, barley, wheat, emmer, and teff. Broad beans and peas are produced
in limited quantities. The cultivation of the highlands is most intense at
the higher elevations. The percentage of tilled land and the density of popu-
lation decreases with altitude. The highest ridges are given over to the
cultivation of barley. Cultivation of wheat and emmer commences at slightly
lower elevations. Teff is grown in the wheat belt and in the sorghum belt.
Sorghums are cultivated at lower elevations than wheat. (Author’s abstract.)
677TH MEETING
The 677th meeting was held at the Cosmos Club March 14, 1925, with
President Rouwerr in the chair and 75 persons present. New members
elected: P.S. RipspaLte, R. W. Westwoop.
C, W. Stites gave a report of his continued experiments on the polution of
ground water. The chemical solution used has now been recovered at a
distance of 414 feet from the well where introduced; the bacterial solution at
232 feet. As in the previous experiments, the bacteria remain at the top of
the water level.
224 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
L. O. Howarp referred to the newspaper reports of experiments made with
mosquitoes in France. The report states that Culex mosquitos, transferred
from a place where they bit only birds to Paris, interbred there with the man-
biting race, and the offspring lost the power of biting. It is questionable
whether this will be true of subsequent generations.
Program: R. C. SHannon: Parasitic flies in man and animals (Illustrated).
—A certain group of Muscoid flies, the Oestridae or bot flies, are obligate
parasites in mammals. However, many of the species of Muscoid flies which
do not belong to the oestridae have similar habits and these serve to show the
transition from forms which are usually saprophytic but may occasionally be
myiasidic in habit to those forms which are true myiasids or bot flies and have
specific vertebrate hosts. The Muscoid group, which is a very large one, is
divisible into two subgroups, one of which lacks hypopleural bristles and
tends to be vegetarian in diet, while the other group, which possesses hypo-
pleural bristles, tends to feed on flesh. The more highly specialized of these
are the bot flies and parasites of other insects. Specimens of many of the
species mentioned were placed on exhibition. (Author’s abstract.)
James Sitver: The European hare in North America: is it a menace?
(Illustrated).—The European hare, Lepus europaeus, is now firmly established
in North America. It was introduced as a game animal for use in coursing.
There have been five or more introductions originating from Hungary, Ger-
many, and England. ‘The first introduction was in 1888, the hares being
liberated at Jobstown, N. J. Others were at Millbrook, N. Y., from 1893
to 1911 and at Brantford, Ont., in 1913. These three have proved most suc-
cessful from the standpoint of subsequent abundance and spread.
The hares have attained a maximum abundance in Dutchess and adjoin-
ing counties, New York. In Dutchess County a recorded drain of over 3,000
hares per year for six years failed to appreciably reduce their numbers. In
New Jersey the increase has been very slow except in a few favorable locali-
ties, while in Ontario the animals widened their range to some 4,500 square
miles in ten years.
The injury chargeable to these hares is confined largely to young fruit and
shade trees, ornamental shrubs and small fruits and then only during periods
of heavy and persistent snow fall. Very severe injury in the past has been
due to a lack of information as to how to protect the trees from possible depre-
dations. This is being corrected by the local orchardists with the assistance
of economic mammalogists so that the menace of the hare is being greatly
lessened without reducing the numbers of this otherwise valuable game ani-
mal. (Author’s abstract.)
W. M. Mann: A collecting trip in Sinai and Palestine (Illustrated) .—
The speaker gave an account of a trip made in 1914, in company with Dr.
Joun C. Puruuies, along the Mosaic trail from Egypt to Jerusalem. Col-
lections were made en route at stops at the Wady Feran, Akaba, Petra, and
the Dead Sea.
From Egypt to Akaba the journey was made by camel caravan, afterwards
by mule train. A number of new species were collected, and large collections
made of others, including the Syrian ibex, Butler’s owl, a new subspecies of
rosy finch, the Moabitic sparrow, and anumber of ants. (Author’s abstract.)
S. F. Buaxe, Recording Secretary.
MAY 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY 225
THE ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
585TH MEETING
The 585th meeting was held November 18, 1924, in the National Museum.
Program: Dr. Ropert 8. Woopworts, chairman of the Division of Anthro-
pology and Psychology of the National Research Council: The relations of
Psychology and Anthropology.
Dr. Woodworth stated that though anthropology is closely affiliated with
geology, anatomy, history, and sociology, and though psychology is closely
affiliated with sociology, physiology, and the science of education, it is note-
worthy that when an academy or similar general scientific body organizes
itself into divisions. anthropology and psychology are usually brought together
into a single division. The two sciences seem to gravitate together at the
border of the natural science field closest to the contiguous territory of the
social sciences.
There is little duplication of effort between anthropology and psychology,
though they lie so close to one another. Anthropology is distinctly a study
of the human species, whereas psychology is rather a study of certain processes
basically common to man and animals, and often best studied in animals.
Psychology, though undoubtedly interested in problems of race and culture,
does not itself investigate these questions. When the psychologist speaks of
race he is apt to be uncritical, meaning nothing more than a group of common
parentage. Psychologists of late have been interested in attempting to mea-
~ sure the intelligence of different groups, but they have not thought of intelli-
gence as a race characteristic in the anthropological sense. From their angle,
for example, there is no a priori reason to expect nationalities within a single
great race to be more alike in intelligence than nationalities selected from
different races.
The relation between the two sciences is peculiar in this respect—that each
is a basal science for the other. Thus the anthropometric and statistical
technique of anthropology is essential in the psychological work of testing,
while on the other hand, the psychological technique of testing is a desidera-
tum of the anthropologist in his study of races. Or again, psychology is
basal to anthropology in the interpretation of many cultural phenomena,
while on the other hand the scientific knowledge of the cultural background is
necessary for the psychologist in tracing the mental development of the
individual.
589TH MEETING
The 589th meeting was held March 17, 1925, at the National Museum.
Program: Dr. M. J. Herssxovirz, of Howard University: Some aspects of
of the anthropology of the American negro. Up to the present, the study of
racial crossing has yielded few results, due largely to the difficulty of obtaining
authentic material. The present study concerns itself with negro-white
crossing, data on which have been gathered by the speaker during thepast
two years. These consist mainly in a large series of measurements of negro
children at Public School 89 and at the Colored Orphanage, both of New
York City, and of male students at Howard University.
The chief problem in the study of mixed groups is not the determination
of the “racial” qualities which they may have, but rather the extent to
which such groups are homogeneous or heterogeneous; if homogeneous, how
may the group be described; if heterogeneous, what are the forces which are
keeping the group so, and, how may it be described? Certain results of the
226 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 10
data gathered on these American negroes force one to the hypothesis that the
American negro is establishing a rather distinet type, which is relatively
homogeneous when compared with the general population. This may be
investigated in certain ways; thus, a study of the growth-curve of the negro
boys in New York City showed that there was a distinct curve for the negro
population,: when compared with the curve for the general white population.
Even though living on the poverty line, the colored boys showed an accelera-
tion of some five pounds in weight and four to six centimeters in height, age
for age, when compared with the curve for the general white population.
When the curve is compared with that for the children in the Orphanage, it
is found that the effect of environment is such that the Orphanage children,
though living in much better surroundings, are retarded when compared
with the public school children; and yet the stock is essentially the same for
the two series. This follows Boas’ findings? so closely that it implies a
“racial” growth curve.
The study of heterogeneity or homogeneity, however, is best approached
througb the computation of the variability of the averages of the children in
families in a given population, the assumption being that in an inbred popula-
tion, since any single family would represent the entire population, such
variability would be relatively low, while in a mixed one, no one family would
be representative. There can be computed both the variability between
family lines, and within them, and we find, when we take fraternities of the
New York negro population, which are probably a good sample of the
country’s population as a whole, that the variability of the family lines is -
relatively low, while that within the families is relatively high. This leads
to the assumption that there has been a large amount of crossing by this
population, but that this has decreased largely in amount, and that for the
past few generations there has been consolidation of type through breeding
within the group.
This hypothesis is so different from that which is generally held to be the
case that the element of social selection, which makes it possible, must be
sought. It has been asserted that the element of color among the negroes is
an important social selective medium.‘ Lightness is at a premium, and
therefore the dark man seeks a lighter-colored wife, while the light-colored
woman prefers the darker man. The very light men and the very dark
women are thus sloughed off from the group, resulting in a concentration
somewhere within the extremes. To test this at Howard, I questioned the
men whom | measured concerning the relative color of their parents. The
replies showed that in over 60 per cent of the total number of cases (or in
75 per cent of the number giving their parents as “‘about the same color” be
disregarded) the mothers were lighter than the fathers. Thus we havehere
the social selective element necessary to account for our findings. (Author’s
abstract.)
Joun M. Cooper, Secretary.
1M. J. Herskovits, Some observations on the growth of colored boys. Amer. Journ.
Phys. Anthro. 7: 439-446.
2 Franz Boas, The growth of children as influenced by environmental and hereditary
conditions, School and Society, pp. 305-308.
3M. J. Herskovits, On the Negro-White population of New York City; the use of the
variability of family strains as an index of heterogeneity or homogeneity. (To be published
in the Proceedings of the 21st Congress of Americanists, part 1, The Hague, August,
1924.)
ee
_ ANNOUNCEMENTS OF MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
4 PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE JOURNAL
_ Thursday, April 16. The ACADEMY. Program: A symposium on forest science.
_ W.B. Greener. E.N. Monns: Timber growing and protection from fire. H. S.
Betts: Timber utilization and by-products. H. Metcaur: Forest diseases and their
control. F.C. CraiaHEeanb: Forest insects, pests and their control.
Thursday, May 7. The Entomological Society. Program: L. O. Howarp: Notes on
Albert Koeblele. E.R. Sasscer: Inspection by the Federal Horticultural Board.
CONTENTS —
ORIGINAL Parzns :
Spectroscopy.—Quartet-system multiplets in the are spectrum of vii
Muaaunrs and B. E. MOORD... 22.0.2... ice cenecnsec scene eesaeee
Entomology.—An _ extraordinary gnyrmpeophile from Panama.
SHANNON, 120520 uh ge eo io aise ainraceials Slams cee ete ee eae
PRocEEDINGS ‘ ve
The Philosophical Society.. Paadpeesnt he ashtray 5 15°07
The Biological Bociety....-./...ssceecseece eserves eeeeerer seen erans
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vernon L. Ketuoae, National Research ‘Counetiee
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. SiusBEx, Bureau of § ES
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
June 4, 1925 : No. 11
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
iS BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Krnuip D. F, Hewett S. J. MaucHuy
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A. RonwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLpMAN G. W. Srosp
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY . ‘ GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Grices J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. Wick ERs
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THB
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr, Roya anp GutLrorp AvEs,
Baitimorn, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
Bit
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
resent a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it publ
ti) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Acade
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Wasl
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington.
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, exce
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to ca
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. at
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. T
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. Refe
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered,
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author. - : Whee
Proof —In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to author
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed, i
Authors’ Reprints —Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of pric
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ae
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprint
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. ,
The rate of Subscription per volume is
Semi-monthly- mumbersss oi. Oa ais toes ob aes ee matlneiee :
Monthly mumbersii.c5 oo cae etcce eds shat eo cae wine cab ele ee hceaae ten eee an ape
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” anc
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. ©
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. en
Exchanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other publications. __
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is mad
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special
are given to members of scientific societies afiliated with the Academy
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Von..15 JUNE 4, 1925 No. 11
RADIOTELEGRAPHY.—Long distance radio receiving measure-
ments in 1924. L. W. Austin. Laboratory for Special Radio
Transmission Research.
Two stations, Monte Grande (LPZ), Argentina, and Cayey (NAU),
Porto Rico, have been added during the year to the number of those
regularly measured in Washington. Monte Grande is interesting;
first, because it is 2,000 km. farther away than the European stations,
and second, because the waves travel in a south-north direction from
the southern to the northern hemisphere; thus producing entirely
different seasonal conditions from those encountered in the trans-
mission from Europe to America. The station gives nearly the same
morning intensity as Nauen, Germany, and the ratio of average
observed to calculated values is about three to one. Unfortunately
Monte Grande does not send in the afternoon.
Cayey has been observed partly because its frequency, approxi-
mately 33.8 ke. (8,870 m.), is considerably higher than the other sta-
tions and partly on account of its nearly south-north direction of trans-
Mission which at certain seasons lies nearly parallel to the sunset
shadow wall. It was thought that this might cause eccentricities in
reception at about sunset, but no peculiarities have been observed on
the rather limited number of occasions when transmission took place
at that time.
The mean monthly values of the field intensities of the signals from
the various stations, and of the corresponding atmospheric disturb-
ances, are shown in the tables and curves.
Table 1 gives the approximate data concerning the transmitting
stations, as far as known.
1 Published by permission of the Director of the Bureau of Standards of the U. 8.
Department of Commerce.
2 Conducted jointly by the Bureau of Standards and the American Section of the
International Union for Scientific Radio Telegraphy.
227
228 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
Tables 2 and 3 give the monthly averages of the received field
intensities and of the corresponding atmospheric disturbances in
microvolts per meter. It is to be remembered that the signals received
in Washington at 10 a.m. from Europe have an all daylight path
TABLE 1.—ApprroxiMATE TRANSMISSION Data
FREQUENCY] ogra | cuanent | Helga” | DISTANCE
oN I h
ike: m. amp. mM. km.
NavemME OAM Ae eet wee 23.4 | 12,800 | 390 145 | 6,650
Bolinnemk Eee ere een tee 22.9 | 13,100 | 420 51 | 3,920
Bl Cayey NAV. te eee ae eee 33.8 | 8,870 | 150 120 | 2,490
Monte Grande LPZ..s..¢-..00-2-+ + 23.6 | 12,700 | 610 150 | 8,300
intarettaive weet. ae ete 15.9 | 18,900 | 475 130 | 6,160
ie (on gs ke ee Vn pe 20.8 | 14,400 | 380 180 | 6,200
S$ * A 7 ?
Moco { WRU eee aes eee 15.0 | 20,000 | 475 180 | 6,200
Malabaryr ox 2s, ¢.cs emanenren amr tt 19.0 | 15,800 | 500 320 | 14,700
Cavie NEOs as ce een 19.3 | 15,500 | 180 120 | 11,800
1 During the year Nauen has used at times an antenna with h. = 175m. and a current
varying between 300 and 480 amperes for its 23.4 ke. frequency.
TABLE 2.—AvVERAGE SIGNAL AND ATMOSPHERIC DISTURBANCE INTENSITIES IN 1924
FoR LAFAYETTE (LY), Sre. Assiss (UFU), anp Ext Carry (NAU) IN
MicrovoLts PER METER
A.M. P.M. A.M, P.M.
1924
LY | UFU | Dist. | Ly | UFU | Dist. | NAU | Dist. | NAU | Dist.
JANUETY Lene e wee se 130.0} 63.5 21.2] 160.0} 89.6 26.5) — — — _
Hebruaryneene cit 153.0) 64.2 389.3) 125.7) 71.5 70.6, — = _— _—
March act sse csi 117.5) 50.3 30.2] 88.3] 46.7 70.4) — = = _
Aprile nc.ctxs seers 136.7) 50.9 65.8] 88.2) 34.7 | 166.5) 73.2] 17.7 | 59.3 47.3
May sem canstacerercier 107.5} 52.2 97.3) 75.8) 34.7 | 180.0] 79.8] 23.3 | 59.9 64.4
JUNE Seer okie cake 120.0} 45.8 | 105.4) 77.3] 36.6 | 605.0) 57.3] 35.4 | 48:5-| 170.0
JUL Ye astrcess seein 113.6] 47.1 | 56.0) 61.8] 22.5 | 267.0} 112.5] 30.0 | 66.5 | 187.0
AUGUStenw eects esi) nosso)! 40.3 87.0] 52.5) 17.7 | 294.0) 57.0] 42.0 | 73.2 | 157.0
September......... 119.7| 55.3 50.0! 88.6) 35.3 | 151.0} 100.2] 19.0 | 92.5 88.0
Octobersesscesee ss 113.7) 54.4 46.0) 187.4] 57.0 | 110.0} 87.0] 10.0 | 67.6 Buh a(0)
November......... 87.8] 37.4 | 38.3] 180.9) 66.3 | 66.0] 62.8] 10.8 | 65.1 | 14.0
December.......... 87.6] 50.3 | 30.2] 151.5) 64.2 | 35.9} 56.1) 7.1 | 62.1 7.8
Average.......... 115.0} 50.9 | 55.5) 107.3) 48.0 | 170.2) 76.2) 21.7 | 65.5 | 79.6
although during the short days of winter they are probably disturbed
by being transmitted too close to the European sunset time. The
3 P.M. signals are sent during the evening hours and during the winter
considerable parts of their paths lie in darkness.
Fig. 1 shows the monthly averages of the 10 a.m. signals from Bor-
JUNE 4, 1925 AUSTIN: RADIO RECEIVING MEASUREMENTS 229
TABLE 3.—AveracE SigNaL anp ArmospHERIC DistuRBANCE INTENSITIES IN 1924
For Ste. AssisE (UFT), Botrnas (KET), NavEen (POZ), anp Monts
‘ GranbD= (LPZ) 1n Microvoitts per METER
A.M. P.M.
1924 Fi
UFT | KET | POZ | LPZ | Dist. | UFT | KET | Poz | LPz | Dist.
January............ SESH en eLG Sonal livevalpsQeaul =) al 24e Qn = 22.1
Rebruany. sect) 4128) || 8054.) 19°3)|| — | 3228 | 8724-69.6| 21.8), — 61.3
Wares ter. cresereic.e -1- 40.7 | 59.9 | 35.7 | 40.1 | 24.0 | 82.5 | 54.4 | 37.0 | — 58.9
Alain lt Capesegaeen oes 39.6 | 56.3 | 28.5 | 33.6 | 53.3 | 21.2 | 47.4] 17.8] — | 136.0
WIEN enc edn ROMEO GOOE 34.3 | 57.4 | 22.5 | 27.2 | 77.3 | 21.4 | 40.6 | 13.1 158.0
JUNE. 2 Saseeesis Scie | 37.0 | 55.4 | 27.1 | 26.1 | 90.4 | 21.5 | 35.0 | 18.9 531.0
UY syste nestles 43.1 | 58.5 | 30.3 | 33.3 | 50.0 | 22.6 | 26.1 | 15.1 238.0
PA SUS tte tere ace 40.4 | 24.5 | 34.9 | 41.3 | 78.0 | 21.8 | 36.3 | 15.7 306.0
September......... 59.5 | 58.9 | 49.6 | 39.3 | 54.0 | 36.5 | 50.8 | 31.2 148.0
October. 222.2... 49.9 | 62.7 | 31.2 | 42.3 | 31.0 | 44.0 | 59.8 | 32.0 81.0
Novem berssacrn 24.3 | 49.3 | 14.5 | 38.4 | 26.0 | 39.0 | 61.2 | 43.8 56.0
Pecembersse--y | 82.7 ) 54.2 | 21.7 | 46.7 | 28.5 | 41.4 | 54.1 | 39.4 25.9
ANGIRYEO.spoote a: | 40.0 | 55.6 | 27.6 | 36.8 | 46.5 | 31.5 | 48.6 | 25.8 156.0
deaux for the years 1922, 1923, and 1924. Fig. 2 gives similar 10 a.m.
curves for Nauen. Fig. 3 shows the morning signals for El Cayey and
MICROVOLTS PER METER
MONTHS
Fig. 1.—Lafayette (LY) average signal, 10 A.M., 1922, 1923, and 1924
Monte Grande. Fig. 4 shows the variations in the monthly disturb-
ance averages at 3 P.M. for three frequencies. The marked difference
230 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
between the disturbances at 24.0 ke. and 33.3 ke. is noticeable. In
Fig. 5 the 3 p.m. disturbances for a frequency of 24.0 ke. (12,500 m.)
are plotted for the years 1922, 1923, and 1924. Fig 6 gives similar
curves for a frequency of 15.0 ke. (20,000 m.) for the same years.
These curves for 1922, 1923 and 1924 are given merely as informa-
tion. It is too early to attempt to draw any definite conclusions from
their variations.
Field intensity measurements were made during August and Sep-
SSHeitaeaasretseasees sfscessczeeses
MICROVOLTS PER METER
MONTHS
Fig. 2.—Nauen (POZ) average signal, 10 a.m., 1922, 1923, and 1924
tember at San Diego, California, on the high-power arc stations,
Cavite, P.I., and Malabar, Java. The distance from Cavite to San
Diego is approximately 11,800 km. (6,400 nautical miles) with a differ-
ence in time of eight hours, while the distance from Malabar is 14,700
km. (8,000 miles) with a difference in time of nine hours. This is
about the greatest distance which can be attained for all daylight and
approximately all water communication with the present high-power
stations of the world. Even in this case there are only about two hours
during the day available for observations without too close approach
to sunset or sunrise at one station or the other. The observations
JUNE 4, 1925 AUSTIN: RADIO RECEIVING MEASUREMENTS 231
were taken with the telephone comparator and the apparatus cali-
brated with a radio-frequency generator and attenuation box as in
the Western Electric method of measuring signals.
The final results were as follows:
CAVITE | MALABAR
@bserved’averages...eisoe den cease ec en emnaedeeeeae 2.04 wv /m 4.02 pv /m
Calevlated (Austin-Cohen formula).................-. 0.69 1.83
MICROVOLTS PER METER
J F M A M J J A Ss (e) N D
MONTHS
Fig. 3—El Cayey (NAU) and Monte Grande (LPZ) average signal, 10 a.m., 1924
During the year experiments have been carried on to determine the
effect of heavy atmospheric disturbances on the observed values of
the strength of signals by making measurements on the telephone
comparator, first with an artificial antenna and then with an elevated
antenna on which the disturbances were coming in. It was found:
(1) That if the disturbances were separated by intervals of compara-
232 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
tive silence, the readings were independent of the intensity of the dis-
turbances provided the telephones were removed from the ears suffici-
ently to prevent the deafening effect of the crashes. (2) If the dis-
turbances were practically continuous but less than about seven times
the strength of the signal, the observations were unaffected. (3)
With continuous disturbances between seven and sixteen times the
strength of the signal the observed values are too low. (4) When
MICROVOLTS PER METER
J F M A M J J A SS) (0) N D
MONTHS
Fig. 4.—Average atmospheric disturbances, 3 p.m., 1924, for 15 ke. (20,000 m.), 24
ke. (12,500 m.), and 33.3 ke. (9,000 m.).
the disturbances are more than sixteen times the signal strength, the
signal is not heard. These experiments have made it possible to make
estimates of the signal strength of the weaker stations on the summer
afternoons instead of arbitrarily throwing them out, or considering
them inaudible. This is a matter of some importance for the deter-
mination of the summer afternoon fading. The application of these
corrections to the afternoon observations of 1922 and 1923 practically
doubles the average values of the summer afternoon readings of the
weaker stations, like Nauen.
7
Cm — a aaa ee
JUNE 4, 1925 AUSTIN: RADIO RECEIVING MEASUREMENTS 233
cae eee
===
MICROVOLTS PER METER
aeeou eal
aa
Sore D
MONTHS
Fig. 5—Average atmospheric
24 ke. (12,500 m.).
MICROVOLTS PER METER
MONTHS
Fig. 6.—Average atmospheric disturbances, 3 p.m. for 1922, 1923, and 1924. f =
15 ke. (20,000 m.).
234 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
Some work has been done during the year on the weakening of the
European stations at about the time of the European sunset. This
plays a part in the production of the weak signals observed at 10 a.m.,
in November, December, and January, and in the afternoon fading
observed on the 3 P.M. signals in summer. On account of the limited
personnel of the laboratory, it has not been possible to complete
this part of the work for presentation.
The similarity in the monthly average intensity curves taken at
Meudon and in Washington on the U. R. 8. I. signals sent out from
Bordeaux (LY) at 3 p.m., Washington time, has continued to be worthy
of note. This similarity began to be observed at the time of Bor-
deaux’s change in frequency from 12.8 ke. (23,400 m.) to 15.9 ke.,
(18,900 m.) in May, 1923, as was mentioned in last year’s report.
Similar, nearly simultaneous readings have also been taken on Rocky
Point, L. I. (WQL), at Meudon and Washington, but in this case no
definite correspondence between the two reception curves has been
found.
ENTOMOLOGY .—A new sabethid mosquito from Panama (Diptera,
Culicidae). Harrison G. Dyar and Raymonp C. SHANNON
(Communicated by 8. A. RoHwsR).
The species here described has been on hand for more than a year,
and recent work on the group requires that it be given a name.
Prosopolepis hemisiris, new species
Antennae, clypeus (without scales), palpi and proboscis entirely blackish;
occiput dark metallic green with purplish cast, whitish on the sides below;
mesonotum dark metallic green, no prescutellar setae evident, pronotal areas
with silvery white reflection; prothoracic lobes with purplish reflection domi-
nant, but also greenish intermixed; pleurae extensively silvery white scaled;
lower sternopleurals extending slightly above the lateral metasternal sclerite;
two spiracular setae, three prealar setae. Legs bluish black; mid tarsi silvery
white on the last three and a half joints below; hind tarsi with last four joints
missing, no white on remaining parts. Abdominal tergites bluish black above,
their lateral margins silvery white, the colors separated in a nearly straight
line, very slightly scalloped, sternites entirely silvery white. Wing scales
broad, entirely black. Length about 4.5 mm.
Type, female.—Cat. no. 28210, U. 8. Nat. Mus.; France Field, Canal Zone,
Panama, collected by a native assistant of Army Sanitary Inspector J.B.
Shropshire, possibly from a coconut shell, and bred by us August 16, 1923.
The collector’s label on the culture was ‘‘cocoa mosquitoes.”
JUNE 4, 1925 COBB: NEW NEMA, TYLENCHUS CANCELLATUS 235
BIOLOGY .—Biological relationships of the mathematical series 1, 2, 4, etc.,
with a descrtption of a new nema, Tylenchus cancellatus, (Contribu-
tions to a Science of Nematology XV). N. A. Coss, U. 8S. Department
of Agriculture.
The behavior of the components of matter, e.g., in chemical reactions,
appears to compel discontinuous variation in the evolution of organisms,
Organic evolution has been thought continuous, but mutation now suggests
that it is discontinuous. Must it not necessarily be discontinuous! from the
very nature of the composition of matter? Morphological changes in
organisms originate in chemical changes in the matter of which they are
composed. Now, a chemical change is one that either takes place or does
not take place; nothing intermediate is known. Hence it seems that the
fundamental changes in the evolution of organisms, so far as we can conceive
at present, i.e., chemical! changes, must be saltatory. But we cannot con-
ceive of the greater and obvious (visible) changes, except as summations of
these minute changes. The visible changes then must per force be con-
sidered of the same character as that of their components, i.e., all visible
evolutionary changes in organisms must be of a saltatory nature.
The mathematics of the morphology of organic evolution may therefore
be considered as, at least mainly, discontinuous,—arithmetical.
The material basis of life is discontinuous, but is the only known form of
matter so organized as to grow and multiply by assimilation; in this lies the
fundamental difference between living objects and all others;—not a mathe-
matical difference.
Matter is dual, or less abstractly, there exists in matter an exceedingly
widespread, probably universal, “bipolarity’’, exemplified, therefore, in organ-
isms. The universality of “bipolarity’’ is more or less understood and
generally admitted. Its universality might be assumed to prove, and at
least very strongly suggests, its necessity. Assuming its necessity, this
bipolarity determines that cells, as well as many of their components, multi-
plying, do so by binary division in a bipolar manner.*
1 Mathematics. Arithmetic and its derivatives arose through everyday problems
connected with matter, which is discontinuous. The Calculus, mathematics of con-
tinuity, arose through problems like those of astronomy, where the continuity of space
and time impress us most vividly.
Quantity. It may be said we cannot conceive of anything so small that it cannot be
divided, or so large that nothing can be added to it ; but as the two opposite statements:
seem just as true, we find ourselves within two limits at each of which we confront some-
thing that must beso, but can’t beso. Between these two irrationalities lie quantities
we can handle rationally by mathematics.
2 Thence ‘‘fore-and-aftness’’ and bilateral symmetry in organisms arose (doubtless
modified by gravity). Bilateral symmetry seems the invariable result of the growth of
what we may call, for lack of a better term, ‘‘untrammeled protoplasm.’’? When proto-
plasm is ‘“‘hampered,’’ say by inorganic materials tending to produce other forms of
symmetry—as, for instance, through the laws of erystallization—then bilaterality may
be more or less masked; otherwise it is manifest. We readily recognize it in nearly all
animals and plants.
236 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
Ss Me On on > ppll6) A fundamental result of this phenomenon is
BO that organisms thus become exact or modified
“mph expressions of the mathematical series 1, 2, 4, 8,
16, etc., a comparatively unheeded basic fact
"sc bib worthy of careful attention.
eo Ts it not possible, simply by way of instance,
: ei ea that by eeu yne carefully this more or cS
apparent widespread mathematico-biological ex-
pression, we may reach a clearer understanding
of organic form and of phylogenetic relation-
ships? This question suggests others of deeper
_ Whad import, since form is largely an expression of the
interplay of internal forces.
der ~Sucha query leads to counting and comparing
more carefully the various features of organ-
_lum oe isvas, repetitive and otherwise. Among a multi-
Fig. 1—Female Tyl- tude of others, such questions
enchus cancellatus n. sp. . Q alec
al Jaf The, characters are set as this then arise: Why is it
atte fortuna Atore “ont that both the number of
\ view of head, followed by Peete 1 mal Aine
um Radner’ ee ransverse INS an
tions of the body sec- NUMber of longitudinal ele-
ee majjnt ents in the cuticle of
= ue many nemas Is likely to
suggest some definite
relationship to the geo-
metrical series 1, 2, 4, 8,
am 16, etc.? The observed
numbers are certainly
’ cellular expressions of
the 1, 2,4 series, or varl-
ants, but why and
according to what law
is it that very often
the numbers of ele-
ments met with are not
members of the series
but integers lying
between? Why is
it that chromosome-
counts are suggestive
_of this same mathe-
matical concept? And
so on throughout the
‘ range of organic struc-
2. _ _ SS vine 7 94 09mm tures. Are not these
a tat
gen min int
~ tim
JUNE 4, 1925 COBB: NEW NEMA, TYLENCHUS CANCELLATUS 237
numbers not only necessarily and definitely, but perhaps somewhat simply,
modified mathematical expressions of the fundamental mathematico-biologi-
cal phenomena inevitably arising from the fact that cells (as well as some of
their components) divide in accordance with the 1, 2, 4 series?
Variations of the 1, 2, 4 series, as expressed in cell multiplication, say in a
segmenting egg, can be readily diagrammed. (See Fig. 3.) If im such a cell-
division diagram any particular multiplying cell or cellsjbe pictured as halted,
while the others continue to divide, the next step will bring about a variation
from the geometrical series. If the reader will draw a few simple diagrams,
he will find it easy, by such variations, graphically to represent, as existing
at successive early stages in the imagined ontogeny, numbers of cells, say,
from 1 to 10 inclusive, and will see that conceivably this could ‘so on indefi-
nitely, and that therefore any number whatever is a possible biological variation
of the 1, 2, 4 series. But this broadening of the possibilities must not be
allowed to obscure the basie fact that the numbers are neverthe-
less definite mathematical variations of the 1, 2, 4 series due to the
binary division of cells and thetr components;—which in turn seems
compulsory owing to the nature of matter itself. Our problem seems
to be: Which of these numerous variations are the more sig-
nificant, and what are their mathematical and biological relationships?
A new triplonch, Tylenchus cancellatus n. sp. (Figs. 1 and 2),
infesting the roots of peonies, will serve, in a very limited way, to
illustrate the foregoing remarks. The figures (Fig. 1) show the
existence, near the head, of sixteen external longittidinal grooves.
Near the middle of the neck this number changes to eighteen by
the splitting, on each side of the nema, of one of the lateral, or
sublateral, elements of the series, so that most of the body presents
18 grooves. Posteriorly this number reduces to 14, 10, then 8.
(Fig. 1.)
This emphasizes the value of pondering the variants of the
1, 2, 4 series. If the numbers of the various elements were con-
fined to the 1, 2, 4 series, they would be less significant, hence less
useful;—e.g., in the interpretation of relationships. But variations
abound, and are, as yet, for the most part unexplained; probably
often highlycomplex. It is certain, however, that 7f these variations p, 8 *:,4.
can be envisaged and understood, they will serve ‘as ‘basic data. CER Che
There seems at present no way of stating jexactly, the upper Si7°,swellinss
limit of the numbers representing these variations of the 1, 2, 4 contain Tul
series as exemplified in an organism. It may in some organisms '@!¥s-
reach twenty figures, and therefore the discovery and interpretation of some
of the highest members of this modified geometrical series, as exemplified in
organisms, may be beyond our present compass. : Nevertheless, does it not
seem likely that relationships traced in this manner may ‘at jleast be set upon
a firmer basis than is the case when data of other sorts'are used,—or even
upon an entirely new basis?
238 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
In a 1, 2, 4 series, let Px be the final product and N its series number,
then Py, = 2N-1: thus, 16 = 251.
Similarly in a simple organism, at any particular instant in its growth,
let Px have a corresponding value,—that is to say, be the number of cells
that either actually exist or would have arisen by the uniform and continuous
dichotomous division of the single primal cell. Such simple and easily
understood organisms occur among the lower forms, and in the early embry-
onic stages of the higher forms, but are rare among the adult stages of the
higher forms, because in these latter some cells lag or cease in their dichotomy,
and because of losses of cells from various causes. Hence, the number of
cells actually present in an organism at any particular instant is likely to be
Py minus a certain number of cells, (X), due to delay or failure in some part
or parts of the dichotomy, or to loss. In this discussion account is taken of
all the cells that have been produced during the growth, whether present
in the organism at the proposed instant or not. This is in order to allow for
worn out or wasted cells; these, possibly vanished, cells are zncluded in Py.
The general 1, 2, 4 equation of an organism thus becomes Py = 2N-! — X,
ayy Cy
4th 7 iy aK VE My \
rd. st. ‘ ve Ae Ve WwW re oe
nd. sty ‘\ wa va aad ae Seual ©
ioeauation P,=2"-X,
i lege Intestine +,@
,
Ist. stage © Ectoderm +,@
Fig. 3—Diagram of 8 generations of cells produced by dichotomous divisions;—as, for
instance, in asegmenting egg. Three general characters of tissue are shown: (1) Sexual,
(2) intestinal and related tissues, (3) ectoderm and related tissues. The sexual and in-
te »stinal tissues are shown to have lagged behind those of the ectoderm, so that Py in this
instance equals 71.
in which X is a whole number and a function of one or more ‘‘p’s” of a lower
order, 1.e., of the 1, 2, 4 character, or p = 28-! character, in which, of course
p is smaller than P and n is smaller than N. These smaller (ascertainable)
groups are 1, 2, 4 groups of cells due to the lag or failure of “‘earlier”’ generations
than N. (See the loop (X) in Fig. 3.)
Py = 2N-! — X is a general equation, which, when X = 0, represents a
strictly uniform and continuous mathematical dichotomy, found only in the
lower organisms or in the early embryonic stages of the higher ones.
The various ‘‘p’s” from Py down to P = 1, (the primal number) become,
therefore, se insignia, indicating particular generations of cells, and
may be made the basis of a definite and fundamental mathematico-biological
nomenclature applicable to the generations of cells in an organism, and hence
to the organism itself. Applications of the equation are endless.
JUNE 4, 1925 HAY: CORRELATION OF PLEISTOCENE DEPOSITS 239
GEOLOGY.—On the correlation of certain Pleistocene deposits and their
fossils. OLtver P. Hay, Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Recently, Dr. W. D. Matthew! presented a paper entitled “Correla-
tion of the Tertiary formations of the Great Plains.” As might have
been expected, Dr. Matthew presents many interesting, instruc-
tive, and acceptable propositions; there are others from which one
may be permitted to dissent. The tone of the paper is somewhat
disquieting, and one gets the idea that the geology and paleontology
of the Tertiary is in a bad way and needs the services of a reformer.
Doubtless there is much justification for his pessimistic conclusions.
However, it is not the Tertiary, in which he has done most of his work,
that appears to Dr. Matthew so nearly in disorder, but the Pleisto-
cene, both of North America and of Europe.
In two matters Dr. Matthew has recently afforded me gratification.
In 1923? I ventured to refer the Blanco to the Upper Pliocene. Not
long ago Dr. Matthew* made the same disposition of it. In a paper
read before the Geological Society recently and published in this
JOURNAL,‘ I recognized two Pleistocene faunas, an earlier and a later.
In his first paper, Dr. Matthew states (p. 747) that it is adequately
proven that there are differences between the earlier and the later
faunas. However, considering the facility with which he moves up
and down the dividing lines between formations, I fear Dr. Matthew
will not long adhere to his decision concerning the Blanco proposition.
As regards the earlier and later faunas, I doubt that his later and my
later will coincide in either depth or superficies. JI am further curious
to learn where he finds the “‘proofs” of the differences alluded to.
Dr. Matthew thinks (p. 751) that it has not been settled whether the
Equus beds of Nebraska and Kansas are at the base of the Pleistocene
or on the top of the Phocene. So far as I am aware, he is the only
man who stands out, and he only of late. In his correlation table he
places the Sheridan in the Pliocene and invites American geologists
to accept the transference. It is a fair offer, and we shall await with
interest their response. As an argument in favor of this new arrange-
ment he states that the genus Equus is quite characteristic of the Upper
Pliocene of Europe. This is a disputed point, one of those on which
Dr. Matthew expresses an opinion in the fourth paragraph of his page
1 Geol. Soc. Amer. Bull., 35: 743-754. 1924.
2 Carnegie Inst. Wash. Pub. No. 322, pp.1, 15. 1923.
3 Nat. Hist., 24: 630. 1924.
‘This Journal, 15: 126-133. 1925.
240 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
752. Most European geologists have indeed drawn the line so as to
throw a part of the Glacial period, the horses with it, into the Pliocene,
but there is a reaction against this. In his great work® Emile Haug
places the parting plane at the base of the Villafranchian, because
then appeared, as he says, a new fauna, characterized by Elephas,
Equus, and Bos, which pushed the old into the background. His
arrangement throws into the Pleistocene the upper beds at Val d’Arno
in Italy and the Norwich Crag in England. He further declares that
the earliest glacial stage, the Scanian, immediately preceded the fluvio-
marine Cromerian, which itself presents the first interglacial fauna.
Recently, J. Reid Moir has published an article’ on the human arti-
facts found in the vicinity of Cromer. Moir places the beds in the
Pliocene, but regards the Cromer Forest bed as belonging to the first
interglacial, and the Red and Norwich Crags as representing the first
glacial epoch of East Anglia.
Moir’s paper is immediately followed by one by Sir E. Ray Lan-
kester, in which he expresses the opinion ‘“‘that it is high time that the
misapprehensions of Lyell and his followers should be discarded and
the discoveries of the last 50 years given their true significance, by
definitely assigning the Red and the Norwich Crags to the Pleistocene.”’
In the number of the Bulletin of the Geological Society which
contains Dr. Matthew’s paper is Dr. T. Wayland Vaughan’s
treatise entitled ‘“‘Criteria and status of correlation and classification
of Tertiary deposits,’ a communication replete with valuable informa-
tion fortified with citations to geological literature. In his “Table
No. 1,” prepared under his direction by Dr. Julia Gardner, Vaughan
presents the “‘Correlation of the Tertiary formations of Europe.” He
had to define the boundary between the Pliocene and the Pleistocene;
and this he draws, as did Haug, below the Villafranchian in Italy and
the Norwich Crag in England. It appears, therefore, that according
to these authorities, the genus Equus is pretty well excluded from the
Pliocene of Europe, and that Dr. Matthew has chosen an inauspi-
cious moment to urge the incorporation of a part of the Glacial Epoch
into our North American Pliocene. It is possible that species of Equus
existed in Asia during the late Pliocene, but our classification of forma-
tions is not based on Asiatic geology. It is not impossible that species
of Equus lived in Asia before any lived in America. Matthew tells
us that Hipparion migrated to Asia and there developed species which
were larger and more progressive than the native American forms. In
5 Traite de Geologie, 1767. 1911,
8 Nat. Hist., 24: 637-658. 1924
JUNE 4, 1925 HAY: CORRELATION OF PLEISTOCENE DEPOSITS 241
like manner, another equine form may early have reached Asia and,
under the stimulating environment of that continent, have given rise
to advanced species of Equus. When the movement of the fauna of
northern and temperate Asia into America began, those horses may
have returned to the land of their ancestors. In the latest Pliocene
known, the Blanco and the San Timoteo, close approaches to Equus
are found. In the earliest Pleistocene that has furnished any con-
siderable number of fossils there are numerous species of one-toed
horses. It seems hardly possible that during that interval the genus
Pliohippus should in America blossom out into more than a dozen
species of Equus. Some of the early Pleistocene horses, as Hquus
baudistensis, E. occidentalis, and E. idahoensis are primitive in many
respects. Others, as EL. fraternus, E. pectinatus, E. scotti’, all belong-
ing to the early Pleistocene, are far more advanced. It appears
possible that the primitive forms may have been natives of this coun-
try; the others have been Asiatic immigrants.
Dr. Matthew does not greatly appreciate the attempts made to
correlate the Pleistocene faunas with the interglacial and glacial stages.
He credits these correlations to Osborn and myself; but, inasmuch as
Osborn has, to my knowledge, made no serious efforts in that direc-
tion, so far as America is concerned, I think that he at least might have
been spared.
Dr. Matthew gives it as his opinion that the position and unity of
the Aftonian are distinctly doubtful and its exact correlation with the
Sheridan also questionable. He seems disposed to reach in and shake
the insecure foundations of the correlations.
Iowa is the most interesting area of the North American glaciated
regions, possessing sheets of drift of all the glacial stages and the
deposits, erosions, and weatherings of all the interglacial times. Its
glacial and interglacial phenomena have been investigated by prob-
ably a greater number of capable geologists than those of any other
state, and their researches are yet being vigorously pursued. The
glacialists welcome the suggestions made by all competent investiga-
tors and any contribution from Dr. Matthew will command attention.
A large part of the surface of the state is occupied by Kansan drift.
This is known to extend, at some points at least,to the Missouri River
and beyond. Beneath this drift sheet there exists, over much of the
state, another, the oldest known, the Nebraskan. This too is known
to reach the Missouri at points, and has been supposed to do so all
7 See Iowa Geol. Sur., 23: 183. 1914. Figs. 68, 69.
242 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
along the western border. Between these two drifts are found, over
a large part of the state, evidences of a long interglacial stage when
there was a mild climate and an abundant flora, doubtless an equally
abundant fauna. During this time too the upper surface of the
Nebraskan drift became deeply weathered and leached. This inter-
glacial time is the Aftonian. Along the Missouri, near or not many
miles away, where erosion has trenched the Kansan drift, or where it
has been penetrated by wells and railway cuts, the bones and teeth
of many mammals and the shells of land and freshwater mollusks
have been discovered. These have been referred to the interglacial
Aftonian.
Fossils have been discovered in supposed Aftonian deposits in about
20 localities. In 7 of these only mollusks were found; in 8, only
mammal bones and teeth; in at least 5, both molluscan and mammalian
remains. According to Shimek, 26 species of mollusks have been
determined, and these all belong to species yet living in western Iowa.
Eighteen at least of these species were found in one pit, at Turin.
The unity, or homogeneity, of this molluscan assemblage can not be
questioned. The species could not have been redeposited from older
formations. Of the vertebrate species we may count about 25 species.
Of these, 19 have been collected in one pit at Missouri Valley. At
Turin, 8 species of vertebrates were collected, associated with the 18
or 20 species of the mollusks mentioned. Six of the vertebrates appear
to be of the same species as those secured at Missouri Valley. The
other two, Megalonyx and Castoroides, are common Pleistocene fossils.
The Hipparion remains found at Afton Junction, Iowa, may appear
to be an intrusive relic of an older fauna. However, this is not the
only case of the occurrence of Hipparion in the Pleistocene. Calvin
reported a tooth of the genus from Rockport, Missouri, where it was
associated with Equus, Elephas columbi, and a large camel, probably
Camelops. The writer described a species of Hipparion collected by
Cragin in western Kansas. In the same collection are Mylodon, two
species of Equus, Camelops, Elephas, and Canis. That Hipparion
was a companion of Equus in the early Pleistocene appears certain.
Possibly some of those progressive species came to America with the
Asiatic contingent early in the Ice Age. The facts presented show, I
think, that the fauna found in the so-called Aftonian deposits of lowa
is a homogeneous one, not one made up of elements of two or more
geological stages of epochs.
We may now ask whether these mammals and mollusks belong to
the Aftonian or to another stage. I think all who understand the
JUNE 4, 1925 HAY: CORRELATION OF PLEISTOCENE DEPOSITS 243
question will agree that the fauna belongs somewhere between the
beginning of the Nebraskan and the early part of the Kansan. Dr.
George F. Kay, State Geologist of Iowa, has expressed the view that
the remains are not found between the two drifts but in one or the
other or both of them. I believe that this is an error which Dr. Kay
will soon correct. The probabilities are strongly against the occur-
rence of sands and gravels containing bones and teeth and delicate
shells within the drift in so many localities and along such an extent of
country; especially since in all the rest of the glaciated region of North
America bones or mollusks are rarely, if ever, found in the drift. Dr.
Kay’s theory is that the animals lived in front of a glacier re-advanc-
ing over ground which it had occupied not long before and then
abandoned. Buried in the gravels of the earlier advance, the bones
and teeth were covered over by the till of the return movement;
and thus they are involved in the drift of one glacial stage and not
between the drifts of two stages. Formerly, the apparent inclusion of
some of those fossiliferous sands and gravels in the drift was explained
on the theory that they had been ploughed up in frozen masses by the
on-coming glacier.
Even if those mammals and mollusks lived near the approaching
glacier, they were the not distant descendants of the species of the
Aftonian and hence a part of the same fauna. However, the writer
maintains that the animals found fossilized in those sands and gravels
could not have lived anywhere near the glacial front. The plants and
animals of British America could exist neither beneath the glacier
nor upon it. ° They were obliged to move on south of it or perish.
Wherever they were driven, the arctic animals, the musk-oxen, the
reindeer, the birds, the fishes, had to have a climate to which they
had been accustomed and the plants which they had learned to eat.
The insects needed their arctic and subarctic climates and many a
species required a particular kind of plant to which it had become
structurely adapted. When the glacier was approaching Iowa, the
state must have had a far colder climate than previously; and this
climate did not form a narrow belt along the glacial front. Inasmuch
as local glaciers existed in the mountains of Nevada and southern Cali-
fornia, and even in the Andes near the equator, the average tempera-
ture of our whole continent was reduced. The seasons along the Gulf
were cooler than before. From this chilled coast the average annual
temperature decreased gradually northward to the arctic cold at the
foot of the ice sheet. Perhaps one or two species of elephants, some
musk-oxen and reindeer, and a few hardy carnivores, found existence
244 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
possible in Iowa; but we may be sure that the camels that had lived
there, and the bisons, and the horses, and peccaries, and especially the
ground-sloths, had long before abandoned the region, seeking better
pastures.
Dr. Matthew states (p. 746) that the correlation of the Sheridan
beds as the exact equivalent of the Aftonian is also questionable.
One must not be too sure. Some three or four hundred miles out on
the plains there might have existed a different species of muskrat or
prairie dog, but the assemblages of mammals were probably as nearly
alike as they are today. About 25 species have been found in the
supposed Aftonian of Iowa and about 20 or more in Sheridan County,
in each case doubtless only a small part of those existing in the locali-
ties. It is possible, too, that the Iowa animals lived a few hundred
years earlier or later than those along Niobrara River. Hence,
some of the differences may be explained. In the writer’s opinion,
there is not a species in either list which may not any day be added to
the other.
Dr. Matthew ought to tell us where his Sheridan fauna belongs if not
in the first interglacial stage. He must consider it an older fauna than
the Aftonian, for he has chosen it to depress into the Upper Pliocene.
If it does not belong to the first interglacial, corresponding to the
Aftonian of Iowa and the Cromerian of England, he may assign it to
the first glacial stage. Two objections present themselves. On the
one hand, there is not a species which suggests a cold climate, no musk-
ox, no reindeer. On the other, there are only Megalonyx and Platy-
gonus that can be regarded as Pliocene species. Several other genera
of remarkable mammals are known to have come high up into the
Pliocene; but they do not appear in the Sheridan list. These Plio-
cene mammals must have been suddenly destroyed by the invading
Asiatic hordes.
The reference of the Sheridan to the Pliocene does not quite satisfy
Dr. Matthew. The Equus fauna must begin still further back.
A new fauna containing Equus, found by Gidley in Arizona, is,
Matthew tells us, considered as Middle or Upper Pliocene. It is
apparently taken as older than the Sheridan and as falling outside the
Glacial epoch. Apparently the Equus entourage has no known limits
downward, just as in Dr. Matthew’s correlation scheme it is not
limited upward.
Now, to refer that Arizona fauna to the Pliocene is to prejudge the
ease. It is certainly younger than the Blanco and therefore nearer
to the Sheridan. The larger animals, except a mastodon and a glypto-
JUNE 4, 1925 HAY: CORRELATION OF PLEISTOCENE DEPOSITS 245
don, have not been described. The mastodon is closely related to
Sheridan and Aftonian species. The other mammals comprise 2 or 3
species of Equus, a Pliohippus, a Hipparion, a Lama, a Procamelus,
a Pliauchenia, a peccary of possibly a known Pleistocene species, and
deer of the genera Odocoileus and Merycodus. All of the rodents
belong to existing genera and most of them are closely related to
existing species. It is not necessary to step down directly from the
Aitonian and the Sheridan into preglacial terranes. The possibility
exists that the Arizona fauna belongs to the Nebraskan glacial stage.
Tt has the transitional features to be looked for in such a position. It
is possible, however, that Dr. Matthew does not recognize any
Nebraskan stage; or if he does, he may think that it was a spell of
weather rather disagreeable, but otherwise of little importance. In
reality some of those barren “intermediate” beds (his p. 751) may find
their place in the Nebraskan.
It is interesting to consider some other features of Dr. Matthew's
correlation table. While he seeks to adjust the Sheridan nicely in the
Pliocene he leaves the La Brea in the Pleistocene, and apparently not
in the lowest. Yet most of the genera which he has named as charac-
teristic of the Equus fauna are common to the two localities, Canis,
Arctotherium, Smilodon, Mylodon, Equus, Elephas, Camelops, Antilo-
capra, Bison, and Capromeryx. We have here the representatives of
an impressive assemblage of mammals which it is proposed, by the
location of an arbitrary plane, to apportion to two distinct geological
periods.
In the second column of Matthew’s table no line is drawn between
the Pliocene and the Pleistocene. Perhaps this treatment is as good
as any, considering the prevailing uncertainty; and it might have been
profitably applied in some other cases. We are told also that Osborn,
Merriam, and Matthew have agreed to transfer the whole of the Hip-
parion zone to the Pliocene. I note with surprise that, as one of the
contracting parties, my friend has not stood up to his bargain, having
assigned the major portion to the Miocene. The impression one gets
from that table is that the Tertiary faunas have very uncertain rela-
tions to the accepted geological periods; as is indicated also in the case
of the Equus fauna. For example, it would now be hazardous to
affirm that any species of Hipparion belonged to the Miocene.
Dr. Matthew has offered his suggestions regarding Pleistocene cor-
relations in the hope that they will lead to fixity of views. They will
scarcely do this. To refer the Sheridan beds to the Pliocene will be
to exchange a natural and determinable plane of division for an arbi-
246 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 11
trary one, and will introduce into the Pleistocene the confusion
that seems to have sway in the Tertiary. It will put us back to the
time when one distinguished vertebrate palaeontologist referred our
Pleistocene animals all to the Champlain stage, and another recognized
two “faunas,” which, however, during the whole Pleistocene, lived
side by side and were really one and the same thing.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Apert H. Kampr, who graduated in engineering from George Washington
University in 1924, has been appointed observer on the staff of the Depart-
ment of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Carnegie Institution of Washington.
The Baltimore-Washington section of the American Ceramic Society met
at the Lee House on Saturday, April4. Program: H. G. Wourram, of the
Bureau of Standards: Enamels; J. W. Greta, of the Geophysical Laboratory:
The formation of mullite from cyanite, andalusite, and sillimanite; H. F.
Srauey, of the Metal and Thermit Corporation: Pottery and enameling prac-
tice on the Pacific Coast.
ns of the meetings of the affiliated ems will appear on this page
editors by the ad and the twenty-seventh day of each month. uy
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS ee
Radiotelegraphy.—Long distance radio receiving measurements in
PANIBITUN 50 0'0)« sin mlaiain, s\n obnis-o]alntefe ar o egy v/vie sebeeat gt comity ieee ae
Entomology.—A new sabethid mosquito from Panama (Diptera,
Harrison G. Dyar and RaymMonp C. SHANNON..............
Biology.—Biological relationships of the mathematical series, 1, 2, 4, ete.
description of a new nema, Tylenchus cancellatus. N. A. Goan:
Geology.—On the correlation of certain Pleistocene deposits | and
OLivER P. 0 oe ene
Scientific Norms nis NEGro wd Lees ee
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY _ :
President: VERNON L. ee National Research Council.
15 JUNE 19, 1925 No. 12
JOURNAL
IASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS '
ie c
_ E.P. Kru D. F. Hewett S. J. MaucHiy
ONAL MUSEUM a GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
~~
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A, Ronwer
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GoLpMAN G. W. Stosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Griees ; J. R. SWANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royau anp Guitrorp AVES,
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office, rep Madisuns the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special Ovid
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authog
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences .
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, ai
resent a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publis
ti) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Acad
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Wa
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Soe
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALi
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summe
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to cotenaee years. mp’
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth |
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, i
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. ‘
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be —
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. ‘To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must |
partly met by the author. ; ‘
Proof-—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ona
Authors’ Reprints—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. 8pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 “6.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.15 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00-
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page. ‘ica
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. Tani
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or rep ts
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume 18........+.0.0cecereees eis alee ote eee “
Semi-monthly numbers... aie. vice gov bin wiv vies wsaipinie)o 9'u pepe a giata ety la
Monthly numbers ies sis oab 56. doew usela eYareg vateitlel ota eievere ela a nate MR Sia
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” an
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. One
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. '
Exchanges-—The Journat does not exchange with other pupbeean
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that clai
within thirty days after date of the following issue. : i
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. ‘Special r
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy ;
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 JUNE 19, 1925 No. 12
BIOLOGY.—Embryological evidence of the evolution of man.! ADOLPH
H. Scuuttz, Carnegie Institution of Washington.
INTRODUCTION
Our knowledge of the evolution of man is being constantly increased
by contributions from four distinct fields of science which are closely
codperating. Direct evidence is furnished by paleontology, the
results of which are supplemented by those of comparative anatomy.
The latter study really includes embryology, since there is no dis-
tinction in principle between the finished form of an adult animal
and the changes which it has undergone during growth. The fourth
field comprises the investigation of individual variations, which so
frequently either represent a recapitulation of ancestral conditions or
foreshadow future steps in evolution; in other words, an individual,
or parts of an individual, may show retardation or acceleration in
comparison with the state of evolution of the species as a whole.
This paper is devoted to a brief discussion of some of the evidence,
derived from embryological findings, of the evolution of the human
race. While it is thus restricted chiefly to the third of the four
sciences enumerated above, it will be necessary, here and there, to
enter the field of comparative anatomy and also that of variations.
Few biological theories have brought about so much controversy as
Haeckel’s well-known biogenetic law. According to this, which
today is more properly called the recapitulation theory, individual
1 Slightly enlarged address given by the author in the symposium on The origin and
evolution of man at the joint meeting of the Washington Academy of Sciences and the
Anthropological, the Archaeological, and the Biological Society of Washington, Jan-
uary 20, 1925. Other papers in this symposium were given by J. C. Merriam, Carnegie
Institution of Washington, and Ales Hrdli¢éka, U.S. National Museum. Further data
on the same and closely allied subjects may be found in two other papers by the author:
Fetal growth in man, Amer. Journ. Phys. Anthropol. 6. 1923; Growth studies on primates
bearing upon man’s evolution, Amer. Journ. Phys. Anthropol. 7. 1924.
247
248 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES * WOL. 15, No. 12
development repeats, generally speaking, ancestral conditions; in other
words, embryology in a sense corroborates paleontology. In spite
of the many attacks upon this theory, the author, for one, can see
ample grounds for its right to existence, but realizes also that its
uncritical application in phylogenetic speculations is beset with pit-
falls. This theory, which fills the réle of a working’ hypothesis,
should never be pressed into service where there are other more
direct explanations for embryonic phenomena. There is no doubt,
however, that the rudimentary, non-functioning teeth? in embryos
of the so-called toothless whales can not be interpreted in any other
way than by assuming that the progenitors of this animal at one
time possessed teeth, not only in an early growth stage but also in
adult life, where they served a definite purpose. Similarly, what
other explanation could we find for the transitory appearance of gill
clefts in the human embryo than the forceful conclusion that they
represent a phyletic contraction, a purposeless survival of conditions
of our remote past which points to one and the same stem for man
and fish? Illustrations such as these, in support of the recapitula-
tion theory, could be listed by the hundreds. They all go to show
that many parts of the human body change in the course of growth
in a manner resembling the successive changes which these parts
have undergone during the process of evolution. This comparison of
ontogeny with phylogeny—although in many respects still very
hypothetical—is of the utmost value for the study of both, but for
embryology particularly it furnishes explanations for phenomena
which otherwise could not be understood.
Two general groups of embryological observations having a bearing
upon problems of evolution can be distinguished. Into the one fall
all those normal structures of a passing ontogenetic duration which |
can only be interpreted in the sense of atavisms. As examples may
be mentioned the so-called milk lines of human embryos, indicating
more than one pair of nipples in the remote ancestors of man; then
the short-lived occurrence of an os centrale in the wrist of the human
embryo, a carpal element which is present throughout life in many of
the lower vertebrates. In this class belong also many of the em-
bryonic changes in shape and relationships of the various parts of the
body, such as the ontogenetic rotation of the foot or the gradual
formation of the typically human promontorium on the spine, proc-
esses bearing at their beginning a striking resemblance to conditions
in adult lower primates. The second group comprises all the cases
2 Milk teeth as well as those of a second dentition (Kiikenthal).
JUNE 19, 1925 SCHULTZ: EVOLUTION OF MAN 249
of closely corresponding developmental changes in different animals
which prove merely some close evolutionary relationship but do not
contribute, as does the first group, to a hypothetical reconstruction
of ancestors.
TRUNK
Man, in the embryonic
state, still possesses a true
external tail, as shown, for
instance, in figure 1. On
the tip of this tail occurs a
small appendix or so-called
caudal filament which con-
Fig. 1—Caudal region of a human embryo
(14 mm. crown-rump length) showing external
tail with caudal filament.
tains no vertebral rudiments and _ be-
comes distinct when the embryo has
an approximate length of 12 mm. and
disappears again in embryos over 30 mm.
long. Exactly the same filament is
found in fetuses of many other primates,
but it seems to appear later and persist s
longer in the tailed monkeys* than in :
man. Occasionally this filament may
persist throughout life. A number
of such cases in man are reported in Fig. 2—External tail, 9 inches
hie literature ;! figure 2 gives an ex- long, in a 12-year old boy from
ci French Indo-China (after ‘‘Scien-
ample of such a so-called soft tail, tific American,” 1889, p. 296).
2 In Cebus capucinus, for example, the caudal filament was not yet present in an
embryo of 13 mm. crown-rump length, but was well developed in one measuring 107 mm.
According to Schwalbe (Studien tiber Entwicklungsgeschichte der Tiere, H. 15. Wies-
baden, 1911), a fetus of Macacus fuscatus, measuring 58 mm. CR., had no caudal filament
as yet, whereas this structure was present in six older fetuses of the same species,
ranging in size from 77 to 196 mm.
4 Harrison, R. G., 1901. On the occurrence of tails in man. Johns Hopkins Hospital
Bull. 12.
Sarasin, P. 1914. Uber ein menschliches Schudnzchen. Verhandl. d. Naturforsch.
Ges., Basel 25.
250 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
which has the record length of 23 cm. This filament has also been
found to persist in an adult chimpanzee and in an orang-utan, which
are normally tailless, like adult man. Furthermore, the exceedingly
short stump of a tail in the Barbary ape (Jnuus ecaudatus) contains
no vertebrae,® and therefore in all likelihood represents an embryonic
caudal filament which in this species persists in every individual
throughout life.
In the human embryo the tail projects for a considerable distance
beneath the level of the anus, but soon thereafter it becomes over-
grown by the neighboring parts, so that it disappears from the surface
and in adult life the tip of the last tail vertebra lies high above the
anal level, as shown in figure 3. A still more marked reduction in a
cranial direction occurs in the spinal cord, the lower end of which
reaches beyond the thirty-eighth vertebral rudiment in the early
embryo, but only as far as the twenty-first vertebra in the adult.
In young embryos there are anywhere from 7 to 9 vertebral rudi-
ments in the caudal region; in adult man this number has dwindled to
4 or 5 coceygeal vertebrae. Incidentally, in orang-utan this reduc-
tion in the number of tail vertebrae has gone even farther, namely,
to only 3 or even 2 vertebrae. In a human embryo of 7.5 mm. crown-
rump length, the tail measured 1.2 mm. in length’—that is, 16 per
cent of the former dimension—whereas in adult man the percentage
relation between corresponding measurements, 1.e., the length of the
row of coceygeal vertebrae and the sitting height, averages only 3.5.
These data demonstrate strikingly the tremendous ontogenetic reduc-
tion of the human tail.
On the ventral side of the caudal vertebrae in the human embryo
haemal processes are found,’ rudimentary structures which correspond
unmistakably to the haemal arches or chevron bones on the proximal
tail vertebrae of many monkeys. ‘This occurrence of haemal arches
in the human embryo would in itself constitute sufficient proof for
a larger and well-functioning tail in our forebears; but, as shown
5 Waldeyer, E., 1896. Die Caudalanhénge des Menschen. Sitz.-Ber. KX. Preuss.
Akad. Wiss., phys.-math. Il. 34.
6 Kunitomo, Kx., 1918. The development and reduction of the tail and of the caudal end
of the spinalcord. Contributions to Embryology, 11. Carnegie Inst. Washington Pub.
No. 271. i
7-y. Schumacher, S., 1906. Uber Haemalbogen bei menschlichen Embryonen. Anat.
Anz., Erg. H. 29.
Favaro, G., 1907. Il canale edivasi caudali negli Amnioti, con particolare riguardo alle
specie umano. Arch. d. Anat. e di Embriol. 6.
JUNE 19, 1925 SCHULTZ: EVOLUTION OF MAN 251
above, embryology furnishes abundant additional proof for such a
claim.
In early prenatal stages of all primates the transverse diameter of
the chest is about the same as the sagittal diameter, but in the course
of growth the chest becomes proportionately much broader in man
and in the anthropoid apes, while just the opposite, a relative nar-
spinal chord =
sninal column <=
Ist coudal
vertebra
Ast caudal
verlebra
ANAL LEVEL
AHS
Fig. 3—Diagrammatic sagittal sections through a human embryo and an adult
man, showing reduction of the external embryonic tail, of the spinal column and the
spinal cord. (Embryo modified after Kunitomo, Contributions to Embryology, 11.
Carnegie Inst. Washington, Pub. 271, 1918.)
rowing of the chest, occurs in the monkeys and lemurs. ‘The close
correspondence in chest shape of all primates early in ontogeny and
the subsequent different growth changes in the lower and higher
forms, is a good example of the absence in early development of what
apparently are fundamental distinctions between the different groups.
The deep and narrow chest of adult lower primates and of adult
quadrupeds in general is due to the action of gravity on the thoracic
organs, which exerts a constant pressure downward upon the partly
cartilaginous framework of ribs. In man and higher apes gravity
acts in a different direction—more on the diaphragm, so that the
252 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
chest is unhampered and free to follow the broadening influence of
the shoulder muscles.
Man has the lowest placed nipples of any of the primates. This
extreme position is not reached, however, until growth is completed,
the nipples being situated relatively higher on the trunk in the fetus
than in the adult. In relation to the ribs, the nipples overlie the
second intercostal space in very young fetuses, but have shifted
down to the fourth or even to the fifth rib in the adult.8 In fetuses
of monkeys and apes the nipples occupy a relative position on the
Dyfi
NEW - CALEDONIAN
Fig. 5—New-Caledonian man, show-
Tig. 4.—Human fetus of 10 weeks, ing the ascending clavicles in a normal
showing the ascending clavicles (head position of rest. (After Sarasin, Atlas
was not drawn, since, in its natural zur Anthropologie der Neu-Caledonier
position, it would overlap the clavicles). und Loyalty-Insulaner, Berlin, 1922).
trunk similar to that in human fetuses, but, in contrast to man, they
shift, if at all, upward in the course of growth. From this it is
justifiable to argue that both the extremely low position of the nip-
ples in man and their exceedingly high position (close to the axillae)
in such primates as the orang-utan or the howling monkey, are com-
paratively recent specializations, and that the common ancestors of
man and other primates had nipples situated somewhere between
these extremes.
In the human fetus the shoulders lie high above the suprasternal
notch, so that the lateral ends of the clavicles are directed upward
(fig. 4). In adult whites the collar bones, when in a normal posi-
tion of rest, are almost or quite horizontally posed, but in adults of
8 In a fetus of the howling monkey (Alouatta pailiata, 68 mm. CR.) the nipples over-
lay the third ribs, whereas in the adult of the same species they were situated over the
second intercostal space.
JUNE 19, 1925 SCHULTZ: EVOLUTION OF MAN 253
primitive races they have descended less from their fetal position
(fig. 5). In view of the fact that in all monkeys and apes the clavi-
cles stand very steep and do not descend during growth, it seems
justifiable to conclude that the relatively low position of the shoul-
ders in the white race is phylogenetically a progressive condition.
HEAD
In absolute size, the brain part of the head in man surpasses that
of any other primate. However, if the head size is expressed in
relation to the size of the trunk, man is found to stand well within
ANT. TRUNK H.
Fig. 6—Exact body proportions in new-born macaque, man, and orang, all reduced
to the same anterior trunk height.
the range of this proportion among primates, and this, too, at any
stage of development. At birth, for example, as shown by figure 6,
the orang has a considerably larger head than man, and in relative
head size man shows little difference from the macaque. In all
primates the relative size of the head, especially its brain part, dimin-
ishes with advance in growth, but it has not decreased as far nm some
adult monkeys as it has in adult man. The average diameter of the
head (length, width, and height, divided by 3), expressed in per-
centage of the trunk length, amounts in man to 57 at birth and to
31 in adult life. These figures are equalled or even surpassed in
many primates, the new-born gibbon and orang each having an
index of 61, and among the lower forms the new-born spider monkey
has an index of 56. Among adults, Cebus apella exceeds man by 8
units in this proportion. These figures deprive man of the distinc-
254 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
tion of having the relatively largest head, and the analogous onto-
genetic process of diminishing relative head size in all primates con-
stitutes further support for the close relationship of man, apes, and
monkeys.
The eyes move relatively closer together with advance in growth,
not only in man, but in all the other primates (fig. 7). Early in
human fetal life the relative interocular width is as great as in adults
of most other groups of animals. In approximation of the eyes,
man stands at any age well within the range of variation exhibited
by his simian relatives. Many of the latter? have become more
highly specialized in this respect than man, whose interorbital sep-
FETUS, J0WEEKS ADULT
Fig. 7.—Head of a human fetus, 10 weeks old, compared with the head of an adult,
showing the decrease in the relative distance between the eyes with advancing growth.
tum is comparatively broad, particularly in some of the lower races,
such as the Hottentots.
The relation in size between the outer ear and the head changes
in all primates with advance in growth. Generally speaking, the ear
grows faster than the head, i.e., the relative size of the ear increases.
In the gibbon, for instance, the index expressing this relative ear
size amounts to 1.7 in a fetus of 21 mm. crown-rump length, 9.9 in
a newborn, and 13.6 in an adult. In a few primates, notably those
with small ears, the relative ear size, while increasing as in others
during prenatal growth, decreases after birth. In man the relative
ear size averages 1.3 in fetuses of 9 weeks, rises steadily to 5.9 at
birth, but drops thereafter to 4.7 in adults.° In orang-utan this
° The distance between the inner angles of the eye clefts, expressed in percentage
of the greatest distance between the zygomatic arches, amounts in man to 52 in fetuses
of 9 weeks, to 25 in newborns, and to 23 in adults; in the orang it is 19 in the newborn,
and 12 in the adult; in adult Lasiopyga rubella this index is 13.3, in L. callitrichus 15.7,
in adult Cebus capucinus 15.1, and in C. apella 16.3.
10 During old age there occurs often a secondary increase in ear size, which, however,
is due to a general flattening out of the ear cartilage and a decreased elasticity of the
skin rather than to actue! growth of the ear.
JUNE 19, 1925 SCHULTZ: EVOLUTION OF MAN 255
index was 2.5in a fetus of 145 mm. length, 5.3 in an infant, and only
1.4 in an adult. This late ontogenetic decrease in relative ear size
in man, orang, and probably in gorilla, i.e., in those forms which
have the smallest ears among the primates (fig. 8), may be inter-
preted as an indication that in phylogeny, too, the outer ear of man
and of these apes has independently become smaller, and is even
continuing in this tendency. This view is further strengthened by
the fact that the relative size and shape of the ear," as well as the
finer configuration of helix and ant-helix, are enormously variable in
man. It is generally conceded that great variability characterizes
CHIMPANZEE
Fig. 8—Side views of heads of anthropoid apes and man, to show the relative size of
the outer ears.
such structures as are undergoing a process of reduction and have
become rudimentary, as, for instance, the coccygeal vertebrae.
EXTREMITIES
The total length of the upper extremity is comparatively much
shorter in adult man than in any adult anthropoid ape. This limb
length, expressed in percentage of the anterior trunk height, amounts.
in man to 153, in chimpanzee to 180, in gorilla to 188, and in orang
to 224.2 Jncidentally, there exists a greater difference in this
proportion between orang and chimpanzee (44 units) than be-
tween the latter and man (27 units). In all the lower primates the
relative length of the upper limb is, as a rule, markedly shorter than
in man; the only exceptions to this consist in some highly specialized
forms, such as the spider monkeys (Ateles geoffroyt, 170) and some
woolly monkeys (Lagothrix infumata, 167). Man, therefore, occupies
a conservative position in regard to his relative arm length; however,
he far surpasses any other primate in relative length of his lower
1 The index of the relative ear size in adult white men ranges from 3.9 to 5.8. Negroes
have on an average slightly smaller ears than whites, but the ear is equally variable in
the two races. The ear shape is even more variable, the morphological ear index
ranging from 84 to 196 in whites and from 110 to 223 in Ainus (R. Martin, Lehrbuch der
Anthropologie, Jena, 1914).
12 Mollison, Th. 1910. Die Kérperproportionen der Primaten. Morphol. Jahrb. 42.
256 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
extremity. During individual development these different special-
izations In man and anthropoid apes make their appearance at quite
different periods. As shown by figure 9, in apes the extreme arm
length is already well defined at birth; on the other hand, the un-
equaled length of the lower limb, characteristic of adult man, is not
even indicated at birth, since the two apes slightly surpass the human
ae
we
z
=)
c
F
«
=
«
Ww
rs
Zz
<
ORANG-UTAN CHIMPANZEE MAN
Vig. 9.—Diagrammatie representation of the exact body proportions of new-born
orang, chimpanzee, and man, all reduced to the same anterior trunk height. Note
the different lengths of the limbs.
newborn in length of lower limb. In view of the fact that the typical
and marked lengthening in the upper extremity in apes develops so
much sooner than the unique increase of lower limb length in man
(fig. 10), it seems fair to assume that this human specialization is
phylogenetically a later acquisition than the former characteristic
of apes. This, naturally, is only a speculation, not a conclusive
argument; further advance in our knowledge of growth may bring
forth a different and more direct explanation or reasons for contra-
dicting and replacing the application of the recapitulation theory.
The posterior limbs of the jumping mouse are proportionately as
extremely lengthened as those of man. As in man, also, this extreme
condition is not reached until late in growth, since in new-born jump-
JUNE 19, 1925 SCHULTZ: EVOLUTION OF MAN 257
ing mice the posterior limbs are still as short as the anterior ones.
It is not to be doubted that the progenitors of these specialized
rodents had shorter posterior limbs and that their ontogeny repeats
their phylogeny in this respect. To be consistent, one also has to
conclude that the corresponding growth change in man points to
shorter legs in human ancestors.
The forearm grows faster than the upper arm, not only in man but in
apes, monkeys, and lemurs. Although the relation in length between
these two segments of the upper limb undergoes strikingly
similar ontogenetic changes in all primates, these
changes are more marked in many monkeys than
they areinman. Man (particularly the white race)
and gorilla have the relatively shortest forearms of
all-the primates. Inasmuch as the forearm is
always proportionately shorter in fetuses than in
adults, and since an extreme length of the forearm,
exceeding that of the upper arm, is only found in
late ontogenetic stages in some primates, such as
the gibbon or the Erythrocebus monkey, it can be
concluded that man and gorilla are conservative or
primal in regard to this proportion, while the gibbon
and others have a highly specialized forearm.
In connection with the development of the upper
extremity, there exists a point of special evolution-
ary interest. On the ulnar side of the forearm, close
to the wrist, sinus hairs occur in many (mostly
arboreal) mammals. They areimplantedinamore Fig.10.—Diagram-
or less distinct round elevation or hillock of the matic comparison
skin, receive a branch of the ulnar nerve, and are Saas Ber emace
¥ ody proportions of
regarded as touch organs. Beddard,* who studied aquit and new-born
their distribution among mammals, concludes that human, both reduced
they occur almost universally in prosimiae but are ee oe SERS SULIT:
entirely missing in monkeys and apes. Since then ne
they have been discovered in one of the primitive South American mar-
mosets (Hapale jacchus) and among Old World monkeys the author
found vibrissae in fetuses of the genus Colobus, as shown by figure 11;
in the adult of this monkey no trace of either these hairs or the
hillock is left. Apparently the only other primate in which this
structure occurs is man, in whom the hillock alone is formed at
SITTING HEIGHT
12 Beddard, F. E., 1902. Observations upon the carpal vibrissae in mammals. Proc.
Zool. Soc. London 1.
258 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
an early period of prenatal development and in only a small
percentage of cases (fig. 12). No sinus hairs are implanted in this
hillock in man, since it develops after the embryo has reached a
crown-rump length of 10 mm. and disappears again during the ninth
week of fetal life; at this early age no hair could yet be expected.
There can be no doubt that this rare and short-lived carpal hillock
Fig. 11—Hands of Colobus fetuses (1—Colobus abyssinicus, 112 mm. crown-rump:
length; 2—same species, 134mm. CR.; 83—C. angolensis 147 mm. CR.), showing the rudi-
mentary thumb and the carpal hillock and vibrissae.
in the human embryo is an atavistic structure without any possible
function.
There are a number of close correspondences in the development:
of the hand in all primates. These, like all the previously men-
tioned analogies in ontogenetic processes, are claimed, on the basis:
of the recapitulation theory, to uphold the direct relationship between
man and other primates. The hand is proportionately much broader
in a fetus than in the adult, not only in man but in all the other
primates as well. However, the human hand remains relatively
broader throughout growth than the hand of any monkey or ape.
In all primate fetuses the palmar touch pads have a very uniform,
arrangement, but they fade sooner and disappear more completely
JUNE 19, 1925 SCHULTZ: EVOLUTION OF MAN 259
in man and anthropoids than in the lower monkeys, especially those
of the New World, in which they often persist well marked to adult
ae Man has a proportionately longer
thumb than any monkey or ape,™
but in all primates the thumb be-
comes gradually shorter in relation
to the hand length as growth ad-
vances. In man this ontogenetic
reduction does not go so far as
Fig. 12.—Hand of a human fetus (22mm.
crown-rump length), showing the carpal
hillock at X.
it does in other primates, among
which the outer thumb has
nearly or completely disappeared
in two unrelated forms, the
African Colobus (fig. 11) and the
American Ateles monkey. In
56 out of 58 spider monkeys
which the author recently col-
lected, there was no trace of an
ae b i Fig. 13—Hand of an infantile spider
outer thumb at all at any post- monkey (Aleles geoffroyi) with atavistic
natal stage of growth. In one reappearance of a rudimentary outerthumb.
infantile (fig. 13) and one-adult Two carpal bones, the first metatarsal and
5 the fused phalanges of the thumb, are
specimen, however, there was
: sketched along side. Normally no trace of
a well-defined, although rudi- an outer thumb is found in these monkeys.
14 Only the baboons and some individuals among Capuchin monkeys approach
closely to man in regard to the relative thumb length. In baboons this relative measure-
ment seems to increase Jate in ontogeny in contrast to the growth changes in other
primates.
260
mentary, outer thumb on the left hand only.
JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
VOL. 15, Nond2
While normally
evolution has completely eliminated the thumb from the outer hand
Fig. 14.—Front view of a human
fetus (25mm. crown-rump length). The
middle toe is the longest, the great toe
short and abduced.
its primary position at the base
of the index finger. This on-
togenetic migration is most pro-
nounced in somewhat
less in other anthropoids and
man, while in platyrrhine mon-
keys no such shifting takes place
at all, the thumb _ persisting
in its typically fetal position
throughout life. In all primates
with the exception of a large
percentage of white men and
perhaps some other human races,
the fourth finger surpasses the
second in length. In negroes
this rule holds true likewise, and
since the thumb is proportion-
ately shorter and the hand
narrower in the negro than in
orang,
of this primate species, in in-
dividual cases a thumb may re-
appear as a beautiful example of
atavism, which proves that the
progenitor of Ateles once pos-
sessed a thumb. These thumb-
less hands must be considered as
highly specialized, in direct con-
trast to the hand of man with
its long thumb, the longest of any
primate, a human _ distinction
which is ontogenetically, and most
likely phylogenetically, the most
original or least changed condition.
In the course of growth the
attachment of the free thumb to
the palm shifts proximally from
Fig. 15.—Foot of a 3-year old white boy
with zygodactyly or skin fusion of second
and third toes. The web in this case ex-
tends even farther than the normal webbing
in the Siamang apes which derived their
name (Symphalangus syndactylus) from this
condition.
JUNE 19, 1925 SCHULTZ: EVOLUTION OF MAN 261
the white it can be stated that the negro has a more simian hand
than the white.
In the embryonic life of all primates the soles of the feet stand
nearly parallel to the sagittal body axis and thus face inward (figs.
4, 14). In the course of growth the feet rotate until the soles face
downward, but in the human newborn, as well as in adult mon-
keys, it is still chiefly the lateral edge of the foot which is placed on
the ground. This supinatorial position of the feet in the human
embryo is the cause of certain conditions in the early development
of the tarsus which must be regarded as primitive according to the
teachings of comparative anatomy.
ORANG-UTAN CHIMPANZEE GORILLA (GORILLA) GORILLA (BERINGER|) MAN
Fig. 16—Feet of adult anthropoid apes and man (Orang after a specimen in the
author’s collection; chimpanzee after O. Schlaginhaufen, Abhdl. u. Ber. KX. Zool. u.
Anthrop.-Ethnogr. Mus., Dresden, 11. 1907; first gorilla, after R. Hartmann, Der
Gorilla, Leipzig, 1880; second gorilla, after C. E. Akeley, Natural History 28. 1923).
Note the differences in relative length of the toes and in the place of attachment of the
great toe.
Among adult primates one finds widely different types of feet, but
in young human, ape, and monkey embryos the feet are strikingly
similar. At this stage of growth the great toe is considerably shorter
than the second and stands much abduced in all primates.
In monkeys and apes the middle toe surpasses all the others in
length, and it is interesting to note that man occasionally also con-
forms to this rule, although only for a very short transitory stage
in his ontogeny, since in a fair percentage of fetuses at the end of the
second or the beginning of the third month the middle toe is the
longest (fig. 14). Very soon thereafter the second toe becomes the
longest, and not until the fourth month does the great toe begin to
262 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
project farther than the others, and then only in a minority of cases.
Even in adult man the great toe is shorter than the second in a
considerable number of whites and in the majority of negroes.
Whereas in man, therefore, the great toe becomes proportionately
longer with advance in growth, in all other primates just the reverse
condition prevails, namely, a gradual ontogenetic shortening of the
relative hallux length.
The lateral toes (II to V) are proportionately short in all primate
embryos, but, while the digits become relatively still shorter in man
towards the completion of growth, they change in just the opposite
sense in monkeys and apes, in which these toes are at times ex-
tremely lengthened in the adult.
In all primates the great toe is found to branch from the sole, just
at the base of the second toe, in very early growth stages. This
embryonic position is retained throughout life in man, whereas in
all other primates the place of attachment of the great toe shifts
proximally, similar to the ontogenetic shifting in the attachment of
the thumb to the palm from the base of the index finger to a place
nearer the wrist. In the gorilla this shifting of the hallux is least
pronounced of any of the apes, whereas it is most extreme in the
orang, a greater difference existing in this respect between the latter
and gorilla than between gorilla and man (fig. 16). Other propor-
tions on the foot lead to similar conclusions; in regard to the relative
length of toes II and VY, for instance, there exists a greater gap, as
shown by figure 16, between the adult orang and gorilla (particularly
Gorilla beringeri) than between the latter and man, and the ex-
tremely short lateral toes of man are certainly no more specialized
than the exceedingly long ones of orang. Finally, if the distance
from the tip of the hallux to the heel is expressed in percentage of
the total foot length, an approximate relative great toe length is
obtained which in adults amounts to as little as 52 in orang, to as
much as 88 in gorilla, and to 100 in man, again a greater difference
between two apes than between an ape and man. Data such as
these are of importance in placing a proper value on some of the
human specializations. We know that the great toe in man has
become singularly strengthened and adduced, both phylogenetically
and ontogenetically. However, fully as marked a deviation from
the original type of great toe has occurred in orang, in which the
hallux has become rudimentary. This assertion is further borne out
by the frequent finding in this ape of a complete lack of a nail and
JUNE 19, 1925 SCHULTZ: EVOLUTION OF MAN 263
only one single phalanx in the great toe, symptoms of degeneracy
resembling closely those occurring rather frequently in the little toe
of man.
For a short time during the development of the human foot, just
after the digits make their appearance on the foot plate, the toes are
united by webs. This webbing between the second and third toes
is slightly more extensive and disappears somewhat later than that
between any of the others. A web between the second and third
toes exists normally in adults of many marsupials, insectivores and
prosimiae; furthermore in Cercocebus monkeys, in the Siamang apes,
and occasionally in some gibbons. It is of great interest in this con-
nection to find not infrequently skin fusion of the same toes in human
children (fig. 15) and adults, where this condition is known to be
inherited and is described under the term of syndactyly or, more
recently, zygodactyly. It is normal in the embryo, persists normally
throughout life in many mammals, including various primates, and
occasionally persists In man, representing an atavism, not an anomaly.
CONCLUSIONS
An almost endless number of other embryological findings, bearing
upon man’s evolution, could be added to these scattered data
which are largely the results of the author’s own investigations. It
is hoped, however, that the above discussion suffices to demonstrate
that embryology is capable of producing valuable corroboration of
evolutionary deductions from comparative anatomy and palaeontol-
ogy, as well as of shedding new light on ancestral conditions of the
human body.
The outstanding conclusions from these embryological studies can
be summarized by stating that the many striking resemblances
between man, ape, and monkey in early development, and their
frequently closely corresponding growth changes can only be under-
stood by assuming one common origin for all primates, including
man, from which they inherited the tendency for the same onto-
genetic processes which have become modified in many instances
through a variety of later specializations. Furthermore, there exists
ample evidence for the conclusion that the human body is in many
points less specialized and hence has remained in some parts phylo-
genetically, as well as ontogenetically, more original and “primitive”
than have various other primates.
264 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
GEOLOGY .—The detection of the Chipola fauna in the Marks Head
marl.! JULIA GARDNER, U. 8. Geological Survey.
The proposed correlation of the Marks Head marl with the Chipola
formation is based, not upon the discovery of a new fauna but upon
the new interpretation of an old—that of the Marks Head marl.
The Marks Head marl takes its name from Marks Head, one mile
west of north of Porter’s Landing on the Savannah River in Effing-
ham County, Georgia. The name was introduced into the literature
in 1908 by Earle Sloan? in the following section from Porter’s Landing:
(a) 64.0 feet—White, yellow and red sands in stratified beds of both fine and
coarse grained material.
(b) Thin broken line of vertebrate remains, and small pieces of
phosphate rock.
Miocene, Edisto phase.
(ec) 5.9 feet—Ledge of compact yellowish marl inclosing Pecten eboreus,
Ecphora quadricostata, numerous Anomias, ete.
Miocene Marks Head phase.
(d) 27.0 feet—Dun-colored mass of leached marl and indurated sands
inclosing many rounded concretions of carbonate of lime
encasing variable amounts of sand. Some concretions more
than two feet in diameter. The basal portion is a hard
concretionary layer (about a half foot thick) formed along
a highly irregular surface. Stratum (d) appears at the same
level as the Marks Head mar! at its type locality, one mile
northwest.
Oligocene, Parachucla phase.
(e) Oto 1.5 feet—Broken undulatory line of compact fine-grained sand-
stone; inclosing Ostrea mauricensis.
0 to 1.7 feet—White sands inclosing a large number of one species of
Pecten, and numerous shell fragments.
(f) 14.0 feet—Tl ine grained laminated shale with sand partings. The median
portion appears in the form of silicified concretions. The
base includes a line of rounded pebbles.
(g) Oto 6feet—A much-leached marl inclosing Carolia floridana, Pee-
tens, sharks teeth, ribs of Cetaceans, and a large number of
small discoidal quartz pebbles.
Combahee phase
(h) Above zero level appears 0 to 8 feet of a lamimated drab shale
with arenaceous partings. Incloses molds of the lucinidae,
and at Hudson Ferry impressions of the dwarf palmetto.
The section was later modified by Vaughan* to read:
1 Published with the permission of the Director of the U. 8. Geological Survey.
2 EaRLE Stoan, Catalogue of the Mineral Localities of South Carolina, South Carolina
Geol. Survey., ser. iv, Bull. No. 2, page 273, 1908.
3T. W. VauGHAN, Science, new ser., 31:833. 1910.
JUNE 19, 1925 GARDNER: CHIPOLA FAUNA 265
eet
F
. Pleistocene—white red and yellow sands, with phosphatic pebbles and
6
ZerheDEatenracments ati thelbaseam cena se meee con steers 64
5. Miocene—compact, yellow, fossiliferous marl (Duplin horizon)....... 6
4. Miocene—grayish, fossiliferous marl (Marks Head marl)............. 29
3. Fine-grained, laminated shale with sandy partings, a line of rounded
pebbles at the base...... ee Re ca rT me eee Berar ete 14
2. Oligocene—fossiliferous marl (Alum Bluff formation)................ 3
1. Laminated drab shale with arenaceous partings............. Sta aes 8
The descriptions of the sections suggest faunal zones which are
not obvious in the collections. The material sent in by Sloan and
Vaughan in 1907 from the type locality at Marks Head includes
Ostrea normalis (= Ostrea mauricensis auctores), the common Pecten
acanikos, and Carolia jfloridana. The three species are also asso-
ciated in bed No. 4 of Vaughan’s Porter’s Landing section in material
sent in by him in 1909. To be sure, Carolia floridana is compara-
tively rare in the upper bed and exceedingly abundant in bed No. 2
of Vaughan, g of Sloan. Later collections by Stephenson in the
vicinity of Porter’s Landing have confirmed the association of the
species in question. Pecten acanikos and Carolia floridana and Pec-
ten acanikos and Ostrea normalis are coexistant at a number of locali-
ties in the Chipola formation in northern Florida. However, Carolia
floridana has not been recognized at any horizon other than the
Chipola, so, from an examination of the literature and the fossils, it
seems that all of Sloan’s Parachucla phase belongs to the Chipola
epoch, and that the Marks Head fauna may be treated as a unit.
The first correlation of the Porter’s Landing section on the following
basis was made in 1910 by T. Wayland Vaughan. “The Marks
Head marl, which was first named by Sloan, and is represented by
bed No. 4 of the section (beds d and e of Sloan’s section) contains
specimens of the genus Carolia which suggests an Oligocene‘ age, but
every other indentifiable species may be Miocene, and only three of
them range downward into the Oligocene. Nine of the species are
not known below the Miocene, while the presence of Turritella
aequistriata Conrad, Calliostoma aphelium Dall, Ostrea mauricensis
Gabb, and Pecien marylandicus Wagner, definitely point to a horizon
low in the series, approximately equivalent to the Calvert formation
of Maryland. This interpretation was followed by Veatch and
Stephenson in the Geology of the Coastal Plain of Georgia published
as Bulletin No. 26 of the Geological Survey of Georgia. C. Wythe
Cooke, however, in unpublished field notes suggested a correlation
of the Marks Head with the Alum Bluff on the evidence of the lith-
4 The lower Miocene of modern usage.
266 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
TABLE 1.—Or1GInaL DETERMINATIONS OF FossILS FROM THE Marks Heap Maru*
afe|a 148
Ele) oe [8
ley [een ee
s|g|sE | 8
i]
Z/2| 2a] 8
. a2) || 2 atl)
een al Se |S
ce | ee sts 1) 8 :
STRATIGRAPHIC RANGE AND Lae | ese) lf ce AD 5 a
ea) : (ae j 2/3)2 ok 3 a
a a relent rye || cl
pommel |
A) a | a | sighs z
a > > = A
B/ 8/8] es )e.|§
illeaed es | Be | a
les ese! BE |e
S12 2 tors onsen ie
a “ ee a a a
Turritella aequistriata Conrad | Jericho, N. J. x
Neverita duplicata var. perca- | Miocene to Recent x
losa Conrad
Calliostoma aphelium Dall Jones Wharf and Calvert x
Cliffs, Md.
Calliostoma sp. x | ex
Yoldia laevis Say
Arca limula Conrad Miocene and Pliocene x
Ostrea mauricensis Gabb Eocene, Oligocene, lower | x | x} x Xx
Miocene of Jericho, N. J.
Pecten marylandicus Wagner Jones Wharf, Md. ete. Ka | xoN sxag ex x
Carolia sp. (floridana Dall?) x x
Mytilus conradinus d’Orb. Throughout the Miocene Xen exe ee
Astarte yo. (also in the upper x
horizon at Porters) :
Venericardia perplana var. ab- | Miocene of York River to x
breviata Conrad Pliocene
Phacoides trisulcatus Conrad Oligocene to Pliocene. x
Phacoides crenulatus (Conrad) | Miocene of Jericho, N. J., x
to Duplin horizon, N.C. : i
Phacoides sp. Jones Wharf, Md., to Dup- 36 J
lin horizon, N.C. ;
Cardium laqueatum Conrad x }
Dosinia sp. x ‘
Macrocallista sp. x
Strigilla flecuosa Say Oligocene to Recent x ;
Strigilla carnaria (Linn.) Hitherto only Recent x }
Donaz 0. sp. Xx |x ‘
Mactra sp. (hinge of large sp.) x
Spisula n.sp. x
Corbula n. sp. x
Balanus 5) exo
* Geological Survey of Georgia, Bull. 26, p. 365.
ology’ “The Marks Head marl is fine gray sand containing some
nodular caleareous concretions and lenses of brittle fullers earth. It
5 C. W. Cookn, Unpublished field notes, April 22, 1922.
JUNE 19, 1925
GARDNER: CHIPOLA FAUNA
267
does not differ materially in appearance from the Alum Bluff forma-
tion, and I should be inclined to include it in the Alum Bluff if the
paleontologic evidence is not conflicting.
”
The fossils on which the age determination was based are very
TABLE 2.—ReviseD DETERMINATIONS OF FossiILs rRoM THE Marks Heap Maru
NAME
Turritella alcida bicarinata Gardner mss
Natica (Cryptonatica ) sp. cf. N. (C.)
platabasts Gardner mss
Calliostoma sp. ind. ef. C. aphelium Dall
Calliostoma sp.
Scapharca staminata Dall?
Ostrea normalis Dall
Pecten acanikos Gardner
Carolia floridana Dall
Mytilis conradinus d’Orbigny?
Astarte sp. ind.
Venericardia (Pleromeris) sp. ind. cf. V.
(P.) perplana abbreviata Conrad?
Phacoides (Parvilucina) trisulcatus Con-
rad?
Phacoides (Parvilucina) sp. cf. P. (P.)
piluliformis Dall
Phacoides (Here) sp. cf. P. (H.) parawhit-
fieldi Gardner mss
Cardium sp. ind.
Dosinia sp. ef. D. chipolana Dall
Macrocallista sp. ind.
Strigilla n. sp.
Donaz n. sp.
Mactra sp. ind.
Spisula n. sp.
Corbula n. sp.
Balanus sp.
STRATIGRAPHIC RANGE AND OCCURRENCE
Chipola formation (‘‘Sopehoppy lime-
stone’’) and Oak Grove Formation
Chipola formation
Jones Wharf and Calvert Cliffs, Md.
Chipola formation including the “Sop-
choppy limestone”’
Chipola formation (‘‘Sopchoppy lime-
stone’’ and ‘‘Hawthorn beds’’)
Chipola formation including the ‘‘Sop-
choppy limestone”’
Chipola formation (‘‘Sopchoppy lime-
stone’’)
Chipola formation (‘‘SSopchoppy lime-
stone’’)
Chipola formation including the ‘‘Sop-
choppy limestone”’
Oak Grove Formation
Oak Grove Formation
Chipola formation including the ‘Sop-
choppy limestone”’
imperfect and, in the absence of a good reference fauna, identification
would be difficult. Later detailed work upon the fauna of the Chipola
formation particularly the “‘Sopchoppy limestone”’ phase, has thrown
a new light upon the Marks Head fauna. The original list as pub-
lished by the Georgia Geological Survey follows together with the
268 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 12
revisions required by our increased knowledge of the lower Miocene
fauna.
The affinities of the Marks Head fauna, particularly of the dom-
inant elements, are so clearly defined that they offer little ground for
discussion. Possibly the late Chipola coast in the Floridian region
was outlined by sand bars and spits similar to those off the east
coast today and the partial isolation offered by those inlets and bays
may account for the provincial character of the late Chipola faunas.
The Chipola fauna seems to have been much more widely distrib-
uted than might be expected from its sketchy occurrence in the
environs of the type locality. It has been recognized at a depth of
4325 feet to 4511 feet in the well at Brownsville, Texas, and even so far
south as Tampico. The northward extension of the fauna, however,
is of particular interest since it approximates the margin of another
faunal province.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Dr. L. Sinpersrern lectured at the Laboratory of the Department of
Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie Institution, on April 29, on the subject Some
Cosmological consequences of the finite universe.
The annual field excursion of the Petrologists Club took place on Saturday,
May 9. The feldspar quarries northwest of Ellicott City, Maryland, which
locally show the alteration of orthoclase to albite, were visited.
Dr. E. A. Eckuarp?, who for six years has been in charge of the Sound
Laboratory of the Bureau of Standards, has resigned this position to join the
staff of the newly organized research department of the Marland Oil Com-
pany of Oklahoma.
Dr. §. F. Buaxe, of the Bureau of Plant Industry, is spending several
weeks at museums in Paris, Geneva and London for the purpose of studying
type specimens of certain American species of plants.
Mrs. AcNrs CHAsg, agrostologist of the Department of Agriculture, re-
turned recently from an extended trip to Brazil. Over 2300 specimens of
plants were collected, chiefly near Pernambuco, Bahia, Minas Geraes, Rio
de Janeiro and on Mt. Itatiaya.
Through the efforts of Dr. Wrt1Am Scuaus of the Division of Insects,
U.S. National Museum, the large collection of lepidoptera of Paul Dognin, Les
Pipots, France, has been purchased and presented to the National Museum.
This collection contains over cighty thousand specimens of moths and _ but-
terflies, a large number of which are types of American species.
S. H. Carucart, geologist of the Geological Survey, has resigned to en-
gage in geological work in Argentina.
Joun 8. Brown, geologist of the Geological Survey, has resigned to engage
in commercial work.
ee
>
h
y s
3 )
= Fe
=> F aan
hye +
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PaPEeRs
Biology.—Embryological evidence of the evolution of man. Avotrn H
Geology.—The detection of the Chipola fauna in the Marka Head m
Gardner iy js cesses opiek bo tana a ese ety cities pal eibian Cigees ekt ee
Scrmntivic NOTES AND NEWS..........00cceceseceecrcssesceces
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Varnon L. Knutoaa, National Research Council.
Corresponding sich Francis B, SItsBEx, sees of Stand
ay
JuLY 19, 1925 No. 18
JOURNAL
OF THE
ASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
2. BOARD OF EDITORS
S E. P. Kru _ DF. Hewerr S. J. MaucHiy
NATIONAL MUSEUM ‘ GEOLOGICAL BURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A. RoHwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. A. GoLDMAN G. W. Srosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
“9 R. F. Griaes ~ ‘J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
6 E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya AND GuILFoRD AVES,
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., pnder toes,
Act of August 24, 1912. Accep’ tance for mailing at special rate of postage pr: ar
in Section 1102, he of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 18 y
Journal of the Washington ‘Academy of Sciences : ‘
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academ
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washi
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated So
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourNA
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the s
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years.
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the -
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author,
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. Reference
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilita
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbere:
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Sruneta
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures —
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be ~
partly met by the author. ; a ae
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors:
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the edit
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. bh cw: ‘
Authors’ Reprints.—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00 Oy
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ae ta
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or rep
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. 4 :
The rate of Subscription per volume is............00.000- FE aeokea cater
Semi-monthly: numbers ca’ soo eden a ae oa da woke ake eee
Monthly numbers : be
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,”
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. — Pe (
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim |
within thirty days after date of the following issue. %,
“Volume I, however, from June 19, i911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Spe :
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy __ af
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 JuLy 19, 1925 No. 138
PHYSICS.—Some remarks on two-coupled multiply periodic systems,
the statistics of quantum theory, and the theory of dispersion.
G. Breir, Department of Terrestrial Magnetism, Carnegie
Institution of Washington. (Communicated by L. A. Bauer.)
1. The quantum theory postulates the substitution of discrete states
which are to replace the continuous manifolds of the classical theory.
However, it says very little about the nature of the interactions which
take place between quantized systems. In fact, the only cases about
which definite postulates have been made are absorption of radiation
in quanta by an atom put in black body radiation, which has been
treated by Einstein,! and the behavior of free electrons put in black
radiation. The two cases can be considered as special cases of the
postulate of Einstein and Ehrenfest. Similar considerations concern-
ing the nature of interactions between sound and light waves have
been made by Schrédinger.*
The writer has performed some calculations on a purely classical
basis which seem to have a bearing on the nature of actual (quantum
theory) interactions. These calculations deal with a somewhat more
general case than that considered by Kramers and Heisenberg? in their
recent paper on the scattering of light and optical dispersion and agree
in a general way with their results, though the point of view taken by
the writer as well as the conclusions drawn are slightly different.
It has been pointed out by Burgers‘ that the problem of optical
dispersion can be reduced to a consideration of coupled systems, and
that as a consequence of this the purely formal quantum theory does
1A. Erystein, Physik. Zeit., 1917; W. Pauut, Zeit. f. Physik.,18:273. 1923; A. Ein-
STEIN and P. ExRENFEXT, Zeit. f. Physik, 19:301. 1923.
2 E. ScHRODINGER, Physik, Zeit., 25: 89-94. 1924.
? Kramers and HEISENBERG, Zeit. f. Physik, 31: 681. 1925.
* Burcers, Dissertation, Leiden.
269
270 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
not account for optical dispersion in a proper fashion, giving rise to
absorption bands at frequencies corresponding to the dynamical rather
than the quantum values. This fact makes one suspect that the fail-
ure of classical perturbation theory in the case of dispersion forms only
a special case of a general deficiency, and that by presenting the prob-
lem of dispersion in the form of a problem on coupled systems in the
manner of Burgers one may hope to generalize the nature of interac-
tions between a light wave and an atom to the case of coupled
systems.
2. We consider, therefore, two non-degenerate coupled systems, the
angular variables w,, the momenta J;, and the energy function H of the
first being
(wi, et) Wh) Ji, tg ps) HE Gh, peo Jn)
and for the second
(Wat. fa ee Wn+m) Deas at Jeers) He Geass ar Noe)
In the absence of coupling, the motions of the two systems progress
independently. The presence of coupling is manifested by the pres-
ence of a perturbation term
AF (Ji, th AR ier Whi 8 Wa +m)
in the total energy
HF BS ae (1)
The effect of the perturbations may be calculated either by the method
of Born and Pauli or by the method used by Van Vleck in studying the
interaction of light waves and multiply periodic systems. We prefer
in what follows to use the latter’s method because it enables one to use
the initial conditions of the system very much more readily than the
method of Born and Pauli.®
The method used by Van Vleck is based on the fact that for the
unperturbed system the transformation from the Cartesian coordinates
and momenta to the angular variables and their corresponding
momenta is a contact transformation, and also upon the theorem that
Hamilton’s canonical equations are invariant under a contact trans-
5 Tn the latter method new variables are introduced at each stage of the approxima-
tion. Strictly speaking, it is questionable whether the dispersion problem can be
always treated as a multiply periodic system even if the unperturbed system is multiply
periodic. The manner in which the new variables w and J depend on initial conditions
is not clear unless it is especially determined, and for our present purpose we shall prefer
an explicit calculation.
JULY 19, 1925 BREIT: MULTIPLY PERIODIC SYSTEMS 271
formation. The calculations are performed, therefore, always for
quantities w and J which have the same significance in terms of the
Cartesian coérdinates and momenta throughout. This, of course, is
true only provided the transformation function w does not involve the
time explicitly. Such is the case for all systems which are condition-
ally periodic.
It must be mentioned, however, that in another connection the
method followed by Born and Pauli possesses certain advantages over
that of Van Vleck. ‘Thus, if we are concerned with the condition of
the two systems while they perturb each other, the method of Born
and Pauli enables us to find new angular variables which are suited
for the quantization of the whole coupled system. On the other hand,
if we are interested in the effect on the two systems of having been
exposed to the perturbations arising from their coupling after the cou-
pling has been interrupted, then Van Vleck’s method is preferable.
If we are interested in a given function of the Cartesian coordinates,
both methods may be used and they must both give the same result.
Before discussing our general case we shall illustrate the meaning of
the quantities used in the special case of a linear oscillator having one
degree of freedom. Here, the energy function H has the expression
i = Se SOE (1.1)
where g is the abscissa of the oscillating particle and p is the corre-
sponding momentum. The angular variable w is
sin (m 2 q/ yn J Q/r) (CL):
1)
~ De
and the corresponding momentum
d= Aig JalyKy GES)
If we should apply our calculations to this case, they will give us
changes in the quantities w, J, where J is obtained from (1.3) with H
expressed by means of (1.1) [in terms of g, p] and w is obtained from
(1.2) on substituting this value of J. The meaning of w and J in this
as well as the general case is thus that of certain explicit functions of w
and J, the type of function being, of course, different for different
dynamical systems.
®E.T. WHitraker, Analytical Dynamics, p. 309.
272 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
It is hardly necessary to state that as soon as the nature of the per-
turbation function F’ in (1) is known in terms of the ordinary codrdi-
nates g; and their corresponding momenta p;, a direct substitution by
means of such equations as (1.2) and (1.3) gives the expression of F in
terms of the w; and J;. Since the codrdinates are multiply periodic
functions of the w; with period 1, we may write
ia HN exp 2 7 i w, (2)
where
Nts SV tAG RE eee (1.2)
Wa aaa Sl TW ie eon tener (2.2)
and where it is supposed that the 7. may take the values zero and all
the positive and negative integral values. The A, are functions of the
J’s only, and the w; may be written as
Wi= wit + «6 (2.3)
where the w; are functions of the J’s only and the ¢ are constants.
Hamilton’s canonical equations are
dJx
a = —h D2 At; exp(271w,) (3)
dw, OA, ; aiUel, 1 186.)
—_— — Xr pai >< (ee r a
a > SI, exp(2miw,) + ayy (4)
We expand
Jy = Jy? + ASO + 2,2 + +> (10)
We = Wy + AW, + Awe + +5 + (5.2)
and substitute in (3), (4). Comparing coefficients of \, we obtain the
system of equations
Ee 5.31
d= se oem
dJi.
=e = — 2ri D> (A exp2riw,) (5.32)
dJ,.
: a) fe)
— a jp — x —S) = =
ai 2ri | >) (IU a + ow =) (1A.exp2xin,) | (5.33)
and
JuLy 19, 1925 BREIT: MULTIPLY PERIODIC SYSTEMS 273
dws (5.41)
dw, =) cr )
i ©), 2 5.42)
dt D(a Tel ING Cee) | ee
where the suffix o indicates that ey the Teg aes values of
the w and the J must be substituted. Having determined J;! from
(5.32) we can substitute it into (5.42), and having then determined wx!
we substitute it and J;! into (5.33) which determines J;? ete.
We suppose that the coupling between the two systems has been
established at the time
b SS tle
and find from (5.32) that
JO = Dar A, w2 [exp2ziw,(t,.) — exp2riw,(t)] (5.5)
Substituting this in (5.42) and integrating we have
wi (sx, (5°) (epzeiw wt)
7, 1) — E a4 (
ps ce ip, (a) (Ode) = Caeeaair te)
A, 0,
me Oe
Substituting this and (5.5) into (5.33) and integrating
< } , A OA, 0 (Ay exp2riw,-(to)
Ho = — Bi hn iL? Bene ae CG il Qniw,
oie.
(exp2riw; — exp2zmiw,(to)) — (2m(w, + w,))— (exp2m(w, + w,))
to) exp2riw, (ty) (5.6)
5 . = C -1 fe) 7! 5
— exp2ri(w,(ts) + we(td)))] + 2A Aya (1 _ ) (cxp(2riw,(ts)) x
| (Qriv,)-* (2riw,(t — to) exp27iw, — [exp2riw, — exp2ziw,(to)]) }(5.7)
Thus it is seen that if the coupling has been established at the time
¢t = ft, and interrupted at the time ¢, then on the classical theory we
should expect in general a rather complex result for the resultant
change in the state of the system from the oneit would have had if it
had not been perturbed during that interval.
In the above calculation the phase of the motion has a very strong
274 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
effect. This is quite proper from the point of view of classical theory.
On the quantum theory, however, we have indications only of statisti-
cal interpretations of the phase, and since we want to establish a con-
nection between expectations of classical dynamics and quantum jumps
we must eliminate effects of phase in the above results. One way of
doing this is to consider forced vibrations. Since, however, a treatment
of forced vibrations for a multiply periodic system is connected with
difficulties such, for example, as the falling of an electron into the
nucleus, we prefer to use the Rayleigh-Lorentz method of interrup-
tions which for the case of a classical linear resonator is equivalent to
forced vibrations.
We consider a number of systems and we wish to know their average
state at the time ¢. We suppose that perturbations in these systems
have begun to take place some time before ¢ and we assume that the
selection of the starting time is governed by the laws of chance so
that if
then the probability of T being between T and T + dT is
ft
sy ea
e alr) (6.1)
We thus find averaging (5.7) that
(A,A,,C(w,)) texp2zi(w, + w,) (7)
where
271 ACG
SSS al
1 + 27i Ty w, (7.1)
C(,) =
This expression for J/,“°) contains periodic as well as constant terms.
The constant terms are by far the more important because they cor-
respond to the case
eee pn) (8)
(74 = — wT; = = T2' etc.)
and because C(w, + w,,) becomes 2717’, which is > > (#, + w,,)— pro-
ie
JULY 19, 1925 BREIT: MULTIPLY PERIODIC SYSTEMS 275
vided the mean period of interruptions is considerably greater than
the important period of the motion. We thus see that terms which
give large average effects on J;, may be collected into the approximate
sum
re) , :
LO2- Dan 57 Ar A Clo)» 2ni Te (9)
col!
Here again, only those terms are great for which
on O (10)
This may be interpreted as a resonance of one part of the dynamical
system to another (approach of degeneration). In the case of the
influence of a light wave on an atom, this means the approximate
equality of the frequency » of the incident light wave to an overtone
w, of the atom.
3. According to the view of Burgers referred to above, the problem
of optical dispersion is mathematically equivalent with that of a
coupled system. We should like to emphasize the importance of this
view also in another connection. It is well known that in classical
electrodynamics there are two ways of discussing interactions between
electrical systems. One simply makes use of the supposedly known
laws connecting the electric and magnetic fields with the distribution
of charges and currents. The other invokes the concepts of electro-
magnetic energy and momentum. The two ways are equivalent and
not at all exclusive. Are there analogies to both of these procedures
on the quantum theory? So far it has been customary to deal only
with the second (field energy, field momentum) point of view. If,
however, the direct point of view be also manageable, we must be able
to treat the following problem:
A sending atom S is coupled to a receiving atom R by means of the
dispersing atom D. Required: The effect of D on the absorption of
R.
The state of the medium between S, D, and R matters only inasmuch
as it effects R, and this is always true for actual observation because
all experiments deal ultimately with material particles and because our
observation of a field always depends on experiments with matter.
On the classical theory nothing need be said about the electromagnetic
energy or momentum in discussing this problem. Similarly we
may suspect that if a proper formulation of quantum theory be found,
the same would be true for it as well.
276 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
Since quantum theory is concerned with sudden transitions in the
J’s, it seems natural to consider our problem from the point of view of
probabilities of transitions in the quantum states of R. Formula
(9) gives the main contributions to steady changes in J; which we
would expect on the classical theory. In order to apply this formula
to our case we consider our system symbolically as
((S) + (R)) + (D)
meaning by this that (D) is first thought of as separated from (S) +
(R) and then its coupling is taken into account by means of (9).
Now in calculating the effect of D on R it is obviously useful to in-
troduce the auxiliary quantity called the electric moment of D, but
otherwise it has no significance. It may be shown using Van Vleck’s
calculations in a manner analogous to that of § 2 (or else considering
the problem as a special case of § 2) that if the wave due to S is of the
form E,cos2z7(vt — €)) and D is a triply periodic atom having a charge
— e, then the averaged changes of the first order in FL’, caused by the
wave in D are
To
1 x
Av er Bs 2 SG pill.
7 A, exp2zi(w,t = vt + €, = e9) (10)
ee: T,
— ] >K
A,H mek, Da il,
w,A, exp2zi(w, + vt + €, = €) (11)
and letting us use our previous notation for C(w,), the second order
contributions are
(A, A. C@, = »)
oJ;
aT zaliee 5
Ady = — 2 ia Da. Clo, = »y + wo, = »v) fe
— (7, + 7) C@s = ») Ap = exp2ri G +o, =p = pvt
+e te, ae (12)
(A, Clo, = »))
oJ;
2 EY? p ;
Ane = — — DC, se) Seo ae 7) fe 7 A,
OAc > AAG:
1/ tae Va ~~
—w, Clw, = ») 7’ Ap ad, 5)
[Cl@, * ») + Co, = »)] X
JULY 19, 1925 BREIT: MULTIPLY PERIODIC SYSTEMS 277
7 aul exp 27i[(o, = (OO ESD SS y) t — G a € Se Gy Sz €0] (13)
At the same time the average change in the x coordinate of the elec-
tron is
as IDE
AX = = ln = au, (Clo, == DN = (Gu a) Cl@a ==) ><
OA. !
Ay aj 4 exp 2ri [(, + o, = vy) t +e, + e = &] (14)
U
The quantity Ax when multiplied by —e give the average electric
moment.
The structure of the terms in (12) and (14) is very similar. The
terms for which w, +,’ = 0 in (14) give contributions to the polariza-
tion which are synchronous with the incident wave. As remarked by
Kramers and Heisenberg and as has been first published by Van
Vleck, other terms than those of frequency » are present in the polariza-
tion. Kramers and Heisenberg attach a real significance to such terms
for which w,’ — »=0. Numerically such terms are great. However,
we must note that the corresponding terms in (12) give periodic con-
tributions to AJ,. It may be that this must be considered a reason
for not attaching a physical significance to such terms because they
do not give rise to anything reminding one of a quantum jump.
We may be permitted to say now a few words about the theory of
optical dispersion advanced by Kramers and the speculations of Born’)
on the same subject.
We should like to point out that the substitutions of T'(n + 7,n)
for [C7]? and of s(n + 7,n) for (7,) are arbitrary (especially the latter).
These substitutions involve an element not included in Bohr’s original
correspondence principle, the spirit of which is given by Born’s for-
mula (29). The original idea seemed to be to obtain quantum quan-
tities from classical quantities by taking proper averages. Kramers’s
formula regards a quantum quantity (the electric polarization) as an
average of a combination of quantum quantities, the most important
of these being the actual emission or absorption frequency. Another
difference between the procedure of Kramers and older applications
of the correspondence principle lies in the fact that the older applica-
tions dealt always with an actual jump of the atom. This is so in
the calculations of frequency, intensities of lines and selection rules.
7 M. Born, Z2it. f. Paysik, 26, p. 379 and especially pp. 389, 390, 394.
278 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
In the application of Kramers the negative virtual oscillators are
given a prominent role because it is desired to use the results for atoms
which do not perform jumps. Is not this analogous to interpreting
the fundamental formula
as meaning that in the lowest state the atom emits a negative frequency
y haia
It seems to the writer to be worth while to consider the meaning of
such formulas as (9) and (12) so far as possible extensions to quantum
theory are concerned. This has been done by Born (I. c.) in his for-
mula (33). The obvious similarity of (9) and (12) and the connection
of (12) with Einstein’s B”, terms make one desire to have a similar
interpretation of (9). Such an interpretation must satisfy the laws of
statistical mechanics if we generalize Einstein’s A”, correctly.
If Born’s extension (33) is correct, we have the same state of things
in an elastic body coupled to an atom as we have in Einstein’s original
problem. If such is the case, we must surmise the general applica-
bility of Einstein’s scheme to such cases.
The relation of this to Born’s point of view may be seen from the
fact that Einstein’s B", may then be thought of as desirable on the
Correspondence Principle from (12) and in the generalized case from
(7) and (9). This involves an integration over a spectrum of yin (12).
We know physically that the singularities of (12) are such values of »
which are equal to the absorption (quantum) frequencies and not to
the classical frequencies. Therefore we must similarly suppose in (7)
and (9) that if our H, and H,, systems have two nearly equal quan-
tum jumps a large probability of interaction results and that this
probability is given by a dispersion relation the true meaning of
eles li ion of formula bein Li Le :
as ae € s rS10 i € — — = 5
pays ae teehee AL why, AW=AWo
8 Dr. A. E. Ruark, in a conversation with the writer mentioned that such a
possibility of interpreting v has also occurred to him as being a possible one a priort.
JULY 19, 1925 FERGUSON: MAGNETIC FERROUS OXIDE 279
PHYSICS.—Note on the use of a light filter in interferometry. Joun
BrigHt Frerauson, Department of Chemistry, University of
Toronto.
The Rayleigh-Zeiss type of interferometer! is the type most fre-
quently used in chemical work. It may be used either as a zero
instrument or as a measuring instrument, and for most purposes
white light is employed since the chromatic bands formed by the
latter enable one to identify the reference band.
When the present writer used a tungsten lamp as a source of light,
it was noted that the eyes soon tired and that the identification of the
bands became a difficult task. This source of trouble was largely
eliminated by the use of a light filter which absorbed a large part of
the yellow and blue light. The potassium dichromate, neodymium
nitrate liquid filter worked very well. The effect of this filter is to
decrease the illumination of the back ground and to make the green
and red portions of the chromatic bands purer in color.
Visual acuity is known to be increased by the use of monochromatic
light and to decrease as the brightness of the background increases
within certain limit,? so that the beneficial effect of the filter is quite
in accord with our present-day knowledge of the factors affecting
visibility.
CHEMISTRY.—A Magnetic form of ferrous oxide. JoHN BricgHtT
Fereuson, Department of Chemistry, University of Toronto.
Metallic iron undergoes a magnetic change when it is heated and
above 790°C., it is no longer magnetic.!. Similarly ferric oxide pos-
sesses a magnetic inversion at 678” and ferro-ferric oxide also an inver-
sion of like character at 530°%. If the magnetic properties are atomic
in character,* ferrous oxide might therefore be expected to show a
magnetic inversion in the same temperature region.
Pure ferrous oxide was prepared for the first time in 1921 by Wohler
and Balz.* They report that their product was non-magnetic in
character. Our own products’ were also non-magnetic. in character.
They were prepared above 749° and contained ferro-ferric oxide.
In our study of the transformation of these phases into free iron and
ferro-ferric oxide and the subsequent recombination of the reaction
products, we noted the following abnormal behavior. During the
1 For a description of this instrument see L. H. Apams, This JouRNAL, 5: 265. 1915,
or Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc. 37: 1181. 1915.
* LuckxiesH, Color and its applications, New York, 1921 and Elliott, Amer. Journ.
Psych. 38:97. 1922.
1 Honpa, Science Reports, Tohoku Imp. Univ. 11:119. 1922.
2 Sosman and Hostetter, Journ. Amer. Chem Soc. 38: 807. 1916.
4 SosMAN, This JouRNAL, 7:55. 1917.
4 Honda, loc. cit.
> Wou LER and Batz, Zeitschr. Electrochem. 27: 406. 1921.
5 Fercuson, This JouRNAL, 13: 275. 1923.
280 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
recombination of the free iron, the decrease in the magnetic perme-
ability did not correspond to the decrease in the free iron content of the
sample. Charges containing small amounts of free iron were quite mag-
netic after heating for five hours at 610°, but after a similar heat treat-
ment at 630° the magnetic property largely vanished. In one case the
behavior was of this character though the charge contained no free iron
at either temperature. These results would seem to indicate that
there is a form of ferrous oxide which is magnetic in character.
Whether this form has a stability range from about 630° to the transi-
tion temperature at approximately 570°, or whether it occurs as an
unstable phase, is a question which cannot now be answered. The
probable occurrence of a magnetic inversion in ferrous oxide which is
here indicated, is of itself an interesting point when considered with
the magnetic behavior of iron and the other oxides of iron.
PETROLOGY.—The mineralogical phase rule. N. L. Bowrn, Geo-
physical Laboratory.
In 1911 V. M. Goldschmidt, in connection with his study of contact
metamorphism in the Kristiania region, enunciated a mineralogical
phase rule which was stated by him as follows: ‘“The maximum num-
ber of solid minerals that can co-exist in stable equilibrium is equal
to the number of individual components that are contained in
the minerals if the singular temperatures of transition points are
excluded.””!
Goldschmidt developed it by consideration of solid phases in contact
with their saturated solution, a method which has the advantage that
it is probably a real picture of what goes on in contact metamorphic
processes. It may be developed in a somewhat more general form
which includes transformations for which the aid of a solution need not
be postulated. Thus the phase rule states that the number of phases
plus the number of degrees of freedom exceeds the number of com-
ponents by 2
ptf=ece+4+2
Having regard for conditions under which only solid phases are
present, and taking for illustration a 3-component system, we could
have at most 5 solid phases. This condition could occur only when the
temperature and pressure had each a definite value, and since the prob-
ability is very small that the conditions of metamorphism of any given
1 Die Lontaktmetamorphose im Kristianiagebiel. Vid.-Selsk. Skrifter I. Math. Naturw.
Kl. No. 1, p. 125. 1911.
JuLY 19, 1925 BOWEN: THE MINERALOGICAL PHASE RULE 281
rock were exactly those corresponding to these values we may not
expect to find a 3-component rock containing 5 solid phases in equi-
librium. If there were only 4 solid phases present the system would be
univariant, that is, there would be a range of temperatures and pres-
sures at which this would represent an equilibrium condition, but
for any definite temperature there would be a definite corresponding
pressure at which the 4 solid phases could exist. Again, the random
conditions of metamorphism cannot be expected to show for any
temperature the requisite precise corresponding pressure. We may
not, therefore, expect to find 4 solid phases in a three-component rock
at equilibrium. On the other hand, if there are only 3 solid phases pres-
ent, the system is divariant, that is, for any definite pressure there is a
range of temperatures and for any definite temperature, a range of
pressures at which this condition can exist. The random conditions
attendant upon any particular example of metamorphism cannot
but meet these conditions. Therefore the maximum number of solid
phases that may be expected in a 3-component rock is 3. The 3-
component rock has been chosen merely by way of illustration, and it
is easy to see that whatever the number of components chosen it would
be found that the maximum number of solid phases to be expected at
equilibrium under any random conditions of metamorphism is equal
to the number of components. A greater number of phases, assuming
that they are in actual contact, indicates a failure to obtain equilib-
rium. Sofarthe assumptions involved are thoroughly justifiable and
though their application to rocks has: been criticized adversely, for
example, by Johnston and Niggli, actual experience with metamorphic
rocks has afforded a very considerable degree of confirmation of the
results to be expected, and the mineralogical phase rule has been a
very useful guide in the study and classification of metamorphic rocks
in the hands of a number of workers, among whom may be mentioned
Goldschmidt himself, Eskola, and Tilley.
Since the number of components actually present in a rock is usually
rather large and since systems of many components are difficult to
treat, especially graphically, certain simplifying assumptions as to
the number of components have been made by some writers. These
assumptions are based in part on the fact that under certain conditions
two or more of the true components may enter into solid solution and
give rise therefore to only one phase. Thus Mg.SiO, and Fe.SiO,
form a complete series of mix crystals in the olivines, and though these
two molecules may be present in a system in amounts varying inde-
282 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
pendently of each other they will form but a single phase and therefore
can be grouped together as a single component for the purposes of the
mineralogical phase rule. At first sight this assumption seems justi-
fiable, but, as we shall see, it must be used with caution.
Another assumption, which, if not definitely stated, is at least
implied in the writings of some investigators, is that even if the two
molecules do not form a complete series but only a limited series
of solid solutions, so long as the concentrations involved do not lie
beyond these limits the two molecules may be grouped as a single
component. This again seems justifiable since they might be expected
to contribute but one phase, but it cannot be justified in the ultimate
analysis.
We may illustrate this fact for the latter case by reference to a
determined equilibrium diagram for silicates, a simple one of two
components, namely, that of nephelite and anorthite.2 Nephelite
shows an inversion at 1248° where it changes to carnegieite. Both
nephelite and carnegieite are capable of taking anorthite into solid
solution, nephelite up to 35 per cent and carnegieite up to 5 per cent.
According to the assumption frequently made in the study of meta-
morphic rocks any mixture in which the amount of anorthite did not
exceed 5 per cent could be regarded as a one-component mixture since
it would give rise to but a single phase except at the transition ‘‘point.”’
What is actually found is that there is no transition point but a transi-
tion interval which, in the mixture containing 4 per cent anorthite,
for example, extends from 1270°-1350°. It could not be guaranteed
that any random metamorphic process did not take place under con-
ditions falling within this range of 80° where the mixture consists of
two solid phases. Therefore the assumption would not be justified
that, for all compositions which do not exceed the limit of solution of
anorthite in nephelite or carnegieite (or, stated in another form, the
limit of replaceability of soda by lime) only one phase could be expected
in the hypothetical metamorphic rock. The grouping of nephelite
and anorthite (or of CaO and Na.O) as a single component would
therefore be justified only asa convenience. While in the great major-
ity of examples no discrepancy would be encountered, nevertheless
when a phase too many was found it would not necessarily be the
result of failure of equilibrium but might more properly be referred to
the inadequacy of the assumption involved in grouping the true
components.
No metamorphic rock is known approaching the mixture referred to
2N.L. Bowen. Amer. Journ. Sci. 33: 551. 1912.
JULY 19, 1925 BOWEN: THE MINERALOGICAL PHASE RULE 283
above, which has, indeed, been chosen merely to illustrate the princi-
ple involved. There are, however, many cases where the principle
applies. Thus, pyroxene and amphibole no doubt show a relation
not unlike that existing between the two phases discussed above, and
in some rocks containing these minerals the number of solid phases
found is too great for the number of (assumed) components. At
times this fact has been considered to indicate lack of equilibrium, one
of the phases being regarded as an “‘unstable relic,”’? but in many of
these cases there may be no such failure of equilibrium. The difficulty
may, in reality, arise from the choice of too small a number of com-
ponents. The grouping of, say, ferrous iron and magnesia as a single
component may lead to no difficulties in the great majority of rocks,
but in those few that are formed under conditions that he within what
may be termed inversion intervals, a number of phases too great for
agreement with such grouping may be found even with perfect
equilibrium.
Another limitation should be noted upon the simplification made by
grouping the true components in those cases where solid solution
occurs. In the three component system MgO-Al1.0;-SiO. there is,
no doubt, some range of temperature in which the three solid phases
sillimanite, spinel, and corundum can exist together. The tempera-
tures concerned were formerly believed to be those immediately
below liquefaction, but this cannot now be maintained since it has
been shown in both synthetic mixtures and natural rocks that mullite,
3A1,0;°28i0., and not sillimanite is the compound of alumina and silica
formed at such temperatures. Nevertheless, natural rocks do show
the association noted above and it is unquestionably a stable one under
the conditions concerned. There is also, no doubt, another range of
temperature in which cordierite, corundum, and sillimanite can coexist.
The whole matter has been discussed very fully by Tilley,* to whose
paper the reader is referred for details. These two different three-
phase assemblages indicate, as Tilley has shown, the possibility of
the reaction:
2(MgO-Al.0;) + 5(A1,0;-SiO2.) = 2MgO-2A1,0;-5Si0O. + 5A1.03
spinel sillimanite cordierite corundum
3 A very useful term which weowetoEsxouta. Norsk Geologisk Tidskrift, 6: 149.
1920.
4 Bowen and Greic, Journ. Amer. Ceram. Soc. 7: 238-254. 1924, and Bowszn,
Grete and Zigs, This Journat 14: 183-191. 1924.
5 C. E. Trier, Geol. Mag., 60: 101-107. 1923.
284 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
All four solid phases can occur together at any given pressure only
at a definite temperature, so we may not expect to find all four present
at equilibrium in any rock containing only these oxides. We will
find one of the four possible three-phase assemblages according to
whether the temperature at which the condition was established was
above or below the reaction temperature. Now, if ferrous iron were
also present, and whether it may replace the magnesia of the two mag-
nesian compounds to an unlimited extent or only partially, the rela-
tions will be changed.
We will then be concerned with the reaction:
2[(Mg,Fe)O-Al,03] + 5(A1,03-Si0.) =
spinel sillimanite
2(Mg,Fe)O-2A1.0;-58i02 + 5A1.03
cordierite corundum
This reaction will necessarily take place through a range of tempera-
tures at any given pressure or through a range of pressures at any
given temperature. Given a certain pressure there will be for any
temperature within the range a definite composition for each of the
two phases of variable composition, but all four phases with appro-
priate adjustments of composition may exist together throughout a
range of conditions. Again we may not safely assume that the con-
ditions attendant upon any specific example of the metamorphic proec-
esses did not fall within this range and we might therefore expect
at times to find the four phases together even in a rock which had
attained complete equilibrium under the conditions of its formation.
Thus, Tilley notes in the Comrie area of Scotland the frequent occur-
rence of the four-phase assemblage spinel, silliimanite, cordierite, and
corundum and appears to consider that it represents failure of equi-
librium.® It is to be noted, however, that the four phases could occur
together throughout a range of conditions rather than merely at a point
and there is no reason why these conditions might not be met in
nature.
In summary, it may be stated that in all attempts to decide, on
the basis of the number of phases, whether equilibrium has been
attained in a metamorphic rock it is essential to bear in mind the
fundamental assumptions as to the number of components.
6 C. E. Tinuey, Quar. Journ. Geol. Soc., 80: 68, 69. 1924.
JULY 19, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 285
BOTANY.—New plants from Central America—III.t Pauu C,
SranD ey, U.S. National Museum.?
The new species described in the present paper were all collected by
the writer in 1924 in Costa Rica and Panama. Most of them belong
to the Rubiaceae, and chiefly to the genus Psychoiria, the largest and
most difficult of the American genera of this family.
Xylopia xylopioides (Dunal) Standl.
Unona xylopiodes Dunal, Monogr. Anon. 117. pl. 21. 1817.
Xylopia grandiflora St. Hil. Fl. Bras. Merid.1: 40. 1825.
Xylopia longifolia A. DC. Mém. Soc. Genéve 5: 210. 1832.
Martius (Fl. Bras. 131: 44. 1841) states that the three names here listed
relate to the same plant. If this is true, it is necessary to employ for it the
oldest specific name.
Colubrina heteroneura (Griseb.) Standl.
Zizyphus heteroneurus Griseb. Bonplandia 1858: 3. 1858.
Rhamnus biglandulosa Sessé .& Moe. Pl. Nov. Hisp. 38. 1887.
Cormonema nelsoni Rose, Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 3: 315. 1895.
Cormonema biglandulosa Stand]. Contr. U. 8. Nat. Herb. 23: 718. 1928.
Cormonema multiflora T. S. Brandeg. Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 10: 411.
1924.
Rhamnus gonzalezii Riley, Kew Bull. 1923: 173. 1923.
This species was first described from Panama, where it is abundant, but
it ranges northward along the Pacific coast to Sinaloa. It is referable to the
genus Cormonema, published by Reissek, but that genus has no character by
which it may be distinguished from Colubrina except the presence of spines
upon the branches. This is scarcely to be considered a valid generic
character.
Doliocarpus multiflorus Standl., sp. nov.
Large woody vine; leaves short-petiolate, the blades broadly obovate to
oblong-obovate, 13-21 cm. long, 5-10 cm. wide, obtuse to attenuate at base,
acute at apex or rounded and short-acuminate, remotely and coarsely sinuate-
serrate toward the apex, coriaceous, bright green, smooth, sparsely puberulent
beneath along the nerves or glabrous; flowers long-pedicellate or rarely
subsessile, in densely clustered, few-flowered racemes on old wood, the pedi-
cels puberulent; sepals unequal, 3-4 mm. long, glabrous, ciliolate; ovary
densely puberulent.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,219,187, collected on brushy
slope near Catival, Province of Colén, Panama, near sea level, January 9,
1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 30285). Fendler 50 from Chagres represents
the same species.
This is the only species of Doliocarpus with racemose inflorescence known
from Central America. In Central America this genus of the Dilleniaceae
has been collected only in Panama, where five species are known, but one
species grows in Mexico.
1 See this Journat 15, 101-107. 1925.
* Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
286 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
Doliocarpus punctatus Standl., sp. nov.
Large woody vine; petioles 8-12 mm. long; leaf blades oblong to oblong-
elliptic, 6-15 em. long, 26.5 em. wide, usually long-acuminate or sometimes
short-acuminate, rounded to acute at base, coarsely sinuate-serrate or suben-
tire, coriaceous, glabrous above, beneath with a few short appressed hairs
along the nerves, densely white-punctate; pedicels slender, much longer than
the flowers, densely clustered in the axils of the leaves, puberulent, often 2
cm. long; sepals very unequal, brownish, minutely and rather sparsely seri-
ceous, the inner about 8 mm. long; petals white; anthers oblong; fruit globose,
red, 1 em. in diameter, hirtellous-scabrous.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 2293, collected near Chagres,
Panama, February, 1850, by A. Fendler (no. 305). The following collections
also belong here:
Panama: Near Catival, Province of Colén, Standley 30323. France
Field, Canal Zone, Stevens 1337. Agua Clara, Canal Zone, Pittier 3988.
Rio Faté, Province of Colén, P7ttier 3949, 4187. Gatun, Hayes 22. Near
Puerto Obaldia, San Blas Coast, Pittier 4339.
Related to Doliocarpus dentatus (Aubl.) Standl. (Tigarea dentata Aubl.
Pl. Guian. 920. pl. 351. 1775), but in that species, which occurs in
Panama, the leaves are not punctate, and the ovary is glabrous.
Hybanthus anomalus (H. B. KI.) Standl.
Tonidium anomalum H. B. lk. Nov. Gen. & Sp. 5: 381. pl. 500. 1821.
Eugenia zetekiana Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub 2.5-4.5 m. high, with few branches, the branchlets densely ferrugi-
nous-tomentose; petioles very stout, 6-12 mm. long, densely ferruginous-
tomentose; leaf blades lanceolate or narrowly oblong-lanceolate, about 30
em. long, 6.5-9.5 em. wide, attenuate at apex, rounded at base, coriaceous,
glabrous above, beneath tomentose along the costa or glabrate, the venation
prominent on both surfaces, the costa stout, the lateral nerves about 20 on
each side, divaricate, slightly curved, anastomosing to form a distinct nerve
about 2 mm. from the margin; flowers in terminal, simple or branched racemes,
these 7-8 cm. long, few-flowered, densely reddish-velutinous, the flowers
subsessile; bractlets minute, subulate; fruit subglobose, 2-celled, 1.5-1.8 em.
in diameter, densely velvety-tomentose; calyx limb short-produced beyond
the fruit, persistent, 5-lobate, the lobes semiorbicular, broadly rounded at
apex; seeds one in each cell, hemispheric, 12 mm. long, brown and shining.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,217,607, collected in wet
forest on hills north of Frijoles, Canal Zone, Panama, December 19, 1923, by
Paul C. Standley (no. 27503). Collected also on hills west of the Canal, near
Gattin, Standley 27192.
The true position of the plant is somewhat doubtful. It belongs to the
genus Hugenia as limited by Bentham and Hooker. It has a strong resem-
blance in aspect to the Brazilian Schizocalyx pohlianus Berg, but I doubt that
it could be referred to the latter genus, should that group be segregated.
Eugenia zetekiana is named in honor of Mr. James Zetek, who has done
more than any other person to popularize the advantages of the Canal Zone
as a field for natural history studies. He has spared no personal effort in
making the resources of the Zone available for the use of students, and no
investigator who has worked in that region can fail to appreciate the results
of his labors.
JULY 19, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 287
Watsonamra alfaroana Standl., sp. nov.
Simple shrub 1-1.5 m. high, the stems obtusely quadrangular or subterete,
about 1.5 cm. in diameter; stipules broadly oblong, 5-5.5 em. long, very
obtuse, brown, finely striate, glabrous within, thinly sericeous outside;
petioles 8-20 cm. long, naked below, narrowly winged above the middle,
thinly sericeous or glabrate; leaf blades broadly ovate, 40-50 em. long, about
40 cm. wide, when young sparsely pilose above with minute appressed
hairs, beneath densely short-sericeous when young, much of the pubescence
persistent in age, the blades pinnatifid two-thirds the distance to the
midrib, the segments again pinnatifid, the lobes broadly ovate-oblong,
acute, the terminal segment less deeply lobed or merely angulate;
cymes dense, few-flowered, sessile or nearly so; fruit globose, 12-15 mm. in
diameter, densely tuberculate, capped by the withered calyx; calyx in fruit
2 em. long, the lobes oblong, obtuse, united below; seeds numerous, brown,
acutely angulate. _
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,152,712, collected in moist
forest along the Rio Grande de Tarcoles, near Capulin, Costa Rica, altitude
about 80 meters, April 2, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 40194).
Related to W. gymnopoda Standl., of the Atlantic coast of Panama, but
in that species the leaves are merely once pinnatifid, with narrow, nearly
glabrous segments, and the stipules are acuminate or attenuate.
The species is named for Don Anastasio Alfaro, Director of the National
Museum of Costa Rica, one of the most distinguished of Central American
scientists. To him the writer is indebted for many favors received during
the course of botanical work in Costa Rica, among others a delightful visit
to the impressive Volcano of Pods.
Psychotria tonduzii Standl., sp. noy.
Simple shrub, about 1 m. high, the stems green, glabrous; stipules green,
broadly triangular, about 4 mm. long, at least the base persistent; petioles
2.5-7 cm. long; leaf blades elliptic to obovate-oblong, mostly 19-85 em. long
and 7-14 cm. wide, obtuse or rounded at apex and abruptly contracted into
a short broad acute acumen, acute to long-decurrent at base, rather fleshy,
glabrous, deep green above, paler beneath; flowers cymose-paniculate, the
panicles axillary, usually sessile and branched from the base, sometimes short-
pedunculate, with few stout puberulent branches, the flowers sessile in dense
heads; bracts and bractlets broad, green, surpassing the calyx; hypanthium
puberulent, 1.5 mm. long; calyx 1.5mm. long, green, puberulent, the 5 lobes
broadly ovate, acutish; corolla creamy white, 3 mm. long, minutely puberu-
lent outside, the lobes about equaling the limb.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,160, collected in wet
forest at La Estrella, Province of Cartago Costa Rica, March 27, 1924,
by Paul C. Standley (no. 39461). The following specimens also belong here:
Costa Rica: Orosi, Province of Cartago, Standley 39797, 39850. El
Maufieco, south of Navarro, Province of Cartago, alt. about 1,400 meters,
Standley 33585, 33658, 33439. Boca de Zhorquin, Talamanca, Tonduz
8621. La Hondura, Province of San José, alt. about 1,400 meters, Standley
36490, 37789.
Related to P. anomothyrsus Schum. & Donn. Smith and P. aggreguta
Standl., both of which have long-pedunculate inflorescence.
288 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
Psychotria torresiana Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub, about 3 m. high, much branched, the branches slender, green,
glabrous; stipules 4 mm. long, green, persistent, closely sheathing, emarginate
at apex with a deep broad sinus; petioles slender, 1-2 em. long; leaf blades
lance-linear, 9-16 cm. long, 1.5-2.5 em. wide, long-acuminate and usually
subfaleate at apex, acute or attenuate at base, thin glabrous, deepgreen
above, pale beneath; inflorescence terminal, open-paniculate, many-flowered,
slender-pedunculate, about 11 cm. long and 9 cm. wide, the primary branches
divaricate or refracted, glabrous, the flowers sessile or short-pedicellate in
few-flowered slender-pedunculate cymes, the bracts linear-lanceolate, green,
the bractlets minute; calyx 1 mm. long, shallowly 5-dentate; corolla not seen;
fruit subglobose, blue, 5 mm. long, the 2 stones coarsely costate dorsally.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,178, collected in wet
forest near Orosi, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, March 30, 1924, by Paul
C,. Standley (no. 39769). Nos. 39725 and 39883 from Orosi also represent
the species.
Easily recognized among the Costa Rican species of the genus by the very
narrow leaves. This species is named for Prof. Rubén Torres Rojas to whose
courtesy I owe several pleasant excursions.
Psychotria jimenezii Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub or small tree 2.5-4.5 m. high, the branchlets terete, ferruginous-
tomentose; stipules triangular, acute, 1 cm. long, brown, early deciduous
from the base, tomentulose; petioles 3 mm. long or less; leaf blades oblong-
oblanceolate, 9-14.5 cm. long, 2.5-4 em. wide, long-acuminate, attenuate
to the base, deep green above, glabrous, beneath paler, puberulent along the
nerves; inflorescence terminal, cymose-paniculate, long-pedunculate or often
branched from the base, open, many-flowered, about as broad as long, the
branches fulvous-tomentulose, divaricate or ascending at a wide angle;
flower sessile in few-flowered headlike cymes; bracts and bractlets small,
deciduous; calyx 1 mm. long, very shallowly 5-lobate, the lobes broad, acutish,
obscurely puberulent; corolla creamy white, 2.5 mm. long, glabrous, the lobes
erect, with incurved tips, nearly as long as the tube; stamens shorter than the
corolla lobes.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,107, collected in wet forest
at La Hondura, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude about 1,400 meters,
March 16, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 37892). Nos. 36555 and 37955,
from the same locality also belong here.
The species is named for Don Otén Jiménez, well known as one of the en-
thusiastic botanists of Costa Rica, to whom I am under obligations for many
favors received during a recent visit to Costa Rica. It was in his company
that the type of the species was collected, during a visit to the rich valley
of La Hondura, on the Atlantic watershed.
Psychotria orosiana Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub 1-3 m. high, much branched, the branchlets glabrous; stipules 5
mm. long, early deciduous, bilobate, the lobes subulate, ferruginous-tomen-
tose, the sheath glabrous; petioles 2 mm. long or less; leaf blades oblong-
obovate or elliptic-obovate, 6-12.5 cm. long, 2-4.5 em. wide, rather abruptly
acute or acuminate, with an obtuse tip, gradually or abruptly long-attenuate
JuLY 19,1925 KILLIP: AMERICAN SPECIES OF URTICACEAE 289
to the base, thin, glabrous, paler beneath; inflorescence terminal, cymose-
paniculate, long-pedunculate, the panicles 4-6 cm. broad, broader than long,
many-flowered, open, the branches slender, glabrous, divaricate or ascending
at a wide angle, the bracts and bractlets minute; flowers sessile or short-
pedicellate, in few-flowered cymes; calyx glabrous, 1 mm. long, shallowly 5-
dentate; corolla greenish white, glabrous, 2.5-3 mm. long, the lobes nearly as
long as the tube.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,182, collected in moist
forest near Orosi, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, March 30, 1924, by Paul
.C, Standley (no. 39803). The following specimens also represent the species:
Costa Rica: Orosi, Standley 39766, 39768, 39861. El Muneco, south of
Navarro, Province of Cartago, alt. about 1,400 m., Standley 33444.
P. orosiana is well marked by the practically sessile leaves.
Psychotria siggersiana Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub, 1-1.8 m. high, the stems simple, green, sparsely villous-hirsute of
glabrous; stipules green, about 7 mm. long, rounded-deltoid, usually glabrous,
finally decidous from the persistent sheath; petioles 4.5—9 cm. long, hirsute or
glabrate; leaf blades elliptic or broadly elliptic, 20-34 em. long, 11-17 em.
wide, abruptly short-acuminate at apex or rounded and short-acuminate,
acute at base, somewhat fleshy, copiously villous-hirsute on both surfaces, or
sometimes glabrate above; inflorescence axillary, cymose-paniculate, many-
flowered, ample, sometimes 20 cm. broad, the peduncles shorter than the
cymes, the branches villous-hirsute; flowers sessile, usually densely clustered,
the bracts large, green, villous, equaling or exceeding the flowers; calyx about
1 mm. long, sparsely short-villous, the 5 lobes deltoid-ovate; corolla 8 mm.
long, greenish white, salverform, sparsely short-villous outside; fruit sub-
globose, red, 5-6 mm. long, the 2 stones deeply concave on the inner face.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,058, collected in wet
forest near Gudpiles, Province of Limén, Costa Rica, altitude about 500
meters, March 12-13, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 37210). The following
additional specimens belong to this species:
Costa Rica: Gudpiles, Standley 37268, 37047, 37228, 37206. Tuis,
alt. 650 m., Tonduz, 11465.
Related to P. tonduzzi, but differing conspicuously in the broad leaves with
copious pubescence. The species is named for Mr. Paul V. Siggers, of the
United Fruit Company, who accompanied me upon two very agreeable and
profitable collecting excursions to the Atlantic lowlands of Costa Rica.
BOTANY.—New tropical American species of Urticaceae.1 Euus-
wortH P. Kiiuip, U. 8. National Museum.
Most of the species described in this paper belong to the genus Pilea
and are based upon material collected in Central America. One new
species of this genus from Mexico and five from South America, as
well as a new Pouzolzia, are included. A species is transferred from
the genus Urera to Pilea.
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
290 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
Pilea tridentata Killip, sp. nov.
Herbaceous or suffrutescent, 40 cm. high or more, glabrous throughout;
stem woody below, sulcate; stipules deltoid-ovate, 0.5 mm. long, deciduous;
leaves penninerved with 6 to 8 pairs of nerves, opposite, those of a node con-
spicuously unequal and dissimilar, the larger 5 to 8 mm. long, 3 to 4 mm. wide,
oblong-spatulate, 3-toothed at apex (or the upper occasionally subentire),
tapering to a petiole 1 to 1.5 mm. long, the margins subequal at base or the
upper side shorter, the smaller leaves 3 to 4 mm. long, 2.5 mm. wide, ovate or
suborbicular, obtuse, sessile, very unequal at the base, the upper side oblique,
the lower side auriculate, the upper surface densely, the under surface sparse--
ly, covered with narrowly fusiform cystoliths 0.4 to 0.5 mm. long; plants
dioecious (or monoecious?) ; staminate cymes 2 or 3-flowered, the peduncles
2.5 mm. long, the pedicels 2 mm. long, the perianth globose, 1.5 mm. in
diameter, the tips of the segments acute, 0.38 mm. long; pistillate cymes 3 or 4-
flowered, the peduncles 1.5 mm. long; pistillate flowers whitish, the middle
perianth-segment elongate, 1.2 mm. long, the lateral segments 0.5 mm. long;
achenes narrowly oblong, 1 mm. long, 0.6 mm. broad, minutely roughened.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 799,669, collected near Coban,
Department of Alta Verapaz, Guatemala, 1,500 meters altitude, November
7, 1907, by H. von Tiirckheim (no. 2011). Tiirckheim’s 2491, from the same
locality, is also this species.
Pilea tridentata resembles P. pleuroneura Donn. Smith, but in that species
the leaves are crenate to the middle, symmetrical at base, and proportionately
longer.
Pilea argentea Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, glabrous throughout; stems erect, up to 35 em. (or
more?) high, apparently simple, succullent, copiously covered with linear
cystoliths; stipules broadly triangular-ovate, barely 1 mm. long, soon decidu-
ous; leaves of a pair nearly equal, oblong, up to 8 cm. long, 3 em. wide, acu-
minate, obtusish at apex, subauriculate and often slightly oblique at base, 3-
nerved at base (nerves pale beneath, the lateral nerves reaching apex of
blade), penniveined along midnerve, sessile or on petioles not more than 1
cin. long, entire at margin, thick, the upper surface green, densely covered
with linear, straight or curved, and punctiform cystoliths, the under surface
silvery-lustrous, with very numerous elongate-linear cystoliths on the nerves
and conspicuous, elevated,curved or straight, linear cystoliths elsewhere;
plants apparently diocecious; staminate inflorescence in axillary panicles near
end of plant, the flowers in subglobose culsters, the perianth about 0.5 mm.
long, pale proximally; pistillate inflorescence in panicles at nodes of upper
half of plant, the flowers in few-flowered, subcontiguous, small clusters, the
segments orbicular, subequal; achenes suborbicular, about 0.5 mm. long,
narrowly winged, the surface minutely rugulose.
Type in the herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden, collected in
forest east of Neiva, Department of Huila, in the Cordillera Oriental, Colom-
bia, altitude 1500 to 2000 meters, August 1-8, 1917, by H. H. Rusby and
F. W. Pennell (no. 654). Another specimen (no. 938), collected at the same
time, also belongs to this species.
Pilea argentea is related to P. parietaria (L.) Blume, a common species of
JuLY 19,1925 MKILLIP: AMERICAN SPECIES OF URTICACEAE 291
tropical America. It may be distinguished by the sessile, or nearly sessile,
proportionately longer and thicker leaves, and its coarser, more erect habit.
Pilea chiriquina Killip, sp. nov.
Plant glabrous, suffrutescent; stem decumbent and rooting at the base,
the branches erect, 35 to 60 cm. high, simple; stipules deciduous; leaves
triplinerved to apex, crenate-serrate, dark green above, paler beneath, the
eystoliths of upper surface fusiform, minute; leaves of a pair very unequal,
the larger oblong-lanceolate or oblanceolate, 4 to 5 em. long, 1.2 to 2 cm.
wide, caudate-acuminate, subauriculate at base (lower margin slightly the
longer), the petioles 3 to 4 mm. long, the smaller leaves ovate or ovate-
lanceolate, 1 to 1.3 em. long, 0.6 to 0.9 em. wide, acute, unequally sub-
cordate at base (lower margin conspicuously auriculate), the petioles
1 mm. long; flowers dioecious, the pistillate borne in a compact flat-topped
cyme 9 to 11 mm. wide, the peduncle 8 to 10 mm. long, the divisions of the
perianth subequal, 0.9 mm. long, 0.5 mm. wide, bearing linear cystoliths on
the outer surface.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,010,199, collected in the humid
forest along the upper Caldera River, 8 miles north of El Boquete, Province
of Chiriqut Panama, altitude 1,650 meters, February 11, 1918, by E. P.
Kallip (no. 3546). Duplicates of this collection are in the herbarium of the
Pei estce Academy of Science.
This species is to be distinguished from Pilea pansamalana by the longer
peduncles of the pistillate cymes, by the subauriculate, rather than cuneate,
leaf-bases, and by its erect, not prostrate, habit.
Pilea caudata Killip, sp. nov.
Glabrous throughout; stem erect, simple; stipules deltoid, 0.7 mm. long,
0.8 mm. broad, acute; leaves thickish, triplinerved, dark green above, paler
beneath, bearing densely on the upper surface, sparselv on the lower surface,
punctiform cystoliths, reticulate-veined (nerves and veins impressed and
conspicuous beneath), cuneate at base, those of a pair conspicuously unequal,
the larger lanceolate-elliptic, 10 to 15 em. long, 2 to 4 em. wide, caudate-
acuminate (tips 2 to 3 cm. long), denticulate in upper third, the teeth 3 to
6 on a side, acute, 0.4 mm. long or less, the petiole 1 to 2.5 em. long, chan-
neled, swollen at base, the smaller leaves narrowly lanceolate-elliptic, 3 cm.
long, 0.8 to 1 cm. wide, acuminate, entire or obsoletely serrulate at apex, the
petiole 2 to 3 mm. long; plants dioecious?; staminate flowers in dense, axillary
glomerules, globose, 0.8 mm. in diameter, the tips of the segments 0.2 mm.
long, acute; pistillate flowers not seen.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 408318, collected at Secoyocté,
near Finca Sepacuité, Department of Alta Verapaz, Guatemala, April 14,
1902, by O. F. Cook and R. F. Griggs (no. 609).
The texture and venation of the foliage of this species resemble that of
Pilea riparia. There is, however, a much greater diversity between the size
of the leaves of a pair than in the case of P. riparia. The larger leaves, more-
over, are much longer, the tips are shallowly, but distinctly and sharply
denticulate, the margin is not thickened, and the cystoliths are uniformly
punctiform, not linear at the margin of the blade.
292 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
Pilea donnell-smithiana Killip, sp. noy.
Erect herb, about 1 meter high, glabrous throughout; stem simple or
few-branched near base; stipules minute, triangular-ovate, soon deciduous;
leaves ovate or elliptic, crenate-serrate nearly to base, 3-nerved or subtrip-
linerved (nerves extending to apex of blade), rounded or subauriculate and
often oblique at base, faintly marked with minute linear cystoliths on both
surfaces; leaves of a pair conspicuously unequal, the larger 10 to 20 em. long,
4 to 7 em. wide, caudate-acuminate, their petioles 1.5 to 2.5 cm. long, the
smaller leaves 1.5 to 3 cm. long, 1 to 1.5 em. wide, acute, their petioles 0.3
to 0.5 em. long; plants dioecious; staminate flowers borne in subglobose, dis-
tinet, usually pedicellate clusters.in small axillary panicles 2 cm. long, or less,
the perianth segments 0.5 mm. long; pistillate flowers in few-flowered sub-
globose heads about 5 mm. wide, the peduncles 2 to 3 mm. long, the middle
perianth segment twice as long as the outer segments; achenes ovate, about
2.5 mm. long (large for the genus), strongly flattened.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 799,603 (staminate), collected
at La Palma, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude 1460 meters, Sep-
tember, 1898, by A. Tonduz (Herb. Inst. Phys.-geogr. Costa Rica no. 12,655;
J. D. Smith no. 7467, distributed as P. costaricensis).
Additional specimens examined:
Costa Rica: La Hondura, Proy. San José, 1300-1700 meters, Standley
37841, 37866, 37899.
Panama: Along Holcomb’s trail, about 10 miles above El Boquete,
Proy. Chiriqui, 1700 meters, Killip 3562.
The description of the pistillate inflorescence is based on Standley’s
37841 (U.S. N. H. 1,229,574).
From P. costaricensis Donn. Sm. this new species differs in both staminate
and pistillate inflorescence. The staminate flowers are in small distinct
glomerules on short few-branched panicles; in P. costaricensis they are in very
dense, nearly sessile cymes. The pistillate flowers are in globose, few-flowered
heads, while in P. costaricensis they are in compact sessile cymes. The achenes
of P. donnell-smithiana are fully twice as large as those of its near relative.
It is quite fitting that a species of Pilea should be named for Captain J.
Donnell Smith, who has been one of the few botanists in the last half-century
to study critically this interesting genus.
Pilea cornmanae Killip, sp. noy.
Plant herbaceous, erect, up to 60 cm. high, the stem branched, yellowish
green, densely covered with elevated linear cystoliths, glabrous; stipules
orbicular or ovate, about 5 mm. long, 3.5 mm. wide, obtuse, persistent, yellow-
ish green, mottled with red; leaves coarsely serrate (teeth 2 to 3 mm. long,
acutish), dark green above, paler beneath, densely covered on both surfaces
with linear cystoliths about 0.3 mm. long, occasionally sparsely strigillose
above with hyaline hairs; leaves of a pair unequal, the larger ovate-lanceolate,
3 to 7 em. long, 1.5 to 3 em. wide, acuminate at apex, acute and often oblique
at base, the petioles 1.5 to 4 em. long, the smaller leaves broadly ovate or
suborbicular, 1.5 to 2 em. long, 1 to 1.5 em. wide, acute at apex, subrotund
and oblique at base, the petioles 4 to 5 mm. long; plants monoecious (or
dioecious), the heads unisexual, the staminate and pistillate often borne at
the same axil; staminate flowers densely clustered in globose heads 9 to 10
mm. in diameter, the peduncle slender, 1 to 3 em. long, the perianth globose
JuLy 19,1925 KILLIP: AMERICAN SPECIES OF URTICACEAE 293
or subturbinate, 2 mm. wide, the segments long-caudate, erect; pistillate
flowers loosely clustered in subglobose heads 4 to 5 mm. in diameter, borne on
peduncles 5 to 7 mm. long, the perianth segments subequal; achenes broadly
ovate or suborbiclar, about 1 mm. long.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,010,196, collected in dense
forest along the Rio Caldera, 7 miles north of El Boquete, Province of Chiri-
qui, Panama, altitude 1650 meters, February 11, 1918, by Mrs. L. R. Corn-
man (Killip 3543). A duplicate of the type is in the herbarium of the Roches-
ter Academy of Science.
Additional specimens examined:
Costa Rica: La Hondura, Prov. San José, 1300-1700 meters, Standley
37779, 37822.
Because of the striking differences in size and shape of the leaves at each
node this species should probably be placed in Weddell’s section Heterophyllae.
In general appearance, in the texture of the stem and leaves, in the large
persistent stipules, the cystoliths, and the peculiar hyaline hairs on the upper
leaf-surfaces, it bears a close resemblance to P. auriculata Liebm., a species
of the group Pubescentes Longipedunculatae. The elongate segments of the
staminate flowers and the differently shaped leaves clearly distinguish it,
however, from P. auriculata.
Pilea rusbyi (Britton) Killip, comb. nov.
Urera rusbyi Britton, Bull. Torrey Club 28:310. 1901.
Pistillate plants of this specis in the Buchtien Herbarium, recently
acquired by the National Museum, show that it is of the genus Pilea rather
than Uvera, and is related to P. anomala Wedd. Because of this additional
material it seems advisable to amplify the earlier description.
Stipules ovate, 1 to 2mm. long, acutish, connate; petioles up to 6 cm. long;
leaves abruptly acuminate (acumen up to 1.5 em. long), often oblique at
base, 3-nerved or subtriplinerved, above bearing numerous punctiform
cystoliths, nearly destitute of cystoliths beneath but punctate with incon-
spicuous dark dots; plants dioceious; panicles much branched, wide-spreading,
20 (or up to 30?) em. wide; staminate inflorescences on peduncles up to 4 em.
long, the perianth segments ovate, 1 mm. long; pistillate inflorescences on
peduncles up to 7 cm. long, longer than the accompanying petiole, the perianth
segments ovate, subequal or the lateral two-thirds as long as the middle
segment, the achenes ovoid, 1 mm. long, 0.8 mm. wide, acutish.
Specimens examined:
Borryv1a: Yungas, 1800 meters, Rusby 1774 (type collection of Urera
rusbyi). Polo-Polo, near Coroico, North Yungas, 1100 meters,
Buchtien 3754.
Pilea pauciserrata Killip, sp. nov.
Low slender herb, glabrous throughout, the stem repent, at length erect,
about 15 em. high, the internodes 1 to 2 cm. long; stipules ovate, 1mm. long,
obtuse; leaves narrowly obovate, 6 to 20 mm. long, 2 to 5 mm. wide, cuneate-
attenuate at base, coarsely serrate above middle (serrations 4 or 5 on each
side, triangular, up to 1.5 mm. long, acute, the upper margin of each serra-
tion at right-angles to the midrib), entire at base, penninerved (lateral nerves
faint), membranous, sessile or short-petioled (petioles up to 2 mm. long),
bearing on upper surface, especially near margin, a few small, fusiform or
294 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
linear cystoliths, on under surface a few punctiform cystoliths; plants ap-
parently dioecious; staminate flowers 3 mm. wide, purple above, pale at
base, sessile or short-pediceled in few-flowered pedunculate heads (peduncles
slender, up to 1.5 em. long), the perianth segments ovate, 1 mm. long, mucro-
nulate, bearing linear cystoliths on outside.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,157,852, collected at Unduavi,
North Yungas, Bolivia, altitude 3400 meters, November, 1910, by O. Buch-
tien (no. 2811).
This species resembles P. serrulata (Sw.) Wedd., having leaves of much
the same shape. The leaves, however, are of thinner texture, and the cystoli-
thie marking is wholly dissimilar. Pilea pauciserrata is distincly herbaceous,
having none of the shrubby habit of its relative.
Pilea gracilipes Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, glabrous throughout; stem repent, the branches erect,
simple, 8 to 40 cm. high; stipules minute, triangular-ovate, 1.2 to 1.5 mm. long,
acute, deciduous; leaves ovate-lanceolate or elliptic, 1 to 8 em. long, 0.7 to
2.5 em. wide, acuminate at apex, rounded or acutish at base, crenate-serrate
(teeth 0.5 to 1 mm. long, acute or often mucronulate), 3-nerved (nerves
extending to upper third of blade), bright green above, paler and often
glaucescent beneath, both surfaces bearing numerous faint linear cystoliths;
leaves of a pair similar in form, subequal in size or one three-quarters as long
as the other, the petioles of the smaller up to 1.5 em. long, those of the larger
about twice as long; plants monoecious or dioecious, the staminate and
pistillate inflorescences often arising at the same axil; staminate flowers in
globose, 12 to 20-flowered heads 5 to 7 mm. wide, the peduncles filiform, 2
to 3.5 em. long, the perianth marked with linear cystoliths on outside, proxi-
mally yellowish, distally dark green, the tips of the segments barely 0.1 mm.;
pistillate flowers in loose glomerules in interrupted spikes or racemose-
paniculate, the peduncles filiform or linear, 2 to 5 em. long, usually much
exceeding the petioles, the middle perianth segment linear-oblong, 1 mm. long,
cucullate, the lateral segments suborbicular, about half as long; achenes
lance-ovate, 1 to 1.2 mm. long, 1 mm. wide at base, acute.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 675,809, collected on a wet
brushy slope in the humid forest at Los Siguas Camp, southern slope of Cerro
de Horqueta, Province of Chiriqui, Panama, altitude about 1700 meters,
March, 1911, by. W. R. Maxon (no. 5426).
The following specimens, all from Costa Rica, at altitudes varying from
1200 to 2500 meters, have also been examined:
Copey, Tonduz 11805, 11925. Tablazo, Tonduz 7927; Coliblanco, Mazon
309. Santa Clara de Cartago, Mazon 8165. La Estrella, Prov. Cartago,
Cooper 384 (J. D. Smith 5950); Standley 39091, 39099, 39234, 39454. Cerro
de la Carpintera, Prov. Cartago, Standley 34493, 35524. Volcan de Pods,
Standley 34630; Tonduz 10790. Las Nubes, Prov. San José, Standley 38540,
38541, 38824.
Much of the material here cited was distributed as P. awriculata, a species
with smaller rotund-rhombic leaves, pilose with hyaline hairs on the upper
surface, large persistent stipules, and the middle segments of the pistillate
flowers auriculate. Pilea gracilipes more closely resembles P. dauciodora,
but is at once distinguished by larger, differently-shaped leaves and long-
peduncled staminate flower-clusters.
Or
JuLy 19,1925 KILLIP: AMERICAN SPECIES OF URTICACEAE 29
Pilea angustifolia Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, glabrous throughout; stem repent at base, erect, simple
or few-branched, 40 to 45 em. high; stipules deltoid, 0.8 mm. long, 1 mm. wide
at base, deciduous; petioles enlarged at base, those of a pair usually unequal,
the longer 4 to 8 mm. long, the ‘shorter 2 to 3.5 mm. long; leaves narrowly
lanceolate, 4 to 10 cm. long, 0.8 to 1.2 em. wide, those of a pair similar in
shape, subequal in size (or the one four-fifths as long as the other), tripli-
nerved (nerves extending to upper third of blade), acuminate at apex, nar-
rowed to a cuneate or subcordate base, serrulate (teeth acute, often mucro-
nulate, 1 mm. long), bearing on both surfaces minute linear cystoliths;
plants monoecious; staminate flowers densely congested in globose heads 0.6
to 1 em. in diameter, the peduncles very slender, filiform, 3 to 4 em. long, the
pedicels 1 to 1.5 mm. long, the perianth segments With tips about 0.4 mm. ‘long;
pistillate flowers congested in sessile cymes 3 to 5 mm. wide, the middle seg-
ment linear-oblong, about 1 mm. long, the lateral segments ovate, 0.6 mm.
long; achenes eblong, 1 mm. long, 0.7 mm. wide, acute, smooth.
Type in the U. National Herbarium, no. 473,969, collected at Juan
Vifias, Reventazén v alley, Costa Rica, altitude 1000 meters, April 21, 1903,
by O. F. Cook and C. B. Doyle (no. 181).
Related to P. gracilipes, this differs in its proportionately narrower leaves,
nearly sessile pistillate cymes, and in the unusually slender peduncles of the
large staminate heads.
Pilea chiapensis Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, 30 em. high or more, glabrous throughout; stem angu-
late, grooved, slightly flexuous; stipules early deciduous; leaves of a pair very
unequal and dissimilar, the larger oblanceolate or oblong (upper often falcate),
7 to 11 em. long, 2 to 2.5 cm. wide, acuminate at apex (acumen up to 2 cm.
long), narrowed to an oblique base, remotely and irregularly serrulate along
upper fourth of margin (teeth obtuse or acutish, somewhat callous-thickened),
otherwise entire, 3-nerved to apex of blade, the petioles 3 to 5 mm. long, the
smaller leaves ovate or ovate-lanceolate, 1.5 to 2.5 em. long, 0.5 to 1 em. wide,
acuminate or acute at apex, narrowed at base, subsessile or with petioles up
to 2 mm. long, 3-nerved to apex, entire or crenate-serrulate at apex, both
kinds of leaves faintly marked with linear and punctiform cystoliths on upper
surface, destitute of cystoliths but sparsely black-punctate on under surface;
staminate cymes subsessile, densely flowered, 5 to 7 mm. wide, the flowers
on pedicels about 2.5 mm. long, the perianth globose, 2 mm. wide, the teeth
minute, barely 0.3 mm. long; pistillate cymes subsessile, 5 mm. long, the
flowers sessile, the segments unequal; achenes ovate, 0.5 mm. long.
Type in the herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia,
collected at the junction of the Teapa and Amatdn rivers, Chiapas, Mexico,
August 6, 1890, by J. N. Rivirosa (no. 938).
This species should be placed among the Heterophyllae, though it is quite
unlike any other species of that section. In many respects it resembles P-
mexicana Liebm., of the section Glabratae Brevipedunculatae, which, however,
has the opposite leaves equal.
Pilea pallida Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, glabrous throughout, or the nerves of the very young
leaves pubescent beneath; stem simple, 30 cm. high or more, stipules lanceo-
late, 3 mm. long 1.5 mm. wide, acute, densely striate without with linear
296 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
cystoliths; petioles 1.5 to 4 cm. long, those of a pair subequal;
petioles 1.5 to 4 em. long, those of a pair subequal; leaves elliptic-lanceolate,
8 to 12 cm. long, 3 to 4 cm. wide, caudate-acuminate (tip up to 2.5 em. long),
tapering to petiole, triplinerved to base of tip, serrate (teeth obtuse, often
mucronulate, 2 to 4mm. long), densely covered with fusiform and punctiform
cystoliths, dark green above, paler, slightly silvery-lustrous beneath; plants
dioecious; staminate flowers densely congested in sessile subglobose clusters
3 to 4mm. wide, the perianth globose, the tips about 0.4 mm. long; pistillate
flowers in much-branched flat-topped cymes, shorter than the petioles, about
1 cm. long, 1.2 cm. wide, in the axils of the upper leaves, the branches of the
inflorescence and the outside of the perianth densely striate with linear cys
toliths, the middle perianth segment linear, 1 mm. long, obtuse, the laterat
segments ovate, 0.2 mm. long, acute, scariose at margin; achenes ovoid, about
1 mm. long, 0.8 mm. wide, acute, wing-margined, the surface black, minutely
papillose.
Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 1,036,444, collected at Sibubi
Falls, Sixaola Valley, Panama, June 6, 1918, by W. W. and H. E. Rowlee
(no. 376).
This species differs from P. quichensis Donn. Sm., to which it is clearly
allied, in the shape, texture, and particularly the cystolithic marking of the
leaves.
Pilea lippioides Killip, sp. nov.
Plant apparently suffrutescent, glabrous throughout, the stem branched,
marked, especially at nodes, with linear cystoliths; stipules oblong-lanceolate,
about 3 mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide, bearing elongate linear cystoliths, at length
deciduous; petioles filiform, those of a pair unequal, the longer 3 to 4 em. long,
the opposite ones about half as long; leaves of a node essentially equal and
similar, ovate-elliptic, 2.5 to 6 em. long, 1.5 to 2.5 em. wide, acuminate at
apex (acumen about 5 mm. long), tapering to petiole, coarsely crenate-
serrate to base (teeth subimbricate, mucronulate), penninerved (lateral
nerves 5 to 10 pairs, impressed above, conspicuous beneath), the upper surface
dark green, with numerous short linear cystoliths, the under surface paler,
with linear cystoliths on the nerves and veins and punctiform cystoliths else-
where; plants monoecious; staminate flowers in dense globose heads borne
singly in the axils of the upper leaves on slender peduncles 1.5 to 2 em. long,
each head subtended by an involucre of 8 bracts, the outer 4 orbicular, about
6 mm. in diameter, the inner 4 oblong, about 4 mm. long, 2.5 mm. wide,
obtuse, the bracts of the same texture and cystolithic marking as the stipules,
and completely enveloping the flowers before anthesis; staminate perianth
segments 3, about 4mm. long, with long linear tips; pistillate flowers in small,
loosely about 10-flowered, subglobose clusters on peduncles 5 to 10 mm. long
in the axils of the lower leaves, the perianth segments subequal, triangular-
ovate, about 0.8 mm. long; achenes suborbicular, 1.5 mm. long, smooth.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 531,410, collected near Rio
Flautas, Rfo Paez Valley, Tierra Adentro, Department of Huila, in the
Cordillera Central, Colombia, altitude 2900 meters, January 26, 1906, by
H. Pittier (no. 1216).
This species is remarkable for the conspicuous involucre subtending the
staminate inflorescence, the general aspect of the plant strongly suggesting
Lippia. In Weddell’s monograph? of the family it would come nearest P.
2 DC. Prodr. 16: 144.
JuLY 19,1925 KILLIP: AMERICAN SPECIES OF URTICACEAE 297
serratifolia Wedd., an Ecuadorean species which, from description, also has
a conspicuous involucre but which differs in venation and cystolithic marking
of the leaves as well as in the shape of the staminate perianth segments.
Pilea buchtienii Killip, sp. nov.
Succulent herb, glabrous throughout, the stem at first repent, at length
erect, about 20 cm. high, the internodes 3 to 6 em. long; stipules ovate, 2
mm. long, 1 mm. wide, obtuse, soon deciduous; petioles 1 to 3.5 cm. long,
succulent, canaliculate; leaves of a node similar and equal, ovate-elliptic, 8
to 12 cm. long, 3 to 6 em. wide, acuminate (acumen up to 1.2 em. long),
tapering at base to petiole, doubly crenate-serrate, entire at base, tripli-
nerved (nerves reaching to base of acumen), reticulate-veined (nerves and
veins conspicuous beneath), the upper surface dark green, bearing numerous
punctiform and minute fusiform cystoliths, the under surface destitute of
eystoliths, punctate with numerous spots scattered among the nerves; plants
monoecious, the staminate and pistillate flowers borne in glomerules in
separate few-branched panicles often at the same node, the peduncles of
both inflorescences subequal, 1.5 to 2 em. long, slightly shorter than the
subtending petioles; perianth segments of staminate flowers oblong, 1.2
mm. long, obtuse, the stamens slightly longer; perianth segments of pistillate
flowers ovate, subequal, about 0.5 mm. long, concave; achenes conical, 1.5
mm. long, 1 mm. wide, strongly flattened.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,156,963, collected at An-
tahuacana, Espiritu Santo, Bolivia, altitude 750 meters, June, 1909, by O.
Buchtien (no. 4526).
Nearest to P. marginata Wedd., this species is distinguished by its propor-
tionately wider leaves with margins doubly serrate, and by the longer pedun-
cles. Pilea marginata is said to be dioecious, while P. buchtiendi is monoeci-
ous. The foliage of this species, especially in the venation, resembles that
of P. rusbyi (Britton) Killip, though the leaves are thicker and the margin
differently cut. Pilea rusbyi, however, is dioecious, and the peduncles are
much longer.
Pilea hitchcockii Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, the stem repent below, erect, about 30 cm. high, slender,
ferruginous-strigillose, especially above, leafy near summit, the internodes at
middle and toward base 3 to 4 em. long; stipules ovate-orbicular, 4 to 7 mm.
long, 2 to 4 mm. wide, rounded or subtruncate at apex, sparingly pubescent,
persistent; petioles up to 4 mm. long, strigillose; leaves of a node similar but
often slightly unequal, narrowly elliptic, 2 to 7 em. long, 0.7 to 1.5 cm. wide,
acute or acuminate at apex, acute or rarely slightly rounded at base, coarsely
crenate-serrate or often sinuate-serrate (teeth obtuse or acutish), penni-
nerved (lateral nerves 12 to 15 on each side), the upper surface dark green
and glabrous, faintly marked with numerous fine linear cystoliths, the under
surface much paler, densely strigillose on the nerves, otherwise glabrous,
densely covered with minute punctiform cystoliths; plants monoecious; the
cymes unisexual (staminate at lower nodes, pistillate at upper), dichotomous,
up to 4 em. long (including peduncle),the flowers sessile or subsessile; perianth
segments of staminate flowers ovate, 1.5 mm. long, acute, glabrous; perianth
segments of pistillate flowers ovate-lanceolate, 0.5 mm. long, acute, the apex
often reflexed; achenes broadly ovoid, 1 to 1.2 mm. long, the margin thickened.
v
298 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,195,706, collected on a tree
stump, in the valley of the Pastaza River, between Bafios and Cashurco, 8
hours east of Bafios, Province of Tungurahua, Ecuador, altitude 1300 to 1800
meters, September 25, 1923, by A. S. Hitchcock (no. 21825).
This species, having much the general appearance of narrow-leaved forms
of Euphorbia heterophylla, belongs with the long-peduncled, pubescent species
of the section Dentatae, though it is apparently the only species with penni-
nervation. The venation is similar to that of P. fallax Wedd., a species with
dimorphic leaves, and of P. abetiaefolia Killip, a very distinct Colombian
plant.
Pilea pittieri Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, decumbent or erect, up to 40 em. high, the stem simple or
few-branched, glabrescent below, sparingly pubescent above, densely marked
throughout with linear cystoliths; stipules linear-oblong, 5 to 6 mm. long, 2
mm. wide, obtuse, deciduous; petioles 1 to 5 cm. long, those of a pair subequal
(or one 2 or 3 times as long as the other), pubescent; leaves ovate or ovate-
lanceolate, 3 to 10cm. long, 1.5 to 7 cm. wide (those of a pair similar but
slightly unequal), long-acuminate at apex, rounded or subcordate at base, 3
(or occasionally 5)-nerved (inner lateral nerves three-fourths length of blade),
reticulate, serrate or serrate-crenate nearly to base (teeth obtuse or acute,
minutely undulate-crenulate), the upper surface dark green, glabrous, bearing
numerous minute linear cystoliths, especially along the nerves, the under
surface paler, densely pubescent on nerves and veins, punctate on veins,
bearing less numerous similar eystoliths; plant monoecious (or occasionally
dioecious?); staminate cymes solitary in the axils of the lower leaves or at
the leafless nodes of the rooting portion of the stem, subsessile (or on pedun-
cles up to 3 em. long), pubescent, densely flowered, the perianth segments
linear-spatulate, 2 to 3 mm. long, 1 to 1.2 mm. wide, striate on outside with
linear cystoliths; pistillate spikes solitary in the axils of the upper leaves,
4 to 5 em. long, the peduncles slender, glabrous, 2 to 4-forked, the flowers
borne in subglobose clusters 3 to 4 mm. wide, the middle perianth segment
0.6 to 0.8 mm. long, cucullate, twice as long as the lateral segments; achenes
ovate, 1 mm. long, 0.8 mm. wide, acute, flattened, unicostate at center of
both faces.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,080,422, collected along the
Rio de la Paz, Sarapiqui Valley, Costa Rica, altitude 1300 meters, May 5,
1901, by H. Pittier (Herb. Inst. Phys.-geogr. Costa Rica 14149).
Additional specimens examined:
Costa Rica: (Province Cartago) La Estrella, Standley 39204. Orosi,
Standley 39730, 39760, 39811, 39862. El Mufieco, Standley 33943.
(Province San José) La Hondura, Standley 37713.
This species is related to P. acuminata Liebm., a dioecious plant with
staminate and pistillate inflorescences similar and having much larger leaves,
and to P. pubescens Liebm., a species with androgynous spikes and with the
upper leaf-surface strigillose.
Pilea standleyi Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, the stem decumbent, at length ascending to about 20
em., slender, pellucid, green, glabrescent below, pubescent above, particularly
at the nodes; stipules suborbicular, 3 to 4mm. long, rounded, persistent;
petioles up to 3 em. long, densely pubescent, those of a pair subequal; leaves
JULY 19,1925 KILLIP: AMERICAN SPECIES OF URTICACEAE 299
ovate-elliptic, 2 to 6 cm. long, 1.5 to 3 cm. wide, acute at apex, rounded or
acutish at base, crenate-serrate nearly to base, 3-nerved (lateral nerves ex-
tending to upper fourth of blade), dark green and glabrous above, paler
beneath, densely pubescent on the nerves, bearing numerous linear cystoliths
on both surfaces; plants dioecious; peduncles of pistillate inflorescence up
to 5 em. long, in the axils of the upper leaves, slender, glabrous, dichotomous,
the flowers borne in contiguous clusters at the ends of the branches, the
perianth segments unequal, the middle segment about 0.7 mm. long, the
lateral segments less than one-half as long, hyaline; achenes suborbicular,
about 0.8 mm. long, narrowly wing-margined, not costate on faces.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,229,585, collected at Las
Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude 1500 to 1900 meters,
March 20-22, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38697).
The principal character by which this species may be distinguished from
P. pittieri, which it resembles in general appearance, is in the smaller, con-
spicuously wing-margined, ecostate achenes.
Pouzolzia phenacoides Killip, sp. nov.
Shrub 1 to 1.5 meters high, branched, the branches hirsutulous above,
glabrate below; stipules lanceolate, 5 to 6 mm. long, acuminate, pilosulous on
midrib without, soon deciduous; leaves ovate or ovate-lanceolate, 2 to 6 cm.
long, 1.5 to 3 cm. wide, acuminate at apex, rounded at base, petiolate (petioles
up to 1.5 em. long, slender), coarsely dentate-serrate except in lower quarter,
3-nerved at base, sparsely strigillose above with stiff white hairs, appressed-
pilosulous on the nerves beneath; plants monoecious, the flower clusters
androgynous or unisexual; staminate flowers in small, axillary, 1 to 5-flowered
clusters, short-pedicellate, the perianth 4+lobed, about 1.5 em. long, pubescent
without, slightly exceeded by the stamens; pistillate flowers 1 to 5, short-
pedicellate or subsessile, at base of staminate inflorescence, the perianth
tubular, about 2 mm. long, contracted at the short 4-toothed beak, about 12-
nerved, finely puberulous without; achenes ovoid, about 2 mm. long, dark
brown, shining.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,229,521, collected on the
Cerro de Piedra Blanca, above Escasti, Province of San José, Costa Rica,
January 31, 1924, by P. C. Standley (no. 32484). Standley’s 34679, from
La Ventolera, on the southern slope of the Voledn de Pods, altitude 1700
meters, is also this species.
This is apparently the only known American species of Pouzolzia with
toothed leaves. The flowers are much like those of P. occidentalis (Liebm.)
Wedd. The general appearance of the specimens suggests Phenax hirtus or
Phenax mexicanus.
300 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFLILATED
SOCIETIES
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
183D MEETING
The 183d meeting of the AcapEMy was held on January 7, 1924, in the
assembly hall of the Cosmos Club. The program consisted of brief addresses
constituting a Symposium on Coal
Program: GrorGE Oris Smiru, Director of the U. 8. Geological Survey,
Coal a national issue. Under a classification that is more practical than
scientific there are two kinds of coal—the coal that we think we can not get
along without, and the coal that we actually can not get along without; coal
for which there are substitutes, and coal for which there are no substitutes;
the luxury fuel, anthracite used by the favored few, and the industrial fuel,
bituminous coal, used by the whole country. The one is used in the homes
of a few States in the East; the other by the industries of the whole country.
We mine as much bituminous coal in a day as anthracite ina week. Of
our anthracite resources one-fourth has been mined; of the bituminous re-
sources less than one per cent. In recent years anthracite production has
failed to keep pace with population; by way of contrast, bituminous con-
sumption per capita has increased 10-fold in a lifetime.
Bituminous coal is indispensable because upon it rest transportation and
industry. Interstate commerce is really what puts the ‘‘United”’ into United
States, and American industry as we know it today surpasses that of other
nations in the degree to which we strengthen the arm of labor with mechani-
cal power. The 3} horsepower or more of prime mover capacity with which
the average wage earner is equipped means an annual consumption of about
10 tons of coal per wage earner for power alone, and power generation is only
one of the uses of coal in industry. The uninterrupted mining of coal and its
transportation and country-wide distribution thus make up an indispens-
able service. Shut down the coal mines or stop the coal-laden trains and
the whole country would soon be not only cold and dark but idle and hungry.
The uninterrupted operation of the coal mines is a vital function of working
America, and it thus becomes a national issue whether or not the coal industry
performs this service so as to meet the public need. Call it public utility or
not, coal mining is absolutely essential to the general welfare.
As we discuss the function of the coal industry it is well to realize the
magnitude of its daily task of supplying the country with fuel. An average
day’s output of the bituminous mines would load a coal train extending from
Washington nearly to New Haven, and if to this is added the daily ‘quota of
anthracite cars the coal train would extend to Hartford.
Four years ago Mr. Tryon and myself described what is wrong with the
coal industry by the phrase ‘Bad load factor.” Unfortunately this load
factor is notimproved. The law of supply and demand, however, works out
differently with anthracite and bituminous coal. The undercapacity of the
anthracite mines to meet even the ordinary demand is in marked contrast
with the overdevelopment of the bituminous mines whose capacity far exceeds
even the peak demand. In the anthracite industry restraint of trade is un-
necessary for the overdemand maintains price levels. In the bituminous
industry no combination or monopoly of producers has ever controlled either
supply or prices. The insistent demand from buyers is the immediate cause
JULY 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 301
of exorbitant prices whenever supply has been inadequate. Herein lies the
opportunity of the consumer; to help stabilize production and prices by stabil-
izing demand.
Uncertainty and irregularity of demand are not the only causes of the
present unfortunate condition of too many bituminous mines and too many
miners. How wasteful is this overdevelopment may be seen in the fact that
in 1921 the bituminous mines turned out a million less tons than in 1910 but
employed 100,000 more men, a difference suggesting decreased skill on the
part of the mine worker but in fact due wholly to the shorter working year—
149 days in 1921 as against 217 days in 1910. This is not progress.
The outstanding cause of this wasteful use of labor and capital in the
bituminous industry is the uncertainty of its labor supply. The present
monopoly of mine labor has followed in the trail of the Union’s necessary
beneficial work in behalf of the mine worker. But that makes labor mon-
opoly no less injurious to the general public, and its power needs to be curbed.
The open threat of tying up the commerce of a nation and shutting down its
industries is the menace of economic chaos and therefore the real issue today
concerns the sovereignty of the American people in their relation to those who
own coal mines or work in coal mines: Is the people’s right to an uninter-
rupted supply of coal the dominant right? On this issue, President Coolidge
has declared that “‘the public interest is paramount” and that selfish failure
in service is “such a betrayal of duty as warrants uncompromising action by
the government.” (Author’s Abstract.)
Davin L. Wire, Operator’s costs and profits. The practical use made of
cost-of-production information is twofold: to assist the operator in the in-
telligent conduct of his own business, and to furnish information required
of him by the Government. One of these requirements has been due to the
administration of the Federal Income and Excess Profits tax; the other to
the position of coal as a basic industry, which caused Government regulation
of it during the war, and to almost continuous investigation from 1917 on, by
Congressional committees, or governmental commisssions.
Costs of production vary greatly from mine to mine, and from field to
field, due partly to physical conditions, and partly to different conditions of
labor, transportation facilities, investment in labor-saving equipment, man-
agement, etc. The sales realizations also show wide variations, due to the use
made of the coal, the competitive conditions in the markets, ete. In fixing
prices for a field under price regulation, the average cost must not be taken
as a basis, but instead, a cost at the 75 or 80 per cent level of production, in
order not to curtail needed output. Large margins can be sometimes ob-
tained by low-cost operators who show sales realizations below the field
average. Margins must not be confused with net profits to the operator
as they do not show return on actualinvestment. (Auwthor’s Abstract.)
H. Foster Barn, Director of the Bureau of Mines, Hazards of the coal
industry. Among the costs of coal society must pay is the cost of death and
disability among miners. Health hazards in mining are not greater than in
industry in general; accident hazards apparently are greater than most but
not all American undustries. While the loss of life per ton of coal is less than
abroad, it is much larger in number per 1000 workers. This follows from the
fact that we work thicker beds, which more frequently lie at low angles,
but we use more machinery and have speeded up production. Part of the
difference is in the national spirit, whichis venturesome; our own men are
disposed to take chances. It will be impossible to prevent accidents entirely,
but it is not impossible to decrease their number and to limit their extent in a
302 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
mine. This is especially true of the great mine disasters. It should also be
possible to decrease the number of haulage accidents. For these things
scientific and technical research is still necessary. To decrease accidents due
to fall of rock, which account for half the deaths in mines, campaigns of
education such as the Bureau of Mines first-aid instruction are needed in
order to inculcate safety thinking by the men. (Author’s abstract.)
F. G. Tryon, of the U.S. Geological Survey, Overdevelopment of the bitumi-
nous coalindustry and its cure. In the bituminous coal industry there are
150,000 miners and 200,000,000 tons of mine capacity in excess of what can
be continuously employed. This results in a higher cost of production, which
must ultmately be borne by the public, and in unrest among the miners
through intermittent employment. It makes difficult the negotiation of
wage agreements, and is thus an indirect cause of strikes. Plans to reduce
overdevelopment include requiring a license to open a new mine, distributing
railroad coal cars to well-established mines in preference to speculative enter-
prises, permitting combination and codperative marketing among producers,
and encouraging voluntary agreements between operators and employers to
provide for unempoyment insurance or for methods of wage payment that
will encourage steady operation. All of these plans are shown to be open to
serious objection, either on legal or economic grounds. The attitude of the
industry is shown to be opposed to regulation and in favor of a policy of
laissez-faire. Unless sweeping changes in existing laws are to be made, the
means of reducing overdevelopment are confined to overcoming the specific
causes that have promoted it, that is, by gradual improvement of the tech-
nique and business methods employed by the industry. (Author’s abstract.)
Cuarues P, Neritu, Manager of the Bureau of Information of the South-
eastern Railways, Wages in the coal industry.
O. P. Hoop, Consumers’ Economics. Cheap fuel has always been available
in America, leading to unthrifty habits in its use. Each new price level has
made old equpment less satisfactory, and we find ourselves with ample room
for improvement in the use of fuels. A change in attitude of the public mind
towards fuel resources is needed. Various economies are being practiced by
the several groups of consumers, namely, the railroads, the largeindustries,
public utilities, the small industrial plants, and the domestic consumer.
The application of our scientific knowledge to the problem of combustion
and heat absorption in the various industries is our most effective means of
meeting advancing prices. The domestic consumer in the east will ultimately
have to learn to use bituminous coal, and when really careful attention is given
less tons of coal will be used and satisfactory service obtained, but with no
more effort and thought applied than with anthracite the results will always
be unsatisfactory. (Auwthor’s abstract.)
184TH MEETING
The 184th meeting was held jointly with the Geological Society and the
Philosophical Society in the Auditorium of the Interior Department building
on January 23, 1925. T. A. Jaccar, Director of the Hawaiian Volcanological
Observatory, gave two addresses, one on the Tokyo Earthquakes, and the other
on the Hawaiian Volcanoes. These were illustrated by lantern slides and
motion pictures.
The Tokyo Earthquake—The earthquake of September 1, 1923, which
produced the fires that so nearly destroyed Tokyo and Yokohama, had its
epicenter, according to the Tokyo seismographs, in the middle of the oceanic
depression near Oshima Island between the Awa and the Izu peninsula. The
seismic damage, however, was not at its maximum on Oshima Island. The
JULY 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE ACADEMY 303
bottom of Dagami bay, north of Oshima, showed changes in depth in places
as great as 200 fathoms. It looks as if block-faulting had occurred in the
bottom of the bay in coincidence with the earthquake, the sea-bottom north
of Oshima showing a drop of 900 feet. The greatest seismic disturbance was
at Manazuru Point on the west side of Sagami Bay, at Kamakura and Yoko-
suka on the Sagami Peninsula, and at Tateyama on the Awa Peninsula. These
places all suffered intense vertical shaking that resembled an up and down
pounding from below; at Manazuru this sort of violent disturbance was re-
peated again and again during twenty-four hours. The shore-line was lifted
from | to 9 feet.
The dying away of the earthquake effects from Sagami Bay outwards is
rapid towards the west in the hard voleanic rocks of the Izu region, and more
gradual towards the northeast in the soft river deposits of Tokyo Bay. The
center of actual damage was about the town of Yokosuka. The intensity of
the damage is remarkably dependent upon topography and on quality of
construction. In some of the districts where the damage was most severe,
honestly built and new houses stood up in extraordinary fashion. One of the
interesting features of the great earthquake is the apparently freakish way
in which the damage was distributed. Some small villages were almost
totally thrown down in the midst of a region where large neighboring farm
houses stand almost uninjured. In Tokyo itself some persons in the suburbs
thought that the earthquake was less severe than the one they had experi-
enced in April, 1922. Beyond Tokyo to the north and east the damage by
earthquake dies away very rapidly within two or three miles, and there is
very little damage on the east side of the Awa Peninsula. According to re-
ports from the mining districts on the west side of the Izu Peninsula, there
were miners working underground who did not know that an earthquake had
occurred, and they perceived no falling of materials in the stopes or other
signs of disturbance. Indeed, in some places in the Suzenji district it is said
that the shock was not perceived even on the surface. In Tokyo the earth-
quake effects were much stronger on the bottom land and near the canals
than they were in the hilly suburbs, and in general the earthquake in Tokyo,
could it have been measured on the solid rock, would not rank as a shock of
very great magnitude. The damage due to the earthquake was enormously
greater in Yokohama.
Fires were set in all the larger towns; this includes Ogowara, Kamakura,
Yokosuka, Hojo on the Awa Peninsula, Yokohama, and Tokyo. Most of
Yokohama was burned and about half of Tokyo. There was a high wind on the
day of the earthquake and about 120 fires are reported to have started in
Tokyo alone. The earthquake occurred at 11.59 a.m. when fires were burning
in all kitchens; the wooden houses and the crowded blocks with traffie con-
gestion and much gasoline make it impossible to deal with fire when many
fires are started at the same time during a high wind. The situation was com-
plicated by a change of wind from southwest at noon to northerly in the even-
ing. This increased the loss of life, for crowds which had taken refuge to
windward of the first fires found themselves to leeward, and in attempting to
shift positions became surrounded and hopelessly lost. The loss oflife will
never be known accurately, as the official statistics involve large numbers
of missing in addition to the known dead. The loss of life certainly greatly
exceeded that of the Messina earthquake, 140,000, and may have been as
large as 400,000.
Tn the last 21 years there have been eleven great disasters; the earthquakes
of San Francisco, Valparaiso, Kingston, Messina, Cartago, Guatemala,
Avezanno, and Tokyo, and the volcanic eruptions of the Caribee Islands,
304 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
Vesuvius, and Sakurajima. Lives lost have averaged 30,000 per year and
property destroyed $500,000,000 a year. The increase of intense catastrophes
is due to concentration of population, not to increase in the frequency or the
violence of earthquakes or eruptions. Any of the cities of our Pacific coast
may be visited by another severe earthquake, and the regions farther east
can not be considered exempt, as is shown by the New Madrid earthquake of
1812, the Charleston earthquake, and the earthquakes of 1755 and 1797 in the
northeastern part of the country. The 1755 earthquake at Boston was as
strong as the Charleston shocks of 1886. Precaution should be taken accord-
ingly, particularly with regard to the danger from the fires that an earthquake
usually starts. The presence of automobiles in the streets and large stores of
gasoline complicate the problem.
The Hawaiian Volcanoes.—The speaker gave a brief account of the geog-
raphy of Hawaii with especial reference to its volcanoes, and described the
work of the Voleano Observatory on Kilauea. Inside the crater the topog-
raphy is continually changing. When there is a rapid rise of lava, it is
generally around the edge of the crater as if the central part had been plugged
by solidifying lava.
The hourly observation of the liquid lava discloses fluctuation of level, pre-
sumably tidal in character. .There is a twice-a-day fluctuation of from two to
seven feet, a daily variation of from three to five feet, and a monthly shifting
of the times of maximum and minimum level. The hard lava floor of the
crater also showed a daily change in level of about one foot, but the times of
maximum and minimum were nearly opposite to those for the liquid lava.
Seasonal tilting of the ground was also found of from 15 to 25 seconds of are.
Seasons in which this tilting was cumulative away from the center of island and
of least monthly range showed the least voleanic activity, and a declineof the
lava column both at Kilauea and Mauna Loa. It is indicated that the ob-
servations, particularly those of the tidal movements, will ultimately be of
value in predicting future eruptions. (Abstracts revised by author )
185TH MEETING
The 185th meeting was held jointly with the Geological Society in the
assembly hall of the Cosmos Club on February 21, 1924.
Program: ALFRED C, Lane, Professor of Geology at Tufts College, The age
of the earth and the oceans.
There are at least 41 different ways of figuring age. The first group of
methods includes those depending upon the loss of heat of the sun or the
earth; they have ceased to have any great value at present owing to the un-
certainty of the effect of radioactivity and the uncertainty as to the tempera-
ture from which to start. The second group may be called the ledger, or
debit and credit, methods. The methods of this group depend upon the
process of deposition and erosion which is always going on; the stuff that is
eroded has to be deposited somewhere. Therefore there must be a balance,
like a trial balance on books of account. Thus the lime is concentrated in
limestones and the sodium goes into the salt of the ocean. The ocean, like any
other great salt lake, has slowly acquired its sodium, while the water and the
chloride have been furnished by voleanoes; the ocean is probably growing in
volume. A separate account may be opened for each element and all these
methods should check, as they do fairly well, indicating an age for the earth
not far from 100,000,000 years.
On the other hand, the methods of attaining the age of the earth by atomic
disintegration give much longer times. The atoms of uranium explode like
kernels of corn, and if we knew the rate at which the corn popper was popping
JuLY 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 305
and the amounts of popcorn made, we could know how jong the machine had
been running. Also in both cases helium gas is given off and finally in the
process of popping, the atoms fly off with such velocity as to produce a halo of
disturbance in the surrounding mica or other material. All these methods
have been used to estimate the age of the earth, and ages as great as one
thousand million to 15 hundred million years have been obtained.
The question arises at once how this discrepancy can be reconciled. Atten-
tion was called to the work of the Committee on Atomic Disintegration of the
National Research Council as calculated to throw light on this important sub-
ject, as well as to have practical value in separating the granites of different
ages. This would have at times commercial value. Perhaps the reason for
the difference in ages is that in the ledger type of determinations we have to
figure from the present rate at which processes take place. It is more likely
that atoms have been exploding at the same rate indefinitely than that the
forces in action upon the earth’s crust have always been uniform, and it seems
more probable that events are happening more rapidly nowadays than they
have on the average in the past, so that the rate of accumulation of sodium
and its transportation by the streams now is a good deal faster than it has
averaged in times past.
Water D. Lampert, Recording Secretary.
THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY
91STH MEETING
The 918th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club, April 4,
1925. The meeting was called to order by President Fuemine at 8:15 with
35 persons in attendance.
Program: F. WENNER and F. M.Sovuur. Measurement of cyclic changes
in electrical resistance, (presented by Dr. WENNER). (Illustrated by lantern
slides and by experimental demonstrations.)
Three methods were described for measuring a cyclic change in the resist-
ance of a conductor when this change can be definitely synchronized with a
test current. These differ from the methods generally used in which the re-
sistance is measured first under one set of conditions, and then under another.
They also differ from the one direct method seldom used, in that the test cur-
rent is not passed through a galvanometer.
In one of these methods an inductor is placed in series with the galvanometer
while the conductor under investigation is placed in parallel with this com-
bination. In another, the potential drop in the conductor is balanced by the
potential drop in an adjacent arm of a Wheatstone bridge. In the third, the
potential drop in the conductor is balanced by the potentiometer arrange-
ment. Each depends for its action upon the rectification produced when
an alternating or varying current is passed through a conductor in phase
with the cyclic change in its resistance.
They are extremely sensitive and extremely selective. The sensibility is
such that under favorable conditions, it is possible to detect a cyclic change in
resistance when the amplitude of this change is no larger than 10-° times the
resistance of the conductor in which it occurs. The selectivity is such that it is
possible to detect such a cyclic change in resistance, of the same frequency as
and in phase with the test current, when the amplitude of this change is no
larger than 10~? or even 10-* times the amplitude of other changes which may be
occurring at the same time. Further, they have the advantage that they do
not require exceptionally high grade nor in general specially constructed
apparatus for their application.
306 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
Attention was directed to a number of applications of these methods and the
mathematical relations which apply for some of the simpler arrangements.
The possible application to an investigation of telephone loud speakers and the
acoustical qualities of auditoriums was illustrated by an experimental demon-
stration. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Wu1tr, HAWKESWORTH,
Foorr, TucKERMAN, EckKHARDT, and HUMPHREYS.
I. G. Priest.—Gray skies and white snow. (Illustrated.) At the Boston
meeting of the Optical Society of America, October, 1924 (and previously), A.
Ames, JR., showed that reproduction, in a plane picture, of the accurate pro-
jection of an ‘‘objective scene” may result in an effect on the beholder of the
picture which is neither natural nor artistic. Mr. Ames has shown that much
more natural pictures, which recall the visual impression of the “objective
scene” more pleasingly and vividly, may be made by introducing certain aber-
rations into the picture.
In the oral discussion of Mr. Amegs’ paper, I pointed out that a similar,
paradox may exist between the “values” (A. H. Munsett, ‘Color Notation,”
pp. 18 and 112) in a picture and the brightnesses in the “‘objective scene.”
My present purpose is to substantiate this proposition by specific experiments
and quantitative photometric data.
The following major propositions have been demonstrated by experimental
data.
(1) In viewing an actual scene of snow-covered ground and overcast sky,
the sky may be perceived as “‘gray’”’ and the show as “‘white”’ even though the
brightness (technical photometric sense) of the snow be much less than the
brightness of the sky.
(2) The observer may be conscious that the sky is “brighter” than the snow
in spite of the fact that he perceives it as “gray,” and the snow as “‘white.”
(3) This paradox cannot be wholly explained by assuming that the snow
appears white because of contrast with neighboring dark objects.
(4) If a virtual image of the “gray” sky be brought into juxtaposition with
the direct view of the ‘‘white” snow, the snow may appear “gray” and the
image of the sky “white.”
(5) A vertical wall illuminated by half of the sky on an overcast day may
be perceived as ‘‘white”’ and the sky immediately above and beyond it as
“oray’’ even though the sky be much brighter than the wall.
(6) Photographs which render the relative brightness of sky and white ob-
jects approximately as they would be measured photometrically may produce
quite unnatural effects.
(7) To give a faithful rendition of the visual effect, the artist may be obliged
to make the relative brightness on his canvas in reverse order of the corre-
sponding brightnesses in the ‘‘objective scene.’’ (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Wuitg, Ives, HAawKEs-
WORTH, CRITTENDEN, Eckuarpt, L. H. ApAMs, GisH, Foors, and others.
919TH MEETING
The 919th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club, April
18, 1925. ‘The meeting was called to order by President FLEMING at 8:14
with 32 persons in attendance.
Program: C. W. Kanour. Non-flammable liquids for low temperature
thermostats. (Illustrated by charts.) Thermostats are usually constructed
with a stirred liquid bath. When the bathis to be used at a low temperature
the liquid must be one that will not freeze at the temperature employed. Such
JuLy 19,1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 307
liquids as gasoline, petroleum ether and toluol have commonly been used for
this purpose. Several very serious accidents have occurred in laboratories when
such fammable liquids were used, especially when liquid air has been used for
cooling. The evaporation of liquid air leaves liquid oxygen, and the conden-
sation of a combustible vapor in liquid oxygen produces an explosive. A mild
explosion or the collapse of a glass vacuum vessel may throw ignited liquid
upon the operator.
The purpose of the investigation has been to find liquids which will not
burn, which have very low freezing points and are otherwise suitable for ther-
mostat liquids. The materials tried are chlorine and bromine derivatives of
methane, ethane and ethylene and mixtures of these derivatives. By mixing
the substances in suitable proportions it is usually possible to obtain mixtures
having lower freezing points than any of the constituents.
The eutectic compositions and temperatures of mixtures of two, three and
four components have been determined, and some mixtures of five components
have been investigated. Viscosity and corrosiveness have also been studied.
Suitable non-flammable liquids have been found that can be used at tempera-
tures down to —150°C. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Stimson and L. H.
ADAMS.
E. W. Wootarp.—A problem in mathematical expectation and its bearing on
statistics. In order that the mind may grasp the significance of a great mass
of numerical data, and detect the laws and relations, if any, concealed in the
figures, special methods of representation and of analytical treatment, known
as statistical, are necessary. A common procedure is to replace the original
body of data by a small set of summary coefficients which resume in them-
selves all the features of the complete data that are essential or relevant to the
purposes in hand.
The statistical coefficients pertaining to a single variable that are now in
common use, such as the mean, the standard deviation, etc., characterize only
the features of the frequency distribution. In many cases, however, including
those in which statistical methods and the theory of “errors” are applied to
meteorological problems, the order in which the values of a time-variable occur
is of importance, and it becomes desirable to have a coefficient characterizing
the order of succession in a sequence of values:
Conclusions seriously in error may be drawn if statistical formulae are
applied to problems in which the conditionsin Nature do not conform to those
under which the mathematical formulae are valid. For example, the mean
temperatures of consecutive days are not independent of each other whereas
the theorems of the theory of “errors” presuppose, in general, independent
events. GOoUTEREAU and Maret, in 1906, showed that in a sequence of
numbers drawn at random from a Gaussian distribution, the ratio of the mean
variability to the mean deviation is equal to 1 2, where by the mean variability
is meant the mean of the absolute values of the differences between consecutive
numbers in the sequence.
The author has obtained a formula, readily adapted to numerical computa-
tion, which gives the value of the mean variability in a random sequence drawn
from a frequency distribution of any form. A comparison of this theoretical
value with the actual value in any given series will give some indication of
whether or not the series is a random one. The formula has been tested ex-
perimentally. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. LAMBERT and TUCKERMAN.
P.R. Heri. Some thoughts on the inertia of energy. For the discovery of the
308 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
principle of the inertia of energy we are indebted to Ernsrrern, who pointed it
out about 20 yearsago. He first deduced it from the special theory of relativity,
but shortly showed that it might be deduced as a corollary of Maxwell’s elec-
tromagnetic theory without introducing relativity at all. Its pedigree there-
fore is unimpeachably classical, though the concept itself is subversive of much
that was held to be firmly established in the nineteenth century.
There is a parallel to be drawn betsveen the inertia of energy and the me-
chanical equivalent of heat. The latter principle asserts that there is a heat
equivalent of energy, 4.2 < 107 ergs per calory. The former doctrine asserts
similarly that there is a mass equivalent of energy, 9 X 102° ergs per gram.
The difference in dimensions between the erg and the gram is made up by the
fact that the numerical coefficient (9 10?°) has the dimensions of the square
of a velocity, being in fact the square of the velocity of light.
The great importance of the concept from a philosophical point of view is
that it correlates the two fundamental concepts of matter and energy. It also
shows potential energy in a new aspect, always accompanied by a slight change
of mass, thus removing it from the ‘imponderables.”
In his general theory of relativity Ervsrern still further elaborates this
doctrine of inertia of energy, showing that it leads to the concept that matter
and energy are two different aspects, static and kinetic, of the same thing,
space curvature. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Mussrs. TucKERMAN, HAWKEs-
WORTH, and SILSBER.
920TH MEETING
The 920th meeting was held in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club, May 2,
1925. The meeting was called to order by President Fuemmne at 8:19 with
36 persons in attendance.
Program: F. Neumann. Larthquakes of 1925—the problem of determining
epicenters. (Illustrated by lantern slides.) The Quebec earthquake was less
severe than several others occurring in Asia during the early part of 1925.
This is based particularly on the ground movements registered on the seismo-
graph at the Honolulu Magnetic Observatory. In the United States the rec-
ords of the Quebee earthquake of February 28th are complex, making a pre-
liminary determination of the epicenter very uncertain.
The effect of earthquake waves on movable bodies in the disturbed region
surrounding the epicenter is discussed with special reference to resonance
effects and the doubtful possibility of using this kind of information to locate a
definite epicenter.
The necessity of compiling more data concerning the variations in the veloc-
ity of earthquake waves is stressed. The Honolulu Observatory is cited as
a station where particularly wide variations are in evidence.
The Alaskan earthquake of February 23d is cited as an instance in which
five observatory records give fairly satisfactory results regarding both location
and time of origin. It is shown how, at four observatories in the United States,
several interpretations are possible in determining the epicenter of the Quebec
earthquake. No positive statement is made concerning its exact location.
(Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. Laporte and Hrcx.
H. D. Houtzer. A method of studying electrode potentials and polarization.
(Illustrated by lantern slides.) A resistance-coupled electron-tube amplifier
was used to operate an oscillograph for observing the variations in the potential
of an electrode without requiring any current from the electrode under investi-
gation. By making oscillographic photographs of the electrode potential at
JULY 19,1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 309
the instant of interrupting a direct current through the cell under investigation
it was possible to obtain a continuous record of the variation in potential. In
eases where the polarization potential disappeared slowly enough, distinction
could be made between the electromotive force of polarization and potential
difference due to resistance.
By superposing alternating current upon the electrode under investigation
and the half cell, it was possible with the use of the amplifier and a separately
excited wattmeter, to measure the true alternating potential across the elec-
trode. From this potential and the current passed through the cell, the bound-
ary resistance at the electrode was computed from Ohm’s law. This was per-
missible because the potential and current, as shown by the oscillograph were
in phase, there being a negligibly small capacity effect.
The boundary resistance varied considerably with the different kinds of
electrodes. The resistance of platinized platinum, lead, and carbon in sulphuric
acid was small; that is, several hundredths of an ohm, while that of smooth
platinum and copper in the same electrolyte was high, several tenths of an ohm.
The resistance of copper in copper sulphate and zinc in zinc sulphate was also
small. The results show that in some cases the electrode potential as measured
by the potentiometer when current is flowing is more than 0.2 volt too high
because of the potential due to resistance. In the cases where the boundary
resistance was high, it decreased rapidly as the current was increased.
N.H. Hecx. The path of sound waves through sea water. (Illustrated.) At
first thought it might appear that a sound wave due to an explosion at a point
off-shore would take a straight path to a hydrophone near the shore, and there-
fore the velocity would correspond to that of the warm surface layer. In tests
made of the radio acoustic method of the Coast and Geodetic Survey in which
the sound wave from an explosion of a small bomb 30 to 50 miles off-shore ar-
rives at the hydrophone with sufficient energy to automatically send a return
signal from a shore radio station to which the hydrophone is connected by
cable, it was found that the velocity averaged considerably lower than for the
surface layer. It was found further that it did not correspond to the straight
line path, taking the earth’s curvature into effect.
Tests made in July, 1924, off the coast of Oregon showed that the average
temperature was 7°.1C. as the mean of surface to bottom temperature at
several sections between the explosion and the shore. The corresponding
velocity from Table 13, Special Publication No. 108, Coast and Geodetic Sur-
vey, is 1475 m. per second, while the measured velocity, based on visual deter-
mination of the position of the ship which fired the bomb, was 1473 m. per
second. In October the corresponding figures were: average temperature
10°.9C., and the corresponding velocity 1491 m; measured velocity 1493 m.
It was shown by means of a diagram that a part of the wave front in the
warm surface layers would travel faster and therefore the wave surface would
be disturbed. Rays drawn from the bomb explosion normal to the successive
wave fronts were bent downward; accordingly for successive wave fronts
the energy per unit of area would be less near the surface than further down.
For this reason, above a certain distance, perhaps ten miles, there would not be
sufficient energy from the direct wave in the surface to send the signal. On
the other hand, the waves which strike the bottom are reflected. For paths
near the vertical the reflections are numerous and there is loss of energy at each
reflection. It would appear then, that having given position of explosion and
hydrophone, the required amount of energy reaches the hydrophone by a path
which is based on maximum energy for a minimum number of reflections. As
the depth of the water is small compared to distance, the actual path makes
310 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 13
very little difference in distance determination. The indication that the theory
advanced is correct is upheld by the agreement of measured velocity with the
theoretical velocity for the average temperature, top to bottom, and it is fur-
ther upheld by the fact that in some cases a shoal projecting well above the
bottom, but by no means up to the path of the straight line from bottom to
hydrophone, actually blocks the transmission. (Avthor’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Mussrs. VauGHAN, W. M. Davis,
STEPHENSON, Marmer, and HAWKESWORTH.
By request. Pror. W. M. Davis gave a formal talk on the Significance of the
discovery of a shoal in China sea, and pointed out the bearing of this discovery
on Darwin’s theory of coral reefs.
921sT MEETING
The 921st meeting was held in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club, May 16,
1925. The meeting was called to order by President FLemine at 8:16 with 34
persons in attendance.
Program: L. B. TuckerMAN. Full walled sturdy columns in theory and prac-
tice. (Illustrated by lantern slides.) Sixty-nine large columns of H-shaped
section, part rolled in one piece and part fabricated from plates and angles or
from channels, were tested at the Bureau of Standards in coédperation with the
American Bridge Company and the Bethlehem Steel Company.
The cross sectional areas were approximately 35 and 85 square inches, the
lengths 12, 18 and 24 feet and the slenderness ratios ranged from 38 to 92. All
were tested as ‘‘flat end” columns in the Bureau’s ten million pounds vertical
testing machine.
To determine the properties of the material over 1,000 tensile coupons were
tested, so that the material in these columns was better known than in any other
series of similar large columns.
The tests results indicate that the strength of solid walled sturdy column
within this range of slenderness depends only slightly on the manner of con-
struction, slenderness ratio or small accidental eccentricities, either of structure
or of test conditions.
The column strengths, however, correlate closely with the weighted average
yield point as determined by the coupon tests, indicating that the strength of
the columns is determined largely by the properties of the material in the
neighborhood of the yield point.
A study of various details of the behavior of the columns in the tests, espe-
cially the anomalous lateral deflections, and the “pick-up” of load, indicate that
the behavior of these columns can be best explained by means of the ‘double
modulus” theory, first proposed by ConsmEere, developed and experimentally
confirmed by KarMaN on small specimens, and later independently proposed
by SouTHWELL. (Author’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. L. J. Briees, TRuscorr,
and PAWLING.
I. C. Garpner and F. A. Casr. Photographing the interior of a rifle barrel,
(Presented by Mr. GarpNeER.) (Illustrated by lantern slides.) In order to study
the progress of the erosion in the 0.30 caliber service rifle and machine gun
barrels a camera has been designed for photographing the interior surface of the
barrel. The apparatus consists essentially of a periscope of unit magnification
of such dimensions as to permit entry into the bore of the rifle. A small electric
lamp, also placed in the bore of the gun, provides the illumination. «The peri-
scope projects an image of a small portion of the bore on a strip of motion pic-
ture film. The barrel to be photographed is slowly drawn along the periscope
—_—
JuLy 19,1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY 311
and simultaneously the film is moved at such a rate that there is no relative
motion between image projected by periscope and film. If the barrel is drawn
its entire length along the periscope, one obtains a picture on the film showing
a strip of the interior of the bore of the same length as the barrel and including
approximately one-sixth of the circumference. Six such pictures provide a
photographic record of the entire surface of the bore upon which the detailed
defects arising from the erosion can be clearly seen. The instrument is also
excellently adapted for a visual examination of the interior of the barrel. A
microscope magnifying 20 or 30 diameters can be used to view the image in the
focal plane, and the different characteristics of the surface of the bore stand out
clearly in good contrast. This camera is intended to be used to study the
manner in which different steels resist erosion. (Awthor’s abstract.)
Discussion. The paper was discussed by Messrs. SinsBeE and Hawkegs-
WORTH.
922ND MEETING
The 922nd meeting was a special meeting held jointly with the Washington
Academy of Sciences and the Chemical Society of Washington, May 28, 1925,
in the auditorium of the Cosmos Club. It was called to order at 8:30 by Dr.
L. H. Adams, president of the Chemical Society of Washington, with 110
persons in attendance.
Program: HeRBERT FreuNpiicH. The state of aggregation and shape of
colloidal particles. (Illustrated by lantern slides.)
The X-ray has been applied to the study of colloids, and by its use we have
been able to decide whether particles of a sol are crystalline or amorphous-
solid (or liquid). It has been found that the particles of very many sols
are crystalline, e.g. sols of gold, silver, Al,O3, and FesO3.
The state of aggregation of particles depends on the velocity of their
formation; there is according to HaBrer a competition between a grouping
velocity and an orientation velocity. If the period of precipitate formation is
very short, definite orientation does not take place. The particles remain in
a state of disorder and the precipitate is amorphous as in the case of quickly
precipitated Al(OH); and Fe(OH);. But where Al.O; or Fe.O3 sols are formed
by hydrolysis and if the tendency to crystallize is great enough, there is time
for the process of orientation and consequently the particles crystallize.
The shape of amorphous particles is, as a rule, spherical.
Non-spherical particles, due to their shape, exhibit manifold phenomena.
One of these is that of pronounced scintillation of light, i.e., not a continuous
radiation of light as in the case of spherical particles. V2O; is a characteristic
sol of this type. The aged sol shows particles with a definite rod-like struc-
ture. The particles are crystalline. In old and non-coagulated concentrated
sols the particles do not lie irregular, but in cloud-like swarms. Such groups
are made up of very small colloidal particles. When such swarms are viewed
through an ultra-microscope using a so-called azimuth diaphragm, long
thread-like particles standing nearly parallel to one another may be seen.
They possess weak scintillations caused by the Brownian movement. Old
and concentrated Fe.O0; sols show this same phenomenon still more pro-
nounced. But their particles are lamellar, and they settle down in regular
spaced layers and an iridescent green color is reflected or refracted similar to
the iridescent light of butterfly wings.
Double refraction is also a property of the sols composed of non-spherical
particles. A simple explanation of this property is that these sols contain
small crystals which are double refracting. Double refraction is only visible
312. JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 13
in dilute sols, when the particles are arranged in a regular order. This may
be achieved by different methods.
Theoretically, double refraction is correlated with dichroism. Many sols,
especially the sols of V2O; and Fe.O;, do not only exhibit a strong double
refraction, if th» particles are oriented in a regular way, but also show a
pronounced dichroism. The change of double refraction and dichroism with
the wave-length of light are correlated by a general rule.
The non-spherical shape of colloidal particles is not always caused by this
crystalline state. In the case of latex, the sap of the india-rubber tree, for
instance, the particles are pear shaped because a solid skin encloses an inner
viscous fluid. This structure seems to be important for the stability of latex
and there also seems to be a parallelism between their structure and the
nerve of the india-rubber product. (Author’s abstract.)
H. A. Marner, Recording Secretary.
ae
progranis of the ecetiiak of the affiliated societies will appear on this page :
to the editors by ate thirteenth and the dia ar ah a day of each month. ‘
4
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
‘Physics.—Note on the use of a light filter in interferometry. JoHN |
HR GUBON os oe joss -n' a'als al Yio Se aecors Seale otal occle SRR Oe SRR tee cian
Chemistry.—A magnetic form of ferrous oxide. Jonny Brienr Frrevso:
Petrology.—The mineralogical phase rule. N. L. BowEen..............
Botany.—New plants from Central America—III. Paur C. Sranpury..
Botany.—New tropical Americanspecies of Urticaceae. ELLSWORTH
PROCEEDINGS
The Acapamy .¥oA, «senha kaaess cate ave Senate Cees (ee Ne eae
The Philosophical Society... 0... 0... 2.00. 14s shee eae ey see sme ee
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vernon L. Kniioace, National Research Council.
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. SitsBex, Bureau of Stand
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Surv
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
‘3
Aueust 19, 1925 No. 14
= JOURNAL
OF THE
~
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
| OF SCIENCES
; BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Kinurp D. F. Hewett S. J. Maucuiy
Se NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SUBVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S, A. RonwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GoupMAN G, W. Stross
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F, Grices J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIBTY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royat anp GuiLtrorp AvEs.
Battimore, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, ep ie the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of pote rovided for
In Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on 3, 1918
< Coal Ls
wh AUG 28 1925 +
+. Sy
S7ionaL use
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences e :
This Journal, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALis issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to jaleadae years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. ny
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be —
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate —
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. :
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author. pee i
Proof:—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors __
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. 5 ;
Authors’ Reprints—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices. —
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. ;
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints”
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. ia
The rate of Subscription per volume 18.......ecccccucecucececucs saa tar $6.00*
Semi-imonthl y Numbers es as. Fs os shag ale aia vis ijeie ia Stole 9 tiae wicinte wiaietecalaletersa eam Seite
Monthly mumberss 455s ceo Ue ae cae Dew apni Saeco ses anee Be aa ae
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” an
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. 7
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other publications. =
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue. ihe j
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vo. 15 Avaust 19, 1925 No. 14
GEOPHYSICS.—Some geophysical problems... R. L. Farts, Coast
and Geodetic Survey.
Geodetic operations.—In the beginning of geodetic operations the
controlling interest appears to have been to arrive at a more certain
knowledge of the exact size and shape of the Earth; and, again, to
find some exact and reproducible natural unit of linear measure.
The next application of the trigonometric method was in fixing of
control points (their latitudes and longitudes) upon which to con-
struct topographic maps of land areas of countries; and yet a little
later on, to hydrographic surveys for charting the sea coasts and
connecting waters.
Today the immediate application of geodetic operations finds its
practical and economic use for mapping and charting purposes, and
in the fixation of international, state, and other boundary lines.
Geodetic data for maps and charts—The general topographic
mapping of the United States has been recently wisely recognized by
our National Congress as a project of the Federal Government, to
be carried out in a definite period of years.
This project will require, for its proper execution, a more detailed
extension of geodetic control over the whole country than exists at
the present time.
Vith this will also come, of necessity, further extension of the lines
of precise levels over the country, so that the elevations shown on the
maps may also have the proper control, and all be referred to a
uniform datum, which is now the generally accepted one of mean
sea level.
Importance of maps and charts—It is perhaps unnecessary to
restate here the great importance of accurate maps and charts in the
1 Paper read by the chairman of the Section of Geodesy of the American Geophysi-
cal Union, at the annual meeting, May 1, 1925.
313
ul 4 MST
Xe
i AUG 28 1925 x,
tv, at
[iw
314 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
commerce and the industrial activities and development of our
country, and in the economic utilization of our national resources.
None of these things can be properly considered or initiated without
the assistance of topographic maps as a guide in their establishment.
From the standpoint of the so-called natural sciences topographic
maps are essential to a clear presentation of many important facts
and relations. In comparative biology, for example, the geographic
position and elevation are important facts in the classification and
arrangement of fauna and flora, just as at sea the configuration of
the ocean bottom, temperatures, currents, and the depth of water
are essential to a clear understanding of marine life and its develop-
ment and growth. The geologist must have maps, or his geologic
surveys and studies can not be correlated. In fact, a roster of those
who must make use of maps includes those who work in almost every
branch of science, industry, and commerce. In this day, maps are
an every day necessity. When the importance of maps in the daily
life of a nation is thoughtfully considered it is at once seen that the
project recently adopted by Congress for the mapping of our country
was indeed a wise provision for the promotion of the public welfare.
Mean sea level.—Reference has been made to mean sea level as a
datum plane for topographic mapping. The determination of mean
sea level is also a fundamental problem of geophysics. Its deter-
mination is not the simple problem that a casual view of the ocean
surface might lead any one to infer.
Mean sea level is a local phenomenon where stations are individ-
ually considered, as in the case of its application to topographic
mapping. But as a geophysical problem it is found to have varia-
tions from year to year, and through a period of years. Neither are
all of its variations yet known nor are their causes understood in
detail. So it is yet a problem of prime importance for systematic
observation and study.
Velocity of light, a linear measure-—Our unit of geodetic measure
is the length of an arbitrary metal bar under certain prescribed
physical conditions. The recent experiments of Dr. Michelson in the
determination of the velocity of light when carried to further verifica-
tion and completion give promise of yielding a new method of measur-
ing terrestrial distances which will have a very practical bearing on
geodetic operations, especially in regions of difficult accessibility,
such as the Alaska peninsula and the Aleutian Islands. This method
for distance measure, together with latitude observations and radio
longitude determinations, would greatly expedite the geodetic opera-
august 19, 1925 FARIS: SOME GEOPHYSICAL PROBLEMS 315
tions of ascertaining geographic positions in such regions. It is
hoped that Dr. Michelson may pursue those experiments to a success-
ful conclusion.
The standard spherotd.—l have emphasized the practical applica-
tions of geodetic operations more especially, inasmuch as the earlier
intent of geodetic work (that of the determination of the size and
shape of the Earth) seems now to have been satisfactorily concluded
in the adoption of the Hayford Spheroid by the International Geodetic
and Geophysical Union at the meeting in Madrid last year. The
dimensions of this spheroid will serve all practical purposes for the
future; and possibly for scientific purposes as well, as it appears from
a study made by Lambert, “that Hayford’s Spheroid of 1909, with
corrections for topography and isostatic compensation, may be taken
as representing our best present knowledge, and it seems probable
that future determinations will give nearly the same results.”
Tsostasy, an established fact—For more than half a century the
degree of stability of the Earth’s crust (the so-called lithosphere)
has been a live question for observation, study, and hypotheses. At
the last meeting of the International Geodetic and Geophysical Union
the results of these studies reaped their reward by a definite recog-
nition by that expert international body, of the validity of the theory
of isostasy which the late Prof. Hayford did so much to establish as
a fact of geophysics.
It would appear that investigators in other lines of geophysics may
now study the question of the application of the fact of isostasy to
their problems, inasmuch as isostasy does tell us of certain sub-
crustal conditions that could not be so definitely arrived at in any
other way. It seems proper to inquire if their theories should not
now be revised so as to better harmonize with the known facts of
isostasy. This will require an alteration in the accepted views con-
cerning certain aspects of some of the geophysical sciences. Never-
theless, the facts of isostasy must now be reckoned with, and no
longer denied their rightful place in the consideration of the mechanics
of the Earth’s crustal evolution.
Gravity observation on land and sea.—Gravity observations have
now been satisfactorily carried out at sea by Dr. Meinesz of the
Dutch Geodetic Commission by using pendulums on board a sub-
marine. It is most desirable that many more gravity observations
be made at sea in order that more certain knowledge may be had of
the isostatic condition of the Earth’s crust under the vast ocean
areas. While the observations of Meinesz gave good results yet it
316 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
seems to be of importance to devise, if possible, some instrument and
method which will give the required results with less effort of observa-
tion and computation, so that the determinations of gravity at sea
may be expedited, and the amount of needed data may be increased
more rapidly and to the desired extent.
On land, the gravity determinations, in addition to furnishing data
for the determination of the shape of the Earth and for isostasy
investigations, also have useful applications in other branches of
geophysics, and in the exploration of our natural resources. It is
desirable, therefore, that instruments for gravity determinations may
be simplified to the end that more data may be obtained with less
use of time and effort than is possible with our present apparatus and
methods.
Variation of latitude——The purposes for which the variation of
latitude stations were established, have since taken on a new sig-
nificance in view of recent theories regarding the Earth’s crustal
movements. The observations at these stations, in conjunction with
the proposed world belt of radio longitude determinations, should
in time yield data sufficient to enable us to evaluate the probability
of the truth of such hypotheses. Should such crustal movements be
found to exist, we may then find the need to revise our ideas concern-
ing a number of the phases of geophysical problems including the
variation of latitude itself, in the event that such crustal movements
should be found to have an element of periodicity in them. The
carrying out of the radio longitude determinations and the con-
tinuance of the variations of latitude observations give much promise
of definite results of much value aside from their prime astronom-
ical purposes.
aueust 19, 1925 AUSTIN: SUNSET RADIO DIRECTION VARIATIONS 317
RADIOTELEGRAPHY.—A new phenomenon in sunset radio direc-
tion variations: L. W. Austin, Laboratory for Special Radio
Transmission Research.”
The observations on the deviations preceding sunset? have been
continued. The phenomena, it will be remembered, are as follows:
The apparent direction of the long-wave stations, New Brunswick
and Tuckerton, to the northeast of Washington, begins to shift
toward the east two or three hours before sunset. This deviation
reaches a maximum of 10° to 15°, roughly an hour before sunset.
The bearing returns to normal before sunset and then usually shifts
to the west and passes into the irregular night deviations.
The remarkable thing about this phenomenon is its uniformity,
the only variations from day to day being differences in the amount
of deviation and the exact time when the bearing returns to its cor-
rect value. It seems to occur with regularity only with stations at
certain distances, not over 300 km. and not less than 100 km. As
the only stations suitable for these observations le to the northeast
of Washington, attempts have been made to interest observers in
taking observations in other directions. Work covering only two or
three days by Mr. Englund at Cliffwood, N. J., indicated that Annapo-
lis, about 270 km. to the southwest, showed deviations first to the
west and later to the east, that is, in the opposite sequence to those
observed on the northeasterly stations at Washington.
According to Eckersley’s theory,‘ direction deviation is due to an
indirect wave reflected or refracted from the Kennelly-Heaviside
layer, which comes down with its magnetic field non-parallel to the
earth’s surface, thus having a vertical component which cuts the top
and the bottom of the radio compass coil and produces an EMF
which destroys the true minimum and requires turning the compass
coil to bring the electromotive forces again into balance. If we could
assume that the conducting layer is horizontal, and that there is a
regular reflection, it should be possible to restore the bearing to the
true direction by rotating the frame carrying the compass coil around
a horizontal axis at right angles to the line joining the stations.
Then, at the vertical angle which restores the true horizontal bearing,
1 Published by permission of the Director of the Bureau of Standards of the U. S.
Department of Commerce.
* Conducted jointly by the Bureau of Standards and the American Section of the
International Union of Scientific Radiotelegraphy.
2 Proc. I. R. E. 13: 3. 1925.
4 Radio review 2: 60. 1921.
318 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
the compass coil should be at right angles to the direction of the
indirect wave and from the assumptions should enable the height of
the reflecting layer to be determined by triangulation. This experi-
ment has been tried but failed to restore the true bearing. It did
however show a new series of phenomena which, while not so far
explained, show apparently the same regularity of sequence as the
before-sunset deviation already described. It has been -frequently
noticed that the rotation of the normal axis of the compass coil around
a horizontal axis at right angles to the true direction of the sending
station frequently produces a great sharpness of minimum at a certain
Bakelite sttips
MeThod of winding
wire
Fig. 1—Double axis compass coil. Frame A, 3’ 8’’ by 5’ 2’ by 7’’; frame B, 3/ 1”
by 4’ 63’’ by 7’; 72 turns No. 20 D. C. C. wire wound in three layers; layers spaced
+ inch apart; turns spaced 3% inch; 24 turns on each layer.
vertical angle. It is now found that the angle for the sharpening of
the minimum apparently varies regularly with the changes in bearing
deviation during the before-sunset period. The “sharp minimum”
vertical angle starting at 0° to 20° increases with the deviation of the
horizontal bearing until at about an hour before sunset just before
the horizontal bearing deviation has reached a maximum, it reaches
50° to 80°. Then, as the horizontal bearing returns toward the true
direction, the vertical “sharp minimum”’ angle decreases rapidly so
that before the horizontal bearing has become correct, the vertical
Bearing
degrees
P minimum
egrees
C
Shar
auaust 19, 1925 AUSTIN: SUNSET RADIO DIRECTION VARIATIONS 319
angle has returned to zero and gone up to 50° to 80° on the other
side, that is, with the main axis of the compass coil tipped forward.
Fig. 1 shows the double axis compass coil and Fig. 2 a typical set
of curves. A few points in regard to the curves are worthy of notice.
The sharp minimum vertical angle always begins to rise some time
before the bearing of the station begins to shift. The vertical angle,
so far as has been observed, always returns to zero at the same
moment that the easterly bearing deviation begins to drop. The
vertical angle curve cuts the axis again nearly at the same time that
the westerly deviation starts to decrease. The negative maximum
3:30 4:00 4:30 mageicd Fao : G00 G50 T:00
Time
Fig. 2—Typical sunset deviation curves, New Brunswick (WIL). Received at
Washington.
of the vertical angle always nearly coincides with the passage of the
bearing through its true value in going from the easterly to the
westerly deviation.
Enough observations have been made to convince us that we have
a perfectly regular natural phenomenon apparently occurring daily,
which is probably connected with the deionization of the atmosphere
as the sun sinks toward the west. It seems probable that similar
deviations take place after sunrise but these have not as yet been
investigated. As it may be a long time before the physical processes
involved are understood, I am publishing the observed facts for
others to verify and, if possible, explain.
320 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
ACCUSTICS.—An experiment on the recognition of speech sounds by
touch. Ropert H. Gautt,! Northwestern University. (Com-
municated by E. P. Kruiip.)
The subject matter of this paper belongs to the psychology of
sensation and interpretation of sensory impressions; sensations of
touch specifically. It is a partial report on an experimental invasion
of the ‘‘great archeological field of the psychologist ;” i.e., the extended
pattern of organs of touch in the skin. ‘These are the primitive sense
organs. Our remotest ancestors in the series of animal forms had no
other avenues through which they could become acquainted with
their world.
Possibly these tactile organs, if they were rightly approached,
could be made the gateways through which our deafened neighbors
could be made aware of speech and its forms. If so, it is not too
great a strain upon the imagination to see them learning to under-
stand speech by the aid of the touch sense alone as a substitute for
the sense of hearing. Certainly one can feel vibrations of speech.
When a heavy-voiced person is sitting in a solid chair and reading
aloud, place your finger tips lightly upon his chair, and be convinced.
A simple observation of this sort, in itself, is enough to set one off
upon an experiment such as I propose to discuss in the following pages.
In fact, it was just this sort of phenomenon, and a crude experiment
in which a long speaking-tube played a réle, that were responsible
for ushering in the present investigation. Close over one end of the
tube was the palm of the hand of a “‘listener’’ if I may tease the term
for a moment, because hearing was eliminated from the situation.
At the other end was the speaker? or experimenter. The column of
air in the tube, vibrating with the speaker’s vocal organs, stimulated
the sensitive palm of the subject or “‘listener,’”” and he became able
to distinguish many words by their feel.
Here is the point of setting off; and we require the most efficient
possible instrumental means of communicating the vocal vibrations
of a speaker to one or another sensitive skin area of a subject.
The work has interesting scientific aspects that bring attention to
the lately all but unbelievable capacity of touch organs to discriminate
in cases where the differences amongst stimuli are as small as the
proverbial ‘‘mote in thy brother’s eye’”’—if I may confuse the tactual
and visual. This is, in addition to the fascinating probability,
1QOn leave with the National Research Council.
? See Journ. Abnor. Psy. and Soc. Psy. 19: No. 2, July—-Sept., 1924.
aueust 19, 1925 GAULT: SPEECH SOUNDS BY TOUCH 321
already suggested, of developing a new method whereby the deaf
may learn to interpret speech. Other probabilities are along the
way and are tempting to diversions but they are afield from the
purpose of this paper.
THE. STIMULI
The stimuli are vibrations of the vocal apparatus in speech, com-
municated through the air into a microphone, and from what corre-
sponds to the receiver or ear-piece of a telephone that is held closely
in the hand, through a thin cushion of air to the palm. The contact
has been varied on occasions, for experimental purposes, by allowing
the subjects to hold their finger tips directly upon the diaphragm of
the ‘“‘ear-piece.”’ In the last analysis, therefore, the stimuli are
tactual impressions occasioned by the alternating compression and
release of this air cushion under the action of the diaphragm. We
are not yet able to say how nearly the vibratory behavior against
the area of contact corresponds to that of the air at the lips of the
experimenter when he is in the act of speaking.
In more detail, the stimuli that have been employed in the course
of the experiment thus far are:
1. Those that occur while uttering a group of 20 sentences, each
one composed of six monosyllabic words.
2. Those that occur in uttering each of a list of 27 words of one
or more syllables; words not included in the sentences referred to
above, and not combined in sentence form, but in isolation.
3. The vibrations that occur in speaking short sentences and bits
of conversation made up of words in (2) above.
4. The vibrations that correspond to the spoken long vowels.
5. Those that correspond to certain diphthongal sounds.
This paper is limited to an account of our experience with the long
vowels alone, some of which are, as a matter of fact, diphthongal.
The results reported here were all obtained during the period March
11 to April, 1925.
THE APPARATUS AND ITS ADJUSTMENT TO THE SUBJECT
The apparatus in use to communicate speech vibrations to the
tactual organs of the subjects consists of a microphone, a three tube
amplifier, and nine receivers. Each receiver has a resistance of 58
ohms and all are connected in series so that the stimuli are applied
simultaneously to as many subjects. The cap on each receiver has
been cut so as to expose almost the entire area of the diaphragm.
322 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL, 15, No. 14
In the course of an experiment the receiver is held in the hand of
the subject with the exposed diaphragm toward the palm. An air
cushion, already referred to, intervenes between the diaphragm and
the tactual organs. In the last analysis, as I have said, the stimuli
are the compression and release of this air cushion in reaction to the
swinging diaphragm.
Other types of receiver have been in use, but not in the section of
the experiment that is being discussed in the present paper.
THE SUBJECTS
We have chosen deaf and very hard-of-hearing subjects so that
their reports upon what they feel may be complicated as little as
possible, or not at all, by auditory reactions. It is difficult, though
not impossible, to eliminate the possibility of hearing when normal
subjects are employed. Fifteen deaf subjects have cooperated in
the portion of the work that is being reported here. The following
tabulation includes pertinent data relative to the subjects:
TABLE 1.—AGer oF SuBsEcTS AND CAUSE OF DEAFNESS
uumaex || yon | Aes EN DRArm || chogg on anmroee a eee
R L
1 23 63 Scarlet fever 5- 5
2 17 10 Cerebral meningitis 10-15
3 20 15 Spinal meningitis 20-20
4 23 Congenital 35-40
5 21 7 Spinal meningitis 5- 5
6 22 5 Spinal meningitis 45-15
if 20 3 Spinal meningitis 20-15
8 32 (fe Spinal meningitis 0-10
9 22 12 Spinal meningitis 5-0
10 17 9 i 55-45
11 21 Congenital 30-30
12 19 Congenital 55-50
13 19 13 ze 50-50
14 21 8 ? 15-45
15 31 4 ? 25-35
Note: The Audiometric record 5-5 indicates that the subject, in each ear, has 5
per cent of normal reaction to simple tones. No corresponding figures in the table
above are necessarily indicative of a capacity to understand spoken words.
METHOD
The subjects report at the laboratory one period daily five days a
week. The period of actual practice is not more than 25 or 30 min-
utes, after deducting for checking up, etc. All are seated in a small
Aueust 19, 1925 GAULT: SPEECH SOUNDS BY TOUCH 323
room with pencils and prepared paper. Before them upon the wall
are the letters A, E, I, O, U plaimly visible. Each one holds his
receiver firmly in one hand with the exposed diaphragm toward the
palm. The experimenter is at the microphone in an adjoining room.
An assistant in the room with the subjects instructs them by writing
or by sign at the beginning of the period devoted to this section of
the work, that the long vowels will be pronounced in succession into
the microphone in the adjoining room while they attend to the tactual
impression upon their hands corresponding to each utterance in
turn. The assistant points to each letter as the experimenter pro-
nounces it. This reading in the known order for drill is repeated
two or three times. Thereupon the experimenter pronounces a
series of ten in an unknown order. Between every two utterances
about 20 seconds lapse. In the interval each subject writes the
letter that seems to him to correspond to the complex of vibrations
that he has just now felt upon his palm. At the end of each series
experimenter and subjects check up. Each subject then knows how
he and every other member of the group has succeeded. An observa-
tion of the confusions that were made suggests the points at which
emphasis should be placed in further drill before another series is
presented for report and record.
In the course of the period referred to—March 11 to April 9—
only two or three series of vowel sounds were presented at a sitting,
for experience has taught us that here as elsewhere variety is the
spice of life. The remainder of the session was devoted to practise
with other forms of stimuli—words and sentences for example—the
results of which will be reported at another time.
RESULTS
Chart ‘‘A” below shows the degree of successful identification by
the entire group and also the confusions that were made. Chart
“B” makes the corresponding showing for the most successful sub-
ject. The figures on the extreme left designate the total number of
reports received upon each vowel. The figure 54 (Chart ‘“B’’)
cpposite “I” in the vertical column on the left and beneath ‘‘I” in
the horizontal line above, indicates the number of times “‘I’’ was
identified by the most successful subject. This is 66.7 per cent of the
total number of times the stimulus occurred—81 (left column).
The figures under “‘O”’ on the same line represent the confusion of
“O” with “I.” Figures in corresponding positions on Chart “A”
indicate the like facts for the group as a whole.
324 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
It should be said in this connection that the most successful sub-
ject, whose record is in Chart “B,” is a young woman of 19 years
whose audiometric record is 55-50. Her condition is described as
congenital. The record of the medical examination indicates no
reaction to the whisper test. There is reaction, however, to a loud
voice at six inches. She does not understand speech and she has
practically no use of voice in speech. Her close second in these
A
398
43.1 per cent
135
15.2 per cent
127
14.1 per cent
162
17.0 per cent
162
19.1 per cent
E
135
14.6 per cent
414
46.7 per cent
81
9.0 per cent
99
10.4 per cent
127
15.0 per cent
I
130
14.1 per cent
83
9.4 per cent
415
46.1 per cent
O
145
15.7 per cent
93
10.5 per cent
142
15.8 per cent
U
114
12.3 per cent
156
17.6 per cent
128
14.2 per cent
19.4 per cent] 43.1 per cent | 9.7 per cent
63
7.4 per cent
18.1 per cent
39.8 per cent
Chart A, showing degree of successful identification of sounds
experiments is a young man of 23 years.
He is reported as having
acquired his deafness from scarlet fever and diphtheria at the age of
3 years. His audiometric record is 5-5 and his reactions are nega-
tive to the whisper and to the low and loud voice. He also has
practically no use of voice in speech.
Returning to Chart “A” it will be observed that when “E”’ is
given, if confusions occur, they are most frequent with “U.” “T”
AuGust 19, 1925 GAULT: SPEECH SOUNDS BY TOUCH 325
and ‘‘O” are likewise confused. Other points of conflict are easily
read in the chart. In the main the records in the two charts are in
agreement each with the other, and the confusions illustrated in
Chart “A” agree in detail with those the writer tended to make
when a year ago, he was acting as a subject in the course of prelim-
inaries to this experiment, working in a sound-proof situation.
It is interesting to observe that the confusions that occur in these
A E a O U
A 52 9 4 14 1
80 65 per cent J 11.3 per cent} 5.0 per cent | 17.5 per cent} 1.3 per cent
E 13 63 3 3 2
S4 15.5 per cent] 75.0 per cent] 3.6 per cent | 3.6 per cent | 2.3 per cent
I 4 54 23
81 4.9 per cent 66.7 per cent 28.4 per cent
O 14 24 42 ! 1
81 17.2 per cent 29.6 per cent} 51.9 per cent} 1.2 per cent
W 3 4 1 i 80
88 3.4 per cent | 4.5 per cent | 1.1 per cent 90.9 per cent
Chart B, showing success in identification by most successful subject
tactual experiments—especially between “K’’ and ‘‘U’’—are the
confusions that occur frequently in conversation over the telephone;
for the reason, apparently, that the higher pitched components of the
vowel sounds—the most potent determiners—are not carried by the
instrument.
326 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
CONTROL TESTS AND RESULTS
Two questions arise that call for control tests: 1. Do any of our
subjects have the advantage of bone-conduction to the inner ear?
We have put this question to the test. An assistant, sitting between
two subjects, held a receiver against the temple of the subject on his
right and the one on his left. A doubled sheet of light paper was
between the receiver and the skin for partial elimination of the tactual
sensation factor. An entire group of six subjects was handled in this
manner. The usual .program of drill and stimulation for written
report was brought into requisition. Eight stimuli were employed,
a, 6, i, 6, U, oi, ou, ander. (The last three of these have been intro-
duced since April 9, the end of the period covered by the body of
this paper.) The results certainly do not support the hypothesis
that stimulation of the palm in our procedure reaches the inner ear,
in any effective measure, by way of bone conduction.
There is no good evidence that our subjects thus obtain auditory
clues to aid them; such subjects, I mean, as have an auditory nerve
that is capable of performing its function at least minimally. For
the average performance of members of this group during the three
days preceding the control test, was 35. The range was 21 to 68
identifications in a hundred (eight stimuli). Under the conditions
of the control test the average performance was 25 identifications,
and the range was 20 to 30. This is considerably above a chance
result when there are eight stimuli. It is impossible to tell how far
this degree of success may have been due to interpretation of tactual
stimulation of the temple that occurred in spite of the obstruction
afforded by the paper that lay between the receiver and the temple.
It is obviously impossible to eliminate this factor without at the
same time throwing out the possibility of stimulating the inner ear
by way of bone conduction.
If auditory stimulation due to bone conduction were an important
factor in our experiments we ought to obtain a better record of
identifications under the control conditions than we have under the
usual precedure, for the reason that the receiver against the temple
undoubtedly affords the subject a much more intensive auditory
stimulation than does the same receiver against the palm. Further-
more, my own experience as a subject in this experiment during the
academic year 1923-1924 must be construed as in opposition to the
hypothesis of hearing by bone conduction, though not conclusive,
to be sure. I learned to identify the long vowels by impressions
aueust 19, 1925 GAULT: SPEECH SOUNDS BY TOUCH 327
upon the palm, after the manner of the present experiment. At
best, I attained an accuracy of 91 correct reports in 100 trials. If
hearing by any means had been an effective factor I should not have
required several months of painstaking effort a half hour daily. But it
was a very tedious process.
2. Do any of the subjects in our experimental situation ‘have the
advantage of hearing by normal means, i.e., through the air? This
question is suggested by several facts: (a) When the experimenter is
speaking into the microphone the assistant in the adjoming room
with the subjects can hear him, though not with great distinctness.
(b) The vibration of the diaphragm in each receiver can be heard by
a normal hearing person at a distance of a few feet. By giving very
close attention to these stimuli alone he could learn to understand
what is being spoken at the other end of the system. (c) We have
two subjects whose residual hearing in one ear is as high as 55, and
one stands at 50 for each ear.
For the purpose of discovering whether our subjects have any
advantage in our experiments from auditory impressions we devised
two control experiments as follows:
(a) The work of a session was carried on under the usual conditions
excepting that each receiver lay open upon the chair arm. The sub-
ject had no contact with it and consequently he received no tactual
impressions from it. The auditory stimuli were present as in other
circumstances: the experimenter’s voice sounded through the wall
and the diaphragms in the receivers continued to affect the air. If
these impressions are of any avail the subject should be able to make
a record despite the fact that he received no tactual cues.
The assistant in the room with the subjects gave them a signal
everytime the experimenter pronounced a stimulus. They were
instructed to write a guess as to the nature of the stimulus.
Result: The only subject who reported correctly in more than a
chance number of instances in 100 trials is he whose audiometric
record is 0-10. It is impossible that he heard. All others gave a
chance distribution, or less, of correct reports. This is what we
should expect if hearing through the air is not a factor in our
experiments.
(b) The microphone was removed to a distant part of the building;
so far away that a normal hearing person in the room with the sub-
jects could not hear the experimenter’s voice at the microphone. A
sound proof box, 24 x 22 x 22 inches, outside measurement, was
built; a box within a box. The space between the walls—8 inches—
328 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
is filled with sand. An aperture through the box-walls on one side
is so equipped with rubber collars that a hand holding the receiver can
be thrust through. The collars grip the fore-arm. A person with
normal hearing with his hand in this position can not distinguish
the voice of the experimenter at the transmitter and, assuming that
the collars are properly fitted to his fore-arm, he can not hear the
receiver within the box. Our subjects make at least an average
record in the conditions of this control. This, too, is what should
be expected if hearing through the air is not a factor in our work,
but if tactual impressions alone are effective.
CONCLUSION
Aside from the bearing of this research upon general psychology it
is probable that it may lead to a new avenue through which the
totally deaf may be enabled to interpret speech, as has already been
indicated in an introductory paragraph.
Not only so, but it may supply a supplement to residual hearing.
It may afford additional clues that will aid the teacher and learner of
the art of lip-reading. There is likely to develop also a very im-
portant addition to present methods in vogue in schools for the deaf
for teaching and learning the art of vocal control.
These forecasts presuppose improvements of our methods and
devices—improvements that are quite within reach. They assume
also the completion of an elaborate program for further research.
But, more than all, they summon the subjects of this experiment to
a great adventure in taking pains, and the experimenters to a high
level of skill in the art of provoking their subject’s zeal.
The writer very gratefully acknowledges the aid of his assistants,
Mr. George Crane and Mr. Irving 8. Fusfeld.
auGust 19, 1925 sOSMAN AND POSNJAK: FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE 329
MINERAL CHEMISTRY.—Ferromagnetic ferric oxide, artificial
and natural.1. Roprert B. SosMan and E. Posnsax, Geophysical
Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Ferric oxide (Fe.O;) can exist at atmospheric temperatures in two
different forms. One, the mineral hematite, is paramagnetic, like
most of the compounds of iron. The other form is ferromagnetic,
like magnetite and metallic iron.
Although the existence of a ferromagnetic modification of FeO;
has been known for over sixty years, comparatively little experi-
mental study has been made of this interesting substance. Further-
more, it has been known heretofore as an artificial product, and only
within the past few years has it been observed in nature.
The purpose of this note is to set down some experimental facts
obtained by us several years ago concerning this ferromagnetic
oxide, particularly the relation of its structure and magnetic proper-
ties to those of magnetite, and to describe a natural occurrence of
the oxide.
DISTINCTION FROM ‘‘MAGNETIC HEMATITE”’
It is important at the outset to distinguish clearly between so-
called ‘“‘magnetic hematite’ and ferromagnetic ferric oxide.
Natural hematite, particularly in its well-crystallized varieties, is
seldom if ever quite free from ferrous iron, held in combination as
an oxide of some kind. The ferrous iron may be present as a con-
stituent of intergrown magnetite (Fe;0.,); or it may be present as a
constituent of a solid solution.? In either case, the specific magnetic
susceptibility (susceptibility per gram) increases with the percentage
of ferrous iron, starting at about 0.000 02 for pure Fe.Q;, and cul-
minating at magnetite, whose maximum susceptibility per gram is
of the order of 2. The series thus covers a range of 100,000-fold
in susceptibility.
Correspondingly, we have found? that the force exerted by a non-
uniform magnetic field upon powdered specimens of the oxides covers
a range of about 1 to 5000. A particular specimen of natural oxide
of iron may fall anywhere in this series, with a content of FeO any-
where between zero and 31.03 per cent.
1 Received July 5, 1925.
*Sosman anp Hostetter, The oxides of iron. I. Solid solution in the system
Fe.0--Fe:0;. Journ. Amer. Chem. Soc. 38: 807-833. 1916.
?Sosman anpD Hostetter, The ferrous iron content and magnetic susceptibility of
some artificial and natural oxides of iron, Trans. Amer. Inst. Mining Eng. 58: 409-433.
1917. (Also Bulletin, pp. 907-931.)
330 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
Since the magnetic susceptibility mounts so rapidly with the
ferrous iron content, there is required only a few tenths of a per cent
of FeO to cause the powdered specimen to move visibly in a magnetic
field. This is particularly the case when tests are made with the
ordinary small horseshoe or bar magnet, because the gradient found
near the surface of such a magnet may be fairly intense. For this
reason, specimens containing relatively little ferrous iron may be
classed by the prospector or the mineralogist as ‘‘magnetic hema-
tite’ or “magnetic iron ore,’ because they will adhere to a hand
magnet.
TRUE MAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE
Very different is the true ferromagnetic oxide which forms the
subject of this paper. It contains no ferrous iron, yet is as magnetic
as magnetite itself, at least so far as can be told from the properties
of the. powdered oxides.
Ferromagnetic ferric oxide has been obtained only in finely divided
form. The intensity of magnetization obtainable with any powder
is very much less than that obtainable with the same amount of
material in the form of a single continuous fragment, especially if
in the shape of a bar or rod. The ferromagnetic oxide must there-
fore be compared with magnetite powdered to a similar degree of
fineness.
The intensity of magnetization also varies with the size of the
grains, their shape, and their relative orientation. Hence two ferro-
magnetic substances in powdered form can not be compared with
any great exactness. The effects of size and shape of grain, however,
may cover a range of twofold or threefold, while ferromagnetic sub-
stances differ from paramagnetic by many thousandfold. There
need never be any question, therefore, whether or not a given pow-
dered substance is ferromagnetic, nor whether its susceptibility is of
the same order of magnitude as that of some other substance taken
as a standard for comparison.
HISTORICAL REVIEW
The earliest recorded observation of the properties of ferromag-
netic ferric oxide is that of Robbins,* in the “Notes and Queries”
of the first volume of Chemical News. He prepared it by the oxida-
tion of magnetite, both by heating in air and by fusion with KNOs.
He showed that the product was free from ferrous iron when dissolved.
4 Roppins, J., Magnetic peroxide of iron, Chem. News 1: 11-12. 1859.
auGust 19, 1925 sOSMAN AND POSNJAK: FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE 331
The oxide was independently discovered by .Malaguti® a few years
later; he prepared it by oxidation and ignition of precipitated ferrous
hydroxide, and also by ignition of certain hydrated oxides.
Thirty years later Liversidge® observed that various specimens of
oxide produced by the rusting of iron in air were ferromagnetic,
although most of them contained no ferrous iron. Similar speci-
mens were also made artificially.
The most complete data are by Hilpert,’7 who made the ferromag-
netic oxide by oxidizing either precipitated magnetite or ferrous
hydroxide with soluble oxidizing agents.
Within the present year the oxide has again been rediscovered
twice; first by Abraham and Planiol,’ who have added no new informa-
tion to the facts already known, and again by Chevallier,? who
obtained some new data on its.-magnetic properties.
Sarzeau’® and J. Lawrence Smith! may have been dealing with
this same ferromagnetic oxide, but the evidence is nct clear, since
it is also possible that they had magnetic ferrites or ferric oxide con-
taining magnetite.
PREPARATION OF ARTIFICIAL FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE
Cur specimens of the oxide were made from precipitated mag-
netite. To a warm solution containing ferrous and ferric sulfates,
in the proportion of one equivalent of ferrous to two of ferric iron,
was added a warm solution of sodium hydroxide. The black mag-
netic precipitate was filtered off and washed. Part of it was shaken
up with a warm solution of ammonium persulfate, NH.SO,, until
completely oxidized. (No. 2005.) Analysis showed the presence of
*Matacutt, F., Sur le sesquioryde de fer attirable 4 Vaimant, Compt. rend. Acad.
Sci. Paris 55: 350-352. 1862. Ann. Chim. et Phys. (3) 69: 214-224. 1863.
5 LivERSIDGE, A., On iron rust possessing magnetic properties, Rep. Australasian
Assoc. Ady. Sci. 1892: 302-320.
7 Hinpert, §., Ueber Beziehungen zwischen chemischen Konstitution und magne-
lischen Eigenschaften bei Eisenverbindungen, Ber. Deutsch. Physik. Ges. 11: 293-299.
1909. Also Ber. Deutsch. Chem. Ges. 42: 2248-2261. 1909. Journ. Iron and Steel |
Inst. 82: 65-68. 1910.
* Apransam, H., anp Puaniou, R., Sur le sesquioxyde de fer magnétique, Compt.
rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 180: 1328-1329. 1925.
9 CHEyaLLier, R., Sur l’oxyde ferrique ferromagnétique, Compt. rend. Acad. Paris
1280: 1473-1475. 1925.
10 Sarzeau, Chem. News 1: 137. 1860.
ii Santa, J. Lawrence, Singular anomaly of the sesquioxide of iron as prepared from
meteoric iron, Amer. Chemist 5: 356-358. 1875. Chem. News 31: 210-212. 1875.
Compt. rend. Acad. Sci. Paris 80: 301-304. 1875. Original researches in mineralogy
and chemistry (1884) pp. 480-486.
332 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
0.7 per cent FeO. Another part oxidized spontaneously in air when
dried at about 105°. (No. 2007.)
A second preparation of precipitated magnetite (No. 2006), made
in the same way, was preserved by drying over sulfuric acid and then
over phosphorus pentoxide in a vacuum, but even with these pre-
cautions was found, after the magnetic tests, to be nearly half oxidized,
containing 17.4 per cent FeO, 80.1 per cent Fe.O;, and 1.35 per cent
H.O0." Several years later, after having stood at room temperature
in air, it was found to have changed in color to the brown shade
characteristic of ferromagnetic Fe.O; (No. 2006a).
We find also that the dehydration of the mineral lepidocrocite,
Fe.O;-H.O, yields a ferromagnetic ferric oxide, while similar dehy-
dration of goethite, the other form of the monohydrate, yields only
paramagnetic Fe.O;. These two are the only clearly defined ecrys-
talline hydrates of ferric oxide.”
This interesting reaction, the production of a ferromagnetic from
a paramagnetic substance by dissociation, is being further studied.
The only specimen available for quantitative examination was made
from lepidocrocite from Easton, Pennsylvania, by heating it in a
glass dish for 10 days at 320°, and was only about half as magnetic
as magnetite; but it was not homogeneous, as it contained portions of
much greater and much less susceptibility than the average for the
whole. Whether the reaction produced a certain proportion of inert
oxide, or whether an original product of high susceptibility has under-
gone irreversible change during the long heating at 320° (see p.
338) remains to be seen. The product contained no detectable
ferrous iron.
NATURAL FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE
While these experiments were being conducted (in 1916) we re-
ceived from Messrs. L. C. Graton and B. S$. Butler a specimen of
polarized magnetic ferric oxide (No. RC1487). The specimen was
in the form of a light chocolate brown powder containing yellowish
brown specks, and was collected from a gossan deposit, at Iron Moun-
tain, in the Shasta County copper district, California. A partial
analysis by J. C. Hostetter yielded the results shown in Table 1.
The tests described in later paragraphs show that this specimen
corresponds in properties to artificial ferromagnetic ferric oxide.
Unfortunately it is not very pure. In particular, it contains 2.40
2 Analysis by J. C. Hostetter of this Laboratory.
18 PosngAK, E., anp Merwin, H. E., The hydrated ferric oxides, Amer. Journ. Sci.
47; 311-848. 1919.
AuGusT 19, 1925 sOSMAN AND POSNJAK: FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE 333
per cent of FeO, which might be suspected of causing a part at least
of the high magnetic susceptibility. But the presence of considerable
volatile matter in addition to water suggests that this ferrous iron
may be present largely as carbonate and sulfide. Even if it were all
in solid solution or in the form of magnetite, it could account for only
about one-eighteenth of the observed susceptibility.
TABLE 1—AnatysiIs oF PoLarizED Magnetic FERRIC OXIDE
PER CENT
Rerrous mironcalculatedsaswheO waa acepcte cies ecient ec ree eer 2
Wisster-sremovedtatired heate- gos oncsaa cheers ce se ee rot cae anaes 3.1
Other volatile matter, removed at red heat.......................... 2
Insoluble in HCl, mostly quartz, with few large opaque crystals,
mrobablyspycite o<* dos eA ees eicn ste een eo Desa By r ony ne ees 1.80
@alcrumvoxdet CaO by creases oa si tafo eae erases Ste age eee aye esac Present
REETIGTOXIGePHEsOs1( So Ol ANS SO.) ate ee erie epee e eis re eef Ene 85.3
A natural ferric oxide differing from hematite in physical proper-
ties as much as this one does deserves a separate mineral name. It
would be desirable, however, before assigning such a name, to have
a type specimen which was more nearly pure Fe.O; than the one
in hand.
MAGNETIC APPARATUS
The apparatus used for magnetic tests will be more fully described
in another publication. It consists of two concentric solenoids, of
which the inner furnishes a uniform magnetic field while the outer
furnishes a field having a gradient. The two can be independently
varied. The force acting on a specimen suspended in the axis of the
solenoids is weighed directly on an analytical balance sensitive to
0.01 mg. 1
With a paramagnetic substance such as ferrous sulfate the force is
proportional to the magnetic susceptibility, the field strength, and
the field gradient, and absolute measurements of the susceptibility
of the compounds of iron can be made with an accuracy of two per
cent or better. But with a ferromagnetic substance, as already noted,
the force depends not only on the factors mentioned but also on fine-
ness of grain, shape of grains, shape of the charge as a whole, and
previous magnetic history. Therefore only somewhat crude com-
parative results are obtainable with a ferromagnetic powder, but
the method has the advantage of being adaptable, without change
in the apparatus, to a wide range of susceptibilities.
334 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
MAGNETIC RESULTS
Reproducibility. A set of 5 measurements on Mineville magne-
tite No. 3b, 170 to 200 mesh, confirmed the conclusion reached in
our earlier measurements with a cored electromagnet,“ that the
attraction per gram on a ferromagnetic powder of given size of grain
and shape of charge is reproducible within one per cent. The charge
was taken out and mixed between measurements, and the effect of
depolarizing it by gradual withdrawal from an alternating field was
also tried.
Effect of position. The field and gradient, and hence the force,
vary with the position of the charge with reference to the solenoids.
The charge was always suspended so as to be coaxial with the sole-
noids, and the position of its center, with reference to the top of the
outer solenoid as zero, was measured to 0.2 mm. The variation as
actually measured agreed with that calculated from the dimensions
of the solenoids.
Shape of charge. The shape of the sample is without effect on the
force exerted upon a paramagnetic substance. With a ferromag-
netic substance, on the contrary, it is one of the most important
variables. Measurements were therefore made with varying amounts
of the ferromagnetic powders contained in cylindrical ‘brass con-
tainers of 6 and 10 mm. diameter. The results are incorporated in
figures 1 and 2. All of these measurements were made in a field
whose intensity on the axis was about 700 gilbert-per-cm., with a
gradient of 14.5.
The shape of the curves depends upon the complex relation existing
between the demagnetizing factor of the individual grain, due to its
individual shape and size; the mutual inductive effect of the grains,
depending on their relative position and distance apart; and the
demagnetizing factor of the charge as a whole, depending upon its
over-all shape and size.
The important fact brought out by the curves for magnetite in
figure 1, and for artificial ferromagnetic Fe.O; and the corresponding
natural oxide in figure 2, is the agreement in order of magnitude of
the magnetization, as indicated by the force. All are seen to be
ferromagnetic, and to have similar values of susceptibility, although
the absolute values can not be deduced from these data. Also, the
curves for the three are similar in form.
Effect of grain size. Three sizes of grain of natural magnetite are
M4 Sosman anD Hostetter, Op. cit. (Trans. Amer. Inst. Mining Eng. 58) p. 414.
AuGusT 19, 1925 SOSMAN AND POSNJAK: FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE 335
500
400
t
—
S
a
dS
a
v
YL
>
<&
~
§ 4300 a
£
°
&
£
g
nw
°
2
6
w
200
O Magnefite, 0.12 mm grain, [0-mm cylinder x Artificial ferromagnetic oxide, 6-mm cylinder ]
s c O.07 - Oars cS g O Natural ” “ lo- « "
o - 0.07 - - 6-- - o : . G5 0"
x - Oo = = 6-" + 4 a Q ane
heated Tt iT 6a
A i precipitated, partly eeidiced (heated To about Goo") }
100
Natural ferromagnetic oxide,
OG heated to 750° In
°
Ratio length to diameter >
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Figs. 1 and 2—Comparative magnetic susceptibilities of magnetite and artificial
and natural ferromagnetic oxide.
336 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
compared in figure 1: one collected between sieves having 170 and 200
meshes per inch, average grain size 0.12 mm.; another between 300
and 325 meshes, 0.07 mm.; and a third size separated by means of
the I-mm. jet in an air elutriator,” grains about 0.01 mm. The
results confirm the general statement made in the earlier paper,
that diminution in grain size diminishes the magnetization. In both
cases the change from 0.12 to 0.07 mm. average diameter corre-
sponds to a decrease of about 3 per cent.
TABLE 2.—ComparatTivE Data ON SUSCEPTIBILITY AND REMANENCE OF OXIDES
or IRON
a z
5 & 5 & |&
El ¢ | & (age
= z 5 Bae
SUBSTANCE FORM & is Es | a z
2 eS a 5
a D 2 Dn =
mm. m7
Magnetite, Mineville, N. Y........ 170-200 mesh 10 3b 598
Magnetite, Mineville, N. Y........ 300-325 mesh 10 3b 580 5*
Magnetite, Mineville, N. Y........ 300-325 mesh 6 3b 652
Magnetite, Mineville, N. Y........ Elutriated 6 3b 595 11
powder
Precipitated Fe;0,, partly oxidized.| Very fine pow- 6 2006 | 670 4
der
Artificial ferromagnetic Fe.O;.....| Very fine pow- 6 2005 | 597 3
der
Artificial ferromagnetic Fe.03..... Very fine pow- 6 2007 | 576 4*
der
Natural ferromagnetic Fe2O;...... Coarse powder] 10 | RC1487 | 568 15*
Natural ferromagnetic Fe2O3...... Tine powder 10 | RC1487 | 560 15
Natural ferromagnetic Fe2O;...... Fine powder 6 | RC1487 | 606 14
Natural ferromagnetic Fe20;
(heated to about 600°).......... Fine powder 6 | RC1487 | 558
Same, heated to 750°............... Fine powder RC1487 4.20) 400 | 19
Terrous ammonium sulfate,
Fe(NH4)2(SO4)2.6H20........... Powder | 6211 0.33! 31
Purest ferric) Oxid@rac--eeisseer Powder ; 1041 0.21) 20
* See curve in figure 3.
The artificial (precipitated) and partly oxidized magnetite (No.
2006) is much finer than the natural fractions, but is nevertheless of
somewhat higher susceptibility.
The maximum values are compared in Table 2.
18 SosMaAN AND Hostetter, Op. cit. (Trans. Amer. Inst. Mining Eng. 58) p. 414.
Iii bid tps 45:
aveust 19, 1925 sosMAN AND POSNJAK: FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE 337
Remanence. The remanence (also called ‘‘residual magnetization,”
‘Dermanent magnetization,” or “magnetic polarization’) of mag-
netite and ferromagnetic oxide could also be compared in the appa-
ratus described. For the measurement, the current of the outer sole-
noid was kept constant, maintaining a constant gradient, after the cur-
rent in both solenoids had been carried through a cycle from maximum
positive to maximum negative and part of the way back. Bycontinu-
ing the cycle with the current of the inner solenoid, the field intensity
Soo
mg per gram
ny
8
Force of attraction ,
200
Fic. 3—Relative forms of hysteresis loops of magnetite and ferromagnetic ferric
oxides.
at a given point on the axis was thus brought twice to the value zero.
The mean value of the force of attraction at these two points gives
some idea of the remanence. As before, we get only a rather crude
relative value, since the demagnetizing factors of grains and of charge
enter into the effect, in addition to the fundamental fact that only
an apparent remanence, dependent on the coercive force of the
material, can be measured on a specimen in other than ring form.
338 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
The results, expressed in percentages of the maximum attraction,
are included in Table 2.
Hysteresis loop. The remanence is only one of the characteristics
of the hysteresis loop, whose relative form can also be compared by
means of the apparatus described. Typical curves are shown in
figure 3. The form of curve is found to be distinctly different for
natural magnetite, artificial ferromagnetic oxide, and natural ferro-
magnetic oxide. This may indicate that the natural specimen was
formed in some other way than by oxidation of Fe;O,, but further
study of hysteresis loops as correlated with mode of formation is
needed to clear up this question. The effect of degree of fineness is
not known with certainty, although fine-grained magnetite gave a
curve similar to that shown in figure 3, and not like those of the
ferromagnetic ferric oxides.
INVERSIONS IN THE FERROMAGNETIC OXIDE
Ferromagnetic ferric oxide undergoes two types of inversion at
high temperatures:
(1) A reversible inversion, consisting in a relatively sudden change
from ferromagnetic to paramagnetic at a temperature not far above
500°. On cooling, the ferromagnetic condition is again assumed.
This inversion is similar to those in metallic iron and in magnetite,
although at a different temperature.
(2) An irreversible inversion, consisting in a complete loss of the
ferromagnetic property, the oxide becoming like ordinary para-
magnetic Fe,O; and perhaps identical with it. This change occurs
at an increasing rate as the temperature rises, being slow at 500°
while it is complete in a few minutes at 650° and higher.
The sample of natural ferromagnetic oxide described in preceding
paragraphs remained ferromagnetic after the heating to determine
water and volatile matter. Its characteristics after being heated
are seen in one of the curves of figure 2.
Heated for 15 minutes at 750° the natural oxide became para-
magnetic, lowering the force of attraction per gram to the value
shown near the bottom of figure 2.
Some natural magnetite which had been partially oxidized by
heating in moist oxygen at 400 to 470° for 20 to 45 hours yielded
only a paramagnetic oxide, as shown by the fact that the suscep-
tibility was about that corresponding to the ferrous iron content.”
17 SosMAN AND Hostetter, Op. cit. (Trans. Amer. Inst. Mining Eng. 58) p. 428.
ee ee
AuGtust 19, 1925 sOSMAN AND POSNJAK: FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE 339
COLOR OF THE FERROMAGNETIC OXIDE
Some data on the colors of the powders of the natural and artifi-
cial ferromagnetic oxides are assembled in Table 3, with similar
data on specimens of ordinary ferric oxide for comparison. The
numbers and names are those used by Ridgway.'s
Those familiar with Ridgway’s system of numbering colors will
see at once that the color of the ferromagnetic oxide is distinctive.
It is further toward the yellow than the paramagnetic, and of a
slightly deeper shade, and so tends toward a “chocolate brown”
color. The difference is not cne that could be produced by a differ-
ent degree of fineness.
TABLE 3——Cotors or OxipEs orf IRoN IN PowpDER Form
SPECIMEN COLOR
NUMBER NUMBER
|
COLOR NAME
Natural magnetite, Mineville........ | 3b Black, lustrous
Artificial ferromagnetic Fe.O3........ | 2005 | 6’m Hessian brown to liver brown
Artificial ferromagnetic Fe.O3........ 2007 | 7m Bay
Natural ferromagnetic FeO; coarse. .}| RC1487| 9’’m Burnt umber
Natural ferromagnetic Fe.O; fine ...} RC1487| 11’k Hazel
Natural ferromagnetic Fe.O; heated
SOPADOUG OOUg tres cin rs: RC1487| 69’’’’m | Aniline black
Natural ferromagnetic FeO; heated
CORT OU sae ee ae hse SNe .....| RC1487| 77 Vinaceous-rufous to Hay’s
russet
“Reagent” Fe,O;, Merck............. 1041 | 5/7 Ocher red to Prussian red
Fe:0; from hydrolysis of nitrate..... 231 | 54) Dragons-blood red to brick
red
Oxidized magnetite, not ferromag-
TO cee eat eee ae eae eee ae 242 11k Mineral red
Specular hematite, L. Superior....... 1058 | 5k Morocco red
“Magnetic hematite,’ Juragua, Cuba.| 1092 | 69’’’k | Anthracene purple
Natural goethite, Diamond Hill,
17d ee eae ee eae 17879 | 13’m Mars brown
Natural limonite, Urals, Russia...... 40352 | 17’k Dresden brown
Cther investigators have also observed this color difference.
Abraham and Planiol call the ferromagnetic oxide ‘“‘a slightly yellowish
brown,” and Chevallier, “more yellowish than ordinary ferric oxide.”
REFRACTIVE INDEX OF FERROMAGNETIC OXIDE‘?
The refractive index is difficult to measure because of the fineness
of grain. The natural oxide (RC1487) is mostly either isotropic or
1s Ripeway, R., Color standards and color nomenclature, Washington, 1912.
19 We are indebted to Dr. H. E. Merwin of this Laboratory for this examination.
340 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
in such fine-grained aggregates that no birefringence is evident, but
a few distinctly birefringent fibrous aggregates are present. The
grains are porous, as is evident from the penetration of liquids used
for mounting. The refractive index of grains which the liquid has
penetrated is about 2.52 for red light. This is somewhat nearer to
the average index of goethite (Fe.O;-H.O) than to that of hematite
(Fe,O;). As the specimen contains 3.1 per cent of water, this
measurement is not decisive as to the index of the ferromagnetic
oxide. The maximum index obtained with the oxide derived from
lepidocrocite is equal to the minimum index of hematite (2.74).
It is evident, then, that the indices of the ferromagnetic oxide
are not radically different from those of hematite, but no more exact
quantitative statement can be made until visible crystals are available.
STRUCTURE OF FERROMAGNETIC OXIDE
One of the most interesting facts about the ferromagnetic oxide is
the close relation of its structure to that of magnetite.
TABLE 4.—Data SHowine APPARENT IDENTITY OF STRUCTURE BETWEEN MAGNETITE
(Fe;04) AND FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OxIpE (Fe:03)
MAGNETITE. | OXIDIZED PRECIPITATED OXIDIZED PRECIPITATED
MINEVILLE, 3b MAGNETITE NO. 2605 MAGNETITE NO. 2006
ci I oe ann I cal ann I pe
2.51 oo 0.300 | 2.62 5 0.292 | 2.61 5— 0.293
2.97 10 0.2535 | 3.055 10 0.252 | 3.06 10 0.251
3.59 4 0.210 3.66 3 0.210 3.65 4 0.2105
4.10 (?) 1/2 0.187
4.50 (?)| 1/2 0.171
4.685 6- 0.161 4 84 6 0.159 4.81 7 0.160
5.12 8 0.1475 | 5.245 9 0.147 5.26 9 0.147
5.94 2 0.128 6.15 (?) 1/2 | 0.126
6.28 (?)| 1/2 0.121 |
6.58 (?) 1/2 0.116 |
eO2) Pn — | On LOO a ierpestitha((2))1 etl 2 0.1095
7.92 [Pe
Following up a suggestion made in 1917,° one of the authors (E. P.)
made some X-ray diffraction measurements on natural magnetite
and ferromagnetic ferric oxide, by the so-called powder method.
The films were made in 1922 but the results have not heretofore been
published.
20 SosMAN, R. B., p. 67 of Some problems of the oxides of tron, This JouRNAL 7: 55-
72. 1917.
auGusT 19, 1925 sOSMAN AND POSNJAK: FERROMAGNETIC FERRIC OXIDE 341
Table 4 shows the comparison. Under each substance is given:
first, the distance (x) of each spectrum line from the central un-
deviated image, obtained by measuring the distance between corre-
sponding lines on opposite sides of the center of the film and dividing
by 2; second, the relative intensity (/) of the line, judged visually;
third, the fractional spacing of atomic planes (d/n) corresponding to
the line, in mu (10-* mm.). This third quantity is based upon the
equation n\ = 2d sin 6, in which n is the order of reflection, \ is the
wave-length of X-rays used (Ka line of molybdenum, 0.712 A.),
d is the distance between like planes of atoms, and @ is the angle of
reflection, determined from x with the aid of a calibration of the
X-ray camera with sodium chloride.
The table shows practically complete identity between the three
patterns. The only discrepancy which seems in excess of the normal
error is in the line closest to the center; at this line, agreement is
complete between the two ferric oxides but the magnetite shows a
greater intensity and slightly larger spacing. But it should be
remarked that the films are rather weak, with much scattering (the
technique has since been improved) and it cannot be asserted that
this one difference is real.
Welo and Baudisch2! have recently reported confirmation of this
identity of pattern, with the aid of X-ray photographs by W. P.
Davey, but their results have not yet been published in full.
The theoretical importance of this transformation has already been
commented upon,” but the explanation for the persistence of mag-
netic properties and of structure is not yet clear.
If the identity of X-ray pattern shall be found to be complete, it
will furnish a second instance of two compounds which differ in com-
position and physical properties but give the same X-ray pattern.”
SUMMARY
The ferromagnetic modification of ferric oxide, long known only
as an artificial product, has now been found in nature. The proper-
ties of this specimen are compared with the properties of Mineville
magnetite and of artificial ferromagnetic Fe.O; made by oxidizing
precipitated Fe;O0,. The three are similar in magnetic susceptibility,
21WeLo, L. A., anp Bavpiscu, O., The two-stage transformation of magnetite into
hematite, Abstract of paper before American Physical Society. Physical Rev. 25:
587. April, 1925.
22 Sosman, Op. cit. (This Journat 7: 66).
22 The other case is that of sillimanite (Al,O;- SiO») and mullite (3A1.0; - 2Si02).
See Bowen anp Greic, Journ. Amer. Ceramic Soc. 7: 253. 1924.
342 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
and give the same X-ray pattern, in spite of the radical difference in
composition between Fe;0, and Fe.,O;. The ferromagnetic oxides
are similar in color and differ in color from ordinary Fe.0;. The
natural specimen gives a different hysteresis curve from the artifi-
cial oxide and from magnetite. The ferromagnetic property of
Fe,O,; is lost reversibly at a definite temperature a little above
500°, and irreversibly at 650° and possibly lower, depending upon
the time of heating. A ferromagnetic oxide has also been obtained
by the dehydration of lepidocrocite, one of the two crystalline forms
of the monohydrate Fe.0;-H,O, while the other form, goethite,
yields only paramagnetic Fe.QO3.
MINERALOGY .—Petzite from the Last Chance mine, Cornucopia
district, Oregon. By Earu V. SHANNON,! U.S. National Museum.
(Communicated by D. F. Hewett.)
A specimen of rich telluride gold ore recently collected in the Last
Chance Mine in the Cornucopia district, Oregon, by Mr. Clyde P.
Ross of the U. 8. Geological Survey has been forwarded to the writer
for identification. This has been analysed in the museum laboratory
and found to be petzite. The results of this work are considered to
be of sufficient interest to deserve record in the present brief article.
The mineral is massive and occurs in a gangue of quartz with some
white calcite. Some areas in the ore up to 2 centimeters across
consist of about equal volumes of the telluride and the gangue. The
calcite seems to be intimately associated with the petzite.
In color the telluride is lead gray with a faint suggestion of red
which becomes more definitely perceptible with exposure. It is
very soft and sectile but is brittle enough to be readily pulverized in
a mortar. The luster on fresh fracture is brilliant metallic. There
is no trace whatever of any cleavage and the fracture is perfectly
conchoidal.
The analyzed material was submitted to a metallographic exam-
ination by Mr. M. N. Short of the U. 8. Geological Survey who
reports it pure except for less than 1 per cent of chalcopyrite. The
results of his microscopic examination are given as follows: Color
of polished surface silvery white; very soft and sectile but gives a
little powder on edges of the scratch. In polarized reflected light
shows medium anisotropism with pink and blue colors of about the
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
Aueust 19, 1925 SHANNON: PETZITE FROM OREGON 343
same intensity as arsenopyrite. With the standard microchemical
reagents of Davy and Farnham, it gives the following reactions:
HNO; tarnishes black differentially with no effervescence; HCl
tarnishes iridescent to brown; KCN brings out scratches and pits
surface, action slow and rather feeble; FeCl; instantly tarnishes
iridescent; KOH, negative, HgCl. tarnishes differentially iridescent.
These data agree fairly well with those of hessite given by Davy and
Farnham and present some essential differences from their data
for petzite. This work is in line with the efforts of Mr. Short to
record such microchemical and microscopic properties of opaque ore
minerals as made upon analyzed material.
The material for analysis was ground and the gangue removed by
floating in methylene iodide. The mineral was insoluble in either
nitric or hydrochloric acids alone but dissolved readily in mixtures
of the two with separation of silver chloride. The solution in the
mixed acids was evaporated to dryness and after freeing from nitric
acid by repeated evaporation on the steam bath with hydrochloric
acid was taken up in hydrochloric acid, diluted largely and boiled.
The silver was thus separated as chloride together with a little gold
and the insoluble quartz. This mixture was treated on the filter
with ammonia to remove the silver chloride which was recovered
later by acidification of the extract with nitric acid, filtered on a
gooch and weighed. The small amount of gold remaining with the
quartz was separated, after ignition, by solution in aqua regia. The
first filtrate from the silver chloride, etc. was treated with oxalic
acid and the gold separated and weighed as metal. The tellurium
was then precipitated by saturating the solution with sulphur diox-
ide; it was filtered on a gooch crucible and weighed as the element.
The iron and copper were recovered from the filtrate by ordinary
methods. Sulphur was determined in a separate portion by the
ordinary method.
The results of the analysis are given in Table 1.
The results are of interest in several respects. This represents a
new locality for this mineral although hessite is reported from the
North Pole mine, near Sumpter. Its composition is, nevertheless,
in line with the results indicated by Dana who, on the basis of sev-
eral good analyses considered petzite to represent a definite double
salt in which gold telluride and silver telluride were combined in the
ratio of 3 to 1. Dana includes this mineral in the galena group, a
wrong interpretation since it is essentially a telluride of univalent
metals quite devoid of the cubic cleavage characteristic of the lead
344 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
TABLE 1.—ANaAtysiIs or PETZITE FROM OREGON
1p Il.
OREGON THEORY
Quarter fn 8 . 3ccrarops eters 28 siepP Qoauet si Poe egret eerie 0.60
Gold CAN eee ereirh oto caste cee ets einer eer 23 .04 Qoe5
Silivert(Ate hc 8 oe Sheds. dasa cabo ee te ose reea re 42.00 42.0
Tron hle) oes. Aly arses base ee ee oe eee 0.44
Copper (Cw) tic dcctargtep tn at escent oe erne 0.32
SUlpNUn (Slee mcs tetiaya teats sre ety eee nao eee 0.12
Tellurium (Le) Ve\-piso. nace oer eraeter eens eee 33.44 32.5
99 .96 100.00
I. Analysis of Petzite from the Last Chance mine.
Il. Theoretical composition of Petzite 3AgeTe.Auw.Te.
sulphide, telluride and selenide. The examination of Wherry’s
classification of the sulphide minerals finds that petzite is definitely
assigned a 3:1 silver-to-gold formula, these elements not being
regarded as isomorphous and not mutually replaceable.2 Moreover
the mineral is not, as in Dana’s mineralogy, included in the galena
group, a group of bivalent-metal sulphides characterized by cubic
cleavage, but is relegated to a non-crystallized section of the chalco-
cite group (orthorhombic). No crystals of petzite have ever been
obtained but the marked anisotropism observed by Mr. Short and
recorded above would seem to place the present mineral, at least,
in a crystalline and non-isometric group, presumably the chalcocite
group. This analysis confirms several previously recorded ones and
the composition of this mineral can now be considered to be well
established. The investigated specimen is numbered 95,185 in the
U. 8. National Museum catalog.
2, T. Wherry, The nomenclature and classification of sulphide minerals. This
JOURNAL, 10: 492. 1920.
auaGustT 19, 1925 PEATTIE: CASUARINAS OF AMERICA 345
BOTANY .—Casuarinas of America identified by branchlets and seeds.
Donatp CutLross Pratrin, Washington, D. C. (Commun-
icated by E. P. Kiuure.)
In the task of identifying specimens of Casuarina sent in to the
Bureau of Plant Industry from various parts of the country, the
writer was faced with the perplexity that the majority of samples
consisted only in branchlets, while the keys in all books are based
mainly on flowers and fruits. In order to overcome this difficulty
a special study was made of the branchlets of plants known from
their reproductive characters to be correctly identified, and a simple
key to species was then based on branchlets.
Another useful diagnostic character was found in the seeds which
authors have much neglected, though they are quite distinctive. As
most of the plants of Casuarina received from foreign correspondents
consist only in seeds and these, as it has proved, often wrongly
labelled, it has seemed of value to indicate how Casuarinas may be
identified from seeds.
All specimens of Casuarina in the National Herbarium, the Eco-
nomic Herbarium of the Bureau of Plant Industry, and the seed
collection of the Office of Foreign Seed and Plant Introduction have
been examined, as well as those in the herbarium of Professor L.
H. Bailey.
Casuarina, an Australasian genus, is now extensively grown in
this country. As an ornamental and economic genus it is of coming
importance.
In using the following key it should be recalled that the apparent
leaves are really branchlets, and that the true leaves are reduced to
teeth in a sheath around the nodes, as in Hquisetum. Measurements,
particularly of the branchlets, are important; as they are made in
very small units it is essential to be accurate. A micrometer caliper
is best for this purpose, though a millimeter ruler, read with a mag-
nifying glass, will do.
KEY TO THE SPECIES OF CASUARINA CULTIVATED IN THE UNITED STATES
A. Teeth 6-16, branchlets round or somewhat angular
B. Internodes on full grown branchlets 7 mm. long or less.
C. Branchlets 0.7-0.85 mm. thick; teeth 7 (6-8) in number, rarely
more; mature cones about 1.3 em. thick; seeds 6-8 mm. long, 1-3
1Jn Plant Immigrants, no. 217, the author has described the economic and ornamen-
tal uses of the Casuarinas growing in America. Descriptions of the trees as a whole
are found there, as well as their horticultural ranges and histories in America.
346 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
mm. broad, pale brown throughout, the wing thickish, twice as
long. asthe seed body.) ms sack eee C. equisetifolia
C. Branchlets 0.4-6.5 mm. thick, teeth 6-10
D. Mature cones 13 mm. or more in diameter, seeds 3-4 mm. broad,
6.5-8 mm. long, the wing thin, pale brown, twice as long as the
seed body, which is handsome chestnut brown; male flower-
spikes interrupted; teeth 6-8....................... C. suberosa
D. Mature cones 10 mm. in diameter at the most, but generally
much less; seeds 1-2 mm. broad, 3-4.5 mm. long, dull grayish
white, with a short, thickish wing; male spikes dense; teeth
S=NOL ee Rn Oe TR AE eek Oe de C. Cunninghamiana
B. Internodes on full grown branchlets more or less glaucous, thick (0.85—
1.50 mm.)
E. Branchlets 0.85-0.95 mm. thick; internodes 8-10 mm. long, teeth
erect or appressed, not spreading, mostly 16 in number; cones
about 12 mm. broad, seeds about 4 mm. long and 2 mm. broad,
grayish white or pale brown, dull, the wing fairly thickand narrow,
the midnerve not extruded; male spikes dense............ C. glauca
E. Branchlets 0.95-1.50 mm. thick, internodes 13-27 mm. long, the
approximately 10 teeth often spreading. Cones 25 mm. or more
thick; seeds 8-12 mm. long, 3-4.5 mm. broad, the seed-body choco-
late brown flecked with white, the wing broad, long pale, thin, with
decidedly excurrent midnerve. Male spikes elongated and at
first dense, at maturity loosely flowered.................. C. stricta
A. Teeth only 4; branches markedly quadrangular
F. Internodes about 7 mm. long; branchlets not forking, about 0.5 mm.
thick; seeds 7-9 mm. long, 3-4 mm. broad, somewhat shining brown,
not wrinkled, the wing thin and transparent.............. C. torulosa
F. Internodes 3-4 mm. long; branchlets forking, the ultimate divisions
about 0.7 thick; seeds 12-18 mm. long, 4-8 mm. broad, dull brown
and wrinkled; wing relatively thick................... C. sumatrana
auGust 19, 1925 LONGLEY: POLYCARY, POLYSPORY AND POLYPLOIDY 347
CYTCLOGY.—Polycary, pelyspory, and polyploidy in citrus and
citrus relatwes. A. E. Loneuny, Bureau of Plant Industry.
(Communicated by G. N. CoLiins.)
During the past two seasons the writer has made a study of chromo-
some conditions in the large and representative collection of citrus
and citrus relatives in the greenhouse of the Cffice of Crop Physiol-
ogy and Breeding at Washington, D. C. This was undertaken
because a knowledge of the relationship between forms might possibly
be an aid in planning future breeding work, and with the hope of
shedding some light on the origin of this important group of culti-
* vated plants.
All material was obtained from type plants growing in the green-
houses at Washington. The study was confined to a determination
of the numbers and behavior of chromosomes at meiosis of the pollen
mother cells and to the mature pollen, where the presence of dwarf
grains indicate some abnormality in pollen formation.
Mother cells were stained in Belling’s! iron-acetocarmine, and
chromosome counts promptly made. Duplicate material was killed
with chromo-acetic killing solution, embedded with Heidenhain’s
haematoxylin, but this method had few advantages over the quicker
method for making chromosome counts. Mature pollen was stained
with chloral-iodine solution to make classifying and counting less
difficult.
Early in the study it was found that counts of heterotypic and
homotypic metaphases gave, with few exceptions, 9 as the haploid
chromosome number. Frost? in a recent publication has made
similar determinations for three citrus forms. He found neither
polycary nor polyspory. The writer frequently observed both
phenomena in many of the forms as they flowered in the greenhouse.
In addition Fortunella hindsw (fig. 1, a) was discovered to be a tetra-
ploid form.
Table 1 has been prepared so as to show the conditions observed
in twenty-five citrus and citrus relatives. Only one species, Fortunella
hindsti the sole representative of the subgenus Protocitrus,? had
more than 9 bivalent chromosomes at diakinesis.
1Beiiine, J. Counting chromosomes in pollen mother cells. Amer. Nat. 55: 573-
574. 1921.
2? Frost, H. B. The chromosomes of citrus. This Journau 15: 1-3. 1925.
2Swinete, W. T. A new genus of kumquat oranges. This Journau 5: 165-176.
1915.
a
$2/ 62/8 — 4, xe 6 yenbuny [BAQ [ap Burmg (aney) vpwvbwow vyaunjJoy
£2/ 92/8 — IT |e8t 6 yenbuny Baroy
¥C/ 92/998 LIGOT JOST |CLTT SI qeunbuny pyIM Suoysu0py
atl eed ae 6
val L 1% — |r |T16r 6 autszasuny Koueq
=—}/— | — 6 ULIVPUBUL JVI] MOTTA
vz/s /9 — |€0€ |T09 6 aSuvso vuns}Tg
¥G/ €1/% — |206 |€9¢ ’ 6 aSuBIO BIDUITE A
FG! 8Z//8E°F|0E |S0Z |288 TASS ECACEGS GY LEE? (cocnb on dao eaacodoocmmoonnuocos feaniaeg —
#2/ 9z/Z — ce 262 If 6 (sse[pees) aduvio afddvourg Yooqse swswawes sn.ujyy
G2/'¢ |G — lta |es9 I |IITFl 6 PINTTOM GIG: WROUTGT (|iessnie sees tea reer sls ne eseksseFeTe aerate inh s0) SSaleiaalotoisis yooqsQ sypunsb snappy
G3/ 2/280 T1/2I |8T6 |92T T |IT2te}\ ;
SFO PIs) MAIN ATO Gad CSA ele el eee cee eile celled Nicaea ods el ScisasiaL Ta yoods (D.LB SNL},
F2/F2/ FP 9lcs | ceZT 1 lozlogs| { © eater) ay EIEN. BOGOR THO)
2/6 |Z ee toa 6 BPO DO NG iis erate os Ser oer eign Seema DSUING DIOfUDIND sn.7U)
pel L 1% — |F¢ |Fez 6 GOAT TSO NT 5 liege sesnaes cas eSReN Nel RCTS RRS ah RT alae d|SUIMYG DIVO/UUDIND sn.yL)
: 2 wn
eee pee ae foe G |66) 6 C08 Cy hl (REIN ag aCe SA OD Ob d[SUIMG DrOf/yUDIND snUjUD %
F2/G0/Z|9Z SGI (SLE |1SF 6 TOUTS T WH OIN GPa cass setae he elastase Css Ea oss1y wn woUrN sn.yuy
rz/e /gloeolr ler \zz0r 6 TOC fe uUY] vorpou snap
—|—|— 6 asurig A10y9 MIN ¥ 'S ((Sugp) wyjunfuramyos srsdoury
asd a Gist lP Sate, Nc irae 0 SA Siig Ii eet pCa iat aaa aa ae hae a A[SUIMG Luaupaaya sisdojpbay
alte lee laa 4b
a | 8/8 | # lejzjols|s] de
Ble ce 8 Bs
C a
aZzis oO
aiva Wess | gr 5 ALGIUVA IVHAWTAOLUOH sa1odus
oe daLVOIGNI SV 2
SNIVHUD fo}
Ayduioy N@110d ONINUOA S
SAVULUL ON =
&
N@110d TUNLVN
SHUAILVTAY SQULIY) GNV SNULIZ) NI NOILYNUOW NATIOG—T WISV.L
¥6/ 1/9/80’ F
¥Z/ 82/ G|99' &
¥2/ 91/ G|Z0'§
velh /€
be/b /€
G28 1%
£2/ G2/ 8
606
8c0t
O16
169
ai
yenbouny srysnop
oposuny uosduing
ALO OU]
yenbuiny punoy
(DIDYOPLL] SNLLUOT XK SIUIUIs snupug) X opuoBivue vppauUnjuoyy
pO TEES S1DUDLD SNULI X VSOLOYOP “ABA SYLGOU SND
Se TORT ca (ULL OLPO Lula es Dy Cah p
ee he aca inca ss Le. NC chee See LOh pypOfrweng DUULIAIS
Ma eae ee matte tai he ge Nedert cam. 1 cota ied a “JUV (TD) DIDYOLUL SNMLIUWO
Waar otk ah sha pa eT ea a: oa “OLSUING povuodnl D)POUND LOT
349
350 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
The few counts of pollen tetrads given were made from prepara-
tions in which anomalies were frequent. No attempt was made to
study tetrads of all forms. The results of a study of mature pollen
are included and the percentage of dwarf pollen grains given. This
per cent indicates the occurrence of irregularities in chromosome
distribution and tetrad formation.
E
Fig. 1—Poiiten Moruer Ceuts or Cirrus anp Cirrus RELATIVES
A. Homotypic metaphase of Fortunella hindsii; B. heterotypic metaphase of Citrop-
sis schweinfurthii; C. polyspory in Citrus aurantifolia; D. homotypic metaphase of
Fortunella japonica; E. polyeary in Citrus grandis; F. polyspory in Fortunella marga-
rita X (citrus sinensis X Poncirus trifoliata) (Figures drawn with the aid of a camera
lucida, using a Leitz 1.5 objective and for a, b, d and e an X18 ocular, for ce and f an
< 15 ocular. Reduced 2/3 on reproduction).
Irregularities in chromosome pairing at diakinesis and in their
distribution at meiosis (fig. 1, e) were frequently noticed. The out-
come of such irregularities was the presence of tetrads containing
more (fig. 1, ¢ and f) or less than the expected four pollen grains.
Polyspory was often noted in limes, grape-fruit, and limequats.
It is believed that there may be a relation between irregular chromo-
some distribution that produces pollen. cells with varying chromo-
some numbers and the production of citrus forms with supernumerary
chromosomes.
There are two factors that hinder the spontaneous appearance of
august 19, 1925 LONGLEY: POLYCARY, POLYSPORY AND POLYPLOIDY 351
such forms, the likelihood that’ only sex cells with 9 chromosomes
are viable and the very infrequent use of seeds as a means
of propagation.
The importance of a tetraploid Fortunella seems to be in the possi-
ble opportunity it affords the breeder to obtain hybrids with closely
related diploid forms, and thus multiplying the chances of obtaining
forms with unusual chromosome complexes.
In many of our polymorphic genera, variability seems to be asso-
ciated with polyploidy, but the author has found that in three groups,
citrus and its relatives, Zea and its relatives,t and Irises (unpub-
lished), polyploidy is rare while variability is general among culti-
vated diploid forms. It seems probable that this variability is the
outcome of long cultivation where selection and hybridization would
naturally occur. The question before us is, will the presence of a
tetraploid form in such a group as the citrus be useful in bringing
about new chromosome combinations? And are we to expect added
variability as the outcome of unusual chromosome complexes?
Unless we reverse the prevalent idea of the origin of polyploidy
and derive the numerous diploid citrus forms from ancestors with
higher chromosome numbers we must conclude that the wild species
Fortunella hindsiz is not primitive but represents a branch from the
common ancestral trunk of the citrus group.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY
678TH MEETING
The 678th meeting was held in the assembly hall of the Cosmos Club,
March 28, 1925, at 8 p.m., with President Rohwer in the chair and 89
persons present. New members elected: ANNE Benton, Dr. E. A. Back,
J. E. Grar, C. H. PopEnor.
P. B. Jounson described his observations of certain animals in the zoolog-
ical gardens at New York and Philadelphia. The great anteater, after
feeding on milk, was seen to suck the end of his tail. An echidna at Phila-
delphia was watehed as it took its meal of milk. The white-handed gibbon
at Philadelphia is active, and often goes erect on its hind feet, with its hands
on its head, while the one at New York is comparatively quiet.
A. 8. Hircucock mentioned a grass, described from a collection supposed
to have been made by Haenke at Nootka Sound, which is now found to be
a Peruvian species.
4Lonctey, A. E. Chromosomes in maize and maize relatives. Journ. Agri. Re-
search, 28: no. 7, 673-687. 1924.
352 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 14
Program: H. C. OBBRHOLSER: The future of the Potomac Valley below
Great Falls (illustrated) —The speaker described the scenic beauties of the
Potomae Valley between Washington and Great Falls and its importance
as a field for the outdoor study of natural history. The possibility of its
destruction through the building of a dam at the District line, for the pur-
pose of developing water power, was discussed, and the desirability of pre-
serving the region as a public park. In conclusion, the speaker presented
a resolution which had been recommended by the Council for passage by
the Society. After discussion by R. F. Griacas, R. M. Lrssy, L. O. Howarp.
8. C. Brooks, A. A. Doourrrye, A. K. Fisher and W. B. GREELEY, leading
to the elimination of one paragraph, the resolution was passed as follows:
Whereas, the Potomac Valley, from Great Falls to Chain Bridge, provides one of
the best fields for general biological observation and collecting in the vicinity of
Washington, and is as yet comparatively unspoiled and worthy of preservation for
purposes of outdoor recreation and education in natural history in this region,
and whereas, The contemplated construction of a high dam at the District line,
if carried out in accordance with legislation which has been and may again come before
Congress, will forever deprive the inhabitants of Washington of this great natural
playground and outdoor laboratory, which can never be replaced,
Therefore, be it resolved, That the Biological Society of Washington oppose the
building of any dam below Great Falls until a thorough study shall have been made
of the possibilities of this area as a publie park by the Capital Park Commission, the
Fine Arts Commission of the District of Columbia, and representatives of organiza-
tions interested in the preservation of wild life and opportunities for outdoor recreation,
W. B. Greetey: The national forests of the United States (Illustrated) —
The extent of the national forests was described, and their importance as
a source of timber for various purposes, as a protective covering for water-
sheds, and for recreational purposes. The first aim of the Forest Service
is the protection of the forests from destruction by fire. Improvements in
methods of fire-fighting were described and illustrated by slides. The princi-
ples of reforestation leading to a continuous supply of lumber for commercial
uses were discussed. The importance of Alaskan forests as a source of
- supply of woodpulp was especially emphasized.
5. F. Buaxe, Recording Secretary.
eS ee
¥
- fot, 3 Bae ‘fs, : a hee 7
} of th magetinest a the affiliated societies will appear on this page ~
of the meeti f t feces See ;
tors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month. —
of poe 3
‘CONTENTS
OrIGINAL PAPERS : Sas
Geophysics .—Some geophysical problems. R.L. Faris. Rr eee
snipes Sos alae on the recognition of speech sounds a touch.
ua
B. Sosman and EB. Posnsak.. Rereeey. : a
Mineralogy.—Petzite from the Last iChange mine, Comucopia district,
Bart V. SHANNON Pate RAO Na Sere Sete 8 Mie ey AT Pe
SEPTEMBER 19, 1925 No. 15
JOURNAL :
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
| OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
_E.P. Kmur D. F. Hewett S. J. MaucHLy —
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A. RonwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GoLtpan G. W. Srosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Gricas J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHEERs
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE :
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anp Guitrorp Aves.
Bautrmmore, MaryLaNp
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences by
yAj
Pita)
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aimsto
present a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. Tothisendit publishes:
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JournALisissued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be ©
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures it
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be __
partly met by the author. i
Proof.—tn order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints——Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints —
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. 4
The rate of Subscription per volume 18.......ceceecceccenccerceecencccess .. $6.00* *
Semi-monthly. nitmibers... yo). WS este 5 viclein ine peo. cmioleiiatele apae ein ween Rae
Monthly mumbers. 52.25/02). «Jes tacts ctlaes doe ebrele te asia] labels ee sae eta ae
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,”’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. O.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. —
Exchanges.—The JournatL does not exchange with other publications. =
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue. [ ,
‘ wy
“Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates —
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 SEPTEMBER 19, 1925 No. 15
GENERAL SCIENCE.—The second revised edition of the Academy’s
List of One Hundred Popular Books in Science. Rosert B.
Sosman, Chairman of the Committee on Popular Books in
Science.
The “first revised edition’ of the Popular Science List was pub-
lished by the American Library Association in 1923 in the form of
a twenty-page pamphlet, and a report on the revised list was pub-
lished in this Journal.2. The edition having become exhausted about
two months ago, the Library Association inquired of the ACADEMY
whether any revision was desired before the list was reprinted, as
there seemed to be a continuing demand for such a list.*
The President of the AcapEmy, by a vote of the Board of Mana-
gers, thereupon appointed a special committee, consisting, as before,
of the Vice-Presidents of the AcapEmMy, with the writer as chairman.
Since the affiliated societies, now numbering seventeen, usually
make an annual change in the Vice-Presidents by whom they are
represented, the appointment of this group as the dctive Committee
automatically insures not only a broad representation of the branches
of science, but also a personnel different from that of previous Com-
mittees.
For general comments on the character of the list, and a history of
its original compilation, reference may be made to the last report.!
The new Committee has met, and has approved the following
changes.
1 Received July 13, 1925.
2 This JouRNaL 12: 469-476. December 19, 1922.
3 See news item in This Journat 15: 206. May 4, 1925.
4 Op. cit. 1922.
353
354 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
ADDITIONS
Stosson, E. E. Keeping up with science. New York, Harcourt, Brace
& Co., 1924. 355 pp., 30 pls.
WissLer, Crark. Man and culture. New York, Crowell Co., 1923.
371 pp.
Happon, A. C. The races of Man and their distribution. New York,
Macmillan Co., 1925. 201 pp., 10 pls. This work was included in the
Preliminary Edition of 1921, but was removed in 1922 because it was then
out of print. A new edition is now available.
Humpureys, W.J. Weather proverbs and paradoxes. Baltimore, Williams
& Wilkins Co., 1923. 125 pp., 16 pls.
Brooks, Cuartes F. Why the weather? New York, Harcourt, Brace
& Co., 1924. 310 pp., 26 pls.
TautMAN, CuHarues F. Our weather, what makes it and how to watch tt.
New York, Reynolds Publ. Co., 1925. 384 pp., 21 pls.
Batt, W. W. Rousz. Mathematical recreations and problems. Tenth
Ed. London, Macmillan & Co., 1922. 508 pp.
The Committee would have liked to include F. Roru: First book of fores-
try (Boston, Ginn & Co., 1902) among the botanical books, but finds it to
be out of print.
REMOVALS
To keep the list at exactly one hundred, the following have been
removed for the reasons indicated:
TuHomson, J. ArtHuR, Editor. The outline of science. The principal
objection to this work isits bulk. It was originally published in England in
two large volumes, and has been republished in the United States as four
volumes, too large a work to carry home conveniently from a library.
Mason, O. T. Woman’s share in primitive culture. Not so well adapted
to the purpose of the list as the author’s Origins of invention, which remains
on the list; goes too much into descriptive detail.
McCotuium, E. V. The newer knowledge of nutrition. This work has
been considerably enlarged in its later editions, and is believed to contain
far too much detailed evidence for a book suited to popular reading, although
it is indispensable to the specialist.
Moraan, T.H. A critique of the theory of evolution. Written for students
of college rank as regards preparation in biological sciences, and is too speci-
alized for this list.
CHAMBERLIN, T. C. Origin of the Earth. This book contains much
material that is still the subject of controversy among geologists and cos-
mogonists. Although a stimulating book, it might give to a reader approach-
ing the subject for the first time a misleading impression of geology as a
highly speculative science.
sEpT. 19, 1925 SOSMAN: POPULAR BOOKS IN SCIENCE 355
GEIKIn, ArcHIBALD. The founders of geology. As stated in the last
report, this book was put on the list as a temporary extra item, awaiting a
new edition of Merriny’s First hundred years of American geology, which
was then in press and is now available.
Lemprert, R. G. K. Weather science. This book was written primarily
for British readers, and being devoted mainly to weather forecasting, has
little reference to conditions in the United States. Meteorology and the
weather provide such unusually suitable material for popular science that
the Preliminary List contained several books touching these subjects, but
all except one were rendered ineligible for the First Revised List through
being out of print. This gap has recently been filled by three excellent
books, those by Humphreys, Brooks, and Talman.
Suaw, James Byrnie. Lectures on the philosophy of mathematics. This
work requires too extended a knowledge of mathematics to serve the pur-
poses of this list.
REARRANGEMENTS
The order of arrangement and the grouping of the books have been
altered somewhat, but will still be found unsatisfactory by many
readers. When we consider the numerous and complex ramifications
of science it is not surprising that a logical linear classification of one
hundred titles is difficult to achieve.
The complete list, as published by the American Library Associa-
tion, contains a descriptive paragraph about each book, with con-
necting paragraphs joining the groups of books, in order that even
the reader who does nothing more than glance through the list may
gain some feeling of the unity of scientific knowledge and the inter-
relations of its branches. These paragraphs need not be reprinted
here, but the complete list of authors and titles is given below for
reference.
A GENERAL VIEW:
1. Huxuey, THomas Henry. Selections from Hucley.
2. SLtosson, Epwin E. Keeping up with science.
3. Curtis, WINTERTON C. Science and human affairs.
SCIENCES OF MAN:
Psychology:
4. THORNDIKE, Epwarp L. The Human Nature Club.
5. James, Wiuu1am. Psychology.
6. WoopwortyH, Rogpert §. Psychology; a study of mental life.
Anthropology:
7. OsBorN, Henry Farrrietp. Men of the Old Stone Age.
8. WissLeR, CuarK. Man and culture.
356 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
9.
10.
ta
Mason, O. T. The origins of invention.
Happon, A. C. The races of Man and their distribution.
Hovey, Wautter. The Hopi Indians.
Human physiology:
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
SHERMAN, H. C. Food products.
Eppy, Watter H. The vitamine manual.
Jorpan, E. O. Food poisoning.
Keen, Witiram Wrutams. Medical research and human
welfare.
Huntinaton, Ettswortu. Civilization and climate.
SCIENCES OF LIFE:
Heredity:
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Darwin, CHarues. The origin of species.
East, E. M., and Jones, D. F. Inbreeding and outbreeding.
CastLe, W. E., Couttrer, J. M., Davenport, C. B., East,
E. M., and Towrr, W. L. Heredity and eugenics.
Conxkuin, E. G. Heredity and environment.
Gatton, Francis. Hereditary genius.
PoprENnon, Pau, and Jounson, R. H. Applied eugenics.
General biology:
23.
24.
25.
Tuomson, J. ARTHUR. The wonder of life.
Tuomson, J. ArTHUR. The haunts of life.
Locy, Witu1am A. Biology and its makers.
Zoology:
26.
. Netson, E. W. Wald animals of North America.
. RoosgvettT, THEopoRE. African game trails.
. Bersr, C. W. Jungle peace.
. StonE, Witmer, and Cram, W. E. American animals.
. CHAPMAN, FRanK M. Camps and cruises of an ornithologist.
. Fasre, J. H. Social life in the insect world.
. Bouvier, E. L. The psychic life of insects.
. Marteruinck, Maurice. The life of the bee.
. JENKINS, OttveR P. Interesting neighbors.
36.
37.
Bucktey, A. B. The winners in life’s race.
BuatcHiey, W. 8. Gleanings from nature.
Mayer, AtFrrep G. Sea-shore life.
Botany:
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
Ganone, W. F. The living plant; a description and interpreta-
tion of its functions and structure.
OstrerHout, W. J. V. Experiments with plants.
SoRAvER, Paut. A popular treatise on the physiology of plants.
Harpy, Marcezt E. The geography of plants.
Darwin, CHartes. Insectivorous plants.
TownsEND, C. W. Sand dunes and salt marshes.
sEPT. 19, 1925 SOSMAN: POPULAR BOOKS IN SCIENCE 357
Microscopic life:
44
Ancie
45
46
SCIENCE
47.
. VaLery-Rapot, Rent. Louis Pasteur, his life and labours.
nt life:
. Lucas, F. A. Animals of the past.
. Hutcarmson, H.N. Extinct monsters and creatures of other days.
S OF THE EARTH:
Grecory, J. W. Geology of to-day.
. HawxswortH, Hautuam. The strange adventures of a pebble.
. Luty, R. S., and others. The evolution of the Earth and its
inhabitants.
. COLE, GRENVILLE A. J. Rocks and their origins.
. Merritt, Grorce P. The first one hundred years of American
geology.
. SempLe, ELvten Cuurcuriin. Influences of geographic environ-
ment.
. Spurr, J. E., Hd. Political and commercial geology and the
world’s mineral resources.
. BricoamM, ALBERT P. Geographic influences in American history.
The Earth’s surface:
55
56
57
58
59.
. TynDaLL, JoHN. The forms of water in clouds and rivers, ice
and glaciers.
. Bonnsy, T. G. The work of rains and rivers.
. Bonney, T. G. Volcanoes, their structure and significance.
. Russeuu, IsraEet C. Volcanoes of North America.
Davison, CHartes. The origin of earthquakes.
The air and the ocean:
60
61
62
63
64
SCIEN
65
72.
SCIENCE
. Humpureys, W. J. Weather proverbs and paradoxes.
. Brooks, CHartes F. Why the weather?
. Tauman, C. F. Our weather; what makes it and how to watch it.
. Warp, R.pe C. Climate, considered especially in relation to Man.
. Murray, JoHN. The ocean.
CES OF THE HEAVENS:
. Batt, Ropert 8. The story of the heavens.
. Dyson, F. W. Astronomy.
. Hatz, Georce E. The new heavens.
. ABBOT, CHaRLES G. The Sun.
. Lewis, Isapet M. Splendors of the sky.
. Murpuy, E.G. A beginner’s star book; by Kelvin McKready,
pseud.
. Turner, H. H. A voyage through space.
Berry, Artuur. A short history of astronomy.
S OF THINGS AND EVENTS:
Chemistry:
73
. Stosson, E. E. Creative chemistry.
858 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
74. Henprick, Enuwoop. LHveryman’s chemistry.
75. Futter, Henry C. The story of drugs.
76. Fapre, JEAN Henri. The wonder book of chemistry.
77. Duncan, Ropert Kennepy. The chemistry of commerce.
78. Martin, Grorrrey. Modern chemistry and its wonders.
79. Soppy, FrReprRiIcK. The interpretation of radium.
80. Venasue, F. P. A short history of chemistry.
81. Smita, Epear Faus. Chemistry in America.
Physics:
82. Soppy, Freperick. Matter and energy.
83. Mitts, JoHn. Within the atom.
84. ErysrEIn, ALBERT. Relativity.
85. Fuemina, J. A. Waves and ripples in water, air and aether.
86. Miuuer, Dayton C. The science of musical sounds.
87. Braac, Wituiam. The world of sound.
88. Lucxinsu, M. Color and its applications.
89. Boys, C. V. Soap bubbles; their colours and the forces which
mould them.
90. Macu, Ernst. Popular scientific lectures.
91. Soppy, FrepEericK. Science and life.
SCIENCES OF FORM AND RELATION:
92. Batt, W. W. Rousz. Mathematical recreations and problems.
93. WuirEHEaD, A. N. Introduction to mathematics.
94. Conant, Levi Leonarp. The number concept, its origin and
development.
95. Younc, JoHN Wustey. Lectures on the fundamental concepts
of algebra and geometry.
96. Dr Morcan, Avaustus. On the study and difficulties of mathe-
matics.
97. Smita, Davip Eucrenr. Number s‘ories of long ago.
HISTORY OF SCIENCE:
98. Lippy, WALTER. An introduction to the history of science.
99. Sepewicxk, W. T., and Tyter, H.W. A short history of science.
100. Wuitr, ANDREW D. A history of the warfare of science with
theology in Christendom.
SEPT. 19, 1925 DUTTON: PROBLEMS IN PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 359
GEOPHYSICS.—On some of the greater problems of physical geology.
CLARENCE E. Dutton.
The greatest problems of physical geology I esteem to be: Ist,
What is the potential cause of volcanic action? 2d, What is the
cause of the elevation and subsidence of restricted areas of the earth’s
surface? 3d, What is the cause of the foldings, distortions, and
fractures of the strata?
The voleanie problem is at present unsolved. Every theory or
hypothesis thus far offered to explain it goes to pieces at the touch of
criticism. For elevations and subsidences we are also without any
satisfactory explanation. But the third problem, the cause of dis-
tortions and fractures in the strata, looks much more hopeful, and
it is my intention to propose this evening a solution of it, not a new
one, let me say, but an old one remodeled. Before proceeding to
discuss it, it is proper to advert to a hypothesis which has long been
in favor, and which is looked upon by some authorities as affording
an explanation. This is sometimes called the contractional hypoth-
esis.
The earth is regarded as being hot within and undergoing secular
cooling by conduction of heat through its external shell and its radia-
tion into space. This loss of interior heat is presumed to be ac-
companied by a corresponding loss of interior volume, thus depriving
the cold exterior shell of a part of its support. In a body so large
as the earth the tangential strain set up by this loss of interior sup-
port is demonstrably so great that the outer shell or crust, as it is
usually called, must be crushed or buckled by it and collapse upon
the shrinking nucleus. The objection to this explanation is twofold:
In the first place, we cannot, without resorting to violent assumptions,
find in this process a sufficient amount of either linear or volume con-
traction to account for the effects attributed to it. In the second
place, the distortions of the strata are not of the kind which could be
produced by such a process. As regards the first objection I will
confine myself here to a mere reference to the very able analysis of
the problem by Rev. Osmond Fisher. I see no satisfactory reply
to his argument. As regards the second objection, which, if pos-
sible, is more cogent still, it may be remarked that the most striking
1 An address read before the Philosophical Society of Washington, April 27, 1889.
and published in the Bulletin, 11: 51-64. 1889. It is reprinted here on the recom-
mendation of the General Committee of the Philosophical Society of Washington,
because it is the earliest summary of the theory of isostasy which is receiving wide-
spread attention and the original source is readily accessible to few persons.
360 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
features in the facts to be explained are the long, narrow tracts oc-
cupied by belts of plicated strata and the approximate parallelism of
the axes of their folds. These call for the action of some great hori-
zontal force thrusting in one direction. Take, for example, the
Appalachian system, stretching from Maine to Georgia. Here is a
great belt of parallel synclinals and anticlinals with a persistent trend,
and no rational inquirer can doubt that they have been puckered up
by some vast force acting horizontally in a northwest and southeast
direction. Doubtless it is the most wonderful example of systematic
plication in the world. But there are many others which indicate
the operation of the same forces with the same broad characteristics.
The particular characteristic with which we are here concerned is
that in each of these folded belts the horizontal force has acted wholly
or almost wholly in one direction. But the forces which would arise
from a collapsing crust would act in every direction equally. There
would be no determinate direction. In short, the process could not
form long, narrow belts of parallel folds. As I have no time to discuss
the hypothesis further I dismiss it with the remark that it is quantita-
tively insufficient and qualitatively inapplicable. It is an explanation
which explains nothing which we want to explain.
In proposing another view of the problem we may first turn our
attention to those obvious and universally conceded forces which
determine the figure of the earth. That figure we know to be one
which a liquid or viscous body of large size will take when sub-
ject only to the forces arising from rotation around an axis and to
the mutual gravitation of its own parts. This form is an oblate
spheroid.
The spherical form, however, is only approximate. We find large
portions of its surface protruding into continents and islands, while
others are sunken to form oceanic basins. How did these inequali-
ties arise? If the form of the earth is nearly spheroidal why is it not
exactly so? It has always been supposed that this nearly spheroidal
form implies that the earth, if not liquid, is certainly not rigid enough
to maintain any other form against the forces of its own gravitation.
Even if the earth were a mass of unbroken steel no great departure
from this shape could be maintained fora moment. It would straight-
way collapse and flow into a spheroidal form. But if gravitation
compels it to take a nearly spheroidal shape why should it stop short
of making it perfectly so? Perhaps it will be said that while the
rigidity of rocks may be insufficient to permit a great deformation
of the normal spheroid it may be sufficient to permit a small one.
SEPT. 19, 1925 DUTTON: PROBLEMS IN PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 361
Before discussing this point it will be necessary to introduce a con-
sideration which has seldom been touched upon by geographers or
geologists.
If the earth were composed of homogeneous matter its normal
figure of equilibrium without strain would be a true spheroid of
revolution; but if heterogeneous, if some parts were denser or lighter
than others, its normal figure would no longer be spheroidal. Where
the lighter matter was accumulated there would be a tendency to
bulge, and where the denser matter existed there would be a tendency
to flatten or depress the surface. For this condition of equilibrium
of figure, to which gravitation tends to reduce a planetary body,
irrespective of whether it be homogeneous or not, I propose the
name isostasy. I would have preferred the word isobary, but it is
preoccupied. We may also use the corresponding adjective, iso-
static. An isostatic earth, composed of homogeneous matter and
without rotation, would be truly spherical. If slowly rotating, it
would be a spheroid of two axes. If rotating rapidly within a certain
limit, it might be a spheroid of three axes.
But if the earth be not homogeneous—if some portions near the
surface be lighter than others—then the isostatic figure is no longer
a sphere or spheroid of revolution, but a deformed figure bulged
where the matter is light and depressed where it is heavy. The
quest-on which I propose is: How nearly does the earth’s figure
approach to isostasy?
Mathematical statics alone will not enable us to answer this ques-
tion with a sufficient degree of approximation. It does, indeed,
enable us to fix certain limits to the departure from isostasy which
cannot be exceeded. This very problem has been treated with
great skill by Prof. George Darwin.
But this problem may be approached from another direction with
more satisfactory results. Geology furnishes us with certain facts
which enable us to draw a much narrower conclusion. There are
several categories of fact to which we may turn. One of the most
remarkable is the general fact that where great bodies of strata
are deposited they progressively settle down or sink seemingly by
reason of their gross mechanical weight, just as a railway embank-
ment across a bog sinks into it. The attention of the earlier Appa-
lachian geologists was called, as soon as they had acquired a fair
knowledge of their field, to the surprising fact that the paleozoic
strata in that wonderful belt, though tens of thousands of feet in
thickness, were all deposited in comparatively shallow water. The
362 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
paleozoic beds of the Appalachian region have a thickness ranging
from 15,000 to over 30,000 feet, yet they abound in proofs that when
they were deposited their surfaces were the bottom of a shallow sea
whose depth could not probably have exceeded a few hundred feet.
No conclusion is left us but that sinking went on pari passu with
the accumulation of the strata. When the geology of the Pacific
coast was sufficiently disclosed, the same fact confronted us there.
As investigation went on the same fact presented itself over the
western mountain region of the United States. One of the most
striking cases is the Plateau Country. This great region, nearly
100,000 square miles in area, lying in the adjacent parts of Colorado,
Utah, New Mexico, and Arizona, discloses from 8000 to 12,000 feet
of mesozoic and cenozoic strata. Here the proof is abundant that
the surface of the strata was throughout that vast stretch of time
never more than a few feet from sea level. Again and again is emerged
from the water a little way, only to be submerged. At many hori-
zons grew forests which are now represented by those abundant and
beautiful fossil woods which of late have become celebrated. In the
cretaceous we find many seams and seamlets of coal or carbonaceous
shale; but they are included between sandstones which are cross-
bedded and ripple-marked, or between shales and limestones which
abound in the remains of marine mollusca. Here the evidence seems
conclusive that the whole subsidence went on at about the same rate
as the surface was built up by deposition. In short, it may be laid
down as a general rule that where great bodies of sediment have
been deposited over extensive areas their deposition has been ac-
companied by a subsidence of the whole mass.
The second class of facts is even more instructive, and stands in a
reciprocal relation to those just mentioned. Wherever broad moun-
tain platforms occur and have been subjected to great erosion the
loss of altitude by degradation is made good by a rise of the platform.
In the western portion of the United States there occur mountain
ranges situated upon broad and lofty platforms from 20 to 60 miles
wide and from 50 to 200 miles in length. Some of these platforms
contain several mountain ridges. All of them have been enormously
eroded, and if the matter removed from them could be replaced it
would suffice to build them to heights of eight or ten miles; yet it is
incredible that these mountains were ever much loftier than now,
and may never have been so lofty. The flanks of these platforms,
with the upturned edges of the strata reposing against them or with
gigantic faults measuring their immense uplifts, plainly declare to
sEepT. 19, 1925 DUTTON: PROBLEMS IN PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 363
us that they have been slowly pushed upwards as fast as they were
degraded by secular erosion.
Tt seems little doubtful that these subsidences of accumulation
deposits and these progressive upward movements of eroded moun-
tain platforms are, in the main, results of gravitation restoring the
isostasy which has been disturbed by denudation on the one hand
and by sedimentation on the other. The magnitudes of the masses
which thus show the isostatic tendency are in some cases no greater
than a single mountain platform, less than 100 miles in length, from
20 to 40 miles wide and from 2500 to 3500 feet mean altitude above
the surrounding lowlands. From this we may directly infer that in
those regions the effective rigidity of the earth is insu‘ficient to up-
hold a mass so great as one of those platforms if that mass consti-
tuted a real deformation of isostasy; and if an equal mass were to
be suddenly removed the earth would flow upward from below to
fill the hiatus; hence we must look to considerably smaller masses
to find a defect of isostasy. It is extremely probable that small or
narrow ridges are not isostatic with respect to the country round about
them. Some volcanic mountains may be expected to be non-isostatic,
especially isolated volcanic piles.
Thus the geologic changes which have taken place may be regarded
as experiments conducted by Nature herself on a vast scale, and
from her experiments we may by suitable working hypotheses draw
provisional conclusions, both as to the degree in which the earth
approximates to isostasy and also as to the mean effective rigidity
of large portions of the subterranean mass. The approach to isos-
tasy is thereby inferred to be very near, while the mean rigidity of
the subterranean masses is also inferred to be far less than that of
ordinary surface rocks, and even approaching more nearly the rigidity
of lead than to that of copper. Pure physics alone would not have
enabled us to reach such a conclusion, for the equations employ con-
stants of unknown value. But geologic inquiry may, and I believe
does, furnish us with narrow limits within which those values must
be taken. Thus the two sciences must work coéperatively and supple-
ment each other.
There is, however, one other branch of physical inquiry which bears
directly on the foregoing questions. This is the investigation of
terrestrial gravitation by means of the pendulum. I regret that I
have never had time or opportunity to acquaint myself thoroughly
with the results thus far reached by this branch of investigation, and
can only speak from general knowledge. Pendulum observations
364 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
are far too few for the wants of geographic or geologic science. So
far as they go they are highly suggestive in the present connection.
The pendulum, as a rule, does not show any appreciable variation
of gravity, such as would be expected if the mean density of all the
outer parts of the earth were uniform. It indicates rather that the
elevated regions and continents are composed of lighter matter and
the depressed regions and ocean basins of denser matter. The ex-
ceptions are of a character which prove the general rule, and occur
where we should look for them. The results obtained by the India
survey upon the Himalayan mass were regarded by Archdeacon
Pratt as indicating that the plateau was composed of lighter matter
than the lowlands to the southward. A similar result has been
obtained in the great bulge which forms the western half of the
United States. In other words, the pendulum indicates that those
elevated regions are nearly if not quite isostatic.
On the other hand, the observations of Mendenhall on Fujiyama,
in Japan, indicated a slight excess of mass, and a similar result would
seem to follow from Mr. Preston’s work in the Hawaiian Islands.
From the nature of the process by which volcanoes are built these
results are to be expected.
It would also seem natural to expect that the plumb-line would
give some indications upon this subject; but experience has shown
that most of the observed deflections of the plumb-line are inexpli-
cable. They occur where we would least expect them—upon broad
and level plains, where there is nothing to indicate any cause of
deflection. They are found on the tundras of Siberia and the monot-
onous expanse of British North America, where the surface of the
earth is but feebly diversified. In mountain regions they are often
conflicting and unintelligible, but along the sea coast the indications
are more systematic. On both the Atlantic and Pacific shores the
deflection of the plummet is almost invariably towards the ocean,
and is often of considerable amount; but it is along the shore that the
isostatic theory would lead us to look for just this deflection, for it
is along the margins of the continents that great bodies of sediment
accumulate; and so long as the earth possesses any noteworthy
degree of rigidity, enabling it to sustain in part the resulting defor-
mation of isostasy, so long must we expect to find these sediments
constituting an excess of mass whose attraction will make itself felt
upon the plummet.
The theory of isostasy thus briefly sketched out is essentially the
theory of Babbage and Herschel, propounded nearly a century ago.
sEpT. 19, 1925 DUTTON: PROBLEMS IN PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 365
It is, however, presented in a modified form, in a new dress, and in
greater detail. We may now proceed to deduce some important
consequences.
A little reflection must satisfy us that the secular erosion of the
land and the deposit of sediment along the shore lines constitute a
continuous disturbance of isostasy. The land is ever impoverished
of material—is continuously unloaded; the littoral is as continuously
loaded up. The resultant forces of gravitation tend to elevate the
eroded land and to depress the littoral to their respective isostatic
levels. Whether these forces shall become kinetic and produce actual
movement or flow will depend, first, upon their intensity; second,
upon the rigidity of the earth by which such movement js resisted.
Let us consider, then, the intensity of the forces:
The littoral belts upon which sediments are thrown down are co-
extensive in length with shores. Their widths are no doubt variable,
but must often reach a hundred miles or more with considerable
thickness, and are not wholly unimportant at much greater distances.
The thickness of the deposits may vary much, but may be propor-
tional to the time of accumulation, and here time is measured by the
geologic standard. The gross weight of such masses of sediment
must be vast indeed. If there is any viscous yielding at all the
problem becomes essentially that of the flowing solid, which is in a
large measure governed by hydrostatic laws. The intensity of the
force must have a maximum value proportional to the thickness which
lies above the isostatic level and also proportional to its specific
gravity. The area covered by the deposit enters as a quantity factor,
but not as an intensity factor. The greater the area, the greater
is the total potential energy of movement without any necessary
increase of the intensity of the force. This intensity, being propor-
tional to the thickness of the sediments, may become almost indefi-
nitely great or it may be small. Indeed, it may, and in fact does,
become negative when we apply the same statical theory to the move-
ment or stress of the denuded land areas. :
But whether these forces are sufficient to produce actual flow is
equally dependent upon the rigidity, or, as we may here term it,
the viscosity of the masses involved. We have already seen reason
to infer that the mean viscosity is not great, being far less than that
on the surface rocks alone. Beyond this rather vague statement I
perceive no way of assigning a value to the resistance to be over-
come.
It remains to inquire what is the resulting direction of motion.
366 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 15
The general answer is, towards the direction of least resistance. The
specific answer, which must express the direction of least resistance,
will, of course, turn upon the configuration of the deposition on the
one hand, and of denudation on the other, and also upon the maner
in which the rigidity or viscosity varies from place to place. Taking,
then, the case of a land area undergoing denudation, its detritus
carried to the sea and deposited in a heavy littoral belt, we may
regard the weight of each elementary part of the deposited mass as
a statical force acting upon a viscous support below. Assuming
that we could find a differential expression applicable to each and
every element of the mass and a corresponding one for the resistance
offered by the viscosity, the integration for the entire mass might
give us a series of equipotential surfaces within the mass. The resul-
tant foree at any point of any equipotential surface would be normal
to that surface. A similar construction may be applied to the ad-
joining denuded area, in which the defect of isostasy may be treated
as so much mass with a negative algebraic sign. The resultants
normal to the equipotential surfaces would, in this case, also have
the negative sign. The effective force tending to produce movement
would be the arithmetical sum of the normals or of a single resultant
compounded of the two normals. From this construction we may
derive a force which tends to push the loaded sea bottoms inward
upon the unloaded land horizontally.
This gives us a force of the precise kind that is wanted to explain
the origin of systematic plications. Long reflection and con-
siderable analysis have satisfied me that it is su‘icient both in in-
tensity and in amount unless we assume for the mean viscosity of
the superficial and subterranean masses involved in the movement
a much greater value than I am disposed to concede. The result
is a true viscous flow of the loaded littoral inward upon the unloaded
continent.
There may be in this proposition some degree of violence to a
certain mental prejudice against the idea that the rock-ribbed earth,
to which all our notions of stability and immovableness are attached,
can be made to flow. It may assist our efforts if we reflect upon the
motion of the great ice sheet which covers Greenland. Here the
masses involved are no greater than some masses of sediment. The
specific gravity of ice is only about one-third that of the rock masses.
The forces called into play to carry the glacier along horizontally
do not seem to differ greatly in intensity or amount from the de-
scribed forces, and the rigidity of the ice itself may not exceed the
mean rigidity of the rock masses beneath the littoral.
SEPT. 19, 1925 DUTTON: PROBLEMS IN PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 367
We may now proceed to inquire how this theory adjusts itself to
the actual facts. And, firstly, where do systematic plications occur?
(1) It is a remarkable fact that they occur among sedimentary
beds of great and variable thickness, which were rather rapidly
accumulated. They seldom, and, so far as I now recall, never occur
among strata which are of small thickness, slowly accumulated with
uniformity over large areas; and the theory requires that they should
occur in the heavy deposits or along their margins, and should have
their greatest development there, for the forces called into play
must be proportional to the masses involved.
(2) They occur in their systematic form along the ancient shore
lines. This is but another way of stating the preceding proposition.
It has its uses, however, for in so far as the continents have preserved
approximately their old shore lines since the ages in which the plica-
tions were formed there is a conspicuous parallelism of the axes of
plication to the neighboring coast. This is true of the Pacific coast
of the United States. As regards the Appalachian plications, we
have the remarkable fact that in paleozoic time the ocean lay to the
west of those vast bodies of folded strata instead of to the east of
them, as now. We must look to a paleozoic Atlantis for the origin
of a great portion of those sediments. The flow of the earth was
from west northwest to east southeast.
(3) The parallelism of the folds and their occurrence in long,
narrow belts formed by horizontal forces acting in one direction be-
come a consequence so obvious as to need no comment. It is in
strong contrast with the contractional theory, which gives a force
without any determinate direction.
(4) Another important fact is that these systematic flexures were
mainly formed at the times the sediments were deposited. This is
a fact of geologic observation. The contractional hypothesis gives
no determinate time for the formation of these flexures. It holds up
to us a process continuous through all geological time, proceeding
at a rate which diminishes but slowly as the ages roll by. These
plications, according to the isostatic theory, are the results of the
disturbance of isostasy, and follow immediately upon that distur-
bance or after it has reached a sufficient amount, and cease with
it. These folds, however, have been subject since their first forma-
tion to great erosion, which is also a disturbance of isostasy, and
thus the original plication may have been increased or modified
thereby.
The theory may also be applied in a most satisfactory manner
to the explanation of subordinate features associated with plication.
368 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 15
(5) One of the features of plication which has attracted great
attention and occasioned great perplexity to geologists is the so-called
fan-structure. This is very striking in the Alps, and has its counter-
part in the inclined folds of the Appalachians of Pennsylvania, where
the northwestern branches of the anticlines are steeper than the
southeastern branches. If we assume that as the rocks lie deeper
in the earth they are softened somewhat by the increasing heat, it
follows that in the flow of the mass the movement would be easier
and more rapid below than above. Thus a horizontal force arising
from this differential movement acts upon the inverted arches of
the synclines and carries their lower vertices forward in the direction
of motion.
Thus the general theory here proposed gives an explanation of the
origin of plications. It gives us a force acting in the direction re-
quired in the manner required, at the times and places required, and
one which has the intensity and amount required and no more. The
contractional theory gives us a force having neither direction nor
determinate mode of action, nor definite epoch of action. It gives us
a force acting with a far greater intensity than we require, but with
far less quantity. To provide a place for its action it must have
recourse to an arbitrary postulate assuming for no independent
reason the existence of areas of weakness in a supposed crust which
would have no raison d’etre except that they are necessary for the
salvation of the hypothesis.
Before closing this discussion it will be necessary to advert to
another one of the great problems of physical geology, viz., the cause
of general elevations and subsidences. I do so, not with the idea of
throwing light upon it, but to guard against a misapprehension which
would otherwise be sure to occur.
Geologic history discloses the fact that some great areas of the
earth’s surface which were in former ages below sea-level are now
thousands of feet above it. It also gives us reason to believe that
other areas now submerged were in other ages terra firma. Our
western mountain region at the beginning of cenozoic time was at
sea level. It is now, on an average, 6000 feet above it. The great
Himalayan plateau contains early cenozoic beds full of marine fossils
which now lie at altitudes of 14,000 feet or more. The whole North
American Continent has, since the close of the paleozoic, gained in
altitude. Now, it is sufficiently obvious that the theory of isostasy
offers no explanation of these permanent changes of level. On the
contrary, the very idea of isostasy means the conservation of pro-
sEpT. 19, 1925 DUTTON: PROBLEMS IN PHYSICAL GEOLOGY 369
files against lowering by denudation on the land and by deposition on
the sea bottom, provided no other cause intervenes to change those
levels. If, then, that theory be true, we must look for some inde-
pendent principle of causation which can gradually and permanently
change the profiles of the land and sea bottom. And [I hold this
cause to be an independent one. It has been much the habit for
geologists to attempt to explain the progressive elevation of plateaus
and mountain platforms, and also the foldings of the strata by one
and the same process. I hold the two processes to be distinct and
having no necessary relation to each other. There are plicated re-
gions which are little or not at all elevated, and there are elevated
regions which are not plicated. Plication may go on with little or
no elevation in one geologic age and the same region may be elevated
without much additional plication in a subsequent age. This is in a
large measure true of the Sierra Nevada platform, which was in-
tensely plicated during the paleozoic and early mesozoic, but which
received its present altitude in the late cenozoic.
Whatever may have been the cause of these great regional uplifts
it in no manner affects the law of isostasy. What the real nature
of the uplifting force may be is, to my mind, an entire mystery;
but I think we may discern at least one of its attributes, and that is
a gradual expansion, or a diminution of the density, of the subter-
ranean magmas. If the isostatic force is operative at all, this expan-
sion is a rigorous consequence; for whenever a rise of the land has
taken place one of two things has happened; the region affected has
either gained an accession of mass or a mere increase of volume with-
out increase of mass. We know of no cause which could either add
to the mass or diminish the density, yet one of the two must surely
have happened. But the difference of the two alternatives in respect
to consequences is immense. If the increase of volume of an ele-
vated area be due to an accession of matter, the plateau must be
hoisted against its own ri idity and also against the statical weight
of its entire mass lying above the isostatic level. But if the increase
of volume be due to a decrease of density there is no resistance to
be overcome in order to raise the surface. Hence I infer that the
cause which elevates the land involves an expansion of the underlying
magmas, and the cause which depresses it is a shrinkage of the magmas.
The nature of the process is, at present, a complete mystery.
370 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOU. 15, No. 15
BOTANY.—A new acid-soil onion from West Virginia. Epaar T.
Wuerry, Bureau of Chemistry.
The widespread Nodding Onion, Alliwn cernuum Roth, grows on
limestone ledges, in alluvial soil, and in other situations where the
soil is circumneutral in reaction. In the course of the writer’s
studies of the relations between soil reaction and the distribution of
native plants, a relative of that species was found to occur in south-
eastern West Virginia and adjoining Virginia, where the soil reaction
is often decidedly acid. In the usual keys this runs down to A.
cernuum, but close examination indicates it to be sufficiently different
to justify its recognition as a distinct species. In view of its pref-
erence for acid soil habitats, it may be named Allium oxyphilum.
Its features are as follows:
Allium oxyphilum sp. nov.
Plants occurring in scattered small colonies on rocky or gravelly slopes
over shale and sandstone, and in residual clay over limestone, the soil reac-
tion being more or less strongly acid. Bulb slender, tapering gradually
upward; coatings membranous, outermost gray, inner white to dull reddish
(Ridgway purplish vinaceous, 1/’’b). Leaves basal, 10-25 em. long, 2-7 mm.
wide, flat toward the tip, keeled and crescentic in cross-section toward the
base. Scape 25-45 em. long, 1-3 mm. thick, in cross section rhombic with
the acute angles prolonged, thus appearing two-edged. Umbel nodding in
anthesis, becoming erect in fruit, of 10 to 40 flowers, subtended by two
secarious bracts formed by the splitting of the spathe which surrounds the
buds. Pedicels slender and flexuous, 2-4 em. long. Flowers campanulate,
green at the base of the sepals, otherwise pure white or exceptionally pale
pink. Perianth segments oblong-ovate, obtuse, concave and somewhat
keeled, of two sorts, the sepals 4-5 mm. long, spreading, the petals 5-6 mm.
long, connivent. Stamens in two groups, those opposite the petals elongat-
ing and maturing a day or two earlier than those opposite the sepals. Cap-
sule at maturity triangular-top-shaped, about 4mm. high and 5 mm. broad;
the 6 narrowly deltoid crests grouped in pairs, and the members of each pair
lying practically in the same plane; crests 1.5-3 mm. long, slightly erose,
granular-margined. Blooming period from mid-July to late August.
As the type locality may be designated open woods along the road 2 km.
(1} miles) westnorthwest of Lillydale, Springfield Township, Monroe County,
West Virginia (Alderson quadrangle, U.S.G.8.). Type specimens collected
there by Messrs. W. A. Benfield, F. W. Gray and the writer August 12,
1924, have been deposited in the U. S. National Herbarium. The rock
there is limestone, but it is covered with dense residual clay of minimacid
reaction. The plant has been observed growing at a number of other places
in the Appalachian Valley and Appalachian Plateau provinces in south-
western Virginia and southeastern West Virginia, but so far as known is
endemic in an area not more than 100 km. (60 miles) in diameter. It is
particularly abundant in subacid to mediacid soil in open woods on shale
rock, growing in association with other endemics such as Trifolium vir-
ginicum Small and Pseudotaenidia montana Mackenzie. It has been found
to grow well in cultivation, and should make a desirable addition to any rock
SEPT. 19, 1925 WHERRY: NEW. ACID-SOIL ONION 371
garden. When planted in neutral soil it produees few viable seeds, and so
does not spread as rapidly as do some species of Allium. It may be assigned
the common name of Acid-soil Onion. — ;
The most striking differences between this new species and A. cernwum,
evident in field and herbarium alike, lie in the flower color and the length
of the pedicels. In addition, the race of A. cernuwmn which grows in the same
general region has the petals and sepals less differentiated, the stamens matur-
ing more nearly together, and the crests on the capsule shorter, more broadly
deltoid, and with more markedly erose and notched margins, while the
Fig. 1.—Allium oxyphilum, sp. nov. Lillydale, West Virginia
members of the pairs lie at considerable angles with one another instead of
being essentially coplanar. It also blooms two to three weeks earlier than
A. oxyphilum, all of these divergences remaining constant when the two
are cultivated side by side. Fresh material of western races of A. cernwwm
or of A. allegheniense Small have not been available for comparison; de-
scriptions and herbarium specimens indicate that they may approach the
new species in having distinct sepals and petals, but not in the other re-
spects enumerated.
In order to complete the characterization of Allium oxyphilum as a
distinct species, two photographs of it by the writer are here reproduced.
372 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
The first (Fig. 1), taken at the type locality, brings out the general aspect of
the plant, which is sufficiently different from that of A. cernuwm to enable the
two to be distinguished at a distance, or from a moving vehicle; the promi-
nent divided leaves in the background are those of Delphinium exaltatum
Fig. 2.—Aldium oxyphilum, sp. noy. In cultivation, Washington, D.C.
YL } )
Ait. The second (Fig. 2), taken in the writer’s garden in mid-August, 1925,
shows the long flexuous pedicels, the separation of the perianth segments into
two groups, and even the dimorphism of the stamens, in that only three of
these are in evidence in any one flower, the other set being still included in
the corolla or withered away.
sEpT. 19, 1925 ALLEN: CELLS OF THE VISCERAL TRACT 373
MAMMOLOGY.—Localization of the cells of the descending visceral
tract in the cst and guinea-pig (preliminary communication).
Wiiu1am F. Auten, Department of Anatomy, University of
Oregon Medical School, Portland, Oregon.
As a result of a study of several Nissl-stained brain stems of cats
and guinea-pigs in which the spinal cords had been hemisected, it
was found that practically all of the cells in the nucleus commissuralis
and in the nucleus tractus solitariz were altered cells. That is, these
cells had undergone Nissl degeneration or chromatolysis. Many
of these cells were in an advanced stage of degeneration, exhibiting
considerable vacuolation and disintegration. It is of interest to
record that no altered cells are present in the cephalic and middle
portions of the nucleus tractus solitarit, an area which was described
in a previous paper, as showing chromatolytic cells after severing
the lemniscus medialis of the opposite side in the mid-brain region.
Furthermore, to note that the area portraying degenerate cells in
the caudal part of the nucleus tractus solitarii and in the nucleus
commissuralis in these experiments, is identical to the area that
showed no chromatolytic cells in the previous work,! where the
lemniscus medialis was severed. It is obvious that the degenerated
cells in these experiments, belong to the nucleus tractus solitarti and
the nucleus commissuralis, and not to some adjacent nucleus, for the
reason that they were shown in a still earlier paper? to occupy iden-
tically the same sensory regions that were supplied by degenerated
fibers from the tractus solitarius, brought about through severance
of the sensory root fibers of the VII, IV, and X cranial nerves.
Since some experiments in which the hemisection of the spinal
cord extended over to the opposite side, to include the ventral column
of that side, demonstrated a degeneration of the cells of both com-
missural nuclei and the caudal ends of both solitary tract nuclei, it
can be concluded that the descending fibers arising from these, nu-
clei on one side, cross to the opposite side as internal arcuate fibers,
and descend with the ventral cortico-spinal fibers of the opposite
side.
1Allen, W. F. Origin and destination of the secondary visceral fibers in the guinea-
pig. Jour. Comp. Neur., 35: 275-311. 1923.
2 Allen, W. F. Origin and distribution of the tractus solitarius in the guinea pig.
Jour. Comp. Neur., 35: 171-204. 1923.
374 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED
SOCIETIES
THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY
679TH MEETING
The 679th meeting was held April 11, 1925, at 8:00 p.m. in the new as-
sembly hall of the Cosmos Club, with President RoHwer in the chair and
73 persons present.
Miss Katuerine Stuarr exhibited specimens of solitary bees which
have been very abundant in Oxford, N. C., for two successive springs. They
raise little red nest domes of clay and have ruined many lawns. ‘The speci-
mens have been identified by Mr. Ronwer as Andrena sp.
M. K. Brapy described the discovery of a nest of Cryptotis parva con-
taining about 20 young.
Dr. A. E. Imms, of Rothamsted Experiment Station, introduced by Dr.
L. O. Howarp, described the history of the Rothamsted Experiment Station.
J. E. Lawns, who had discovered the value of superphosphate as a fertilizer
and made considerable money from its exploitation, devoted the proceeds
to study of agricultural problems. He was associated with the chemist
Henry Giupert. The Station was established in 18438, and work was done
in a barn. In 1854, with the aid of subscriptions, the first real laboratory
was built. A new laboratory was built in 1919, and another since. The
station is supported with the aid of a government grant, and is devoted to
the study of soil science in the widest sense.
The speaker described his own work on the reproduction and migration
of Aphis rumicis. The whole experimental stock was bred from one agamic
female. It is found that many more young are produced with increased
illumination. The broadbean is attacked much more than its supposed
ancestor, Vicia narbonensis.
W. F. Tuompson, introduced by Lewis Rapcuirre, spoke briefly on the
treaty between Canada and the United States for the protection of the
halibut.
Program: L. O. Howarp, Something about estimates of loss through insect
damage.—The speaker discussed the past loss to agriculture due to the de-
predation of insects. Marlatt’s estimate is that the damage done in 1919
was $2,200,000,000. The subject is a very complicated one. The difference
in the value of the product raised, due to a raise in price caused by reduced
quantity, is probably offset by secondary losses due to reduction in the
amount of manufacturing, as in milling, cotton manufacturing, etc. The
loss from diseased insects, stored product insects, and insects feeding on
cloths is vast but extremely difficult to estimate in figures. The loss from
the cotton boll weevil has been estimated at $524,000,000 in one year. Very
much damage is also done by post and powder beetles. In conclusion the
speaker showed a moving picture illustrating some of the principal insects
damaging wood and their work.
Vernon Battery, Making pets of insect-eating bats —The speaker exhibited
a large brown bat which has been kept as a pet in his house for over a month.
It makes its home under an Indian basket on the wall and flies about freely
at night. It has learned to go to one place to be fed and watered, drinks
eagerly from a spoon or from drops on the finger tip, and eats a great variety
of insects, as well as raw or cooked meat, fish, lobster and ice cream. It
SEPT. 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY 375
refuses slugs, angleworms, ants, rough centipedes and one kind of soft beetle.
Contrary to ordinary belief bats are exceptionally free from parasites, are
harmless, cleanly, intelligent and very useful animals and do not get in
ladies’ hair. More interesting house pets would be hard to find.
680TH MEETING
The 680th meeting was held in the new assembly hall of the Cosmos Club
April 25, 1925, at 8 p.m., with President RoHweEr in the chairand 42 persons
present. New members elected: Wint1am P. Harris, Jr., Dorotuy H.
PorENOE, WILSON PopPENOE (life member).
A. A. Doouitrie exhibited an ostrich egg from the Zoo which he had
boiled and cross-sectioned. The yolk showed concentric lines. The weight
of the egg was 51 oz. He also described a method of water-proofing labels
for fluid specimens by infiltrating the labels with paraffin, used either melted
or as a solution in xylol.
S. F. Buaxe described a curious family of cats seen in the city. The
mother is black, with a slight white mark on the throat. Hertwokittens
are pure white, and in each the right eye is green and the left bright blue.
L. N. HorrMann reported the capture of a young specimen of Clemmys
muhlenbergizt near Stubblefield Falls, Virginia, which has been identified
by Dr. L. StesNecer. It was kept through the summer, but lost sight of,
and was later found dead in the yard. This is the first record for this species
in the vicinity of Washington.
S. A. Rouwer reported since the last meeting, further lots of bees (And-
rena sp.) had been received from northern Virginia and from New Jersey.
In both localities the same habit of damaging lawns by nest building was
reported.
Program: Smita Rey, Forest fires and wild life-——The speaker described
the abundant animal and plant life of a large area in northern Idaho and
western Montana. The effect of extensive forest fires in this area in the
dry year 1910 was then discussed. Not only were large numbers of the
larger game animals, such as elk, deer, and bear, destroyed, but innumerable
small animals and birds. The heat was so intense that great numbers of
fish were killed even in rapidly flowing mountain streams. The indirect
damage to wild life, through destruction of cover and food supply, was far-
reaching but impossible to measure accurately. The conditions described
in this area are typical of the damage done by fires in the great forested re-
gions of the western States.
Witson Popenog, Peruvian agriculture of Pre-Columbian days (Illustrated).
—Among the civilized peoples of Pre-Colombian America, the Maya of
Guatemala and Yucatan excelled in the development of a written language
and of a highly intricate and exact calendar system; the Aztec of Mexico in
the arts of warfare; and the Peruvians in agriculture, in weaving, and in
social organization.
The agriculture of the ancient Peruvians was noteworthy in several
respects. On the rocky slopes of the high Andes they built series upon
series of stone terraces, filled them with rich alluvium from the fertile valleys
below, and irrigated them artificially from the mountain streams above.
They brought many wild food plants into domestication and through con-
scious or unconscious selection carried some of them to a high degree of agri-
cultural perfection, and they understood the use of artificial fertilizers.
Their achievements are all the more remarkable when it is recalled that
they were practically without metal implements; that they had no draft
376 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
animals worthy of the name; and that they never developed a written lan-
guage with which to pass on the accumulated information of generations.
Other countries have profited greatly in modern times, through the intro-
duction of some of the plants first domesticated by the ancient Peruvians.
The potato is a food crop of major importance in Europe and North America,
while the tomato and the peanut are extensively grown in many regions.
(Author’s abstract.)
8. F. Buaxn, Recording Secretary.
THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
370TH MEETING
The 370th meeting of the Entomological Society was held December 4,
1924, at the National Museum, with President Bovine in the chair and 34
persons present.
Officers elected for 1925 were: President, R. A. CusHMaAN; First vice-
president, J. M. Aupricu; Second vice-president, J. A. Hysuop; Editor, Carn
Henrico; Recording secretary, C. T. GreENE; Corresponding Secretary-
Treasurer, S. A. Rouwer; Executive-Committee; A. N. CaupEuu, W. R.
Watton, J. E. Grar; Vice- president of the AcADEMY, S. A. Ronwer.
Program: Wm. Scravs: Mimicry and the Entomological Society of Lon-
don. The speaker read abstracts from the proceedings of the Society’s
meetings on the subject of mimicry. Many of the theories held by mem-
bers of the society the speaker considered far-fetched. The so-called mime-
tic groups of butterflies, which vary according to distribution, all the species
showing the same change under similar conditions, simply represent a de-
velopment along parallel lines. Coloration is aggressive rather than pro-
tective. All these species are devoured, the Heterocera being especially
attractive to birds.
R. C. SHANNON discussed mimicry in the Syrphidae. Dr. W. M. Mann
spoke of mimicry among the army ants, calling attention to the numerous
species of beetles which greatly resemble these ants, and live in their nests.
Notes and Discussion: M. C. Lane spoke of the study of wire worms in
the State of Washington. Dr. Mann gave an account of this recent trip
to Europe, in the course of which he visisted museums in Spain, Portugal,
Paris, Genoa, Switzerland, Leiden, and England.
371SsT MEETING
The 371st meeting was held January 8, 1925, at the National Museum,
with President CusHMAN in the chair and 46 persons present.
The Editor reported that the last volume of the Proceedings contained
56 articles, 54 of which were systematic papers, and 235 pages.
The following were elected to membership in the Society: Henry Goon,
Alabama Polytechnic Institute; Miss Gracrk H. Griswoup, Cornell Uni-
versity; Donatp T. Ricn, Ithaca, New York.
Dr. A. G. Bovine was elected to represent the Entomological Society as
Vice-president of the Academy, in place of Mr. Ronwenr, resigned.
Presidential Address by Dr. A. G. Bévine: A summer trip in Iceland
southeast of Vatna-Jékul. The paper was illustrated by several charts.
Fritz JOHANSEN, Ottawa: The speaker dealt with the explorations and
scientific work carried out by the Canadian Arctic expeditions of 1913-
1918, under Stefansson. Sailing from Vancouver Island in 1913 the expedi-
tion separated into a northern and a southern party. The former, in the
SEPT. 19, 1925 PROCEEDINGS: THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY 377
“‘Karluk,” was frozen into the ice north of Alaska, and carried over to north-
east of Wrangle Island, where the ship went down in January 1914, and its
company marooned, until the following summer.
The southern party wintered in Camden Bay, close to the boundary line
between Alaska and Yukon, from September 1913 to July 1914; then sailed
to new winter quarters in Dolphine and Union Straits, where it remained
until July 1916, examining the copper-bearing rocks and studying the Eski-
mos, and the flora and fauna of this area.
The explorations of the new northern party in 1915-1917, the discovery
of new islands north of the western part of the Canadian Arctic Archipelago,
and Storkersen’s eight months’ drift with the ice north of Alaska in 1918,
were all recounted.
The speaker emphasized the necessity for entomological collecting on
the Alaskan Arctic Coast between Bering Strait and Point Barrow, in order
to connect up the entomological work that has been done in southern Alaska
with the detailed investigations made by this Canadian expedition, east of
Point Barrow, where almost 100 new species and many biological data were
obtained.
372D MEETING
The 372d meeting was held February 5th, 1925, at New National Museum
with President CusHMAN in the chair and 37 persons present.
Resolutions on the death of Colonel THomas L. Casry were adopted.
Austin H. Ciark was elected a member of the Society.
Program: R. E. Snoperass: Senses, and the morphology of the sense
organs of insects.
The structure of the sense organs must be taken into consideration in any
study of insect senses. A knowledge of the senses of insects is essential
for general studies of insect tropisms and ecology; and extend research in
those fields, by furnishing a better understanding of the nature of insects
as living things, is most likely to lead to the development of new methods of
control, as well as to a better appreciation of old methods of control of in-
jurious species, and of the propagation of beneficial species.
The sense organs of insects were discussed under the heads of (1) hair-
like organs, (2) campaniform organs, (3) plate organs, (4) the organ of
Johnston, (5) chordotonal organs, (6) eyes.
This paper was discussed by Messrs. McINpoo and RoHWER.
373D MEETING
The 373d meeting was held March 5, 1925, at the National Museum,
with President CusHMAN in the chair and 39 persons present.
The Secretary read a communication from the Russian Bureau of Infor-
mation in Washington expressing the desire that more cordial and intimate
relations be established between scientists in the United States and those
in the Union of Soviet Republics. The Bureau offered to assist in the
exchange of literature between scientists of the two countries.
Resolutions on the death of Paut Reverr Myers were adopted.
Program: Entomological taronomy (in three parts): (1). From an eco-
nomic aspect by A.C. Baxer; (2) from an educational aspect by E. D. Batt;
(3) from a taxonomic aspect by 8. A. RoHwErR.
Dr. Batt stated that true taxonomy is an expression of the actual rela-
tionship of existing forms of life to each other. It is an interpretation of
the path of evolution and as such is one of the most profoundly interesting
and profitable fields of biological research. Evolution takes place in all
378 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
lines—in structure, function and habit. It is only when we consider all of
the factors in their relations to each other that we arrive at a true concept
of the path. If text-books of entomology were based on a truly evolutionary
taxonomy it would be much easier for the student to obtain a ground work
in the fundamentals of entomological science. In many cases the accuracy
of taxonomic interpretations can be checked, as in the parallel evolution of
the mammals and their external and internal parasites; also in the case of
groups of insects and their internal parasites. The independent working
out of these phylogenies has shown so close an agreement as to make it
practically certain that they are accurate. This type of taxonomic studies
is of the highest educational value, and should be a part of the life work of
a much larger number of entomologists.
Notes and Discussion: Dr. J. M. ALpricH announced that Colonel THomas
L. Casry had bequeathed his collection of beetles and his extensive library
on the order to the National Museum. This is the largest gift of insects
ever received by the Museum, containing, as estimated, the types of more
than five thousand species.
R. C. SHANNON spoke of the need of a name which would be applicable to
all Arthropoda exclusive of the Crustacea. He said this need is particularly
felt in Medical Entomology where there is frequent need to refer to all of
the poisonous, bloodsucking, disease-carrying, and parasitic (on vertebrate
hosts) Arthropods as a single group. In view of the fact that a common
well-known name is highly desirable and especially one that would be cor-
rectly applicable to all of the members of the group, he wished to propose
the use of the name insect for this purpose. The use of the name in this
sense would be in keeping with the definition of the word and in its frequent
popular application. If this were done the phylum Arthropoda would be
accordingly divided into two subphyla, one the Crustacea and the other the
Insecta. The true insects would then be called the Insecta, sensu stricto,
or by the other name for the Insects, the Hexapoda.
Mr. Hernricu objected to Mr. SHANNON’s change of the definition of the
word insect. He said that definition of words should be more precise, and
urged adherence to the present definition of the word insect.
Mr. Rouwer said that a single common term to cover all of the animals
usually treated by entomology was desirable; he thought that the use of
the word insect could well be expanded so as to include all of them, and that
for technical use entomologists might use the word hexapod instead of insect
and the word herapoda instead of the word “‘insecta.”’
The subject was further discussed by Messrs. Howarp, Hystop, Mann,
Scuaus, and THONE.
Mr. Rouwer exhibited six lantern slides showing nests of three different
species of social wasps. One of these was of Vespa carolina, the photograph
of the nest being made from specimens from Orlando, Florida. He pointed
out the similarity between the underground nest and the aerial nest of the
bald-faced hornet. Another nest illustrated was that of Polistes versicolor,
an ordinary polistine. The third nest was that of Polistes goeldiz, which
is composed of two parallel cells arranged so as to form a long whip-like
nest, the dorsal part being dark brown in color, the ventral being white, thus
giving the nest the appearance of a snake. For this reason the natives of
South and Central America commonly call this nest the snake nest.
374TH MEETING
The 374th meeting was held April 2, 1925, at the New National Museum,
with President CusHMAN in the chair and 33 persons present.
sepr. 19, 1925 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 379
Program: W. M. Mann: An entomological journey across Lower California.
Notes and Discussion: E. A. Back gave an informal talk on Some fabric
pests. He exhibited numerous specimens of fabrics, books, and a chair,
all of which were badly damaged by insects.
R. C. SHannon exhibited material of a species of botfly (Cuterebra) which
infests the howling monkeys of tropical America. He also showed a piece
of the hide of a howling monkey, collected by J. L. Barr in Darien, Panama,
which is literally riddled by the bot larvae. A third exhibit consisted of
two adult specimens of Cuterebra reared from the red howler of British
Guiana. The primate host of this botfly is a very unusual one as Cuterebra
is addicted to the use of rodents and opossums for hosts.
Dr. Ewrne exhibited a tree frog (Hyla arenicolor) from Southern California,
which had several specimens of a new species of mites of Trombicula.
375TH MEETING
The 375th meeting was held at the National Museum May zB ae with
President Cusu@an in the chair and 42 persons present. CARL
DRAKE was elected a member of the Society.
Program: L. O. Howarp: Notes on Albert Koebele. An outline of the
career of this distinguished entomologist, who died in December 1924, was
given by the speaker.
E. R. Sasscer: Inspection by the Federal Horticultural Board.
Notes and Discussions: S. A. Ronwer reported the occurrence of Euro-
pean sawfly larvae boring in cherries in the United States. R.A. SHANNON
exhibited a species of Microdon from Panama which possesses the unusual
character of having the third antennal joint divided.! This species may
prove to be the adult of the extraordinary larvae described recently from
Panama by Professor WHEELER.
Cuas. T. Greene, Recording Secretary.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
On August 4, 1925, after a long illness, Professor Jay Backus WoopWwoRTH
of the Department of Geology and Geography at Harvard University and
a member of the AcapEMy, passed away in the sixty-first year of his age.
He had been connected with the University since the year 1890. After
serving as instructor in geology, he was promoted to an assistant professor-
ship in 1901 and to an associate professorship in 1912. Many thousands
of students have been introduced to the science of geology by Professor
Woodworth. He served the University, not only as an enthusiastic and
respected teacher but also as an administrator, serving on many committees
and for some years as Chairman of the Department. Throughout most of
his professional career he was a member of the United States Geological
Survey and published many valuable memoirs under the auspices of that
organization. Another of his leading contributions to science was a pro-
longed exploration in the geology of Brazil and other parts of South America.
This expedition was financed by the Shaler Memorial fund, which is con-
trolled by the Division of Geology at Harvard. It was appropriate that
Professor Woodworth could have been the first investigator to be aided
by this fund for he was the trusted friend of his master, Professor Nathan-
iel Shaler, who organized the present department of geology and geography
at the University. As a labor of love, Professor Woodworth undertook the
1See this JouRNAL, 15: 211. 1925.
380 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 15
rather arduous task of organizing and continuously administering the Har-
vard Seismographic Station, which has been in continuous operation since
the year 1908. Professor Woodworth was one of the American pioneers in
the scientific study of earthquakes and the records from his station have
been among those most prized by the seismological stations of the whole
world. This is especially on account of the accurate timing of the records.
It is important to note that Professor Woodworth steadily held the opinion
that according to the testimony of both human history and the geological
facts in hand, the city of Boston is not in serious danger from earthquake
shocks. Like all other scientific students of New England earthquakes,
he recognized that New England is sure to have small shocks at irregular
intervals but he strongly deprecated the effort now being made in certain
quarters to lead the public to the opinion that facts of science support
the claim of considerable danger to Boston, and New England in general,
from earthquakes. Professor Woodworth’s other chief researches have been
in the field of glacial geology, where he was the recognized authority; and
in the structural geology of New England, particularly Massachusetts.
Professor Woodworth has served for some years on the National Research
Council, his most important contribution to the work of that Council per-
haps, being his service as Chairman of the Committee on the use of seismo-
graphs in war, 1917-18. He was active in the American Association for
the Advancement of Science and in the administration of the Geological
Society of America, of which he has long been a fellow. He was a member
of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences; past president of the Seis-
mological Society of America; a member of the Washington Academy of
Sciences, of the American Geophysical Union, the Meteorological Society of
America, Boston Society of Natural History, and other societies.
He is survived by a daughter, Miss Ethel Woodworth.
Professor Woodworth was born at Newfield, New York, the son of the
Reverend Allen Beach Woodworth.
Dr. 8. 8. Apams received the honorary degree L.L.D. from Georgetown
University at the annual commencement exercises this year.
Messrs. ARTHUR L. Day and E. T. ALLEN of the Geophysical Laboratory,
Carnegie Institution of Washington, are making a reconnaissance of the
hot springs and geysers of the Yellowstone National Park.
E. F. Burcuarp of the U. 8. Geological Survey has been granted four
months leave of absence to examine iron ore deposits for the Argentine
government.
C. Wuitman Cross and Wiiu1amM H. Datt, senior geologists, Joun H.
RENsHAW, well-known maker of artistic shaded relief maps for the Topo-
graphic Branch and Grorce M. Woon, veteran editor, all of the U. 8.
Geological Survey, were retired from active service on July 1 on account
of age.
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page
if sent to the editors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month.
ORIGINAL PAPERS ©
Durros, 4) CONE ets WAIT, Tp ERR oe ie
Botany.—A new acid-soil onion from West Virgin. Epaar T. Pe
Mammalogy.—Localization of the cells of the descending viscers
and guinea-pig. Witu1am F, ALuENn...... te eee ees
Prockepinas Ha ehh
The Biblogical:Societiy. fo... Asa Wats wien wee tesa lan ele Ble He blero
The Entomological Society... 06. ......s. sees eeeeeeeeeeneesees
Screntiric Notes anD NEWS... 2... .0. cece elec ute cess cee
\
Corresponding Secretary Francis B. Seek Bureau of Stan
Vol. 15 OcToBER 4, 1925 No. 16
thn>
oo imOllig;, ‘p
#
\ %
JOURNAL acT 9 192
Pas)
OF THE MO ey We
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
: BOARD OF EDITORS
E.P. Kinup D. F, Hewerr S. J. Maucsaiy
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A. RonwEr
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GotpMan G. W. Srost
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Griaes J. R. SwaANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHrrs
| CHEMICAL SOCIETY
: PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
: EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
= BY THE
f WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anp GuILrorp AVES.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
ee % ond Clase Matter, bist be ee ‘at pie post-office a ives ee a nee the
A ugust Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 8, 1917. Authorized on Saty 8, 1918
*
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JouRNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
present a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes: ~
(1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALis issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond to calendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. *
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. '
Tilustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof.—tIn order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50.
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. \
The rate of Subscription per volume 28... 2.60 o csp ccc ccunscaicevesouesmiace $6.00*
Semi-monthly! numbers... oo) 5 ced boise ome nities deen etelotic seedy tates iets Sane aarn 25
Monthly mumbers iis 3 ois 'o ie cers open s soe oveialgs wynia aulewrle siete dial taleteloke isle area -50
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges.—The Journau does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Von. 15 OcroBER 4, 1925 No. 16
GEOLOGY :—Review of Dr. Giinther Schlesinger’s paper on Mastodons.
Outver P. Hay. Carnegie Institution of Washington.
In a paper published! jin 1912 Dr. Giinther Schlesinger presented
a classification of the mastodons, proceeding on the theory that they
all belonged to one genus, but that subgenera were indicated. He
expressed his indebtedness to a friend for instruction in the laws of
nomenclature and of priority; and this instruction led him to adopt
for all mastodons Cope’s generic name Tetrabelodon. It rendered
him also competent to join in a protest? against the strict application
of the law of priority. Inasmuch as in that paper under his subgeneric
names, chlesinger cited species only as examples, not choosing types,
consideration of these subgenera will be passed.
In his recently published? essay Schlesinger presents a similar scheme
of classification, but with some changes. He disavows his former
choice of Tetrabelodon on the ground that its use was not, after all, in
accordance with the rules of nomenclature, and he now places the
generic primacy on Mastodon. He also selected a type species for each
of his subgenera.
In choosing Mastodon as the generic name Schlesinger grants that
there is no valid reason why Mammut should not be employed; but
he rejects it on the ground that, being used in German literature as a
name for the Siberian elephant, confusion would result. For the
same reason, one may think, our modern Greek zoologists and paleon-
tologists might object to the use of Hipparion for a three-toed horse,
whereas they apply it to the existing one-toed equine; also to the use
of Corydalus for a neuropterus insect, whereas it is the modern Greek
word for the sky-lark. .
1 Jahrb. geolog. Reichsanst. Wien, 62: 135.
# Ziegler, Zool. Anz., 33: 268.
? Denkschr. naturh. Staatsmus.,1: 1. 1921.
381
382 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 16
Mammut, however, is not wholly shorn of authority. It is simply
required to take a less conspicuous seat and is there permitted to
preside over Mastodon americanus and its near kin. Being retained
in a somewhat obscure position, it is less likely to be mistaken for an
elephant. Tetrabelodon likewise has suffered a reduction in rank and
now represents only Mastodon pygmaeus Depéret. Inasmuch as
M. pygmaeus had not been heard of by Cope when he established
Tetrabelodon, much less included under the name, it cannot be made the
type of this genus. Besides, Cope expressly stated that the type of
Tetrabelodon is T. angustidens.
It may be well to point out here again, as the writer has already
done,‘ that the oldest generic name for angustidens, if withdrawn from
Mastodon, is Gomphotherium; that the oldest specific name is lepto-
don;> and that hence the species is properly to be known as Gompho-
therium leptodon Fischer de Waldheim; and the name will, in this paper,
be used for the species. In Schlesinger’s scheme this species is recog-
nized as the type of Vacek’s genus Bunolophodon. Already, in 1918,
Dr. W. D. Matthew® had made angustidens the lectotype of this genus;
a lucky stroke, inasmuch as Bunolophodon became thereby a synonym
of Tetrabelodon, therefore of Gomphotherium, and hence apparently
permanently side-tracked.
For Mastodon arvernensis Dr. Schlesinger proposes a new subgenus
Dibunodon. This appears superfluous, however, inasmuch as Anan-
cus presents claims for the honor. This name was first used in 1854
by Aymard’ for a mastodon called Anancus macroplus, but there was
no description, and the name was a dead letter. The writer has
recently explained’ the status of this name. Suffice it to say that if
Mastodon arvernensis requires a generic or subgeneric name Anancus
must be used, credited to Lartet, 1859. Moreover, it must include
all other mastodons not withdrawn on valid generic characters.
For the type of Cope’s genus Dibelodon Schlesinger proposes Mas-
todon humboldtii, but Cope at the time of establishing this genus
made Leidy’s M. shepardi the type. Unless it can be shown that this
species is a synonym of M. humboldtii, which would appear to be a
task beset with difficulties, Schlesinger’s proposal will hardly be
4 Pan-Amer. Geol. 39: 109. 1923.
5 Op. cit., p. 112.
§ Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 38: 200. 1918.
7 Ann. Soc. Agric. Sci. du Puy, 19: 597. 1854.
8 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., vol. 66, art. 35, p. 4, 1925.
OCTOBER 4, 1925 HAY: SCHLESINGER ON MASTODONS 383
accepted by people who have any regard for established rules of
nomenclature. The genus Dibelodon was based on a tusk and a tooth,
but nobody can at present be certain that these belonged to the same
species or even genus, and the probability appears’ to be that there
were long tusks in the lower jaw. This, however, does not necessarily
put the species in the genus Gomphotherium, as was wrongly concluded
by the present writer on the page quoted.
Schlesinger’s use of Mastodon tapiroides as a type of Zygolophodon
appears to be legitimate. It seems to have been selected by Matthew”
in 1918. Schlesinger makes Mastodon. pentelici the type of his Choero-
lophodon. The animal appears really to belong to a distinct genus, not
so much on account of its teeth, perhaps, as of its remarkable skull.
Without any desire to question Dr. Schlesinger’s knowledge of pro-
boscideans, it seems necessary to say that that author has no proper
conception of the significance of a genotype. When once properly
chosen and announced, it should be inseparably joined to its genus, but
the writer here reviewed evidently regards it as possible to detach
that species and attach it as type to any other genus that may suit his
wishes. If he does not so regard a genotype, how can he make pyg-
maeus the type of Tetrabelodon when Cope said Cuvier’s angustidens
was to be taken as the type? Practices of this kind tend to produce
confusion in biological nomenclature.
In pursuing his theme Dr. Schlesinger pays his respects to some of
the primitive mastodons of America. One finds it difficult to deter-
mine what he has in mind when he writes about Mastodon shepardi.
When he mentions W. obscurus he evidently refers to the tooth
described by Leidy from California, first as M. shepardi, later as
M. obscurus. These are different species, one found on the eastern
border of the continent; the other, on the western. He likewise makes
the mistake of attributing Cope’s type of M. productum (= Gompho-
therium productum) to Mexico, instead of New Mexico.
It might be regarded as improbable that, starting at any point
between France and New Mexico, any species of proboscidean would
not in its journey to the two countries undergo specific modifications.
Among living mammals it is rare to find the same species in southern
Europe and the southern United States. Schlesinger finds it other-
3 Hay, O. P., Pan-Amer. Geol., 39: 111. 1923.
10 Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 38: 200. 1918.
384 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 16
wise. He assures us that he cannot distinguish Cope’s Gomphotherium
productum from G. leptodon “forma typica,’”’ and that Leidy’s M.
obscurus represents “forma subtapiroidea.”’
Dr. Schlesinger discovers much to complain of in Cope’s description
of G. productum. He finds fault with Cope’s expression regarding the
cross-section of the tusk. Cope quoted Falconer’s statement that
the symphyseal tusks of Gomphotherium leptodon frequently have a
channel on the superior and inner sides and then he wrote: “In M.
productus the tusk is without channel.’’ Schlesinger says that this is
an error of Cope’s; but he himself is wrong in that he supposes that
Cope referred to the fine longitudinal channeling which the ivory
shows when the smooth outer layer is removed. Cope, however, had
in mind the broad shallow channel or groove which is present on the
upper surface of the lower tusk of Gomphotherium leptodon. If
Schlesinger’s section is compared with that figured by Cope" it will
be seen that he was correct and that the tusks described by him are
quite different in section from those figured by Schlesinger. That
Cope observed what Schlesinger calls “kannelierung” is shown by
Cope’s statement: ‘“The dentine is longitudinally, weakly, closely
striate. It is usually covered by a thin layer of cementum.”
Schlesinger questions Cope’s statement that the symphysis of his
G. productum was shorter than that of G. leptodon. In Cope’s figure,”
as noted by Schlesinger, it is seen that a part of the bone is restored in
plaster, and Schlesinger concludes that the jaw has been wrongly
restored and was originally much longer. But Schlesinger could not
see whether there was natural contact between the two parts on the
lower side or in the interior. Why, then, his confident conclusion?
As a matter of fact, the present writer finds nowhere actual contact
superficially between the proximal and the distal halves of the sym-
physis. What is hidden beneath the surface is unknown. Never-
theless, the conformation of the parts indicates that no important gap
was closed up. The concave and the convex surfaces of the basal
portion of the symphysis pass in a natural way into the corresponding
surfaces of the anterior part. At least, nobody has the right to say
positively that the symphysis has, in the middle of the length, been
artificially shortened. Furthermore, if Schlesinger means to say that
the front end of the symphysis as figured by Cope is not the natural
termination, he is wholly mistaken. The bone ends as represented.
Schlesinger likewise attacks the position of the two lower tusks of
Cope’s specimen and states that these must have been, in life, closely
11 Wheeler, U. S. Geogr. Sur. west 100th merid., vol. VI, pl. LXX, fig. 3.
12 Op. cit., pl. LXX, figs. 1-3.
OCTOBER 4, 1925 HAY: SCHLESINGER ON MASTODONS 385
applied, one against the other, as they are in G. leptodon; whereas in the
restoration they stand apart about 15 mm. This is another error.
The two teeth are separated by 12 mm. of bone thoroughly fossilized
and never disturbed, and the symphysis has its natural width, 120 mm.
Again, there is nothing either in the description or in the restoration
of the specimen to indicate that Cope did not know that the lower
incisors extend far back into the jaw. When he fitted the two parts
of the symphysis together he could not help seeing this. Besides,
on his page 307, Cope speaks of the longitudinal concavity on the
underside of the beak “which occupies the space between the alveolar
ridges of the enclosed tusks.”
In the U. 8. National Museum is the lower jaw which Leidy
described in 1873. In this jaw are both lower tusks, and these have
exactly the same oval section as those of Cope’s type. Cope was aware
of Leidy’s specimen and the description, and knew, therefore, that the
tusks extended backward to near the hinder end of the symphysis.
One tusk is exposed nearly its whole length. It must be said further
that throughout their length these tusks are separated by a septum of
bone 14 mm. thick.
That the symphyseal portion of the jaw of G. productuwm is not the
same as in G. leptodon is shown by the proportions of the parts. In
G. leptodon the anterior mental foramen is placed much farther for-
ward than in G. productum, as shown both in Cope’s and Leidy’s
specimens. According to Schlesinger’s restoration of the lower jaw
of G. leptodon, the greatest width near the distal end is only 0.265 of
the distance from the distal end to the anterior mental foramen; in
Cope’s type the corresponding value is very close to 0.5; in the sym-
physis described and figured by Leidy the value is close to 0.4. A
computation based on Leidy’s specimen shows that Cope’s type was
not shortened more than 25 or 30 mm., if at all. The difference may
be due to individual or sexual variation. In other respects the sym-
physeal portion of the jaw of Gomphotherium productum is quite dif-
ferent from that of G. leptodon. In the latter, this part is relatively
long, slender, constricted in the middle of the length, and spatulate at
the distal end. In G. productum the part is broader in proportion to
the length and its right and left borders are nearly parallel. In
G. leptodon the length of the tooth row, M,-M; following Schlesinger’s
restoration, is two-thirds the length of the symphysis. The tooth row
of Cope’s type, M.—Mz, lacks little of equalling the symphyseal
length of Leidy’s specimen, and it is to be remembered that this
12 Extinct Vert. Fauna West. Terrs., p. 235, pl. XXII, figs. 1-4.
386 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 16
belonged to a larger animal. In the type the beak-like lower jaw is
much more bent downward than it is in G. leptodon. Cope gives the
amount of deflection as 35°. This seems to be measured in the upper
border of the beak.
Dr. Schlesinger tells us that the teeth of Cope’s type of G. produc-
tum are indistinguishable from those of G. leptodon “forma typica.”
To the present writer they appear distinctly different. At hand is a
fine specimen of the lower left hinder molar of G. leptodon sent from
southern France by Lartet. It is in nearly the same stage of wear as
the corresponding tooth of Cope’s type. The two teeth have the fol-
lowing dimensions:
TABLE 1.—MeasurReMENTS OF THtRD Lower Mo.uars IN MILLIMETERS
G, LEPTODON G, PRODUCTUM
IV ytd Nab asednnaD docusgoN OD Dao ban Hoop Ss Jena gdonoUéaDdo. 157 158
Widthvat second!crest 5.0. cic oe oretctove.c ets vie sree tee 68 75
Height of first posttrite cone: .4- : ih ..a. cece eee eee ee 50 75
Height of second posttrite cone........0...6.5.+20 en. 50 65
Heicht of third posttrite cone. ....20. 0s cs.s «senses 53 55
Height of fourth posttrite cone......- 2.0.5. .0+cc5 38 45
In these measurements allowances are made as carefully as possible
for loss by wear and injury. The height of the cones is measured
perpendicularly to the base of the crown, not along the slopes.
The lower third molar of G. leptodon is narrow and has relatively
low crests and the first three are of nearly the same height. In G.
productum the tooth is broad and has high crests which diminish in
height from the first to the last, as shown by figure 3 on Cope’s
plate LXXI. InG. leptodon the principal cones, especially the outer
ones, are columnar and broadly rounded at the summits; in G. produc-
tum they are conical and their summits are narrow. In the specimen
of G. leptodon at hand the second lower molar lacks its front crest. Its
width at the third crest is 60 mm. In G. productum this molar is
102 mm. long, 75 mm. wide at the rear, and 60 mm. in front. The
teeth of G. productum had reached ahigher stage of development than
those of G. leptodon.
Dr. Schlesinger is no doubt correct in his identification of the upper
teeth figured'* by Cope. They are the third and fourth premolars
and the first and second molars.
On his page 53, Schlesinger mentions the lower tusk illustrated by
Cope by his figures 8 and 8a; and Schlesinger regards this tusk as
14 Wheeler, U. S. Geogr. Sur. west 100th merid., pl. LX XI, figs. 1, 2.
OCTOBER 4, 1925 HAY: SCHLESINGER ON MASTODONS 387
demonstrating his view that Cope’s species is identical with G. lep-
todon. That might be the case if he could be sure that the tusk
belonged to the same species as Cope’s type. The writer believes that
it belonged to another species. The fragment is 220mm. long. How
much of the distal end is missing cannot be determined; it may be that
it was but little longer or twice as long. The proximal end has the
pulp cavity filled with sandstone. The greater diameter is 56 mm.;
the shorter, 39 mm. Its section, as shown by Cope’s figure, is wholly
different from that of the tusk of Cope’s type and from that of the
symphysis figured by Leidy. On both the upper and lower faces
there is a broad shallow groove or channel. It belonged to an animal
evidently larger than G. productum and possibly one having a shorter
jaw.
Dr. Schlesinger, on his pages 51 and 228, identified the tooth
described by Leidy from California under the name Mastodon obscurus
as identical with Schlesinger’s ‘‘forma subtapiroidea.” When the cast
of that lower tooth, if lower it is, is placed alongside of the subtapiroid
lower teeth of Schlesinger’s plate VIII very distinct differences are
observed. When the cast is compared with upper teeth of Schlesin-
ger’s subtapiroid form (his pl. IV, fig. 2; pl. VII, fig. 3) there is still
less agreement, although the common possession of a pretrite cingulum
is shown.
On his page 36, Dr. Schlesinger noted the fact that Gaudry had
described a species, Mastodon pyrenaicus, (now regarded as a synonym
of G. leptodon) which presented characters resembling those of M.
tapiroides. Schlesinger concluded that this form pyrenaicus is prob-
ably a synonym of his subtapiroideus, in case the tusks should not
exclude its union with G. leptodon. A remark or two are suggested.
In nomenclatural parlance subtapiroideus would be a synonym of
pyrenaicus not vice versa. Why should Schlesinger burden the litera-
ture with his new name before he had determined that the two forms
are different? Why did he not give to Cope’s proavus and Leidy’s
obscurus the benefit of the qualifying phrase which he used in refer-
ring to pyrenaicus?
In maintaining these objections to Schlesinger’s views the writer
does not deny that the animals in question are closely related, that G.
productum tay have descended from G. leptodon; but he believes that
the first constitutes a form sufficiently different to be regarded as a
species. As long as it is not demonstrated that the two are identical
he does not see what is to be gained by insisting that they are identi-
cal. Cope’s ideas regarding species may have been narrow, but pos-
sibly Schlesinger’s may be thought by some to be somewhat too broad.
388 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 16
ENTOMOLOGY.—Some generic transfers and synonymy in Ichneu-
monidae. (Hym.) R. A. CusHman, Bureau of Entomology.
(Communicated by 8. A. RoHwmEr.)
The following notes are brought together and published at this
time to make the new combinations and synonymy available for use
in the forthcoming list of New York insects. Accepted names are in
bold face type and synonyms in italics. In generic transfers the origi-
nal genus is printed in Roman type and inclosed in parentheses.
(Ichneumon) Trogomorpha ferrugator (Fabricius) = Trogomorpha trogiformis
(Cresson).
Amblyteles annulipes (Cresson) 2 = Amblyteles scitulus (Cresson) o.
This synonymy is based on a gynandromorph in which the thorax, body
and left legs are female and the head and right legs male. This specimen is
in the National Museum collection.
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles ater (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles aterrimus (Provancher).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles atrox (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles bimembris (Provancher).
Amblyteles cincticornis (Cresson) 2 = Ichnewmon galenus Cresson o’.
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles citimus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles corvinus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles creperus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles funestus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles fuscifrons (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles humillimus (Dalla Torre).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles inconstans (Cresson).
Amblyteles jucundus (Brulle) 2 = Amblyteles flavizonatus (Cresson) &.
The synonymy of these two species is based on a mated pair captured by
Dwight Isely at North East, Pa., on July 7, 1915; and also on one specimen
of each sex reared by H. Bird from pupae of Papaipema circumlucens Mliger at
Chicago, Ill. There are two males in the National Museum with the ab-
dominal color pattern of the female.
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles lachrymans (Provancher).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles leucaniae (Fitch) = Amblyteles seminiger (Cresson).
(Cryptus) Amblyteles mellicoxus (Provancher).
The transfer of this species to Amblyteles is based on a homotype (Rohwer)
in the National Museum collection.
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles mellipes (Provancher).
Amblyteles nanodes, new name, = Ichnewmon nanus Cresson (1877), not
Ratzeburg (1848).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles pervagus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles pilosulus (Provancher).
Amblyteles provancheri, new name, = Ichnewmon bifasciatus Provancher
(1875) not Foureroy (1785) nor Say (1828).
OCTOBER 4, 1925 CUSHMAN: SYNONYMY IN ICHNEUMONIDAE 389
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles proximus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles pullatus (Cresson) = Ichneuwmon subcyaneus Cresson.
The former name has page precedence.
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles putus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles restrictus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles rubicundus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles scelestus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles scriptifrons (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles solitus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles stygicus (Provancher).
Amblyteles sublatus (Cresson) o& = Ichnewmon pravus Cresson @.
This synonymy is based on a series of seven specimens, including both
sexes, reared under Gipsy Moth Laboratory No. 10092 E 19 from pupae of
Hemerocampa guttivitta Walker at Tamworth, N. H. These are in the
National Museum. There are also in the collection two specimens, one of
each sex, reared from the same host at the Maine Experiment Station.
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles trunculentus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles ultimus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles uncinatus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles vescus (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles vitalis (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles vittifrons (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles vivax (Cresson).
(Ichneumon) Amblyteles volesus (Cresson).
(Phygadeuon) Glyphicnemis crassipes (Provancher). -
(Phygadeuon) Stylocryptus maculatus (Provancher).
(Phygadeuon) Stylocryptus vulgaris (Cresson).
(Cryptus) Plectocryptus contiguus (Cresson).
(Phygadeuon) Plectocryptus major (Cresson).
The sexual antigeny of the above two species is very great, but I suspect
they are the sexes of the same species.
(Phygadeuon) Chromocryptus planosae (Fitch) = Chromocryptus nebras-
kensis (Ashmead).
The types of both names are in the National Museum collection.
Tribe Cryptini.
Cryptint, Tribe V, Ashmead, Smith’s Insects of N. J., 1899 edition, p. 570.
1900.
MesostEnint, Tribe VI, Ashmead, loc. cit.
The tribe Mesostenini is separated from the Cryptini entirely on the size
and form of the alar areolet. There is no sharp division between the two
tribes on this character, as becomes more evident when the tropical forms of
the group are studied. I therefore consider them as the single tribe Cryptini.
(Cryptus) Chaeretymma lata (Provancher) = Phygadewon occidentalis Pro-
vancher.
390 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 16
S. A. Rohwer examined the types of latws and occidentalis and was of the
opinion that they are synonymous. He brought back to the National
Museum a homotype of occidentalis, and it is on the basis of this specimen
that I transfer the species to Chaeretymma.
(Cryptus) Chaeretymma velox (Cresson).
(Cryptus) Compsocryptus retentor (Brullé).
(Cryptus) Spilocryptus atricollaris (Walsh).
A female specimen from Illinois in the National Museum with the name
label in Walsh’s handwriting is hereby designated as the neotype.
Spilocryptus extrematis (Cresson) = Cryptus imitator Provancher.
(Cryptus) Hoplocryptus apicatus (Provancher).
Hoplocryptus incertulus, new name = Cryptus incertus Cresson (1869) not
Ratzeburg (1852).
In Dalla Torre’s ‘‘Catalogus Hymenopterorum” Cryptus incertus Cresson is
synonymized with Phygadeuon latus (Provancher). Viereck, recognizing
it as Cryptine rather than Phygadeuonine and as distinct from latus Pro-
vancher, has written the name in Dalla Torre under Cryptus and opposite it
has written” = [tamoplex incertulus Vier., n. n.”’ But I have. been unable
to find any publication of this name.
(Cryptus) Idiolispa limata (Cresson).
Genus Trychosis Foerster.
Idiolispa Foertser, Verh. Nat. Ver. Preuss. Rheinl. 25: 188. 1868.
Ethaemorpha Viereck, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 44: 565. 1913.
The types of these two genera are, in my opinion, entirely congeneric.
(Cryptus) Trychosis rufoannulata (Provancher).
(Ethaemorpha) Trychosis similis (Cresson).
Genus Cryptus Fabricius.
Itamoplex Foerster, Verh. Nat. Ver. Preuss. Rheinl. 25: 188. 1868.
There seems to be no reason to doubt the propriety of referring (Cry yptus
americanus Cresson) = Itamoplex vinctus (Say) to Itamoplex. This species 1s
entirely congeneric with Cryptus viduatorius Fabricius, genotype of Cryptus.
If, however, the Erlangen list is to be recognized, Itamoplex will have to be
used in place of Cryptus.
Cryptus persimilis Cresson is a typical Cryptus.
(Itamoplex) Cryptus vinctus (Say) = Cryptus purnert Dalla Torre =
Cryptus nigricornis Provancher.
(Mesostenus) Crypturopsis candidus (Cresson) = Crypturopsis albomaculatus
(Ashmead).
(Mesostenus) Crypturopsis fortis (Cresson).
Genus Listrognathus Tschek.
Listrognathus Tschek., Verh. Zool.-bot. Ges., Wien., 20: 153. 1870.
Mesostenoidens Ashmead, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 23:45. 1900.
Viereck has synonymized Mesostenoideus with Polycyrtus Spinola. In this
he is in error, for the only character mentioned by Spinola in his description of
Polycyrtus that is shared by Mesostenoideus albomaculatus (Cresson) is the
frontal horn; while it differs markedly in its opaque and densely punctate
integument and short and weakly impressed notauli. It is, however, entirely
OCTOBER 4, 1925 CUSHMAN: SYNONYMY IN ICHNEUMONIDAE 391
congeneric with Listrognathus tricolor Tschek. as represented in the National
Museum, and is presumably so with the genotype of Listrognathus. It
should be noted that albomaculatus will not run to Mesostenoideus in Ash-
mead’s key, because of its possession of the frontal horn.
(Mesostenoideus) Listrognathus albomaculatus (Cresson).
(Mesostenus) Listrognathus leucocoxus (Ashmead).
Polyaenus spinarius (Brullé) = Mesostenus delawarensis Dalla Torre =
Mesostenus albopictus Cresson.
Polistiphaga, new genus.
Genotype.—Mesostenus arvalis Cresson.
Temples narrow and sharply sloping; eyes bulging; frons mutic; clypeus
elevated, depressed at apex, in profile nose-shaped; antennae slender,
filiform. Thorax moderately robust, opaque punctate or granular; dorsal
anterior angles of pronotum tuberculate but without carinae; notauli sharply
defined though not especially deep, prescutum not strongly gibbous; scutellum
moderately convex, margined only at base; propodeum nearly completely
areolated, only the areola incomplete laterally, its space more or less rugose
longitudinally, apophyses strong, compressed, petiolar area deeply impressed,
spiracles nearly circular; areolet small to very small, open at apex, recurrent
near apex; nervulus antefurcal, nervellus broken below middle; legs slender,
front basitarsus nearly as long as tibia. Abdomen moderately stout, very
minutely and densely punctate opaque; first seement with ventral margin
strongly decurved, postpetiole broad, spiracles at or near apical third; second
tergite with minute pit-like gastrocoeli removed from base; ovipositor short,
compressed, subsagittate at apex, sheath not or barely as long as first tergite,
In Ashmead’s and Schmiedeknecht’s keys of the tribe Mesostenini the
genotype runs best to Mesostenus Gravenhorst. From this genus it is at once
distinguished by the form and areolation of the propodeum, the form of the
clypeus, ete. Except that the frontal horn is lacking it agrees much better
with Listrognathus Tschek, especially in the form of the clypeus, wing vena-
tion, and shape of abdomen. Here again the propodeum distinguishes it»
though less sharply than from Mesostenus.
The genotype and an undescribed species are parasitic in the nests of
various species of Polistes.
(Meniscus) Syzeuctus elegans (Cresson).
(Meniscus) Syzeuctus michiganensis (Davis).
Lissonota americana (Cresson) = Lampronota amphimelaena Walsh =
Harrimaniella relativa Viereck.
(Lampronota) Lissonota angusta (Davis).
(Lampronota) Lissonota jocosa (Cresson).
(Lampronota) Lissonota punctata (Cresson) 2 = Lampronota punctulata
Cresson 2 and Lampronota albifacies Provancher &.
In his key to the species of Lampronota Cresson employed punctata and
in the description of the species, punctulata; punctata has page precedence.
Provancher’s male species was synonymized by Provancher himself with
pleuralis Cresson. It is, however, the male of the present species.
Lissonota rufipes (Cresson) #@ = Lissonota tegularis (Cresson) o.
392 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 16
(Meniscus) Asphragis mirabilis (Cresson) = Asphragis pulcherrimus Ash-
mead, Clistopyga pleuralis Ashmead, Meniscus ostentator Davis.
(Pimpla) Epiurus alboricta (Cresson) = Pimpla investigatrix Walsh @.
Tromatobia rufopectus (Cresson) = Pimpla defensator Davis, Pimpla
landerensis Viereck, Pimpla scriptifrons Cresson.
Zaglyptus incompletus (Cresson) 2 = Cylloceria lemoinet Provancher.
(Pimpla) Delomerista novita (Cresson).
(Rhorus) Spanotecnus bicolor (Cresson).
(Catoglyptus) Stiphrosomus fucatus (Cresson).
(Mesoleptus) Callidiotes albopleuralis (Provancher) & = Atractodes nitens
Provancher @.
The above transfer and synonymy are based on homotypes of both species,.
that of albopleuralis by 8. A. Rohwer and that of nitens by A. B. Gahan. —
Metacoelus mansuetor (Gravenhorst) = Hyperacmus tineae Riley, Hyperac-
mus ovatus Davis.
The inclusion of mansuetor in Metacoelus rather than in Polyclistus, where
it is placed by many of the European authorities, is based on Foerster’s
manuscript.
(Limneria) Olesicampe argentifrons (Cresson).
(Limneria) Nemeritis ruficoxa (Provancher).
(Limneria) Angitia tibiator (Cresson).
(Limneria) Eulimneria valida (Cresson).
(Limneria) Dioctes salicicola (Ashmead).
Pristomerus fuscipennis Cushman = Pristomerus aciculatus Ashmead MS.
Ashmead’s name was published in Smith’s Insects of New Jersey, (1899)
1900, p. 584. A specimen labelled ‘‘aciculatus Ashm. type’’ and others are
those paratypes of fuscipennis recorded from Oswego, N. Y.
(Atractodes) Leptopygus politus (Ashmead).
(Orthocentrus) Plectiscus carinatus (Provancher).
This transfer is based op a homotype (Rohwer). On a misdetermination
Davis placed the species in Atmetus Foerster.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
The name of the Land Classification Branch of the U. 8. Geological Survey
has been changed to the Conservation Branch, of which HERMAN STABLER
is chief. The following divisions have been created: Mineral Leasing, J. B.
Tovueu, chief; Mineral Classification, J.D. Norrurop, chief; Homestead, A.
EK. Aupous, chief; Power, B. E. Jonsrs, chief.
On July 1, the Division of Mineral Resources of the U.S. Geological Survey
was transferred to the U. 8. Bureau of Mines. F. J. Karz, chief of the divi-
sion, F. G. Tryon, B. L. Jounson and A. H. Reprrexp, geologists and mineral
geographers, were transferred at the time.
F. L. Hass, geologist of the Geological Survey, has been appointed chief
of the Division of Mineral Technology of the Bureau of Mines.
H. D. Miser, geologist of the Geological Survey, has been granted leave
of absence to serve as state geologist of Tennessee for one year, effective
September 1.
~ s 4 4 1
ibe iiaic
~
v f 4 -
\
&
i +i} x
= -
,
;
~ ‘ {
“> ‘ }
ai
\
\
‘
}
* fe 2)
; ‘
i i
—~
ee
‘The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page
___ if sent to the editors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month. —
- } " en
:
4 ‘ ‘
é “A
4
bn
ay
z 5 i: A
‘x
,
)
be
; f
{ 2
i
e
ra —
,
- \
‘
j
/ 5
\
J ~
x ‘ /
CONTENTS ~~ ae
ORIGINAL PAPERS
Geology.—Review of Dr. Giinther Schlesinger on mastodons. Oxiver P. H
Entomology.—Some generic transfers and synonymy in Ichneumonidae. R
CUBHMANY tiie vb trent teak ee ib cle Tisia sels intbuat tle Vaiss a rte a RR Beste
Screntiric Notes anp NrEws.:........... sia Ri eda
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vernon L. Ketioca, National Research Council.
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. SrusBexr, Bureau of Standards. :
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Survey. ph
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic sitet
af
OcroBER 19, 1925 No. 17
JOURNAL
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES |
- 4
BOARD OF EDITORS
_ E.P. Kinup D. F. Hewett S. J. Maucaty
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L.H.Apams _ __ S. A. Ronwrr
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL socinry
E. A. GotpMaNn G. W. Srosr ~
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
> R. F. Griags J. R. Swanton
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL BOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
* PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royan anp GuILForp AvEs. r
Ba.timore, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
resent a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it publishes:
{1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALisissued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendaryears. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or :
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, inthe
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. ss
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be ~
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The ~
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References —
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. : %
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be.
partly met by the author. ;
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors —
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed. ey
Authors’ Reprints—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3:80) 3 snse4s05: 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi- ‘
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. : ao
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints i
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. ;
The rate of Subscription per volume 18.........2.-cecceccnccscceree ata ea ie $6.00*
Semi-monthly. mumbe®s,.:. <2: 1. c'vcan cp clase niaioe «soap ale)aislaibicle’s aisle Gaccthteh ones .25
Monthly numbers: 53’. os os.: «'s.v'e's'e o1crn vieicicla sina tua v sivie ue elelelsialy @le/norgis iiss -50
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. Oo.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London. — in
Exchanges——The Journat does not exchange with other publications. _ Sa ’
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made —
within thirty days after date of the following issue. So a ;
“Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates”
we are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy j
‘
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 OcToBER 19, 1925 No. 17
BOTANY.—New species of Agave from the Republic of Salvador.
Wituram TRELEASE, University of Illinois. (Communicated by
PauL C. STANDLEY.)
Agave acuispina, sp. nov.
(TEQuILaANaE.) Acaulescent (?). Leaves ensiform, flattish, grayish,
rather large, 4 100 cm. or more, toothed to within 20 em. of the end;
spine chestnut-colored, glossy upward, granular, slenderly conical and
sharp, very round-grooved, the margin scarcely decurrent for more than its
length, little intruded into the green tissue, 3 X 20 mm.; teeth glossy chest-
nut- or garnet-colored, 10-20 mm. apart or even more, upcurved or hooked,
narrowly triangular from narrow lenticular bases 3-5 mm. wide, the inter-
vening margin nearly straight. Inflorescence tall, openly paniculate, with
rather slender, purplish, glaucous branches; pedicels short (6mm.). Flowers
(2). Capsules ellipsoid, 2.5-3 X 3 em., short-stipitate; seeds (?). Bulb-
iferous.
In hedges, Hacienda El Platanar, San Miguel, El Salvador (Calderén
2084; type in the U.S. National Herbarium); also Calderén 2082, from same
locality, collected in January, 1924. Called “maguey silvestre.”
Agave Letonae I’. W. Taylor in litt., sp. nov.
(TeQuinaNak.) Caulescent, suckering. Trunk about 50 & 150 cm.
Leaves oblong-lanceolate or ensiform, slightly concave, glaucous, large
(8-10 * 125-200 em.); spine dull brown, rather glossy toward the end, low-
granular on the back, arcuately and triquetrously conical, round-grooved, with
acute edges below the middle, the acute margin very shortly decurrent,
slightly intruded dorsally and ventrally into the green tissue, 4-5 & about
25 mm.; teeth chestnut-colored, 15-35 mm. apart, 2-3 mm. long, mostly
upcurved or hooked, slender from lenticular bases about 5 mm. wide, the
intervening cartilaginous margin nearly straight. Inflorescence paniculate,
about 7 meters tall, rather openly branched; pedicels about 5 mm. long.
Flowers (?). Capsules ellipsoid, about 25 * 40 mm., slightly beaked, stipi-
tate; seeds dull, 8-9 XK 1lmm. Saidtobe bulbiferous. (Tig. 1.)
El] Salvador. Source of Letona fiber. Cultivated at Sucesién Letona,
San Miguel (Milner, October and November, 1923); from plants grown by
the Indians from a very early date. Type in the herbarium of the University
of Ilinois.
393
394 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 17
Fig. 1.—Details of leaves and fruits of Agave Letonae. Natural size.
oct. 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 395
Agave Letonae marginata, var. nov.
Differing from the type in having the leaves rather broadly bordered with
bright yellow.
Hacienda El Platanar, San Miguel, El Salvador (Calderén 2081; type,
sheets 1169878-9 in the U. S. National Herbarium).
Agave lempana, sp. nov.
(TEquILANAE.) Acaulescent. Leaves prickly only at base, oblong-
lanceolate, nearly flat, grayish or slightly glaucous, large (15 X 120 cm. or
more); spine chestnut-colored, glossy upward, somewhat low-granular on
the back below, broadly conical, pitted and round-grooved below the middle,
the margin acutely decurrent for several times its length, somewhat intruded
into the green tissue, about 6 X 20 mm.; teeth confined to the lower third of
the leaf, glossy garnet- or chestnut-colored, 10-15 or 20 mm. apart, straight
or upeurved or recurved, narrowly triangular from lenticular bases 2-4 mm.
wide, the intervening green margin nearly straight. Inflorescence unknown.
El Salvador. Planted (?) at the railroad station on the Lempa River
(F. W. Taylor, February 15, 1924). Type in the herbarium of the University
of Illinois.
Agave parvidentata, sp. nov.
(GUATEMALENSES.) Acaulescent; not cespitose (?). Leaves slightly
glaucescent, oblanceolate-oblong, acute, smooth, 15 xX 100 cm. or more;
spine brown, apparently conical, somewhat intruded into the green tissue
and decurrent, 5 mm. thick; teeth dull brown, 10-25 mm. apart, thick, firm,
small (scarcely 2 mm. long), from abrupt lenticular bases 83-5 mm. wide, the
intervening margin somewhat concave. Inflorescence paniculate, apparently
with short branches and closely bunched flowers; pedicels moderate (2 X
15 mm.). Flowers orange, 40-50 mm. long; ovary 20-30 mm. long, equaling
or surpassing the perianth, oblong; tube conical, scarcely 5 mm. deep; seg-
ments 15 mm. long, shorter than the ovary; filaments inserted nearly in the
throat, about 30 mm. long. Capsules unknown, and not known to be
bulbiferous.
Cultivated in San Salvador, El Salvador (Calderén 2085, in 1924; type,
sheets 1169884-5, in the U.S. National Herbarium), under the name “‘maguey.”’
ENTOMOLOGY .—New termites from the Solomon Islands and Santa
Cruz Archipelago. Tuos. E. Snyprr, Bureau of Entomology.
Dr. W. M. Mann visited Fiji in 1915 and the Solomon Islands
and Santa Cruz Archipelago in the South Pacific Ocean in 1916. On
these islands in Oceania he collected fourteen species of termites,
representing seven genera or subgenera and three families; all of these
species are apparently new to science. They were carefully compared
with descriptions of known termites from the Ethiopian, Oriental, and
Australian regions. Often, however, the descriptions and illustra-
tions of known species are not as adequate as is necessary, without
396 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 17
specimens for comparison. Careful measurements and camera
lucida illustrations accompany the descriptions of the new species,
where special characters are to be noted.
No mound-building, fungus-growing termites of the Termes group
were found, although they occur in this general region. Species of
the family Rhinotermitidae were well represented in the Solomon
Islands and Santa Cruz. Species of Nasutitermes (sens. lat.) are more
or less restricted to certain islands, as in the West Indies.
These termites found by Doctor Mann are the first and only speci-
mens ever reported as having been collected on these islands in the
South Seas. The specimens were deposited in the Museum of Com-
parative Zoology at Cambridge, Mass., and were lent to the writer for
study through the kindness of Dr. 8. Henshaw and Mr. Nathan Banks.
All types have been returned to the Museum of Comparative Zoology,
but where there was sufficient material, paratypes were retained for
the collection of the United States National Museum; no definite
holotype has been designated.
The termites of the Solomon Islands and Santa Cruz Archipelago
apparently represent isolated, distinct, old, island fauna of Melanesia.
The closest relations are apparently with the Malay Peninsular and
there are indications of continuation of the fauna of Papua to these
islands. It is, however, difficult to draw definite conclusions from
this small series of termites alone.
_One new species in the family Kalotermitidae and eight in the family
Rhinotermitidae are described herewith; five new termites in the family
Termitidae will be described in a subsequent paper, as part IT.
Family KALOTERMITIDAE
Genus Kalotermes Hagen
Subgenus Neotermes Holmgren
The subgenus Neotermes is closely related to Kalotermes. The numerous
species are widely distributed throughout the world, from the subtropics of
southern Florida to the tropics of South America and New Zealand, as well
as throughout the tropics of the Eastern Hemisphere. Species of Neotermes
are forest-inhabiting and are greatly dependent upon moisture for life; they
are wood-boring and do not burrow in earth.
Neotermes sanctae-crucis, new species
Winged adult—Head light castaneous (reddish brown), broadly oval
(with mandibles), or quadrate, rounded posteriorly, with a few scattered,
long hairs. Compound eyes black, not round, projecting, separated from
lateral margin of head by a distance nearly equal to long diameter of eye.
Ocelli hyaline, suboval, slightly projecting, at an oblique angle to and nearly
oct. 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 397
touching eyes. Labrum yellow-brown, tongue-shaped, broader than long,
slightly shallowly coneave at apex, with long hairs.
Antenna light yellow-brown, with 20-21 segments; segments-broadest at
middle, narrowed near base and apex, with long hairs; third segment sub-
clavate, longer than second or fourth segments; segments becoming longer
towards apex; last segment narrow, elongate and semielliptical.
Pronotum about same color as head, broader than head, broadest at middle,
not twice as broad as long, broadly, deeply, and roundly emarginate anter-
iorly, shallowly and roundly emarginate posteriorly, the sides round to
posterior margin, with fairly numerous, long hairs.
Wings grayish, with tinge of yellow, costal area yellow-brown; membrane
reticulate or finely punctate; in fore wing, subcosta approximately reaching
basal third of wing, radius extending for approximately two-thirds of wing,
radius sector with 4 long sub-branches to costa and shorter sub-branches near
apex; median close to and parallel to radius sector and reaching apex of wing;
short transverse branches to radius sector near apex; cubitus running slightly
below middle of wing, not reaching apex, with about 15 or 16 branches or sub-
branches to lower margin, those nearer the base (the first) the most distinct.
Wing scale as long as pronotum. In hind wing, subcosta rudimentary;
radius joining the costa beyond middle of wing; radius sector parallel to costa
and reaching apex of wing, with fewer branches than in fore wing; median
originating from radius sector not far from base of wing (approximately
2.75 mm.) ; cubitus nearer to middle of wing than in fore wing; indications of
rudimentary anals.
Legs yellow, tibia darker; pulvillus present, with long hairs.
Abdomen about same color as head; tergites with two transverse rows of
long hairs; cerci and styli present, the cerci not elongate.
Measurements.—Length of entire winged adults (males
and females), 18-19 mm.; length of entire dealated adults,
11-12 mm.; length of head (to tip of labrum), 2.8 mm.;
length of head (to anterior margin), 2.1 mm.; length of pro-
notum, 1.8 mm.; length of hind tibia, 2.2 mm.; length of an-
terior wing, 13.5 mm.;
diameter of eye (long Fig. 1.—Kalotermes (Neotermes) sanctae-crucis Snyder.
diam.), 0.55 mm.; width Soldier. View of mandibles to show marginal teeth.
at head (of eyes), 2.25
mm.; width of pronotum, 3 mm.; width of anterior wing, 4.8 mm.
Soldier —Head light castaneous (light reddish-brown), darker anteriorly,
quadrate or broadly oval, longer than broad, broadest posteriorly, rounded
posteriorly, convex dorsally, shallow depression at epicranial suture on front
slope of head, with scattered, long hairs. Eye spot hyaline, suboval at right
angle to margin of head. Gula very narrow at middle, width nearly one-
third that anteriorly.
Mandibles black, reddish-brown at base, stout, incurved at apex, where
sharp-pointed; left mandible with two pointed, marginal teeth near apex, a
smaller tooth and a molar near middle, and a pointed tooth at base; right
mandible with two marginal, broad, pointed teeth at about middle, its edge
roughened. (Fig. 1.)
Labrum light yellow, broad, broader than long, broadly pointed at apex,
with long hairs.
Antenna yellow-brown, with 16-18 segments, segments becoming longer
and broader toward apex, with long hairs; where there are 18 segments, third
segment subclavate, longer than second or fourth segments; fourth shorter
than second segment; last segment narrow, shorter and subelliptical.
398 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, NO. 17
Pronotum dirty white tinged with yellow, roundly and shallowly emargi-
nate anteriorly, convex posteriorly, twice as broad as long, broadest at
middle, not as broad as head; sides round to posterior margin, with scattered
long hairs.
Legs yellowish, tibiae darker, femora not markedly swollen, with long hairs.
Abdomen dirty white tinged with yellow tergites with two transverse
rows of fairly long hairs; cerci and styli fairly elongate and prominent.
Measurements.—Length of entire soldier, 13-13.5 mm.; length of head with
mandibles, 5.7 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to anterior), 3.7 mm.;
length of left mandible, 2.1 mm.; length of pronotum 1.5-1.6 mm.; length of
hind tibia: 2.4 mm.; width of head anteriorly (back of antennae), 3.3 mm.;
width of head (posteriorly), 3.5 mm.; width of pronotum, 2.9-3 mm.
Type locality —Graciosa Bay, Santa Cruz Archipelago.
Described from a series of winged adults collected with soldiers and nymphs
at the type locality by Dr. W. M. Mann, in July, 1916. Winged adults and
soldiers were also collected by Mann on Santa Anna Island, Solomon Islands,
in August, 1916.
Type, winged adult—Cat. No. 15284, Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Cambridge, Mass.; morphotype, soldier; paratypes in U.S. National Museum
and with Hill in Australia.
Family RHINOTERMITIDAE
Genus Prorhinotermes Silvestri
The genus Prorhinotermes was established in 1909 by Silvestri for the
species znopinatus from Samoa. Only eleven described species are included,
and these occur on islands from southern Florida to Central and South Ame-
rica, in Formosa, the Philippine Islands, Samoa, Krakatoa, Ceylon, Mada-
gascar, and the Seychelles. Several species are found in localities south
of the equator and all of the species are confined to the tropics or subtropics.
Prorhinotermes is an island genus.
Prorhinotermes manni Snyder from Santa Cruz Archipelago and P. solomonen-
sis Snyder from the Solomon Islands are two new species from the South Seas,
making a total of thirteen species for the genus, all of which are in general
more or less closely related.
Species of Prorhinotermes are wood-boring in habit and burrow through the
hardest woods; their colonies are located in moist logs, stumps, and dead
trees; they do not burrow in the earth. In southern Florida P. simplex
Hagen occurs on keys, at Miami Beach, and on the mainland near Home-
stead—the only known record of any Prorhinotermes occurring on the main-
land.
Prof.S. F. Light has shown from his study of two species of Prorhinotermes,
both taken from the Island of Luzon in the Philippines, that they are very
different; also P. manni and P. solomonensis from Santa Cruz Archipelago
and the Solomon Islands are quite distinct, although oddly from closely
adjacent islands. Hence it is quite possible that a more thorough study of
P. simplex Hagen occurring in southern Florida and islands of the West
Indies will show that more than one species is involved, instead of a single,
variable, widely distributed species.
oct. 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 399
Large numbers of apterous reproductive forms occur in the colonies of
species of Prorhinotermes and all of these species, as has already been noted,
occur on islands; it seems probable that the species of this genus are dispersed
in driftwood and that the winged adults do not play an important part in
geographical distribution of this group.
Prorhinotermes manni, new species
Soldier —Head yellowish, much broader posteriorly than anteriorly,
narrowed and markedly tapering anteriorly, with few scattered long hairs
arranged in several transverse rows; fontanelle hyaline, a round, distinct
spot, situated on a line connecting the front of the eyes; a fairly distinct
groove from fontanelle to anterior margin.
Eye spot hyaline, large, suboval, and convex (slightly projecting). Lab-
rum tongue-shaped about as long as broad, with two long hairs at apex.
Gula relatively broad at middle.
Mandibles reddish-brown, except at base, where yellow-brown, slender
and elongate.
Antenna yellow, elongate, with 16-18 segments, with very long hairs;
segments becoming longer and broader towards apex; third segment sub-
clavate and usually longer than second; fourth segment shorter than third,
almost as long as second segment; last segment narrow, elongate, and sub-
elliptical.
Maxillary palpi very elongate, nearly as long as mandibles.
Pronotum yellow, not twice as broad as long, broadest anteriorly; anterior
margin markedly emarginate, somewhat arched; sides roundly taper poster-
iorly; posterior margin slightly convex (nearly a straight line), with scattered
long hairs.
Mesonotum only slightly broader than pronotum.
Legs whitish with tinge of yellow, elongate and slender, with short and long
hairs.
Abdomen yellowish; tergites with a row of long hairs at the base of each,
also short hairs. Cerci elongate; styli present.
Measurements.—Length of entire soldier, 5.5 mm.; length of head with
mandibles, 2.8 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to anterior), 1.6 mm.;
length of left mandible, 1.2 mm.; length of pronotum, 0.65-0.7 mm.; length
of hind tibia, 1.25 mm.; width of head posteriorly, 1.4 mm.; width of head
anteriorly, 0.95 mm.; height of head (at middle), 0.9 mm.; width of pro-
notum, 1.2 mm.
Winged adult unknown.
Type locality.—Graciosa Bay, Santa Cruz Archipelago.
Described from a series of soldiers collected with workers, also winged
adults of Nasutitermes (Subulitermes) sanctae-crucis Snyder at the type
locality by Dr. W. M. Mann in July, 1916.
Type, soldier —Cat. No. 15285, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.; paratype in the U. S. National Museum.
Prorhinotermes manni is darker colored and larger, and has more segments
to the antenna than P. krakataui Holmgren, from Krakatoa. The head is
longer than in P. inopinatus Silvestri, of Samoa, and is smaller than in either
canalifrons Sjéstedt, of Madagascar, or luzonensis Light, from the Philippines.
The antenna has more segments than gracilis Light, from the Philippines,
400 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 17
and fewer than flavus Bugnion & Popoff of Ceylon, and the pronotum also
is of different shape. P. manni has also more segments to the antenna, is
larger, and has a more tapering head and larger pronotum than solomonensis
Snyder from the Solomon Islands. It is smaller than japonicus Holmgren,
from Formosa, and is probably closest to inopinatus from Samoa.
Prorhinotermes solomonensis new species.
Soldier.—Head yellowish, flat, while broader posteriorly than anteriorly,
more or less oval (not so tapering as in manni Snyder, from Santa Cruz Island)
with few scattered long hairs arranged in several transverse rows; fontanelle
a hyaline, round, distinct spot, situated posteriorly to a line connecting the
front of the eyes, with a fairly distinct groove from fontanelle to anterior
margin.
Eye spot hyaline, large, suboval, and convex (slightly projecting). Lab-
rum tongue-shaped, slightly longer than broad (but not as broad asin mannt),
with two long hairs at apex. Gula relatively broad at middle.
Mandibles reddish-brown except at base where yellow-brown, slender
(more slender than in mannz) and elongate.
Antenna yellow, with 14 or 15 segments; segments with very long hairs,
becoming longer and broader towards apex; third segment subclavate,
usually much longer than second or fourth; fourth segment shorter than
second; last segment slender and subelliptical.
Maxillary palpi very long and slender, as long as the mandibles.
Pronotum yellow, broadest anteriorly, nearly twice as broad as long (not
as long as in mannz); anterior margin less deeply emarginate anteriorly than
in manni, roundly narrowing posteriorly; posterior margin nearly a straight
line (slightly convex); scattered long hairs present.
Mesonotum broader than pronotum.
Legs tinged with yellow, elongate and slender, with short and long hairs.
Abdomen yellow; tergites with a row of long hairs at the base of each, also
short hairs. Cerci elongate; styli present.
Measurements.—Length of entire soldier, 5.25-5.5 mm.; length of head with
mandibles, 2.5-2.6 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to anterior),
1.5 mm.; length of left mandible, 1.15 mm.; length of pronotum, 0.5-0.6 mm.;
length of hind tibia, 1.2 mm.; width of head posteriorly, 1.25-1.35 mm.:
,
width of head anteriorly, 0.95 mm.; height of head (at middle), 0.8 mm.;
width of pronotum, 1-1.1 mm.
Head of soldier more oval and less markedly tapering than in most species
of Prorhinotermes.
Winged adult unknown.
Type locality —Auki, Malayta Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a series of soldiers collected with workers at the type
locality by Dr. W. M. Mann, in May and June, 1916, with minor soldiers of
Rhinotermes (Schedorhinotermes) solomonensis Snyder and soldiers of Copto-
termes solomonensis Snyder.
Type, soldier —Cat. No. 15286, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.; paratype in the U. S. National Museum.
Prorhinotermes solomonensis has a more oval, less markedly tapering head
than manni Snyder from Santa Cruz Archipelago; is darker colored and
larger, and has more segments to the antenna than krakataui Holmgren, from
Krakatoa; is smaller and has fewer antennal segments than znopinatus
oct. 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 401
Silvestri, of Samoa; is smaller than canalifrons Sjéstedt, from Madagascar,
or luzonensis Light, of the Philippines; and is smaller than japonicus Holmgren
from Formosa. The antenna has fewer segments than gracilis Light, from
the Philippines, or flavus Bugnion & Popoff, from Ceylon. P. ponapiensis
Oshima, from Ponape Island in the Caroline Islands, is known from the
winged adult only.
Genus Coptotermes Wasmann
Coptotermes was established in 1896 by Wasmann as a subgenus for Termes
gestrot Wasmann from Burma. In 1902 he described the genus Arrhinotermes
for the new species hezmz from Ceylon, based on adults only. A. hetmi is a
Coptotermes and, being the type of Arrhinotermes, Arrhinotermes becomes a
synonym. Banksin 1920 replaces Arrhinotermes by Prorhinotermes, described
by Silvestri in 1909.
Coptotermes includes approximately thirty-five valid species, widely dis-
tributed throughout the tropics of the world. Some of the most injurious
termites to both woodwork and living trees are contained therein.
A viscous milky fluid is secreted from the short tubular frontal gland
situated at the anterior margin of the head; this secretion dissolves lime
mortar.
Coptotermes grandiceps, new species
Soldier —Head yellow-brown to light castaneous, area of frontal gland
distinct, lighter colored, and arched; head markedly longer than broad,
broadest posteriorly, narrowed anteriorly (sides of head more straightly than
roundly tapering) ; posterior margin rounded; hairs fairly numerous, scattered,
long. Eye spot visible, not distinct. Frontal tube light castaneous, fairly
long, and prominent. Gula at middle more than half as broad as the greatest
anterior width. Mandibles reddish brown, yellow-brown at base, sabre-
shaped, broad at base but narrowed and incurved at sharp, pointed apex;
left mandible with 3 or 4 fairly distinct marginal teeth at base; right with a
narrow, sharp, pointed marginal tooth.
Labrum light castaneous, elongate, subtriangular, sharply pointed at apex
where hyaline and constricted, two long hairs at apex.
Antenna light yellow-brown, with 16 segments; segments becoming longer
and broader towards apex, with long hairs; third segment ring-like, shorter
than second or fourth segments; fourth shorter than second segment; last
segment narrow, elongate, and subelliptical.
Pronotum tinged light yellow, twice as broad as long, deeply and roundly
emarginate anteriorly, shallowly emarginate posteriorly; sides angularly
narrow to posterior margin; hairs numerous, scattered, long.
Legs with tinge of yellow, slender, elongate, with long hairs.
Abdomen dirty white, with tinge of light yellow; tergites with numerous,
scattered, long, golden hairs, apparently not arranged in transverse rows, but
if so, faling in Holmgren’s key with the posterior row longest and most
prominent; cerci and styli prominent.
Measurements.—Length of entire soldier, 5.25—5.5 mm.; length of head with
mandibles, 2.7 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to anterior), 1.7 mm.;
length of left mandible, 1 mm.; length of pronotum, 0.5 mm.; length of hind
tibia, 1.3 mm.; width of head posteriorly, 1.4-1.5 mm.; width of head ante-
riorly, 0.9-0.95 mm. ; width of pronotum, 1 mm.
402 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 17
Type locality.—Tulagi Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a series of soldiers collected with workers at the type
locality by Dr. W. M. Mann, in May, 1916.
Type, soldier—Cat. No. 15287, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.; paratype, U.S. National Museum.
Some species of Coptotermes are known only from the winged adult
and cannot be used in comparison, but the soldier of C. grandiceps appears to be
distinct; the large head, somewhat straight sides of the head, and number of
antennal segments are distinguishing characters.
Coptotermes pamuae, new species
Soldier.—Head yellow-brown to light castaneous, area of frontal gland
lighter colored and arched, sides of head lighter; head longer than broad,
broadest posteriorly, narrowed anteriorly, the sides roundly tapering; pos-
terior margin of head rounded; hairs scattered and long. Frontal tube light
castaneous, darker on rim of opening, fairly long and prominent. Eye spot
not distinct. Gula at middle more than half as broad as where broadest
anteriorly.
Mandibles light castaneous at base, reddish brown, sabre-shaped, broad at
base but narrowed and incurved at apex where pointed; left mandible with
slight indications of several marginal teeth at base; right with no marginal
teeth.
Labrum light castaneous, subtriangular, sharply pointed
at apex where slightly hyaline and constricted; two long
hairs at apex.
Antenna tinged with yellow,
with 14 segments; segments
becoming longer and broader
towards apex, with long hairs; third segment subclavate, usually approximately
subequal with second and fourth segments, variable, last segment elongate,
slender, subelliptical.
Pronotum tinged with yellow, not twice as broad as long, deeply and
roundly emarginate anteriorly; sides of anterior margin high before median
emargination, roundly sloping posteriorly; posterior margin shallowly con-
cave at middle, with long hairs.
Legs tinged with yellow, slender, elongate, with long hairs.
Abdomen tinged with yellow; tergites with dense long hairs, the posterior
row longest; cerci and styli prominent.
Measurements.—Length of entire soldier, 4-4.3 mm.; length of head with
mandibles, 2 to 2.1 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to anterior)
1.35 mm.; length of left mandible, 0.77 mm.; length of pronotum, 0.45 mm.;
length of hind tibia, 0.9 mm.; width of head posteriorly (where widest),
1.15-1.2 mm.; width of head anteriorly, 0.7 mm.; height of head at middle,
0.9 mm.; width of pronotum, 0.75 mm.
Type locality —Pamua, San Cristobal Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a series of soldiers collected by Dr. W. M. Mann with
workers and Rhinotermes (Schedorhinotermes) solomonensis Snyder at the
type locality in August, 1916.
Type, soldier—Cat. No. 15288, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.; paratypes in U. 8. National Museum.
Fig. 2.—Coptotermes pamuae Snyder. Soldier.
View of pronotum to show marked emargination.
Coptotermes pamuae is a small species, but is larger than C. parvulus
Holmgren, from India; it is close to C. travians Haviland, from the Malay
oct: 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 403
Peninsula and Borneo, but has a longer pronotum which is also deeply
emarginate anteriorly. (Fig. 2.)
Coptotermes solomonensis, new species
Soldier —Head light yellow, area of frontal gland distinct, lighter colored
and arched, markedly longer than broad, broadest posteriorly, narrowed
anteriorly (sides of head more straightly than roundly tapering); posterior
margin of head rounded; hairs fairly numerous, scattered, long. Eye spot
indistinct. Frontal tube light castaneous, fairly long. Gula broad in middle,
more than half as broad as where broadest anteriorly. Mandibles reddish
brown, yellow-brown at base, sabre-shaped, broad at base but narrowed and
incurved at sharp pointed apex; left mandible with 3 or 4 more or less broad
marginal teeth at base.
Labrum light castaneous, elongate, subtriangular, sharply pointed at apex,
where hy aline and constricted; two long hairs at apex.
Antenna yellow, with 15 segments; segments become longer Sra broader
towards apex, with long hairs; third segment short and ring-like, shorter than
second or fourth segments; fourth segment shorter than second: last segment
narrow and subelliptical.
Pronotum tinged with yellow (margins
darker), not quite twice as broad as long,
deeply and roundly emarginate anteriorly,
shallowly emarginate posteriorly; sides
angularly narrow to posterior margin;
hairs numerous, scattered, long.
Legs with tinge of yellow, slender,
elongate, with long hairs. b
Abdomen dirty white, with tinge of piece eae 2
light yellow; tergites with numerous long, Fig 3—Contrasting views of the
golden hairs, apparently not arranged in ™andibles of major soldiers of new
regular transverse rows, but if so, running Schedorhinotermes to show marginal
in Holmgren’s key with the posterior row teeth on left mandible. :
longest and most prominent; cerci and (a) Rhinotermes (S.) marjoriae
styli prominent. Snyder, both left and right mandibles.
Measurements.—Length of entire (b) Rhinotermes (S.) sanctae-crucis
soldier, 6.5 mm.; length of head with Snyder. (ce) Rhinotermes (S.) solo-
mandibles, 3mm.;length of head without ”onensts Snyder.
mandibles (to anterior), 1.8 mm.; length
of left mandible, 1.2 mm.; length of pronotum, 0.6 mm.; length of hind tibia,
1.25 mm.; width of head (posteriorly), 1.45 mm.; width of head (anteriorly),
0.95 mm.; width of pronotum: 1 mm.
Type locality. —Auki, Malayta Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a single soldier, collected with workers, together with
soldiers and workers of Prorhinotermes solomonensis Snyder and minor soldiers
of Rhinotermes (Schedorhinotermes) solomonensis Snyder at the type locality,
in May and June, 1916, by Dr. W. M. Mann.
Type, soldier. —Cat. No. 15289, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.
Coptotermes solomonensis is lighter colored and larger, and has a narrower,
longer head and longer pronotum than C. grandiceps Snyder, from Tulagi
Island, Solomon Islands.
S
404 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 17
Genus Rhinotermes Hagen
Subgenus Schedorhinotermes Silvestri
The subgenus Schedorhinotermes was established in 1909 by Silvestri for
Rhinotermes intermedius Brauer, from Australia. Sixteen species are in-
cluded, which occur only in the tropics of the Eastern Hemisphere—in
Africa, the Philippines, Nicobar Isles, Malacca, Sumatra, Borneo (Sarawak),
Celebes, Java, New Guinea, Bismark Archipelago, and Australia.
The winged adult has the clypeus less strongly projecting anteriorly than
in Rhinotermes.
There are two types of soldiers, the large, mandibulate major soldier and
the minor soldier with the relatively broad labrum nearly or quite as long
as the mandibles, which have marginal teeth.
Rhinotermes (Schedorhinotermes) marjoriae, new species.
Winged adult.—Head yellow-brown, area of frontal gland distinct; sides
parallel; posterior margin rounded; outline of head with eyes and labrum
round; hairs few, scattered, long. Fontanelle hyaline, round, located on a
line connecting ocelli posteriorly, or at beginning of raised area at front of
head. Median groove running from fontanelle to labrum. Post-clypeus
yellow, lighter colored than head, broader than long, convex anteriorly and
somewhat raised as a nasutiform projection overhanging the labrum, not
so prominent as in Rhznotermes. Labrum yellow, about as long as broad,
arched and constricted anteriorly, placed nearly vertical.
Eyes black, suboval, prominent, projecting, close to lateral margin of head.
Ocelli hyaline, suboval, projecting, separated from eyes by a distance about
equal to the long diameter of an ocellus (closer in translucens Haviland).
Antenna yellow to light yellow-brown, with 19 or 20 segments; segments
becoming longer and broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment
subclavate, longer than second or fourth; fourth shorter than second segment;
last segment short, slender and subelliptical.
Pronotum yellow-brown, flat, slightly inclined anteriorly, twice as broad
as long, not emarginate; sides roundly narrowing posteriorly; long hairs
present.
Wings yellow; costal veins slightly darker; membrane irregularly and
coarsely reticulate; in fore wing, median vein free, intermediate, but closer to
cubitus than to subcosta, branching to apex of wing, with 4 to 7 branches or
sub-branches; cubitus with 12 to 16 branches or sub-branches to lower margin
of wing. Median separating into branches nearer middle of wing than in
translucens Haviland.
Legs light yellow-brown, elongate, slender, with long hairs.
Abdomen yellow-brown; tergites with dense long hairs; cerci not prominent.
Measurements.—Length of entire winged adult, 12.5 mm.; length of
entire dedlated adult, 6+ mm. (shrunken?); length of head (posterior to
tip of labrum), 1.8-1.85 mm.; length of head to anterior, 1.45 mm.; length of
pronotum, 0.8 mm.; length of fore wing, 9.5 mm.; length of hind tibia, 2.2
mm.; diameter of eye (long diameter), 0.45 mm.; width of head (at eyes),
1.8-1.85 mm.; width of pronotum, 1.6 mm.; width of fore wing, 3.3 mm.
The pronotum and wing are smaller than in translucens Haviland.
Major Soldier —Head yellow-brown, lighter than in R. (S.) solomonensis
Snyder but darker than in R. (S.) sanctae-crucis Snyder, with scattered long
hairs. Gula at middle more than half as wide as at widest part anteriorly.
oct. 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 405
Mandibles intermediate between those of sanctae-crucis and solomonensis
(Fig. 3a).
Antenna with 16 segments; third subclavate, longer than second or fourth
segment; fourth shorter than second segment.
Abdomen with tergites having short hairs and a row of long hairs at the
base.
Measurements, Major Soldier.—Length of entire soldier, 4.5 mm.; length
of head with mandibles, 2.4 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to
anterior), 1.6 mm.; length of left mandible, 1.2 mm.; length of pronotum, 0.6
mm.; length of hind tibia, 1.5 mm.:; width of head posteriorly, 1.65 mm.;
width of head anteriorly, 1.2 mm.; height of head at middle, 1 mm.; width
of pronotum, 1 to 1.1 mm.
Minor Soldier —Head yellow-brown; transverse rows (at least three) of
long hairs on head.
Mandibles with apex less incurved; teeth more parallel to the margin than
in solomonensis.
Antenna with 15 segments; third slightly shorter and more slender than
second or fourth segments.
Abdomen with tergites having denser hairs than in solomonensis.
Measurements, Minor Soldier —Length of entire soldier; 3.4 mm.; length
of head with mandibles. 1.6 mm.; length of head with labrum, 1.65 mm.;
length of head without mandibles (to anterior), 1 mm.; length of left mandi-
ble, 0.65 mm.; length of labrum (together with post-clypeus), 0.7 mm.;
length of pronotum, 0.45 mm.; length of hind tibia, 1.1 mm.; width of head
(at antennal sockets where widest), 0.95 mm.; height of head at middle,
0.7 mm.; width of pronotum, 0.65 mm.
Type locality —Uegi Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a series of major and minor soldiers and winged adult
collected with workers at the type locality by Dr. W. M. Mann, in July and
August, 1916. Named in honor of my wife Marjorie.
Type, Major Soldier—Cat. No. 15290, Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Cambridge, Mass.; morphotypes, minor soldier and winged adult; paratypes
in U.S. National Museum
Rhinotermes (S.) marjoriae is close to translucens Haviland, of Borneo,
Java, Macassar, and German New Guinea. The shape and teeth of the
mandibles of the soldiers appear to present excellent specific characters in
Schedorhinotermes (Fig. 3).
Rhinotermes (Schedorhinotermes) sanctae-crucis, new species
Major Soldier —Head yellow-brown, lighter colored than R. (S.) solomonensis
Snyder, from the Solomon Islands, the head larger, with fairly numerous,
scattered, long hairs. Gula at middle more than half as wide as at widest
part anteriorly.
Mandibles more slender and elongate than in solomonensis (fig. 3b and c),
the apex more slender and less incurved, and the marginal teeth farther from
apex.
Antenna with 16 or 17 segments; third segment subclavate, much longer
than second or fourth segment; fourth segment shorter than second.
Pronotum broader than in solomonensis.
Abdomen with denser hairs than in solomonensis.
Measurements, Major Soldier —Length of entire soldier, 5 mm.; length
406 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 17
of head with mandibles, 2.5-2.6 mm.; length of head without mandibles
(to anterior), 1.5 mm.; ‘length of left mandible, 1.15 mm.; length of pronotum,
0.5 mm.; length of hind tibia, 1.4 mm.; width of head posteriorly, eff roava0) 2
width of head anteriorly, 1.1 mm.; height of head, 0.9 mm.; width of pro-
notum: 1 mm.
Rhinotermes (S.) sanctae-crucis, except for the differences noted, has a
major soldier close to that of solomonensis; the head and mandibles present the
greatest differences.
Minor Soldier.—Head yellow-brown, lighter colored than in solomonensis,
smaller, but with denser long hairs, at least three transverse rows on head.
Mandibles with apex more elongate and slender and less incurved between
tip and marginal teeth.
Antenna broken, 11+ segments; third segment slightly smaller than second
or fourth segments.
Abdomen with denser hairs than in solomonensis.
Measurements, Minor Soldier.—Length of entire soldier, 3 mm.; length of
head with mandibles, 1.4 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to anterior),
0.8 mm.; length of head with labrum, 1.45 mm.; length of left mandible, 0.6
mm.; length of labrum (together with post- -clypeus), 0.65 mm.; - length of
pronotum, 0.35 mm.; length of hind tibia, 0.95 mm.; height of head at middle,
0.5 mm.; width of head (at antennal sockets, where widest), 0.8 mm.; width
or pronotum, 0.55 mm.
Type locality —Graciosa Bay, Santa Cruz Archipelago.
Described from two major soldiers and one minor soldier collected with
workers at the type locality by Dr. W. M. Mann in July, 1916.
Type, Major Soldier.—Cat. No. 15291, Museum of Comparative Zoology;
morphotype, minor soldier.
Rhinotermes (S.) sanctae-crucis has a lighter colored, smaller minor soldier
than solomonensis, with differences in mandibles and hairier head.
Rhinotermes (Schedorhinotermes) solomonensis, new species.
Major Soldier.—Head light castaneous brown, area of frontal gland lighter
colored; head quadrangular posteriorly; sides narrowing sharply and con-
verging anteriorly, rounded at posterior margin. Fontanelle hyaline, round,
distinct, opening flat, located on a line connecting antennal sockets; shallow
groove running from fontanelle to tip of labrum, widening anteriorly, with
margins darker colored than head; head with sparse, scattered, long hairs.
Eye spot hyaline, suboval, near rim of depression around antennal socket.
Labrum light yellow- brown, grooved medianly, tongue-shaped, longer than
broad, the apical part bilobed, not reaching tip of mandibles, with fringe of
short hairs and scattered, fairly long hairs. Gula at middle about half as
wide as at widest point anteriorly.
Mandibles light castaneous brown at base, reddish brown at apex, broad
at base, slender and incurved at apex, where pointed; left mandible with two
subequal pointed marginal teeth about at middle; right mandible with one
similar tooth located at a point between the two teeth on left mandible.
Antenna yellowish, with 16 segments; segments becoming longer and
broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment subclavate, longer than
second or fourth segments; fourth shorter than second segment; last segment
short, slender and subelliptical.
Pronotum light yellow-brown (margins darker), flat; anterior margin with
sides converging anteriorly to median where convex; sides straightly narrow
oct. 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 407
posteriorly; posterior margin shallowly concave at middle; margins with
scattered long hairs.
Legs tinged with yellow, slender, elongate, with long hairs.
Abdomen light yellow-brown (straw-colored); tergites with short hairs
and a row of long hairs at base; cerci and styli prominent.
Measurements, Major Soldier.—Length of entire soldier, 4.5 mm.; length
of head with mandibles, 2.35 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to
anterior), 1.5 mm.; length of left mandible, 0.95 mm.; length of pronotum,
0.5 mm.; length of ‘hind tibiae, 1.8 mm.; : height of head at ‘middle, 0.9 mm.;
width of head (posteriorly), 1.5 mm.; w idth of head (anteriorly), 1 mm.;
width of pronotum, 0.9 mm.
Minor Soldier —Head yellow-brown (area of frontal gland lighter), slightly,
arched; sides broadening from rounded posterior margin to antennal socket
thence narrowing toward anterior margin. Fontanelle hyaline, round, on a
line between antennae, a deep groove running from it to tip of labrum;
epicranial suture sharply declined anteriorly; head with a row of long hairs
anteriorly and posteriorly. Labrum light castaneous brown, slightly longer
than mandibles, broadest posteriorly; sides slightly concave; median groove
deep, broadening anteriorly; labrum widened at apex, where hyaline and
bilobed, with a dense fringe of short hairs and longer hairs.
Mandibles yellow at base, reddish brown at apex, slender, elongate, pointed
and incurved at apex; left mandible with two pointed marginal teeth on apical
third; right mandible with one tooth located at a point between the teeth on
left mandible.
Antenna light yellow-brown, with 15 segments, segments becoming longer
and broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment subclavate, short
and narrow, shorter than second or fourth segments; fourth shorter than
second segment; last segment short, slender, subelliptical.
Pronotum yellow -brown; anterior margin convex; posterior margin con-
cave medianally; margins w ‘ith long hairs.
Legs yellowish, slender, elongate, with long hairs.
Abdomen yellow-brown (straw-colored) ; tergites with short hairs and a row
of long hairs at base; cerci prominent.
Measurements, Minor Soldier -—Length of entire soldier, 3.7 mm.; length
of head with mandibles, 1.45-1.5 mm.; length of head without mandibles
(to anterior), 0.9 mm. - length of head with labrum, 1.55-1.6 mm.; length of
left mandible, 0.6 mm.; length of labrum (together with post-clypeus), 0.65
mm.; length of pronotum, 0.35-0.40 mm. length of hind tibia, 0.95 mm.;
height of head at middle, 0.5 mm.; width of head (at antennal sockets,
where widest), 0.8 mm.; width of pronotum, 0.55-0.6 mm.
Type locality— Pamua, San Cristobal Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a series of major and minor soldiers collected with workers
at the type locality in August, 1916, by Dr. W. M. Mann; also minor soldiers
collected by Mann at Auki, Malayta Island, Solomon Islands, May and June,
1916.
Type, Major Soldier—Cat. No. 15292, Museum of Comparative Zoology,
Cambridge, Mass.; morphotype, minor soldier, paratypes in the U.S. National
Museum.
Rhinotermes (S.) solomonensis is smaller than most species in this subgenus.
408 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 1
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
S. Kk. Anuison and G.S. TuNneELL, graduate students at Harvard University,
and C.8. Pracor, formerly with the research laboratory of the U.S. Industrial —
Alcohol Co., have joined the staff of the Geophysical pe Carnegie —
Institution of Washington. ii
ae
c
- The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page
if sent to the editors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month.
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
Botany.—New species of Agave from the Republic of Salvador. WiLL1aM TRELI
Entomology.—New termites from the Solomon Islands and Santa Cruz Archipel
THOR. Bi SNYDER. 235s: 2 WEA belo stig ath oh ace eteasceeeres
SEtawrthe Notts tp NEWS... cccsecccecssssetevsuesseesees
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: VeRNon L. Ket.oaa, esau Research Council.
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. SinsBex, Bureau of Stagdaed
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Sur
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Const and Geodetic Survey. ey
Vol. 15 NovEMBER 4, 1925 No. 18
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
‘OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Kinurp D. F. Hewett 8. J. Maucuiy
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams 8. A. RonwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GotpMAan G. W. Srosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Gricas J. R. Swanron
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
. E. WicHERSs
. PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
‘ Mr. Royat anp GuILrorp AvEs,
BALTIMORE, MaRyYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24,1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on Fay 8, 1918
d
3
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This Journat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to ; r
pronent a brief record of current scientific work in Washington. To this end it publishes:
1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNALis issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer —
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendaryears. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or ©
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors —
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints——Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. - 12pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00. iy
100 1.90 3 80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 -7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra aories § or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume is
Semi-monthly numbers.................- °
Monthly numberssieeg soo ee hip wate Os clavelddais ste tan eee eau eeu EPG
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences," and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. Cc.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other ublications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is sige aE,
within thirty days after date of the following issue. %
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special Bear
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Lame
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 NoveMBEr 4, 1925 No. 18
SPECTROSCOPY .—Some remarks on primed terms in the spectra
of the lighter elements! By Orro Laporte, Bureau of Standards.
(Communicated by W. F. Mrccmrs.)
I. In recent investigations by Heisenberg? and by Hund? it has
been shown that in series spectra of elements with several valence
electrons the quantum number which is related to the term character
SPD .:-.- - in the following well known way
iS) Ie Dig 13 SC Lab eoy ales
2 Fis Be GS (Gan o-o ic
is not identical with the azimuthal quantum & of the last bound elec-
tron, but has to be regarded as a resultant of the moments of momenta
of all the valence electrons, obtained by space quantization. In
building up a shell of orbits of equal n and k, as pointed out by Pauli,*
no two electrons may occur which possess the same values? of n, k,
M1, M2 or n, k, mj, m;. By applying these principles to a shell con-
sisting of 3; and 4, electrons, Hund was able to derive all the empiri-
cally found terms of the are spectra of Ca, Sc, Ti etc., from a few
low terms of their first spark spectra.
Russell and Saunders,® to whom we owe the idea of the quantization
of the individual k values, have shown in the case of Ca, that assum-
ing the nineteenth electron to be in a 4, orbit gives rise to the ordi-
nary are spectrum of SPD - - - andspd- - - terms, whereas assum-
1 Published by permission of the Director of the Bureau of Standards, Department of
Commerce.
2 Zs. f. Phys. 32:841. 1925.
3 Zs. f. Phys. 33: 345. 1925.
47Zs.{. Phys. 31:765. 1925.
5 Compare also S. Goudsmit Zs. f. Phys. 32: 794. 1925.
6 Astrophys. Journ. 61: 38. 1925.
409
410 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
ing it to be in a 3; orbit leads to the well known system of primed
terms.”
II. Recently an interesting (PP’) group of the doublet systemhas
been discovered by A. Fowler’ in the first spark spectrum of Si (Si
II) and by Bowen and Millikan® in the are spectrum of Al and the
analogous spark spectra P III, S IV, Cl V and C II, N III, OIV.
The low term ?P;,2, well known from the series 2P;,. — 12S, and 2P; 2
— n*D»2,3, combines with a very high (in Al I even negative) term
2P,.5 whose separations are of the same order of magnitude as that of
2P,5. In their explanation of the (?PP’) group Bowen and Millikan
proceed in the following way: If the (Al) atom is in its normal state,
two of its electrons are in 3s, one in 3p orbits. We obtain the 2P’
state, when one electron is in 3s and two in 3p.
The author cannot agree with such considerations. It is impossible
and in contradiction with the general formulation of the alternation
law to have several electrons move in the same doublet-energy-
diagram and to place several electrons in the same s or p orbit. On
the contrary the investigations of Wentzel on double electron jumps
and especially the recent successful work of Hund have shown that
the are spectrum has to be built up from the spectrum of the ionized
atom; and that all the terms of an even arc spectrum (let us say)
have to be derived from the odd terms of its first spark spectrum.
(The same objection holds also for the explanation of the *P —
8P’ group of Mg I, Al II etc., as given by Bowen and Millikan.)
In order to understand the explanation given below, it is of impor-
tance to know that besides the PP’) group numerous other groups
exist in the ‘three electron system” of Si II’, which ap-
parently involve a double jump: these are the combinations of
n’P and n2F with a 2D»,; term, which Fowler calls X,,2, because it
does not belong to any of the established term sequences. In its
combinations with Al = 1 this term reminds us of the terms #P”
and *F” of Ca which Russell and Saunders found combining with
8D. We therefore propose the notation D”,,; for X:». The explana-
tion of *P’ and 2D” must be given simultaneously, as they are likely
7 Dr. G. Wentzel kindly informs the author that new data on these terms in Ca, Sr
and especially Ba are being published by himself and Dr. Bechert.
8 Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. A225: 1. 1925.
9 Phys. Rev. 26: 150, 1925; Proc. Nat. Acad. 11: 329. 1925.
10 A. Fowler, 1.c. 8. In CII, PIII, SIV, also an x term has been found, but it
seems to bea single level. (Fowler, Proc. Roy. Soc. 105: 299. 1924; Millikan and
Bowen, Phys. Rev. 25: 600. 1925.) Since the analysis of these spectra is not very com-
plete we must leave it undecided whether these terms correspond to our ?S” or 7D’.
nov. 4, 1925 LAPORTE: SPECTRA OF THE LIGHTER ELEMENTS 411
to arise from similar configurations. They cannot come from the
same term of the preceding spark spectrum, in which case they ought
to have almost equal magnitudes like numerous term groups in Ca,
Se, Ti, ete. In Si II the terms in question have the magnitudes:
=P, = 131500; 2D”; = 76500; ?P’, = 48050 cm—.
A term °S,2P, 2D - - - of the ordinary doublet — series system
with 1 = 1, 2, 3 --- belongs obviously to the arrangement
iem—sleiccse— lio le owe Ineklundssimotation weuniay,
write 2P (443) for the lowest term of Al I, Sill, etc. The only other
simple configuration which we may regard as responsible for other
terms is $33o0rk; =1;k, =2;k; = 2. The configuration 4 3 corre-
sponds to a singlet and a triplet P term. We obtain the following
terms by adding one more # electron and observing Pauli’s rule as we
have now two equivalent 3, electrons.
i 3p
ZN
VA | IN
Vie IN
pS Bh yey as ae! DY?
This is the only reasonable way of obtaining the terms ?P’ and 2D”.
(The terms 28S” and ¢#P’ are not yet found.) As consequences of our
scheme are the following combination relations for Si, which, of
course, cannot be proved yet on account of the lack of higher series
members:
oo 2P — co 2)" — 315 — 33P = 39330
o 2=P — o 2p’ = 315 — 3!P = 82860
We have used total quantum numbers and numerical values for the
Si spectrum. It may be noted that 3?P — 32D” = 55000 and 32P
— 3?P’ = 83706, but we do not wish to attach too much weight to the
agreement in the second case. Finally, we call attention to the fact
that we have used orbits with total quantum number 3 and 2 (for
Boron) only. We therefore have no difficulty in understanding that the
frequencies of (2PP’) follow the irregular doublet law in the series Al
I, Si II, ete., and BI, CII, ete. We predict the same for the groups
PD”) also.
Ill. Since the new development of the theory of series spectra has
shown that it is possible to produce terms involving excitation of two
electrons in several different ways, one might as well abandon Went-
zel’s idea that in the *P’ terms of Mg I, Al II etc., the next to the last
x
412 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
electron is in a 3; orbit, as it is in the primed terms of Ca, Sr, Ba.
We believe it to be in a 3, orbit. This gives the following scheme:
ae le
1G" 3p’ iD”,
38, 1P and *D being forbidden according to Pauli’s principle.4! The
configuration $ 3 is the only one which gives new terms, as # 4 is
equivalent to + 3 and a possible configuration $ 3 is not allowed to
combine with ?P (4 #) and *P(4 3) according to Heisenberg’s new
selection rule. Wecan now understand why no other primed terms
of the triplet system were found in Mg, Be, ete., whereas in Ca, Sr,
Ba numerous primed terms are known.
If the suggested configuration is true we have the relation:
2 §P — x» 3p’ = 328 — 32P for Mg I, AI II, ete.
= 2°5 — 22P for Be I, B II, ete:
We give a few numerical values:
reo ne
roo alee
33P — 38P’ 325 — 32P 22P — 22p’ 25— 22P
Whereas cietaaystes 36000 35700 Bests ie diyere tebe 7700 32000
ANE ery h maa 56700 54000 BE: She hospriees. 61500 48400
'S) Meacoeeomaranes 77000 71700 Gi. notice owen 85100 64500
PR AAs alas aistemens¢ 97000 89500 INR Breet ciate 108300 80000
epee oewlord tions 117000 107200 O erijectereistae elas 131000
Cl acters ers 137000 125000
The agreement with the above asserted relation is quite satisfactory,
although we do not regard it as conclusive proof.
We are led to a much more convincing result by applying Heisen-
berg’s” formula for the computation of term separations:
1
ki? = ko? a l? — F
a ket — ik? Se
1
ve 4
i) = 9Ge De) ; ——
| 6 ki ¢ -3) Ge)
where /, and i» represent respectively the two azimuthal quanta
of the two electrons, and / is their resultant, the quantum number
which defines the term empirically. c(k,) and c(k2) are constants
which are characteristic for the two electron orbits. In the special
case of kz = 34 we get, because! = ki =k:
Agi c
Av (3,k) =4979 + 17.
11 Tt is very probable that a level which coincides with 5D represents the thus pre-
dicted 1D” term, because its magnitude is almost equal to that of =P’ (Compare Green
and Peterson, Astrophys. Journ. 61: 301. 1924.)
27s. f. Phys. 32: 841. 1925.
Noy. 4, 1925 PAPERS ON VOLCANOLOGY: AMERICAN GEOPHYSICAL UNION 413
But we obtain the same expression by computing the separation of a
term whose two electrons have the same azimuthal quanta k, =
ke = k; hence:
Av (4, k) = Av (k, k).
Putting k = 3 we have the result that the ordinary *P term in the
“two valence-electron-system’ *P (4 $) and the primed P term
sp’ ({ 3) have the same separations. This agrees fully with the
experimental facts. It has been known for a long time, that the
GPP’) groups of Mg I, Al II etc., and Be I, etc., for man almost per-
fectly symmetrical group of five equidistant lines on account of the
equality of the A P and A P’. The main lines *P, — °P’;, and *P, —
’P’, therefore fall together and can only be separated with spectro-
graphs of high resolving power.¥
It may be pointed out that this fact, which distinguishes empiri-
cally the @PP’) groups of MgI, Bel and their analogous spark spec-
tra from the (?PP’) groups of Ca, Sr, Ba, cannot be obtained by
assuming the next to the last electron to be in an n; or % orbit.
Another advantage of our viewpoint is, that in using orbits with the
same total quantum number (2 for Be, etc., 3 for Mg, etc.) we are able
to understand the important discovery of Millikan and Bowen that
the (PP’) groups follow approximately the irregular doublet law.
VOLCANOLOGY.—Scientific papers and discussions at the 1925
meeting of the Section of Volcanology, American Geophysical
Union.}
The fifth Annual Meeting? of the Section of Volcanology of the American
Geophysical Union was held in the Board Room, National Academy of
Sciences, on April 30, 1925. Abstracts of the reports of committees have
been published.’ The following pages contain the original papers or abstracts
thereof, together with a report on the discussions, prepared by the Secretary
and approved by the speakers.
The report of the Chairman of the Section, presented before the general
meeting of the Union, is also included, as it was received from Hawaii too late
for publication in Bulletin 53.
Rozert B. Sosman, Secretary.
% For Bel comp. E. Back, Ann. d. Phys. (4) 70: 333. 1923; for Mg I: J. B. Green and
M. Peterson, Astrophys. Journ. 61: 301. 1924.
1 Received Sept. 11, 1925.
2 This is the second meeting at which a program of scientific papers has been pre-
sented. The first of these meetings included the Symposium on Hot Springs held in 1923,
the papers having been published in Journal of Geology, 32: 177-225, 291-310, 373-399,
449-471. 1924.
2 National Research Council, Bull. 53: 80. 1925.
414 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
Laccoliths and sills. W.M. Davis, Harvard University, Cam-
bridge, Massachusetts.
In the Triassic rocks of the Connecticut Valley and New Jersey
there occur both overflow sheets such as the Hanging Hills by Meriden
and the Watchung Mountains back of Newark, and intrusive silts
such as West Rock by New Haven and the Palisades of the Hudson.
Both types came into place before monoclinal tilting and faulting
occurred. Their composition is practically the same.
The horizontal spread of the sills may be 30 to 50 times their thick-
ness. Laccoliths, on the contrary, usually have a horizontal spread
only 5 or 10 times their thickness. The mechanism of the formation
of laccoliths is best treated by Gilbert‘ in his description of the Henry
Mountains; but there has been no corresponding treatment of the
mechanism of sills.
The simplest explanation for the difference between sills and lacco-
liths is found in a difference in the fluidity of the molten rock, sills
being more fluid and laccoliths being viscous; but this explanation
will not hold for the laccoliths of the Henry Mountains. It appears
necessary to believe that the laccoliths there began with the horizon-
tal penetration of a very thin layer, which was thickened vertically
after its horizontal spread was accomplished; for it does not seem
possible that horizontal strata could first have been bent and then
straightened out again, as would be necessary if the laccolith began
as a small dome at the center and spread outward and upward.
Gilbert gave good reasons for believing that a laccolithie intrusion
ceases to spread and begins to swell when the lifting force, which
increases with the square of the radius of spread, comes to exceed the
resistance to flexure in the overlying strata, which increases with the
radius. The rate of intrusion may also be a factor. Rapid intru-
sion may demand a thickening of the intrusion and hence a flexure of
the overlying strata when the limiting size of a laccolith is reached,
while slow intrusion may give opportunity for a wide-spreading sill
of small thickness.
Discussion. H. F. Ret suggested that the mechanical relation between the
radius and the square of the radius meritioned above would be dependent
also upon the rigidity of the strata.
W. Cross referred to his discussion, published in 1895,° showing that the
*G. K. Gilbert, Geology of the Henry Mountains, U. 8. Geogr. Geol. Survey Rocky
Mtn. Region, 1877 and 1880.
5 W. Cross, The laccolitic mountain groups of Colorado, Utah and Arizona, U.S. Geol.
Survey, Ann. Rep. 14: 157-241. 1895.
Noy. 4, 1925 PAPERS ON VOLCANOLOGY: AMERICAN GEOPHYSICAL UNION 415
intrusive rock type of the Henry Mountains laccoliths occurs not only in
other isolated mountain groups, more or less similar to the Henry Mountains,
but also in the structurally complex mountains of Colorado. It occurs
throughout the sedimentary section from the base of the Paleozoic to lower
Eocene and in all manner of intermediate forms from simplest sill to ideal
laccolith, as well as in many unsymmetrical shapes. Further observation
since 1895 amply confirms the generalization that while laccoliths closely
comparable with Gilbert’s ideal one occur mainly in the Cretaceous beds,
all other intrusive forms of the same magma may also occur in them.
The mechanical problem of the ideal laccolith of Gilbert is inseparable,
geologically, from the broad physical problem presented by the wide range
of occurrences of the rock type in question.
Incidentally, Hobbs’ hypothesis that the laccoliths of the Plateau Province
represent shale fused in situ ignores the known facts as to this diversified
occurrence.
F. E. Wricut mentioned the sills in the Karroo formation of South Africa
(Permian to Jurassic). Sills are very numerous but there are no laccoliths.
The sills follow the bedding. Dutoit assumes that the underlying strata fall
away as the sill spreads. The molten basalt and the shale do not differ much
in density. The area as a whole is cut into many blocks. Differential
vertical movement is actually shown in outcrops.
Gases in volcanic activity. ARTHUR L. Day, Geophysical Labora-
tory, Carnegie Institution of Washington.
In explaining voleanism, data are going to be needed on the follow-
ing points:
(1) The fluidity of the molten rock when gases are present as con-
trasted with the loss of fluidity after the gases have escaped.
(2) The state of the material beneath the lava lake of Kilauea dur-
ing the years preceeding the explosions of May 1924. During these
explosions the size of the hole was increased about ten times, but
among the debris there is no vitreous material and there is no trace
even of contact of the fragments with a liquid. This underlying
material has always been concealed by talus. It may have been
relatively cold, the lake being fed through narrow tubes extending to
greater depths. There has been evidence of lava inlets at no less than
three different places. The absence of clearly distinguished tides is
perhaps due to the small depth of the lake. Outbreaks of lava at
points near each other horizontally but at different levels show that
there could not have been hydrostatic equilibrium. These outbreaks
may have differed in their points of origin and also in their tempera-
ture and pressure. The absence of chemical equilibrium in the gases
is consistent with these facts.
416 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
Discussion. In reply to questions from E. W. Brown and W. M. Davis as
to the density of the lava when full of gas the speaker stated that there were
no quantitative data; the density varies from that of a clear liquid containing
dissolved gas but no bubbles, over to a light foam consisting mostly of gas
bubbles. The gas occurs both in the form of large free bubbles and in the
form of bubbly lava masses moving asa unit. The density of the lava when
saturated with dissolved gas is probably not very different from its density
when free from gas.
In reply to a question from Davin Wuirs, T. A. Jaacar stated that the
geothermal gradient had not been measured in the Hawaiian Islands except
in a shallow boring in the Kilauea crater. Down to eighty feet there was no
change in temperature and the temperature was lower than in the rocks
outside of the crater. The temperature is probably controlled largely by
gases and water travelling through the rocks. In reply to a question from
Pror. Davis, Dr. JAGGAR gave the approximate dimensions of the voleano as
follows: diameter of the mountain 60 miles (100 km.), diameter of the crater
3 miles (5 km.), diameter (1925) of the pit about 0.6 mile (1 km.). Sonic
soundings show that the slope of the mountain is a continuous curve from
above sea-level down to a depth of 16,000 feet (4.9 km.).
Plus and minus volcanicity. T. A. Jaccar, Hawaiian Volcano
Observatory, U. 8. Geological Survey.
The explosive eruption of Kilauea in 1924 was dominantly a sub-
sidence and an engulfment of wall rock. There were ejected 28 mil-
lion cubic feet (0.0008 cubic kilometer) of rock and there were engulfed
7 billion cubic feet (0.21 km.*). This engulfed matter would make an
underground fill in the form of an upright cylinder of breccia 3000
feet deep and 1500 feet wide (about 1 x 4km.) The fill thus extends
below sea-level.
The ratio of ejecta to engulfed matter is 1:253. This ejection-
engulfment ratio was here measured for the first time and the maxi-
mum enlargement of the pit by engulfment occurred after the maxi-
mum of explosion had passed. Collapse and engulfment are com-
mon at Kilauea at the end of short lava-flow periods without any
explosion. Explosion appears to be pseudo-voleanic, due to meteoric
water, and confinement of steam due to lowering of the lava column .
below ground-water. While the Kilauea engulfments are in progress,
the surrounding country tilts inward; the centripetal tilt amounted
to 70 seconds at the Observatory in two months, April-June 1924.
These phenomena may be called ‘‘minus voleanicity,”’ in contrast to
“plus voleanicity”’ characteristic of rising lava with expulsion of lava
gases, centrifugal tilting, overflows, doming of country rock, and ris-
ing temperatures where an active solfatara is succeeded by incan-
nov. 4, 1925 PAPERS ON VOLCANOLOGY: AMERICAN GEOPHYSICAL UNION 417
descence. Both plus and minus classes of volcanic change have been
measured at Kilauea. The actual ground levels measurably change.
The normal sequence in a cycle begins with plus movements, the
voleano yields, and minus movements then lead to engulfment with
or without explosion. Minus voleanicity is dominant in all post-
Tertiary volcanism, with down-faulted craters, much explosion,
and decadence of external lava activity. Lava activity had reached
a maximum in Tertiary time.
It seems probable that lava pressure creates intrusion and a dom-
ing strain in the larger crust units, whereas yielding of edifice, effu-
sion, gas collapse with lowering of lava, plugging of craters, inrush
of ground-water and steam explosion are features of the topographic
units. Engulfment may take place among the larger units’ where
general collapse follows outflow. Thus engulfment may occur in
upright chasms amid intrusives such as form long batholiths. It is
a question of interest whether such engulfment in deep voids occa-
sions earthquake.
Phenomena of engulfment and consequent ‘“‘graben”’ faulting apply
to all types of eruption. Rhythmic phenomena, with alternation of
magmatic pressure and crustal yielding, may be compounded of a
greater or less amount of heating by oxidation of magmatic gas as
suggested by Shepherd.
The ratio of active volcanoes to extinct is 1:5. Pseudo-eruption is
dominant today. Since 1500 A.D. 72 cubic miles (800 km.*) of explo-
sive matter have been ejected on the Earth and only 12 cubic miles
(50 km.*) of lava. By the 1:253 ratio the engulfed matter would
equal 18,000 cubic miles (75,000 km.*) for this 425 years; if engulf-
ment for the same period were active amid intrusive magma under
the recently “extinct’’ volcanoes, another 90,000 cubic miles (375,000
km.*) of crustal matter might have been engulfed and assimilated.
The visible lava flows of this period, by this reasoning, are as 12 to
108,000 in comparison with the volume of the possible intrusive
breccias of the volcanic districts of the world with autogenous heat
supply. This takes no account of the Tertiary and earlier volcanic
districts of the crust wherein intrusion and engulfment may be
seismically and thermally active on a gigantic scale.
418 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
Note on the chemical significance of engulfment at Kilauea. HE. 8.
SHEPHERD, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of
Washington.
The problem of the energy supply at Kilauea is one of the most
puzzling. The temperature of the lava lake has been found to be a
scant hundred degrees above the crystallizing temperature of the
lava and this temperature is maintained over amazingly long periods.
This temperature is that of the hottest lava observed and therefore
seems to negative the idea that the heat is maintained by the rise of
heated lava from below. It will be remembered: that Jaggar’s
measurements of temperature and depth showed that the highest
temperature was just below the lake surface instead of being deter-
mined by a continuous rise with depth as had been expected. It is
also observed that the places at which the lava is rising steadily are
apparently cooler and much quieter than places where the lava is
flowing back down carrying the lake crusts with it. These as well
as other characteristics of the voleano led Jaggar to his ‘‘surface
combustion” hypothesis. He deduced that the foundering crusts
carried down entrapped oxygen which combining with the voleano
gases furnished a part of the necessary heat to maintain the lake
temperature. This hypothesis is undoubtedly sound as far as it can
reach but the amount of oxygen thus obtainable seems insufficient
to furnish the energy required.
It has seemed to us that the problem was essentially a gas problem
and for that reason the collection and analysis of the gases from the
volcano has been followed up with some vigor. These collections,
culminating in the splendid 1919 collection made by Professor Jaggar,
have supplied us with all that we may hope to learn from the gases as
they reach the surface. If we review the entire series of gases col-
lected from this crater the most striking thing about them is that they
are almost completely oxidized. They average about 80 per cent
by volume of H,O with a scant one per cent of components capable
of further oxidation. Obviously the gases as they reach the surfate
are incapable of doing any significant amount of chemical work.
It seems improbable that bubbling steam through the lava could
maintain the temperature, no matter how superheated the steam
might have been at its source, nor is it readily believed that the neces-
sary amount of gases could be forced lengthwise of the several thou-
sand feet of semi-solid magma column at a sufficient speed, no matter
® Read by the Chairman in the absence of the author.
Noy. 4, 1925 PAPERS ON VOLCANOLOGY: AMERICAN GEOPHYSICAL UNION 419
what pressures might be postulated. It is one thing to assume that
at a depth of a few thousand feet the solubility of the gas in the
magma may reach several thousand liters per kilogram and a differ-
ent matter to imagine the mechanism whereby such a gas could be
moved at relatively high speed up through the solid or pasty column.
There remains the possibility of obtaining heat if the magmatic
gases contain a reasonable amount, say five per cent, of combustible
gases which can be oxidized in the upper part of the lava column.
Here, however, we face the difficulty of applying our reagent, oxygen
in some available form, at the proper place and in sufficient quantity.
To the writer it seems unnecessarily hazardous to assume that atmos-
pheric oxygen or even water can diffuse through the volcano edifice
and into the lava column, surrounded as it is by its chilled conduit
lining.
It is at this point that Jaggar’s recent observation of engulfment
comes to our rescue. According to this observation the recession of
the lava at the great eruption precipitated something like seven
billion cubic feet of ash and oxidized wall rock several thousand feet
deep into the heart of the mountain. The ferric iron in this breccia
may easily reach five per cent and probably approaches the complete
oxidation of theiron present. The new lava frothsits way up through
this oxidized breccia. On a small scale this mechanism has been
frequently observed and such an occurrence was photographed by
Day in 1912. It is clear that we have not only a porous breccia
which is a good heat insulator but also an ample supply of available
oxygen which can react with the oxidizable magmatic gases.
While such calculations are far from precise it can be shown that
if the ferric iron of the breccia be only three per cent, which is reduced
by the magmatic gases again to ferrous iron, enough heat can be thus
obtained to raise nearly two million cubic meters (0.002 km.*) of
breccia from 20° to 1200°C. We have not taken into account other
sources of heat and it is of course obvious that it is not necessary to
remelt the entire breccia. The essential point is that a supply of
oxygen sufficient to maintain the lava temperature is thus available.
This explanation has several advantages. It does not require
that the upper portion of the lava column be fresh lava continuously
brought up from great depths. It avoids the continuous solid—we
have too long regarded it as liquid—column through which the gases
would be compelled to rise at a rapid rate, and it explains the chan-
nels and tunnels in the lake bottom which have been observed at
times of sudden draining off of the lake. We conceive the mecha-
420 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
nism more or less as follows: the gas-charged magma starts frothing
up some crack in the breccia. It fuses out a small and probably
tortuous channel for itself taking up oxygen and being heated as it
rises. Probably many such channels are formed. When the oxygen
supply is exhausted these passages freeze and others are formed. It
is not necessary to assume that the breccia is ever completely
remelted, in fact the upper portion of it is being constantly renewed
during the long periods of quiet activity. At the same time the brec-
cia may be raised or lowered by the forces acting on the main magma
in depth in whatever manner seems best. The eccentric currents in
the lake find here an easy explanation.
In passing, attention is called to the significance of engulfment in
concentrating the rock distillates, that is, the less volatile constitu-
ents. For example, sulfur is notably abundant around volcanic
vents. This has led some to suppose that the magmatic gases at
volcanoes were different in character from magmatic gases in general.
Such an assumption is unnecessary. During the prolonged periods of
quiet activity this relatively non-volatile element is concentrated in
the cooler parts of the breccia and walls. Engulfment continues
the working-over and further concentration of this element while the
more volatile constituents escape. In a similar way many elements
present in minute amounts in the magma become concentrated until
with the decadence of the vent there is only enough energy to bring
them to the surface and hold them there.
Discussion. F. E. Wrrcur mentioned the kimberlite pipes of South Africa.
These consist of brecciated material and contain, at depth, fragments of the
Beaufort shale which belongs stratigraphically 2000 feet (0.6 km.) higher and
has since been removed by erosion. These pipes have been followed to a
depth of 3500 feet (1.1 km.) where they have narrowed down to a size too small
to pay for further deepening. Dr. JagGar mentioned the throwing out of
sedimentary rocks in explosions at Vesuvius.
In reply to questions from H. T. Stearns and E. T. ALien, the speaker
stated that the origin of aa lavais not yet clear. It may result from a remelt-
ing of the breccia. The basaltic magma below carries the gases which rise
and by their reactions produce the heat for remelting the breccia. Mauna
Iki, the new mountain of 1920, may be of this origin. The aa lava, however,
contains no visible solid fragments but may contain microscopic, or nearly
microscopic, fragments.
L. H. Apams mentioned the possible effect of such fragments in causing
gas to be released from a super-saturated liquid although it would be held in
solution if the liquid were clear and homogeneous.
nov. 4, 1925 PAPERS ON VOLCANOLOGY: AMERICAN GEOPHYSICAL UNION 421
Gravity and underground lava. F. E. Wricut, Geophysical Labora-
tory, Carnegie Institution of Washington.
One characteristic of voleanoes is the transfer of large quantities of
material from one place to another. The methods used in geophysi-
eal field surveys may, therefore, be applicable. The problems are, in
some respects, similar to those met with in oil exploration. The
E6tvés torsion balance is particularly sensitive in showing the varia-
tions of gravitational attraction due to inhomogeneities beneath the
surface. This method might be applied near a volcano, to find the
distribution before and after an explosion. Similarly, methods for
detecting changes in the Earth’s magnetic field (dip-needle, magnetom-
eter), or in electromagnetic fields produced in the Harth, may be of
service: also the seismic methods and possibly the new sonic methods.
Discussion. In reply to remarks by Davin Warts and T. A. Jaaaar, the
speaker stated that the price asked for the Eétvés balance seems too high;
that the photographic apparatus sometimes attached to it is complicated
and not necessary in field work. The balance has a sensitivity of 1 x 107°
dynes per gram. W. D. Lampert remarked that the balance measures the
gravity gradient so that the effect varies inversely as the cube of the distance;
nearby inhomogeneities, therefore, have a large effect.
Tides in lava. KE. W. Brown, Yale University, New Haven,
Connecticut.
Solar tides are difficult to distinguish from atmospheric effects.
Lunar tides, on the contrary, are distinguishable with certainty by
analyses of the records over a number of days. Observations by the
staff at Kilauea have been made at intervals of 15 to 20 minutes over
a period of 27 days. ‘These indicate tides in the lava crust on the
bottom of the pit of Halemaumau with periods of one half and one
lunar month and an amplitude of about 3 to 5 cm. but their existence
is not certain. On the other hand, the absence of such tides is also
not proved. ‘The ocean tides may have an effect through the inter-
mediate distortion of the Earth’s crust. A fuller report has been
recently published.’
Discussion. In reply to questions from A. L. Day and T. A. Jaaear, the
speaker stated that the Earth’s bodily tide would probably not be detectable
in the volcano. It does not seem likely that the release of gases could be
influenced by the bodily tide.
Dr. Jaccar suggested that a structure which was long enough in an east
and west direction might show some effect. There is a ridge under the
7. W. Brown, Amer. Journ. Sci. 9: 95-112. 1925.
422 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
Pacific 2000 miles or more in length, with Hawaii at one end and it is con-
ceivable that the bodily tides might affect any volcanic phenomenon which
depended on movements of this ridge as a unit.
W. D. Lampert mentioned that tides had been distinctly observed in
certain lignite mines in Bohemia which had been flooded with water. Prof.
Brown suggested that the water levels at the two ends of a pipe leading
from the crust in the pit to the outside slope of the mountain would show the
effect of the bodily tide. Dr. JaGGar referred to the use of the horizontal
pendulum as a very sensitive instrument for the measurement of tilt, whether
due to tides or to the movements of the volcano.
Oxygen and volcanism. Roxsert B. Sosman, Geophysical Labora-
tory, Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Jaggar and Shepherd have called attention to the great importance
of oxidation reactions in the activity at Kilauea, but it has been diffi-
cult to find a means of supplying oxygen beneath the floor of the
crater in amounts sufficient to explain the reactions. The phase rule
relationships in the system iron-oxygen and in silicates containing
the oxides of iron would allow of a possible supply of oxygen from
the deep interior of the Earth.
From researches on the systems Fe:O, Fe: C:O, and Fe: H:0O,
it appears very probable that the oxide FeO resembles other oxides
of the metals of the eighth group of the Periodic System in being
stable only at higher temperatures, decomposing as the temperature
falls. The decomposition temperature for FeO appears to be between
500 and 600° and occurs according to the following reaction:
4FeO = Fe;0; + Fe
It is entirely possible, though not yet shown experimentally, that a
similar relation may hold, at some temperature, for a given silicate
melt containing iron oxides, and that as the temperature falls metal-
lic iron and oxygen may be separated from the liquid. | Under ordi-
nary conditions the metallic iron would sink towards the center of the
Earth. Under special conditions such as a rapid rush of deep-seated
magma, metallic iron might be carried along with the liquid. This
would account for the appearance of metallic iron in the basaltic
rocks of Greenland and elsewhere.
The oxygen would normally rise toward the surface, producing
oxidation reactions at higher levels. This would account for the
known occurrence of such reactions at levels below the circulation of
meteoric water, such as the formation of sulfates and of martite.
The hypothesis would also explain the existence of oxygen in the
nov. 4, 1925 PAPERS ON VOLCANOLOGY: AMERICAN GEOPHYSICAL UNION 423
atmosphere of the Earth in spite of the fact that its presence there
seems at first inconsistent with an originally molten body whose
supply of oxygen was so deficient that it now possesses an iron core.
Discussion. DDavip Wuite referred to experiments by 8. C. Lind and others
on the bombardment of water by alpha particles and its decomposition into
hydrogen and oxygen as a possible source of deep-seated oxygen. Dr.
Sosman replied that if this were the origin of atmospheric oxygen, the quan-
tity of helium in the atmosphere should be larger than it now is, unless it can
be shown that the helium, like hydrogen, would be nearly all lost by diffusion
into space. T. A. JaGGarR emphasized the view that ferric oxide might be
the principal reacting substance in the rocks underlying Kilauea, according to
Shepherd’s hypotheses, and that neither atmospheric oxygen .nor deep-
seated oxygen would necessarily have to be called upon directly to account
for the deep-seated oxidation of gas described by Shepherd. Keeping up the
supply of ferric oxide over long periods of time is still another problem.
Other communications
H. T. Stearns, of the U.S. Geological Survey, presented some informal
notes on the present condition of the volcanoes in Japan, Java and Italy,
from observations which he had made on a trip around the World during the
months just preceding. In Japan, Oshima and Sakurajima were steaming,
Kirishima was in a fumarolic stage, Aso had been recently explosive, Osama
was smoking, and Fujiyama was quiet.
In the Philippines, a lake was found in the crater of Taal with no activity
visible.
In Java, the volcano Papandajan 1s about to become eruptive, to judge from
the increasing activity of hot springs; liquid sulfur is being shot out 200 feet
at a new solfatara and there have been eleven phreatic explosions in the past
few months. Galoenggoeng and Tangon Kaprahol are steaming, Bromo
has just completed an eruptive cycle. Smeroe shows its usual activity,
giving off jets of steam at three-minute intervals. At Merapi, a volcano
of the Fujiyama type, the dome of andesite is expanding. At Lamongan,
seismic activity indicates that a dome is rising.
In Italy, at Stromboli, there were two boccas, one of which was shooting
lava to a height of about 120 feet at intervals of 3 to 15 minutes. The tem-
perature is increasing at Vuleano. Etna and Vesuvius are both in a Strom-
bolian phase.
In closing the meeting, Dr. Jaccar spoke of the possible use of the sonic
sounding method, as developed by Hayes, in studying volcano structures.
He thought also that some method of direct listening to underground sounds of
volcanic origin would yield valuable information, provided that some method
of recording these sounds could be developed. It will be necessary first that
the rocks involved shall be calibrated with artificial explosions. The use of a
424 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
water-well for the transmission of sounds from rock to instrument, the latter
being suspended in the water, gives promise of improvements in the record.
Progress of volcanology during 1924.8 T. A. Jaacar, Hawaiian
Voleano Observatory, U. 8. Geological Survey.
During the past year volcanologic services have made progress in
Java, Japan, the Philippines, Hawaii and Italy, a new service with a
travelling investigator has been established in New Zealand, and a
new service has been proposed in Reunion. Provision has been made
by the International Union for international libraries at Naples,
Catania, and Hawaii. The Hawaiian observatory was transferred
July 1, 1924 from the U. 8. Weather Bureau to the U. 8. Geological
Survey. Seismology has been transferred from the Weather Bureau
to the U. 8S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, which will result in placing
teleseismic work under the latter. Under the new administrations
voleanology thus becomes attached to physical geology in Hawaii,
California, Alaska and the Philippines; the Carnegie Institution of
Washington investigates macroseismic problems in California; and
the Coast and Geodetic Survey cares for those world problems of
mathematical seismology which are closely related to gravity and
magnetism.
Dr. Friedlaender’s Volcanological Review (Zeitschrift fiir Vulkan-
ologie) continues to be the best of its kind. The Section of Volcan-
ology of the International Union is now publishing a useful Bulletin
Volcanologique edited by Dr. Malladra at the University of Naples.
A new series of Annali of the Royal Vesuvian Observatory is
announced. ‘The Hawaiian Volcano Research Association is issuing
a weekly Volcano Letter. Two splendid monographs have been issued
by the Geophysical Laboratory of the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington, on ‘‘Vesuvius” and on “Lassen Peak.’”’ The world of volcan-
ology very greatly needs publications on routine activities of the
volcanoes of Chile, Iceland, Galapagos, Kamchatka and Hast Africa.
Some volcanic events of the year have been the explosive eruption
of Kilauea in May, 1924, continued upbuilding of the lava floor of
the Vesuvian crater, somewhat alarming signs of growing heat and
activity in Papandayan, and an eruption on Albemarle Island of the
Galapagos group.
8 Report of the Chairman of the Section of Volcanology to the Sixth Annual Meeting
of the American Geophysical Union, May 1, 1925. Previous reports by chairmen of this
section have been published as follows: First Annual Meeting, H.S. Washington, Proc.
National Acad. Sci. 6: 583-592. 1920. (Reprint No. 11, National Research Council).
Fourth Annual Meeting, A. L. Day, National Res. Council, Bull. 41: 71-73. 1923.
Nov. 4, 1925 FISHER: NEW CACTUS WEEVIL FROM TEXAS 425
The Anderson-W ood torsion seismometer promises great usefulness
in macroseismic measurement with high magnifications. Optical
magnifications of two million have recently been attained in the
Wiechert laboratory in Géttingen. The Eétvés balance and electri-
cal sonic ranging both appear applicable to voleanology. William-
son, Adams, Washington, Bowie, Jeffreys, Holmes, and Joly have
produced important discussions of the interior of the Earth. Brown
has discussed the lava tide at Kilauea. Oxidation, tilt, creep, and
changes of elevation are becoming increasingly measurable and
demonstrable in relation to underground magma; there are growing
new cooperations in voleanological science; and slowly methods of
measurement are emerging which promise much for purposes of fore-
casting, and for setting the observer free from dependence on such
discontinuous phenomena as “eruptions.”
ENTOMOLOGY.—A new cactus weevil from Texas. W.S. FISHER,
Bureau of Entomology, U. S. Department of Agriculture.
(Communicated by 8. A. RoHWER).
The cactus weevil described below was obtained in connection with
the prickly-pear insect investigations being conducted by the Com-
monwealth of Australia at Uvalde, Texas, and was sent for identifica-
tion by Alan P. Dodd. Mr. Dodd is anxious to have a name for the
species to use in papers dealing with cactus insects.
Gerstaeckeria (Philopuntia) doddi, new species
Black, with the antennae reddish brown; clothed with white, yellowish,
and brownish scales. Head with the front sulcate, and densely clothed with
white and yellowish scales; beak long, shining, densely punctate, and some-
times longitudinally carinate, in which case the surface is rugosely punctate;
eyes rounded above, acute beneath, and separated from each other by two-
thirds the width of the beak. Pronotum wider than long, widest at middle,
with the sides arcuately rounded and strongly narrowed to apex; surface
moderately convex, longitudinally carinate at middle, coarsely, confluently
punctate, and sparsely clothed with yellowish and blackish brown scales,
with a few whitish ones intermixed. Scutellum invisible. Elytra oval, not
wider at base than pronotum, but about one-third wider than pronotum at
middle, and without a post-humeral prominence; interspaces wide, and the
alternate ones not more densely scaly; strial punctures large, round, rather
shallow, and each bearing a large scale; surface rather densely clothed with
dark brown and yellow-brown scales, with a few white ones intermixed, the
sutural interval more densely clothed with yellowish brown scales, ornamented
with a distinct white post-humeral fascia, and a short, irregular, transverse,
white fascia just before the apical declivity. Abdomen beneath coarsely,
densely punctate, and clothed with whitish scales; second, third, and fourth
segments about subequal in length; femora unarmed, and mottled with
whitish and yellowish brown scales; claws small and approximate.
426 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 18
Length, 6-7.75 mm.
Type locality—Uvalde, Texas.
Other localities —San Diego and New Braunfels, Texas.
Type and paratypes —Cat. No. 28519, U.S. N. M.
Described from eleven specimens; six (one type) collected at the type
locality in July, 1924, and August, 1925, by Alan P. Dodd, for whom the
species is named; three collected at the same locality, December 11, 1920,
and January 30, 1924, by J. C. Hamlin; one from San Diego, Texas, May 7
(Hubbard and Schwarz); and one from New Braunfels, Texas, November 17,
1895 (H. Soltau Collection).
This species belongs to the subgenus Philopuntia Pierce,! and is closely
allied to porosa Le Conte and opuntiae Pierce. From the former it can be
distinguished by the elytra not one-half wider than the pronotum, and from
both species by the tarsal claws being approximate, and not widely divergent.
It resembles fasciata Pierce, from Florida, which also has the tarsal claws
approximate, but the elytral markings are different.
The markings on the elytra are fairly constant in this species, but the dens-
ity of the scales is quite variable. In some specimens the surface of the beak
is rather finely punctured and without a longitudinal carina, in others the
carina is quite distinct and the surface rugosely punctate.
1 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 42: 163. 1889.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Brayton Howarp Ransom, chief of the Zoological Division of the Bureau
of Animal Industry and one of the leading parasitologists in the world, died
in Washington, D. C., on September 17, 1925, after a brief illness of three
weeks.
Dr. Ransom was born in Missouri Valley, Iowa, on March 24, 1879. He
was graduated from the University of Nebraska with the B.S. degree in 1899,
with the M.S. degree in 1900, and with {the Ph.D. degree in 1908. He came to
Washington in 1902 as assistant in zoology in the Hygienic Laboratory of the
U.S. Public Health and Marine Hospital Service, and in 1903 he was trans-
ferred to the Bureau of Animal Industry as assistant in charge of the zoologi-
cal laboratory in which capacity he served until 1906 when he was raised to
the rank of Chief of the Zoological Division. Under Dr. Ransom’s leader-
ship the Zoological Division developed to great importance in the organiza-
tion of the Bureau of Animal Industry contributing to the solution of many
important practical and purely scientific problems pertaining to parasitology
and related subjects and thereby achieving a world wide reputation. In the
solution of these problems Dr. Ransom played the most conspicuous rdle,
his own researches in parasitology constituting an enviable record of scientific
accomplishment. ;
In recognition of his work Dr. Ransom had many honors bestowed on him.
He was a member of the following scientific societies: The American Micro-
scopical Society (President), The American Society of Naturalists, The
American Society of Zoologists, The American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science (Fellow), The American Society of Tropical Medicine (Secre-
tary-Treasurer), The American Veterinary Medical Association (Honorary
Member), The Biological Society of Washington, The Helminthological
nov. 4, 1925 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 427
Society of Washington (Past President), The Washington Academy of
Sciences (Vice-President), The American Society of Parasitologists
(Councillor), the Société Pathologie Exotique (Foreign Correspondent)
the Reale Academia d’Agricoltura di Torino (Foreign Correspondent). He
was honorary Assistant Custodian of the Helminthological collections of the
U.S. National Museum, and a member of the editorial boards of the Journal
of Parasitology and the American Journal of Tropical Medicine. He was a
U.S. delegate to the Seventh International Zoological Congress, a delegate
to the Fourth Fisheries Congress, and a delegate to the First Pan-American
Scientific Congress. He was a recipient of the gold medal of the Seaman’s
Tropical Disease Research Association of Kobe, Japan, in recognition of his
contributions to the life history of Ascaris.
His scientific contributions involve numerous publications dealing largely
with the morphology, taxonomy, and life history of parasitic worms and with
the practical application of facts ascertained by himself and by others to the
prevention of parasitic diseases in man and in domestic animals. Richly
endowed with a healthy scienific curiosity, with resourcefulness, thorough-
ness, and the ability to apply himself unswervingly to the solution of baffl-
ing problems, he brought these qualities to bear on his work, his writings
being thoughtful, finished, and scholarly productions. His many charming
personal qualities, his unassuming dignity, his thoughtful consideration for
the feelings of others, his high sense of justice, and his frankness are reflected
in his scientific papers which are singularly free from personal criticism, from
unwarranted conclusions and are liberal in acknowledging the contributions
of other scientific workers. It is a great tribute to Dr. Ransom’s scientific
achievement that despite his extensive and highly important contributions
to parasitology and medical zoology covering a quarter of a century none of
his major scientific work has ever been challenged.
Dr. J. N. Ross, associate curator of the Division of Plants, National
Museum, has received the degree of LL.D. from Wabash College.
Dr. Joun M. Courter, head of the botany department of Chicago Uni-
versity since 1896, has joined the resident staff of the Boyce Thompson Insti-
tute for Plant Research at Yonkers, New York.
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page
if sent to the editors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month.
CONTEN TS”
Ontenvar PArERs
ScumnTiric Se rs) 0, Ms
k
Vol. 15 NoveMBER 19, 1925 No, 19
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Kruuip D. F. Hewett 8. J. MaucHiy
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL 5URVEY DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L. H. Apams S. A. RoHwER
\ PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
? E. A. GotpMANn G, W. Srosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F. Grices * J. R. SWANTON
BOTANICAL SOCIETY ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCINTY
E. WicHERs
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mt. Roya anp GuILForp AVEs.
Bautimore, MaryLanp
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
I&
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims
resent a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it publishes: _
tl 1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JouRNAL isissued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer ~
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes corres ond to calendar years. Prompt :
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reac oa the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the }
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. :
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be Hy
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. ;
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text fouses
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors —
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints—Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices. —
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. f
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints.
should invariably be attached to the first page of his an ueene ;
The rate of Subscription per volume 18.........0cceccecerecceeee® i, Rice
Semi-monthly numbers 6 ane
Monthly numborsic 25 Sredscs enuecies es SEO EE Baia Tone ree
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,” aa
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D.O.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges.—The Journat does not exchange with other ublications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is ;
within thirty days after date of the following issue. ;
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Specs at
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy :
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 NovEeMBER 19, 1925 No. 19
PHYSICS.—Glaser’s experiments and the orientation of molecules
in a magnetic field. G. Brrr, Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton. (Communicated by L. A. Baurr.)
It has been shown by Glaser that the diamagnetic susceptibility of
H., N2, COs is proportional to the pressure for sufficiently high pres-
sures, but that at a certain pressure [in the particular experiments
about ; atmosphere] another non-linear law is followed. At suff-
ciently low pressures the susceptibility is again proportional to the
pressure. Glaser and Debye suggest that the transition region is
due to the finite time which is required for the establishment of space
quantization.'?.* Without discussing the mechanism which orients
the molecules, we can derive some restrictions as to the laws which
govern this phenomenon. ‘These restrictions are discussed below
with the conclusion that some of the apparently simplest laws may
contradict Glaser’s results, while others are in agreement with them.
We begin by supposing that every collision destroys the orientation
of a molecule. We consider the time ¢ = 0 as representative of the
general state, and we approximate the relative number of molecules,
which have suffered a collision for the last time ¢ seconds before t = 0,
by eta() where 7’ is a constant for a given pressure. This group
at the time f = 0 consists partly of oriented and partly of unoriented
molecules.
Our first hypothesis is that the number of molecules which are not
t
oriented at f = Oise 7. Denoting the specific susceptibility by x
and using suffixes Q, C to denote quantum and classical values of x
1 Glaser, Ann. der Physik, 75: 459. 1924.
? Debye, P., Amer. Physic. Soe. Bull., Feb. 14, p. 8, 1925.
2 A different interpretation of the mechanism of passing into the oriented condition
is contained in Rvark and Breit, Phil. Mag. 59: 504. 1925.
429
430 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 19
[corresponding to the oriented and unoriented condition respectively]
we have
E
r t eat T Xe
Ig = E Be ar XQ (1 = &') Je ta(#) = fee XQ (1)
e/o z iG a 1 ka a
ge at
The absolute (volume) susceptibility « may be written as « = kx/T
for a given temperature, k being a constant, as long as the gas is not
too dense. Hence
e
™ e + KQ
ee at
ook @)
i a
where
k k
Ko op Xo KG) T XQ:
Taking in accordance with Glaser xg = 3x. and letting
Kop Be Xe, X 7 (3)
we have
2;
e=x(1+ 7.) (4)
Here x is proportional to the pressure and we may compare (4) directly
with Glaser’s curves. It is seen that the asymptote to (4) does not
pass through the origin (curve 1) and that the point of inflection char-
acteristic of Glaser’s curves is absent in (4). Thus Glaser’s results
show the probabilities of orientation are not given by a simple ex-
ponential relation.
t
We investigate next in what manner the function e 7 should be
changed in order to give such a dependence of « on x that the asymp-
tote should pass through the origin. We suppose that the probability
ch CCST :
of an atom being unoriented a time ¢ after a collision is ‘) where 7 is
constant for a given magnetic field. We have
Nov. 19, 1925 BREIT: MOLECULES IN A MAGNETIC FIELD 431
[fOr Olea ©
eo
ccera(® =a [[r-Q]ee ©
We wish that « — «, should vanish for large x. This means that the
and
integral in (6) must vanish faster than a Since x is large we are
only concerned with values of f for small values of the argument,
and we have therefore the condition that 1 — f(y) for small y must
vanish faster than y. The physical meaning of this is that the number
of molecules in an oriented state at time ¢, since the group considered
suffered a collision, must for small¢ vanish faster than t. Since +
must be supposed to depend on H and since small values of H give large
values of 7 we have another physical interpretation, viz., that in weak
fields the number of oriented atoms at a given time ¢ since the last
a : 1
collision must vanish faster than -. How 7 depends on H cannot be
de
said without forming a hypothesis as to the mechanism which estab-
lishes the orientation. However, experiments on the variation in
Glaser’s curves with H will surely establish the nature of this relation-
ship.
Experiments on resonance radiation may be interpreted in terms of
the dependence of son H. ‘Thus it is known that if the polarization of
resonance radiation in a field H be P, then (Ge) ; <0. The depolar-
ization of resonance radiation on our hypothesis is mainly due to the
presence of atoms which have acquired their final orientation in the
magnetic field. For weak fields at the mean instant of falling from the
excited to the unexcited level the number of ‘‘depolarized’”’ atoms is
proportional to 1 — i(‘) where t, is the mean life of the atom. Now
Ty
1+6
this number for large 7 is of the form (‘*) where 6>0 or else it van-
ae
ishes still more strongly than that. If 7 should be inversely propor-
tional to H, then P for small H would be approximately proportional
to H'*’ and (SH) would vanish as H. It seems probable
H=0
432 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 19
therefore that 7 has the character of H~* where g is a proper fraction
=
(0 < q < 1) for then a is proportional to H**~1! which does not
In particular we note that if 6 = 1, then g =
vanish if g = 1 - x
9° We shall see presently that 6 = 1 is in fair agreement with Glaser’s
1
9
If an atom behaves as a magnetic doublet of fixed moment the
magnetic field H exerts a moment on it which is proportional to H,
and if during the orienting process the field exerts a sensibly constant
moment, a given angle @ is passed in a time 7, such that
6= A Hr?
where A is constant. This explains why the time constant 7 may be
results, and we consider therefore the physical significance of q =
il ae :
taken to be ~—— because it is reasonable to suppose that a certain
VH
angle must be turned through in order to assume the final orientation.
i : lee, é
Needless to say, the relation a is not the only. possible one.
V
However, the writer thought it of interest to show that the restrictions
on f are not of such a nature as to be inconsistent with experiments
on the depolarizing influence of a magnetic field on resonance radiation.
The question of the magnitudeof éinthe above formula we leave open.
A closer examination of numerical values shows that it may be roughly
the ratio of the period of the electron to the mean life of an atom. We
have proved that for small y the function 1 — f(y) must vanish
more strongly than y. In our proof it has been assumed that the
number of molecules which, when referred to t = 0, have suffered their
t
last collision in the interval of time —t, —t + dtis Ne ™d - where N
is the total number of molecules. Let us suppose now more generally
that this number is N¢ (..)al a): We have
[-Gale)=2 @
and in place of (6) we obtain
co
cna ne (2 - 1) E ig (:)| o(t)dt (8)
e/o
nov. 19, 1925 BREIT: MOLECULES IN-A MAGNETIC FIELD 433
Again the experimental results require that the integral should vanish
: a er .
more rapidly than = if x is large. If now for small y the function
1 — i(y) vanishes as y the integral in (8) cannot vanish faster than =
unless J , to(t)dt vanishes. However, this integral cannot vanish
because both t and o(t) are positive by definition throughout the range
of integration. Thus our conclusion as to the behavior of 1 — f(y)
at y = 0 is independent of the form of 6 as long as this form is in the
range of physically possible forms. If ohh _ t'e(t)dt should be divergent
for q>q., we have the additional requirement that 1 — f(y) should
vanish more rapidly than y*e.
190
Scale of X
Fig. 1—Theoretical dependence of susceptibility on pressures
Using special forms of f which satisfy the derived condition and
making ¢(y) = e-%,
(1) Tf f(y) = 1, (O<y<1);f(y) = O <y<~) we have
r= nox[1+ (22 - Je |
Xe
434 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 19
(2) Iff(y) =e * we have
c= 2x -y[— (2 —1 eye" - a]
Xe
where
For the case yo = 3x, these relations are plotted as curves 2 and 3.
The first is plotted against x and the second against y. It is seen
that the reproduction of the shape of Glaser’s curves is fair. Glaser’s
relation for CO, appears to follow a somewhat different law, though an
inquiry into the nature of the difference between CO, and the gases
H,., Ny may be premature on account of the inherent difficulties of the
experiments.
MINERALOGY.—Magnesite and kammererite from Low’s Mine
(Line Pit), Cecil County, Maryland Earu V.SHANNON. U.S.
National Museum.
Low’s Chrome mine, better known as the Line Pit Chrome mine
is a widely known mineral locality which enjoys the unique distinction
of being in two states. The minerals known from the locality have
all been enumerated in Gordon’s Minerals of Pennsylvania? but the
writer plans to include them also in the Minerals of Maryland which
is in preparation. This is because the Pennsylvania-Maryland state
line exactly bisects the shaft of the mine, and the dumps are partly in
one state and partly in another. It is reported, however, that the
orebody pitched into Pennsylvania at slight depth and most of the
minerals were actually mined from that state. A certain amount
of original work will be done on the minerals from this locality,
principally on specimens collected by the writer.
MAGNESITE
A specimen of magnesite has recently been analyzed in the Museum
laboratory and, since no analysis of this carbonate is recorded from this
mine the following short description is presented. The specimen,
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
? Samuel G. Gordon, The Mineralogy of Pennsylvania, Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia,
Special Publication No. 1, 1922.
Noy. 19, 1925 SHANNON: MAGNESITE AND KAMMERERITE FROM MARYLAND 435
when picked up on the dump of the mine, weighed 4 or 5 pounds. It
consisted of a flat slab, about 4 centimeters in average thickness and
apparently represented the full width of a narrow vein. On one wall
is a layer up to 1 centimeter wide consisting of serpentine (williamsite)
in thin flakes surrounded by white magnesite. On the other wall is a
layer of similar thickness of pale brown material, mottled with white
spots. The central part of the mass is a vein 2 centimeters in average
thickness of white material of porcellanous appearance, containing
scattered open spaces a millimeter or two in diameter. This central
vein is bordered on either side by a crust from 1 to 3 millimeters thick
of grayish translucent material.
The specimen appears anything but homogeneous. Mr. Gordon,
who was with the writer when it was collected, ventured the opinion
that the material was a mixture of magnesite and sepiolite, while
the writer himself regarded it as most probably a mixture of magnesite
and chalcedony. Quite unexpectedly, the specimen proved to con-
sist almost entirely of magnesite with some included williamsite.
Material from the central vein gave the following results upon
analysis:
TABLE 1.—Awnatysis or Macnesite, Low’s Ming, Crecit Co., Marytanp
RK CORK «oe bn el Ghee SE CaS ae Ree eee ee ae ante 4 Se aes aes ae eee ieee 96.26
CHO a Oe a rete es a eee Mn Sie 4 Be ee EN ere ets 2.50
TEAC. ais tale ae etree ENR a Be Bae PR RCE, 8 Vk eRe RRR RA ea 0.58
Aasoluble:andesilicaup nthe eee ey Se EE Ey Gath oh atapor oe ein ane eT eT TS 0.28
99.62
Careful examination with a lens shows that the whole specimen
seems to represent open cavities. Although the serpentine is minutely
_fractured, each fragment is surrounded by a clean-cut layer of mag-
nesite which forms a crust of fibers perpendicular to the surface and
there is no evidence of replacement. All of the magnesite has a
decidedly chalcedonic structure and is composed of layers and crusts
of fine fibers in the arrangement commonly regarded as indicating
that the material is a metacolloid, i.e., has originated by the crystalliz-
ation of an amorphous material. In the present case, as has been
suggested for other occurrences of magnesite, this structure might
have been inherited from hydromagnesite after which the magnesite
may be secondary.
The thin sections show the same characters observed in the grains.
The brownish material which makes up one wall of the central portion
436 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 19
of the vein is colored by a minute amount of deweylite which, under
the microscope, shows a fine metacolloidal structure and low birefrin-
gence coupled with low refractive index. It is the latest mineral
deposited in the cavities. Minute amounts of deweylite may account
for the silica shown by the analysis.
Another specimen from this locality shows small globular masses
of magnesite made up of loose concentric shells or hollow hemispheres
of magnesite up to 5 millimeters in diameter. These are pale brown-
ish white in color and have the dense appearance of chalcedony, from
which they are distinguished by their softness. The magnesite rests
upon a base of williamsite. A third specimen of kammererite border-
ing chromite has a fibrous texture and is fractured and the fractures
are filled with thin seams of magnesite.
Gordon’ mentions magnesite from this locality as follows: “mag-
nesite was quite common at a depth of 60 meters, forming thick
veins cutting more or less horizontally across the orebody and the
serpentine; which circumstance throws some doubt on the belief that
magnesite is a product of surface solutions, causing the pendulum
of modern paragenetic thought to swing still further and include
even magnesite in the category of minerals produced by hydrothermal
solutions.”
The writer is strongly inclined to support Gordon in his belief that
this magnesite is a product of hydrothermal solutions rather than
surface-weathering, downward-percolating carbonated solutions of
meteoric water. The specimens here examined are very clearly fissure
fillings in cracks which seem to have been repeatedly reopened. There
is no evidence of metasomatic replacement of the serpentine in the
examples studied.
IKKAMMERERITE
Although a total of seven analyses of penninite containing some
chromicoxide, most of them of the pink material usually designated kam-
mererite, from Wood’s chromeminein Lancaster County, Pennsylvania,
are quoted by Gordon,‘ he gives no analysis of this mineral from the
Low mine in the same region which probably indicates that the
mineral from this mine has never received a detailed examination.
The writer therefore presents the following short description of a
® Samuel G. Gordon, Teas, Lancaster County, Pennsylvania, Amer. Mineralogist,
6: 115. 1921.
4 Samuel G. Gordon, The Mineralogy of Pennsylvania, Acad. Nat. Sci., Philadelphia,
Special Publication No. 1, 1922.
noy. 19, 1925 SHANNON: MAGNESITE AND KAMMERERITE FROM MARYLAND 437
specimen collected at the Line Pit, as the mine is commonly known,
and examined in the Museum laboratory.
The specimen was collected from a pile of chromite mined during
the war period of 1917 when this mine was reopened. It consists of a
mass of chromite bordered on one side by a sheet of the kammererite
varying in thickness up to 1 centimeter. The color of this mineral
ranges irom dark bluish-purple to purplish-white. The difference
in color coincides with a difference in translucency, the darkest material
being very translucent while the lightest appears almost opaque on
polished surface. The translucency, in turn, is dependent on the
presence or absence of air inclusions which render the chlorite opaque.
The structure of the chlorite is compact: it shows no micaceous cleav-
age but only a rectangular parting with splintery fracture and fibrous
appearance with silky luster. The texture is that described for the
material from Lake Itkul, Siberia, to which the name rhodochrome was
given. The chlorite is intimately fractured and the fractures are filled
by thin veins of magnesite, less than half a millimeter in width.
TABLE 2.—Awatysis or Kawererite, Low’s Miyg, Cecit Co., Maryuanp
SYD oe osc ced te eat A Ne ea co eS SES re er oes nee ier Coa eI 32.28
AUD Re es ecg RB ROR SI ee SE er a eS SCE Aeneas Paes oe: eee re 10.64
Fe.0- ~2 5525052654 25555 5 5ee Seb ses 656 455555505 Sossh es oose os sesso Sos sons S65 5 1.04
Cr.0; Dane Me eeu aie a5 pop eo oe eae bos S14 eso Sao BODa sooo oso bo aicnos ooo 2.74
WP7E ee claps sae aie Bs Bee Ee Re OR Se Se ee Ene oe eee to oe et Seer Ce ee ee ee 0.96
CHO). 25 Bate cas heals TAR Oe Bes 5 Oe Deen Ears 2 Sree ete a aE ete Pid 0.06
2H Og eae Eg els a a lec Sa lot ee aS a Od Oe ae 38.14
ROA OE Ose ay ere er Sree oe AS nr oe ie SSE Bae TAR a Ee tes 14.84
TEL O) lor teh gad PU Os SSNs See Ro nee a eS ee eee en ee eee ee none
SHG) Ne ae ee EE Oe oe a ae ee 100.7
The sample analyzed was ground, and freed from some included
chromite and a considerable amount of magnesite by the use of heavy
solutions. The analysis gave the results shown in Table 2. This
composition is very similar to the average of published analyses of
penninite, the chromium content not being very large as compared
with other kammererites which have been analyzed. The ratios do
not yield any simple formula, the analysis being represented fairly
well by the formula 7MgO-A1,0;-48i0.-6H.O.
Under the microscope the analyzed powder is practically color-
less and hence no pleochroism is observable. The optical properties
are very difficult to determine but seem to agree with those of pennin-
ite. Plates parallel to the basal cleavage are dark in all positions be-
438 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 19
tween crossed nicols and are probably essentially uniaxial with the
acute bisectrix perpendicular to the cleavage. No definite interfer-
ence figure could be observed although, in convergent light, there is a
suggestion of strong dispersion. Many of the grains are clouded with
opaque air inclusions. Plates on edge show very low birefringence
with sub-normal low order blue interference colors. The index of
refraction of basal plates w, is about 1.570. It seems probable that the
low birefringence, high dispersion, and confused optical figure are due
to complex twinning, a characteristic of penninite.
Other specimens from this locality, not yet studied in detail, consist
of pale violet micaceous scales of chromiferous chlorite greatly re-
sembling lepidolite, and still others contain compact pale purple
material mixed with picrolitic sheared serpentine.
ENTOMOLOGY .—New termites from the Solomon Islands and Santa
Cruz Archipelago—II.'. Toos. E.SnypEr. Bureau of Entomol-
ogy.
Family TERMITIDAE
Genus Nasutitermes Banks (sens. lat.)
Subgenus Nasutitermes Holmgren (sens. str.)
Species of the subgenus Nasutitermes Holmgren (sens. str.) have a wide
distribution throughout the tropics of the world; they occur as far north
as Mexico and the Bahamas and in the United States there is a doubtful
record from Texas. Southward, Nasutitermes occurs in South America,
Africa, Madagascar, Asia, New Guinea, Oceania generally, and Australia.
More species are included in this subgenus than in any other genus or
subgenus of termites, approximately 200 having been described, nearly one-
half of which are American. As a rule, species of Nasutitermes are quite
distinct, although there are certain natural groups in which the species are
of especially close relationship.
The soldier secretes a sticky fluid from the nasus which is a very effective
defence against ants; in some species the workers bite viciously. These
termites live in carton tree nests, in colonies in wood, and in the ground;
they are destructive wood-borers.
Large queens of the first form of two species of Nasutitermes (sens. lat.)
were found later on Guadalcanar Island, Solomon Islands, by Mr. Knibbs,
Government Surveyor, and given to Doctor Mann: one species with a
large eye and ocelli close to the eye, the other with a smaller eye and more
distant ocelli. Of the latter species there were, in addition to the large
first form queens, many smaller queens of the’ second form, with wing pads
1 See this JournaL 15: 395-407. 1925.
nov. 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 439
varying in length from normal to as long as those of the nymphs of the first
form; i.e., there was a large series of “intermediates.” These specimens are
in the United States National Museum.
It was believed at first that Nasutitermes (Grallotermes) oceantcum Snyder
was in this subgenus, but the elongate third segment of the antenna and the long
legs lead me to place oceanicwm in the subgenus Grallotermes Holmgren.
However, oceanicum has also been compared with the descriptions of all
species of Nasutitermes (sens. str.) and may be in this subgenus, in the matan-
gensis group (Haviland).
Subgenus G'rallotermes Holmgren
Only five species in this subgenus are known, all of which occur in the
oriental region. They are distributed as follows: Philippine Islands (2),
Carolina Islands (1), New Guinea (1), and India (1). The soldiers are dark
colored and long-legged, and have points to the mandibles. The worker
has the post-clypeus bulging (arched) and less than half as long as wide.
The winged sexual forms have the antenna with 15 segments, and large,
prominent eyes.
Nasutitermes (Grallotermes) oceanicum, new species.
Soldier —Head castaneous-brown (lighter posteriorly, where rounded);
pear-shaped; in profile head with nasus forming a slight curve, but is in
nearly a straight line; head with two transverse rows of long hairs, one
anteriorly and one posteriorly, also microscopic hairs. Mandibles with
fairly long sharp points at apex.
Nasus same color as head, but with slight reddish tinge at apex, lighter
at middle. elongate, aquiline, broad at base, pointed at apex where slightly
turned down, and beset with hairs.
Antenna yellow to light yellow-brown, with 13 segments; segments be-
coming longer and broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment
elongate, subclavate, slender, much longer than either second or fourth seg-
ments, sometimes twice as long; second and fourth segments subequal, or
fourth longer than second; last segment shorter, slender, subelliptical.
Pronotum light yellow brown (darker at anterior margin), saddle-shaped,
semicircular, inclined anteriorly, not or only slightly emarginate anteriorly,
there provided with hairs.
Legs tinged with yellow, elongate, slender; hairs long.
Abdomen with tergites light yellow-brown; tergites with short hairs and
a row of long hairs at base of each; sternites with dense long hairs; cerci
elongate, prominent.
Measurements ——Length of entire soldier, 4.14.2 mm.; length of head
with nasus, 1.85-1.9 mm.; length of head without nasus (to anterior, to base
of mandibles), 1.05-1.1 mm.; length of nasus, 0.8 mm.; length of pronotum
(where longest not at median), 0.25 mm.; length of hind tibia, 1.35 mm.;
width of head posteriorly (where widest), 1 .05-1.1 mm.; height of head at
middle, 0.65 mm.; width of pronotum, 0.55 mm.
Nymphs of sexual form (with long wing pads) with large eye 0.32 mm.
in length; antenna with 15 segments; third segment shorter than second or
fourth; pronotum emarginate posteriorly.
Worker large, 5 to 5.5 mm. in length; head dark castaneous brown; Y-
440 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 19
suture distinct; antenna with 14 segments; post-clypeus bulging, length less
than half its width.
Type locality —Graciosa Bay, Santa Cruz Archipelago.
Described from a large series of soldiers collected with nymphs of the
sexual form and workers at the type locality by Dr. W. M. Mann in July,
1916.
Type,’ soldier —Cat. No. 15293. Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.; paratype in U.S. National Museum.
Subgenus Subulitermes Holmgren
Species of the subgenus Subulitermes are few in number (only 15 have
been described) and are restricted to the tropics of America, Africa, Asia,
and Oceania. These termites range as far north as Panama in Middle
America.
Winged adults of but very few species are known. In some species the
number of antennal segments of the nymphs of the sexual forms has been
noted in publishing the descriptions of the soldier and worker castes.
In the three new forms here proposed from the South Seas the nymphs of
the sexual winged adults or the winged adults have 13 segments to the
antenna and the soldiers 11 segments, while most of the previously described
species from the oriental region have more segments to the antenna in both
these castes.
Nasutitermes (Subulifermes) orientis. new species
Winged adult—Head very dark reddish castaneous brown (lighter near
eyes and posteriorly and anteriorly), not much longer than broad, suboval,
punctate, with dense hairs, a few longer than the others. Fontanelle a
hyaline, narrow, elongate, subelliptical slit ending in a raised spot at epi-
cranial suture, posterior to ocelli. Eye black, not round, projecting, close
to lateral margin of head. Ocelli hyaline, raised, suboval, separated from
eyes by a distance less than their diameter.
Antenna dark brown; with 13 segments, the segments becoming longer
and broader toward apex; third segment slender, subclavate shorter than
second or fourth segment; fourth shorter than second segment; last segment
slender, elongate, subelliptical.
Pronotum same color as head, nearly straight anteriorly (broadly and
shallowly concave); posterior margin acutely emarginate; sides narrowed
angularly to the posterior margin; hairs dense and long.
Wings dusky grayish; costal area yellow-brown (darker); tissue and
margins hairy; in fore wing, median vein close to cubitus, in about middle
of wing. branches to apex; hyaline area between median and cubitus; cubitus
with 7-9 branches or subbranches to lower margin, not reaching apex.
Legs yellow-brown (the tibiae darker), elongate, siender; hairs long.
Abdomen with tergites reddish brown, slightly lighter colored than head,
with dense long hairs, those at base of tergites longest; cerci prominent, broad
at base, fairly elongate.
Measurements.—Length of entire winged adult, 9.5 mm.; length of entire
deilated adult, 6 mm.; length of head to tip of labrum, 1.2 mm.; length of
* No definite specimen designated as holotype; hence, since the specific descriptions
were made from a series, these are cotypes.
Nov. 19, 1925 SYNDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 441
pronotum, 0.6 mm.; length of fore wing. 7.75 mm.; length of hind tibia,
1.1 mm.; diameter of eye (long diam.), 0.8 mm.; width of head (at eyes),
1.05 mm.; width of pronotum, 0.85 mm.; width of fore wing, 2.25 mm.
The winged adults of very few species of Subulitermes are known; NV.
GS.) orzentis is a dark-colored, hairy-headed species, with antenna of but 13
segments.
Soldier —Head yellow-brown or light castaneous brown (darkest on sides,
lighter posteriorly and anteriorly), pear-shaped, slightly constricted in middle,
rounded posteriorly; in profile head and nasus forming approximately a
straight line; head with dense short hairs and scattered long hairs (8-4 rows).
Mandibles without points at apex, or a minute, very short, sharp point in
some specimens.
Nasus reddish brown, elongate, slender, cylindrical; hairs short.
Antenna light yellow-brown, with 11 segments; segments becoming longer
and broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment subclavate, sub-
equal in length to second and fourth segments, but more slender; last seg-
ment suboval, slender.
Pronotum light yellow (margins darker), saddle-shaped, with short
hairs and also long hairs on anterior margin, very slightly emarginate
(roundly and shallowly) anteriorly.
Legs tinged with yellow; elongate; slender; hairs long.
Abdomen tinged with yellow; tergites with dense long hairs, the longest
row at base of each; cerci fairly elongate and prominent.
Measurements—Length of entire soldier, 3-3.3 mm.; length of head with
nasus, 1.3 mm.; length of head without nasus (to anterior), 0.8 mm.; length
of nasus, 0.5 mm.; length of pronotum, 0.15 mm.; length of hind tibia,
0.67 mm.; width of head posteriorly (where widest), 0.8 mm.; width of
pronotum, 0.4 mm.
Worker —Post-clypeus not as long as half its breadth.
Type locality ——Auki, Malayta Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a large series of winged adults and soldiers collected with
workers at the type locality by Dr. W. M. Mann, in May and June, 1916.
Type, soldier —Cat. No. 15294, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.; morphotype, winged adult; paratypes in U. 8. National
Museum. :
Nasutitermes (S.) orientis is distinct in its hairy head, number and shape
of antennal segments, and size.
Nasutitermes (Subulitermes) orientis Snyder, tulagiensis, new variety
Soldier —Head light castaneous brown (yellow-brown, with greyish
tinge), lighter near antennal sockets and posteriorly; head slightly constricted
behind antennae, suboval, with few long hairs anteriorly and posteriorly
and dense shorter hairs. Nasus light castaneous, with a reddish tinge,
elongate, slender, cylindrical. slightly more robust at base (or more conical
than in orientis); nasus with dense short hairs. Mandibles without points.
Antenna: light yellow-brown with 11 segments; segments becoming longer
and broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment slender, subclavate,
longer than second or fourth segments (when fourth is shorter than second
segment), or approximately subequal to them; last segment slender, elon-
gate and subelliptical.
Pronotum tinged with yellow (the anterior margin darker), saddle-shaped,
with long hairs on anterior and short hairs on posterior margins.
Legs tinged with yellow, elongate, slender, with long hairs.
442 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 19
Abdomen dirty-white, tinged with yellow; tergites with a row of long
hairs at base and other denser, shorter hairs; cerci fairly elongate, prominent.
Measurements.—Length of entire soldier, 2.5-3 mm.; length of head with
nasus, 1.2-1.25 mm.; length of head without nasus (to anterior), 0.75 mm.;
length of nasus, 0.45 mm.; length of pronotum, 0.12 mm.; length of hind
tibia, 0.67 mm.; width of head (where widest, posteriorly), 0.7 mm.; width
of pronotum, 0.37 mm.
Worker.—Length of post-clypeus less than half its breadth.
Type locality—Tulagi Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a large series of soldiers and workers collected by Dr. W.
M. Mann at the type locality in May, 1916. Doctor Mann also collected
soldiers, nymphs of the sexual form, and workers of this species of Ugi
Island, Solomon Islands, in July and August, 1916. The antenna of these
nymphs of the sexual form had 13 segments.
Type, soldier—Cat. No. 15295, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Mass.; paratypes in U. 8. National Museum.
This variety is shghtly smaller than orzentis and the third segment of the
antenna is somewhat longer, but in most characters it is close to the typical
form.
Nasutitermes (Subulitermes) sanctae-crucis, new species
Winged adult.—Head dark castaneous brown with reddish tinge, not much
longer than broad, suboval, punctate, with dense, fairly long hairs and scat-
tered longer hairs. Fontanelle as in N. (S.) orientis Snyder, but only the
spot back of the ocelli hyaline.
Eyes black, not round, prominent, projecting, close to lateral margin of
head. Ocelli hyaline, suboval, projecting, close to eye, separated from eyes
by a distance less than their short diameter.
Antenna yellow-brown, with 13 segments, segments becoming longer and
broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment shorter than second
or fourth; second longer than fourth; last segment slender, subelliptical.
Pronotum slightly lighter-colored than head, punctate; anterior margin
nearly straight; posterior margin emarginate (not so strongly as in orientis) ;
sides angularly narrowed posteriorly; hairs dense and long.
Wings smoky gray, the costal area darker (yellow-brown); tissue and
margins of wing hairy; in fore wing, median vein parallel and close to cubi-
tus, p!aced in middle of wing, branching to apex of wing, with 2 or 3 branches;
cubitus below middle of wing, with 8-10 branches or subbranches to lower
margin; hyaline area between median and cubitus.
Legs yellow-brown (the tibiae darker), elongate, slender, with long hairs.
Abdomen with tergites lighter-colored than head, with dense long hairs,
the basal row longest; cerci short but prominent, the base stout.
Measurements ——Length of entire winged adult, 9.5-9.75 mm.; length of
entire deilated adult, 5.5-6 mm.; length of head (to tip of labrum), 1.4 mm.;
length of pronotum, 0.55 mm.; length of fore wing, 8 mm.; length of hind
tibia, 1.15 mm.; diameter of eye (long diameter), 0.32 mm.; width of head
(at eyes), 1.15 mm.; width of pronotum, 0.85 mm.; width of fore wing, 2.2-
2.25 mm.
The winged sexual adult of Nasutitermes (S.) sanctae-crucis, unlike most
oriental species of Subulitermes, has only 13 segments to the antennae.
Soldier —Head light castaneous brown (yellow-brown with reddish
tinge), lighter-colored at sides and anteriorly and posteriorly, slightly con-
stricted in middle, pear-shaped, rounded posteriorly; head with nasus in
Nov. 19, 1925 SNYDER: NEW TERMITES FROM SOLOMON ISLANDS 443,
nearly a straight line, except for shght elevation at base of nasus; head with
dense short hairs and 3+ transverse rows of long hairs. Mandibles without
points at apex.
Nasus darker-colored than head, castaneous with reddish tinge, cylin-
drical, slender, elongate, but not as long as length of head to base of mandi-
bles, with short hairs.
Antenna yellow-brown, with 11 segments; segments becoming longer and
broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment subclavate, subequal
to second or fourth segments, although sometimes longer than fourth and
shorter than second; last segment slender, suboval.
Pronotum tinged with yellow (anterior margin darker), saddle-shaped,
slightly emarginate anteriorly, with dense, short hairs and longer hairs on
anterior margin.
Legs tinged with yellow, elongate, slender, with long hairs.
Abdomen with tergites tinged with yellow; tergites with dense long hairs,
the row of hairs at the base of each being longest; cerci prominent.
Measurements——Length of entire soldier, 2.6-2.9 mm.; length of head
with nasus, 1.3-1.4mm.; length of head without nasus ventrally (to anterior
margin), 0.7-0.75 mm.; length of nasus, 0.6 mm.; length of pronotum, 1.5
mm.; length of hind tibiae, 0.7 mm.; width of head posteriorly (where widest)
0.7-0.75 mm.; width of pronotum, 0.36 mm.
Type locality —Graciosa Bay, Santa Cruz Archipelago.
Described from a series of winged adults and soldiers collected with workers
at the type locality by Dr. W. M. Mann in July, 1916.
Type, soldier —Cat. No. 15296, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bude, Mass., morphotype winged adult; paratype in the U. 8. National
Museum.
Nasutitermes (S.) sanctae-crucis has a longer nasus than orientis Snyder;
unlike most oriental species of Swbulitermes there are only 11 segments to the
antenna and a very hairy head.
Genus Microcerotermes Silvestri
Species of the genus Microcerotermes are widely distributed throughout
the tropics of the world. The West Indies and Central America represent
their most northerly points of distribution, but their range extends to South
America, Africa, Madagascar, Asia, New Guinea, Oceania generally, and
Australia.
Over 55 species of Microcerotermes have been described, some of which
are closely related and difficult to separate. These termites live in hard
carton nests on trees, on the ground, and in colonies in wood; they are de-
structive wood borers.
Microcerotermes piliceps, new species
Soldier —Head castaneous (red-brown), not twice as long as broad,
cylindrical, the sides parallel (slightly concave in middle); head broadest
posteriorly, narrowed anteriorly; posterior margin rounded; epicranial
suture very steeply inclined anteriorly; head with dense, fairly long hairs.
Fontanelle hyaline, small but distinct, raised, subelliptical, located at be-
ginning of epicranial suture. Eye not distinct, on lower rim of depression
444 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 19
containing antennal socket. Gula at middie slightly less than half as broad
as greatest anterior width. Labrum light yellow-brown, broader than
long, subtriangular anteriorly, with long hairs.
Mandibles dark reddish-brown (lighter-colored at base), bowed or sabre
shaped; in left mandible, bow 0.6 mm. deep (from inner margin to a line
connecting apex and base); mandibles broad at base, narrowed and pointed
at apex, where incurved, margins irregularly and coarsely serrate for basal
two-thirds of their length.
Antenna yellow to light yellow-brown, with 13 segments; segments be-
coming broader toward apex, with long hairs; third segment half as long as
second; fourth segment slightly shorter than second, last segment elongate,
slender, subelliptical.
Pronotum light yellow-brown, saddle-shaped, shallowly and roundly
concave medianly at anterior and posterior margins; sides gradually and
roundly narrowed posteriorly, margins with dense long hairs.
Legs tinged with yellow, elongate, slender, with long hairs.
Abdomen tinged with yellow; tergites with dense long hairs; cerei not
prominent.
Measure ments.—Length of entire soldier, 5.3 mm. (shrunken?); length of
head with mandibles, 2.7 mm.; length of head without mandibles (to an-
terior margin), 1.9 mm.; length of left mandible, 1.25 mm.; length of prono-
tum, 0.3 mm.; length of hind tibia, 0.9 mm.; width of head posteriorly, 1.2
mm.; width of head anteriorly, 1 mm.; Sea of head at middle, 1 mm.;
width of pronotum, 0.75 mm.
Type locality—Ugi Island, Solomon Islands.
Described from a large series of soldiers collected with workers at the
type locality by Dr. W. M. Mann in July and August, 1916.
Type, soldier.—Cat. No. 15297, Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cam-
bridge, Massachusetts; paratypes in United States National Museum.
Microcerotermes piliceps is distinctive on account of the densely hairy
head of the soldier; M. serrula Desneux, from Borneo, is readily distinguished
from piliceps by its smaller soldier, the head of which is less densely hairy;
the soldier of piliceps also has a more hairy head than M. annandalez
Silvestri, from Barkuda Island.
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Dr. D. Roserts Harper 3rd, physicist in the Bureau of Standards for
more than sixteen years, has resigned to take charge of some heat measure-
ments in the general engineering laboratory of the General Electric Company
at Schenectady. Dr. Harper has been stationed in New York for the past
two years as the liaison officer of the Bureau of Standards with the Ameri-
can Engineering Standards Committee.
The degree of Doctor of Laws was recently conferred on Dr. Cuarues D.
Waxcort, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, by the University of the
State of New York. This degree is conferred upon only one person each
year, Secretary Walcott being the twelfth recipient of this honor.
Dr. 8S. F. Braxs, of the Bureau of Plant Industry, returned early this
month from Europe. Dr. Blake has been examining types of South American
Compositae at the principal European herbaria.
ANNOUNCEMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES*
Saturday, November 21. The Helminthological Society, at the School of
Hygiene and Public Health, 615 North Wolfe
Street, Baltimore, Maryland.
Wednesday, November 25. The Geological Society.
Saturday, November 28. The Philosophical Society.
* The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page
if sent to the editors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month.
CONTENTS
ORIGINAL PAPERS
Puysics.—Glaser’s experiments and the orientation of molecules in a n
field. G. Breir ...... Bee, yo saree caleatale dephat ais Me apsste aki 3s a tae ap
MineraLocy.—Magnesite and kammererite from Low’s Mine (ine:
County, Maryland. Haru V.SHANNON............c0.scecucseens
Enromotoey.—New termites from the Solomon Islands and Santa Cruz |
pelago—II. Tos. E.Snyper......... Rae, hee :
Scrsntivic Nores AND, NEWSi.. 5. 205. 5c. coe ee cakes Ao aint ien + ne eta
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vernon L. Kettoce, National Research Council.
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B, Stuspex, Bureau of S
Recording Secretary: W. D. LamBerrt, Coast and Geodetic Suryeys :
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic SULT ey
Vol. 15 DECEMBER 4, 1925 No. 20
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Kinuip D. F. Hewett
S. J. MaucHLy
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
= L. H. Apams S. A. Ronwrer
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY ENTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GotpMAn G. W. Srosz
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R. F, Gricas
BOTANICAL SOCIETY
J. R. Swanton
ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicHERS
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Roya anD GuILForp AVES.
BALTIMORE, MARYLAND
Entered as Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of ponees provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences
This JourNAL, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Sciences, aims to
resent a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it publishes: |
1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (2)
short notes of current scientific literature published in or emanating from Washington;
(3) proceedings and programs of meetings of the Academy and affiliated Societies; (4)
notes of events connected with the scientific life of Washington. The JourRNALis issued
semi-monthly, on the fourth and nineteenth of each month, except during the summer
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes correspond tocalendar years. Prompt
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth or
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively.
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they should be
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without essential changes. The
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page.
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be
partly met by the author.
Proof.—In order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to authors
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints——Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of prices.
Copies 4pp. 8pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 baie 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered.
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript.
The rate of Subscription per volume 28.0. oc sis<cc «ccc os cu qeuloa oeinnicieisisiicate $6.00* —
Semi-monthly. numbers, oo. 5 os diel’c sie voi mviein icicin ord ssioye la) elarole. oisieletete ie stein 25
Monthly numbers. cess ee eon selon sane eee eee Ferg steers
Remittances should be made payable to ‘‘Washington Academy of Sciences,”’ and
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D. C.
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges——The Journat does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special rates
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
<
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 DECEMBER 4, 1925 No. 20
GEOPHYSICS.—Isostasy in the southern Pacific. Witi1am Bows,
U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey.
The word isostasy was first used at a meeting of the Philosophical
Society of Washington on April 27, 1889, in an address! by Major Clar-
ence E. Dutton, a member of the U. 8. Geological Survey, when he
definitely formulated the fundamental principles underlying isostasy.
The progress of the isostatic investigations carried on by the U. 8S.
Coast and Geodetic Survey during the past twenty-five years, by
which the idea has been developed into a scientific principle, has been
set forth in a number of papers delivered before the society. It was,
therefore, very fitting that the officials of the society should have
made a grant to be used in making the isostatic reduction of several
gravity stations. The grant in question was made to the writer in
the early part of 1925.
For the reduction, five island stations in the southern Pacific were
selected. This choice was deemed advisable because there had been
no systematic test of isostasy in the southern hemisphere, and it was
especially desirable to add to the meagre knowledge we had of the
isostatic condition of the Earth’s crust under the oceans.
The determinations of gravity at the selected stations were made
by observers of the navy of Austria-Hungary in 1893 and 1896.
Modern instruments and methods were employed by them, but,
owing to the short time available while the vessels were in port,
the pendulums were swung for only a few hours at a station. The
inaccuracy of the gravity values may, therefore, be as great as 0.010
dyne or centimeter per second per second. This uncertainty is much
greater than that of a standard gravity station for which the value of
gravity has a probable error seldom exceeding 0.002 dyne. Neverthe-
1 Bull. Phil. Soc. Washington 11: 51-64. 1899; reprinted in Journ. Washington
Acad. Sei. 15: 359-369. 1925.
445
446 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
less, the island stations selected have gravity values sufficiently reli-
able to test the local isostasy.
The data for the stations were taken from the report of the Inter-
national Geodetic Association entitled, Comptes Rendus de l’ Associa-
Fig. 1.—The positions of the gravity stations considered in this paper are shown
above by circles. The numbers correspond to those in the table of data.
tion Géodésique Internationale (3. 1909). The isostatic reductions
under the grant by the Philosophical Society of Washington were
made under the immediate direction of C. H. Swick, Mathematician
of the U. 8S. Coast and Geodetic Survey.
ost 0
0&1 O-+
Sgt 0+
OPT O-+
961° O--
O@1' O-+-
860) O--
AITVWONYV
WLV OOO TL
620° 0
€¢0' 0-+
190’ 0+
£60’ O--
(0 O-++
£00° 0--
GZ0' O-+
060° 0
080! O--
690’ O-+-
6P0' OF
020° 0-+
100'0—
120° O-
74
AIVWONV
OMLVLHORT
199° 816 | ¥OS' S826 | &60' 0+
1L8°826 | ¥99°826 | GOL O-+
169° 826 | ¥E9' 826 | ZITO
118'816 | 398° 816 | €20°0-+-
GPE’ S826 | 982826 | 660' 0--
199°826 | 809°826 | 260°0
119'816 | L99°816 | 901'0
189° 826 | 889°826 | 131° O-+-
118°826 | 998'816 | 220’ O--
(31) OW (NOTH
jongtanas | outa lan aay
tuna ane
TOP
100° 0— £ 881° 826 G'8Pp O9T
100° 0— € GIP S26 100 291 G98
100'0— € CoP 826 O'Lb 291 G96
100'0— tS 819°826 O'6L SOT Q°Sp
100° 0— O82 826 18 26 o99T 19 OT
“uy 9G Yidap Uornsuaduo,)
100° 0— £ 881826 G'sp OOT 1 6v
100° 0 € CIV 826 T00 291 6 9G
100 0— & CoP 826 O'Lb 201 696
100° 0— £ 819826 OGL Sol 0'oV
100/0— G O82 826 (8 LG M91 19 OT
Uy LETTE Yidop worpsuaduo,)
Soy
NOWLVALS
AMO
AIO LOLA CLT
WOM AWATOD "AGS wd
IVA TIVO
“LLGQLOU NE
SNOMVIG UOM VLVCE IVIENGSSO—" TOTAAL
Here GIS OF PUBL FNOYPIM UBOTT
6- SHC NeUAIAL (G
Chics |PaErOC ON Mon coe HOROD SON RM My
Qt eT OTA PUG iT TO oT ae
Jip ee eRe (TOL DUS) NG LACE,
REC ia eee a ome ene eC OMULUNT: Si
verre es UTS OF PABGOT JNOY JIM UBOTT
pereeee sees TGTS OF PAIL YITM UBOA
= = = = —
6- D OTOH DIES OOK GORDO SL TUTLUOIINE Le} +
Fey cheer [nS TS MAD CORRS UR MTOR AUC Pi ay
OT— BOB HQODUOTOTOC HG AVA DNAUTS! MUG} hs
P| Pe eT Sek (POTA URS) eT LN
ee RRO CAUCE HOUIOMAR IODC OTN TINE 2 Ul
NOVAS
448 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
In Table 1 are given the essential data for the stations, including
the anomalies by the Free Air and the Isostatic reductions.
In the Free Air method of reducing gravity stations, the only correc-
tion applied to the value of gravity as computed for sea level at the
latitude of the station is for the elevation of the station above the
level of the sea. For the island stations the elevation correction is
very small because the stations are located at places little above the
sea. The isostatic reductions were made by the method described
in detail in special publications Nos. 10 and 40 of the U. 8. Coast and
Geodetic Survey.
For some years the depth of 113.7 kilometers was used in the
computation of the effect of the isostatic compensation but in special
publication No. 40, 96 kilometers was derived as the most probable
depth of compensation. The reduction of the five island stations
was made for both values, as shown in the table.
For many years students of the Earth have tried to explain the great
difference between the computed and the observed values of gravity
at island stations. The Free Air reduction left the observed value
much greater than the theoretical one. No explanation prior to the
establishment of the theory of isostasy seemed to meet with favor
except the one that the crust under the oceans was far heavier than
that under the continents. This idea was strongly favored by many
geologists, as indicated in geological literature by its application to
major problems.
The first test of isostasy, under the oceans, was made by the late
Dr. John F. Hayford and the author when the isostatic reduction was
made for six island gravity stations. The results are shown on page
81 of special publication No. 10 of the U. 8. Coast and Geodetic Survey.’
Stations were then purposely selected which had large differences
between the observed and the theoretical values. Even those stations
had their gravity anomalies very much reduced by the application of
the isostatic method.
By reference to the preceding table, it will be seen that the anoma-
lies by the Free Air method are large. The greatest anomaly is
+0.158 while the smallest one is +0.098, with an average of +0.130.
The isostatic anomalies are, in each case, smaller than the Free Air
ones. Since it is believed that the depth of compensation, $6 kilo-
meters, is the most reliable one, the anomalies deduced by using that
depth will be considered the true ones. As a matter of fact, they
° These results were later superseded by somewhat different values which are given
in special publication No. 40, p. 57.
pEc. 4, 1925 BOWIE: ISOSTASY IN THE SOUTHERN PACIFIC 449
differ only 0.003 dyne on the average from those obtained with the
depth of 113.7 kilometers.
One isostatic anomaly is only +0.003, very close to zero. Of the
other four, two have anomalies of +0.023 and +0.025 which are only
slightly larger than the average of 0.020 dyne for the stations of the
United States. The other two anomalies are +0.053 and +0.061
which are nearly two and one-half times the average anomaly in the
United States, but there are a number of anomalies in this country
which are larger than they are.
Tf the crust under the island stations considered here were normal
in density, the deficiency of mass in the space around them occupied
by water would indicate the amount the crust was out of equilibrium.
In such case the observed values of gravity would be smaller than the
theoretical values by the negative effect of the deficient masses. But
instead of the observed gravity being too small at each of the stations
it is too great. This leads one to suspect that the crust below is much
denser than normal. The isostatic reductions enable us to learn just
how much above normal is the density of the crustal matter.
In making the isostatic reduction, the negative effect of the de-
ficiency in density in the ocean waters was computed and also the
effect of the isostatic compensation supposed to be equal in amount
to the deficiency but, of course, of the opposite sign. The compensa-
tion was assumed to be distributed uniformly throughout the thick-
ness of the crust down to a depth of 96 kilometers below sea level.
Also the compensation was assumed to be directly below the topo-
graphic features, in this case the water of different depths and the
small masses of the islands above sea level. The effect of the isostatic
reduction was to account for the larger part of the differences between
the observed and the theoretical values. The unaccounted-for differ-
ence was reduced from an average of +0.130 dyne to +0.033 dyne.
This is a reduction of 75 per cent.
There are several explanations of the isostatic anomalies:
(1). That the crust below the stations is out of balance by an
amount indicated by the anomalies. On an average this is equivalent
to 825 feet of rock of a density of 2.7 of indefinite horizontal extent.
Eyen if this were true, still we could say that isostasy obtains to a
very marked degree.
(2). The depth of compensation may be greater, and should the
depth used in the computations be increased, the anomalies may be
greatly reduced. The change of nearly 18 kilometers only reduced
the anomalies 0.003 dyne. Therefore, to bring the average anomaly
with regard to sign to zero, by a change in depth, the depth would
450 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY ON SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
have to be increased by about 200 kilometers, making the new depth
about 300 kilometers. This depth seems to be most improbable. The
difference in the behavior of crustal and subcrustal matter must be a
function of pressure and of heat. Since the pressure at 96 kilometers
below the sea level surface under the oceans and the land must be very
close to equal, we have only the heat different. It is difficult to see
how there could be very great heat differences at a depth of 96 kilo-
meters under the sea and the continent. I think we should reject
the greater depth of compensation explanation.
(3). Uncertainty in the values of gravity as observed. Earlier
in this paper it is stated that the uncertainty is about 0.010 dyne.
This is less than one-third the average anomaly. Even should the un-
certainty be as much as that, it is likely that at some stations the error
would be positive and at others negative. This explanation probably
would account for some part of the isostatic anomalies.
(4). Densities of the materials in the pedestals, on which the islands
rest, larger than those used in the computations. Should these
densities be from 10 per cent to 15 per cent above normal, then the
average anomaly, with regard to sign, could be reduced to about one-
half of their present values. ‘The islands are voleanic and it is prob-
able that the density below them is greater than normal.
It may be concluded that the causes of the isostatic anomalies are
probably due in part to errors in the observed gravity values, and to
an excess of density of the material composing the island pedestals.
Five island gravity stations are not sufficient on which to base
a definite conclusion regarding the isostatic condition of the Earth’s
crust under the oceans, but the evidence presented here is in close
accord with evidence from land data and from those collected by Dr.
F. A. Vening Meinesz on his submarine voyage from Holland to Java,
when he determined the value of gravity at a number of places at
sea.
BOTANY.—Twelve new species of Valeriana from the Andes of South
America... Evuswortx P. Kixuip, U. 8. National Museum.
In the present paper twelve new Andean species of Valeriana are
described. In nearly every case the specimens upon which these are
based were taken to Europe last summer by the writer, and compared
with material in the rich collections at Paris, Geneva, Berlin, and
London.
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
Dec. 4, 1925 KILLIP: NEW SPECIES OF VALERIANA 451
This difficult, widely distributed genus has been subdivided in
various ways by Hoeck,? Graebner,’ Briquet,’ and others, numerous
subgenera and several segregated genera having been proposed. A
thorough revision based on collections in the United States as well
as in Europe is greatly needed.: It was not practicable for me in the
time at my disposal to do more than make the comparisons referred
to. In the discussion following the formal description of each species
in the present paper reference is made merely to its nearest relative
and the principal points of difference are pointed out.
Valeriana trichiata Killip, sp. nov.
Climbing herb; stem terete, glabrous, pilosulous at the nodes; leaves
simple, oblong-ovate, 5 to 7 em. long, 1.5 to 2 cm. wide, acute at both ends,
sessile or the lower short-petioled, entire at margin, triplinerved, above
glabrous, beneath glabrous or sparsely hirsute on the nerves, bright green
when dry; bracts similar to the leaves, decreasing to about 1 em. long,
sessile; inflorescence paniculate, diffuse, about 25 cm. long, the branches
glabrous or sparsely hirsutulous toward ends; bractlets oblanceolate, about
3 mm. long, acute, densely ciliate, otherwise glabrous, green throughout;
corolla white, funnelform, 1.5 mm. long, 5-lobed, the lobes orbicular, 0.5 mm.
long or less; fruit oblong-ovate, 3-nerved on one face, 1-nerved on other.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1, 143,768, collected in forest
between Paletard and Calaguala, Department of El Cauca, Colombia,
altitude 3000-3200 meters (Central Cordillera), June 17, 1922, by F. W.
Pennell (no. 7103).
The densely ciliate bractlets distinguish this species from its near relative,
V. pavonii, both belonging to the small group of scandent species.
Valeriana quindiensis Killip, sp. nov.
Shrubby vine; stem terete, woody below, herbaceous above, glabrous,
pilosulous at the nodes, the internodes 1 cm. long, or less, below, longer
upward; leaves ovate-oblong, 2.5 to 4 em. long, 0.8 to 1.5 em. wide, acute at
apex, decurrent at base to a short (about 5 mm.) petiole, entire, subtripli-
nerved reticulate-veined (nerves and veins impressed above), dark green,
sublustrous and glabrescent above, paler, dull, and scurfy-glandular be-
neath, often densely crowded on sterile axillary branches; inflorescence
diffusely paniculate, twice-trichotomous, the branchlets repeatedly dichot-
omous, ferruginous-pilosulous; bractlets oblong-lanceolate, 2 to 3 mm. long,
acutish; corolla turbinate-campanulate, barely 1 mm. long, 5-lobed, white or
yellowish green; fruit lance-oblong, 3-nerved on one face, 1-nerved on other,
thickened at margin, sparingly pilosulous, pappose, the pappus about 16-
rayed.
Type in the U. §. National Herbarium, no. 1,191,839, collected on rocky
cliff, Piramo del Quindio, Department of Caldas, Colombia, altitude 3800-
4000 meters (Central Cordillera), August 15-20, 1922, by F. W. Pennell and
2 Bot. Jahrb. Engler 3: 38-44. 1882; Nat. Pflanzenfam. 44: 172-182. 1891.
2 Bot. Jahrb. Engler 26: 425-436. 1899; 37: 464-480. 1906.
4 Ann. Consery. Jard. Bot. Genéve 17: 347-356. 1917.
452 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
T. E. Hazen (no. 10075). Two other specimens in the National Herbarium,
from the Péramo de Ruiz, in the same general locality (Pennell 3084 and
Lehmann 3164) belong to this species.
This species is related to V. clematitis H. B. K., V. laurifolia H. B. K.,
and V. hispida Turez., Pennell’s 10075 having been compared with the types
of these three species in Europe. It differs from all of them in the closely
crowded, proportionately narrower leaves which are densely scurfy-glandular
beneath.
Valeriana tatamana Killip, sp. nov.
Erect herb, about 65 em. high, thickened at base; stem simple, terete,
shallowly grooved, glabrescent in lower half, finely pilosulous in upper;
basal leaves lanceolate, 15 to 20 cm. long, 1.5 to 2 cm. wide, acute or slightly
obtusish at apex, tapering to a broadly winged, retrorse-ciliate, sheathing
petiole about 3.5 em. long, 11 or 13-nerved (nerves prominent, with numer-
ous cross-veins between the nerves), leathery-coriaceous, shining and dark
green above, duller and olive-brown beneath, glabrous or finely pubescent
on the midnerve above, sparsely ciliate at the subrevolute margin; cauline
leaves about 4 pairs, lanceolate, 9 (decreasing to 2.5) em. long, 1.5 to 1 em.
wide, cordulate at base, abruptly narrowed to a petiole 1 to 0.5 em. long;
inflorescence a contracted panicle about 12 cm. long, densely rufo-pilosulous,
the terminal and axillary panicles twice or thrice-trichotomous, 3 to 5 em.
wide, the lowest panicles with well developed peduncles, the heads subglobose,
about 1.5 em. wide, densely flowered; bracts oblong, 7 to 8 mm. long, about
2 mm. wide, acutish, ciliate below, purplish throughout; bractlets lance-
oblong, about 5 mm. long, 1.5 mm. wide, entire or with 2 small lobes just below
apex, ciliate to apex, otherwise glabrous, purplish at center, pale at margin;
corolla funnelform, about 1 mm. long, 5-lobed; stamens very slightly exserted.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,143,788, collected on wet
grassy pdiramo, Cerro Tatamd, Department of Caldas, Colombia, altitude
3400-3700 meters (Western Cordillera), September 8-10, 1922, by F. W.
Pennell (no. 10582).
This is related to V. plantaginea and V. longifolia, differing from both
in the glossy, acute, short-petioled, conspicuously nerved leaves and strongly.
ciliate bracts and bractlets. From V. plantaginea it is further distinguished
by much smaller bracts, and from V. longifolia by a more contracted panicle
with very densely flowered heads.
Valeriana asterothrix Killip, sp. nov.
Plant “1 to 1.5 em.,” straggling (or erect?); stem terete, densely short-
hirsute, leafy to inflorescence, the upper leaves remote; leaves cordate, 3 to 6
em. long, 1.5 to 3.5 em. wide (upper leaves and those of sterile branches
smaller), acute at apex, petiolate (petioles up to 2 em. long, the upper leaves
subsessile), dentate or crenate-dentate, short-hirsutulous above, densely
stellate-pubescent beneath especially on the nerves; bracts oblong-lanceolate,
6 to 8 mm. long, 2 to 3 mm. wide, obtuse, subentire, free to base; inflorescence
a contracted trichotomous cyme about 3 em. wide (in flower) ; bractlets lmear
or slightly linear-spatulate, about 5 mm. long, obtuse, conspicuously 1-nerved,
minutely ciliate; corolla white, funnelform, the tube 4 to 5 mm. long, the
lobes ovate-oblong, 1.5 to 2 mm. long, rounded; stamens exserted; fruit
lance-oblong, about 4 mm. long, 3-nerved on one face, l-nerved on other,
glabrous, apparently epappose.
DEc. 4, 1925 KILLIP: NEW SPECIES OF VALERIANA 453
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,196,436, collected in rich
woods between Ofia and Cuenca, Province Assuay, Ecuador, altitude 2700-
3300 meters, September 10, 1923, by A. S. Hitchcock (no. 21629).
This plant very closely resembles the type specimen of V. malvacea Graebn.,
with which it was compared.at Berlin. The leaves in both cases are quite
similar and have the same characteristic stellate pubescence. In V. astero-
thrix the flowers are fully three times as large as in V. malvacea, the fruit
is much larger, the inflorescence more contracted, the leaves more coarsely
toothed, and the pubescence of the stem much different.
Valeriana renifolia Killip, sp. nov.
Erect, perennial (?) herb, about 65 em. high; roots elongate, fleshy, up to
5 mm. thick; stems striate, straw-colored, pilose with whitish hairs below,
glabrescent above, densely pilosulous at nodes; basal leaves subreniform or
broadly ovate, 1.5 to 3.5 em. long, 2.5 to 3 em. wide, rounded at apex, coarsely,
and often doubly crenate-dentate or repand-dentate, 5-nerved at base, petio-
late (petioles 2.5 to 3 em. long), glabrescent or sparsely subappressed-pilose,
rather fleshy; cauline leaves oblong or lanceolate-oblong, about 1.5 cm. long
0.6 to 0.8 em. wide (lower leaves), 1 to 0.5 em. long (upper leaves), sessile,
subamplexicaul, irregularly glandular-denticulate; inflorescence paniculate,
up to 20 em. long, 15 em. wide, the primary branches 2 to 4 at a node, 5 to 7-
dichotomous, the flowers borne singly but approximately at the ends of the
ultimate branches; bracts linear, 5 mm. long or less, acute; bractlets linear,
up to 2mm. long, mucronulate, hyaline, with dark midrib; flowers very small,
funnelform, 1 to 1.5 mm. long, 5-lobed, the lobes orbicular; fruit ovate, 1 mm.
long, nerveless, pappose, the pappus about 8-rayed.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 534169,
collected on rock ledges, Huariaca, Peru, altitude 2900 meters, April 3, 1923,
by J. F. Macbride (no. 3099).
The relationship of this new species is with V. baltana Graebn., the type
of which I examined at Berlin. Valeriana baltana, however, is leafy up to the
inflorescence, the cauline leaves being only slightly narrower than the basal;
the panicle is much larger; and the fruit is twice as long as in V. renifolia,
and more oblong in shape.
Valeriana melanocarpa Killip, sp. nov.
Erect herb, 40 cm. high or more; stem subterete, pilosulous or glabrescent;
leaves (only upper cauline seen) up to 8 em. long, unequally pinnate, subses-
sile, the leaflets ovate-oblong or ovate-lanceolate, acute, shallowly repand-
dentate or nearly entire, finely appressed-pubescent above, white-tomentose
beneath, membranous, the terminal leaflet 4 to 5.5 em. long, acutish at base,
the lateral leaflets two pairs (upper pair 2.5 to 3.5 cm. long, about 1 em. wide,
the lower pair about 1 em. long, 0.6 to 0.8 em. wide), oblique at base, decurrent;
inflorescence cymose-paniculate, terminal and in the axils of the upper leaves,
the cymes rather compact, the branches arcuate-ascending, up to 10 cm. long,-
trichotomous, the branchlets repeatedly dichotomous, the flowers borne in
clusters of 3 to 7 at the ends of the branchlets; bracts linear, up to 7 mm. long,
pilosulous; bractlets linear-oblong, 2 mm. long, mucronulate, ciliate; fruit
oblong-lanceolate, about 2 mm. long, 3-nerved on one face, l-nerved on
other, appressed-pilosulous, black, pappose, the pappus about 10-rayed.
454 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 604495, collected in the Lucu-
mayo Valley, Peru, altitude 1800-3600 meters, June 18, 1915, by O. F. Cook
and G. B. Gilbert (no. 1311).
The dense long-peduncled cymes and black fruit distinguish this species
from its nearest relative V. decussata R. & P.
Valeriana macbridei Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, 60 em. high or more, woody at base, pilose or pilosulous
throughout, the stem slender (about 5 mm. in diameter), terete, shallowly
grooved; basal leaves crowded, up to 20 em. long (including petiole), un-
equally pinnate (or those of the sterile shoots occasionally simple), the
leaflets obtuse at apex, entire or remotely denticulate, subearnulose, the
terminal leaflet much larger than the lateral leaflets, ovate-cordate, 6 to 10
cm. long, 4 to 7 em. wide, the lateral leaflets 2 pairs, ovate, 1.5 to 4 em. long,
1 to 2.5 em. wide (decreasing in size toward leaf base), sessile or subsessile,
rounded and often oblique at base; cauline leaves similar to basal, decreasing
to about 2 cm. long; inflorescence diffusely paniculate, up to 40 em. long,
twice-trichotomous, the branches dichotomous, the flowers borne singly or in
two’s and three’s; bracts and bractlets linear, acute; corolla cylindric-funnel-
form, about 1.5 mm. long, 5-lobed; fruit narrowly oblong, about 2 mm. long,
3-nerved and glabrous on one face, l-nerved and minutely pilosulous on
other.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 534750,
collected on steep grass-shrub hillside, Piedra Grande, near Santo Domingo
River, Peru, altitude 1500 meters, May 14-19, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no.
3686). Duplicate in the U. 8. National Herbarium.
Related to V. paniculata R. & P., this species is differentiated by obtuse
leaflets and particularly by the much larger, ovate-cordate terminal leaflet.
A second collection from the same general locality (Macbride 4240) prob-
ably belongs to this species. Some of the leaves are fully 30 em. long, with
terminal leaflets up to 14 cm. long.
Valeriana hirsutissima Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, with rootstock, tuberous-thickened at base, densely
hirsute-pilose or the inflorescence and upper leaves glabrescent; leaves of
sterile shoots simple, ovate-oblong, up to 2.5 em. long, slender-petioled; basal
and cauline leaves unequally pinnate, up to 25 em. long (including petiole),
the leaflets acuminate, glandular-serrulate, subcarnose, the lateral leaflets
2 to 5 pairs, up to 5 em. long, 2 em. wide, acutish and usually oblique at base,
sessile or subsessile, the terminal leaflet ovate or ovate-oblong, up to 8 cm.
long, 3.5 em. wide, rounded or acutish at base; inflorescence diffusely panicu-
late, up to 40 em. long, the branches divaricate, trichotomous, the branchlets
dichotomous, the flowers distichous along the ultimate branchlets; bracts
and bractlets linear, acute, mucronulate; corolla globose-campanulate, about
1 mm. long, 5-lobed, the lobes ovate; fruit oblong, about 2 mm. long, 3-
nerved on one face, 1-nerved on other, pilosulous, pappose.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, no.
536168, collected on open brushy hills, Pampayacu, at mouth of Chinchao
River, Peru, altitude 1000 meters, July 19-25, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no.
5118). Duplicate in the U. S$. National Herbarium.
pec. 4, 1925 KILLIP: NEW SPECIES OF VALERIANA 455
This species also is similar to V. paniculata R. & P. in leaf shape and
general habit. The distichous arrangement of the flowers on the branches,
more like that of V. urttcaefolia, at once distinguishes the species from V.
paniculata. In addition, the lower leaves are strongly hirsute.
Valeriana bambusicaulis Killip, sp. nov.
Plant herbaceous, about 3 meters high, woody at base, the roots fibrillose;
stem stout, up to 2 em. thick, terete, glabrous, smooth or finely striate or
shallowly grooved; leaves of sterile shoots simple, ovate, 2 to 5 cm. long, 1 to
3 em. wide, long-petioled, the petioles slender, up to 7 em. long; basal leaves
unequally pinnate, up to 25 em. long (probably longer), the petioles quadran-
gular, glabrous, dilated at base, the rachis quadrangular, finely pubescent
above, the lateral leaflets 4 or 5 pairs, the terminal and lateral leaflets sub-
equal, oblong or oblong-lanceolate, up to 6 cm. long, 3 cm.. wide, acute at
apex, rounded or acutish at base, petiolulate (petiolules up to 1 em. long),
entire at margin, finely puberulent or glabrescent, subcoriaceous, dark green
above, paler beneath; cauline leaves linear-lanceolate, simple, 2 to 4 cm. long,
acuminate, entire or glandular-serrulate toward apex; inflorescence diffusely
paniculate, the branches divaricate or arcuate-ascending, 4 or 5 times trichot-
omous, the flowers 1 to 4 at the ends of the branchlets; bractlets linear-lanceo-
late, about 2 mm. long, acute; corolla globose-campanulate, 1 mm. long,
5-lobed, the lobes orbicular-ovate; fruit oblong-lanceolate, about 2 mm. long,
usually curved, 3-nerved on one face, I-nerved on other, glabrous,pappose,
the pappus about 6-rayed.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 535549,
collected on a wet shrubby slope, Tambo de Vaca, Peru, altitude 3800 meters,
June 10-24, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 4463). Duplicate in the U. 8.
National Herbarium.
This species is related to V. warburgiit Graebn. It differs in its much
thicker, entire, proportionately longer leaflets.
Valeriana tenella Killip, sp. nov.
Slender herb, about 30 cm. high; roots tuberous; stem subquadrangular,
glabrous or sparingly pilosulous, the internodes 2 to 4 cm. long; basal leaves
not present on type specimen; cauline leaves up to 3 em. long, unequally pin-
nate (terminal leaflet subrhombic, up to 1 cm. long, 0.6 em. wide; lateral
leaflets 1 or 2 pairs, oblong-lanceolate, smaller), the leaflets acuminate, sessile
or subsessile, irregularly glandular-serrate, finely pubescent on nerves, mem-
branous; flowers in trichotomous cymes 1 cm. wide or less, borne on filiform
peduncles (up to 1.5 em. long) in the axils of the much reduced upper leaves;
bracts linear, 1.5 em. long; bractlets linear-spatulate, 1 mm. long or less;
corolla cylindric-campanulate, about 1 mm. long, white, the 5 lobes green.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,118,526, collected at Palmira,
Mérida, Venezuela, altitude 2100 meters, September 1, 1921, by A. Jahn
(no. 564).
Comparison of this specimen with the type of V. sorbifolia H. B. K. in the
Humboldt Herbarium, Paris, shows a close relationship between the two
species. Valeriana tenella, however, is a much more slender plant, with one or
two, not five or six, pairs of lateral leaflets. The leaflets are more finely
toothed, and are pubescent on the under side of the nerves.
456 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
A plant in the herbarium of the Jardin Botanique, Geneva, collected by
Brother Apollinaire near Bogota, Colombia, is probably this new species.
Valeriana isoetifolia Killip, sp. nov.
Plant perennial, cespitose, the caudex about 5 mm. thick, woody, branched
above, basal leaves rosulate, numerous, narrowly linear, 1.5 to 2.5 em. long,
up or 2 mm. wide, acute, sessile, dilated to a sheathing base, scabrous at
margin, 3 or 5-nerved, fleshy, russet brown or blackish when dry; scapes up to
11 em. long, finely pubescent, bearing at or above the middle a cluster of three
leaves similar to the basal leaves; bracts linear, about 7 mm. long, 2 mm. wide,
i-nerved, hyaline at margin; inflorescence a dense, subglobose or broadly
ovoid head 1 to 1.5 cm. in diameter; bractlets spatulate, 3 to 4 mm. long,
truncate and subemarginate at apex, purplish at center, pale at margin; corolla
eylindric-campanulate, about 3 mm. long, white, 5-lobed, the lobes ovate;
fruit 2.6 mm. long, I-nerved, glabrous, pappose, the pappus 6-rayed, white.
Type in the herbarium of the Field Museum of Natural History, no. 585510,
collected among rocks at the summit of range, near Tambo de Vaca, Peru,
altitude 4000 meters, June 10-24, 1923, by J. F. Macbride (no. 4424). Dupli-
cate in the U. 8. National Her barium.
Apparently a species is nearest V. romanana Graebn. The scapes are
much longer, the flowers are borne in a single larger, globose head, the leaves
are acute, not rounded at apex, and the caudex is much branched.
Valeriana ligulifolia Killip, sp. nov.
Plant acaulescent, from a slender taproot, the crown bearing numerous
persistent enlarged bases of leaves; leaves narrowly linear-spatulate, 9 to 10
cm. long, 3 to 4 mm. wide toward apex, about 2 mm. wide below middle,
abruptly enlarging to a sessile base about 10 mm. wide, obtuse, conspicuously
3-nerved, fleshy, glabrous, bright green when dry; peduncles subequal to the
leaves and of similar texture, the flowers borne in a single dense terminal
head; bracts lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate, unequal, 5 to 8 mm. long, 4 to 5
mm. wide at the connate base, acutish, minutely ciliate; bractlets linear, 2 to
3 mm. long, obtuse; flowers not dev eloped i in type specimen.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,143,789, collected on wet,
grassy paramo, Cerro Tatama, Department of Caldas, Colombia, altitude
3400-3700 meters (Western Cordillera), September 8-10, 1922, by F. W.
Pennell (no. 10583).
This species belongs to the small group, perhaps generically distinct from
Valeriana, in which the plants are acaulescent and the bracts connate, of
which the best-known Colombian species is V. bracteata Benth. From that V.
ligulifolia is distinguished by longer, more slender, 3-nerved (not 5 or 7-nerved)
leaves, and ciliate bracts.
pec. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 457
BOTANY.—New plants from Central America——IV.! Patt C.
Sranpuey, U. 8. National Museum.’
In this paper there appear descriptions of several new species of
Panama plants, and Dr. William Trelease has contributed an account
of a new species of Peperomia collected in Guanacaste, Costa Rica, by
Prof. Juvenal Valerio. The rather numerous new combinations listed
below are mostly ones necessary for the proper listing of the flora of
the Canal Zone.
Cyperus hayesii (C. B. Clarke) Stand.
Torulinium hayesit C. B. Clarke, Kew Bull. Add. Ser. 8: 20. 1908.
Cyperus panamensis (C. B. Clarke) Britton.
Mariscus panamensis C. B. Clarke, Kew Bull. Add. Ser. 8: 15. 1908.
Stenophyllus hirtellus (Schrad.) Standl.
Isolepis hirtella Schrad. in Schult. Mant. 2: 70. 1824.
Callisia multiflora (Mart. & Gal.) Stand.
Commelina multiflora Mart. & Gal. Bull. Acad. Brux. 9°: 374. 1842.
Callisia martensiana C. B. Clarke in DC. Mongr. Phan. 3: 312. 1881.
Vagnera paniculata (Mart. & Gal.) Standl.
Smilacina paniculata Mart. & Gal. Bull. Acad. Brux. 97: 388. 1842.
Vagnera salvini (Baker) Stand.
Tovaria salvini Baker, Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot. 14: 567. 1875.
Vagnera flexuosa (Bertol.) Standl.
Smilacina flecuosa Bertol. Nov. Com. Acad. Bonon. 4: 411. pl. 39. 1840.
Vellozia panamensis Standl., sp. noy.
Caudex simple or branched, densely covered by the persistent fibrous
leaf bases; leaves linear, 8-25 em. long, 5-9 mm. wide, subulate-attenuate,
glabrous above, whitish-pilose beneath, the margins cartilaginous, smooth;
scapes 1 or 2, stout, 4-6 cm. high, densely glandular, the glands short-
stipitate above; perianth tube nearly 5 em. long, densely covered with stipitate
glands, the lobes linear, about 1 em. long, glandular outside, stamens 12; style
filiform, twisted above, exceeding the perianth; capsule 1.5 cm. long, globose-
oval, very densely covered with dark glands, these borne on stout spinelike
stipes.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 715574, collected on Cerro Vaca,
eastern Chiriqui, Panama, altitude 900-1135 meters, by H. Pittier (no.
5352).
This is the first plant of its family (Velloziaceae) to be reported from
Central America.
1See this JouRNAL 15: 285-289. 1925.
? Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution.
458 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
Peperomia valerioi Trelease, sp. nov.
A moderately small, stoloniferous, glabrous herb; stem short but rather
thick (5-6 mm.); leaves alternate, elliptic- or obovate-spatulate, obtuse, more
or less emarginate, cuneately attenuate, rather large (4.5-5 x 11 em.),
drying coriaceous and rather glossy, pinnately veined nearly throughout, the
branches of the midrib about 6 X 2; petiole short (about 1 em.), scarcely
winged; spikes terminal, moderately stout and long (2 X 100 mm. or more),
closely flowered; peduncle about 8 cm. long, bracted at about the middle;
bracts small, round-peltate, about 12 to the pseudo-whorl; berries oblong,
the short conical beak filiformly protracted; stigma anterior at base of the
beak.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,169,888, collected at Arenal,
Costa Rica, at 600 meters, by Juvenal Valerio (no. 31).
Struthanthus oerstedii (Oliver) Standl.
Loranthus oerstedii Oliver, Naturh. For. Kjébenhavn Vid. Medd. 1864:
171. 1865.
This new name has been listed by the writer (in Standl. & Calderén, Lista
Pl. Salv. 72. 1925), but without indication of the name-bringing synonym.
Alternanthera williamsii Stand.
Achyranthes williamsii Standl. Contr. U.S. Nat. Herb. 18, 89. 1916.
Alternanthera williamsii f. purpurea Standl., f. nov.
Like the typical form of the species, and differing only in the color of the
leaves, which are purple or purple-red.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,153,387, collected along the
Corozal Road, near Panama City, Panama, Dec. 13, 1923, by Paul C. Stand-
ley (no. 26892).
Typical A. williamsii is a common weedy plant in thickets about the Canal
Zone. This striking form, with handsomely colored leaves, is seen frequently
in gardens, where it is planted for ornament. It occurs also in the wild state,
but perhaps only as an escape from cultivation. The flowers are white,
as in the normal form. When specimens are dried all the purple coloration
disappears.
Castalia blanda (Meyer) Standl.
Nymphaea blanda Meyer, Prim. Fl. Esseq. 201. 1818.
Radicula mexicana (Moc. & Sessé) Standl.
Nasturtium mexicanum Moc. & Sessé; DC. Reg. Veg. Syst. 2: 193. 1821.
Leptoglottis leptocarpa (DC.) Standl.
Schrankia leptocarpa DC. Prodr. 2: 443. 1825.
Leptoglottis hamata (Humb. & Bonpl.) Standl.
Schrankia hamata Humb. & Bonpl.; Willd. Sp. Pl. 4: 1042. 1805.
Leptoglottis DC. seems to be the proper name for the genus known as
Schrankia Willd. and more recently as Morongia Britton.
DEc. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 459
Amerimnon escatophyllum (L.) Stand.
Hedysarum ecastophyllum L. Syst. Nat. ed. 10. 1169. 1759.
Machaerium microphyllum (Meyer) Standl.
Drepanocarpus microphyllus Meyer, Nov. Act. Nat. Cur. 12: 808. 1825.
Machaerium glabripes -Pittier, Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 20: 472. 1922
Protium sessiliflorum (Rose) Standl.
Icica sessiliflora Rose, N. Amer. Fl. 25: 259. 1911.
Malache ovata (Presl) Standl.
Malachra ovata Presl. Rel. Haenk. 2: 125. 1836.
Malache fruticosa (Mill.) Standl.
Sida fruticosa Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8. Sida no. 18. 1768.
Malache dasypetala (Turez.) Standl.
Pavonia dasypetala Turez. Bull. Soc. Nat. Moscou 31: 189. 1858.
Taonabo seemanni (Triana & Planch.) Standl.
Ternstroemia seemanni Ann. Sci. Nat. IV. 18: 260. 1862.
Parsonsia calophylla (Cham. & Schlecht.) Standl.
Cuphea calophylla Cham. & Schlecht. Linnaea 2: 361. 1827.
Chelonanthus alatus (Aubl.) Standl.
Lisianthus alatus Aubl. Pl. Guian. 214. pl. 80. 1775.
Malouetia guatemalensis (Muell. Arg.) Standl.
Stemmadenia guatemalensis Muell. Arg. Linnaea 30: 410. 1860.
Malouetia panamensis Heurck & Muell.; Heurck, Obs. Bot. 185. 1870.
Prestonia obovata Standl., sp. nov.
Large woody vine with milky sap, the branches bearing numerous corky
tubercles; leaves opposite, the petioles stout, 7-14 mm. long; leaf blades
obovate or broadly obovate, 10-16 em. long, 5-7.5 em. wide, cuneate at base,
obtuse or rounded at apex and cuspidate-apiculate, thick, glabrous, green
above, pale beneath, with about 9 pairs of lateral nerves; inflorescences ter-
minal, racemose, pedunculate, the pedicels stout, 1-1.5 em. long, puberulent;
calyx ‘sparsely puberulent or glabrate, thick and fleshy, the 5 lobes twice as
long as the tube, lance-oblong, acuminate, the calyx bearing within at base
5 deltoid truncate scales 2 mm. long; ring of the disk cuplike, 2.5 mm. long;
corolla salverform, glabrous, fleshy, the lobes yellow, the throat purplish,
the tube 15 mm. long, 4-5 mm. thick, the lobes contorted, broadly oblique-
ovate, nearly 1 em. long, cuspidulate; corolla throat furnished with an annulus
2mm. high; anthers sagittate, 5 mm. long, connivent about the stigma, appen-
daged at base.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 678837, collected along trail
between Gamboa and Cruces, Canal Zone, Panama, July 2, 1911, by H.
Pittier (no. 3767).
460 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
Not closely related to any species known previously from Central America
Sterile specimens from Gatuncillo, Canal Zone (Piper 5609, 5648) are prob-
ably referable to this species. The leaves of these specimens are as much as
25 em. long and 15 em. wide.
Prestonia exserta (A. DC.) Standl.
Haemadictyon exsertum A. DC. in DC. Prodr. 8: 426. 1844.
This species was described from Caracas, Venezuela. It occurs also in
Panama.
Cestrum panamense Standl., sp. nov.
Slender tree 4.5-9 meters high, the branchlets terete, green, glabrous or
very sparsely puberulent; petioles slender, 7-15 mm. long, glabrous or nearly
so; leaf blades mostly lance-oblong, sometimes ovate or ovate-oblong, 10-16
em. long, 3.5-7 em. wide, acuminate to long-attenuate at apex, rounded or
broadly rounded at base, thin, bright green, glabrous, the lateral nerves about
15 on each side, arcuate-spreading; cymes axillary and terminal, lax, few or
many-flowered, 2-6 em. long, the branches very slender, slightly tomentulose
or glabrate, the bracts linear or lanceolate, green, 10 mm. long or shorter, the
flowers partly slender-pedicellate and partly sessile; calyx green, narrow-
campanulate, 1.5-2 mm. long, glabrous or thinly and minutely tomentulose,
the limb shallowly and irregularly 5-dentate, the teeth obtuse; corolla pale
green, the tube slender, glabrous outside, 10-11 mm. long, gradually widening
from base to apex, nearly 2 mm. wide at the mouth, the 5 lobes oblong-lanceo-
late, 3 mm. long, obtuse or acutish, pubescent outside along the incurved
margins; filaments inserted 2.5 mm. below the apex of the corolla tube, the
filaments glabrous, not appendaged; style equaling the corolla tube; fruit
subglobose, glabrous, 6 mm. in diameter.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,217,919, collected in moist
forest along the Rio Tapia, Province of Panama, Panama, near sea level, Dec.
24, 1923, by Paul C. Standley (no. 28042). The following collections also
represent the species:
PanaMA: Hills west of Canal near Gattin, Canal Zone, Standley 27261.
Rio Tapia, Standley 30661. Along Rio Dupf, eastern Chiriqui, Pzttier 5238.
Costa Rica: Forests of Boea de Zhorquin, Talamanca, alt. 50 m., Tonduz
8568. Forests of Tuis, alt.600 m., Tonduz 11355.
Honpuras: Cuyamel, Carleton 460.
Bacopa limosa (Pennell) Standl.
Macuillamia limosa Pennell, Proc. Acad. Phila. 1920: 158. 1920.
Bacopa violacea (Pennell) Standl.
Monocardia violacea Pennell, Proc. Acad. Phila. 1920: 156. 1920.
Bacopa humilis (Pennell) Standl.
Monocardia humilis Pennell, Proc. Acad. Phila. 1920: 157. 1920.
Bacopa axillaris (Benth.) Standl.
Herpestis axillaris Benth. in DC. Prodr. 10: 396. 1846.
pec. 4, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 461
Arrabidaea isthmica Standl., sp. nov.
Large woody vine, the branchlets terete, brown, puberulent or glabrate;
petioles 2.5-3 em. long, the petiolules 1.5-2 cm. long; tendrils long, slender,
simple, coiled; leaflets 2, lance-oblong, 12-15 cm. long, 5-5.5 em. wide,
rounded and emarginate at base, acuminate at apex, thin, nearly concolorous,
minutely puberulent above along the costa, obscurely puberulent beneath
along the nerves or nearly glabrous, the venation prominent-reticulate; pan-
icles axillary, 30 cm. long, laxly many-flowered, ovoid, the branches densely
puberulent; calyx campanulate, 5 mm. long, densely and minutely puberulent,
the limb truncate, with 5 minute distant teeth; corolla pink, 5.5-6 em. long,
finely tomentose outside, the tube about 7 mm. long and 4 mm. thick, abruptly
expanding into the throat, this 1.5-2 em. wide at the mouth, the lobes broadly
rounded; stamens subequal, the anthers 2 mm. long; ovary elongate-ovoid,
minutely lepidote.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 676736, collected near Paraiso,
Canal Zone, Panama, Jan. 26, 1911, by H. Pittier (no. 2576).
Anemopaegma punctulatum Pitt. & Standl., sp. nov.
Large woody vine, the branchlets slender, terete at first, angulate in age,
glabrous; leaves opposite, 2-foliolate, bearing in their axils sessile suborbicular
green foliaceous appendages 5-8 mm. long; petioles 1—-2.5 em. long, the petiol-
ules 4-8 mm. long; leaflets elliptic-oblong, 8.5-13.5 em. long, 3-5 em. wide,
acute or obtuse at base, acute or acuminate at apex, with obtuse tip, thin-
coriaceous, glabrous, concolorous, puncticulate, especially beneath; tendrils,
when present, very long, slender, simple; flowers geminate or ternate in the
axils, on pedicels 1-1.5 em. long; calyx campanulate, 9-13 mm. long, 9 mm.
wide, glabrous, punctate, the margin entire; corolla pale yellow, the tube 6-7
em. long, slender below, gradually dilated about 2 cm. above the base into a
throat 1.5-2 em. broad, the lobes subequal, broadly rounded, 1.5 cm. long,
densely and minutely lepidote within.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,083,010, collected along the
Rio Sirri, Trinidad Basin, Province of Colén, Panama, near sea level, July,
1911, by H. Pittier (no. 4009). The following collections also belong here:
Panama: Near Gattin, Canal Zone, Goldman 1869. Cano Quebrado,
Canal Zone, Pittier 6669.
Costa Rica: Lim6n, Pittier, 16005.
Related species are A. grandiflorwm Sprague, in which the leaflets are much
broader and the flowers larger, and A. chaimberlaynii (Sims) Bur. & Schum.,
which has much smaller flowers.
Guarania suberosa Standl., sp. nov.
Large woody vine, climbing over tall trees, the stems 1.5-3 em. thick,
covered with very thick, narrow, corky ridges, the wood divided into radial
sections, with numerous large longitudinal channels; staminate racemes
clustered on short spurs on naked stems near the ground; peduncles 1-3.5 cm.
long, sparsely hirtellous or glabrate; rachis about 1 cm. long, the pedicels
numerous and dense, 1-3 em. long, minutely appressed-pubescent or glabrate;
calyx tube 2—2.5 em. long, orange-scarlet, minutely puberulent or glabrate,
swollen at base, above about 3 mm. thick; sepals narrowly linear, 5-10 mm.
long, orange-red, spreading; petals linear-attenuate, yellow, 3-4 mm. long,
connivent to form a sharp-pointed cone; stamens 2, dorsifixed, 12-14 mm.
long, linear, short-replicate at base, the connective linear, prolonged at apex
as a linear-triangular papillose appendage.
462 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,219,834, collected in moist
forest on Barro Colorado Island in Gattin Lake, Canal Zone, Panama, near
sea level, Jan. 17, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 31461). Also collected in
forest along the Rio Indio de Gatitin, Canal Zone, Jan. 1911, by E. A. Goldman
(no. 2778).
The leaves of this species have not been collected. Species of Guarania
with woody stems are rare, and habitally (as well as structurally) this one
seems to resemble G. megistantha Donn. Smith, described from the Atlantic
lowlands of Costa Rica. In that species, however, the petals are longer than
the sepals.
ZOOLOGY.—New species and subspecies of American turtles. LEon-
HARD STEJNEGER, U.S. National Museum.
It has. been considered advisable to place on record the following
brief characterizations of some undescribed forms of turtles in the
collection of the U. 8S. National Museum.
Kinosternon herrerai, new species.
Diagnosis.—Plastron smaller than opening of shell; plastron deeply incised
posteriorly; carapace without keel; nasal shield furcate; width of bridge con-
tained in the length of the anterior plastral lobe; postcentrals scarcely lower
than tenth marginals; interpectoral seam one-fourth to one-third the inter-
humeral; gular relatively short, shorter than one-half the anterior lobe;
interabdominal seam shorter than either lobe; first central lamina narrow,
widely separated from second marginals; rostrum strongly hooked; male
with postfemoral tuberculated patches.
Type.—U. 8. National Museum No. 61249. Adult male.
Type locality—Xochimileo, Valley of Mexico.
In addition to the type three adult females were presented to the National
Museum by Dr. Alfonso L. Herrera, the distinguished director of Biological
Studies, and the National Museum of Mexico, through Dr. A. Busck.
The new species, although larger and with a larger head, has the general
appearance of K. subrubrum, but it differs in many important respects, as
shown in the diagnosis. References in the literature to K. pensilvanicum
in Mexico in most instances relate to the present species.
Kinosternon abaxillare Baur, new species. J
Diagnosis.—“‘Near Kinosternon cruentatum, but axillary lamina absent and
posterior seam of abdominal laminz convex; three more or less distinct longi-
tudinal keels near together; plastron not emarginate behind; gular large,
about one-half the length of anterior lobe; interfemoral seam very short,
at most one-sixth of interanal seam.”’
Type.—U. 8. National Museum No. 7518; adult male.
Type locality —Tuxtla, Chiapas, Mexico.
In the national collection there are twelve shells collected by Dr. C. H.
Berendt at Tuxtla. They were named Kinosternon abaxillare by the late
Dr. Georg Baur, from whose manuscript note I have abstracted the above
diagnosis. The locality Tuxtla, visited by Dr. Berendt, is Tuxtla Gutierrez,
not far from the Chiapas River, which belongs to the Atlantic watershed and
DEC. 4, 1925 STEJNEGER: NEW SPECIES OF AMERICAN TURTLES 463
drains into the Gulf of Mexico. It should not be confounded with Tuxtla
in the state of Verz Cruz. The species seems to be a valid one, though the
most obvious character, the absence of a distinct axillary, is not absolutely
constant, Inasmuch as in a young specimen it is plainly separated off from the
abdominal lamina by a distinct seam.
Kinosternon bauri palmarum, new subspecies.
Diagnosis.—Difiers from typical Kinosternon bauri in the head being larger
and the snout less conical and pointed; profile of beak more perpendicular;
horizontal outline of carapace more perfectly elliptical; laminae of carapace
thin, semitranslucent, pale; color of head including nasal shield, pale gray
with a uniform reticulation of dusky lines and spots; temporal pale stripes
more or less distinctly indicated.
Type—vU.S. National Museum No. 61065; adult female.
Type locality—Royal Palm State Park, Dade County, Florida.
Three more specimens of this form, all collected at the same locality by
C. A. Mosier, have been examined. They differ strikingly from the typical
dark K. bawri by the thinness and translucency of the horny laminae of the
upper surface, which results in the very pale color with the sutures of the
bony shell underneath shining through as narrow whitish lines. As a con-
sequence, the three longitudinal light bands on the carapace, so characteristic
of the species, are rather indistinct. It should be noted that the coloration
of the plastron is the normal one of the typical form.
Terrapene nelsoni, new species.
_ Diagnosis.—Nostrils vertically oval, close together, not visible in side view
of head; hind feet with four claws; three phalanges in middle digit of fore
foot; carapace with a median keel anteriorly ; digits scarcely webbed; no bony
temporal arch; upper jaw hooked, not notched in the middle; first marginal
lamina almost as long as width of first central lamina; length of first central
pumas width of third central; fourth central shorter than width, shorter than
s
Type.—U. 8. National Museum No. 46252; adult.
Type locality —Pedro Pablo, Tepic, Mexico; 2500 feet altitude.
The type is unique and is one of two specimens of box turtles, the only ones
obtained by Dr. E. W. Nelson and E. A. Goldman during their many years of
collecting in Mexico. It is dedicated to Dr. E. W. Nelson, Chief of the U.S.
Biological Survey, in recognition of the splendid work done by him and his
organization in making known the vertebrate fauna of that country.
Graptemys pseudogeographica versa, new subspecies.
Diagnosis.—Color pattern of postocular region that of typical Graptemys
pseudogeographica, fine light lmes running obliquely upwards from tympanum
to posterior edge of orbit, but postorbital spot extending backwards from its
lower (outer) edge and not from its upper (inner) edge.
Type.—U. 8. National Museum No. 27473.
Type locality——Austin, Texas.
Seven paratypes from the same locality (U. S. N. M. Nos. 27474-80)
are essentially like the type and differ markedly both from typical pseudo-
geographica and from kohnii.
464 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 20
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
Dr. G. N. Voronorr, head of the Russian Scientific Expedition to South
America, spent several days in Washington recently. After a short tour
through this country the party will proceed by way of Mexico and Cuba to
the north coast of Colombia. For the present, botanical exploration will be
confined chiefly to the mountainous region of eastern Colombia.
Nett M. Jupp, curator of American Archeology at the National Museum,
and director of the National Geographic Society’s Pueblo Bonito Expedition,
returned to Washington from New Mexico October 23. The fifth season of
exploration in Pueblo Bonito, a prehistoric Indian village in northwestern
New Mexico, was perhaps the most important of the entire expedition,
resulting in the solution of several important problems. For the first time
a definite pottery sequence—the cultural yardstick for all archeological
research in the New World—has been established, and, as a result, the period
during which Pueblo Bonito was occupied has been greatly extended. Geo-
physical, geological, and botanical studies have explained away many of the
mysteries of Chaco Canyon and led to a better understanding of conditions
as they must have existed there in prehistoric times. It is not improbable
that a sixth season will be authorized in order to bring the Pueblo Bonito
explorations to conclusion.
Pau GC. STANDLEY, of the National Museum, left recently for Costa Rica
to carry on botanical exploration in that country, in connection with his
studies of the flora of Central America.
E. C. Lronarp, of the National Museum, sailed November 6 for Haiti
to make botanical collections for the Museum. This expedition is one of
several that have been made possible through the codperation of Dr. W. L.
Abbott of Philadelphia, with the Smithsonian Institution.
ANN OUNCEMENTS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND
AFFILIATED SOCIETIES*
Saturday, December 5. The Biological Society.
Wednesday, December 9. The Geological Society, Annual Meeting.
Saturday, December 12. The Philosophical Society.
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE
JOURNAL
Thursday, November 19. The ACADEMY. W. H. Hosss: The glacial anticyclones;
the poles of the atmospheric circulation.
Saturday, November 21. The Biological Society. T.S. Patmer: Report of the
recent meeting of the American Ornithologists Union, New York. Motion pictures.
W. C. Henperson: When the elk come down. H.C. OBERHOLZER: Birds on the
Farallon Islands, California. H. C. OperHouzer: The bird reservatians of
Louistana. ra
Wednesday, November 25. The Geological Society. C. E. Resser: Human and
geographic aspects of the 1925 Smithsonian-Princeton expedition to Europe. EB. O.
Usricu: European Paleozoic stratigraphy and stratigraphers.
* The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page
if sent to the editors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month.
CONTENTS
_ OrIGINAL PapErs
Geophysics.—Isostasy in the southern Pacific. Witt1am Bowie...
Botany.—Twelve new species of Valeriana from the Andes of South America,
WORTH (P. Karn)... yc oe shee d) hace eee Ra ee eae eae
Botany.—New plants from Central America—IV. Pau C. Sranpuey..
Zoology.—New species andsubspecies of Americanturtles. Lronnarp Stxsn
Screnrivic Norms AND NEWS?) : 5. c.nleesisicie.c carp cleo vleiscsloslolein ni hate sieinaree steele
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY Ce
President: Vernon L. Ketuoce, National rps Council.
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. Stuspex, Bureau of Standards.
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lamsurt, Coast and Geodetic es
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Vol. 15 DECEMBER 19, 1925 No. 21
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY
OF SCIENCES
BOARD OF EDITORS
E. P. Kinurp D. F. Hewett
S. J. MaucHby
NATIONAL MUSEUM GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM
ASSOCIATE EDITORS
L, H. Apams
S. A. RonwER
PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY BNTOMOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E, A. GoLpMAN G, W. Stross
BIOLOGICAL SOCIETY
R, F, Gzices
BOTANICAL SOCIETY
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY
J. R, SWANTON
ANTHROPOLOGICAL SOCIETY
E. WicH=Es
CHEMICAL SOCIETY
PUBLISHED SEMI-MONTHLY
EXCEPT IN JULY, AUGUST, AND SEPTEMBER, WHEN MONTHLY
BY THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mr. Royat anD Guitrorp AVEs.
BALTIMORE, MaRYLAND
Entered es Second Class Matter, January 11, 1923, at the post-office at Baltimore, Md., under the
Act of August 24, 1912. Acceptance for mailing at special rate of postage provided for
in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917. Authorized on July 3, 1918
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences” :
This JounNat, the official organ of the Washington Academy of Seiencecs aims
resent a brief record of current scientific workin Washington. To this end it publish«
th 1) short original papers, written or communicated by members of the Academy; (
short notes of current scientific literature Pit tha:hes in or emanating from Washing
semi-monthly, on the fourth and iene at of each mont
when it appears on the nineteenth only. Volumes nee to calendar years. Prom
publication is an essential feature; a manuscript reaching the editors on the fifth °
the twentieth of the month will ordinarily appear, on request from the author, i in the
issue of the Journat for the following fourth or nineteenth, respectively. f
Manuscripts may be sent to any member of the Board of Editors; they shoulaee ;
clearly typewritten and in suitable form for printing without ‘essential changes. The —
editors cannot undertake to do more than correct obvious minor errors. References
should appear only as footnotes and should include year of publication. To facilitate
the work of both the editors and printers it is suggested that footnotes be numbered iF
serially and submitted on a separate manuscript page. Rane
Illustrations will be used only when necessary and will be confined to text figures.
or diagrams of simple character. The cost of producing cuts for illustrations must be *
partly met by the author. tt
Proof.—tin order to facilitate prompt publication no proof will be sent to anghniae
unless requested. It is urged that manuscript be submitted in final form; the editors
will exercise due care in seeing that copy is followed.
Authors’ Reprints Reprints will be furnished at the following schedule of pner
Copies 4pp. 8 pp. 12 pp. 16 pp. Cover
50 $.85 $1.65 $2.55 $3.25 $2.00
100 1.90 3.80 4.75 6.00 2.50
150 2.25 4.30 5.25 6.50 3.00
200 2.50 4.80 5.75 7.00 3.50
250 3.00 5.30 6.25 7.50 4.00
An additional charge of 25 cents will be made for each split page.
Covers bearing the name of the author and title of the article, with inclusive pagi-
nation and date of issue, will be furnished when ordered. fs
As an author will not ordinarily see proof, his request for extra copies or reprints
should invariably be attached to the first page of his manuscript. ,
The rate of Subscription per volume t8........+++0+00+ aac aan wna bemeciew 5 36.00%
Semi-monthly numbers............ EP oe « Sabie heats 3 AL cia oe wosees 25
Monthly numbers............sccesecee Rai ase canebiman talaton seco 39 saa eae +50.
Remittances should be made payable to “Washington Academy of Sciences, a are
addressed to the Treasurer, R. L. Faris, Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington, D .O
European Agent: Weldon & Wesley, 28 Essex St., Strand, London.
Exchanges——The Journat does not exchange with other publications.
Missing Numbers will be replaced without charge, provided that claim is made
within thirty days after date of the following issue.
*Volume I, however, from June 19, 1911, to December 19, 1911, will be sent for $3.00. Special
are given to members of scientific societies affiliated with the Academy
JOURNAL
OF THE
WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vou. 15 DECEMBER 19, 1925 No. 21
MINERALOGY.—Beidellite, a new mineral name. Esper 8. LARSEN,
Harvard University, and Epcar T. WuHerry, Bureau of Chem-
istry.
Several years ago we described! a peculiar aluminum silicate mineral,
occurring as a gouge-clay adjoining metalliferous veins, as leverrierite.
Subsequent studies of the relationships among the minerals of this
subclass have suggested that it may be better to restrict leverrierite
as a species name to vermicular material with the alumina-silica ratio
near 1:2. As no mineralogical name appears to have been assigned to
a compact crystalline compound with the 1:3 ratio represented in the
Colorado mineral, we now propose to rename it. Our thanks are
herewith extended to Messrs. Clarence 8. Ross and Earl V. Shannon
for valuable suggestions in connection with the preparation of this
note; their work on the composition and properties of the mineral from
other localities is recorded in the following article. The properties
and distinctive features of the mineral may be summarized as follows:
Cuass: Srticatses; Susciass: Hyprous Merasiuicatses; Divi-
ston: R: Si: H,O =2:3:X.
Beidellite
Name.—From the locality of the first occurrence described in detail,
Beidell, Colorado. This is accented on the final syllable, so the mineral
name should be pronounced bei-dell’-ite. Originally not separated
from leverrierite. Termed “clay-gouge” in a recent tabulation.?
Chemical properties —Formula Al,0;-3Si0.:XH,0, with some Al
replaced by Fe’”’, and often containing minor amounts of other oxides
1Larsen, E. S., and Wherry, E. T., Leverrierite from Colorado. This JourNat., 7:
208. 1917.
2 Am. Min. 10: 141. 1925.
465
466 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCE VOL. 15, No. 21
presumably replacing H.O. Theory for X = 4, a frequent value:
SiO, 51.0 per cent; Al,O; 28.7 per cent; H.O 20.3 per cent; sum
100.0 per cent.
Crystallographic properties.—Known only in plates, with indistinct
crystal boundaries, and often of only microscopic size. Probably
orthorhombic.
Physical properties.—Luster vitreous to waxy. Color, white, reddish
or brownish-gray. Form, micaceous plates, often very minute, so
that the mass is cryptocrystalline. Hardness less than 2. On wet-
ting, may become plastic, owing to the entrance of water in innumer-
able thin films between the plates.
Optical properties —Refractive indices of original beidellite are vari-
able with conditions and method of measurement, and increase on
standing in the immersion liquids to a = 1.494, Band y = 1.536? which
may be taken as standard for the species. -The figures given in the
former paper for material saturated with oil are a = 1.558 and B
and 7 = 1.602, but these observations were made on a specimen unusu-
ally rich in iron oxide. Biaxial, with a small axial angle, 2 E usually =
16° to 24°, 2V = 9° to 16°, though approximately uniaxial in some
specimens.
Relationships.—Beidellite may be defined as the compact-crystalline
representative of the alumina-silica ratio 1:3, with about 4 molecules
of water to the one alumina. It belongs in a mineral group lying,
with respect to alumina-silica ratio, between the kaolinite and the
pyrophyllite groups; the colloidal member of this group is apparently
steargillite (grouped by Dana under montmorillonite) and the crys-
tallized member anauxite, although both of these need further study.
Occurrences.—Found as a gouge-clay by the writers (loc. cit) and by
Shannon;‘ as a gangue mineral by Ferguson;* as the result of altera-
tion of zeolites by Shannon;* as a derivative from volcanic glass by
Miser and Ross,’ and as a schist-forming mineral by Corbett. The
X-ray pattern given. by the last author as typical of leverrierite repre-
sents beidellite, as here defined.
8 Determined by Clarence 8. Ross, personal communication.
4 Shannon, Earl V., Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 62: art.15. 1922.
5 Ferguson, H. G., Econ. Geol. 16:1. 1921.
6 Shannon, Earl V., Am. Min. 10: 159. 1925.
7 Miser, H. D., and Ross, Clarence S., Am. Journ. Sci. 9: 119. 1925.
8 Corbett, C.S., Am. Journ. Sci. 10: 247. 1925.
DEC. 19, 1925 ROSS AND SHANNON: COMPOSITION OF BEIDELLITE 467
MINERALOGY .—The chemical composition and optical properties of
beidellite.1 CLARENCE S. Ross, Geological Survey, and Ear
Y. SHannon, National Museum.
The writers have been engaged in an investigation of the clay
minerals for the past two years and in the course of that work have
made analyses of and determined the optical properties of specimens,
from several localities, of the mineral to which Larsen and Wherry
have assigned the name beidellite (preceding paper).
TABLE 1.—ANnatyses oF BEIDELLITE
Ss. fi oamnllile ae 4 5 6
Si Oh- Gee Sosa ees Cae eee 45.52 | 45.12 | 47.28 45.32 46.06 51.0
its 0s jean eas See e 0.84
PROS es eee a eee 27.52 28.24 20.27 27.84 12.22 28.7
HesOscea- eet ae aoe ats ek 2.80 4.12 8.68 0.80 18.54
BeQO lessees wis eget 0.28
Gn One oe ee 0.52 0.88 275 Pik 1.66
VT Ce ees a eee eine 3.00 PE BY) 0.70 0.16 1.62
TEED ie Sirah ori ae eR a A ees | Trace 0.12
NEO eee eee | 0.97 0.10
EHO hn cescee ounce ene 19.60 18.72 19.72 22.64 17.26 20.3
Nas] eT ee ee eee 98.96 | 99.40 100.37 99.64 98.48 100.0
1. Bentonite. Mine Creek, near Nashville, Howard County, Arkansas. Fine separa-
tion product. Purified by Clarence S. Ross. E. V. Shannon, analyst.
2. Bentonite, seme, coarser product.
3. Beidellite, “leverrierite’’ gouge clay from Beidell, Saguache County, Colorado,
E. S. Larsen and E. T. Wherry, Jour. Wash. Acad. Sci., 7: 208-217. 1917.
4. Beidellite, “‘leverrierite’’ gouge clay, Black Jack vein, Carson dist. Owyhee
County, Idaho. E. V. Shannon, Proc. U.S. Nat. Museum, 62: Art. 15. 1923.
5. Iron-beidellite; Spokane, Washington, E. V. Shannon, analyst.
6. Theoretical iron-free end member to satisfy Al,O;-3Si0.-4H.O.
Three entirely distinct modes of formation of beidellite are known.
The occurrence in a gouge clay has been described by Larsen and
Wherry? from Beidell, Colorado, and by Shannon’ from the Black
Jack vein, Carson district, Owyhee County, Idaho. It also occurs in
a fluorite vein at Wagon Wheel Gap, Colorado. The gouge clay type
of beidellite forms laminated masses that occasionally reach a deci-
meter or more in diameter. Under the microscope the laminae give
an optical figure with the axis perpendicular to the plates, and so the
1 Published by the permission of the Acting Director of the U. S. Geological Survey
and the Secretary of the National Museum.
2 E.S. Larsen and E. T. Wherry, This Journat, Art. 7: 208-217. 1917.
3 E. V. Shannon, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 62: 1923.
468 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 21
mineral has properties that seem to connect it with the micas. A
second type of beidellite from Jones Falls, Baltimore, Md., has
been formed by the alteration of zeolites and has been described by
Shannon.*
The third type of beidellite forms the clay-like ground mass in some
bentonites. Near Nashville, Arkansas, it is the clay material asso-
ciated with arkosic bentonites, and at Spokane, Washington, it is
interbedded with basalt flows. In Arkansas it has resulted from the
breaking down of the glassy portion of a voleanic ash that has the com-
position of an orthoclase-rich trachyte, and phonolite, and in Wash-
ington from the voleanic ash of an olivine basalt.
The beidellite from Spokane, Washington, contains Fe.O; nearly
equal to Al.O; in molecular ratio, and the other beidellites contain
smaller amounts of Fe.O; replacing Al,O;. It is evident that there is
an isomorphous series composed of
Al,03:3810.:nH.O and
Fe,0;-38i02:nH.O
Water is present in approximately the ratio n = 4
TABLE 2.—TuHeE OpricaL PROPERTIES OF BEIDELLITE
a| z
[>] ere)
<| &
LOCALITY a B,y | a-v 2V 2E 4 Gill 2 COLOR
£8) £
Sialigs
BerdellsiColowree sence etic 1.494|1.536)0.042} 9°-16° 16°-24°|(—)} ‘|| | Grayish buff
Owyhee Co., Idaho........ 1.488}1.527/0.039} Small (—)} || | White
biaxial
Nashville Arky. 4 .ccctea- ee 1.517|1.549|0.032} Small (—)} || | Gray to light
biaxial gray
Spokane, Wash............ 1.523|/1.572|0.051} Small (—)} || | Pistachio
biaxial green
Wagon Wheel Gap, Colo. . .|1.495/1.537|0.042) Small (—)} || | Gray
biaxial
Tables 1 and 2 give the analyses of beidellite from four localities
and the optical properties of beidellite from five localities:
The indices of refraction are moderately low for the nearly iron-free
material but increase greatly for those containing ferric iron. The
birefringence is high for the low-iron samples and very high for the
iron-rich one from Spokane, Washington.
4E. V. Shannon, Amer. Mineralogist 10: 159-161. 1925.
pec. 19, 1925 LOTKA: THE MEASURE OF NET FERTILITY 469
GENETICS.—The measure of net fertility. ALFRED J. LorKa, Metro-
politan Life Insurance Co., New York.
There can hardly be any divergence of opinion regarding a suitable
definition of gross fertility. This is evidently measured by the total
number of children born per female, in a life time. At most, doubts
might arise as to whether the ratio should be formed with respect to
children of both sexes, or with respect to daughters only. But this is
of little consequence, since these two alternatives would in any case be
distinguished only by a constant factor of 2.06, the sex ratio at birth
plus unity.
As soon, however, as we begin to discuss net fertility, difficulties
arise. Ji we loosely define this quantity as the number of surviving
children (or daughters) per female, in a life time, the question is imme-
diately asked: surviving to what age?
If we decide this question by setting an arbitrary age, then we obtain
as many different arbitrary measures of fertility as we posit arbitrary
ages of survival. This is not an ideal state of affairs. An alternative
which has sometimes been adopted is to compute an aggregate sur-
vival to an arbitrary standard population.! This procedure, also, is
obviously not satisfactory. Net fertility seems to depend solely on
two things: Number of children born, and survival rates. An arbi-
trary standard population is extraneous to the question at issue. It
should be possible to define and measure net fertility in terms of the
two factors: children born, and, survivals, alone. The measure
should contain only two functions, (1) the maternity frequency 6s
of women at age x; and (2) the survival factor 1., the well known life
table function which tells us what proportion l, out of any (large)
number of persons (in particular, females) born survive to age x.
Now there is a simple measure which satisfies these conditions, and
is free from reference to any arbitrary standard. It is singular that
this fact should have escaped attention. The measure in question
is simply the ratio of total births in two successive generations. One
writer has come very near to formulating this measure, but, as we
shall see, his formula, though outwardly resembling the one here to be
developed, differs essentially in principle, and materially in arithmeti-
cal value, from the measure here proposed.
If we trace a batch of births of N females through their subsequent
1 Karl Pearson, Chances of Death 1: 70, defines net fertility as the number of children
surviving after fifteen years of married life.
470 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 21
life, at age x a number N |, survive, and these reproduce at the rate
of 6. daughters per annum. ‘The total number of daughters born of
these N females throughout life is evidently given by the integral of
N1..6.dx extended over the whole range of life; or, what amounts to
the same thing, over the range of the reproductive period, since Bx
is zero outside this range. In forming the ratio of the births in the
original generation to those in the generation of daughters, N cancels
out, and we have for this ratio, simply
R, =| Bx dx Z (1)
The gross fertility, on the other hand, would be reckoned by the ratio
of total births in two successive generations if no deduction had to be
made for deaths, so that we may write for the gross fertility
Ria if Wace (2)
For the United States in 1920 the values of R, and R,, computed on
the basis of central values of 1,, (6. being given for five year groups)
are as follows:
Re =2)420
1s = il as
Ro
a (IY
R,
Thus in the United States in 1920 the net fertility was 82 per cent of
the gross.
An interesting relation is brought out by effecting a transformation
of the integral for R,. It can be shown that if the age schedule of
maternity frequency 6,, and of mortality l., remains fixed for a suffi-
cient length of time, the population settles down to a fixed age distribu-
tion and increases at a constant fractional rate r given by the trans-
cendental equation for r
1 Sion 1, Bx ax (3)
while the (constant) birthrate per head is then given by
b= uf Bata Rok (4)
Multiplying (3) and (4) together, and expanding the exponential
function under the integral sign, we find
psc. 19, 1925 LOTKA: THE MEASURE OF NET FERTILITY 471
it Te
R, — Tpit 97k a aint
DSS Rane NEAR SRE Fame a) (5)
Lo aie ihn ID + 21 Dp 50000
where Ra =|) x ao: IE To Cob:<
n es
La = Oa llkebs
If r is sufficiently small we have, in first approximation
Da = (6)
or
R, > b Meg (7)
It is thus seen that the net fertility, as measured by the ratio of
the total births in two successive generations, is given by the product
of the mean length of life L, and that particular 6 which results
ultimately from the given age schedule of mortality and maternity
frequency.
Now this expression is very similar, in outward form, to a measure of
net fertility suggested by G. H. Knibbs,? who proposes to measure the
net fertility by the product of the observed birthrate b’ and the mean
length of life.
Now the very fact that Knibbs’ formula is in form identical with
the expression (7) for the ratio R, between total births in two succes-
sive generations, shows that in general Knibb’s product cannot be
good measure of net fertility.
Perhaps the most obviously convincing argument is a numerical
example from actual observation. In the United States in 1920 the
observed birthrate was 6’ = 0.0234. The ‘ultimate’ birthrate
corresponding to the existing age schedule of mortality and maternity
frequency was 0.0209. ‘Thus the ratio of total births in two successive
generations is given by
TR = lolly,
= 0.0209 x 57.523
= 1%
2G. H. Knibbs, Mathematical Theory of Population, p. 294, 1917.
3 These figures relate primarily to the female population, but this does not materially
affect the argument. For details see the Journal of the American Statistical Association
20: 314. 1920.
472 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 21
whereas, using the observed birthrates, we would find
lop, = Wats
Thus Knibbs’ figure gives at best, in this case, an estimate of the net
fertility which is over 10 per cent too high.
In point of fact the omission of higher degree terms in (7) vitiates
the figure 1.2 here obtained for R,. The exact value of R, is 1.168,4
still further increasing the divergence from Knibbs’ figure.
It should also be noted that Knibbs’ measure of net fertility involves
the existing age distribution, which, obviously, should not enter into
an absolute measure of net fertility.
BOTANY.—New plants from Central America.—V.1 Paut C. STAND-
LEY, U.S. National Museum.
Except for two Cyperaceae, all the plants described as new in this
paper are trees or shrubs. ‘The most interesting are the three species
of Ilex reported from Costa Rica, and two new members of the genus
Tetrathylacium, of the family Flacourtiaceae, hitherto believed to
consist of a single species. Besides the Central American plants,
there is described a new Vallesia from southern Mexico.
Cyperus nubigenus Britt. & Standl., sp. nov.
Subgenus Hucyperus. Erect glabrous perennial, the culms 60-100 cm.
high or taller, obtusely trigonous, smooth, stout, leafy below, the lowest
sheaths without blades, purplish; leaf blades equaling the culms, 1-2 cm. wide,
scabrous on the margins, many-nerved, with very numerous transverse
nerves; umbel compound, the primary rays numerous, 4-12 em. long, the
secondary rays very numerous, 1-5 em. long; bracts numerous, leaf-like,
equaling the rays, 7-15 mm. wide, long-attentuate; spikelets few or numerous
in dense glomerules at the ends of the smooth secondary rays, lance-oblong,
about 1 em. long, 3 mm. wide, persistent, strongly compressed; scales8-11,
oblong-ovate, acute or acuminate, oblique and rather lax, not closely ap-
pressed, deciduous (?), dull-vinaceous, the keel green; achene 1 mm.
long, elliptic, trigonous, smooth, dull brownish; style branches 3, exserted.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,152,733, collected on bank
of small stream at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, altitude
about 1900 meters, March 21, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 38653). No.
38693, from Las Nubes, also belong to this species.
In aspect C. nubigenus is suggestive of C. canus, but it is conspicuously
distinct from that and all other species known from Central America. It is
a handsome, rather showy plant, frequent on grassy stream banks of the
slopes of Irazti, about Las Nubes.
4 See Journ. Amer. Statistical Association. loc. cit.
1 Published by permission of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. See this
JouRNAL 16: 457. 1925.
DeEc. 19, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 473
Rynchospora torresiana Britt. & Standl., sp. nov.
Planis erect, stout, forming large clumps, with thick, somewhat woody
thizomes; culms 1-2 m. high, multinodose; leaves elongate, very numerous,
9-13 mm. wide, pale green, glabrous, the margins scaberulous; spikelets
sessile or nearly so, very numerous, in dense headlike cymes 2-2.5 em. in
diameter, the heads few, solitary on long, slender, axillary and terminal
peduncles, rarely sessile, sometimes in clusters of 3 on the peduncle, the
lateral heads then subsessile; bracts 1-3, elongate, resembling the leaves
but narrower; spikelets 1 em. long, with about 6 scales, these ovate, mucro-
nate, firm, glabrous, pale greenish, often mottled with pale red-brown;
bristles 4, usually slightly shorter than the achene, one of them sometimes
slightly exceeding the achene, antrorse-scaberulous; achene obovoid-orbic-
ular, plano-convex, rounded at apex, 2.5-3 mm. long, pale brownish, finely
reticulate, the beak 4-5 mm. long, green, its base about one-third as bread
as the achene.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,152,725, collected in wet
forest at El Mujiieco, south of Navarro, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica,
altitude about 1400 meters, Febr. 9, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 33846).
No. 33635, from the same locality, also represents the species.
This species is named for Prof. Rubén Torres Rojas, of Cartago, in whose
company the specimens were collected. In its gross characters and general
appearance the plant is very unlike any Rynchospora reported previously
from Central America.
Neea orosiana Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub 1.5-2.5 m. high, the branches terete, pale, glabrous, or when young
sparsely and minutely ferruginous-puberulent; leaves opposite, the petioles
stout, 5-7 mm. long, glabrate; leaf blades mostly oblong-oblanceolate, some-
times oblong-obovate, 15-27 em. long, 5.5-7.5 em. wide, rather abruptly
very long-acuminate, gradually narrowed from about the middle to the
narrow obtuse base, thin, glabrous, the lateral nerves conspicuous beneath,
about 10 on each side, arcuate, laxly and irregularly anastomosing near the
margin; pistillate inflorescences axillary, few-flowered, cymose-paniculate
or subracemose, the branches at first obscurely ferruginous-puberulent but
soon glabrate, the peduncles in fruit 46.5 em. long, the flowers on very short
stout pedicels; fruit red, ellipsoid-oblong, 12 mm. long, 5 mm. thick, con-
spicuously striate.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,228,760 collected in moist
forest near Orosi, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, March 30, 1924, by
Paul C. Standley (no. 39738). No. 39801, from Orosi, is referable here.
Neea orosiana is related to N. pittieri Standl."and N. psychotrioides Donn.
Smith, but in both those species the leaves normally are broadest at the
middle, and in N. psychotrioides they are usually much smaller. The very
short petioles and large fruit of N. crosiana also are noteworthy.
Hyperbaena smilacina Standl., sp. nov.
Slender woody vine, the branchlets terete, striate, glabrous; petioles
slender, 3-4 cm. long, glaucescent; leaf blades subcoriaceous, ovate to
rounded-ovate, 7.5-9 cm. long, 4.5-7 em. wide, obtuse or rounded at apex
and abruptly short-acuminate, at base broadly rounded or truncate or
474 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 21
somewhat concave, glabrous, 5 or 7-nerved at base, the lowest pair of nerves
very close to the margin and almost confluent with it, the innermost pair
of nerves arcuate and extending nearly to the apex; staminate panicles
axillary, solitary, equaling or shorter than the petioles, many-flowered, the
flowers partly sessile and partly pedicellate, the branches glabrous or nearly
so, glaucescent; bractlets minutely hispidulous; sepals and petals glabrous.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,206,159, collected at Arenal,
Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 600 meters, May 5, 1923, by Juvenal
Valerio (no. 15).
In Diels’ key to the species of Hyperbaena? this plant runs to H. tonduzii
Diels, which also is a Costa Rican species, but a tree, and not at all closely
related to this plant of Guanacaste. Sterile specimens collected by the
writer (no. 36921) at La Colombiana, Province of Limén, Costa Rica, in
March, 1924, are probably referable to H. smilacina.
In Mexico and Central America the family Menispermaceae (to which
Hyperbaena belongs) is represented chiefly by the genus Cissampelos,C.
pareira being one of the most abundant plants of the region. A few isolated
species of other genera have been described, however, and the writer has
material of several others, most of which are not in satisfactory condition
for diagnosis. In several cases the generic position is uncertain and it will
be necessary to await the collection of more complete material before the
species may be described.
There are at hand sterile specimens of two Central American Menisper-
maceae which, with little doubt, are referable to the genus Hyperbaena.
Although the description of new species from sterile specimens is not to be
recommended, in the present instance it has been adopted as a means of
calling attention to the plants involved, and for purposes of record. Ex-
cepting only Cissampelos pareira, it seems to be difficult in Central America
to find plants of this family in flower, and it is probable that their flowering
season is a very short one.
Hyperbaena panamensis Standl., sp. nov.
Slender woody vine, the branchlets slender, terete, green, thinly puberu-
lent; petioles slender, 1-2.2 cm. long, terete, puberulent; leaf blades
oblong-ovate or ovate, 8-13 cm. long, 4.5-6 em. wide abruptly and shortly
obtuse-acuminate, rounded or shallowly emarginate at base, subcoriaceous,
somewhat lustrous, glabrous above, the costa impressed, the other nerves
prominulous, beneath very sparsely and minutely puberulent, 5-nerved at
base, the basal nerves slender and inconspicuous, remote from the margin at
first but finally anastomosing with it, the inner pair of nerves very promi-
nent, extending nearly to the apex, the few and irregular lateral nerves diver-
gent from the costa nearly at right angles.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 1,218,122, collected in moist
forest near Gamboa, Canal Zone, Panama, Dec. 26, 1923, by Paul C. Standley
(no. 28417).
2In Engl. Pflanzenreich ITV. 94: 199. 1910.
DEC. 19, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 475
Hyperbaena panamensis resembles H. smilacina, but in that species the
leaves are relatively much broader, and their venation different.
A sterile specimen collected by the writer (no. 39638) at Orosi, Province of
Cartago, Costa Rica, is perhaps referable to H. panamensis, having the same
pubescence and nearly, but not quite, similar leaves.
Hyperbaena guatemalensis Standl., sp. nov.
Tree 9 m. high, the branchlets striate, at first densely puberulent but soon
glabrate; petioles stout, 1.5-2 em. long, striate, puberulent; leaf blades
oblong, 10-14 em. long, 3.5-6 em. wide, acute or acutish, obtuse or rounded
and slightly unequal at base, thick-coriaceous, thinly and finely puberulent
above or glabrate, slightly rough to the touch, the costa and lateral nerves
prominent, beneath rather densely soft-pubescent, pinnate-nerved, the
lateral nerves 6 or 7 on each side, arcuate, laxly and irregularly anastomosing
near the margin.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,080,620, collected at Bar-
ranquillo, Department of El Progreso, Guatemala, altitude 540 meters,
March 15, 1920, by Wilson Popenoe (no. 965).
Perhaps related to H. phanerophlebia Standl., of Salvador, but in that
species the leaves are glabrous, narrow at base, and with different venation.
The vernacular name of H. guatemalensis is given as “bailador.”’
Capparis lankesteri Standl., sp. nov.
Small tree, glabrous throughout; petiole 10 cm. long, terete; leaf blade
rounded-ovate, 30 cm. long, 21 cm. wide, broadly rounded at base, at apex
rounded and abruptly short-acuminate, the tip 1.5 em. long, thin, lustrous
above, the lateral nerves 9 pairs, arcuate, anastomosing near the margin;
pedicels 8-9 cm. long; sepals imbricate, broadly ovate, 4 mm. long, rounded
at apex; petals oblong, about 2 cm. long and 8 mm. wide, rounded at apex,
obtuse and sessile at base; stamens very numerous, 5 cm. long or more;
ovary globose-ovoid, verrucose, much longer than the gynophore.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,207,618, collected at sea
level, along the Reventazén River, Costa Rica, in dense woodland, December,
1922, by C. H. Lankester (no. 697).
The flowers are said to be pink. Although known only from incomplete
material, consisting of a leaf and detached flowers, this plant is evidently
distinct from any species of Capparis known previously from Central Amer-
ica. It is related perhaps to C. discolor Donn. Smith, also of Costa Rica,
which has linear-oblong leaves.
Lonchocarpus trifoliolatus Standl., sp. nov.
Branchlets terete, with numerous large pale lenticels, the young shoots
densely pubescent with short spreading hairs; leaves 3-foliolate, the petiole
1.5-3.5 em. long, the rachis 1-1.5 em. long, densely pubescent; terminal
leaflet broadly ovate or rounded-ovate, 9-14.5 cm. long, 7-9 cm. wide, acute
or short-acuminate, rounded at base, densely velutinous-pubescent on both
surfaces; lateral leaflets broadly ovate to orbicular-ovate, acute or subob-
tuse, 3.5-7 em. long, racemes axillary, solitary, the rachis in fruit about 8 em.
long, densely pubescent, many-flowered flowers neary sessile, the calyx
476 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 21
turbinate-campanulate, 2.5 mm. long, minutely sericeous; lezume 1-seeded,
elliptic, the stipe about 7 mm. long, the body 44.5 em. long and 2 em. wide,
glabrous or nearly so, glaucous, the valves very thin, thin on both margins
but with a slender elevated nerve close to the dorsal margin, the apex of the
pod obtuse or acute and short-beaked.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium no. 1,208,138 collected in the De-
partment of Chalatenango, El Salvador, in 1924, by Salvador Calderén
(no. 2162).
Among the known Central American species this may be recognized
readily by its trifoliolate leaves.
Lonchocarpus calderoni Standl., sp. nov.
Branchlets slender, terete, brown, furnished with numerous pale lenticels;
petiole and rachis together 7-11 em. long, slender, glabrous; leaflets usually
11, oblong or lance-oblong, 2-4 em. long, 0.8-1.6 em. wide, narrowed to the
broad emarginate apex, the terminal leaflet acute at base, the lateral ones
obtuse or acute and very unequal, obscurely puberulent above along the
costa, beneath densely short-barbate at base of costa, elsewhere glabrous;
racemes axillary, solitary, 7-15 em. long, many-flowered, glabrous, the
flowers partly solitary but mostly on 2-flowered peduncles, the peduncles
about 3 mm. long, the pedicels equaling or shorter than the peduncles, gla-
brous; calyx broadly campanulate, 3-3.5 mm. long, glabrous, the margin
minutely ciliolate, with very short, broad, remote teeth; standard 1 cm.
long, sparsely and minutely sericeous outside near the base; ovary linear,
the sides glabrous, the margins minutely appressed-pubescent.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,169,951, collected on Cerro
del Guayabal, El Salvador, January, 1924, by Salvador Calderén (no. 2022).
So far as I know, no species of Ilex has ever been reported from Central
America. It was, therefore, with some surprise that I found trees of this
genus frequent in the humid forest about La Estrella, Costa Rica, in March,
1924. Later, specimens of Jlex were collected at Las Nubes, and specimens
taken earlier on La Carpintera also represent the genus, although their
identity was not recognized at the time of collection. Study of these col-
lections has revealed the fact that not one but three specimens are repre-
sented. It is remarkable that the genus was not discovered by some of
the earlier collectors in Costa Rica.
Ilex lamprophylla Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub or tree 2-7.5 m. high, glabrous throughout; branchlets subterete,
blackish when dry, bearing scattered large pale lenticels; petioles stout,
4—7 mm. long; stipules pale, trangular-subulate, 1 mm. long; leaves persistent
the blades elliptic or rarely oblong-elliptic, broadest at the middle, 5-10 cm.
long, 2.5-5 em. wide, obtuse at base, acute at apex or abruptly short-acumi-
nate, with obtuse tip, subcoriaceous, coarsely crenate or crenate-serrate
nearly to the base, the crenations about 10 on each side, each with a short
incurved mucro; upper surface of blades very lustrous, blackish when dry,
the lower surface paler, the lateral nerves about 10 pairs, divergent at an
angle of about 65°, straight, laxly anastomosing remote from the margin;
pistillate flowers axillary, in fascicles of 3-8; pedicels stout, 6-10 mm. long,
DEC. 19, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 477
the bractlets ovate-triangular, borne near the base of the pedicel; calyx
2.5 mm. broad, shallowly 4-lobate, the lobes broadly triangular, acutish,
spreading, glabrous; fruit (immature?) green, lustrous, oval, 5 mm. long,
3.5 mm. thick, conspicuously costate; nutlets 4, 5-costate dorsally.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,228,657, collected in wet
forest at La Estrella, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, March 27, 1924, by
Paul C. Standley (no. 39440) The following collections also belong here:
Costa Rica: La Estrella, Standley 39297, 39367. Orosi, Province of
Cartago, Standley 39666.
Ilex carpinterae Standl., sp. nov.
Tree 6 m. high with dense rounded crown, glabrous throughout, the branch-
lets subterete, “pale brownish, the lenticels few and inconspicuous; stipules
triangular-subulate, 1 mm. long, pale, persistent; petioles stout, 5-8 mm.
long; leaves persistent, the blades oblong or elliptic-oblong, 3.5-6 em. long,
1.5-2 cm. wide, acute or acutish at base, acute at apex, the tip obtuse, coria-
ceous, practically entire, but faint crenations indicated by remote minute
mucros; blades dark green and slightly lustrous above, the nervation faint
and inconspicuous, beneath paler, the lateral nerves 8 or 9 pairs, divergent
at an angle of 60° or more, nearly straight, laxly anastomosing near the margin,
the costa very stout and prominent; pistillate flowers axillary, in few-flowered
fascicles; pedicels stout, 4-5 mm. long, the bractlets broadly triangular,
borne near the base of the pedicel; calyx 2 mm. broad, shallowly 4-lobate, the
lobes very broadly rounded, appressed; fruit (immature) ovoid-globose,
2.5 mm. long, lustrous.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,226,682, collected in moist
forest on Cerro de la Carpintera, Province of Cartago, Costa Rica, altitude
about 1800 meters, February, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 34491).
This may be only a form of I. lamprophylla, but it seems to differ suffi-
ciently from that in its narrower subentire leaves, short pedicels, and rounded
calyx lobes.
Tlex vulcanicola Standl., sp. nov.
Shrub about 1 m. high, the branchlets subterete, ochraceous, densely
pubescent with minute spreading hairs; stipules triangular, pale, scarcely
0.5 mm. long; leaves persistent, the petioles stout, about 3mm. long, puberu-
lent; leaf blades broadly elliptic to nearly orbicular, 15-23 mm. long, 12-17
mm. wide, broadly cuneate at base, rounded or very obtuse at apex, coria-
ceous, remotely and shallowly crenate in the upper two-thirds, the teeth
tipped with a minute incurved mucro; blades deep green and somewhat
lustrous above, with priminulous venation, beneath paler, sparsely and
minutely puberulent, especially on the costa, sparsely dark-punctate, the
lateral nerves 4 or 5 pairs, divergent at an angle of about 45°, laxly anatomos-
ing near the margin; pistillate pedicels in axillary fascicles of 2 or 3, 4-5 mm.
long, sparsely and minutely pubescent or glabrous; calyx glabrous, 2 mm.
broad, shallowly 4-lobed, the lobes obtuse; fruit sub-globose, 4 mm. in diam-
eter, lustrous, glabrous; nutlets smooth.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,228,373, collected in wet
forest at Las Nubes, Province of San José, Costa Rica, March 21, 1924,
by Paul C. Standley (no. 38729).
According to my notes, the shrub was epiphytic upon a tree, but this may
be an error.
478 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 21
Sloanea faginea Standl., sp. nov.
Large tree, the branchlets terete, with scattered coarse lenticels, minutely
tomentose; stipules early deciduous; petioles stout, 1.5-3.5 em. long, minutely
tomentose or glabrate; leaf blades obovate or elliptic-obovate, 12-21 cm.
long, 7-12 em. wide, narrowed to an obtuse base, at apex obtuse or rounded,
subcoriaceous, with sinuate or subentire margins, sparsely and very minutely
tomentose along the costa, elsewhere glabrous or nearly so, the lateral nerves
about 10 pairs, slightly arcuate, divergent at an angle of about 50°, irregularly
and indistinctly anastomosing close to the margin; flowers in axillary simple
racemes, or the pedicels solitary, simple, and axillary, the racemes mostly
3 or 4-flowered, the rachis about 3 em. long, the pedicels stout, 1.8-2.5 em.
long, finely tomentose; sepals about 7, linear-oblong, 4 mm. long; capsule
globose-ovoid, 2.5 em. long, the 4 valves hard and woody, densely covered
with stiff spines, these 3.4 mm. long, stout, unequal, antrorse-scaberulous.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,166,464, collected at Peralta,
Costa Rica, in 1923 by H. E. Stork (no. 483). The following collections also
are referable here:
Costa Rica: Peralta, Stork 481. EL Mufieco, south of Navarro, Province
of Cartago, altitude 1400 m., Standley 33685.
Sterile material collected in British Honduras by H. C. Kluge (no. 6) in
December, 1924, may represent the same species.
The only related species known from Costa Rica is S. medusula Schum.
& Pittier, which has larger and more numerous. flowers. From S. faginea,
as well as from the two species described below, S. medusula is distinguished
by its very large leaves, which are densely covered beneath with a fine pale
tomentum.
Sloanea guapilensis Standl., sp. nov.
Tree 6 m. high, the branchlets slender, terete, thinly hirtellous; stipules
linear-subulate, 83-4 mm. long, persistent; petioles slender, 1-2 cm. long
hirtellous; leaf blades obovate-oblong, 12-17.5 em. long, 4.5-6 em. wide
narrowed to the rounded base, acute or abruptly short-acuminate at apex
irregularly and shallowly sinuate, especially toward the apex, thin, green
above, glabrous or nearly so, beneath paler, sparsely hirtellous along the
costa and principal nerves, elsewhere glabrous or nearly so; raceme axillary
2-flowered, the rachis 1.5 em. long, the pedicels scarcely 1 em. long; capsule
about 2 em. long, very densely setose, the setae slender, unequal, thelonger
1.5-2 em. long, densely antrorse-scaberulous.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,227,904, collected in wet
forest near Gudpiles, Province of Limén, Costa Rica, altitude about 500°
meters, March 12, 1924, by Paul C. Standley (no. 37352).
Easily distinguishable from S. faginea by the different pubescence, and by
the long bristles of the fruits.
Sloanea macropoda Standl., sp. nov.
Medium-sized tree, the branchlets stout, finely and densely tomentose;
stipules deciduous; petioles slender, terete, 9-11 em. long, minutely brown-
ish-tomentose; leaf blades oblong-elliptic, about 35 cm. long and 14 cm.
wide, obtuse at base, short-acuminate at apex, thin, irregularly sinuate
finely tomentose along the costa and lateral nerves, elsewhere glabrous or
pEc. 19, 1925 STANDLEY: NEW PLANTS FROM CENTRAL AMERICA 479
nearly so; racemes axillary, solitary, 15-22 em. long, several-flowered, matur-
ing 1 or 2 fruits, the pedicels about 3 cm. long, tomentose; capsule globose-
ovoid, 2.5 em. long, densely covered with slender spines 2=2.5 cm. long,
these stiff, sharp-pointed, minutely puberulent; capsule valves hard and
woody, 2.5 mm. thick.
Type in the U. 8S. National Herbarium, no. 578466, collected in forests
of Boca Culebra, Pacific coast of Costa Rica, altitude 50 meters, Jan. 21,
1898, by H. Pittier (no. 12168). Vernacular name, “‘abrojo.”’
This collection has been determined as S. macrophylla Spruce, but the
latter, according to description, differs in several details. The fruit of S.
macropoda is much like that of S. guapilensis, but the leaves are much larger,
of different shape, and on longer petioles, while the pubescence is quite
unlike in the two species.
The genus Tetrathylacitum Poepp. & Endl. is a member of the family
Flacourtiaceae. The original species, and the only one recognized hereto-
fore, is T. macrophyllum Poepp. & Endl., of Peru. However, Seemann later
described as the type of a new genus, Hdmonstonia, another plant which has
been recognized as congenerice with Tetrathylacum, and his species has been
considered as synonymous with 7. macrophyllum. Notes furnished by Mr.
I. Hutchinson would indicate that Seemann’s plant probably represents a
distinct species, for which the proper name is the following:
Tetrathylacium pacificum (Seem.) Standl.
Edmonstonia pacifica Seem. Bot. Voy. Herald 98. pl. 18. 1853.
Edmonstonia pacifica was described in Seemann’s ‘Flora of the Isthmus of
Panama,” and the type locality was given as “Cape Corrientes, Darién,”
but this locality is in Colombia. The genus Tetrathylactwm has not been
reported heretofore from Central America, but it is now possible to record
the two species described below.
Tetrathylacium johanseni Standl.
Tree 6 to 30 m. high the branchlets brown, somewhat puberulent when
young; stipules foliaceous, green, deciduous, 8-17 mm. as lanceolate to
oblong, somewhat falecate, conspicuously nerved; petioles 3-5 mm. long;
leaf blades oblong or elliptic- oblong, 13-24 em. long, 4-8 em, wide, cuspidate
acuminate (acumen often falcate), often somewhat narrowed toward the
rounded or subcordate, slightly unequal base, subcoriaceous, lustrous,
bright green, glabrous, remotely low-crenate or nearly entire, the venation
prominent on both surfaces, the lateral (secondary) nerves 6-8 pairs, arcuate-
ascending, gradually anastomosing with the margin, the tertiary nerves very
numerous, divaricate at a right angle from the costa and oblique to the
secondary nerves, finely reticulate; spikes subsessile, 3.5-4.5 cm. long, the
rachis puberulent, very densely flowered, the flowers crowded, compressed
by the crowding and 4 or 5-angled; corolla 2 mm. long, glabrous, not gibbous
below; fruit (immature) obovoid-globose, 1 cm. long, glabrate, apiculate,
many-seeded.
Type in the U.S. National Herbarium, no. 690299 collected near Gattin,
Canal Zone, Panama, February 10, 1911, by E. A. Goldman (no. 1863).
The following specimens also represent this species:
480 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 21
Panama: Rio Indio de Gattin, Canal Zone, Pittier 2772. Mount Hope
Cemetery, Canal Zone, Standley 28767. Rio Tecumen, Province of Panama,
Standley 29408. Canal Zone, July, 1923, Johansen 4. Puerto Obaldfa,
San Blas coast, Pittver 4300.
The species is named for Mr. Holger Johansen, Director of the Plant
Introduction Garden at Summit, Canal Zone, to whom the writer is indebted
for many favors while engaged in botanical work in Panama. Mr. Johansen’s
recently (February, 1925) published ‘‘Handbook of the Principal Trees and
Shrubs of the Ancon and Balboa Districts” is the only publication ever
issued devoted wholly to the plants of the Canal Zone.
Tetrathylacitum johanseni is easily separable from T. costaricense and T.
pacificum by the short, densely flowered spikes, which strongly resemble
those of the genus Piper. The crowding of the flowers, resulting in a 4 or 5-
angled corolla, does not occur in the other species. The flowers are quite as
tightly packed as in Piper spikes, and give the same effect of a pavement or
mosaic. The nervation of the leaves in T. johansenz is like that of T’. cos-
taricense.
Tetrathylacium costaricense Standl., sp. nov.
Large tree, the branchlets brownish, conspicuously lenticellate; petioles
stout, 5-10 mm. long; leaf blades oblong, 18-28 em. long, 5-8 cm. wide,
abruptly acuminate, deeply cordate at base, subcoriaceous, glabrous, remotely
and very obscurely crenate, the nervation prominent on both surfaces, the
lateral (secondary) nerves 10-12 pairs, arcuate-ascending, gradually merging
with the margin, the tertiary nerves numerous, nearly straight, divergent at
a right angle from the costa and oblique to the secondary nerves, closely
reticulate; spikes about 7 em. long, much interrupted, the flowers remote,
solitary or in clusters along the minutely puberulent rachis; corolla glabrous,
3 mm. broad, deeply 4-lobed, much broader than high.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 579332, collected on plains of
Currfs, along the Rio Diqufs, Costa Rica, altitude 100 meters, March 4,
1898, by H. Pittier (no. 11968). The vernacular name is said to be ‘‘sapote.””
This species is distinguished from 7. johanseni by the interrupted spikes
and 4-lobed, not compressed corollas. It is closely related to T. pacificum
but, as indicated by Mr. I. Hutchinson (in letter of September, 1910) and in
Seemann’s plate of his new species, it differs in the venation of the leaves.
In T. pacificum the lateral nerves anastomose at some distance from the
margin to form an intramarginal nerve; also, the tertiary nerves are almost
at right angles with the secondary ones, and not perpendicular to the costa.
The dimensions given by Seemann for the leaves of the Colombian plant
are much larger than in the Costa Rican specimen. Mr. Hutchinson states,
further, that the leaf venation of T. macrophyllum is different from that of
the Costa Rican tree.
Vallesia conzattii Standl., sp. nov.
Branchlets densely whitish-tomentose; petioles stout, 3-5 mm. long,
tomentose; leaf blades narrowly lance-oblong, 7-9 cm. long, 2 cm. wide,
pDEc. 19, 1925 ROHWER: THREE SAWFLIES FROM JAPAN 481
acute or acutish, at base rounded or truncate, above glabrous except along
the costa, beneath densely tomentose; peduncles 10-18 mm. long, simple
or bifid, tomentulose, the flowers numerous, umbellate, the pedicels about
4 mm. long, glabrous; calyx lobes 1 mm. long, glabrous, triangular-ovate,
acutish; corolla glabrous, the tube 6 mm. long, strongly enlarged slightly
above the middle over the anthers, the lobes narrowly oblong, obtuse, 4 mm.
long; fruit narrowly obovoid, sessile, 1.5 em. long, 6-7 mm. thick, rounded
at apex.
Type in the U. S. National Herbarium, no. 1,208,306. collected at Tlaco-
lula, Oaxaca, Mexico, altitude 1600 meters, June 11, 1925, by C. Conzatti
(no. 4626). Collected also in the Valley of Oaxaca in 1918 by Blas P. Reko
(no. 3945).
Vallesia conzattii is a very distinct species, differing from the three others
known from Mexico in the dense tomentum of the leaves and branches.
Aegiphila valerii Standl., sp. nov.
Branchlets obtusely quadrangular, stout, covered with a pale-ochraceous
tomentum of short appressed hairs, the leaf scars large and elevated; petioles
about 1 em. long, pubescent like the stems, the blades cuneate-obovate,
11-17 em. long, 5-7.5 em. wide, acute or short-acuminate, cuneately narrowed
to the petiole, entire, green above and sparsely and minutely puberulent,
beneath somewhat paler, rather densely covered with very minute, appressed
hairs, the lateral nerves about 10 pairs; flowers in small dense short-pedun-
culate axillary cymes 1.5-2 cm. long, the whole inflorescence densely and
minutely appressed-tomentose, the flowers sessile or short-pedicellate; calyx
obeonic, 4-5 mm. long, truncate, in age verruculose, subglobose and enclosing
the fruit (5-6 mm. in diameter), with only small aperture at apex; corolla
glabrous, the tube equaling the calyx, the 5 lobes oblong, 3 mm. long; fruit
globose, 4 mm. in diameter.
Type in the U. 8. National Herbarium, no. 1,206,252, collected at Tilardn
Guanacaste, Costa Rica, altitude 750 meters, June 27, 1923, by Juvenal
Valerio (no. 148).
Related to A. anomala Pittier, also of Costa Rica, in which the flowers
and fruit are twice as large. The vernacular name of A. valerii is “taba-
quillo.”
ENTOMOLOGY .—Three sawflies from Japan. S. A. ROHWER.
Bureau of Entomology.
The two new speciesof Dolerus described below are of some economic
importance. The descriptions are published at this time so that the
names will be available for use in a paper dealing with the habits and
biology of these forms.
Dolerus hordei, new species.
Female-—Length 9 mm. Anterior margin of the clypeus with a broad,
deep, U-shaped emargination, the lobes broad and roundly truncate; front
coarsely punctato-reticulate; vertex shining, with large, distinct punctures,
the punctures in the postocellar area being smaller; vertical furrows straight,
482 JOURNAL OF THE WASHINGTON ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOL. 15, No. 21
deep and well defined; third antennal joint slightly longer than the fourth;
prescutum with small, close, uniform punctures, except in the posterior mid-
dle, sharply defined and angulate posteriorly; scutum polished, with small,
scattered punctures; scutellum with large, well defined punctures which are
much closer posteriorly; post-tergite (scutellar appendage) shining, with an
indistinct median carina; mesepisternum coarsely punctato-granular; meso-
sternum without lateral furrows, shining, with small, widely separated punc-
tures; sheath narrow, rounded apically and convex below. Dark metallic
blue; pronotum, tegulae and scutum rufous; scutellum aeneous; very sparsely
clothed with gray hair; wings hyaline, the venation black.
Male.—Length 8 mm. ‘The sculpture of the male agrees well with that of
the female except that there is an oblique furrow extending from the superior
orbits to the vertical furrows; the postocellar area is strongly convex and the
post-tergite is finely granular. Entire body blue and clothed with long,
gray hair. Hypopygium narrowly rounded.
Type locality— Yamanashi, Japan.
Described from one female and one male reared April 15, 1924, from larvae
feeding on barley, and sent for identification by 5. I. Kuwana (no. 1).
Type.—Cat. no. 27303, U.S. N. M.
Dolerus yokohamensis, new species.
This species seems to agree better with bimaculatus Cameron (not Geoffroy)
than with any other species. It differs from Cameron’s description in the
absence of white marks on the tergites and in the third and fourth antennal
joints being subequal.
Female.—Length 10 mm. Anterior margin of the clypeus with a deep
U-shaped emargination; the lobes very broad, rounded; front coarsely,
closely punctured; vertex with punctures separated and slightly larger
than those on the front; vertical furrows curved, deep, broad; prescutum
with large, close punctures laterally, medianly shining and with a few small
punctures; lobes of the seutum shining, with a few punctures which are closer
medianly; scutellum shining anteriorly but posteriorly with close, large
punctures; post-tergite (scutellar appendage) polished; mesepisternum closely,
coarsely punctured; sternum without lateral furrows, shining, but with rather
small, scattered punctures; sheath straight above, acute at the apex, broadly
rounded below, basally nearly parallel sided. Dark aeneous; both lobes of
the scutum dark rufous, rather densely clothed with silvery pile; wings hy-
aline, venation black.
Male.—What may be the male of this species is entirely black and clothed
with rather dense, long, white hair; the post-tergite finely aciculate. Length
8.5 mm.
Type locality—Yokohama, Japan.
Described from a single female and male collected April 14, 1924, and
forwarded for identification by 8. I. Kuwana (no. 3).
Type.—Cat. no. 27302, U. 8. N. M.
Macrophya japonica Marlatt
Forsius! suggests that japonica is only an indistinct color variety of tumida
Smith. Since publishing the brief note on japonica? I have seen two females,
from Yokohama, Japan, which agree with Smith’s and Kirby’s descriptions
1 Act. Soc. Fauna & Flora Fennica 56, no. 4: 13-14. 1925.
2 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 39: 120. 1910.
DEc. 19, 1925 SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS 483
of timida. If these specimens are correctly determined, japonica Marlatt
may easily be distinguished from timzda Smith by the angulate (not arcuate)
emargination of the clypeus, and by the feebly punctured scutum. (In
my specimens of timida the scutum is covered with distinct, rather close punc-
tures.)
SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS
The first of a series of public lectures under the auspices of the Carnegie
Institution of Washington was given in the assembly room of the Institution
on November 17. Prof. Anotpa H. Scuuttz, Associate Professor of Physi-
eal Anthropology in the Johns Hopkins Medical School, lectured on Varia-
tions in Man and their evolutionary significance.
The Pick and Hammer Club met at the Geological Survey on November
14. H.S. Wasurnaton, of the Geophysical laboratory, gave some Reminis-
cences of geologic exploration in Italy and Greece. Reports of the season’s
work of members of the Geological Survey were given by C. H. BirpsryE
of the Topographic Branch, HERMAN StaBueEr of the Conservation Branch,
W. C. MENDENHALL of the Geologic Branch and P.S. Smrrx of the Alaskan
Branch, O. E. Mervzsr of the Water Resources Branch.
The death of Jack Hitters on November 14 removes one of the few sur-
vivors of the early personnel of the U.S. Geological Survey. He was a
photographer, and accompanied Major J. W. Powell in his western journeys,
notably in the wonderful voyage down the Grand Canyon in 1873. Fora
long time, later, he was in charge of the Photographic Laboratory of the
U.S. Geological Survey in Washington. His numerous large photographs
of notable western geologic features were not only of highest technical
quality, but admirable in lighting and composition. They have been used
extensively for illustrating geologic reports and text books, for transparen-
cies and for lantern slides, which have been of great value to teachers of
geology in this and other countries.
INDEX TO VOLUME 15
A ; denotes the abstract of a paper presented before the Academy or an affiliated Society. A § indicates an
item published under the head Scientific Notes and News.
PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY AND AFFILIATED SOCIETIES
Anthropological Society of Washington.
Biological Society of Washington.
Entomological Society of Washington.
Geological Society of Washington.
Philosophical Society of Washington.
Washington Academy of Sciences.
Proceedings: 134, 225.
Proceedings: 59, 220, 351, 374.
Proceedings: 79, 136, 376.
Proceedings: 182.
Proceedings: 15, 56, 214, 305.
Proceedings: 10, 300.
AUTHOR INDEX
Apams, O.S. Maps, new world, derived
from elliptic functions. 216.
Atpricu, J. M. jDiptera from Green-
land in the National Museum. 81.
Auten, W. F. Localization of the cells
of the descending visceral tract in the
cat and guinea-pig. 378.
Austirx, L. W. Long distance radio re-
ceiving measurements. 227.
— Sunset radio direction variations,
new phenomenon. 317.
— Transpacific radio field intensity
Measurements. 139.
Battey, VERNON. jBats, making pets of
insect-eating. 374.
—— jGlacier National Park, observa-
tionsin. 59.
Baty, H. F. 7Coal industry, hazards of.
301.
BALDENSPERGER, P. J.
fauna. 60.
Barker, A. C. jEntomological taxon-
omy, economic aspect. 377.
Batt, E. D. 7Entomological taxonomy,
educational aspect. 377.
—— Treehoppers, new North American.
200.
Barser, H.S.
79.
Barrtscu, Paut. Asiatic blood fluke, new
intermediate hosts of. 71.
Brrcer, ALWIN. Roseocactus, new genus
of Cactaceae. 43.
Bicnowsxy, F. R. Electromagnetic the-
ory of quanta. 187.
7Palestine and its
TBeetles, smallest known.
Bowen, N. L. Mineralogical phase rule,
the. 280.
Bowin, W. Isostasy in the southern
Pacific. 445.
Breit, G. Glaser’s experiments and the
orientation of molecules in a magnetic
field. 429.
jInductance and resistance of a coil
encircling the Earth. 217.
— Two-coupled multiply periodic sys-
tems, statistics of quantum theory,
and theory of dispersion. 269.
BripweEL., J. C. {Bruchidius ater, unre-
corded immigrant from Europe. 80.
Brown Epcar. {Longevity of buried
seeds. 222.
Brown, E.W. Tidesinlava. 421.
Casz, F. A. 7Photographing the in-
terior of arifle barrel. 310.
Cuausen, C. P. Entomological investi-
gations in the Orient. 81.
Cogs, N. A. Biological relations of the
1, 2,4, etc., mathematical series. 235.
— Nema, new, Tylenchus cancellatus.
235.
Costentz, W.W. j{Measurement of plan-
etary temperatures. 56.
Cotirxs, W. D. j;Temperatures of air
and water. 58.
Cooke, C. W. Coastal
Georgia. 184.
Cusuman, J. A. Pseudotextularia and
Guembelina, the genera. 133.
CusuMan, R. A. Ichneumonidae, generic
transfers and synonymy in. 388.
terraces of
485
486
Davis, W. M. Laccoliths and sills. 414.
Day, A. L. Gases in volcanic activity.
415.
Dean, G.A. {Cornborer situation. 136.
—— t+European corn borer in America.
61.
Depyr, P. {Quantum theory and its
bearing on laws of conservation of
energy and momentum. 219.
Drypen, H. L. {Flettner rotor ship.
214,
Durton, C. E. Physical geology, the
greater problems of. 359.
Dyar, H. G. Mosquito, new sabethid,
from Panama. 234.
— Mosquitoes from Brazil, new. 39.
Mosquitoes of Peary’s North Pole
expedition of 1908. 77.
EHRENBERG, Kurr. +Present day pale-
ontologie work in Austria. 183.
Fasry, Cu. {Spectroscopy with the
interferometer, thirty years with. 18.
Faris, R. L. Geophysical problems.
313.
Frercuson, J. B. Light filter in inter-
ferometry. 279.
— Magnetic form of ferrous oxide.
279.
Frewxes, J. W. tAnthropology of south-
eastern United States. 134.
Fisoer, W.S. Cactus weevil from Texas,
new. 425.
Fisk, H.W. {Magnetic secular change in
Latin America. 216.
Freunpiicu, Hersert. }{Colloidal par-
ticles, state of aggregation and shape
of. 311.
Frost, H. B. Chromosomes of citrus,
the. 1.
Garpner, C. +tPhotographing the in-
terior of a rifle barrel. 310.
GARDNER, JuL1A. Chipola fauna in the
Marks Head marl. 264.
Gautt, R. H. Experiment on recogni-
tion of speech sounds by touch. 320.
Gisu, O. H. tEarth-current measure-
ments at Watheroo, Australia, pre-
liminary results of. 15.
Grar, J.E. jWeevil, sweet potato, eradi-
cation. 79.
GREELEY, W. B.
United States.
+National Forests of the
352.
AUTHOR INDEX
Greene, C. T. {Puparia of muscoid
flies. 81.
Grecory, H. EB. {Pan-Pacific Scientific
Congress—resolutions adopted at, by
Congress on International Coopera-
tion in Scientific Research. 12.
Griees, R.F. tKatmaiexpedition, scien-
tific results of. 221.
GRINNELL, JosppH. {Faunal changes
taking place in California. 63.
Hann, R. M. Addition compounds of 3,
5-dibromo-o-toluidine with metallic
salts. 163.
Haruan, H. V. fAbyssinia, plant ex-
plorationin. 223.
— {Punjab and Kashmir, plains and
hills of. 64.
Hay, O. P. Mastodons,
paperon. 381.
—— Pleistocene deposits and their fos-
sils, correlation of. 239.
—Pleistocene Period in North America,
revision of, based on glacial geology
and vertebrate paleontology. 126.
Hazarp, D. L. Terrestrial magnetism in
the twentieth century. 111.
Heck, N. H. {Compass compensation,
application of force diagrams to. 58.
{Sound waves, path of, through sea
water. 309.
Hersxovirz, M. J. tAnthropology of
American Negro. 225.
Heyt, P.R. fInertia of energy. 307.
Hoiier,H.D. jElectrode potentials and
polarization, method of studying.
308.
Hoop, O. P. {Coal; Consumer’s eco-
nomics. 302.
Howarp, L. O. {Insect damage, esti-
mates of loss through. 374. ;
Howe.t, A. B. Alimentary tracts of
squirrels with diverse food habits.
145.
—— Mice that livein trees. 220.
Hrpouréxa, Axes. {Anthropology of
southeastern United States. 134.
Imus, A. E. +Rothamsted Experiment
Station. 374.
Jacecar, T. A. {Hawaiian volcanoes. 304.
Plus and minus voleanicity. 416.
of voleanology during
Schlesinger’s
— Progress
1924. 424.
— {Tokyo earthquake. 302.
AUTHOR INDEX
JOHANSEN, Fritz. {Canadian Arctic. Ex-
pedition, 1913-1918, under Stefansson.
376.
Kanott, C. W. jfThermostats, non-
flammable liquids for low tempera-
ture. 306.
Krirre, E. P. Urticaceae, new tropical
American species of. 289.
—— Urticaceae, Peruvian, of Marshall
Field exploration. 48.
—— Valeriana, twelve new species of,
from the Andes of South America.
451.
Kine, J. L.
Japan. 81.
Lampert, W. D. 7Distance between two
points on the Earth. 16.
Lane, A.C. jAge of the Earth and
oceans. 304.
Laporte, Orto. Primed terms in the
spectra of the lighter elements. 409.
Larsen, E. 8S. BEIELLITE, a new mineral
name. 465.
Lewrton, F. L. Cottons, taxonomy of
American and Mexican. 65.
— Hibisceae, value of anatomical
characters in classifying. 165.
Lrxcotn, F.C. {Bird-bandingin Europe.
62.
Loneteyr, A. E. Polycary, polyspory
and polyploidy in citrus and citrus
relatives. 347.
Lorxa, A.J. The measure of net fertility.
469.
Mann, W.M. Beetle guests of army ants,
Entomological work in
new. 73.
—— 7jSinai and Palestine, collecting trip
in. 224.
MansrFietp, G. R. 7Physiography of
southeastern Idaho. 182.
Marner, H. A. jfMeansealevel. 219.
Meccers, W. F. Are spectrum of
yttrium. 207.
Mereiam, J. C.
Congress. 10.
Merwin, H. E. {Optical effects of iron
in certain glasses. 219.
Mircuett, C. L. {West Indian hurri-
canes and other tropical revolving
storms in the north Atlantic. 217.
Moorg, B. E. Arc spectrum of yttrium.
207.
7Pan-Pacific Scientific
487
Morey, G. W. {Optical effects of iron in
certain glasses. 219.
Moniz, O. J. j{Sheep,
Alaska range. 223.
Neumann, F. jfHarthquakes of 1925,
problem of determining epicenters.
308.
OspEeRHoLsER, H. C. j{Potomac Valley
below Great Falls, future of. 352,
Parker, J. B. {7 ricrania, beetle para-
site on solitary bee. 82.
Preattie, D. C. Casuarinas of America
identified by branchlets and seeds.
345.
PopeNnor, Wrtson, {Peruvian agricul-
ture in Pre-Columbian days.
Possnak, E. Ferromagnetic ferric oxide,
artificial and natural. 329.
Priest, I. G. jGray skies and white
snow. 306.
ReinHarD, E. G. Wasp, Hoplisus cos-
talis, hunter of treehoppers. 107.
— Wasp, Nysson hoplisivora, a parasitic
relative of Hoplisus costalis. 172.
Ritey, Smita. jfForest fires and wild life.
375.
Rouwer, S. A. Heterosphilus, five bra-
white, of the
chonid parasites of the genus. 177.
— jEntomological taxonomy, taxo-
nomic aspect. 377.
— Three sawflies from Japan. 481.
Ross, C. S. The chemical composition
and optical properties of beidellite.
467.
Russety, H. N. {Stars, recent advances
in knowledge of interior of. 16.
Sanrorp, R. L. {Magnetic analysis, de-
tection of flaws by. 218.
Scuaus, Wirtt1am. +tMimicry and the En-
tomological Society of London. 376.
Scuzrrer, T. H. tMountain beaver
(Aplodontia) and moles in Puget
Sound country. 60.
Scuutrz, A. H. Embryological evidence
of the evolution of man. 247.
SuHannon, E. V. Boulangerite from the
Cleveland mine, Stevens County,
Washington. 195.
Magnesite and kammererite from
Low’s mine, Cecil County, Maryland.
434,
— Petzite from Last Chance mine,
Cornucopia district, Oregon. 342.
488
SHannon, E. V. The chemical composi-
tion and optical properties of beide-
llite. 467.
SHannon, R. C. {Dermatobia, human
bot-fly, egg-laying habits of. 137.
— Mosquito, new sabethid, from Pan-
ama. 234.
— Mosquitoes from Brazil, new. 39.
— Mosquitoes of Peary’s North Pole
expedition of 1908. 77.
— Myrmecophile from Panama. 211.
—— {Parasitic flies in man and animals.
224.
SHantz, H. L.
Africa. 222.
SuepHerD, BE. 8. Kilauea, chemical sig-
nificance of engulfment at. 418
Snore, Henry. Thermoelectric meas-
urement of cutting tool temperature.
85.
Sitver, JAMes. European hare in North
America—is it a menace? 224.
Smiru, G. O. +tCoal a national issue.
300.
Snoperass, R. E. tAnatomy as a basis
for research in entomology. 81.
{Senses and the morphology of
sense organs in insects. 377.
Snyper, T. E. Rugitermes from Panama,
new. 197.
— Termites from Solomon Islands and
Santa Cruz Archipelago. 395, 438.
—— Termites, new American. 152.
Sosman, R. B. Ferromagnetic ferric ox-
ide, artificial and natural. 329.
One hundred popular books in
Science, revised list. 353.
Oxygen and voleanism. 422.
— Volcanology, papers on, at 1925
meeting of American Geophysical
Union. 413.
Soutzr, F. M. jfElectrical resistance,
measurements of cyclic changes in.
305.
{Collecting in East
AUTHOR INDEX
Spencer, G. C. Addition compounds, 3,
5-dibromo-o-toluidine with metallic
salts. 163.
SranvueEy, P.C. Plants, new, from Cen-
tral America. 3, 101, 285, 455, 472.
Srrsnecer, Lronnarp. Lizard, new
scincid, and new burrowing frog from
China. 150.
— New species and
American turtles. 461.
Swanton, J.R. fAnthropology of south-
eastern United States. 134.
TRELEASE, WILLIAM. Agave, new species
from Salvador. 393.
Tryon, F. G. {Coal industry, bitum-
inous, overdevelopment of, and its
cure. 302.
TuckerMAN, L. B. {Full walled sturdy
columns in theory and practice. 310.
Van Ostranp, C. E. Empirical repre-
sentation of production curves. 19.
VaucHan, T. W. {Pan-Pacific Scien-
tific Congress. 10.
Waker, E. P. {Blue fox farming in
Alaska. 222.
Watters, F. M. Jr. Nickel, regularities
in the are spectrum of. 88.
WennNER, F. Electrical resistance, meas-
urement of cyclic changes in. 305.
Wuerry, E. T. Onion, new acid-soil,
from West Virginia. 370.
— bBeidellite, a new mineral name.
465.
Wuire, W. P. Golf, scientific aspects of
subspecies of
the game. 215.
Wine, D. L. Coal, operator’s costs and
profits. 301.
Woopwortnh, R. 8. tAnthropology and
psychology, relations of. 225.
Wootarp, E. W. {Mathematical expec-
tation and its bearing on statistics.
307.
Wricut, F. E. Gravity and under-
ground lava. 421.
SUBJECT INDEX
489
SUBJECT INDEX
Acoustics. Experiment on recognition
of speech sounds by touch. R. H.
Gatit. 320.
Agriculture. {Pan-Pacifie Scientific Con-
gress. T. W. VauGHAN and J. C.
Merriam. 10.
7Punjab and Kashmir, plains and hills
of. H. V. Hartan. 64.
See also Botany, Entomology.
Anthropology. jAmerican Negro, anthro-
pology of. M. J. Herskovitrz. 225.
TPan-Pacific Scientific Congress. T.
W. VaucHan and J. C. Merriam.
10.
TPsychology and anthropology, rela-
tions of. R.S. WoopwortH. 225.
jSoutheastern United States, anthro-
pology of. J. W. Frwxkers, ALEs
HrpuiéKa, and J.R.Swanton. 134.
Apparatus. {Photographing the interior
of a rifle barrel. C. GarpNER and
F.A.Casr. 310.
Archeology. {Peruvian agriculturein Pre-
Columbian days. Witson PorEnor.
375.
§Yucatan, excavations at Chichen Itza.
42.
Astronomy. {Planetary temperatures,
measurement of. W. W. CoBLentz.
56.
jStars, recent advances in knowledge of
interior of. H. N.Russreuu. 16.
Biology. jAfrica, East, collecting in.
H.L.SHantz. 222.
jBats, making pets of insect-eating.
VERNON Battery. 374.
{Canadian Arctic expedition, 1913-1918,
under Stefansson. Fritz JOHANSEN.
376.
Embryological evidence of the evolution
ofman. A.H.Scuuntz. 247.
TForest fires and wild life.
RILey. 375.
Mathematical series, 1, 2, 4, etc., bio-
SmirH
logical relations of the. N. A. Coss.
235.
Nema, new, Tylenchus cancellatus. N.
A.Coxps. 235.
Parasitic flies in man and animals. R.
C. SHANNON. 224.
TPotomac Valley below Great Falls,
future of. H.C. OBrRHoLsER. 352.
jRothamsted Experiment Station. <A.
E.Imms. 374.
{Tricrania, beetle parasite on solitary
bee. J. B. ParkER. 82.
See also Botany, Zoology.
Botany. {Abyssinia, plant exploration in.
H.V.Harpan. 223.
fAfrica, East, collecting in. H. L.
SHAnTz. 222.
Agave, new species of, from Salvador.
WILLIAM TRELEASE. 393.
Casuarinas of America identified by
branchlets andseeds. D.C, Pratrir.
345.
Central America, new plants from. P.
C. STANDLEY, 3, 101, 285, 455, 472.
Chromosomes of citrus, the. H. B.
Frost. 1.
Cottons, American and Mexican up-
land, taxonomy of. F. L. Lewron.
65.
Hibisceae, value of anatomical char-
acters in classifying. F. L. Lrwron.
165.
{Katmai Expedition, scientific results
of. R. F. Griaes. 221.
fLongevity of buried seeds.
Brown. 222.
{National Forests of the United States.
W.B. GREELEY. 352.
Onion, new acid-soil from West Virginia.
E.T.WuHeErry. 370.
{Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress. T. W.
Vaucuan and J.C. Merriam. 10.
fPeruvian Agriculture in Pre-Colum-
bian days. Wiutson Poprnon. 375.
{Punjab and Kashmir, plains and hills
of. H.V.Haruan. 64.
Roseocactus, new genus of Cactaceae.
ALWIN BERGER. 43.
Urticaceae, new tropical American
species of. KE. P. Kiiurp. 289.
Urticaceae, Peruvian, of Marshall Field
exploration, E.P.Kituip. 48.
Valeriana, twelve new species of, from
the Andes of South America. E. P.
Kiuuire. 451.
See also Biology, Cytology, Genetics.
EDGAR
490 SUBJECT INDEX
Cartography. New world maps, derived
from elliptic functions. O. 8S. Apams.
216.
Chemistry. Addition compounds, 3, 5-
dibromo-o-toluidine with metallic
salts. R. M. Hann and G. C. Spren-
cER. 163.
{Colloidal particles, state of aggrega-
tionandshape of. Hrrpert FREvuND-
LicH. 311.
Magnetic form of ferrous oxide. J. B.
Frerauson. 279.
Oxygen and volcanism. R. B. Sos-
MAN. 422.
Cytology. Polyeary, polyspory, and poly-
ploidy in citrus and citrus relatives.
A.E. Loneury. 347.
Electromagnetics. {Inductance and re-
sistance of a coil encircling the Earth.
G. Breit. 217.
See also Physics.
Engineering. tFull walled sturdy col-
umns in theory and practice. L. B.
TucKERMAN. 310.
Entomology. tAnatomy as a basis for
research in entomology. R. E.
Snoperass. §&1.
Beetle guests of army ants, new. W.
M. Mann. 73.
{Beetles, smallest known. H. S. Bar-
BER. 79.
{Bruchidius ater, unrecorded immigrant
from Europe. J. C. Bripwe.u. 80.
{Canadian Arctic expedition, 1913-1918,
under Stefansson. Fritz JOHNANSEN.
376.
Casey, (T. L.) collection bequeathed
to the National Museum. J. M.
ALDRICH. 378.
{Corn borer, European in America. G.
A.DeEan. 61.
{Corn borer situation. G. A. Dran.
136.
{Dermatobia, human bot-fly, egg-laying
habits of. R.C.SHannon. 137.
{Diptera from Greenland in the Na-
tional Museum. J. M. Aupricu. 81.
{Flies, puparia of muscoid. C. T.
GREENE. 81.
Heterospilus, five braconid parasites of
the genus. S. A. Rouwer. 177.
Ichneumonidae, generic transfers and
synonymy in. R.A. CusHMan. 338.
fJapan, entomological work in. J. L.
Kine. 81.
tLoss through insect damage, estimates
of. L. O. Howarp. 374.
{tMimicry and the Entomological Soci-
ety of London. Witttam ScuHats.
376.
Mosquito, new sabethid, from Panama.
H.G. DyarandR.C.SHannon. 234.
Mosquitoes from Brazil, new. H. G.
Dyar and R.C.SHannon, 39.
Mosquitoes of Peary’s North Pole ex-
pedition of 1908. H.G. Dyarand R.
C. SHANNON. 77.
Myrmecophile from Panama. R. C.
SHANNON. 211.
jOrient, entomological investigation in
the. C.P.Cuausren. 81.
{Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress. T.
W. VauauHan and J. C. Merriam.
{Parasitic flies in man and animals.
R.C.SHannon. 224.
{Rugitermes from Panama, new. T. E.
SNYDER. 197.
Sawflies, Three, from Japan.
Rouwer. 481.
{Senses and the morphology of sense
organs of insects. R. E. SNopGrass.
377.
7Taxonomy, entomological—Economic
aspect, A. C. Baxnr. Educational
aspect, E. D. Batu. Taxonomic
aspect, 8S. A. Ronwer. 377.
Termites from Solomon Islands and
Santa Cruz Archipelago. T. E. Sny-
DER. 395, 438.
Termites, new American. T. E. Sny-
DER. 162.
Treehoppers, new North American.
E. D. Batu. 200.
+Tricrania, beetle parasitic on solitary
bee. J.B. Parker. 82.
Wasp, Hoplisus costalis, hunter of tree-
hoppers. E.G. Rernnarp. 107.
Wasp, Nysson hoplisivora, a parasitic
relative of Hoplisus costalis. E. G.
REINHARD. 172.
Weevil, new cactus, from Texas. W-
S. Fisoer. 425.
{Weevil, sweet potato, eradication of.
J.E.Grar. 79.
8. A
SUBJECT INDEX
General Science. {Congress on Interna-
tional Cooperation in Scientific Re-
search, Resolutions adopted by, at
Pan-Pacifie Scientific Congress. H.
E.Grecory. 12.
One hundred popular books in Science,
revised list of. R.B.Sosman. 353.
7Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress. T.
W. VaueHan and J.C. Merriam. 10.
§Russian Scientific Expedition to South
America. 464.
Genetics. Chromosomes of citrus, the.
H.B. Frost. 1.
Fertility, The measure of net. A. J.
Lorra. 469.
Geodesy. {Distance between two points
on the Earth. W. D. Lamperr. 16.
jEarth-current measurements at Wath-
eroo, Australia, preliminary results of.
O.H.Gise. 15.
7Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress. T.
W. VaueHan and J.C. Merriam. 10.
See also Physics.
Geology. jAge of the earth and oceans.
A.C. Lane. 304.
Chipola fauna in the Marks Head marl.
Jutta GARDNER. 264.
7Coal a national issue. G.O. Smits.
300.
{Coal consumers’ economics. O. P.
Hoop. 302.
7Coal industry, bituminous, over-
development of, anditscure. F.G.
Tryon. 302.
jCoal industry, hazards of. H. F.
Baty. 301.
7Coal, operator’s costs and profits. D
L. Wine. 301.
Coastal terraces of Georgia. C. W.
Cooxs. 184.
Mastodons, Schlesinger’s paper on. O
P.Hay. 381:
{Paleontological work in Austria, pres-
ent day. Kurt EHRENBERG. 183.
7Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress. T.
W. VaccHan and J.C. Merriam. 10.
7Physiography of’ southeastern Idaho.
G. R. MansFietp. 182.
Pleistocene deposits and their fossils,
correlation of. O. P. Hay. 239.
Pleistocene Period in North America,
revision of, based on glacial geology
491
and vertebrate paleontology. O. P.
Hay. 126.
See also Geophysics, Mineralogy and
Vulcanology.
Geophysics. Geophysical problems. R.
L. Faris. 313.
Isostasy in the Southern Pacific. W.
Bowie. 445.
7Mean sea level. H. A. Marmer. 219.
Physical geology, the greater problems
of. C.E.Durron. 359.
See also Geology, Physics, Terrestrial
Magnetism and Vulcanology.
Interferometry. Light filter in interfer-
ometry. J. B. FeErGuson.
See also Physics.
Mammology. Localization of the cells of
the descending visceral tract in the
cat and guinea-pig. W. F. ALLEN.
373.
See also Zoology.
Mathematics. Empirical representation
of production curves. C. E. Van
OstRAND. 19.
7Statistics, mathematical expectation
and its bearing on. E. W. Woouarp.
307.
Meteorology. +West Indian hurricanes and
other tropical revolving storms in the
north Atlantic. C. L. MrrcuHetu.
217.
Mineral Chemistry.
oxide, artificial and natural.
Sosman and E. Posnsak. 329.
Ferromagnetic ferric
Ts 18},
Mineralogy. Beidellite, a new mineral
name. EH. §. Larsen and E. T.
Wuerry. 465.
Beidellite, The chemical composition
and optical properties of, C. S.
Ross and E. V.SHaNNON. 467.
Boulangerite from the Cleveland mine,
Stevens County, Washington. E. V.
SHannon. 195.
Magnesite and kammererite from Low’s
mine, Cecil County, Maryland. E.
V.SHannon. 434.
Petzite from Last Chance mine, Cornu-
copia district, Oregon. E. V. SHan-
Non. 342.
Necrology. tBascock, W.H. 13. Casry,
T. L. 185. fHENDERSoN, J. B. 13.
§HILLEBRAND, W. F. 110. jHottts-
TER, Nep. 60. {Kuotz, Orto, 13,
492
Necrology (Continued)
fMayor, A. A. 13. {Mor ey, E. W.
13. §Ransom, B.H. 426. §Sampson,
ALDEN. 64. {Wruuiamson, E.D. 13.
§Woopworth, J. B. 379.
Oceanography. {Pan-Pacific Scientific
Congress. T. W. VauGcHan and J.C.
Merriam. 10.
Optics. {Gray skies and white snow. I.
G. Priest. 306.
jIron, optical effects of, in certain
glasses. H. E. Merwin and G. W.
Morey. 219.
Ornithology. tBird-banding in Europe.
F.C. Lincoun. 62.
See also Zoology.
Paleontology. {Austria, present day pale-
ontologic work in. Kurt EHREN-
BERG. 183.
Pleistocene in North America, revision
of, based on glacial geology and verte-
brate paleontology. O.P.Hay. 126.
Pseudotextularia and Guembelina, the
genera. J. A. CusHMAN. 133.
Petrology. Mineralogical phase rule, the.
N. L. Bowen. 280.
See also Geology.
Physics. {Compass compensation, appli-
cation of force diagrams to. N. H.
Heck. 58.
tEarth-current measurements at Wath-
eroo, Australia, preliminary results of.
OSH=Gise:, 15:
tElectrical resistance, measurement of
cyclic changes in. F. WENNER and
F.M.Sovure. 305.
tElectrode potentials and polarization,
method of studying. H. D. Houuer.
308.
Electromagnetic theory of quanta. F.
R. Bicoowsky. 187.
TEnergy, inertia of. P.R. Heyy. 307.
{Flettner rotor ship. H. L. Drypen.
214,
{Full walled sturdy columns in theory
and practice. L. B. TuckERMAN.
310.
Glaser’s experiments and the orienta-
tion of molecules in a magnetic field.
G. Breit. 429.
7Golf, scientific aspects of the game.
W.P. Waits. 215.
SUBJECT INDEX
fInductance and resistance of a coil
encircling the Earth. G. Brett. 217.
jInterferometer, thirty years of spec-
troscopy with the. Cu. Fasry. 18.
Light filter in interferometry. J. B.
Frercuson. 279.
jMagnetic analysis, detection of flaws
by. R.L.Sanrorp. 218.
tMagnetie secular change in Latin
America. H. W. Fisk. 216.
Molecules, orientation of, in a magnetic
field, Glaser’s experiments and the
G. Breit. 429.
tPan-Pacifie Scientific Congress. T.
W. VaucHaNn and J.C. Merriam. 10.
{Photographing the interior of a rifle
barrel. C. GarpNner and F. A. Case.
310.
{Planetary temperatures, measurement
of. W. W. Cospientz. 56.
Quantum theory and its bearing on
laws of conservation of energy and
momentum. P. Drsyr. 219.
Quantum theory, statistics of, theory of
dispersion, and two-coupled multiple
periodic systems. G. Breir. 269.
{Sound waves, path of, through sea
water. N. H. Hecx. 309.
{Temperatures of air and water.
Couns. 58.
Thermoelectric measurement of cutting
tool temperature. Henry SHORE.
85.
{Thermostats, nonflammable liquids for
low temperature. C. W. KaNno.ur.
306.
See also Geophysics, Meteorology, Op-
tics, Spectroscopy.
Radiotelegraphy. Long distance radio re-
ceiving measurements. L. W. AUSTIN.
227.
{Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress. T. W.
VauGuHan and J.C. Merriam. 10.
Sunset radio direction variations, new
phenomenon. L. W. Austin. 317.
Transpacific radio intensity measure-
ments. L. W. Austin. 139.
Scientific Notes and News. 18, 42, 64, 83,
110, 138, 185, 205, 246, 268, 392, 408,
426, 464, 483.
Seismology. §Coast and Geodetic Survey,
seismological work authorized by.
205.
W. D.
SUBJECT INDEX 493
Seismology (Continued)
jHarthquakes of 1925, problem of deter-
mining epicenters. F. NEUMANN.
308.
jTlokyo earthquake. T. A. Jaaear.
302.
Spectroscopy. tInterferometer, ~ thirty
years of spectroscopy with the. Cx.
Fapry. 18.
Nickel, are spectrum of, regularities in
the. F.M. Watters, Jr. 88.
Primed terms in the spectra of the
lighter elements. Orto Laporte.
409.
Yttrium, are spectrum of. W. F. Mrc-
cers and B. E. Moore. 207.
Technology. {Compass compensation, ap-
plication of force diagrams to. N.H.
Heck. 58.
Terrestrial Magnetism. Twentieth cen-
tury, terrestrial magnetismin. D. L.
Hazarp. 111.
Volcanology. American Geophysical
Union, papers on voleanology at the
1925 meeting. R.B.Sosman. 413.
Gases in voleanic activity. A.L. Day.
415.
Gravity and underground lava. F. E.
Wricur. 421.
jHawaiian voleanoes. T. A. JAGGER.
304.
7Katmai Expedition, scientific results
of. R.F.Grices. 221.
Kilauea, chemical significance of en-
gulfment at. E.S.SHmPHERD. 418.
Laccoliths and sills. W. M. Davis.
414,
Oxygen and volcanism. R. B. Sos-
MAN. 422.
Plus and minus volcanicity, T. A.
JAGGER. 416.
Progress of voleanology during 1924.
T.A.JaccER. 424.
Tidesinlava. E.W.Brown. 421.
Zoology. Alimentary tracts of squirrels
with diverse food habits. A. B.
Howey. 145.
{A plodontia (mountain beaver) in Puget
Sound country. T. H. Scuerrer.
60.
{Bats, making pets of insect-eating.
VERNON BaILEy. 374.
jEuropean hare in North America, is it
amenace? JAMESSILVER. 224.
jFaunal changes taking place in Cali-
fornia. JOSEPH GRINNELL. 63.
Fluke, blood, Asiastic, new intermediate
hosts of. PaunL Bartscu. 71.
tFox, blue, farming in Alaska. E. P.
WALKER, 222.
Frog, new burrowing, from China.
LEONARD STEJNEGER. 150.
{Glacier National Park, observations
in. VERNON Battery. 59.
{Hare, European, in North America, is
ita menace? JAMES SILVER. 224,
Lizard, new scincid, from China. LEon-
ARD STEJNEGER. 150.
7Mice that liveintrees. A.B. HowE.u.
220.
TMoles in the Puget Sound country.
T.H.Scurerrer. 60.
{Mountain beaver (A plodontia) in Puget
Sound country. T. H. ScuHErrmr.
60.
{Palestine anditsfauna. P.J. BALDEN-
SPERGER. 60.
{Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress. T.W.
VaueuHan and J.C. Merriam. 10.
{Sheep, white, of the Alaska range. O.
J.Mouriz. 223.
{Sinai and Palestine, collecting trip in.
W.M. Mann. 224.
Turtles, American, new species and
subspecies. L. Sresnecpr. 461.
See also Biology, Entomology, Orni-
thology.
PROGRAMS ANNOUNCED SINCE THE PRECEDING ISSUE OF THE
JOURNAL
Saturday, December 5. The Biological Society. W.B. Greretny: The proposed
changes in the boundaries of the Yellowstone Nationa! Park in relation to wild
life. T. H. Kearney: Pollination in cotton.
Wednesday, December 9. The Geological Society. L. W. StepHenson: Major fea-
tures in the geology of the Atlantic and Gulf coastal plain,
The programs of the meetings of the affiliated societies will appear on this page
if sent to the editors by the thirteenth and the twenty-seventh day of each month.
CONTENTS
' ORIGINAL Papers
Mineralogy.—The chemical composition and optical properties of beidellite. ¥
Crarence §. Ross and Harn V.SHANNON..............--- ott eheclatioin we la pimem ya
Genetics.—The measure of net fertility. Aurrep J. LorKa...... Klee sip aha ena
Botany.—New plants from Central America.—V. Pauu C. SraNDLEY.......
Entomology.—Three sawflies from Japan.. S. A. ROHWER........2..000eceeeeeeee |
Screntiric Notes anp News........... gig teat acronis arouse ae ys
InpEx
Rrockedings si. \o.cs cece ane sp ook ore SSA Pee aie ; i
Author Index ;.5 igen toe cbs Baste Gs. Seeman HDs Gaitie ¢ sees saIC ee
Sublecs Mndexs oo cfc ss ae ee ee, cao eae sae eee ote 2 :
OFFICERS OF THE ACADEMY
President: Vernon L. Kettoca, National Research Council. :
Corresponding Secretary: Francis B. Sinssen, Bureau of Standards, ;
Recording Secretary: W. D. Lampert, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
Treasurer: R. L. Farts, Coast and Geodetic Survey.
mi
hy
i
Wane
ey
Hietana
WONT gt
nt
RT Rt
h
Mus
iy 3
WREARIEE
w)
AI Soe
an
Ns
fi
i
oi)
HGR
wi
Hiatt
Pe oi
Me
ana
fet )
MNT My
By
FBV Nn:
Raa
P Oe Ge) alae, ite De alalalala ja la|ni.| | Pe ae Arpaianel PCr Lan.
a se 4 aaAans acoe Aaa
=BeAManamtentnnsaen ®®2cscaacsiascc Ni claRen Mae
Aaa aaR~ ARS AAR™ gf W .aRAPPDAZ ~ aaraanpnanne~ , my
Anta naRr AANA OAR poe AR <A ananeemantn.al
amr ane. BAAR RANIIAAAAAER US Rann aAAARARANA seen,
ASST AaMMaanaangananaae meseeeeae fra fan asanas Aa ans
COCAE N wee Ae BREA == Ps
ape RANARAR aaa ry & Ala
Aaa®S - an A AARAAE anni | POLY at nt aar™
— ~~ AaAnaR, a4 NN
adi Wr ANUTAA,
AA naan. RR erererre Feet Aan NAR
~ "aa S\ a= RA SE Mesos ORAS © = * aa > SD ava nas aa;
228.
x
~
Ba Ra abe F ty ~<A maAah« a er
ae 4 fe a _\ a yA SG
ASF sae cure ns ary
RESaG See a, & BAAR NAAN AY.
aaaaa a2 A Mea naRAmasanananaanasnriia <
ai es = maannna SAaA Arenas
RAT saa Aa AA 2
wear aamegaaatates Manan
RARAaAamagaare’\a~ Mas
A va aAaAAaan ‘Maan a. Kasra nprA_ mA
BBR AaBRAaAR ARR ah eras U- et
POPOL Pr y \yapAPA es : rte
om R 4 t www a [Pig a
Jpn anaes na Ve ry
> AAR = AAA AASARASA a
BAAnAhlansn:acnssacaacaasscaas canvases mantORiiina
AHARAA mr aranasoe nat Aar AAA,
RAN SAAR Aas a taAa annannanal! SRRARARLAAA AR
- NN AA AV a sO 5 ~RE WON; IAAL ale le le A AARS AAD
r yas! VAY \ MY * = me a, mhe NA
’ . aa. RB @ .
> Be i nw
A
esasa saan AC
NAY al
| nf ey Ucn ge” 8
WAREEI “eet en fcr lg
RAAT Se wee NAS eR
; oy q ~
= ahan Con maran na me ho LIN
Oe Ure NA eae
amas awa’ vn. & NCL. OY ae
f& one WANYVY VIiVvyY rer
nelle’ V laa APA RR
PAA N\A G8 AAaAAaa .
DA aA a aie » BAAR fe AGna a
~~~ Nat.’ Aa a ¥ av» Vv
j " fen ~— > » ra
' Seed _ fi Aare ae de dol as a ae 9 ,é
te ede Aan aAAA« MAR AAAE An ea Abana AAaace
LAA al VY ¥\NE VOT a Y yey YY ey A aN
Aa) ams Ty) wy eee a Dea
~) IN EN ’ ~ aA
CER IAA, iL Le = Abe RAM ANADOAAADDS Aaagae shana
ei aN anke WYARAA RAIS tbe ti 2k EL PhLEL@ekin ‘on? rN A
aan s i lA aka A FAN a a a ee a NN oN PB . a
wg
3 9088 01303 1695